texlive[52096] Master: latex-dev (15sep19)
commits+karl at tug.org
commits+karl at tug.org
Sun Sep 15 00:07:10 CEST 2019
Revision: 52096
http://tug.org/svn/texlive?view=revision&revision=52096
Author: karl
Date: 2019-09-15 00:07:09 +0200 (Sun, 15 Sep 2019)
Log Message:
-----------
latex-dev (15sep19)
Modified Paths:
--------------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/README.md
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/alltt.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cfgguide.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cfgguide.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/classes.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/clsguide.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/clsguide.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cmfonts.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cyrguide.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cyrguide.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/doc.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/docstrip.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/encguide.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/encguide.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/exscale.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fntguide.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fntguide.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/graphpap.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ifthen.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/inputenc.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexchanges.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexchanges.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexsym.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/legal.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/letter.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltluatex.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltx3info.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltx3info.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltxdoc.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/makeindx.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/modguide.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/modguide.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/proc.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/slides.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/slifonts.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/source2e.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/source2e.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/syntonly.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/texpert.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tulm.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/usrguide.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/usrguide.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/utf8ienc.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/README.md
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/color.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/drivers.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/epsfig.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/graphics.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/graphicx.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/grfguide.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/grfguide.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/keyval.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/lscape.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/rotating.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/rotex.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/trig.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/alltt.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/alltt.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/classes.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/classes.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/cmextra.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/cmfonts.fdd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/cmfonts.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/doc.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/docstrip.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/docstrip.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ec.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/exscale.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/exscale.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/fontdef.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/format.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/graphpap.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/graphpap.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ifthen.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ifthen.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/inputenc.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/inputenc.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latex209.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latex209.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexsym.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/latexsym.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/letter.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/letter.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltalloc.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltbibl.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltboxes.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltclass.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcntrl.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltcounts.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltdefns.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltdirchk.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lterror.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfiles.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfinal.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfloat.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssbas.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfssini.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lthyphen.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltidxglo.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlength.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlists.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltlogos.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltmath.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltmiscen.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutenc.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutenc.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltoutput.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpage.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpageno.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpar.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltpictur.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltplain.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltsect.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltspace.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/lttab.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltthm.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltvers.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltxdoc.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltxref.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/makeindx.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/makeindx.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/newdc.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/newlfont.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/olddc.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/oldlfont.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/preload.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/proc.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/proc.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/slides.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/slides.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/slifonts.fdd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/syntonly.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/syntonly.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/tulm.fdd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/tulm.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/unpack.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/utf8ienc.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/graphics/color.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/graphics/drivers.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/graphics/epsfig.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/graphics/graphicx.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/graphics/keyval.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/graphics/lscape.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/graphics/rotating.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/graphics/trig.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/alltt.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ansinew.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/applemac.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/article.cls
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/article.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ascii.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/bezier.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/bk10.clo
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/bk11.clo
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/bk12.clo
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/book.cls
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/book.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/cp1250.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/cp1252.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/cp1257.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/cp437.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/cp437de.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/cp850.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/cp852.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/cp858.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/cp865.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/decmulti.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/doc.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/docstrip.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/exscale.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/fixltx2e.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/flafter.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/fleqn.clo
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/fleqn.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/fltrace.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/fontenc.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/fontmath.cfg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/fontmath.ltx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/fonttext.cfg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/fonttext.ltx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/graphpap.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/hyphen.ltx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/idx.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ifthen.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/inputenc.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/lablst.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/latex.ltx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/latex209.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/latexsym.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/latin1.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/latin10.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/latin2.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/latin3.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/latin4.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/latin5.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/latin9.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/lcyenc.dfu
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/leqno.clo
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/leqno.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/letter.cls
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/letter.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ltluatex.lua
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ltluatex.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ltnews.cls
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ltxcheck.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ltxdoc.cls
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ltxguide.cls
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ly1enc.dfu
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/macce.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/makeidx.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/minimal.cls
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/newlfont.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/next.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/oldlfont.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/omlcmm.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/omlcmr.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/omlenc.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/omllcmm.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/omscmr.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/omscmsy.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/omsenc.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/omsenc.dfu
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/omslcmsy.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/omxcmex.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/omxlcmex.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/openbib.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ot1cmdh.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ot1cmfib.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ot1cmfr.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ot1cmr.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ot1cmss.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ot1cmtt.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ot1cmvtt.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ot1enc.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ot1enc.dfu
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ot1lcmss.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ot1lcmtt.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ot2enc.dfu
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ot4enc.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/preload.cfg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/preload.ltx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/proc.cls
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/proc.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/report.cls
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/report.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/sfonts.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/shortvrb.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/showidx.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/size10.clo
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/size11.clo
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/size12.clo
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/slides.cls
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/slides.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/slides.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/syntonly.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t1cmdh.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t1cmfib.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t1cmfr.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t1cmr.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t1cmss.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t1cmtt.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t1cmvtt.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t1enc.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t1enc.dfu
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t1enc.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t1lcmss.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t1lcmtt.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t2aenc.dfu
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t2benc.dfu
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/t2cenc.dfu
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/testpage.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/textcomp.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/tracefnt.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ts1cmr.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ts1cmss.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ts1cmtt.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ts1cmvtt.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ts1enc.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ts1enc.dfu
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/tuenc.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/tulmdh.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/tulmr.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/tulmss.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/tulmssq.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/tulmtt.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/tulmvtt.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ucmr.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ucmss.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ucmtt.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ulasy.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/ullasy.fd
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/utf8-2018.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/utf8.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/utf8enc.dfu
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/base/x2enc.dfu
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/color.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/dvipdf.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/dvipsnam.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/dvipsone.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/dviwin.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/emtex.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/epsfig.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/graphicx.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/keyval.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/lscape.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/pctex32.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/pctexhp.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/pctexps.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/pctexwin.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/rotating.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/tcidvi.def
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/trig.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/graphics/truetex.def
trunk/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
trunk/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
trunk/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/amsmath.tlpsrc
trunk/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-latexextra.tlpsrc
trunk/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-latexrecommended.tlpsrc
Added Paths:
-----------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/README.md
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/ams-external.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/ams-internal.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsldoc.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsldoc.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsopn.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amstext.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsxtra.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/changes.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/diffs-m.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/manifest.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/subeqn.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/subeqn.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/technote.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/technote.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/testmath.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/testmath.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews01.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews01.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews02.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews02.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews03.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews03.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews04.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews04.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews05.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews05.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews06.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews06.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews07.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews07.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews08.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews08.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews09.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews09.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews10.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews10.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews11.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews11.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews12.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews12.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews13.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews13.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews14.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews14.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews15.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews15.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews16.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews16.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews17.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews17.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews18.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews18.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews19.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews19.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews20.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews20.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews21.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews21.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews22.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews22.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews23.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews23.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews24.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews24.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews25.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews25.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews26.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews26.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews27.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews27.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews28.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews28.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews29.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews29.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews30.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews30.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/README.md
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/afterpage.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/array.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/bm.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/calc.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/changes.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/dcolumn.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/delarray.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/enumerate.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/fileerr.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/fontsmpl.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/ftnright.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/hhline.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/indentfirst.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/layout.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/longtable.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/manifest.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/multicol.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/rawfonts.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/shellesc.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/showkeys.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/somedefs.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tabularx.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/theorem.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tools-overview.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tools-overview.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/trace.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/varioref.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/verbatim.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/xr.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/xspace.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsopn.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsopn.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amstext.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amstext.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsxtra.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsxtra.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/afterpage.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/afterpage.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/array.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/bm.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/bm.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/calc.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/dcolumn.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/delarray.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/enumerate.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/fileerr.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/fontsmpl.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/ftnright.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/hhline.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/indentfirst.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/layout.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/longtable.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/longtable.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/multicol.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/multicol.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/rawfonts.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/shellesc.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/showkeys.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/somedefs.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/tabularx.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/tabularx.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/theorem.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/tools.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/trace.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/varioref.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/varioref.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/verbatim.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/xr.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/tools/xspace.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/amsmath/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/amsmath/amsopn.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/amsmath/amstex.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/amsmath/amstext.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/amsmath/amsxtra.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/afterpage.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/array-2016-10-06.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/array.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/bm.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/calc.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/dcolumn.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/delarray.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/e.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/enumerate.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/fontsmpl.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/fontsmpl.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/ftnright.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/h.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/hhline.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/indentfirst.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/layout.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/longtable.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/multicol-2017-04-11.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/multicol.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/q.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/r.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/rawfonts.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/s.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/shellesc.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/showkeys.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/somedefs.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/tabularx.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/thb.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/thc.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/thcb.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/theorem.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/thm.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/thmb.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/thp.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/trace.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/varioref-2016-02-16.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/varioref.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/verbatim.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/verbtest.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/x.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/xr.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex-dev/tools/xspace.sty
trunk/Master/tlpkg/bin/c2lx
trunk/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/latex-amsmath-dev.tlpsrc
trunk/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/latex-tools-dev.tlpsrc
Removed Paths:
-------------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/README-doc.md
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/TEMPLATE-IncludeInRelease.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes-doc.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/kernel-external-commands.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/kernel-internal-commands.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lb2.err
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lb2.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lgc2.err
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lgc2.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manual.err
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manual.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tlc2.err
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tlc2.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/webcomp.err
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/webcomp.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews01.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews02.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews03.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews04.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews05.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews06.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews07.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews08.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews09.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews10.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews11.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews12.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews13.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews14.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews15.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews16.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews17.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews18.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews19.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews20.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews21.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews22.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews23.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews24.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews25.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews26.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews27.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews28.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews29.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/base/ltnews30.tex
trunk/Master/tlpkg/bin/c2l3
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/README.md
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/README.md (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/README.md 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+The amsmath bundle for LaTeX
+============================
+
+Release 2019-10-01 pre-release 3
+
+Overview
+--------
+
+The `amsmath` package is an extension package for LaTeX that provides
+additional features to facilitate mathematical typesetting. It has been
+developed by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) and released for general
+use as a service to the mathematical community. A number of smaller
+auxiliary packages are also distributed with the `amsmath` package.
+
+Effective in 2016, maintenance of `amsmath was transferred from AMS to
+the LaTeX Project; as `amsmath` is considered a "required" package, this
+centralizes control over the core LaTeX components.
+
+Installation
+------------
+
+We no longer distribute installation instructions for the various TeX
+implementations. All modern TeX systems include `amsmath` as-standard, and end
+users should in general use the release versions supplied in this way.
+
+Release distribution is carried out only through the CTAN archives.
+
+Documentation
+-------------
+
+The primary documentation for `amsmath` is in provided as `amsldoc.pdf`.
+
+Additional documentation files include:
+
+ - `diffs-m.txt`
+ - `subeqn.pdf`
+ - `technote.pdf`
+ - `testmath.pdf`
+
+which are included in the collection. All of these can be accessed
+easily with most distributions by entering `texdoc` *filename* at the
+command line, or via [TeXdoc Online](http://texdoc.net).
+
+Change logs
+-----------
+
+The file `changes.txt` lists recent changes in reverse chronological order.
+
+The file `diffs-m.txt` contains information on development and changes
+prior to 2000.
+
+Reporting Bugs
+--------------
+
+If you wish to report a problem or bug in the `amsmath` bundle
+please use the [Issue Tracker for LaTeX2e on
+GitHub](https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/issues)
+and follow the guidelines that pop up if you press the "New issue" button.
+
+In particular, to check that you are really seeing a bug, please write
+a short, self-contained document that shows the problem. This should
+include the `latexbug` package, which will warn if your test file is
+not suitable for one or the other reason. See the [CONTRIBUTING
+guide](https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/blob/master/CONTRIBUTING.md)
+for further details, or if you need to obtain the `latexbug` package.
+
+If the bug turns out to be with third-party software then please
+contact the developer, and not us!
+
+License
+-------
+
+The contents of this bundle are distributed under the [LaTeX Project
+Public License](https://www.latex-project.org/lppl/lppl-1-3c/),
+version 1.3c or later.
+
+-----
+
+<p>Copyright (C) 2001-2004, 2007, 2008, 2010, 2011, 2013 American Mathematical Society. <br />
+<p>Copyright (C) 2016-2019 The LaTeX Project and American Mathematical Society. <br />
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/README.md
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/ams-external.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/ams-external.txt (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/ams-external.txt 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,547 @@
+%%% list of external commands used by amsmath (not totally correct)
+
+\!
+\"
+\(
+\*
+\,
+\-
+\.
+\/
+\:
+\;
+\=
+\Acute
+\AmS
+\AmSfont
+\And
+\AtBeginDocument
+\Bar
+\Big
+\Bigg
+\Biggr
+\Bigr
+\Breve
+\Check
+\DOTS
+\DOTSB
+\DOTSI
+\DOTSX
+\Ddot
+\DeclareFontEncoding
+\DeclareFontShape
+\DeclareMathAccent
+\DeclareMathDelimiter
+\DeclareMathOperator
+\DeclareMathSymbol
+\DeclareOption
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+\Dot
+\ExecuteOptions
+\GenericError
+\GenericInfo
+\GenericWarning
+\Grave
+\Hat
+\Leftarrow
+\Longleftarrow
+\Longleftrightarrow
+\Longrightarrow
+\MessageBreak
+\MultiIntegral
+\PackageError
+\PackageWarning
+\PackageWarningNoLine
+\PassOptionsToPackage
+\Pr
+\ProcessOptions
+\Relbar
+\RequirePackage
+\Rightarrow
+\Tilde
+\Umathaccent
+\Umathcar
+\Umathchar
+\Umathcharnumdef
+\Umathcode
+\Umathcodenum
+\Umathfractiondelsize
+\Vec
+\Vert
+\XeTeXcharclass
+\[
+\]
+\above
+\abovedisplayskip
+\abovewithdelims
+\accentedsymbol
+\acute
+\addtocounter
+\advance
+\aftergroup
+\allowbreak
+\allowdisplaybreaks
+\alph
+\arabic
+\arccos
+\arcsin
+\arctan
+\arg
+\array
+\arraycolsep
+\arraystretch
+\atop
+\atopwithdelims
+\badness<
+\bar
+\baselineskip
+\baselineskip6
+\begin
+\begingroup
+\belowdisplayskip
+\bgroup
+\big
+\bigcap
+\bigcup
+\bigg
+\biggr
+\bigodot
+\bigoplus
+\bigotimes
+\bigr
+\bigsqcup
+\biguplus
+\bigvee
+\bigwedge
+\binom
+\bmod
+\boldsymbol
+\box
+\boxed
+\breve
+\cases
+\cdotp
+\cdots
+\cfrac
+\char
+\chardef
+\check
+\cleaders
+\colon
+\columnwidth
+\coprod
+\copy
+\cos
+\cosh
+\cot
+\coth
+\cr
+\crcr
+\csc
+\csname
+\csnamen
+\csnamethe
+\dbinom
+\ddddot
+\dddot
+\ddot
+\def
+\deg
+\delimiter
+\delimiterfactor
+\delimitershortfall
+\det
+\dfrac
+\dim
+\displaybreak
+\displayindent
+\displaylimits
+\displaystyle
+\displaywidth
+\divide
+\do
+\dot
+\doteq
+\dots
+\dotsb
+\dotsc
+\dotsi
+\dotsm
+\dotso
+\dp
+\edef
+\egroup
+\else
+\end
+\endalign
+\endaligned
+\endarray
+\endcsname
+\endgather
+\endgroup
+\endmathdisplay
+\endmatrix
+\endmultline
+\endsplit
+\endsubarray
+\eqno
+\eqref
+\everycr
+\everydisplay
+\everymath
+\exp
+\expandafter
+\fbox
+\fi
+\fontchardp
+\fontcharht
+\fontdimen
+\fontencoding
+\fontfamily
+\frac
+\fracwithdelims
+\futurelet
+\gcd
+\gdef
+\genfrac
+\global
+\grave
+\halign
+\halignto
+\hat
+\hbox
+\hdots
+\hdotsfor
+\hfil
+\hfill
+\hfilneg
+\hfuzz
+\hom
+\hookleftarrow
+\hookrightarrow
+\hrule
+\hskip
+\ht
+\ialign
+\idotsint
+\if
+\ifDOTS
+\ifcase
+\ifdim
+\iff
+\iffalse
+\iffalse%initialvalue
+\ifhbox
+\ifinner
+\ifm
+\ifmacrostarts
+\ifmmode
+\ifnum
+\ifnum`
+\ifodd
+\iftrue
+\ifvmode
+\ifx
+\ignorespaces
+\ignorespacesafterend
+\iiiint
+\iiint
+\iint
+\impliedby
+\implies
+\inf
+\injlim
+\int
+\interdisplaylinepenalty
+\intertext
+\intop
+\joinrel
+\jot
+\ker
+\kern
+\l%
+\lVert
+\label
+\lastbox
+\lastkern
+\lastskip
+\lbrace
+\ldots
+\leavevmode
+\left
+\leftarrow
+\leftmargini
+\leftmarginiminus
+\leftroot
+\leqno
+\let
+\lg
+\lhook
+\lim
+\liminf
+\limits
+\lineskip
+\lineskiplimit
+\linewidth
+\llap
+\ln
+\log
+\long
+\longleftarrow
+\longleftrightarrow
+\longmapsto
+\longrightarrow
+\loop
+\lq
+\lvert
+\mapsto
+\mapstochar
+\mathaccent
+\mathaccentV
+\mathalpha
+\mathbin
+\mathchar
+\mathchardef
+\mathchoice
+\mathclose
+\mathcode
+\mathdisplay
+\mathellipsis
+\mathgroup
+\mathhexbox
+\mathinner
+\mathop
+\mathopen
+\mathord
+\mathpalette
+\mathpunct
+\mathrel
+\mathring
+\mathsurround
+\mathxxx
+\mathxxxtest
+\mathxxxx
+\matrix
+\max
+\maxdimen
+\mbox
+\meaning
+\medmuskip
+\medspace
+\min
+\minalignsep
+\mintagsep
+\mkern
+\mod
+\moveleft
+\mskip
+\mspace
+\multicolumn
+\multiply
+\multlinegap
+\multlinegap10pt
+\multlinetaggap
+\multlinetaggap10pt
+\negmedspace
+\negthickspace
+\negthinspace
+\newbox
+\newcommand
+\newcount
+\newcounter
+\newdimen
+\newenvironment
+\newhelp
+\newif
+\newmuskip
+\newskip
+\newtoks
+\noalign
+\nobreak
+\nobreakdash
+\nobreakspace
+\noexpand
+\noindent
+\nointerlineskip
+\nolimits
+\nonscript
+\nonumber
+\normalbaselines
+\normalcolor
+\normalfont
+\normallineskiplimit
+\not
+\notag
+\nottest
+\null
+\nulldelimiterspace
+\number
+\numberwithin
+\of
+\oint
+\ointop
+\omit
+\openup
+\operatorfont
+\operatorname
+\operatornamewithlimits
+\or
+\over
+\overleftarrow
+\overleftrightarrow
+\overline
+\overrightarrow
+\overset
+\overwithdelims
+\par
+\parshape
+\penalty
+\pmatrix
+\pmod
+\pod
+\postdisplaypenalty
+\predisplaypenalty
+\prevdepth
+\primfrac
+\prod
+\projlim
+\protect
+\providecommand
+\qopname
+\quad
+\rVert
+\raise
+\raisetag
+\rangle
+\rbrace
+\rbrack
+\rceil
+\ref
+\refstepcounter
+\relax
+\relaxo
+\relbar
+\renewcommand
+\renewenvironment
+\repeat
+\rfloor
+\rgroup
+\rhook
+\right
+\rightarrow
+\rlap
+\rmoustache
+\romannumeral
+\root
+\rootbox
+\rq
+\rvert
+\scriptfont
+\scriptscriptfont
+\scriptscriptstyle
+\scriptstyle
+\sec
+\selectfont
+\setbox
+\setcounter
+\shoveleft
+\shoveright
+\sideset
+\sim
+\sin
+\sinh
+\skewchar
+\smash
+\space
+\spaceor
+\span
+\spbreve
+\spcheck
+\spdddot
+\spddot
+\spdot
+\sphat
+\split
+\sptilde
+\sqrtsign
+\stepcounter
+\string
+\strut
+\strutbox
+\subarray
+\substack
+\sum
+\sup
+\symoperators
+\tabskip
+\tag
+\taghere
+\tan
+\tanh
+\tbinom
+\text
+\textellipsis
+\textfont
+\textstyle
+\textup
+\tfrac
+\the
+\theequation
+\theparentequation
+\thetag
+\thickmuskip
+\thickmuskip0mu
+\thickspace
+\thinmuskip
+\thinspace
+\tilde
+\tmspace
+\toks
+\typeout
+\u
+\underleftarrow
+\underleftrightarrow
+\underrightarrow
+\underset
+\unhbox
+\unhcopy
+\unpenalty
+\unskip
+\unvbox
+\unvcopy
+\uppercase
+\uproot
+\usefont
+\value
+\varDelta
+\varGamma
+\varLambda
+\varOmega
+\varPhi
+\varPi
+\varPsi
+\varSigma
+\varTheta
+\varUpsilon
+\varXi
+\varinjlim
+\varliminf
+\varlimsup
+\varprojlim
+\vbox
+\vcenter
+\vec
+\vee
+\veqno
+\vert
+\vrule
+\vskip
+\vss
+\vtop
+\wd
+\widehat
+\widetilde
+\xdef
+\xleaders
+\xleftarrow
+\xrightarrow
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/ams-external.txt
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/ams-internal.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/ams-internal.txt (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/ams-internal.txt 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,482 @@
+%%%% list of internal commands used by amsmath (not totally correct)
+
+\@@above
+\@@abovewithdelims
+\@@atop
+\@@atopwithdelims
+\@@eqno
+\@@italiccorr
+\@@leqno
+\@@over
+\@@overline
+\@@overwithdelims
+\@@sqrt
+\@@undefined
+\@@underline
+\@M
+\@addtoreset
+\@amsmath at err
+\@arrayboxrestore
+\@arrayparboxrestore
+\@backslashchar
+\@badmath
+\@car
+\@cdots
+\@centering
+\@checkend
+\@currentlabel
+\@currenvir
+\@declmathop
+\@depth
+\@display at init
+\@displaytrue
+\@eha
+\@ehc
+\@ehd
+\@elt
+\@empty
+\@emptytoks
+\@envbody
+\@eqnnum
+\@eqnswfalse
+\@eqnswtrue
+\@eqpen
+\@fleqntrue
+\@for
+\@genfrac
+\@getpen
+\@gobble
+\@gobblefour
+\@gobblethree
+\@gobbletwo
+\@gtempa
+\@height
+\@iden
+\@ifdefinable
+\@ifnextchar
+\@ifnotempty
+\@ifpackageloaded
+\@ifpackagewith
+\@ifstar
+\@ifundefined
+\@ignoretrue
+\@ldots
+\@let at token
+\@lign
+\@m
+\@mathmargin
+\@mathmeasure
+\@mathstyle
+\@namedef
+\@ne
+\@nil
+\@nocnterr
+\@nocounterr
+\@nx
+\@onlypreamble
+\@saveprimitive
+\@sptoken
+\@stpelt
+\@tempa
+\@tempb
+\@tempc
+\@tempcnta
+\@tempcntb
+\@tempd
+\@tempdima
+\@tempdimb
+\@tempdimc
+\@temptokena
+\@testopt
+\@totalleftmargin
+\@undefined
+\@width
+\@xp
+\@xp#1
+\DN@
+\DOTS@
+\DOTSCASE@
+\FN@
+\Invalid@@
+\Leftarrowfill@
+\Leftrightarrowfill@
+\Let@
+\Mathstrut@
+\Mathstrutbox@
+\RIfM@
+\Rightarrowfill@
+\SK@@label
+\SK at equationtrue
+\SK at tagform@
+\Umathch@
+\acc at check
+\acc at error
+\accentclass@
+\add at amp
+\add at amps
+\addto at envbody
+\addto at hook
+\align@
+\align at preamble
+\align at recover
+\aligned at a
+\alignedat at a
+\alignedspace at left
+\alignsafe at testopt
+\alignsep@
+\alignsep at -
+\alignsep@<
+\alt at tag
+\ams at DeclareRobustCommand
+\ams at def
+\ams at newcommand
+\ams at renewcommand
+\andhelp@
+\arrowfill@
+\bBigg@
+\begin at stack
+\big at size
+\bigcap@
+\bigcup@
+\bigodot@
+\bigoplus@
+\bigotimes@
+\bigsqcup@
+\biguplus@
+\bigvee@
+\bigwedge@
+\binrel@
+\binrel@@
+\black@
+\bold at false
+\bold at true
+\boldsymboldots@
+\boxz@
+\c at MaxMatrixCols
+\c at MaxMatrixColsc
+\calc at shift@align
+\calc at shift@gather
+\check at mathfonts
+\checkat at false
+\checkat at true
+\cl@@ckpt
+\classnum@
+\cmex at opt
+\collect@@body
+\collect at body
+\column@
+\column at plus
+\coprod@
+\count@
+\csname@@
+\csnamec@
+\csnamecl@
+\csnameemdf@
+\csnamem at gobble
+\csnamemb@
+\ctagsplit at false
+\ctagsplit at true
+\default at tag
+\delayed@
+\df at label
+\df at tag
+\dft at tag
+\dimen@
+\displ at y
+\displ at y@
+\displaywidth@
+\dotsb@
+\dotso@
+\dotsspace@
+\dspbrk@
+\dspbrk at context
+\dspbrk at lvl
+\dt at pfalse
+\dt at ptrue
+\emdf at L
+\emdf at La
+\emdf at R
+\emdf at Ra
+\emdf at U
+\emdf at Ua
+\endmathdisplay at a
+\endmathdisplay at fleqn
+\endmultline at math
+\env at cases
+\env at matrix
+\eqnshift@
+\every at math@size
+\ex@
+\ext at arrow
+\extra@
+\extrap@
+\f at series
+\f at size
+\field at lengths
+\fieldlengths@
+\finsm at sh
+\firstchoice at false
+\firstchoice at true
+\fracwithdelims@
+\frozen at everymath
+\gather@
+\gather at split
+\gdisplaywidth@
+\genfrac at choice
+\genfrac at rule
+\getdsp at pen
+\getmathch@
+\getmathcode@
+\gmeasure@
+\gobble at tag
+\gtest at false
+\gtest at true
+\hdots at for
+\hexnumber@
+\if at display
+\if at eqnsw
+\if at fleqn
+\ifbold@
+\ifcheckat@
+\ifctagsplit@
+\ifdt at p
+\iffirstchoice@
+\ifgtest@
+\ifinalign@
+\ifingather@
+\ifmeasuring@
+\ifshifttag@
+\ifst at rred
+\iftag@
+\iftagsleft@
+\iftagsleft at L
+\ifxxat@
+\ilimits@
+\inalign at false
+\inalign at true
+\incr at eqnum
+\inf at bad
+\ingather at false
+\ingather at true
+\insplit@
+\intdots@
+\intertext@
+\intkern@
+\ints at a
+\ints at b
+\ints at c
+\invalid at tag
+\keybin@
+\keybin at test
+\label at in@display
+\leavevmode at ifvmode
+\leftarrowfill@
+\leftrightarrowfill@
+\leftroot@
+\leftroot at mu
+\lendmultline@
+\lendsplit@
+\lineht@
+\ltx at label
+\m at gobble
+\m at ne
+\m at th
+\m at th$
+\macc at a
+\macc at adjust
+\macc at code
+\macc at depth
+\macc at group
+\macc at kerna
+\macc at kernb
+\macc at nested
+\macc at nested@a
+\macc at nucleus
+\macc at palette
+\macc at set@skewchar
+\macc at skewchar
+\macc at style
+\macc at test
+\macc at tmp
+\macro@
+\macro@@
+\make at df@tag
+\make at df@tag@@
+\make at df@tag@@@
+\make at display@tag
+\makesm at sh
+\maketag@@
+\maketag@@@
+\math@
+\math at bgroup
+\math at cr
+\math at cr@
+\math at cr@@
+\math at cr@@@
+\math at cr@@@align
+\math at cr@@@align at measure
+\math at cr@@@aligned
+\math at cr@@@alignedat
+\math at cr@@@gather
+\math at cr@@[
+\math at egroup
+\mathbin@
+\mathch@
+\mathdisplay@@pop
+\mathdisplay@@push
+\mathdisplay at pop
+\mathdisplay at push
+\mathdisplay at stack
+\mathrel@
+\mathsm at sh
+\matrix at check
+\matrix at error
+\maxcol at width
+\maxcolumn at widths
+\maxfields@
+\mb at b
+\mb at t
+\mb at tb
+\mdots@
+\mdots@@
+\meaning@
+\meaning@@
+\measure@
+\measuring at false
+\measuring at true
+\mmeasure@
+\multline@
+\multline at indent
+\new at ifnextchar
+\newmcodes@
+\newmcodes at m
+\newmcodes at o
+\next@
+\nextii@
+\nextiii@
+\nextiv@
+\nextix@
+\nextv@
+\nextvi@
+\nextvii@
+\nextviii@
+\nfss at text
+\nmlimits@
+\noaccents@
+\nogood at displaybreak
+\nolimits@
+\nomath at env
+\nonmatherr@
+\not@
+\operator at font
+\operator at fontlim$
+\operator at fontmod
+\overarrow@
+\p@
+\p at equation
+\place at tag
+\place at tag@gather
+\plainroot@
+\print at eqnum
+\process at envbody
+\prod@
+\protected at edef
+\push at begins
+\r@@t
+\raise at tag
+\relaxnext@
+\rendmultline@
+\rendsplit@
+\reset at equation
+\reset at strutbox@
+\resetMathstrut@
+\restore at hfuzz
+\restore at math@cr
+\restorealignstate@
+\restorecolumn@
+\restorecounters@
+\rightarrowfill@
+\rightdelim@
+\row@
+\savealignstate@
+\savecolumn@
+\savecounters@
+\savefieldlength@
+\saveshift@
+\savetaglength@
+\select at group
+\set at field
+\set at gather@field
+\set at mathaccent
+\setboxz at h
+\sf at size
+\shdots at for
+\shift at tag
+\shifttag at false
+\shifttag at true
+\sixt@@n
+\skip@
+\slimits@
+\split@
+\split at al@a
+\split at al@tagcheck
+\split at aligned
+\split at err
+\split at tag
+\split at warning
+\spread at equation
+\ssf at size
+\st at rredfalse
+\st at rredtrue
+\start at align
+\start at aligned
+\start at gather
+\start at multline
+\std at equal
+\std at minus
+\striplong@
+\strut@
+\strut@$
+\strutbox@
+\sum@
+\tag at false
+\tag at help
+\tag at in@align
+\tag at in@display
+\tag at in@display at a
+\tag at lengths
+\tag at shifts
+\tag at true
+\tag at width
+\tagform@
+\tagshift@
+\tagsleft at false
+\tagsleft at true
+\tagwidth@
+\tdots@
+\text@
+\textdef@
+\thecharacter@
+\thedots@
+\thr@@
+\toks@
+\too at wide
+\totwidth@
+\try at load@fontshape
+\tw@
+\underarrow@
+\uproot@
+\use at mathgroup
+\varlim@
+\varliminf@
+\varlimsup@
+\wdz@
+\x at calc@shift at lc
+\x at calc@shift at lf
+\x at calc@shift at rc
+\x at calc@shift at rf
+\x at lcalc@width
+\x at rcalc@width
+\xatlevel@
+\xxat at true
+\z@
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/ams-internal.txt
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsldoc.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsldoc.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsldoc.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsldoc.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsldoc.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsldoc.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsldoc.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsldoc.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,2770 @@
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1995, 2000, 2013 American Mathematical Society.
+% Copyright (C) 2016-2019 LaTeX3 Project and American Mathematical Society.
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+%
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is the LaTeX3 Project.
+%
+\documentclass[leqno,titlepage,openany]{amsldoc}[1999/12/13]
+
+\def\MaintainedByLaTeXTeam#1{%
+\begin{center}%
+\fbox{\fbox{\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}%
+This file is maintained by the \LaTeX{} Project team.\\%
+Bug reports can be opened (category \texttt{#1}) at\\%
+\url{https://latex-project.org/bugs/}.\end{tabular}}}\end{center}}
+
+\ifx\UndEfiNed\url
+ \ClassError{amsldoc}{%
+ This version of amsldoc.tex must be processed\MessageBreak
+ with a newer version of amsldoc.cls (2.02 or later).}{}
+\fi
+
+\renewcommand\bibname{References}
+
+% Definitions that should be moved to amsldoc.cls
+% when it is next updated
+\makeatletter
+\let\cleardouble at page\cleardoublepage
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifx\cleardouble at page\cleardoublepage
+ \def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage{\pagestyle{empty}\cleardouble at page}}
+ \fi
+}
+
+% #1 is empty or one of class, environment, option, package
+% could use different font in each case
+\makeatletter
+\def\@category at index#1#2{%
+ \autoindex{%
+ #2\actualchar\string\index#1font{#2}%
+ \ifx\@nil#1\@nil\else\space#1\fi
+ }%
+}
+
+\let\indexpackagefont\textsf
+\let\indexclassfont\textsf
+\let\indexoptionfont\texttt
+\let\indexenvironmentfont\texttt
+\let\indexfont\texttt
+\makeatother
+% For a package that won't be indexed, i.e. amsmath
+\newcommand{\nipkg}{\textsf}
+\def\tikz/{Ti\textit{k}Z}
+% End definitions for amsldoc.cls
+
+\title{User's Guide for the \nipkg{amsmath} Package (Version~2.1)}
+\author{American Mathematical Society, \LaTeX3 Project}
+\date{1999-12-13 (revised 2002-02-25, 2016-11-14, 2018-04-05)}
+\makeatletter
+\def\@thanks{\bigskip\MaintainedByLaTeXTeam{amslatex}}
+\makeatother
+
+% Use the amsmath package and amscd package in order to print
+% examples.
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage{amscd}
+
+\usepackage{imakeidx}
+% Need alternate coding for vertical bar to get it into index.
+% Based on \qcbang and \cnbang in amsldoc.cls, refined by David Carlisle.
+% Give it a sort field that will be at the end of the symbols;
+% must avoid " and | which have special meanings.
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\qcvert}{\qc\|\index{{z1}@{\ntt\char'174}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cnvert}{%
+ \ncn{\|}\index{{z0}@{\ntt\bslchar\char'174}}}
+% Need alternate index sort field for bang to allow & to sort first
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\altcnbang}{%
+ \ncn{\!}\index{"!b@{\ntt\bslchar\qcbang}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cnamp}{%
+ \index{"!a@\texttt{\&}}}
+
+\makeindex[intoc] % generate index data
+\providecommand{\see}[2]{\textit{see} #1}
+
+% The amsldoc class includes a number of features useful for
+% documentation about TeX, including:
+%
+% ---Commands \tex/, \amstex/, \latex/, ... for uniform treatment
+% of the various logos and easy handling of following spaces.
+%
+% ---Commands for printing various common elements: \cn for command
+% names, \fn for file names (including font-file names), \env for
+% environments, \pkg and \cls for packages and classes, etc.
+
+% Many of the command names used here are rather long and will
+% contribute to poor linebreaking if we follow the \latex/ practice
+% of not hyphenating anything set in tt font; instead we selectively
+% allow some hyphenation.
+\allowtthyphens % defined in amsldoc.cls
+
+\hyphenation{ac-cent-ed-sym-bol add-to-counter add-to-length align-at
+ aligned-at allow-dis-play-breaks ams-art ams-cd ams-la-tex amsl-doc
+ ams-symb ams-tex ams-text ams-xtra bmatrix bold-sym-bol cen-ter-tags
+ eqn-ar-ray idots-int int-lim-its latex med-space neg-med-space
+ neg-thick-space neg-thin-space no-int-lim-its no-name-lim-its
+ over-left-arrow over-left-right-arrow over-right-arrow pmatrix
+ qed-sym-bol set-length side-set small-er tbinom the-equa-tion
+ thick-space thin-space un-der-left-arrow un-der-left-right-arrow
+ un-der-right-arrow use-pack-age var-inj-lim var-proj-lim vmatrix
+ xalign-at xx-align-at}
+
+% Prepare for illustrating the \vec example
+\newcommand{\vect}[1]{\mathbf{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\booktitle}[1]{\textit{#1}}
+\newcommand{\journalname}[1]{\textit{#1}}
+\newcommand{\seriesname}[1]{\textit{#1}}
+
+% Command to insert and index a particular phrase. Doesn't work for
+% certain kinds of special characters in the argument.
+\newcommand{\ii}[1]{#1\index{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\vstrut}[1]{\vrule width0pt height#1\relax}
+
+% An environment for presenting comprehensive address information:
+\newenvironment{infoaddress}{%
+ \par\topsep\medskipamount
+ \trivlist\centering
+ \item[]%
+ \begin{minipage}{.7\columnwidth}%
+ \raggedright
+}{%
+ \end{minipage}%
+ \endtrivlist
+}
+
+\newenvironment{eqxample}{%
+ \par\addvspace\medskipamount
+ \noindent\begin{minipage}{.5\columnwidth}%
+ \def\producing{\end{minipage}\begin{minipage}{.5\columnwidth}%
+ \hbox\bgroup\kern-.2pt\vrule width.2pt%
+ \vbox\bgroup\parindent0pt\relax
+% The 3pt is to cancel the -\lineskip from \displ at y
+ \abovedisplayskip3pt \abovedisplayshortskip\abovedisplayskip
+ \belowdisplayskip0pt \belowdisplayshortskip\belowdisplayskip
+ \noindent}
+}{%
+ \par
+% Ensure that a lonely \[\] structure doesn't take up width less than
+% \hsize.
+ \hrule height0pt width\hsize
+ \egroup\vrule width.2pt\kern-.2pt\egroup
+ \end{minipage}%
+ \par\addvspace\medskipamount
+}
+
+% Errors in output shouldn't be \texttt, and they may also be longer
+% than one line, but they should be identified by the "errorbullet".
+% (They were formerly labeled as aubsections.)
+\newenvironment{erroro}[1]{%
+ \par\addvspace\medskipamount
+ \noindent\hangindent\parindent
+ \hbox to\parindent{\errorbullet\hfil}\ignorespaces
+ #1\par\vspace{\smallskipamount}
+}{%
+ \par\addvspace\medskipamount
+}
+
+% The chapters are so short, perhaps we shouldn't call them by the
+% name `Chapter'. We make \chaptername read an argument in order to
+% remove a following \space or "{} " (both possibilities are present
+% in book.cls).
+
+\renewcommand{\chaptername}[1]{}
+\newcommand{\chapnum}[1]{\mdash #1\mdash }
+\makeatletter
+\def\@makechapterhead#1{%
+ \vspace{1.5\baselineskip}%
+ {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \reset at font
+ \ifnum \c at secnumdepth >\m at ne
+ \large\bfseries \chapnum{\thechapter}%
+ \par\nobreak
+ \vskip.5\baselineskip\relax
+ \fi
+ #1\par\nobreak
+ \vskip\baselineskip
+ }}
+\makeatother
+
+% A command for ragged-right parbox in a tabular.
+\newcommand{\rp}{\let\PBS\\\raggedright\let\\\PBS}
+
+% Non-indexed file name
+\newcommand{\nfn}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+% For the examples in the math spacing table.
+%%\newcommand{\lspx}{\mbox{\rule{5pt}{.6pt}\rule{.6pt}{6pt}}}
+%%\newcommand{\rspx}{\mbox{\rule[-1pt]{.6pt}{7pt}%
+%% \rule[-1pt]{5pt}{.6pt}}}
+\newcommand{\lspx}{\mathord{\Rightarrow\mkern-1mu}}
+\newcommand{\rspx}{\mathord{\mkern-1mu\Leftarrow}}
+\newcommand{\spx}[1]{$\lspx #1\rspx$}
+
+% For a list of characters representing document input.
+\newcommand{\clist}[1]{%
+ \mbox{\ntt\spaceskip.2em plus.1em \xspaceskip\spaceskip#1}}
+
+% Fix weird \latex/ definition of rightmark.
+\makeatletter
+\def\rightmark{\expandafter\@rightmark\botmark{}{}}
+% Also turn off section marks.
+\let\sectionmark\@gobble
+\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{%
+ \uppercase{\markboth{\rhcn#1}{\rhcn#1}}}
+\newcommand{\rhcn}{\thechapter. }
+\makeatother
+
+% Include down to \section but not \subsection, in toc:
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
+
+% Subheadings for the bibliography
+\newif\iffirstbibsubhead \firstbibsubheadtrue
+\newcommand{\bibsubhead}[1]{%
+ \iffirstbibsubhead \firstbibsubheadfalse
+ \else \addvspace{\medskipamount}
+ \fi
+ \item[]\hspace*{-\leftmargin}\textbf{#1}\par
+ \vspace{\smallskipamount}
+}
+
+\DeclareMathOperator{\ix}{ix}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\nul}{nul}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\End}{End}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\xxx}{xxx}
+
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\hypersetup{pdfborder=0 0 0}
+\makeatletter
+\let\oldcs\cs
+\def\cs#1{\texorpdfstring{\oldcs{#1}}{\@backslashchar\@backslashchar#1}}
+\let\cn\cs
+\makeatother
+\begin{document}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\frontmatter
+
+\maketitle
+
+\pagestyle{headings}
+\tableofcontents
+\cleardoublepage % for better page number placement
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\mainmatter
+\chapter{Introduction}
+
+\index{amsmath@\texttt{amsmath} package|(}
+
+The \nipkg{amsmath} package is a \LaTeX{} package that provides
+miscellaneous enhancements for improving the information structure and
+printed output of documents that contain mathematical formulas. Readers
+unfamiliar with \LaTeX{} should refer to \cite{lamport}. If you have an
+up-to-date version of \LaTeX{}, the \nipkg{amsmath} package is normally
+provided along with it. Upgrading when a newer version of the
+\nipkg{amsmath} package is released can be done via
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amsmath.zip}.
+
+This documentation describes the features of the \nipkg{amsmath} package
+and discusses how they are intended to be used. It also covers some
+ancillary packages:
+\begin{ctab}{lll}
+\pkg{amsbsy}& \pkg{amsopn}& \pkg{amsxtra}\\
+\pkg{amscd}& \pkg{amstext}\\
+\end{ctab}
+These all have something to do with the contents of math formulas. For
+information on extra math symbols and math fonts, see \cite{amsfonts}
+and \url{https://www.ams.org/tex/amsfonts.html}. For documentation of the
+\pkg{amsthm} package or AMS document classes (\cls{amsart},
+\cls{amsbook}, etc.\@) see \cite{amsthdoc} or \cite{amshandbk} and
+\url{https://www.ams.org/tex/author-info.html}.
+
+If you are a long-time \latex/ user and have lots of mathematics in what
+you write, then you may recognize solutions for some familiar problems
+in this list of \nipkg{amsmath} features:
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item A convenient way to define new `operator name' commands analogous
+to \cn{sin} and \cn{lim}, including proper side spacing and automatic
+selection of the correct font style and size (even when used in
+sub- or superscripts).
+
+\item Multiple substitutes for the \env{eqnarray} environment to make
+various kinds of equation arrangements easier to write.
+
+\item Equation numbers automatically adjust up or down to avoid
+overprinting on the equation contents (unlike \env{eqnarray}).
+
+\item Spacing around equals signs matches the normal spacing in the
+\env{equation} environment (unlike \env{eqnarray}).
+
+\item A way to produce multiline subscripts as are often used with
+summation or product symbols.
+
+\item An easy way to substitute a variant equation number for a given
+equation instead of the automatically supplied number.
+
+\item An easy way to produce subordinate equation numbers of the form
+(1.3a) (1.3b) (1.3c) for selected groups of equations.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+The \nipkg{amsmath} package is distributed together with some small
+auxiliary packages:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\nipkg{amsmath}] Primary package, provides various features for
+ displayed equations and other mathematical constructs.
+
+\item[\pkg{amstext}] Provides a \cn{text} command for
+ typesetting a fragment of text inside a display.
+
+\item[\pkg{amsopn}] Provides \cn{DeclareMathOperator} for defining new
+ `operator names' like \cn{sin} and \cn{lim}.
+
+\item[\pkg{amsbsy}] For backward compatibility this package continues
+to exist but use of the newer \pkg{bm} package that comes with \LaTeX{}
+is recommended instead.
+
+\item[\pkg{amscd}] Provides a \env{CD} environment for simple
+ commutative diagrams (no support for diagonal arrows).
+
+\item[\pkg{amsxtra}] Provides certain odds and ends such as
+ \cn{fracwithdelims} and \cn{accentedsymbol}, for compatibility with
+ documents created using version 1.1.
+
+\end{description}
+
+The \nipkg{amsmath} package incorporates \pkg{amstext}, \pkg{amsopn}, and
+\pkg{amsbsy}. The features of \pkg{amscd} and \pkg{amsxtra}, however,
+are available only by invoking those packages separately.
+
+The independent \pkg{mathtools} package \cite{mt} provides some
+enhancements to \nipkg{amsmath}; \pkg{mathtools} loads \nipkg{amsmath}
+automatically, so there is no need to separately load \nipkg{amsmath}
+if \pkg{mathtools} is used. Some \pkg{mathtools} facilities
+will be noted below as appropriate.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\chapter{Options for the \nipkg{amsmath} package}\label{options}
+
+The \nipkg{amsmath} package has the following options:
+\index{options!amsmath@\texttt{amsmath} package options|(}
+\begin{description}
+
+\item[\opt{centertags}] (default) For an equation containing a
+\env{split} environment, place equation
+numbers\index{equationn at equation numbers!vertical placement}
+vertically centered on the total height of the equation.
+
+\item[\opt{tbtags}] `Top-or-bottom tags': For an equation containing
+a \env{split} environment, place equation
+numbers\index{equationn at equation numbers!vertical placement} level with the last
+(resp.\ first) line, if numbers are on the right (resp.\ left).
+
+\item[\opt{sumlimits}] (default) Place the subscripts and
+superscripts\index{subscripts and superscripts!placement}\relax
+\index{limits|see{subscripts and superscripts}} of summation symbols
+above and below, in displayed equations. This option also affects other
+symbols of the same type\mdash $\prod$, $\coprod$, $\bigotimes$,
+$\bigoplus$, and so forth\mdash but excluding integrals (see below).
+
+\item[\opt{nosumlimits}] Always place the subscripts and superscripts of
+summation-type symbols to the side, even in displayed equations.
+
+\item[\opt{intlimits}] Like \opt{sumlimits}, but for
+integral\index{integrals!placement of limits} symbols.
+
+\item[\opt{nointlimits}] (default) Opposite of \opt{intlimits}.
+
+\item[\opt{namelimits}] (default) Like \opt{sumlimits}, but for certain
+`operator names' such as $\det$, $\inf$, $\lim$, $\max$, $\min$, that
+traditionally have subscripts%
+\index{subscripts and superscripts!placement} placed underneath when
+they occur in a displayed equation.
+
+\item[\opt{nonamelimits}] Opposite of \opt{namelimits}.
+
+\end{description}
+
+\goodbreak
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[\opt{alignedleftspaceyes}]
+\item[\opt{alignedleftspaceno}]
+\item[\opt{alignedleftspaceyesifneg}]
+\end{description}
+
+To use one of these package options, put the option name in the optional
+argument of the \cn{usepackage} command\mdash e.g.,
+\verb"\usepackage[intlimits]{amsmath}".
+For AMS document classes and any other classes that preload \nipkg{amsmath}
+desired options must be specified with the \cn{documentclass}\mdash
+e.g.,\\
+\verb+\documentclass[intlimits,tbtags,reqno]{amsart}+.
+
+The \nipkg{amsmath} package also recognizes the following options which
+are normally selected (implicitly or explicitly) through the
+\cn{documentclass} command, and thus need not be repeated in the option
+list of the \cn{usepackage}|{amsmath}| statement.
+\begin{description}
+
+\item[\opt{leqno}] Place equation numbers on the left.%
+\index{equationn at equation numbers!left or right placement}
+
+\item[\opt{reqno}] Place equation numbers on the right.
+
+\item[\opt{fleqn}] Position equations at a fixed indent from the left
+margin rather than centered in the text column.%
+\index{displayed equations!centering}
+
+\end{description}
+
+Three options have been added to control the space to the left of
+\env{aligned} and \env{gathered} environments. Prior to the 2017 release
+a thin space was added to the left but not the right of these constructs.
+This appears to have been an accidental feature of the implementation and
+was typically corrected by prefixing the environments with \altcnbang.
+
+The new default behavior is aimed to ensure that the environments do
+not have a thin space added in most cases, and that existing documents
+using |\!\begin{aligned}| continue to work as before.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[\opt{alignedleftspaceyes}] Always add \cn{\,} to the left of \env{aligned} and \env{gathered}.
+\item[\opt{alignedleftspaceno}] Never add \cn{\,} to the left of \env{aligned} and \env{gathered}.
+\item[\opt{alignedleftspaceyesifneg}] Only add \cn{\,} if the environment is prefixed by negative space. (New default behavior.)
+\end{description}
+
+\index{options!amsmath@\texttt{amsmath} package options|)}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\chapter{Displayed equations}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+The \nipkg{amsmath} package provides a number of additional displayed
+equation structures\index{displayed equations}%
+\index{equations|see{displayed equations}} beyond the ones
+provided in basic \latex/. The augmented set includes:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ equation equation* align align*
+ gather gather* alignat alignat*
+ multline multline* flalign flalign*
+ split
+\end{verbatim}
+(Although the standard \env{eqnarray} environment remains available,
+it is better to use \env{align} or \env{equation}+\env{split} instead.
+Within \env{eqnarray}, spacing\index{horizontal spacing} around signs
+of relation is not the preferred mathematical spacing, and is
+inconsistent with that spacing as it appears in other environments.
+Long lines in this environment may result in misplaced or overprinted
+equation numbers. This environment also does not support the use of
+\cn{qed} or \cn{qedhere} as provided by theorem packages.)
+
+Except for \env{split}, each environment has both starred and unstarred
+forms, where the unstarred forms have automatic numbering using
+\latex/'s \env{equation} counter. You can suppress the number on any
+particular line by putting \cn{notag} before the end of that line;
+\cn{notag} should not be used outside a display environment as it will
+mess up the numbering. You can also
+override\index{equationn at equation numbers!overriding} a number with a tag
+of your own using \cn{tag}|{|\<label>|}|, where \<label> means arbitrary
+text such as |$*$| or |ii| used to \qq{number} the equation.
+A tag can reference a different tagged display by use of
+|\tag{\ref{|\<label>|}|\<modifier>|}| where \<modifier> is optional.
+If you are using \pkg{hyperref}, use \cn{ref*};
+use of the starred form of \cn{ref} prevents a reference to a modified
+tag containing a nested link from linking to the original display.
+
+There is also a
+\cn{tag*} command that causes the text you supply to be typeset
+literally, without adding parentheses around it. \cn{tag} and \cn{tag*}
+can also be used within the unnumbered versions of all the \nipkg{amsmath}
+alignment structures. Some examples of the use of \cn{tag} may be found
+in the sample files \fn{testmath.tex} and \fn{subeqn.tex} provided with
+the \nipkg{amsmath} package.
+
+The \env{split} environment is a special subordinate form that is used
+only \emph{inside} one of the others. It cannot be used inside
+\env{multline}, however. \env{split} supports only one alignment (|&|)
+column; if more are needed, \env{aligned} or \env{alignedat} should be
+used. The width of a \env{split} structure is the full line width.
+
+In the structures that do alignment (\env{split}, \env{align} and
+variants), relation symbols have an |&| before them but not
+after\mdash unlike \env{eqnarray}. Putting the |&| after the
+relation symbol will interfere with the normal spacing; it has to go
+before.
+
+In all multiline environments, lines are divided by \cn{\\}. The \cn{\\}
+should \emph{not} be used to end the last line. Using it there will
+result in unwanted extra vertical space following the display.
+
+In \emph{all} math environments (inline or display), blank lines
+(equivalent to \cn{par}) are not permitted, and will result in an error.
+
+\begin{table}[p]
+\caption[]{Comparison of displayed equation environments (vertical lines
+indicating nominal margins)}\label{displays}
+\renewcommand{\theequation}{\arabic{equation}}
+\begin{eqxample}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation*}
+a=b
+\end{equation*}
+\end{verbatim}
+\producing
+\begin{equation*}
+a=b
+\end{equation*}
+\end{eqxample}
+
+\begin{eqxample}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation}
+a=b
+\end{equation}
+\end{verbatim}
+\producing
+\begin{equation}
+a=b
+\end{equation}
+\end{eqxample}
+
+\begin{eqxample}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation}\label{xx}
+\begin{split}
+a& =b+c-d\\
+ & \quad +e-f\\
+ & =g+h\\
+ & =i
+\end{split}
+\end{equation}
+\end{verbatim}
+\producing
+\begin{equation}\label{xx}
+\begin{split}
+a& =b+c-d\\
+ & \quad +e-f\\
+ & =g+h\\
+ & =i
+\end{split}
+\end{equation}
+\end{eqxample}
+
+\begin{eqxample}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{multline}
+a+b+c+d+e+f\\
++i+j+k+l+m+n
+\end{multline}
+\end{verbatim}
+\producing
+\begin{multline}
+a+b+c+d+e+f\\
++i+j+k+l+m+n
+\end{multline}
+\end{eqxample}
+
+\begin{eqxample}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{gather}
+a_1=b_1+c_1\\
+a_2=b_2+c_2-d_2+e_2
+\end{gather}
+\end{verbatim}
+\producing
+\begin{gather}
+a_1=b_1+c_1\\
+a_2=b_2+c_2-d_2+e_2
+\end{gather}
+\end{eqxample}
+
+\begin{eqxample}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align}
+a_1& =b_1+c_1\\
+a_2& =b_2+c_2-d_2+e_2
+\end{align}
+\end{verbatim}
+\producing
+\begin{align}
+a_1& =b_1+c_1\\
+a_2& =b_2+c_2-d_2+e_2
+\end{align}
+\end{eqxample}
+
+\begin{eqxample}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align}
+a_{11}& =b_{11}&
+ a_{12}& =b_{12}\\
+a_{21}& =b_{21}&
+ a_{22}& =b_{22}+c_{22}
+\end{align}
+\end{verbatim}
+\producing
+\begin{align}
+a_{11}& =b_{11}&
+ a_{12}& =b_{12}\\
+a_{21}& =b_{21}&
+ a_{22}& =b_{22}+c_{22}
+\end{align}
+\end{eqxample}
+
+\begin{eqxample}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{flalign*}
+a_{11} + b_{11}& = c_{11}&
+ a_{12}& =b_{12}\\
+b_{21}& = c_{21}&
+ a_{22}& =b_{22}+c_{22}
+\end{flalign*}
+\end{verbatim}
+\producing
+\begin{flalign*}
+a_{11} + b_{11}& = c_{11}&
+ a_{12}& =b_{12}\\
+b_{21}& = c_{21}&
+ a_{22}& =b_{22}+c_{22}
+\end{flalign*}
+\end{eqxample}
+\end{table}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+\enlargethispage{1\baselineskip}
+
+\section{Single equations}
+
+The \env{equation} environment is for a single equation with an
+automatically generated number. The \env{equation*} environment is the
+same except for omitting the number.%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\footnote{Basic \latex/ doesn't provide an \env{equation*} environment,
+but rather a functionally equivalent environment named
+\env{displaymath}.}
+The wrapper \verb+\[ ... \]+ is equivalent to \env{equation*}.%
+\index{[@\verb+\[ ... \]+}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Split equations without alignment}
+
+The \env{multline} environment is a variation of the \env{equation}
+environment used for equations that don't fit on a single line. The
+first line of a \env{multline} will be at the left margin and the last
+line at the right margin, except for an indention on both sides in the
+amount of \cn{multlinegap}. Any additional lines in between will be
+centered independently within the display width (unless the \opt{fleqn}
+option is in effect).%
+\index{options!behavior of particular options}
+
+Like \env{equation}, \env{multline} has only a single equation number
+(thus, none of the individual lines should be marked with \cn{notag}).
+The equation number is placed on the last line (\opt{reqno} option) or
+first line (\opt{leqno} option); vertical centering as for \env{split}
+is not supported by \env{multline}.%
+\index{options!behavior of particular options}
+
+It's possible to force one of the middle lines to the left or right with
+commands \cn{shoveleft}, \cn{shoveright}. These commands take the entire
+line as an argument, up to but not including the final \cn{\\}; for
+example
+\begin{multline}
+\framebox[.65\columnwidth]{A}\\
+\framebox[.5\columnwidth]{B}\\
+\shoveright{\framebox[.55\columnwidth]{C}}\\
+\framebox[.65\columnwidth]{D}
+\end{multline}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{multline}
+\framebox[.65\columnwidth]{A}\\
+\framebox[.5\columnwidth]{B}\\
+\shoveright{\framebox[.55\columnwidth]{C}}\\
+\framebox[.65\columnwidth]{D}
+\end{multline}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The value of \cn{multlinegap} can be changed with the usual \latex/
+commands \cn{setlength} or \cn{addtolength}.
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Split equations with alignment}
+
+Like \env{multline}, the \env{split} environment is for \emph{single}
+equations that are too long to fit on one line and hence must be split
+into multiple lines. Unlike \env{multline}, however, the \env{split}
+environment provides for alignment among the split lines, using |&| to
+mark alignment points. Unlike the other \nipkg{amsmath} equation
+structures, the \env{split} environment provides no numbering, because
+it is intended to be used \emph{only inside some other displayed
+ equation structure}, usually an \env{equation}, \env{align}, or
+\env{gather} environment, which provides the numbering. For example:
+\begin{equation}\label{e:barwq}\begin{split}
+H_c&=\frac{1}{2n} \sum^n_{l=0}(-1)^{l}(n-{l})^{p-2}
+ \sum_{l _1+\dots+ l _p=l}\prod^p_{i=1} \binom{n_i}{l _i}\\
+&\quad\cdot[(n-l )-(n_i-l _i)]^{n_i-l _i}\cdot
+ \Bigl[(n-l )^2-\sum^p_{j=1}(n_i-l _i)^2\Bigr].
+ \kern-2em % adjust equation body to the right [mjd,13-Nov-1994]
+\end{split}\end{equation}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation}\label{e:barwq}\begin{split}
+H_c&=\frac{1}{2n} \sum^n_{l=0}(-1)^{l}(n-{l})^{p-2}
+ \sum_{l _1+\dots+ l _p=l}\prod^p_{i=1} \binom{n_i}{l _i}\\
+&\quad\cdot[(n-l )-(n_i-l _i)]^{n_i-l _i}\cdot
+ \Bigl[(n-l )^2-\sum^p_{j=1}(n_i-l _i)^2\Bigr].
+\end{split}\end{equation}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \env{split} structure should constitute the entire body of the
+enclosing structure, apart from commands like \cn{label} that produce no
+visible material.
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Equation groups without alignment}
+
+The \env{gather} environment is used for a group of consecutive
+equations when there is no alignment desired among them; each one is
+centered separately within the text width (see Table~\ref{displays}).
+Equations inside \env{gather} are separated by a \cn{\\} command.
+Any equation in a \env{gather} may consist of a \verb'\begin{split}'
+ \dots\ \verb'\end{split}' structure\mdash for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{gather}
+ first equation\\
+ \begin{split}
+ second & equation\\
+ & on two lines
+ \end{split}
+ \\
+ third equation
+\end{gather}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Equation groups with mutual alignment}
+
+The \env{align} environment is used for two or more equations when
+vertical alignment is desired; usually binary relations such as equal
+signs are aligned (see Table~\ref{displays}).
+
+To have several equation columns side-by-side, use extra ampersands
+to separate the columns:
+\begin{align}
+x&=y & X&=Y & a&=b+c\\
+x'&=y' & X'&=Y' & a'&=b\\
+x+x'&=y+y' & X+X'&=Y+Y' & a'b&=c'b
+\end{align}
+%
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align}
+x&=y & X&=Y & a&=b+c\\
+x'&=y' & X'&=Y' & a'&=b\\
+x+x'&=y+y' & X+X'&=Y+Y' & a'b&=c'b
+\end{align}
+\end{verbatim}
+Line-by-line annotations on an equation can be done by judicious
+application of \cn{text} inside an \env{align} environment:
+\begin{align}
+x& = y_1-y_2+y_3-y_5+y_8-\dots
+ && \text{by \eqref{eq:C}}\\
+ & = y'\circ y^* && \text{by \eqref{eq:D}}\\
+ & = y(0) y' && \text {by Axiom 1.}
+\end{align}
+%
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align}
+x& = y_1-y_2+y_3-y_5+y_8-\dots
+ && \text{by \eqref{eq:C}}\\
+ & = y'\circ y^* && \text{by \eqref{eq:D}}\\
+ & = y(0) y' && \text {by Axiom 1.}
+\end{align}
+\end{verbatim}
+A variant environment \env{alignat} allows the horizontal space between
+equations to be explicitly specified. This environment takes one argument,
+the number of \qq{equation columns} (the number of pairs of right-left
+aligned columns; the argument is the number of pairs): count the maximum
+number of \verb'&'s in any row, add~1 and divide by~2.
+\begin{alignat}{2}
+x& = y_1-y_2+y_3-y_5+y_8-\dots
+ &\quad& \text{by \eqref{eq:C}}\\
+ & = y'\circ y^* && \text{by \eqref{eq:D}}\\
+ & = y(0) y' && \text {by Axiom 1.}
+\end{alignat}
+%
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{alignat}{2}
+x& = y_1-y_2+y_3-y_5+y_8-\dots
+ &\quad& \text{by \eqref{eq:C}}\\
+ & = y'\circ y^* && \text{by \eqref{eq:D}}\\
+ & = y(0) y' && \text {by Axiom 1.}
+\end{alignat}
+\end{verbatim}
+The environment \env{flalign} (``full length alignment'') stretches the
+space between the equation columns to the maximum possible width, leaving
+only enough space at the margin for the equation number, if present.
+\begin{flalign}
+x&=y & X&=Y\\
+x'&=y' & X'&=Y'\\
+x+x'&=y+y' & X+X'&=Y+Y'
+\end{flalign}
+%
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{flalign}
+x&=y & X&=Y\\
+x'&=y' & X'&=Y'\\
+x+x'&=y+y' & X+X'&=Y+Y'
+\end{flalign}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+\begin{flalign*}
+x&=y & X&=Y\\
+x'&=y' & X'&=Y'\\
+x+x'&=y+y' & X+X'&=Y+Y'
+\end{flalign*}
+%
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{flalign*}
+x&=y & X&=Y\\
+x'&=y' & X'&=Y'\\
+x+x'&=y+y' & X+X'&=Y+Y'
+\end{flalign*}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Alignment building blocks}
+
+Like \env{equation}, the multi-equation environments \env{gather},
+\env{align}, and \env{alignat} are designed to produce a structure
+whose width is the full line width. This means, for example, that one
+cannot readily add parentheses around the entire structure. But
+variants\index{ed env@\texttt{-ed} environments|(}
+\env{gathered}, \env{aligned}, and \env{alignedat} are provided whose
+total width is the actual width of the contents; thus they can be used
+as a component in a containing expression. E.g.,
+\begin{equation*}
+\left.\begin{aligned}
+ B'&=-\partial\times E,\\
+ E'&=\partial\times B - 4\pi j,
+\end{aligned}
+\right\}
+\qquad \text{Maxwell's equations}
+\end{equation*}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation*}
+\left.\begin{aligned}
+ B'&=-\partial\times E,\\
+ E'&=\partial\times B - 4\pi j,
+\end{aligned}
+\right\}
+\qquad \text{Maxwell's equations}
+\end{equation*}
+\end{verbatim}
+Like the \env{array} environment, these \texttt{-ed} variants also take
+an optional\index{options!positioning of \texttt{-ed} environments}
+|[t]|\index{t option@\texttt{t} (top) option},
+|[b]|\index{b option@\texttt{b} (bottom) option} or the default
+|[c]|\index{c option@\texttt{c} (center) option}
+argument to specify vertical
+positioning. For maximum interoperability, do not insert a
+space\index{options!space before \texttt{[}}
+or line break\index{line break} before the option. See
+also the note on page~\pageref{breaknote} regarding page breaking
+within the \texttt{-ed} environments.
+
+\qq{Cases} constructions like the following are common in
+mathematics:
+\begin{equation}\label{eq:C}
+P_{r-j}=
+ \begin{cases}
+ 0& \text{if $r-j$ is odd},\\
+ r!\,(-1)^{(r-j)/2}& \text{if $r-j$ is even}.
+ \end{cases}
+\end{equation}
+and in the \nipkg{amsmath} package there is a \env{cases} environment to
+make them easy to write:
+\begin{verbatim}
+P_{r-j}=\begin{cases}
+ 0& \text{if $r-j$ is odd},\\
+ r!\,(-1)^{(r-j)/2}& \text{if $r-j$ is even}.
+ \end{cases}
+\end{verbatim}
+Notice the use of \cn{text} (cf.~\secref{text}) and the nested math
+formulas. \env{cases} is set in \cn{textstyle}. If \cn{displaystyle}
+is wanted, it must be requested explicitly; \pkg{mathtools} provides
+a \env{dcases} environment for this purpose.
+
+The |-ed|\index{ed env@\texttt{-ed} environments|)} and \env{cases}
+environments must appear within an enclosing math environment, which can
+be either in text, between |$...$|, or in any of the display environments.
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Adjusting tag placement}
+
+Placing equation numbers can be a rather complex problem in multiline
+displays. The environments of the \nipkg{amsmath} package try hard to
+avoid overprinting an equation number on the equation contents, if
+necessary moving the number down or up to a separate line. Difficulties
+in accurately calculating the profile of an equation can occasionally
+result in number movement that doesn't look right.
+A \cn{raisetag} command is provided to adjust the vertical position of the
+current equation number, if it has been shifted away from its normal
+position. To move a particular number up by six points, write
+|\raisetag{6pt}|. (At the end of a display, this also shifts up the
+text following the display.)
+This kind of adjustment is fine tuning like line
+breaks and page breaks, and should therefore be left undone until your
+document is nearly finalized, or you may end up redoing the fine tuning
+several times to keep up with changing document contents.
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Vertical spacing and page breaks in multiline displays}
+
+You can use the \cn{\\}|[|\<dimension>|]|%
+\index{options!extra vertical space after \cn{\\}}
+command to get extra vertical
+space between lines in all the \nipkg{amsmath} displayed equation
+environments, as is usual in \latex/. Do not type a space between the%
+\index{options!space before \texttt{[}}
+\cn{\\} and the following |[|; \emph{only} for display environments
+defined by \nipkg{amsmath} the space is interpreted to mean that the
+bracketed material is part of the document content.
+
+When the \nipkg{amsmath} package is
+in use \ii{page breaks} between equation lines are normally disallowed;
+the philosophy is that page breaks in such material should receive
+individual attention from the author. To get an individual page break
+inside a particular displayed equation, a \cn{displaybreak} command is
+provided. \cn{displaybreak} is best placed immediately before the
+\cn{\\} where it is to take effect. Like \latex/'s \cn{pagebreak},
+\cn{displaybreak} takes an optional argument%
+\index{options!behavior of particular options} between 0 and 4 denoting
+the desirability of the pagebreak. |\displaybreak[0]| means \qq{it is
+ permissible to break here} without encouraging a break;
+\cn{displaybreak} with no optional argument is the same as
+|\displaybreak[4]| and forces a break.
+
+If you prefer a strategy of letting page breaks fall where they may,
+even in the middle of a multiline equation, then you might put
+\cn{allowdisplaybreaks}\texttt{[1]} in the preamble of your document. An
+optional argument\index{options!behavior of particular options}
+1\ndash 4 can be used for finer control: |[1]| means
+allow page breaks, but avoid them as much as possible; values of 2,3,4
+mean increasing permissiveness. When display breaks are enabled with
+\cn{allowdisplaybreaks}, the \cn{\\*} command can be used to prohibit a
+pagebreak after a given line, as usual.
+
+\begin{bfseries}
+Note:\label{breaknote} Certain equation environments wrap their contents
+in an unbreakable box, with the consequence that neither \cn{displaybreak}
+nor \cn{allowdisplaybreaks} will have any effect on them. These include
+\env{split}, \env{aligned}, \env{gathered}, and \env{alignedat}.
+\end{bfseries}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Interrupting a display}
+
+The command \cn{intertext} is used for a short interjection of one or
+two lines of text\index{text fragments inside math} in the middle of a
+multiple-line display structure (see also the \cn{text} command in
+\secref{text}). Its salient feature is preservation of the alignment,
+which would not happen if you simply ended the display and then started
+it up again afterwards. \cn{intertext} may only appear right after a
+\cn{\\} or \cn{\\*} command. Notice the position of the word \qq{and} in
+this example.
+\begin{align}
+ A_1&=N_0(\lambda;\Omega')-\phi(\lambda;\Omega'),\\
+ A_2&=\phi(\lambda;\Omega')-\phi(\lambda;\Omega),\\
+\intertext{and}
+ A_3&=\mathcal{N}(\lambda;\omega).
+\end{align}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align}
+ A_1&=N_0(\lambda;\Omega')-\phi(\lambda;\Omega'),\\
+ A_2&=\phi(\lambda;\Omega')-\phi(\lambda;\Omega),\\
+\intertext{and}
+ A_3&=\mathcal{N}(\lambda;\omega).
+\end{align}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \pkg{mathtools} package provides a command \cn{shortintertext} that
+is intended for use when the interjected text is only a few words; it uses
+less vertical space than \cn{intertext}. This
+is most effective when equation numbers are on the right.%
+\index{equationn at equation numbers!left or right placement}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Equation numbering}
+
+\subsection{Numbering hierarchy}
+In \latex/ if you wanted to have equations numbered within
+sections\mdash that is, have
+equation numbers (1.1), (1.2), \dots, (2.1), (2.2),
+\dots, in sections 1, 2, and so forth\mdash you could redefine
+\cn{theequation} as suggested in the \latex/ manual \cite[\S6.3, \S
+C.8.4]{lamport}:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand{\theequation}{\thesection.\arabic{equation}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This works pretty well, except that the equation counter won't be reset
+to zero at the beginning of a new section or chapter, unless you do it
+yourself using \cn{setcounter}. To make this a little more convenient,
+the \nipkg{amsmath} package provides a
+command\index{equationn at equation numbers!hierarchy} \cn{numberwithin}.
+To have equation numbering tied to section numbering, with automatic
+reset of the equation counter, write
+\begin{verbatim}
+\numberwithin{equation}{section}
+\end{verbatim}
+As its name implies, the \cn{numberwithin} command can be applied to
+any counter, not just the \texttt{equation} counter.
+
+\subsection{Cross references to equation numbers}
+
+To make cross-references to equations easier, an \cn{eqref}
+command\index{equationn at equation numbers!cross-references} is provided. This
+automatically supplies the parentheses around the equation number. I.e.,
+if \verb'\ref{abc}' produces 3.2 then \verb'\eqref{abc}' produces
+(3.2). The parentheses around an \cn{eqref} equation number will be
+set in upright type regardless of type style of the context.
+
+\subsection{Subordinate numbering sequences}
+
+The \nipkg{amsmath} package provides also a wrapper environment,
+\env{subequations}\index{equationn at equation numbers!subordinate numbering}, to make it
+easy to number equations in a particular \cn{align} or similar group with
+a subordinate numbering scheme. For example
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{subequations}
+...
+\end{subequations}
+\end{verbatim}
+causes all numbered equations within that part of the document to be
+numbered (4.9a) (4.9b) (4.9c) \dots, if the preceding numbered
+equation was (4.8). A \cn{label} command immediately after
+\verb/\begin{subequations}/ will produce a \cn{ref} of the parent
+number 4.9, not 4.9a. The counters used by the subequations
+environment are \verb/parentequation/ and \verb/equation/ and
+\cn{addtocounter}, \cn{setcounter}, \cn{value}, etc., can be applied
+as usual to those counter names. To get anything other than lowercase
+letters for the subordinate numbers, use standard \latex/ methods for
+changing numbering style \cite[\S6.3, \S C.8.4]{lamport}. For example,
+redefining \cn{theequation} as follows will produce roman numerals.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{subequations}
+\renewcommand{\theequation}{\theparentequation \roman{equation}}
+...
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Numbering style}
+
+The default equation number is set in \cn{normalfont}. This means that
+in bold section headings, bold is suppressed; a workaround for this is
+to use \verb+(\ref{+\ldots\verb+})+ rather than \verb+\eqref{+\ldots\verb+}+.
+
+If smaller type is specified for a numbered display, the size of the
+equation number will also be small. The default size can be ensured
+throughout a document by applying this patch in the preamble:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\maketag@@@}[1]{\hbox{\m at th\normalsize\normalfont#1}}%
+\makeatother
+\end{verbatim}
+(This modification may be included in a future version of
+\nipkg{amsmath}.)
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\chapter{Miscellaneous mathematical features}
+
+\section{Matrices}\label{ss:matrix}
+
+The \nipkg{amsmath} package provides some environments for
+matrices\index{matrices} beyond the basic \env{array} environment of
+\latex/. The \env{pmatrix}, \env{bmatrix}, \env{Bmatrix}, \env{vmatrix}
+and \env{Vmatrix} have (respectively) $(\,)$, $[\,]$, $\lbrace\,\rbrace$,
+$\lvert\,\rvert$, and $\lVert\,\rVert$ delimiters\index{delimiters}
+built in. For naming consistency there is a
+\env{matrix} environment sans delimiters. This is not entirely redundant
+with the \env{array} environment; the matrix environments all use more
+economical horizontal spacing than the rather prodigal spacing of the
+\env{array} environment. Also, unlike the \env{array} environment, you
+don't have to give column specifications for any of the matrix
+environments; by default you can have up to 10 centered columns.%
+\footnote{%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+More precisely: The maximum number of columns in a matrix is determined
+by the counter |MaxMatrixCols| (normal value = 10), which you can change
+if necessary using \latex/'s \cn{setcounter} or \cn{addtocounter}
+commands.%
+}\space%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+(If you need left or right alignment in a column or other special
+formats you may use \env{array}, or the \pkg{mathtools}
+package which provides \verb+*+ variants%
+\index{matrix@\indexenvironmentfont{matrix} environment!\verb+*+ variants}
+of these environments with
+an optional argument to specify left or right alignment.)
+
+To produce a small matrix suitable for use in text, there is a
+\env{smallmatrix} environment (e.g.,
+\begin{math}
+\bigl( \begin{smallmatrix}
+ a&b\\ c&d
+\end{smallmatrix} \bigr)
+\end{math})
+that comes closer to fitting within a single text line than a normal
+matrix. Delimiters\index{delimiters} must be provided. (The
+\pkg{mathtools} package provides |p|,|b|,|B|,|v|,|V| versions of
+\env{smallmatrix},%
+\index{smallmatrix@\indexenvironmentfont{smallmatrix} environment!variant delimiters}
+as well as |*| variants%
+\index{smallmatrix@\indexenvironmentfont{smallmatrix} environment!\verb+*+ variants}
+as described above.)
+The above example was produced by
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bigl( \begin{smallmatrix}
+ a&b\\ c&d
+\end{smallmatrix} \bigr)
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\cn{hdotsfor}|{|\<number>|}| produces a row of dots in a
+matrix\index{matrices!ellipsis dots}\index{ellipsis dots!in
+matrices}\index{dots|see{ellipsis dots}} spanning the given number of
+columns. For example,
+\begin{center}
+\begin{minipage}{.3\columnwidth}
+\noindent$\begin{matrix} a&b&c&d\\
+e&\hdotsfor{3} \end{matrix}$
+\end{minipage}%
+\qquad
+\begin{minipage}{.45\columnwidth}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{matrix} a&b&c&d\\
+e&\hdotsfor{3} \end{matrix}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{minipage}%
+\end{center}
+
+The spacing of the dots can be varied through use of a square-bracket
+option,\index{options!behavior of particular options}
+for example, |\hdotsfor[1.5]{3}|. The number in square brackets
+will be used as a multiplier (i.e., the normal value is 1.0).
+\begin{equation}\label{eq:D}
+\begin{pmatrix} D_1t&-a_{12}t_2&\dots&-a_{1n}t_n\\
+-a_{21}t_1&D_2t&\dots&-a_{2n}t_n\\
+\hdotsfor[2]{4}\\
+-a_{n1}t_1&-a_{n2}t_2&\dots&D_nt\end{pmatrix},
+\end{equation}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{pmatrix} D_1t&-a_{12}t_2&\dots&-a_{1n}t_n\\
+-a_{21}t_1&D_2t&\dots&-a_{2n}t_n\\
+\hdotsfor[2]{4}\\
+-a_{n1}t_1&-a_{n2}t_2&\dots&D_nt\end{pmatrix}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Math spacing commands}
+
+The \nipkg{amsmath} package slightly extends the set of math
+spacing\index{horizontal spacing} commands, as shown below.
+Both the spelled-out and abbreviated forms of these commands are robust,
+and they can also be used outside of math.
+\begin{ctab}{lll|lll}
+Abbrev.& Spelled out& Example & Abbrev.& Spelled out& Example\\
+\hline
+\vstrut{2.5ex}
+& no space& \spx{}& & no space & \spx{}\\
+\cn{\,}& \cn{thinspace}& \spx{\,}&
+ \altcnbang& \cn{negthinspace}& \spx{\!}\\
+\cn{\:}& \cn{medspace}& \spx{\:}&
+ & \cn{negmedspace}& \spx{\negmedspace}\\
+\cn{\;}& \cn{thickspace}& \spx{\;}&
+ & \cn{negthickspace}& \spx{\negthickspace}\\
+& \cn{quad}& \spx{\quad}\\
+& \cn{qquad}& \spx{\qquad}
+\end{ctab}
+For the greatest possible control over math spacing, use \cn{mspace}
+and `math units'. One math unit, or |mu|, is equal to 1/18 em. Thus to
+get a negative \cn{quad} you could write |\mspace{-18.0mu}|.
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Dots}
+
+For preferred placement of ellipsis dots (raised or on-line) in various
+contexts there is no general consensus. It may therefore be considered a
+matter of taste. By using the semantically oriented commands
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \cn{dotsc} for \qq{dots with commas}
+\item \cn{dotsb} for \qq{dots with binary operators/relations}
+\item \cn{dotsm} for \qq{multiplication dots}
+\item \cn{dotsi} for \qq{dots with integrals}
+\item \cn{dotso} for \qq{other dots} (none of the above)
+\end{itemize}
+instead of \cn{ldots} and \cn{cdots}, you make it possible for your
+document to be adapted to different conventions on the fly, in case (for
+example) you have to submit it to a publisher who insists on following
+house tradition in this respect. The default treatment for the various
+kinds follows American Mathematical Society conventions:
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}l@{}}
+\begin{minipage}[t]{.54\textwidth}
+\begin{verbatim}
+Then we have the series $A_1, A_2,
+\dotsc$, the regional sum $A_1
++A_2 +\dotsb $, the orthogonal
+product $A_1 A_2 \dotsm $, and
+the infinite integral
+\[\int_{A_1}\int_{A_2}\dotsi\].
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{minipage}
+&
+\begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth}
+\noindent
+Then we have the series $A_1,A_2,\dotsc$,
+the regional sum $A_1+A_2+\dotsb$,
+the orthogonal product $A_1A_2\dotsm$,
+and the infinite integral
+\[\int_{A_1}\int_{A_2}\dotsi.\]
+\end{minipage}
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+For most situations, the undifferentiated \cn{dots} can be used, and
+\nipkg{amsmath} will output the most suitable form based on the
+immediate context; if an inappropriate form results, it can be corrected
+after examining the output.
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Nonbreaking dashes}
+
+A command \cn{nobreakdash} is provided to suppress the possibility of a
+line break\index{line break|(} after the following hyphen or dash. For
+example, if you write `pages 1\ndash 9' as |pages 1\nobreakdash--9|
+then a line break will never occur between the dash and the 9. You can
+also use \cn{nobreakdash} to prevent undesirable hyphenations in
+combinations like |$p$-adic|. For frequent use, it's advisable to make
+abbreviations, e.g.,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\p}{$p$\nobreakdash}% for "\p-adic"
+\newcommand{\Ndash}{\nobreakdash--}% for "pages 1\Ndash 9"
+% For "\n dimensional" ("n-dimensional"):
+\newcommand{\n}[1]{$n$\nobreakdash-\hspace{0pt}}
+\end{verbatim}
+The last example shows how to prohibit a line break\index{line break|)}
+after the hyphen but allow normal hyphenation in the following
+word. (It suffices to add a zero-width space after the hyphen.)
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Accents in math}
+
+In ordinary \LaTeX{} the placement of the second accent in doubled math
+accents is often poor. With the \nipkg{amsmath} package you
+will get improved placement of the second accent:
+$\hat{\hat{A}}$ (\cn{hat}|{\hat{A}}|).
+
+The commands \cn{dddot} and \cn{ddddot} are available to produce triple
+and quadruple dot accents in addition to the \cn{dot} and \cn{ddot}
+accents already available in \latex/.
+
+To get a superscripted hat or tilde character, load the \pkg{amsxtra}
+package and use \cn{sphat} or \cn{sptilde}. Usage is \verb'A\sphat'
+(note the absence of the \verb'^' character).
+
+
+To place an arbitrary symbol in math accent position, or to get under
+accents, see the \pkg{accents} package by Javier Bezos. (\nipkg{amsmath}
+must be loaded before \pkg{accents}.)
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Roots}
+
+In ordinary \latex/ the placement of root indices is sometimes not so
+good: $\sqrt[\beta]{k}$ (|\sqrt||[\beta]{k}|). In the
+\nipkg{amsmath} package \cn{leftroot} and \cn{uproot} allow you to adjust
+the position of the root:%
+\index{options!adjust positioning}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \sqrt[\leftroot{-2}\uproot{2}\beta]{k}
+\end{verbatim}
+will move the beta up and to the right:
+$\sqrt[\leftroot{-2}\uproot{2}\beta]{k}$. The negative argument used
+with \cn{leftroot} moves the $\beta$ to the right. The units are a small
+amount that is a useful size for such adjustments.
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Boxed formulas}
+
+The command \cn{boxed} puts a box around its
+argument, like \cn{fbox} except that the contents are in math mode:
+\begin{equation}
+\boxed{\eta \leq C(\delta(\eta) +\Lambda_M(0,\delta))}
+\end{equation}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \boxed{\eta \leq C(\delta(\eta) +\Lambda_M(0,\delta))}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Over and under arrows}
+
+Basic \latex/ provides \cn{overrightarrow} and \cn{overleftarrow}
+commands. Some additional over and under arrow commands are provided
+by the \nipkg{amsmath} package to extend the set:
+
+\begin{tabbing}
+\qquad\=\ncn{overleftrightarrow}\qquad\=\kill
+\> \cn{overleftarrow} \> \cn{underleftarrow} \+\\
+ \cn{overrightarrow} \> \cn{underrightarrow} \\
+ \cn{overleftrightarrow}\> \cn{underleftrightarrow}
+\end{tabbing}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Extensible arrows}
+
+\cn{xleftarrow} and \cn{xrightarrow} produce
+arrows\index{arrows!extensible} that extend automatically to accommodate
+unusually wide subscripts or superscripts. These commands take one
+optional argument\index{options!behavior of particular options}
+(the subscript) and one mandatory argument (the
+superscript, possibly empty):
+\begin{equation}
+A\xleftarrow{n+\mu-1}B \xrightarrow[T]{n\pm i-1}C
+\end{equation}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \xleftarrow{n+\mu-1}\quad \xrightarrow[T]{n\pm i-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Affixing symbols to other symbols}
+
+\latex/ provides \cn{stackrel} for placing a
+superscript\index{subscripts and superscripts} above a binary relation.
+In the \nipkg{amsmath} package there are somewhat more general commands,
+\cn{overset} and \cn{underset}, that can be used to place one symbol
+above or below another symbol, whether it's a relation or something
+else. The input |\overset{*}{X}| will place a superscript-size $*$ above
+the $X$: $\overset{*}{X}$; \cn{underset} is the analog for adding a
+symbol underneath.
+
+See also the description of \cn{sideset} in \secref{sideset}.
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Fractions and related constructions}
+
+\subsection{The \cn{frac}, \cn{dfrac}, and \cn{tfrac} commands}
+
+The \cn{frac} command, which is in the basic command set of
+\latex/,\index{fractions|(} takes two arguments\mdash numerator and
+denominator\mdash and typesets them in normal fraction form. The
+\nipkg{amsmath} package provides also \cn{dfrac} and \cn{tfrac} as
+convenient abbreviations for |{\displaystyle\frac| |...| |}|
+and\indexcs{textstyle}\relax
+\indexcs{displaystyle} |{\textstyle\frac| |...| |}|.
+\begin{equation}
+\frac{1}{k}\log_2 c(f)\quad\tfrac{1}{k}\log_2 c(f)\quad
+\sqrt{\frac{1}{k}\log_2 c(f)}\quad\sqrt{\dfrac{1}{k}\log_2 c(f)}
+\end{equation}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation}
+\frac{1}{k}\log_2 c(f)\;\tfrac{1}{k}\log_2 c(f)\;
+\sqrt{\frac{1}{k}\log_2 c(f)}\;\sqrt{\dfrac{1}{k}\log_2 c(f)}
+\end{equation}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{The \cn{binom}, \cn{dbinom}, and \cn{tbinom} commands}
+
+For binomial expressions\index{binomials} such as $\binom{n}{k}$
+\nipkg{amsmath} has \cn{binom}, \cn{dbinom} and \cn{tbinom}:
+\begin{equation}
+2^k-\binom{k}{1}2^{k-1}+\binom{k}{2}2^{k-2}
+\end{equation}
+\begin{verbatim}
+2^k-\binom{k}{1}2^{k-1}+\binom{k}{2}2^{k-2}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{The \cn{genfrac} command}
+
+The capabilities of \cn{frac}, \cn{binom}, and their variants are
+subsumed by a generalized fraction command \cn{genfrac} with six
+arguments. The last two correspond to \cn{frac}'s numerator and
+denominator; the first two are optional delimiters\index{delimiters} (as
+seen in \cn{binom}); the third is a line thickness override (\cn{binom}
+uses this to set the fraction line thickness to 0\mdash i.e., invisible);
+and the fourth argument is a mathstyle override: integer values 0\ndash 3
+select respectively \cn{displaystyle}, \cn{textstyle}, \cn{scriptstyle},
+and \cn{scriptscriptstyle}. If the third argument is left empty, the line
+thickness defaults to `normal'.
+
+\begin{center}\begin{minipage}{.85\columnwidth}
+\raggedright \normalfont\ttfamily \exhyphenpenalty10000
+\newcommand{\ma}[1]{%
+ \string{{\normalfont\itshape#1}\string}\penalty9999 \ignorespaces}
+\string\genfrac \ma{left-delim} \ma{right-delim} \ma{thickness}
+\ma{mathstyle} \ma{numerator} \ma{denominator}
+\end{minipage}\end{center}
+To illustrate, here is how \cn{frac}, \cn{tfrac}, and
+\cn{binom} might be defined.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\frac}[2]{\genfrac{}{}{}{}{#1}{#2}}
+\newcommand{\tfrac}[2]{\genfrac{}{}{}{1}{#1}{#2}}
+\newcommand{\binom}[2]{\genfrac{(}{)}{0pt}{}{#1}{#2}}
+\end{verbatim}
+If you find yourself repeatedly using \cn{genfrac} throughout a document
+for a particular notation, you will do yourself a favor (and your
+publisher) if you define a meaningfully-named abbreviation for that
+notation, along the lines of \cn{frac} and \cn{binom}.
+
+The primitive generalized fraction commands \cs{over}, \cs{overwithdelims},
+\cs{atop}, \cs{atopwithdelims}, \cs{above}, \cs{abovewithdelims} produce
+warning messages if used with the \nipkg{amsmath} package, for reasons
+discussed in \fn{technote.tex}.
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Continued fractions}
+
+The continued fraction\index{continued fractions}
+\begin{equation}
+\cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+
+ \cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+
+ \cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+\cdots
+}}}
+\end{equation}
+can be obtained by typing
+{\samepage
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+
+ \cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+
+ \cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+\dotsb
+}}}
+\end{verbatim}
+}% End of \samepage
+This produces better-looking results than straightforward use of
+\cn{frac}. Left or right placement of any of the numerators is
+accomplished by using \cn{cfrac}|[l]| or \cn{cfrac}|[r]| instead of
+\cn{cfrac}.\index{options!adjust positioning}%
+\index{fractions|)}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Smash options}
+
+The command \cn{smash} is used to typeset a subformula with an
+effective height and depth of zero, which is sometimes
+useful in adjusting the subformula's position with respect to adjacent
+symbols. With the \nipkg{amsmath} package \cn{smash} has optional
+arguments\index{options!behavior of particular options}
+|[t]|\index{t option@\texttt{t} (top) option} and
+|[b]|\index{b option@\texttt{b} (bottom) option} because occasionally it is
+advantageous to be able to \qq{smash} only the top or only the bottom
+of something while retaining the natural depth or height. For example,
+when adjacent radical symbols are unevenly sized or positioned because
+of differences in the height and depth of their contents, \cn{smash}
+can be employed to make them more consistent. Compare
+$\sqrt{x}+\sqrt{y}+\sqrt{z}$ and $\sqrt{x}+\sqrt{\smash[b]{y}}+\sqrt{z}$,
+where the latter was produced by
+\verb"$\sqrt{x}" \verb"+"
+\verb"\sqrt{"\5\verb"\smash[b]{y}}" \verb"+" \verb"\sqrt{z}$".
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Delimiters}
+
+\index{delimiters|(}
+
+\subsection{Delimiter sizes}\label{bigdel}
+
+The automatic delimiter sizing done by \cn{left} and \cn{right} has two
+limitations: First, it is applied mechanically to produce delimiters
+large enough to encompass the largest contained item, and second, the
+range of sizes is not even approximately continuous but has fairly large
+quantum jumps. This means that a math fragment that is infinitesimally
+too large for a given delimiter size will get the next larger size, a
+jump of 3pt or so in normal-sized text. There are two or three
+situations where the delimiter size is commonly adjusted, using a set of
+commands that have `big' in their names.%
+\index{delimiters!fixed size|(}
+\begin{ctab}{l|llllll}
+Delimiter&
+ text& \ncn{left}& \ncn{bigl}& \ncn{Bigl}& \ncn{biggl}& \ncn{Biggl}\\
+size&
+ size& \ncn{right}& \ncn{bigr}& \ncn{Bigr}& \ncn{biggr}& \ncn{Biggr}\\
+\hline
+Result\vstrut{5ex}&
+ $\displaystyle(b)(\frac{c}{d})$&
+ $\displaystyle\left(b\right)\left(\frac{c}{d}\right)$&
+ $\displaystyle\bigl(b\bigr)\bigl(\frac{c}{d}\bigr)$&
+ $\displaystyle\Bigl(b\Bigr)\Bigl(\frac{c}{d}\Bigr)$&
+ $\displaystyle\biggl(b\biggr)\biggl(\frac{c}{d}\biggr)$&
+ $\displaystyle\Biggl(b\Biggr)\Biggl(\frac{c}{d}\Biggr)$
+\end{ctab}
+The first kind of situation is a cumulative operator with limits above
+and below. With \cn{left} and \cn{right} the delimiters usually turn out
+larger than necessary, and using the |Big| or |bigg|
+sizes\index{big@\cn{big}, \cn{Big}, \cn{bigg}, \dots\ delimiters}
+instead gives better results:
+\begin{equation*}
+\left[\sum_i a_i\left\lvert\sum_j x_{ij}\right\rvert^p\right]^{1/p}
+\quad\text{versus}\quad
+\biggl[\sum_i a_i\Bigl\lvert\sum_j x_{ij}\Bigr\rvert^p\biggr]^{1/p}
+\end{equation*}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\biggl[\sum_i a_i\Bigl\lvert\sum_j x_{ij}\Bigr\rvert^p\biggr]^{1/p}
+\end{verbatim}
+The second kind of situation is clustered pairs of delimiters where
+\cn{left} and \cn{right} make them all the same size (because that is
+adequate to cover the encompassed material) but what you really want
+is to make some of the delimiters slightly larger to make the nesting
+easier to see.
+\begin{equation*}
+\left((a_1 b_1) - (a_2 b_2)\right)
+\left((a_2 b_1) + (a_1 b_2)\right)
+\quad\text{versus}\quad
+\bigl((a_1 b_1) - (a_2 b_2)\bigr)
+\bigl((a_2 b_1) + (a_1 b_2)\bigr)
+\end{equation*}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\left((a_1 b_1) - (a_2 b_2)\right)
+\left((a_2 b_1) + (a_1 b_2)\right)
+\quad\text{versus}\quad
+\bigl((a_1 b_1) - (a_2 b_2)\bigr)
+\bigl((a_2 b_1) + (a_1 b_2)\bigr)
+\end{verbatim}
+The third kind of situation is a slightly oversize object in running
+text, such as $\left\lvert\frac{b'}{d'}\right\rvert$ where the
+delimiters produced by \cn{left} and \cn{right} cause too much line
+spreading. In that case \ncn{bigl} and \ncn{bigr}\index{big@\cn{big},
+\cn{Big}, \cn{bigg}, \dots\ delimiters} can be used to produce
+delimiters that are slightly larger than the base size but still able to
+fit within the normal line spacing:
+$\bigl\lvert\frac{b'}{d'}\bigr\rvert$.
+
+In ordinary \latex/ \ncn{big}, \ncn{bigg}, \ncn{Big}, and \ncn{Bigg}
+delimiters aren't scaled properly over the full range of \latex/ font
+sizes. With the \nipkg{amsmath} package they are.%
+\index{delimiters!fixed size|)}
+
+\subsection{Vertical bar notations}
+
+The \nipkg{amsmath} package provides commands \cn{lvert}, \cn{rvert},
+\cn{lVert}, \cn{rVert} (compare \cn{langle}, \cn{rangle}) to address the
+%problem of overloading for the vert bar character \qc{\|}. This
+problem of overloading for the vert bar character \qcvert. This
+character is currently used in \latex/ documents to represent a wide
+variety of mathematical objects: the `divides' relation in a
+number-theory expression like $p\vert q$, or the absolute-value
+operation $\lvert z\rvert$, or the `such that' condition in set
+notation, or the `evaluated at' notation $f_\zeta(t)\bigr\rvert_{t=0}$.
+The multiplicity of uses in itself is not so bad; what is bad, however,
+is that fact that not all of the uses take the same typographical
+treatment, and that the complex discriminatory powers of a knowledgeable
+reader cannot be replicated in computer processing of mathematical
+documents. It is recommended therefore that there should be a one-to-one
+correspondence in any given document between the vert bar character
+%\qc{\|} and a selected mathematical notation, and similarly for the
+\qcvert\ and a selected mathematical notation, and similarly for the
+%double-bar command \ncn{\|}\index{"|@\verb"*+"\"|+}. This immediately
+double-bar command \cnvert. This immediately
+rules out the use of \qc{|}
+%and \ncn{\|}\index{"|@\verb"*+"\"|+} for delimiters, because left and right
+and \cnvert\ for delimiters, because left and right
+delimiters are distinct usages that do not relate in the same way to
+adjacent symbols; recommended practice is therefore to define suitable
+commands in the document preamble for any paired-delimiter use of vert
+bar symbols:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\providecommand{\abs}[1]{\lvert#1\rvert}
+\providecommand{\norm}[1]{\lVert#1\rVert}
+\end{verbatim}
+whereupon the document would contain |\abs{z}| to produce $\lvert
+z\rvert$ and |\norm{v}| to produce $\lVert v\rVert$.
+The \pkg{mathools} provides the command \cn{DeclarePairedDelimiter}
+for defining |\abs|-like macros with scaling delimiters.
+\index{delimiters|)}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\chapter{Operator names}
+
+\section{Defining new operator names}\label{s:opname}
+
+Math functions\index{operator names}\relax \index{function
+names|see{operator names}} such as $\log$, $\sin$, and $\lim$ are
+traditionally typeset in roman type to make them visually more distinct
+from one-letter math variables, which are set in math italic. The more
+common ones have predefined names, \cn{log}, \cn{sin}, \cn{lim}, and so
+forth, but new ones come up all the time in mathematical papers, so the
+\nipkg{amsmath} package provides a general mechanism for defining new
+`operator names'. To define a math function \ncn{xxx} to work like
+\cn{sin}, you write
+\begin{verbatim}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\xxx}{xxx}
+\end{verbatim}
+whereupon ensuing uses of \ncn{xxx} will produce {\upshape xxx} in the
+proper font and automatically add proper spacing\index{horizontal
+spacing!around operator names} on either side when necessary, so that you
+get $A\xxx B$ instead of $A\mathrm{xxx}B$. In the second argument of
+\cn{DeclareMathOperator} (the name text), a pseudo-text mode prevails:
+the hyphen character \qc{\-} will print as a text hyphen rather than a
+minus sign and an asterisk \qc{\*} will print as a raised text asterisk
+instead of a centered math star. (Compare
+\textit{a}-\textit{b}*\textit{c} and $a-b*c$.) But otherwise the name
+text is printed in math mode, so that you can use, e.g., subscripts and
+superscripts there.
+
+%%%%xxx%%%\enlargethispage{1\baselineskip}
+If the new operator should have subscripts and superscripts placed in
+`limits' position above and below as with $\lim$, $\sup$, or $\max$, use
+the \qc{\*} form of the \cn{DeclareMathOperator} command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\DeclareMathOperator*{\Lim}{Lim}
+\end{verbatim}
+See also the discussion of subscript placement in
+Section~\ref{subplace}.
+
+\goodbreak
+
+The following operator names are predefined:
+
+\vspace{-1\baselineskip}
+\begin{ctab}{@{}rlrlrlrl}
+\cn{arccos}& $\arccos$ &\cn{deg}& $\deg$ & \cn{lg}& $\lg$ & \cn{projlim}& $\projlim$\\
+\cn{arcsin}& $\arcsin$ &\cn{det}& $\det$ & \cn{lim}& $\lim$ & \cn{sec}& $\sec$\\
+\cn{arctan}& $\arctan$ &\cn{dim}& $\dim$ & \cn{liminf}& $\liminf$ &\cn{sin}& $\sin$\\
+\cn{arg}& $\arg$ & \cn{exp}& $\exp$ & \cn{limsup}& $\limsup$ &\cn{sinh}& $\sinh$\\
+\cn{cos}& $\cos$ & \cn{gcd}& $\gcd$ & \cn{ln}& $\ln$ & \cn{sup}& $\sup$\\
+\cn{cosh}& $\cosh$ & \cn{hom}& $\hom$ & \cn{log}& $\log$ & \cn{tan}& $\tan$\\
+\cn{cot}& $\cot$ & \cn{inf}& $\inf$ & \cn{max}& $\max$ & \cn{tanh}& $\tanh$\\
+\cn{coth}& $\coth$ & \cn{injlim}& $\injlim$ &\cn{min}& $\min$\\
+\cn{csc}& $\csc$ & \cn{ker}& $\ker$ & \cn{Pr}& $\Pr$
+\end{ctab}
+\par\nobreak
+\vspace{-1.2\baselineskip}
+\begin{ctab}{rlrl}
+\cn{varinjlim}& $\displaystyle\varinjlim$&
+\cn{varliminf}& $\displaystyle\varliminf$\\
+\cn{varprojlim}& $\displaystyle\varprojlim$&
+\cn{varlimsup}& $\displaystyle\varlimsup$
+\end{ctab}
+
+There is also a command \cn{operatorname} such that using
+\begin{verbatim}
+\operatorname{abc}
+\end{verbatim}
+in a math formula is equivalent to a use of \ncn{abc} defined by
+\cn{DeclareMathOperator}. This may be occasionally useful for
+constructing more complex notation or other purposes. (Use the variant
+\cn{operatorname*} to get limits.)
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{\cn{mod} and its relatives}
+
+Commands \cn{mod}, \cn{bmod}, \cn{pmod}, \cn{pod} are provided to deal
+with the special spacing conventions of \qq{mod} notation. \cn{bmod} and
+\cn{pmod} are available in \latex/, but with the \nipkg{amsmath} package
+the spacing of \cn{pmod} will adjust to a smaller value if it's used in
+a non-display-mode formula. \cn{mod} and \cn{pod} are variants of
+\cn{pmod} preferred by some authors; \cn{mod} omits the parentheses,
+whereas \cn{pod} omits the \qq{mod} and retains the parentheses.
+\begin{equation}
+\gcd(n,m\bmod n);\quad x\equiv y\pmod b;
+\quad x\equiv y\mod c;\quad x\equiv y\pod d
+\end{equation}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\gcd(n,m\bmod n);\quad x\equiv y\pmod b;
+\quad x\equiv y\mod c;\quad x\equiv y\pod d
+\end{verbatim}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\enlargethispage{1\baselineskip}
+
+\chapter{The \cn{text} command}\label{text}
+
+The main use of the command \cn{text} is for words or
+phrases\index{text fragments inside math} in a display. It is very
+similar to the \latex/ command \cn{mbox} in its effects, but has a
+couple of advantages. If you want a word or phrase of text in a
+subscript, you can type |..._{\textrm{word or phrase}}|, which is slightly
+easier than the \cn{mbox} equivalent: |..._{\mbox{\rmfamily\scriptsize| |word|
+|or| |phrase}}|. Note that the standard \cn{textrm} command will use the
+\nipkg{amsmath} \cn{text} definition, but ensure the \verb+\rmfamily+
+font is used.
+\begin{equation}
+f_{[x_{i-1},x_i]} \text{ is monotonic,}
+\quad i = 1,\dots,c+1
+\end{equation}
+\begin{verbatim}
+f_{[x_{i-1},x_i]} \text{ is monotonic,}
+\quad i = 1,\dots,c+1
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The font used for \cn{text} is the same as that of the surrounding
+environment; i.e., within a theorem, the contents of \cn{text} will
+be set in italic.
+
+If a math expression is included in a \cn{text} string, it must be
+explicitly marked as math (|$...$|).
+\[
+\partial_s f(x) = \frac{\partial}{\partial x_0} f(x)\quad
+ \text{for $x= x_0 + I x_1$.}
+\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\partial_s f(x) = \frac{\partial}{\partial x_0} f(x)\quad
+ \text{for $x= x_0 + I x_1$.}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Function names should \emph{not} be entered as \cn{text}. Instead,
+use \cn{mathrm} or \cn{DeclareMathOperator} as appropriate. These are
+fixed entities that should not change depending on outside content
+(such as appearing within a theorem that is set in italic), and in the
+case of declared operators, proper spacing\index{horizontal
+spacing!around operator names} is applied automatically.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\chapter{Integrals and sums}
+
+\section{Multiline subscripts and superscripts}
+
+The \cn{substack} command can be used to produce a multiline subscript
+or superscript:\index{subscripts and superscripts!multiline}\relax
+\index{superscripts|see{subscripts and superscripts}} for example
+\begin{ctab}{ll}
+\begin{minipage}[t]{.6\columnwidth}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\sum_{\substack{
+ 0\le i\le m\\
+ 0<j<n}}
+ P(i,j)
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{minipage}
+&
+$\displaystyle
+\sum_{\substack{0\le i\le m\\ 0<j<n}} P(i,j)$
+\end{ctab}
+A slightly more generalized form is the \env{subarray} environment which
+allows you to specify that each line should be left-aligned instead of
+centered, as here:
+\begin{ctab}{ll}
+\begin{minipage}[t]{.6\columnwidth}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\sum_{\begin{subarray}{l}
+ i\in\Lambda\\ 0<j<n
+ \end{subarray}}
+ P(i,j)
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{minipage}
+&
+$\displaystyle
+ \sum_{\begin{subarray}{l}
+ i\in \Lambda\\ 0<j<n
+ \end{subarray}}
+ P(i,j)$
+\end{ctab}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{The \cn{sideset} command}\label{sideset}
+
+There's also a command called \cn{sideset}, for a rather special
+purpose: putting symbols at the subscript and
+superscript\index{subscripts and superscripts!on sums} corners of a
+large operator symbol such as $\sum$ or $\prod$. \emph{Note: this
+command is not designed to be applied to anything other than sum-class
+symbols.} The prime
+example is the case when you want to put a prime on a sum symbol. If
+there are no limits above or below the sum, you could just use
+\cn{nolimits}: here's
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+|\sum\nolimits' E_n| in display mode:
+\begin{equation}
+\sum\nolimits' E_n
+\end{equation}
+If, however, you want not only the prime but also something below or
+above the sum symbol, it's not so easy\mdash indeed, without
+\cn{sideset}, it would be downright difficult. With \cn{sideset}, you
+can write
+\begin{ctab}{ll}
+\begin{minipage}[t]{.6\columnwidth}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\sideset{}{'}
+ \sum_{n<k,\;\text{$n$ odd}} nE_n
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{minipage}
+&$\displaystyle
+\sideset{}{'}\sum_{n<k,\;\text{$n$ odd}} nE_n
+$
+\end{ctab}
+The extra pair of empty braces is explained by the fact that
+\cn{sideset} has the capability of putting an extra symbol or symbols at
+each corner of a large operator; to put an asterisk at each corner of a
+product symbol, you would type
+\begin{ctab}{ll}
+\begin{minipage}[t]{.6\columnwidth}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\sideset{_*^*}{_*^*}\prod
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{minipage}
+&$\displaystyle
+\sideset{_*^*}{_*^*}\prod
+$
+\end{ctab}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Placement of subscripts and limits}\label{subplace}
+
+The default positioning for subscripts depends on the
+base symbol involved. The default for sum-class symbols is
+`displaylimits' positioning: When a sum-class symbol appears
+in a displayed formula, subscript and superscript are placed in `limits'
+position above and below, but in an inline formula, they are placed to
+the side, to avoid unsightly and wasteful spreading of the
+surrounding text lines.
+The default for integral-class symbols is to have sub- and
+superscripts always to the side, even in displayed formulas.
+(See the discussion of the \opt{intlimits} and related
+options\index{options!behavior of particular options} in
+Section~\ref{options}.)
+
+Operator names such as $\sin$ or $\lim$ may have either `displaylimits'
+or `limits' positioning depending on how they were defined. The standard
+operator names are defined according to normal mathematical usage.
+
+The commands \cn{limits} and \cn{nolimits} can be used to override the
+normal behavior of a base symbol:
+\begin{equation*}
+\sum\nolimits_X,\qquad \iint\limits_{A},
+\qquad\varliminf\nolimits_{n\to \infty}
+\end{equation*}
+To define a command whose subscripts follow the
+same `displaylimits' behavior as \cn{sum}, put
+\cn{displaylimits} at the tail end of the definition. When multiple
+instances of \cn{limits}, \cn{nolimits}, or \cn{displaylimits} occur
+consecutively, the last one takes precedence.
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Multiple integral signs}
+
+\cn{iint}, \cn{iiint}, and \cn{iiiint} give multiple integral
+signs\index{integrals!multiple} with the spacing between them nicely
+adjusted, in both text and display style. \cn{idotsint} is an extension
+of the same idea that gives two integral signs with dots between them.
+\begin{gather}
+\iint\limits_A f(x,y)\,dx\,dy\qquad\iiint\limits_A
+f(x,y,z)\,dx\,dy\,dz\\
+\iiiint\limits_A
+f(w,x,y,z)\,dw\,dx\,dy\,dz\qquad\idotsint\limits_A f(x_1,\dots,x_k)
+\end{gather}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\chapter{Commutative diagrams}\label{s:commdiag}
+\index{commutative diagrams}
+
+Some commutative diagram commands like the ones in \amstex/ are
+available as a separate package, \pkg{amscd}. For complex commutative
+diagrams authors will need to turn to more comprehensive packages like
+\tikz/\index{TikZ@\tikz/ package} (in particular, \pkg{tikz-cd})
+or \xypic/\index{XY-pic@\xypic/ package},
+but for simple diagrams without diagonal
+arrows\index{arrows!in commutative diagrams} the \pkg{amscd} commands
+may be more convenient. Here is one example.
+\begin{equation*}
+\begin{CD}
+S^{\mathcal{W}_\Lambda}\otimes T @>j>> T\\
+ at VVV @VV{\End P}V\\
+(S\otimes T)/I @= (Z\otimes T)/J
+\end{CD}
+\end{equation*}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{CD}
+S^{\mathcal{W}_\Lambda}\otimes T @>j>> T\\
+ at VVV @VV{\End P}V\\
+(S\otimes T)/I @= (Z\otimes T)/J
+\end{CD}
+\end{verbatim}
+In the \env{CD} environment the commands |@>>>|,
+|@<<<|, |@VVV|, and |@AAA| give respectively right, left, down, and up
+arrows. For the horizontal arrows, material between the first and second
+|>| or |<| symbols will be typeset as a superscript, and material
+between the second and third will be typeset as a subscript. Similarly,
+material between the first and second or second and third |A|s or |V|s
+of vertical arrows will be typeset as left or right \qq{sidescripts}.
+The commands |@=| and \verb'@|' give horizontal and vertical double lines.
+A \qq{null arrow} command |@.| can be used instead of a visible arrow
+to fill out an array where needed.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\chapter{Using math fonts}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+For more comprehensive information on font use in \latex/, see the
+\latex/ font guide (\fn{fntguide.tex}) or \booktitle{The \latex/
+Companion} \cite{tlc2}. The basic set of math font commands\index{math
+fonts}\relax \index{math symbols|see{math fonts}} in \latex/ includes
+\cn{mathbf}, \cn{mathrm}, \cn{mathcal}, \cn{mathsf}, \cn{mathtt},
+\cn{mathit}. Additional math alphabet commands such as
+\cn{mathbb} for blackboard bold, \cn{mathfrak} for Fraktur, and
+\cn{mathscr} for Euler script are available through the packages
+\pkg{amsfonts} and \pkg{euscript} (distributed separately).
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+\enlargethispage{1\baselineskip}
+
+\section{Recommended use of math font commands}
+
+If you find yourself employing math font commands frequently in your
+document, you might wish that they had shorter names, such as \ncn{mb}
+instead of \cn{mathbf}. Of course, there is nothing to keep you from
+providing such abbreviations for yourself by suitable \cn{newcommand}
+statements. But for \latex/ to provide shorter names would actually be a
+disservice to authors, as that would obscure a much better alternative:
+defining custom command names derived from the names of the underlying
+mathematical objects, rather than from the names of the fonts used to
+distinguish the objects. For example, if you are using bold to indicate
+vectors, then you will be better served in the long run if you define a
+`vector' command instead of a `math-bold' command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newcommand{\vect}[1]{\mathbf{#1}}
+\end{verbatim}
+you can write |\vect{a} + \vect{b}| to produce $\vect{a} +
+\vect{b}$.
+If you decide several months down the road that you want to use the bold
+font for some other purpose, and mark vectors by a small over-arrow
+instead, then you can put the change into effect merely by changing the
+definition of \ncn{vect}; otherwise you would have to replace all
+occurrences of \cn{mathbf} throughout your document, perhaps even
+needing to inspect each one to see whether it is indeed
+an instance of a vector.
+
+It can also be useful to assign distinct
+command names for different letters of a particular font:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\DeclareSymbolFont{AMSb}{U}{msb}{m}{n}% or use amsfonts package
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\C}{\mathalpha}{AMSb}{"43}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\R}{\mathalpha}{AMSb}{"52}
+\end{verbatim}
+These statements would define the commands \cn{C} and \cn{R} to produce
+blackboard-bold letters from the `AMSb' math symbols font. If you refer
+often to the\break complex numbers or real numbers in your document, you
+might find this method more convenient than (let's say) defining a
+\ncn{field} command and writing\break |\field{C}|, |\field{R}|. But for
+maximum flexibility and control, define such a \ncn{field} command and
+then define \ncn{C} and \ncn{R} in terms of that
+command:\indexcs{mathbb}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{amsfonts}% to get the \mathbb alphabet
+\newcommand{\field}[1]{\mathbb{#1}}
+\newcommand{\C}{\field{C}}
+\newcommand{\R}{\field{R}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+\enlargethispage{3\baselineskip}
+
+\section{Bold math symbols}
+
+The \cn{mathbf} command is commonly used to obtain bold Latin letters in
+math, but for most other kinds of math symbols it has no effect, or its
+effects depend unreliably on the set of math fonts that are in use. For
+example, writing
+\begin{verbatim}
+\Delta \mathbf{\Delta}\mathbf{+}\delta \mathbf{\delta}
+\end{verbatim}
+produces $\Delta \mathbf{\Delta}\mathbf{+}\delta
+\mathbf{\delta}$; the \cn{mathbf} has no effect on the plus
+sign or the small delta.
+% should be paragraph break; avoid overfull box on next line
+The \nipkg{amsmath} package therefore provides two additional commands,
+\cn{boldsymbol} and \cn{pmb}, that can be applied to other kinds of math
+symbols. \cn{boldsymbol} can be used for a math symbol that remains
+unaffected by \cn{mathbf} if (and only if) your current math font set
+includes a bold version of that symbol. \cn{pmb} can be used as a last
+resort for any math symbols that do not have a true bold version
+provided by your set of math fonts; \qq{pmb} stands for \qq{poor man's
+bold} and the command works by typesetting multiple copies of the symbol
+with slight offsets. The quality of the output is inferior, especially
+for symbols that contain any hairline strokes. When the standard default set of
+\latex/ math fonts are in use (Computer Modern), the only symbols that
+are likely to require \cn{pmb} are large operator symbols like \cn{sum},
+extended delimiter\index{delimiters} symbols, or the extra math symbols
+provided by the \pkg{amssymb} package \cite{amsfonts}.
+
+The following formula shows some of the results that are possible:
+\begin{verbatim}
+A_\infty + \pi A_0
+\sim \mathbf{A}_{\boldsymbol{\infty}} \boldsymbol{+}
+ \boldsymbol{\pi} \mathbf{A}_{\boldsymbol{0}}
+\sim\pmb{A}_{\pmb{\infty}} \pmb{+}\pmb{\pi} \pmb{A}_{\pmb{0}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\begin{equation*}
+A_\infty + \pi A_0
+\sim \mathbf{A}_{\boldsymbol{\infty}} \boldsymbol{+}
+ \boldsymbol{\pi} \mathbf{A}_{\boldsymbol{0}}
+\sim\pmb{A}_{\pmb{\infty}} \pmb{+}\pmb{\pi} \pmb{A}_{\pmb{0}}
+\end{equation*}
+If you want to use only the \cn{boldsymbol} command without loading the
+whole \nipkg{amsmath} package, the \pkg{bm} package is recommended (this
+is a standard \latex/ package, not an AMS package; you probably have it
+already if you have a 1997 or newer version of \latex/).
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Italic Greek letters}
+
+For italic versions of the capital Greek letters, the following commands
+are provided:
+\begin{ctab}{rlrl}
+\cn{varGamma}& $\varGamma$& \cn{varSigma}& $\varSigma$\\
+\cn{varDelta}& $\varDelta$& \cn{varUpsilon}& $\varUpsilon$\\
+\cn{varTheta}& $\varTheta$& \cn{varPhi}& $\varPhi$\\
+\cn{varLambda}& $\varLambda$& \cn{varPsi}& $\varPsi$\\
+\cn{varXi}& $\varXi$& \cn{varOmega}& $\varOmega$\\
+\cn{varPi}& $\varPi$
+\end{ctab}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\chapter{Error messages and output problems}
+
+\section{General remarks}
+
+This is a supplement to Chapter~8 of the \latex/ manual \cite{lamport}
+(first edition: Chapter~6). Appendix~B of the
+\textit{Companion}~\cite{tlc2} lists all \latex/ errors including those
+for \nipkg{amsmath} with likely causes for each. For the reader's
+convenience, the set of error messages discussed here overlaps
+somewhat with the set in those references,
+but please be aware that we don't provide exhaustive coverage here.
+The error messages are arranged in alphabetical order, disregarding
+unimportant text such as |! LaTeX Error:| at the beginning, and
+nonalphabetical characters such as \qc{\\}. Where examples are given, we
+show also the help messages that appear on screen when you respond to an
+error message prompt by entering |h|.
+
+Remember that the important error message is the first for a given line.
+When running in nonstop mode, errors accumulate, and the first error
+may create a further error condition from which it is impossible to
+recover. In such a situation processing will stop after 100~errors,
+so the reporting of genuine errors may not be complete, and it may be
+impossible to determine which reported errors are genuine and which
+are not.
+
+A final section discusses some output errors, i.e., instances where
+the printed document has something wrong but there was no \latex/
+error during typesetting.
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+%% **********
+\enlargethispage{-2\baselineskip}
+
+\section{Error messages}
+
+\begin{error}{\begin{split} won't work here.}
+\errexa
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Package amsmath Error: \begin{split} won't work here.
+ ...
+
+l.8 \begin{split}
+
+? h
+\Did you forget a preceding \begin{equation}?
+If not, perhaps the `aligned' environment is what you want.
+?
+\end{verbatim}
+\errexpl
+The \env{split} environment does not construct a stand-alone displayed
+equation; it needs to be used within some other environment such as
+\env{equation} or \env{gather}.
+
+\end{error}
+
+\begin{error}{Erroneous nesting of equation structures}
+\errexa
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Package amsmath Error: Erroneous nesting of equation structures;
+(amsmath) trying to recover with `aligned'.
+
+See the amsmath package documentation for explanation.
+Type H <return> for immediate help.
+ ...
+
+l.260 \end{alignat*}
+ \end{equation*}
+\end{verbatim}
+\errexpl
+The structures \env{align}, \env{alignat}, etc., are designed
+for top-level use and for the most part cannot be nested inside some
+other displayed equation structure. The chief exception is that
+\env{align} and most of its variants can be used inside the
+\env{gather} environment.
+\end{error}
+
+\begin{error}{Extra & on this line}
+\errexa
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Package amsmath Error: Extra & on this line.
+
+See the amsmath package documentation for explanation.
+Type H <return> for immediate help.
+ ...
+
+l.9 \end{alignat}
+
+? h
+\An extra & here is so disastrous that you should probably exit
+ and fix things up.
+?
+\end{verbatim}
+\errexpl
+In an \env{alignat} structure the number of alignment points per line
+is dictated by the numeric argument given after |\begin{alignat}|.
+If you use more alignment points in a line it is assumed that you
+accidentally left out a newline command \cn{\\} and the above error is
+issued.
+\end{error}
+
+%% **********
+\enlargethispage{1.5\baselineskip}
+
+\begin{error}{Font OMX/cmex/m/n/7=cmex7 not loadable ...}
+\errexa
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Font OMX/cmex/m/n/7=cmex7 not loadable: Metric (TFM) file not found.
+<to be read again>
+ relax
+l.8 $a
+ b+b^2$
+? h
+I wasn't able to read the size data for this font,
+so I will ignore the font specification.
+[Wizards can fix TFM files using TFtoPL/PLtoTF.]
+You might try inserting a different font spec;
+e.g., type `I\font<same font id>=<substitute font name>'.
+?
+\end{verbatim}
+\errexpl
+Certain extra sizes of some Computer Modern fonts that were formerly
+available mainly through the AMSFonts\index{amsfont at AMSFonts collection}
+distribution are considered part of standard \latex/ (as of June 1994):
+\fn{cmex7}\ndash \texttt{9}, \fn{cmmib5}\ndash \texttt{9}, and
+\fn{cmbsy5}\ndash \texttt{9}. If these extra sizes are missing on your
+system, you should try first to get them from the source where you
+obtained \latex/. If that fails, you could try getting the fonts from
+CTAN (e.g., in the form of Metafont\index{Metafont source files} source
+files, directory \nfn{/tex-archive/fonts/latex/mf}, or in PostScript
+Type 1 format, directory
+\nfn{/tex-archive/fonts/cm/ps-type1/bakoma}\index{BaKoMa fonts}\relax
+\index{PostScript fonts}).
+
+If the font name begins with \fn{cmex}, there is a special option%
+\index{options!behavior of particular options}
+\opt{cmex10} for the \nipkg{amsmath} package that provides a temporary
+workaround. I.e., change the \cn{usepackage} to
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[cmex10]{amsmath}
+\end{verbatim}
+This will force the use of the 10-point size of the \fn{cmex} font in
+all cases. Depending on the contents of your document this may be
+adequate.
+\end{error}
+
+\enlargethispage{1\baselineskip}
+\begin{error}{Improper argument for math accent}
+\errexa
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Package amsmath Error: Improper argument for math accent:
+(amsmath) Extra braces must be added to
+(amsmath) prevent wrong output.
+
+See the amsmath package documentation for explanation.
+Type H <return> for immediate help.
+ ...
+
+l.415 \tilde k_{\lambda_j} = P_{\tilde \mathcal
+ {M}}
+?
+\end{verbatim}
+\errexpl
+Non-simple arguments for any \LaTeX{} command should be enclosed in
+braces. In this example extra braces are needed as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+... P_{\tilde{\mathcal{M}}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{error}
+
+\begin{error}{Math formula deleted: Insufficient extension fonts}
+\errexa
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Math formula deleted: Insufficient extension fonts.
+l.8 $ab+b^2$
+
+?
+\end{verbatim}
+\errexpl
+This usually follows a previous error |Font ... not loadable|; see the
+discussion of that error (above) for solutions.
+\end{error}
+
+\enlargethispage{1\baselineskip}
+\begin{error}{Missing number, treated as zero}
+\errexa
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Missing number, treated as zero.
+<to be read again>
+ a
+l.100 \end{alignat}
+
+? h
+A number should have been here; I inserted `0'.
+(If you can't figure out why I needed to see a number,
+look up `weird error' in the index to The TeXbook.)
+
+?
+\end{verbatim}
+\errexpl
+There are many possibilities that can lead to this error. However, one
+possibility that is relevant for the \nipkg{amsmath} package is that you
+forgot to give the number argument of an \env{alignat} environment, as
+in:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{alignat}
+ a& =b& c& =d\\
+a'& =b'& c'& =d'
+\end{alignat}
+\end{verbatim}
+where the first line should read instead
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{alignat}{2}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Another possibility is that you have a left bracket character |[|
+following a line break\index{line break} command \cn{\\} in a multiline
+construction such as \env{array}, \env{tabular}, or \env{eqnarray}.
+This will be interpreted by \latex/ as the beginning of an `additional
+vertical space request \cite[\S C.1.6]{lamport}, even if it occurs on the
+following line and is intended to be part of the contents. For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{array}{c}
+a+b\\
+[f,g]\\
+m+n
+\end{array}
+\end{verbatim}
+To prevent the error message in such a case, you can
+add braces as discussed in the \latex/ manual \cite[\S C.1.1]{lamport}:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{array}{c}
+a+b\\
+{[f,g]}\\
+m+n
+\end{array}
+\end{verbatim}
+or precede the bracketed expression by \cn{relax}.
+\end{error}
+
+\goodbreak
+
+\begin{error}{Missing \right. inserted}
+\errexa
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Missing \right. inserted.
+<inserted text>
+ \right .
+l.10 \end{multline}
+
+? h
+I've inserted something that you may have forgotten.
+(See the <inserted text> above.)
+With luck, this will get me unwedged. But if you
+really didn't forget anything, try typing `2' now; then
+my insertion and my current dilemma will both disappear.
+\end{verbatim}
+\errexpl
+This error typically arises when you try to insert a
+line break\index{line break} or |&|\cnamp\ between a
+\cn{left}-\cn{right} pair of delimiters\index{delimiters} in any
+multiline environment, including \env{split}.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{multline}
+AAA\left(BBB\\
+ CCC\right)
+\end{multline}
+\end{verbatim}
+There are two possible solutions: (1)~instead of using \cn{left} and
+\cn{right}, use `big' delimiters\index{delimiters!fixed size} of fixed
+size (\cn{bigl} \cn{bigr} \cn{biggl} \cn{biggr} \dots; see
+\secref{bigdel}); or (2)~use null delimiters\index{delimiters!null} to
+break up the \cn{left}-\cn{right} pair into parts for each line (or cell):
+\begin{verbatim}
+AAA\left(BBB\right.\\
+ \left.CCC\right)
+\end{verbatim}
+The latter solution may result in mismatched
+delimiter\index{delimiters!mismatched sizes} sizes;
+ensuring that they match requires using \cn{vphantom} in the segment
+that has the smaller delimiter (or possibly \cn{smash} in the segment
+that has the larger delimiter). In the argument of \cn{vphantom} put a
+copy of the tallest element that occurs in the other segment, e.g.,
+\begin{verbatim}
+xxx \left(\int_t yyy\right.\\
+ \left.\vphantom{\int_t} zzz ... \right)
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{error}
+
+\goodbreak
+
+\begingroup
+\lccode`M=`M
+\lccode`@=`\}
+\lowercase{\endgroup
+\begin{error}{Missing @ inserted}}
+
+\errexa
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Missing } inserted.
+<inserted text>
+ \right .
+l.10 \end{multline}
+
+? h
+I've inserted something that you may have forgotten.
+(See the <inserted text> above.)
+With luck, this will get me unwedged. But if you
+really didn't forget anything, try typing `2' now; then
+my insertion and my current dilemma will both disappear.
+\end{verbatim}
+\errexpl
+This error is often the result of using \verb+$+ within a multiline
+display environment. Remove such \verb+$+ signs (except when they
+appear within \verb+\text{...}+).
+\end{error}
+
+\begin{error}{Old form `\pmatrix' should be \begin{pmatrix}.}
+\errexa
+\begin{verbatim}
+! Package amsmath Error: Old form `\pmatrix' should be
+ \begin{pmatrix}.
+
+See the amsmath package documentation for explanation.
+Type H <return> for immediate help.
+ ...
+
+\pmatrix ->\left (\matrix at check \pmatrix
+ \env at matrix
+l.16 \pmatrix
+ {a&b\cr c&d\cr}
+? h
+`\pmatrix{...}' is old Plain-TeX syntax whose use is
+ill-advised in LaTeX.
+?
+\end{verbatim}
+\errexpl
+When the \nipkg{amsmath} package is used, the old forms of \cn{pmatrix},
+\cn{matrix}, and \cn{cases} cannot be used any longer because of naming
+conflicts. Their syntax did not conform with standard \LaTeX{} syntax
+in any case.
+\end{error}
+
+\enlargethispage{2\baselineskip}
+\begin{error}{Paragraph ended before \xxx was complete}
+\errexa
+\begin{verbatim}
+Runaway argument?
+
+! Paragraph ended before \multline was complete.
+<to be read again>
+ \par
+l.100
+
+? h
+I suspect you've forgotten a `}', causing me to apply this
+control sequence to too much text. How can we recover?
+My plan is to forget the whole thing and hope for the best.
+?
+\end{verbatim}
+\errexpl
+This might be produced by a blank line between the |\begin| and |\end|.
+Another possibility is a misspelling in the |\end{multline}| command,
+e.g.,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{multline}
+...
+\end{multiline}
+\end{verbatim}
+or by using abbreviations for certain environments, such as |\bal| and
+|\eal| for |\begin{align}| and |\end{align}|:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bal
+...
+\eal
+\end{verbatim}
+For technical reasons that kind of abbreviation does not work with
+the more complex displayed equation environments of the \nipkg{amsmath} package
+(\env{gather}, \env{align}, \env{split}, etc.; cf.\ \fn{technote.tex}).
+\end{error}
+
+\begin{error}{Runaway argument?}
+See the discussion for the error message
+\texttt{Paragraph ended before \ncn{xxx} was complete}.
+\end{error}
+
+\begin{error}{Unknown option `xxx' for package `yyy'}
+\errexa
+\begin{verbatim}
+! LaTeX Error: Unknown option `intlim' for package `amsmath'.
+...
+? h
+The option `intlim' was not declared in package `amsmath', perhaps you
+misspelled its name. Try typing <return> to proceed.
+?
+\end{verbatim}
+\errexpl
+This means that you misspelled the option\index{options!unknown}
+name, or the package simply does not have an option that you expected
+it to have. Consult the documentation for the given package.
+\end{error}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Warning messages}
+
+\begin{error}{Cannot use `split' here}
+\errexa
+\begin{verbatim}
+Package amsmath Warning: Cannot use `split' here;
+(amsmath) trying to recover with `aligned'
+\end{verbatim}
+\errexpl The \env{split} environment is designed to serve as the entire
+body of an equation, or an entire line of an \env{align} or \env{gather}
+environment. There cannot be any printed material before or
+after it within the same enclosing structure:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{ % <-- Not allowed
+\begin{split}
+...
+\end{split}
+\right. % <-- Not allowed
+\end{equation}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{error}
+
+\begin{error}{Foreign command \over [or \atop or \above]}
+\errexa
+\begin{verbatim}
+Package amsmath Warning: Foreign command \over; \frac or \genfrac
+(amsmath) should be used instead.
+\end{verbatim}
+\errexpl The primitive generalized fraction commands of \tex/\mdash
+\cs{over}, \cs{atop}, \cs{above}\mdash are deprecated when the
+\nipkg{amsmath} package is used because their syntax is foreign to \latex/
+and \nipkg{amsmath} provides native \latex/ equivalents. See
+\fn{technote.tex} for further information.
+\end{error}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Wrong output}
+
+\begin{erroro}{Section numbers 0.1, 5.1, 8.1 instead of 1, 2, 3}
+%
+This most likely means that you have the arguments for \cn{numberwithin}
+in reverse order:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\numberwithin{section}{equation}
+\end{verbatim}
+That means `print the section number as \textit{equation
+number}.\textit{section number} and reset to 1 every time an equation
+occurs' when what you probably wanted was the inverse
+\begin{verbatim}
+\numberwithin{equation}{section}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{erroro}
+
+\begin{erroro}{The \cn{numberwithin} command had no effect on equation
+ numbers}
+%
+Are you looking at the first section in your document? Check the section
+numbers elsewhere to see if the problem is the one described in the
+previous item.
+\end{erroro}
+
+\begin{erroro}{Bracketed material disappears at the beginning of
+ \env{aligned} or \env{gathered}}
+%
+For most multiline equation environments, \nipkg{amsmath} disables the
+\latex/ convention to recognize a [bracketed] expression as an option%
+\index{ed env@\texttt{-ed} environments}%
+\index{options!positioning of \texttt{-ed} environments}%
+\index{options!space before \texttt{[}}
+when it occurs at the beginning of an environment or immediately
+following \cn{\\}, provided a space intervenes. This fails at the
+beginning of \env{aligned} and \env{gathered}, and is a bug. Insert
+\cn{relax} before the opening brace to restore the desired result.
+\end{erroro}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\chapter{Additional information}
+
+\section{Compatibility with other packages}
+
+Several packages have already been mentioned as providing facilities
+lacking in \nipkg{amsmath}.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \pkg{bm} is recommended for specifying bold math symbols.
+\item \pkg{mathtools} provides enhancements to some \nipkg{amsmath}
+ environments as well as additional compatible features, such as
+ \env{rcases} (similar to \env{cases} but with the brace on the
+ right-hand side), \env{multlined} (a subsidiary environment
+ comparable to \env{multline}), and \cn{shortintertext} (more
+ compact spacing than \cn{intertext}). If \pkg{mathtools} is used,
+ \nipkg{amsmath} is loaded automatically, so it is not necessary
+ to load it separately.
+\item \pkg{unicode-math} provides commands for (most?)\ math symbols
+ in Unicode.
+%\item \pkg{empheq}
+\end{itemize}
+
+These packages have known problems when used with \nipkg{amsmath}.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \pkg{lineno} may omit numbers before display environments.
+\item \pkg{breqn} redefines a number of commands from other packages,
+ so is best loaded after \nipkg{amsmath} and other packages with math
+ facilities.\\ \pkg{breqn} is not yet totally stable, and a number of
+ bugs have been reported via \texttt{tex.stackexchange} \cite{tex-sx}.
+\item \pkg{wasysym}, \pkg{mathabx} and perhaps other font packages also
+ define multiple integrals\index{integrals!multiple} using the same
+ names as \nipkg{amsmath}.
+\end{itemize}
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Converting existing documents}
+
+\subsection{Converting from plain \LaTeX{}}
+
+A \LaTeX{} document will typically continue to work the same in most
+respects if \verb'\usepackage{amsmath}' is added in the document
+preamble. By default, however, the \nipkg{amsmath} package suppresses page
+breaks inside multiple-line displayed equation structures such as
+\env{eqnarray}, \env{align}, and \env{gather}. To continue allowing page
+breaks inside \env{eqnarray} after switching to \nipkg{amsmath}, you will
+need to add the following line in your document preamble:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\allowdisplaybreaks[1]
+\end{verbatim}
+To ensure normal spacing around relation symbols, you might also want to
+change \env{eqnarray} to \env{align}, \env{multline}, or
+\env{equation}\slash\env{split} as appropriate.
+
+Most of the other differences in \nipkg{amsmath} usage can be considered
+optional refinements, e.g., using
+\begin{verbatim}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\Hom}{Hom}
+\end{verbatim}
+instead of \verb'\newcommand{\Hom}{\mbox{Hom}}'.
+
+\subsection{Converting from \texorpdfstring{\amslatex/}{amslatex} 1.1}
+See \fn{diffs-m.txt}.
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Technical notes}
+The file \fn{technote.tex} contains some remarks on miscellaneous
+technical questions that are less likely to be of general interest.
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Getting help}
+
+The \nipkg{amsmath} collection of packages is maintained by the \latex/
+team \cite{ltx-team}. Bugs should be reported using the instructions
+at \url{https://www.latex-project.org/bugs/}.
+Please be careful not to confuse \nipkg{amsmath} with the AMS document
+classes (\cls{amsart}, \cls{amsbook}, and \cls{amsproc}), which
+automatically incorporate \nipkg{amsmath}; bugs in the classes should
+be reported directly to AMS, by email to \mail{tech-support at ams.org}.
+
+%Questions or comments regarding \nipkg{amsmath} and related packages
+%should be sent to:
+%\begin{infoaddress}
+%American Mathematical Society\\
+%Technical Support\\
+%Electronic Products and Services\\
+%P. O. Box 6248\\
+%Providence, RI 02940\\[3pt]
+%Phone: 800-321-4AMS (321-4267) \quad or \quad 401-455-4080\\
+%Internet: \mail{tech-support at ams.org}
+%\end{infoaddress}
+%If you are reporting a problem you should include
+%the following information to make proper investigation possible:
+%\begin{enumerate}
+%\item The source file where the problem occurred, preferably reduced
+% to minimum size by removing any material that can be removed without
+% affecting the observed problem.
+%\item A \latex/ log file showing the error message (if applicable) and
+% the version numbers of the document class and option files being used.
+%\end{enumerate}
+
+The online forum\index{online Q\,\&\,A forum} \texttt{tex.stackexchange}
+\cite{tex-sx} is a good source of answers to common questions on usage.
+Look first in the archive to see if your question has already been asked
+and answered; if it has not, post your own question.
+
+There is an online discussion group called \fn{comp.text.tex} \cite{ctt}
+that is a fairly good source of information about \latex/ and \tex/ in
+general. This group, formerly a Unix newsgroup, predates
+\texttt{tex.stackexchange} by decades, and the archives can be a useful
+resource for historical investigation.
+
+%% ------------------------------------------------------------------ %%
+
+\section{Of possible interest}\label{a:possible-interest}
+Information about obtaining AMSFonts or other \tex/-related
+software from the AMS web server at \fn{www.ams.org}
+can be obtained by sending an email request to
+\mail{tech-support at ams.org}. This software is also posted on
+CTAN\index{CTAN (Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network)} and included
+in distributions based on \TeX\,Live\index{TEX Live@\TeX\,Live}.
+
+The \tex/ Users Group\index{TeX Users@\tex/ Users Group} is a nonprofit
+organization that publishes a journal
+(\journalname{TUGboat}\index{TUGboat@\journalname{TUGboat}}), holds
+meetings, and serves as a clearinghouse for general information about
+\tex/ and \tex/-related software.
+\begin{infoaddress}
+\tex/ Users Group\\
+PO Box 2311\\
+Portland, OR 97208-2311\\
+USA\\[3pt]
+Phone: +1-503-223-9994\\
+Email: \mail{office at tug.org}
+\end{infoaddress}
+Membership in the \tex/ Users Group is a good way to support continued
+development of free \tex/-related software. There are also many local
+\tex/ user groups in other countries; information about contacting a
+local user group can be gotten from the \tex/ Users Group.
+
+\index{amsmath@\texttt{amsmath} package|)}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newpage
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{10}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\bibname}
+
+\raggedright
+
+\bibsubhead{References in print}
+
+\bibitem{mil} George Gr\"atzer, \booktitle{More Math into \latex/}, fifth ed.,
+Springer, New York, 2016.
+% Deal with a line breaking problem
+%\begin{raggedright}
+%\bibitem{mil} G. Gr\"{a}tzer,
+%\emph{Math into \LaTeX{}: An Introduction to \LaTeX{} and AMS-\LaTeX{}}
+% \url{https://www.ams.org/cgi-bin/bookstore/bookpromo?fn=91&arg1=bookvideo&itmc=MLTEX},
+%Birkh\"{a}user, Boston, 1995.\par
+%\end{raggedright}
+
+\bibitem{kn} Donald E. Knuth, \booktitle{The \tex/book},
+Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1984.
+
+\bibitem{lamport} Leslie Lamport, \booktitle{\latex/: A document preparation
+system}, 2nd revised ed., Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1994.
+
+\bibitem{tlc2} Frank Mittelbach, Michel Goossens, et al.,
+\booktitle{The \latex/ companion}, second ed., Addison-Wesley, Reading,
+MA, 2004. This is now also available as an ebook, in both English and
+German; see \url{https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/}.
+The front matter, including the full Table of Contents, can be viewed
+online, from a link on the same page.
+%Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and Alexander Samarin,
+%\booktitle{The \latex/ companion}, Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1994.
+% [\emph{Note: The 1994 edition is not a reliable guide for the
+% \nipkg{amsmath} package unless you refer to the errata for Chapter
+% 8\mdash file \fn{compan.err}, distributed with \LaTeX{}.}]
+
+\bibitem{msf} Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf,
+\textit{The new font family selection\mdash user
+interface to standard \latex/}, \journalname{TUGboat} \textbf{11},
+no.~2 (June 1990), pp.~297\ndash 305.
+
+\bibitem{jt} Michael Spivak, \booktitle{The joy of \tex/}, 2nd revised ed.,
+Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI, 1990.
+
+\bibsubhead{Package documentation}
+
+\bibitem{amshandbk}\booktitle{AMS author handbook}, separate versions
+for journal articles, monographs and proceedings articles, Amer. Math.
+Soc., Providence, RI, 2017;
+\url{https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/author-handbook}.
+
+\bibitem{amsfonts}\booktitle{AMSFonts version \textup{2.2d}\mdash user's guide},
+Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI, 2002; distributed
+with the AMSFonts package
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/amsfonts/doc/amsfndoc.pdf}.
+
+\bibitem{amsthdoc}\booktitle{Using the \pkg{amsthm} Package}, version 2.20.3,
+Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI, 2017;
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/amscls/doc/amsthdoc.pdf}.
+
+\bibitem{mt} Morten H{\o}gholm, Lars Madsen, \booktitle{The \pkg{mathtools}
+package}, 2018;
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/mathtools/mathtools.pdf}.
+
+\bibsubhead{Online resources}
+
+\bibitem{ltx-team} The \latex/ Project, \url{https://www.latex-project.org}.
+
+\bibitem{ctt} Online discussion group \texttt{comp.text.tex},
+\url{https://groups.google.com/forum/\#!forum/comp.text.tex}.
+
+\bibitem{tex-sx} Online question and answer forum \texttt{tex.stackexchange},
+\url{https://tex.stackexchange.com}.
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\printindex
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsldoc.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsopn.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsopn.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsopn.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsopn.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsopn.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amstext.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amstext.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amstext.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amstext.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amstext.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsxtra.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsxtra.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsxtra.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsxtra.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/amsxtra.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/changes.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/changes.txt (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/changes.txt 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+2019-02-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * amsmath.dtx (section{Mods, continued fractions, etc.}):
+ Command \overunderset added
+
+#########################
+# 2018-12-01 Release
+#########################
+
+2018-10-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * amsmath.dtx
+ Don't drop \frozen at everymath
+ Start LR-mode for \thinspace and friends if necessary (github/49)
+ Start LR-mode for \bigl and friends if necessary (github/49)
+ Start LR-mode for \smash if necessary (github/49)
+
+#########################
+# 2018-04-01 Release
+#########################
+
+2017-09-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * amsmath.dtx: ensure that overfull alignments give warnings in more cases
+ https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/141287/addmargin-enumerate-and-align-miss-an-overfull-hbox
+
+ * amsmath.dtx: move the nulldelimiterspace correction for closing
+ delimiters in \genfrac for extended TeXs to the line before
+ \nulldelimiterspace is locally set to 0pt.
+
+2017-04-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * amscd.dtx: typo fix in ProvidesPackage line.
+
+2016-11-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * alignedleftspace[yes|no|yesifneg] package options
+ * New genfrac implementation for XeTeX and LuaTeX
+ * Delete obsolete install.txt file.
+
+2016-06-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * amsmath.dtx: Add space to prevent runaway argument error with \dots \left...
+
+2016-05-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * amsmath.dtx: ignore spaces at start of \intertext
+
+2016-03-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * amsmath.dtx: Preserve box0 in \resetMathstrut@
+
+2016-03-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * amsopn.dtx: In xetex, and luatex, add version of \newmcodes@
+ that works even if - has a \Umathcode definition.
+
+2016-03-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * amsmath.dtx: missing %
+
+2016-02-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * amsmath.dtx: update to support \Umathchardef and \long macros in \dots.
+
+2013-01-14 amsmath.dtx 2.14
+
+ * amsmath.sty 2.14
+ -- Minimal changes to make amsmath compatible with stix.sty.
+
+2000-07-18 amsmath.dtx 2.13
+ -- After the numbering patches in 2.11, \notag failed in certain
+ circumstances: introduce some more auxiliary functions to sort
+ things out, and redefine \nonumber.
+
+2000-06-29 amstext.dtx 2.01
+ -- Use \f at size instead of \tf at size because they are not
+ necessarily the same and the former is better for putting a few
+ words into a display.
+
+2000-06-06 amsmath.dtx 2.12
+ -- Fix transposed lines in 2.11 patch.
+
+2000-06-02 amsmath.dtx 2.11
+
+ * amsmath.sty 2.11
+ -- Prevent "Arithmetic overflow" error by guarding against
+ divide-by-zero in \x at calc@shift at lc (align environment).
+
+ * amsdtx.dtx
+ -- Moved to the amscls distribution.
+
+2000-05-25 amsmath.dtx 2.10
+ -- Clear up error message for \allowdisplaybreaks[0].
+ -- Make mathdisplay re-entrant by introducing mathdisplay at stack,
+ to clear up numbering problems in unusual circumstances such as
+ \[ \] nested inside minipage inside equation.
+
+2000-04-21 amsmath.dtx 2.09
+ -- Ensure good catcodes for " etc.
+
+2000-03-16 amsmath.dtx 2.08
+ -- Fixed erroneous tag placement on split with fleqn/tbtags options.
+
+2000-03-15 amsmath.dtx 2.07
+ -- Add \reset at strutbox@ to deal with the following bug: After
+ $...\mbox{\Huge $...$}...$, line spacing is wrong in a
+ following "gather" or other environment that uses \strut at .
+ -- Patch to fix bug with intlimits option: too much space in the
+ middle of \iint.
+ -- Overhaul math accents again to fix a couple of bugs reported by
+ Thimm.
+
+2000-03-10 amsmath.dtx 2.06
+ -- Change \MathAccent to \mathaccentV so \DeclareMathAccent won't
+ give an error when redefining an accent.
+
+2000-01-06 amsmath.dtx 2.05
+ -- Fixed incorrect placement of fleqn/reqno equation numbers
+ inside indented lists (displaywidth < columnwidth). Changed the
+ multline/fleqn/leqno indent to match mathmargin when possible
+ instead of always just using multlinetaggap.
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/changes.txt
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/diffs-m.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/diffs-m.txt (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/diffs-m.txt 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,551 @@
+diffs-m.txt [1999/12/15] American Mathematical Society
+
+This is a synopsis of the principal differences between various versions
+of the amsmath package and its companion packages.
+
+A synopsis of changes in the "AMS-LaTeX" distribution is included at the
+end of this file. See also diffs-c.txt in the amslatex/classes area.
+
+Those upgrading from version 1.2 to version 2.0 will probably be
+interested in the question:
+
+ After I upgrade will anything fail in my pre-existing documents?
+
+Certain of the bug fixes have the potential to affect the output of
+existing documents in the following ways:
+
+---Vertical spacing for some displayed equations will change because
+"abovedisplayshortskip" is now applied when possible.
+
+---Incorrect horizontal spacing for certain math constructs will change,
+e.g., for \iint\nolimits or a subscript on a double-accented letter.
+
+---The default subscript placement in displayed formulas for \varinjlim,
+\varprojlim, \varliminf, \varlimsup is now below rather than to the
+side. To get the old behavior, add \nolimits---e.g.,
+\varliminf\nolimits_{...}.
+
+---Ellipsis dots in text (\ldots or \dots) will now behave the same as
+in standard LaTeX; the surrounding space may therefore change.
+
+During regression testing we found some errors cropping up in documents
+from incorrect usage that had not been caught with version 1.2. Although
+these errors are relatively rare, documents containing such usage will
+need to be corrected before they will run properly with version 2.0:
+
+---Use of two mutually exclusive display structures for the same
+display. In this example the outer \[ \] are redundant:
+
+ \[
+ \begin{align*}
+ ...
+ \end{align*}
+ \]
+
+---Inadequate argument markup for math accents:
+
+ \hat \mathcal{C}
+
+This should have been written with braces surrounding the argument of
+the \hat command: \hat{\mathcal{C}}.
+
+For documents where error messages crop up after the upgrade, there are
+various possible approaches, including:
+
+(a) Change instances of incorrect usage (if applicable).
+
+(b) Put a copy of amsmath.sty version 1.2 into the home directory of the
+document. Then it should continue to work the same as before.
+
+(c) Use the snapshot package in combination with a shell script to
+arrange that version 1.2 of amsmath is found instead of 2.0 when
+processing the document. See ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/tex/snapshot.*. This
+approach requires a certain amount of technical knowledge.
+
+(d) Downgrade to version 1.2 again.
+
+========================================================================
+Changes in amsmath 2.0 [November 1999]
+
+---The AMS-LaTeX User's Guide (amsldoc.tex) has been turned into the
+ AMSmath User's Guide by moving the amsthm documentation into a
+ separate file (amsthdoc.tex) in the amslatex/classes area.
+
+---Restored normal use of "shortskip" spacing in single equations.
+
+[!! NOTE: This means that page breaks may change in existing documents.]
+
+---Restored normal use of available shrink around binary operators in
+ single equations.
+
+---Fixed poor subscript placement for double-accented letters. Math
+accent handling was reworked in the process in such a way that the
+capitalized forms of the math accent commands are no longer necessary.
+\hat{\hat{X}} will do proper alignment of the second accent. \Hat et
+cetera are retained for compabitility reasons. (Thanks to Javier Bezos
+for donating some code from his accents package.)
+
+[!! NOTE: Improper math accent use will now produce wrong output.]
+
+Suppose that we have \boldH defined in the preamble as
+\newcommand{\boldH}{\mathbf{H}}. Then the following examples illustrate
+recommended usage.
+
+ \hat{\mathbf{H}} OK
+ \hat{\boldH} OK
+ \hat\boldH Works OK, but deprecated by the LaTeX book
+ \hat\mathbf{H} Not OK! Output will be incorrect.
+
+Since the output will be wrong, amsmath gives an error message when the
+last variant is detected.
+
+---The following kinds of mixed structures worked by happenstance with
+ amsmath 1.2, although they should have produced an error message.
+ With amsmath 2.0 they will produce an error or warning message.
+
+ [!! NOTE: Potential error messages]
+
+ % Outer \[ \] is redundant
+
+ \[
+ \begin{align*}
+ ...
+ \end{align*}
+ \]
+
+ % Outer \begin{equation*} ... \end{equation*} is redundant
+
+ \begin{equation*}\begin{alignat*}{2}
+ ...
+ \end{alignat*}
+ \end{equation*}
+
+ % No printed material is allowed between \begin{equation} and
+ % \begin{split}:
+
+ \begin{equation*}\left \{
+ \begin{split}
+ ...
+ \end{split}\right .
+ \end{equation*}
+
+---diff12.tex is replaced by diffs-m.txt and diffs-c.txt, with the
+ latter moving to the amslatex/classes area.
+
+---Added an "?" option which gives some information about the available
+ documentation.
+
+---The amsmath definitions for matrix, pmatrix, and cases are
+ incompatible with the plain-TeX syntax for \pmatrix, \matrix, and
+ \cases, which are used occasionally by some authors in LaTeX
+ documents. In version 2.0 the error messages resulting from the
+ plain-TeX syntax have been made more intelligible.
+
+---If you need the boldsymbol facilities of the amsbsy package, use of
+ the "bm" (boldmath) package is recommended instead for new documents.
+ The amsbsy package is retained for compatibility with existing
+ documents. If you have a recent version of LaTeX (1998 or newer) you
+ already have the bm package; otherwise you may need to get it from
+ CTAN. (It is not an AMS package.)
+
+---\iint\nolimits: Fixed poor placement of subscript (also \iiint,
+\idotsint, etc).
+
+---\varinjlim, \varprojlim, \varliminf, \varlimsup: Default to
+\displaylimits instead of nolimits.
+
+---Fixed alignedat so that it doesn't take the first token of its
+ contents and try to interpret it as a number.
+
+---Leave text version of \dots and \ldots unchanged.
+
+---Changed \numberwithin so it no longer assumes previous definition of
+ \thesomething contained no prefixes.
+
+---\mathbf{\Gamma}: Leave cap Greek letters alone instead of converting
+ them from variable (fam 7) to fixed (fam 0). \mathbf{\gamma} still
+ fails---but that's a math font problem.
+
+---\mathindent is aliased to \@mathmargin so that when the fleqn option
+ is used, users can reset it as the LaTeX book advertises.
+
+---With the showkeys package: Corrected loss of marginal notes when
+labels occurred inside an align environment.
+
+---Carried over some tweaks (\bmod, \right/leftarrowfill) from the 1996
+ version of plain.tex.
+
+---Adjusted spacing of overarrow@ and underarrow@ to allow more room for
+ larger cmsy arrowheads.
+
+---Corrected spurious "overfull \hbox" warnings for \xrightarrow.
+
+---Corrected poor spacing for \xleftarrow.
+
+---Removed the \leavevmode in \smash which caused trouble for some
+ applications (e.g., the crop package) that expected the original
+ LaTeX definition.
+
+---Changed \def to \newcommand/\newenvironment where appropriate.
+
+---Use \sqrtsign instead of \@@sqrt (but include a backward
+ compatibility hack for the latter).
+
+---Left brace in \env{cases} environment would fail to work in
+ certain circumstances: Fix by using \lbrace instead of \{.
+
+---Use \ignorespacesafterend where applicable instead of
+ \global\@ignoretrue.
+
+---Protected commands in the definition of \theequation were
+ incorrectly expanded by the subequations environment when copying
+ the definition to \theparentequation: Fix by using \protected at edef.
+
+---Spurious extra space following punctuation at that end of a display:
+ In \math at cr, \math at cr@@, etc, use \iffalse{\fi instead of simply { to
+ keep an unwanted mathord atom from being added at the end of the
+ current math list; added \endmultline at math to work around a similar
+ sort of problem specific to the `multline' environment.
+
+---Various wrong results or no effect for \displaybreak inside "align",
+ "alignat", etc. Resetting \dspbrk at level in the \everycr of
+ \@display at init cleared most of these up.
+
+---Changed \displaybreak to issue an error message if enclosed in boxing
+ environment that will keep it from having any effect.
+
+---Turned off \displaybreak during the measuring phase of multline.
+
+---Fixed some numbering problems with multline and multline* and error
+ for use of \tag.
+
+---Use \@gtempa instead of \@tempa where assigned globally (standard
+ save stack precaution).
+
+---Save and restore \column@ to keep aligned from screwing up the column
+ counting of a parent align environment. Made \column@ assignments
+ uniformly global, except in a couple of places where the risk of side
+ effects seemed too great.
+
+---Error recovery for misspelled '\end{multline}' was not very helpful.
+ Improve \collect at body along lines suggested by Hellstr\xF6m.
+
+---Fixed up certain number placement problems with align
+
+---Add \alignsafe at testopt to work around a LaTeX bug: when a nested
+ alignment environment that takes an optional argument has an empty
+ first cell (i.e., begins with an &) LaTeX's optional argument
+ scanning screws up the alignment state.
+
+---Add `mathdisplay' environment (internal use) to correct several
+ problems of \[ \] and the `equation' environment arising from the
+ previous implementation as a degenerate case of `gather'.
+
+---It is possible now to use \eeq as an abbreviation for \end{equation}
+(one of the consequences of the preceding change). But still not \eal
+for \end{align} or certain other display structures.
+
+---Reorganize `split' internal calling sequence to go along with the use
+ of `mathdisplay' in \[ \] and `equation'.
+
+---Suppression of LaTeX error messages during measuring phase made
+ primitive TeX errors harder to understand; stop suppressing. (As a
+ result, users will sometimes get redundant error messages now.)
+ Remove obsolete Sb, Sp environments again.
+
+---The file amsintx.dtx was removed from the distribution pending
+ further development.
+
+---Remove the \ifinany@ switch, use \spread at equation instead to achieve
+ the same ends.
+
+---Remove unbracefonts@ function, no longer needed after changes in
+ math accent handling.
+
+---Got rid of the special trap for '^x that had been carried over from
+AMS-TeX.
+
+---Made \overline, \doteq, \longrightarrow, etc, robust.
+
+---Changed \relbar to use \std at minus---otherwise \underleftrightarrow
+works poorly in a \DeclareMathOperator definition.
+
+---Use \new at ifnextchar in matrix, pmatrix, cases so that \\<newline>[x]
+doesn't trigger an error.
+
+---Bug fix for nested use of \label inside minipage inside equation.
+
+---Add minalignsep after every second column in aligned, for consistency
+with align.
+
+========================================================================
+Changes in amsmath 1.2 [January 1995]
+
+---Name change; relation to the "amsfonts" package
+
+In version 1.1 of AMS-LaTeX, the name of this package was "amstex". The
+new name is "amsmath". The amstex package automatically invoked the
+amsfonts package as well; the amsmath package does not.
+
+---Adapted for LaTeX2e
+
+Old method of invocation:
+
+ \documentstyle[amstex]{article}% LaTeX 2.09
+
+New method of invocation:
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \usepackage{amsmath}
+
+---Handling of options intlim, nosumlim, nonamelm, righttag, ctagsplt
+
+Old usage:
+
+ \documentstyle[amstex,righttag,intlim]
+
+New usage:
+
+ \usepackage[reqno,intlimits]{amsmath}
+
+Several option names were changed (mainly, they are no longer restricted
+to eight characters):
+
+ intlim -> intlimits
+ nosumlim -> nosumlimits
+ nonamelm -> nonamelimits
+ righttag -> reqno [for consistency with "leqno"]
+ ctagsplt -> centertags
+
+---Character @ is no longer used as a special command prefix
+
+Certain commands in the amstex pkg started with "@" instead of "\". This
+special usage has been discontinued, except for the amscd package, and
+then only within the CD environment. Practically speaking, this means
+primarily that it is no longer necessary to use doubled @@ to get a
+single printed @ character (e.g., in e-mail addresses).
+
+---The @, and @! micro-spacing commands are no longer provided
+
+As a consequence of the @ character change, "@," and "@!" are no longer
+recognized spacing commands. An \mspace command is provided that can be
+used instead; see the AMSmath User's Guide.
+
+---Extensible arrow commands @>>> and @<<<
+
+The commands @>>> and @<<< are no longer available [except in the CD
+environment of the amscd package]; alternative commands \xleftarrow and
+\xrightarrow are provided by the amsmath package. The sub and
+superscripts are given through an optional resp. mandatory argument, for
+example
+
+ X\xleftarrow{b}Y % superscript "b" only
+ X\xrightarrow[\alpha]{\beta}Y % sub alpha, sup beta
+
+---The command \bold has been superseded by the command \mathbf, as the
+latter is now the standard name provided by LaTeX for this purpose.
+
+---The commands \newsymbol, \frak, \Bbb are no longer available because
+the amsfonts package is not loaded by amsmath. In any case those
+commands now have new names---\frak -> \mathfrak, \Bbb -> \mathbb, etc.
+See the amsfonts documentation for further details.
+
+---The amsmath package provides \lvert and \rvert to use for vert-bar
+symbols when they act as delimiters (compare \langle, \rangle for
+angle-bracket delimiters). Commands \lVert and \rVert are likewise
+provided instead of \| for paired-delimiter use of the double-vert
+symbol. Use of | and \| for paired delimiters can lead to incorrect
+spacing in rare cases. Further discussion is found in the AMS-LaTeX
+user's guide (amsldoc.tex).
+
+---The ~ command is now left unchanged by amsmath; the change
+that makes it remove a redundant preceding or following space character
+is now done only by AMS documentclasses (in version 1.1 this was done by
+the amstex package).
+
+---The following rarely used commands are removed to the amsxtra
+package: \accentedsymbol, \sphat, \spcheck, \sptilde, \spdot, \spddot,
+\spdddot, \spbreve, \@))), \@(((.
+
+---The six generalized fraction commands \over, \overwithdelims, \atop,
+\atopwithdelims, \above, \abovewithdelims are deprecated and produce
+warning messages. Their functionality can be obtained through \frac,
+\binom, and \genfrac instead. See amsldoc.tex and technote.tex for
+further details.
+
+---The \fracwithdelims command is gone, as \genfrac provides
+equivalent functionality (and a little more).
+
+---The optional argument of \frac that allowed changing the thickness of
+the fraction line is gone. That functionality is now provided only
+through \genfrac: the need to change the line thickness is so rare in
+practice that it seems better not to burden the ubiquitous \frac command
+with the somewhat time-consuming look-ahead process required for an
+optional argument. I.e., this change will contribute in a small way to
+making your documents run faster.
+
+---The commands \lcfrac and \rcfrac for left or right alignment of
+continued fraction numerators are gone; they are replaced by an optional
+argument of the \cfrac command.
+
+---A new command \DeclareMathOperator is provided for defining new
+operator names:
+
+\DeclareMathOperator{\Tr}{Tr}
+\DeclareMathOperator*{\xlim}{x-lim}
+
+The * form makes the operator name produce limit-style sub and
+superscripts, like \max or \lim. This is now the preferred method,
+instead of using the old command \operatorname (which is, however,
+retained for now). The command \operatornamewithlimits has been renamed
+\operatorname*. These commands now can also be obtained through a
+separate package amsopn, so it's not necessary to load the entire
+amsmath package just to get that feature.
+
+---Environments "Sb", "Sp" retired.
+
+The environments Sb and Sp for multiline subscripts have been replaced
+by a single command \substack, used as follows:
+
+\sum_{\substack{first line\\second line}}
+
+This command can be used equally well in a subscript or superscript, and
+provides better vertical positioning (as compared to Sb, Sp) if a
+multiline subscript is placed on the side, as perhaps for an integral.
+There is also a slightly generalized alternative, an environment
+subarray that allows you to specify either centering or left alignment
+for the contents:
+
+\sum_{\begin{subarray}{l}first line\\second line\end{subarray}}
+
+---New command \nobreakdash
+
+A command \nobreakdash is provided to suppress the possibility of a
+linebreak after the following hyphen or dash. For example, if you write
+"$p$\nobreakdash-adic" then a linebreak will never be taken between the
+hyphen and the "adic".
+
+---The placement of equation numbers has been substantially improved for
+align, gather, and split. Numbers will now never overlap on top of the
+equation body (as far as we can ascertain), and they are much less
+likely to be shifted up or down unnecessarily when there is actually
+adequate space to leave the number in the normal place. In a few
+remaining cases, an equation number will be shifted unnecessarily
+because technical complications make accurate measurement of the
+available room too difficult; for those cases a \raisetag command is
+provided that allows you to manually adjust the vertical position of the
+equation number.
+
+---The [xx]align[at] family of environments has been thoroughly revised:
+now the xalignat environment is gone, as its function has been merged
+into the align environment (it's no longer necessary to specify how many
+side-by-side structures, as was required for xalignat, because align
+automatically handles any number of them). Similarly, the xxalignat
+environment has been replaced by an environment flalign that doesn't
+require you to specify how many side-by-side structures will be needed.
+Certain numbering problems (presence of an equation number when it
+should be absent, or vice versa) have also been cleared up.
+
+(Thanks to David M. Jones for his substantial [volunteer] work behind
+this change and the preceding one.)
+
+---The alignedat environment was changed to take two arguments rather
+than one: a mandatory argument (as formerly) specifying the number of
+align structures, and a new optional one specifying the placement of the
+environment (parallel to the optional argument of aligned). However,
+aligned is simpler to use, allowing any number of aligned structures
+automatically, and therefore the use of alignedat is deprecated.
+
+---The seldom-used command \oldnos is gone; if you need it, you should
+consult the LaTeX documentation on using fonts (e.g., fntguide.tex) to
+find out how to construct an equivalent command.
+
+---A new subequations environment causes all numbered equation
+environments within its scope to be numbered (4.9a) (4.9b) (4.9c) etc.,
+if the preceding numbered equation was 4.8. A \label command immediately
+after \begin{subequations} will produce a \ref of the parent number
+`4.9', not `4.9a'. The counters used by the subequations environment are
+parentequation and equation and standard uses of \addtocounter,
+\setcounter, etc., are possible with those counter names.
+
+---The amsmath package (unlike amstex) respects the setting provided by
+the documentclass for putting equation numbers on the right or the left.
+[Technical note: a documentclass that has leqno as the default should
+explicitly pass that option to the amsmath package with
+\PassOptionsToPackage in order for it to be effective.]
+
+---The fleqn option for left-aligned instead of centered equations is
+now supported (thanks to David M. Jones).
+
+************************************************************************
+The remainder of this file discusses some changes that do not directly
+pertain to the amsmath package but to the parent distribution known as
+"AMS-LaTeX".
+
+========================================================================
+Changes in AMS-LaTeX 2.0
+
+---The AMS-LaTeX User's Guide (amsldoc.tex) is split up into amsldoc.tex
+and amsthdoc.tex, with the latter moving into the "classes" area.
+
+---The file amslatex.faq was split into amsmath.faq and amsclass.faq.
+
+---The file amslatex.bug was done away with; most of the information was
+merged into diffs-m.txt, diffs-c.txt, amsmath.faq, and amsclass.faq.
+
+========================================================================
+Changes in AMS-LaTeX 1.2
+
+---Adapted for LaTeX2e
+
+AMS-LaTeX 1.0 and 1.1 were designed to work with LaTeX 2.09, which
+became obsolete in 1994 with the appearance of "LaTeX2e". AMS-LaTeX 1.2
+has been extensively adapted to take advantage of various features of
+LaTeX2e. It is no longer a separate TeX format---i.e., it does not need
+to be invoked by a separate "amslatex" command.
+
+---LaTeX 2.09 font commands (\bf, \it, etc)
+
+Pre-existing documents will for the most part continue to work fine
+without requiring any changes. However, depending on the installation
+options used for your copy of AMS-LaTeX 1.1 you may need to update the
+options list of the \documentstyle command by adding newlfont, for
+example:
+
+ \documentstyle[newlfont]{amsart}
+
+---The packages amsfonts, amssymb were moved to the AMSFonts
+distribution. They used to be included in the AMS-LaTeX distribution for
+pragmatic reasons but their natural home is with the AMSFonts
+distribution.
+
+---Package amstex renamed to amsmath
+
+The amstex package has been renamed amsmath. The old name `amstex' came
+from the fact that version 1.0 was a more or less straight port into
+LaTeX of selected portions from the macro package AmS-TeX written by
+Michael Spivak, but the historical origins of the package are likely of
+less interest to the general usership---especially looking to the
+future---than a straightforward declaration in the name `amsmath' of the
+sort of features that are provided.
+
+Another important reason for the name change was to make possible some
+progress that would be out of the question (because of the impact on
+existing documents) if the name `amstex' were retained. For example,
+unlike amstex, amsmath doesn't automatically load the amsfonts package,
+as that package was moved out to the AMSFonts distribution as described
+above. If this change were not accompanied by a name change, many
+existing documents would have to be updated by hand (adding
+\usepackage{amsfonts}) in order to run without error. A frozen version
+of amstex.sty is provided for processing pre-existing documents; it
+won't have active maintainence henceforth except for bug fixes. For new
+documents, authors should use the amsmath package.
+
+Therefore, "\usepackage{amstex}" is incorrect usage---do not rely on the
+1994 edition of `The LaTeX Companion' in this respect (unless you obtain
+the errata for Chapter 8).
+
+---New documentclass amsproc
+
+A new documentclass amsproc was added for collections of articles, such as
+the proceedings of a conference.
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/diffs-m.txt
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/manifest.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/manifest.txt (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/manifest.txt 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+README.txt
+amsbsy.dtx
+amsbsy.ins
+amsbsy.pdf
+amscd.dtx
+amscd.ins
+amscd.pdf
+amsgen.dtx
+amsgen.ins
+amsgen.pdf
+amsldoc.pdf
+amsldoc.tex
+amsmath.dtx
+amsmath.ins
+amsmath.pdf
+amsopn.dtx
+amsopn.ins
+amsopn.pdf
+amstex.sty
+amstext.dtx
+amstext.ins
+amstext.pdf
+amsxtra.dtx
+amsxtra.ins
+amsxtra.pdf
+diffs-m.txt
+subeqn.pdf
+subeqn.tex
+technote.pdf
+technote.tex
+testmath.pdf
+testmath.tex
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/manifest.txt
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/subeqn.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/subeqn.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/subeqn.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/subeqn.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/subeqn.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/subeqn.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/subeqn.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/subeqn.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,202 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%% filename = "subeqn.tex",
+%%% version = "1.2c",
+%%% date = "1999/11/29",
+%%% time = "14:49:29 EST",
+%%% checksum = "29866 202 668 6426",
+%%% author = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%% copyright = "Copyright 1999 American Mathematical Society,
+%%% all rights reserved. Copying of this file is
+%%% authorized only if either:
+%%% (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy,
+%%% including name; OR
+%%% (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%% to some other name.",
+%%% address = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%% Technical Support,
+%%% Electronic Products and Services,
+%%% P. O. Box 6248,
+%%% Providence, RI 02940,
+%%% USA",
+%%% telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%% 800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%% FAX = "401-331-3842",
+%%% email = "tech-support at ams.org (Internet)",
+%%% supported = "yes",
+%%% keywords = "latex, amslatex, ams-latex, amstex",
+%%% abstract = "This is part of the AMS-\LaTeX{} distribution.
+%%% It is a sample document illustrating the use of
+%%% the subequations environment and the effect of
+%%% the fleqn option.",
+%%% docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16
+%%% checksum as the first value, followed by the
+%%% equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
+%%% count) utility output of lines, words, and
+%%% characters. This is produced by Robert
+%%% Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%%% }
+%%% ====================================================================
+\documentclass[fleqn]{article}
+
+\title{Test of subequations environment}
+\author{mjd}
+
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\numberwithin{equation}{section}
+
+\newcommand{\env}[1]{{\normalfont\texttt{#1}}}
+
+\AtEndDocument{\multipasswarning}
+\newcommand{\multipasswarning}{%
+ \clearpage
+ \typeout{%
+ **********************************************************************}
+ \typeout{%
+ Note: This document needs to run through LaTeX three times, instead of}
+ \typeout{%
+ the usual two, to resolve indirect cross-references.}
+ \typeout{%
+ **********************************************************************}
+}
+
+\makeatletter
+% Omit the warning message if three passes have been completed (on
+% first pass \ref{check} is undefined and it is set to 0; on second
+% pass \ref{check} is 0 and set to 1; on third pass it is 1).
+\def\checkref{\begingroup
+ \@ifundefined{r at check}{\let\r at check\relax\def\@currentlabel{0}}{\def\@currentlabel{1}}%
+ \ifnum1=0\expandafter\@firstoftwo\r at check\relax
+ \global\let\multipasswarning\relax
+ \fi
+ \label{check}%
+ \endgroup}
+\makeatother
+
+\begin{document}
+\section{Prime equation numbers}
+
+First an equation.
+\begin{equation}\label{e:previous}
+A=B
+\end{equation}
+That was equation \eqref{e:previous}.
+
+Then the same, with a prime on the number.\checkref
+\begin{equation}
+\tag{\ref{e:previous}$'$}\label{e:prevprime}
+C=D
+\end{equation}
+And that was equation \eqref{e:prevprime}.
+
+Notice, by the way, that when a \verb"\ref" occurs inside a \verb"\tag",
+and that \verb"\tag" is then \verb"\label"'d, a \verb"\ref" for the the
+second \verb"\label" requires \emph{three} runs of \LaTeX{} in order to
+get the proper value. (If you run through the logic of \LaTeX{}'s
+cross-referencing mechanisms as they apply in this case, you will see
+that this is necessary.)
+
+\section{Subnumbered equations}
+
+Here is a,b,c sub-numbering.
+\begin{subequations}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+A&=&B\\
+D&=&C \label{e:middle}\\
+E&=&F
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+That was produced with the \env{eqnarray} environment; the middle line
+was labeled as \eqref{e:middle}.
+
+An equation following the end of the \verb"subequations" environment
+should revert to normal numbering:
+\begin{equation}\label{e:check}
+H<K
+\end{equation}
+A check on the labeling: that was equation~\eqref{e:check}.
+
+The sub-numbered equations can be spread out through the text, like
+this:
+\begin{subequations}
+\begin{equation}
+A=B
+\end{equation}
+The \verb"subequations" environment can span arbitrary text between
+subsidiary equations. The only restriction is that if there are any
+numbered equations inside the \verb"subequations" environment that break
+out of the subequation numbering sequence, they would have to be handled
+specially.
+\begin{equation}
+D=C \label{e:newmiddle}
+\end{equation}
+More arbitrary text.
+\begin{equation}
+E=F
+\end{equation}
+\end{subequations}
+Label check: the middle one was \eqref{e:newmiddle}
+
+A final equation for a numbering check.
+\begin{equation}\label{e:final}
+G=H
+\end{equation}
+That equation was labeled as \eqref{e:final}.
+
+\section{Tests of \env{align}, \env{gather}, and other
+AMS-\protect\LaTeX{} environments}
+
+The \env{align} environment:
+\begin{subequations}
+\begin{align}
+\label{align:a}A+B&=B+A\\
+\label{align:b}C&=D+E\\
+\label{align:c}E&=F
+\end{align}
+\end{subequations}
+Label check: that was \eqref{align:a}, \eqref{align:b}, and
+\eqref{align:c}.
+
+The \env{align} environment again:
+\begin{subequations}
+\begin{align}
+\label{xalign:a}A+B&=B& B&=B+A\\
+\label{xalign:b}C&=D+E& C\oplus D&=E\\
+\label{xalign:c}E&=F& E'&=F'
+\end{align}
+\end{subequations}
+Label check: that was \eqref{xalign:a}, \eqref{xalign:b}, and
+\eqref{xalign:c}.
+
+The \env{gather} environment. For the third line we refer to one of the
+numbers in the first \env{align} structure.
+\begin{subequations}
+\begin{gather}
+\label{gather:a}A+B=B\\
+\label{gather:b}C=D+E\\
+\tag{\ref{align:c}$'$}\label{gather:c}E=F
+\end{gather}
+\end{subequations}
+Label check: that was \eqref{gather:a},
+\eqref{gather:b}, and
+\eqref{gather:c}.
+
+The next \env{subequations} environment encompasses two separate
+equations. A \env{split} environment:
+\begin{subequations}
+\begin{equation}
+\label{split:x}
+\begin{split}
+A&=B+C+F\\
+&=G
+\end{split}
+\end{equation}
+and a \env{multline} environment:
+\begin{multline}\label{multline:x}
+A[B]C[D]E[F]G[[H[I]J[K]L[M]N]]=\\
+H[I]J[K]L[M]N[O]P[Q]R[S]T[U]V[W]X[Y]Z
+\end{multline}
+\end{subequations}
+Label check: That was \eqref{split:x} and \eqref{multline:x}.
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/subeqn.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/technote.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/technote.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/technote.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/technote.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/technote.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/technote.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/technote.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/technote.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,233 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%% filename = "technote.tex",
+%%% version = "2.0",
+%%% date = "1999/11/15",
+%%% time = "15:07:20 EST",
+%%% checksum = "58506 233 1647 12005",
+%%% author = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%% copyright = "Copyright 1995, 1999 American Mathematical Society,
+%%% all rights reserved. Copying of this file is
+%%% authorized only if either:
+%%% (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy,
+%%% including name; OR
+%%% (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%% to some other name.",
+%%% address = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%% Technical Support,
+%%% Electronic Products and Services,
+%%% P. O. Box 6248,
+%%% Providence, RI 02940,
+%%% USA",
+%%% telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%% 800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%% FAX = "401-331-3842",
+%%% email = "tech-support at ams.org (Internet)",
+%%% supported = "yes",
+%%% keywords = "amsmath, latex",
+%%% abstract = "This is part of the AMS-\LaTeX{} distribution. It
+%%% is a document discussing some technical issues in the
+%%% contents and interface of AMS-\LaTeX{} packages."
+%%% docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 checksum
+%%% as the first value, followed by the equivalent of
+%%% the standard UNIX wc (word count) utility output of
+%%% lines, words, and characters. This is produced by
+%%% Robert Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%%% }
+%%% ====================================================================
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% LaTeX 2.09 can't be used (nor non-LaTeX)
+[1994/12/01]% LaTeX date must December 1994 or later
+\documentclass{amsdtx}
+
+\title{Technical notes on the \pkg{amsmath} package}
+\author{American Mathematical Society\\Michael Downes}
+\date{1999/10/29}
+
+\markboth
+ {Technical notes on the \pkg{amsmath} package}
+ {Technical notes on the \pkg{amsmath} package}
+\renewcommand{\sectionmark}[1]{}
+
+\providecommand{\etc}[1]{etc.}
+
+\providecommand{\begend}[1]{%
+ {\ntt \symbol{92}begin\symbol{123}#1\symbol{125}}
+ \ldots\ {\ntt\symbol{92}end\symbol{123}#1\symbol{125}}%
+}
+
+\MakeShortVerb{\|}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+These notes are miscellaneous remarks on some technical questions
+applicable to version 2.0 of \amslatex/.
+
+\section{Deprecated and disallowed commands}
+
+Certain commands that were in the \pkg{amstex} package (the predecessor,
+in \amslatex/ 1.0 and 1.1, of the \pkg{amsmath} package) were moved into
+\pkg{amsxtra} because they seemed to be little-used relics:
+\cn{accentedsymbol}, \qq{sup accents} (\cn{sptilde}, \cn{sphat}, etc.).
+
+Certain other commands\mdash e.g., \cn{over}, \cn{pmatrix}, and
+\cn{cases}\mdash are changed by the \pkg{amsmath} package to produce
+warning messages or error messages, depending on their history; these
+are discussed in more detail in the following sections.
+
+\section{Why do \cn{matrix}, \cn{pmatrix}, and \cn{cases} stop working
+when I add the \pkg{amsmath} package?}
+
+If you used the \fn{plain.tex} versions of \cn{matrix}, \cn{pmatrix}, or
+\cn{cases} in a document and then later converted the document to use
+the \pkg{amsmath} package (or one of the AMS documentclasses, which
+automatically call the \pkg{amsmath} package internally), the instances
+of those commands will produce error messages. The problem is that when
+\latex/ was originally created, it adopted most of its mathematics
+features straight from \fn{plain.tex}. But in the case of \cn{matrix},
+\cn{pmatrix}, \cn{cases} this was a mistake\mdash the \fn{plain.tex}
+syntax for them is decidedly non-\latex/ in style, for example the fact
+that they use \cs{cr} instead of \cn{\\} to mark line breaks, and they
+don't use \cn{begin} and \cn{end}. In basic \latex/ this mistake will be
+perpetuated at least until \latex/3 appears, in order to avoid breaking
+existing documents. But no existing documents that were written with the
+\pkg{amsmath} package have that syntactic problem, as \pkg{amsmath}
+provides proper \latex/-syntax versions of \cn{matrix} and the others.
+The possibility of optionally allowing the \fn{plain.tex} variants to
+make document conversion easier seems ill-advised since those variants
+are so blatantly wrong in a \latex/ context. The \env{array} environment
+ought to have been used instead.
+
+\section{Why do \cn{over}, \cn{atop}, \cn{above} [\dots{\ntt withdelims}]
+ give a warning when I add the \pkg{amsmath} package?}
+
+Using the six generalized fraction commands \cn{over},
+\cn{overwithdelims}, \cn{atop}, \cn{atopwithdelims}, \cn{above},
+\cn{abovewithdelims} is not really a good idea in \latex/, for reasons
+explained below. I construe \latex/'s provision of \cs{frac}, and the
+lack of any mention in the \latex/ book of the primitive fraction
+commands, as an implicit injunction against their use, although I don't
+think Lamport actually spent a lot of time pondering the issue, and the
+basic \latex/ version of \cn{frac} provides access only to \cn{over},
+not to \cn{atop}, \cn{above}, or the \verb'withdelims' variants. The
+\pkg{amsmath} package, however, provides a \cn{genfrac} command that
+gives user-level access to all six of the generalized fraction
+primitives in a way that conforms to the syntactic conventions followed
+by all other \latex/ commands.
+
+Not only is the unusual syntax of the \tex/ primitives rather out of
+place in \latex/, but furthermore that syntax seems to be responsible
+for one of the most significant flaws in \tex/'s mathematical
+typesetting capabilities: the fact that the current mathstyle at any
+given point in a math formula cannot be determined until the end of the
+formula, because of the possibility that a following generalized
+fraction command will change the mathstyle of the \emph{preceding}
+material. To cite two of the worst side effects: \cn{mathchoice} must
+actually typeset all four of its arguments, instead of being able to
+immediately select only one; and, were it possible to always know the
+current math style at a given point, math font selection would be
+greatly simplified and the upper limit of 16 different math font
+\cn{fam}s would never be a problem as \cn{text,script[script]font}
+assignments for any \cn{fam} could take immediate effect and therefore
+could be changed arbitrarily often within a single formula. More
+concretely, math font selection difficulties are responsible for many of
+the more convoluted passages in the source code of \latex/'s NFSS (that
+does font loading on demand) and of the \pkg{amsmath} package, and by
+extension it has historically been responsible for significant delays in
+making new features available to end users and for making those features
+more prone to bugs.
+
+There are additional bad consequences following from the syntax of those
+generalized fraction commands that only become evident when you do some
+writing of nontrivial macros for math use. For example, as things
+currently stand you cannot measure the size of any object in math
+without going through \cn{mathchoice} and \emph{leaving and reentering
+math mode} via \verb'\hbox{$' (which then introduces complications
+regarding \cn{everymath} and \cn{mathsurround}). And it seems that
+uncertainty about the current mathstyle is the only barrier to allowing
+the use of mu units with \cn{vrule}, to make vertical struts in
+constructing compound symbols or notation. And so on and so forth.
+
+\section{The \opt{fleqn} option and \cn{mathindent}}
+
+Strictly speaking, the \pkg{amsmath} package doesn't use \cn{mathindent}
+to control the left indent of displayed equations when the \opt{fleqn}
+option is in effect: it uses an internal parameter \cs{@mathmargin}
+instead. However, for compatibility with existing \latex/ documentation,
+\pkg{amsmath} turns \cn{mathindent} into an alias for \cs{@mathmargin}.
+There is a small risk here: In the plain \latex/ implementation,
+\cn{mathindent} is a dimen register, but with \pkg{amsmath}
+\cs{@mathmargin} is a skip register and, by association, so is
+\cn{mathindent}. If any package or documentclass uses \cn{mathindent} in
+a way that depends on it being a dimen register, when used in
+conjunction with the \pkg{amsmath} package it may be vulnerable to a
+well-known pitfall having to do with the primitive \tex/ lookahead for a
+\texttt{plus} or \texttt{minus} key word. However if the standard
+\latex/ commands \cn{setlength} and \cn{addtolength} are used to modify
+\cn{mathindent} then this problem will not arise.
+
+\section{Why can't I use abbreviations for \protect\begend{align}?}
+
+Authors often like to use abbreviations such as |\beq| |\eeq| for
+|\begin{equation}| |\end{equation}|. For some environments defined by
+the \pkg{amsmath} package, such as \env{align}, \env{gather},
+\env{multline}, and others of the same general type, this does not work:
+An attempt to define |\bal| |\eal| as shorthand for |\begin{align}|
+|\end{align}| will fail with a puzzling error message. This has to do
+with unfortunately nontrivial technical complications: the given
+environments must read their contents as a delimited macro argument
+because they do multipass processing of the contents using algorithms
+inherited from Spivak's \fn{amstex.tex}. The obvious
+solution\mdash substitution of different algorithms that do box shuffling
+instead of token shuffling for the multipass calculations\mdash would
+require rewriting these display environments from the ground up; while
+that is a worthy goal, it was beyond the original scope of the
+\amslatex/ project. Work is under way on an auxiliary package called
+\pkg{breqn} that addresses not only this problem but a number of others;
+at the time of this writing, however [September 1999] it has only
+progressed as far as a beta release.
+
+Some workarounds:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item |\def\bal#1\eal{\begin{align}#1\end{align}}|
+\item Define |\newcommand{\env}[2]{\begin{#1}#2\end{#1}}| and then use
+ |\env{align}{...}|
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{The \pkg{upref} package}
+
+The reason for splitting out the \pkg{upref} package instead of
+automatically incorporating it in the \cls{amsart} and \cls{amsbook}
+classes is this: It involves low-level surgery on an important \latex/
+command. This means that if ever this command changes in the future (as
+it did between versions 2.09 and 2e of \latex/) we have a maintenance
+problem. And the benefit that \pkg{upref} provides is something that
+most end users don't care much about.
+
+\section{The \pkg{amsintx} package}
+
+After a very preliminary trial release the \pkg{amsintx} package was
+withdrawn to await further development. It is still considered a worthy
+project but has simply not yet made it to the head of the priority queue
+in the AMS \latex/ development program, as it has had to contend with a
+number of other equally worthy projects for development time.
+
+\section{Hyphenation in the documentation}
+
+Hyphenation was allowed for certain long command names in
+\fn{amsldoc.tex}; this presented technical difficulties because \latex/
+normally deactivates hyphenation for tt fonts. The method chosen to
+reinstate hyphenation was to turn off the encoding-specific function
+\cs{OT1+cmtt} that disables the \cs{hyphenchar} for tt fonts; see the
+definition of \cn{allowtthyphens} in \fn{amsdtx.dtx}. Then a list of all
+tt words in the document was gathered (from the \fn{.idx} file, produced
+by the \cn{cn}, \cn{fn}, \cn{pkg}, etc. commands) and \cn{showhyphens}
+was applied to this list. The result was another list in the resulting
+\tex/ log, containing those words in a form suitable for the argument of
+\cn{hyphenation}. That list was then edited by hand to overrule
+undesirable hyphenations; words with acceptable hyphenations were
+dropped from the list, as they don't need to be repeated there.
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/technote.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/testmath.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/testmath.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/testmath.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/testmath.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/testmath.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/testmath.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/testmath.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/testmath.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,2342 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%% filename = "testmath.tex",
+%%% version = "2.0",
+%%% date = "1999/11/15",
+%%% time = "15:09:17 EST",
+%%% checksum = "07762 2342 7811 82371",
+%%% author = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%% copyright = "Copyright 1995, 1999 American Mathematical Society,
+%%% all rights reserved. Copying of this file is
+%%% authorized only if either:
+%%% (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy,
+%%% including name; OR
+%%% (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%% to some other name.",
+%%% address = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%% Technical Support,
+%%% Electronic Products and Services,
+%%% P. O. Box 6248,
+%%% Providence, RI 02940,
+%%% USA",
+%%% telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%% 800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%% FAX = "401-331-3842",
+%%% email = "tech-support at ams.org (Internet)",
+%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%% keywords = "latex, amsmath, examples, documentation",
+%%% supported = "yes",
+%%% abstract = "This is a test file containing extensive examples of
+%%% mathematical constructs supported by the amsmath
+%%% package.",
+%%% docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16
+%%% checksum as the first value, followed by the
+%%% equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
+%%% count) utility output of lines, words, and
+%%% characters. This is produced by Robert
+%%% Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%%% }
+%%% ====================================================================
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% LaTeX 2.09 can't be used (nor non-LaTeX)
+[1994/12/01]% LaTeX date must December 1994 or later
+\documentclass[draft]{article}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+
+\title{Sample Paper for the \pkg{amsmath} Package\\
+File name: \fn{testmath.tex}}
+\author{American Mathematical Society}
+\date{Version 2.0, 1999/11/15}
+
+\usepackage{amsmath,amsthm}
+
+% Some definitions useful in producing this sort of documentation:
+\chardef\bslash=`\\ % p. 424, TeXbook
+% Normalized (nonbold, nonitalic) tt font, to avoid font
+% substitution warning messages if tt is used inside section
+% headings and other places where odd font combinations might
+% result.
+\newcommand{\ntt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}
+% command name
+\newcommand{\cn}[1]{{\protect\ntt\bslash#1}}
+% LaTeX package name
+\newcommand{\pkg}[1]{{\protect\ntt#1}}
+% File name
+\newcommand{\fn}[1]{{\protect\ntt#1}}
+% environment name
+\newcommand{\env}[1]{{\protect\ntt#1}}
+\hfuzz1pc % Don't bother to report overfull boxes if overage is < 1pc
+
+% Theorem environments
+
+%% \theoremstyle{plain} %% This is the default
+\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}[section]
+\newtheorem{cor}[thm]{Corollary}
+\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}
+\newtheorem{prop}[thm]{Proposition}
+\newtheorem{ax}{Axiom}
+
+\theoremstyle{definition}
+\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
+
+\theoremstyle{remark}
+\newtheorem{rem}{Remark}[section]
+\newtheorem*{notation}{Notation}
+
+%\numberwithin{equation}{section}
+
+\newcommand{\thmref}[1]{Theorem~\ref{#1}}
+\newcommand{\secref}[1]{\S\ref{#1}}
+\newcommand{\lemref}[1]{Lemma~\ref{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\bysame}{\mbox{\rule{3em}{.4pt}}\,}
+
+% Math definitions
+
+\newcommand{\A}{\mathcal{A}}
+\newcommand{\B}{\mathcal{B}}
+\newcommand{\st}{\sigma}
+\newcommand{\XcY}{{(X,Y)}}
+\newcommand{\SX}{{S_X}}
+\newcommand{\SY}{{S_Y}}
+\newcommand{\SXY}{{S_{X,Y}}}
+\newcommand{\SXgYy}{{S_{X|Y}(y)}}
+\newcommand{\Cw}[1]{{\hat C_#1(X|Y)}}
+\newcommand{\G}{{G(X|Y)}}
+\newcommand{\PY}{{P_{\mathcal{Y}}}}
+\newcommand{\X}{\mathcal{X}}
+\newcommand{\wt}{\widetilde}
+\newcommand{\wh}{\widehat}
+
+\DeclareMathOperator{\per}{per}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\cov}{cov}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\non}{non}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\cf}{cf}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\add}{add}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\Cham}{Cham}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\IM}{Im}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\esssup}{ess\,sup}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\meas}{meas}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\seg}{seg}
+
+% \interval is used to provide better spacing after a [ that
+% is used as a closing delimiter.
+\newcommand{\interval}[1]{\mathinner{#1}}
+
+% Notation for an expression evaluated at a particular condition. The
+% optional argument can be used to override automatic sizing of the
+% right vert bar, e.g. \eval[\biggr]{...}_{...}
+\newcommand{\eval}[2][\right]{\relax
+ \ifx#1\right\relax \left.\fi#2#1\rvert}
+
+% Enclose the argument in vert-bar delimiters:
+\newcommand{\envert}[1]{\left\lvert#1\right\rvert}
+\let\abs=\envert
+
+% Enclose the argument in double-vert-bar delimiters:
+\newcommand{\enVert}[1]{\left\lVert#1\right\rVert}
+\let\norm=\enVert
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\markboth{Sample paper for the {\protect\ntt\lowercase{amsmath}} package}
+{Sample paper for the {\protect\ntt\lowercase{amsmath}} package}
+\renewcommand{\sectionmark}[1]{}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This paper contains examples of various features from \AmS-\LaTeX{}.
+
+\section{Enumeration of Hamiltonian paths in a graph}
+
+Let $\mathbf{A}=(a_{ij})$ be the adjacency matrix of graph $G$. The
+corresponding Kirchhoff matrix $\mathbf{K}=(k_{ij})$ is obtained from
+$\mathbf{A}$ by replacing in $-\mathbf{A}$ each diagonal entry by the
+degree of its corresponding vertex; i.e., the $i$th diagonal entry is
+identified with the degree of the $i$th vertex. It is well known that
+\begin{equation}
+\det\mathbf{K}(i|i)=\text{ the number of spanning trees of $G$},
+\quad i=1,\dots,n
+\end{equation}
+where $\mathbf{K}(i|i)$ is the $i$th principal submatrix of
+$\mathbf{K}$.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\det\mathbf{K}(i|i)=\text{ the number of spanning trees of $G$},
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Let $C_{i(j)}$ be the set of graphs obtained from $G$ by attaching edge
+$(v_iv_j)$ to each spanning tree of $G$. Denote by $C_i=\bigcup_j
+C_{i(j)}$. It is obvious that the collection of Hamiltonian cycles is a
+subset of $C_i$. Note that the cardinality of $C_i$ is $k_{ii}\det
+\mathbf{K}(i|i)$. Let $\wh X=\{\hat x_1,\dots,\hat x_n\}$.
+\begin{verbatim}
+$\wh X=\{\hat x_1,\dots,\hat x_n\}$
+\end{verbatim}
+Define multiplication for the elements of $\wh X$ by
+\begin{equation}\label{multdef}
+\hat x_i\hat x_j=\hat x_j\hat x_i,\quad \hat x^2_i=0,\quad
+i,j=1,\dots,n.
+\end{equation}
+Let $\hat k_{ij}=k_{ij}\hat x_j$ and $\hat k_{ij}=-\sum_{j\not=i} \hat
+k_{ij}$. Then the number of Hamiltonian cycles $H_c$ is given by the
+relation \cite{liuchow:formalsum}
+\begin{equation}\label{H-cycles}
+\biggl(\prod^n_{\,j=1}\hat x_j\biggr)H_c=\frac{1}{2}\hat k_{ij}\det
+\wh{\mathbf{K}}(i|i),\qquad i=1,\dots,n.
+\end{equation}
+The task here is to express \eqref{H-cycles}
+in a form free of any $\hat x_i$,
+$i=1,\dots,n$. The result also leads to the resolution of enumeration of
+Hamiltonian paths in a graph.
+
+It is well known that the enumeration of Hamiltonian cycles and paths in
+a complete graph $K_n$ and in a complete bipartite graph $K_{n_1n_2}$
+can only be found from \textit{first combinatorial principles}
+\cite{hapa:graphenum}. One wonders if there exists a formula which can
+be used very efficiently to produce $K_n$ and $K_{n_1n_2}$. Recently,
+using Lagrangian methods, Goulden and Jackson have shown that $H_c$ can
+be expressed in terms of the determinant and permanent of the adjacency
+matrix \cite{gouja:lagrmeth}. However, the formula of Goulden and
+Jackson determines neither $K_n$ nor $K_{n_1n_2}$ effectively. In this
+paper, using an algebraic method, we parametrize the adjacency matrix.
+The resulting formula also involves the determinant and permanent, but
+it can easily be applied to $K_n$ and $K_{n_1n_2}$. In addition, we
+eliminate the permanent from $H_c$ and show that $H_c$ can be
+represented by a determinantal function of multivariables, each variable
+with domain $\{0,1\}$. Furthermore, we show that $H_c$ can be written by
+number of spanning trees of subgraphs. Finally, we apply the formulas to
+a complete multigraph $K_{n_1\dots n_p}$.
+
+The conditions $a_{ij}=a_{ji}$, $i,j=1,\dots,n$, are not required in
+this paper. All formulas can be extended to a digraph simply by
+multiplying $H_c$ by 2.
+
+\section{Main Theorem}
+\label{s:mt}
+
+\begin{notation} For $p,q\in P$ and $n\in\omega$ we write
+$(q,n)\le(p,n)$ if $q\le p$ and $A_{q,n}=A_{p,n}$.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{notation} For $p,q\in P$ and $n\in\omega$
+...
+\end{notation}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{notation}
+
+Let $\mathbf{B}=(b_{ij})$ be an $n\times n$ matrix. Let $\mathbf{n}=\{1,
+\dots,n\}$. Using the properties of \eqref{multdef}, it is readily seen
+that
+
+\begin{lem}\label{lem-per}
+\begin{equation}
+\prod_{i\in\mathbf{n}}
+\biggl(\sum_{\,j\in\mathbf{n}}b_{ij}\hat x_i\biggr)
+=\biggl(\prod_{\,i\in\mathbf{n}}\hat x_i\biggr)\per \mathbf{B}
+\end{equation}
+where $\per \mathbf{B}$ is the permanent of $\mathbf{B}$.
+\end{lem}
+
+Let $\wh Y=\{\hat y_1,\dots,\hat y_n\}$. Define multiplication
+for the elements of $\wh Y$ by
+\begin{equation}
+\hat y_i\hat y_j+\hat y_j\hat y_i=0,\quad i,j=1,\dots,n.
+\end{equation}
+Then, it follows that
+\begin{lem}\label{lem-det}
+\begin{equation}\label{detprod}
+\prod_{i\in\mathbf{n}}
+\biggl(\sum_{\,j\in\mathbf{n}}b_{ij}\hat y_j\biggr)
+=\biggl(\prod_{\,i\in\mathbf{n}}\hat y_i\biggr)\det\mathbf{B}.
+\end{equation}
+\end{lem}
+
+Note that all basic properties of determinants are direct consequences
+of Lemma ~\ref{lem-det}. Write
+\begin{equation}\label{sum-bij}
+\sum_{j\in\mathbf{n}}b_{ij}\hat y_j=\sum_{j\in\mathbf{n}}b^{(\lambda)}
+_{ij}\hat y_j+(b_{ii}-\lambda_i)\hat y_i\hat y
+\end{equation}
+where
+\begin{equation}
+b^{(\lambda)}_{ii}=\lambda_i,\quad b^{(\lambda)}_{ij}=b_{ij},
+\quad i\not=j.
+\end{equation}
+Let $\mathbf{B}^{(\lambda)}=(b^{(\lambda)}_{ij})$. By \eqref{detprod}
+and \eqref{sum-bij}, it is
+straightforward to show the following
+result:
+\begin{thm}\label{thm-main}
+\begin{equation}\label{detB}
+\det\mathbf{B}=
+\sum^n_{l =0}\sum_{I_l \subseteq n}
+\prod_{i\in I_l}(b_{ii}-\lambda_i)
+\det\mathbf{B}^{(\lambda)}(I_l |I_l ),
+\end{equation}
+where $I_l =\{i_1,\dots,i_l \}$ and $\mathbf{B}^{(\lambda)}(I_l |I_l )$
+is the principal submatrix obtained from $\mathbf{B}^{(\lambda)}$
+by deleting its $i_1,\dots,i_l $ rows and columns.
+\end{thm}
+
+\begin{rem}
+Let $\mathbf{M}$ be an $n\times n$ matrix. The convention
+$\mathbf{M}(\mathbf{n}|\mathbf{n})=1$ has been used in \eqref{detB} and
+hereafter.
+\end{rem}
+
+Before proceeding with our discussion, we pause to note that
+\thmref{thm-main} yields immediately a fundamental formula which can be
+used to compute the coefficients of a characteristic polynomial
+\cite{mami:matrixth}:
+\begin{cor}\label{BI}
+Write $\det(\mathbf{B}-x\mathbf{I})=\sum^n_{l =0}(-1)
+^l b_l x^l $. Then
+\begin{equation}\label{bl-sum}
+b_l =\sum_{I_l \subseteq\mathbf{n}}\det\mathbf{B}(I_l |I_l ).
+\end{equation}
+\end{cor}
+Let
+\begin{equation}
+\mathbf{K}(t,t_1,\dots,t_n)
+=\begin{pmatrix} D_1t&-a_{12}t_2&\dots&-a_{1n}t_n\\
+-a_{21}t_1&D_2t&\dots&-a_{2n}t_n\\
+\hdotsfor[2]{4}\\
+-a_{n1}t_1&-a_{n2}t_2&\dots&D_nt\end{pmatrix},
+\end{equation}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{pmatrix} D_1t&-a_{12}t_2&\dots&-a_{1n}t_n\\
+-a_{21}t_1&D_2t&\dots&-a_{2n}t_n\\
+\hdotsfor[2]{4}\\
+-a_{n1}t_1&-a_{n2}t_2&\dots&D_nt\end{pmatrix}
+\end{verbatim}
+where
+\begin{equation}
+D_i=\sum_{j\in\mathbf{n}}a_{ij}t_j,\quad i=1,\dots,n.
+\end{equation}
+
+Set
+\begin{equation*}
+D(t_1,\dots,t_n)=\frac{\delta}{\delta t}\eval{\det\mathbf{K}(t,t_1,\dots,t_n)
+}_{t=1}.
+\end{equation*}
+Then
+\begin{equation}\label{sum-Di}
+D(t_1,\dots,t_n)
+=\sum_{i\in\mathbf{n}}D_i\det\mathbf{K}(t=1,t_1,\dots,t_n; i|i),
+\end{equation}
+where $\mathbf{K}(t=1,t_1,\dots,t_n; i|i)$ is the $i$th principal
+submatrix of $\mathbf{K}(t=1,t_1,\dots,t_n)$.
+
+Theorem ~\ref{thm-main} leads to
+\begin{equation}\label{detK1}
+\det\mathbf{K}(t_1,t_1,\dots,t_n)
+=\sum_{I\in\mathbf{n}}(-1)^{\envert{I}}t^{n-\envert{I}}
+\prod_{i\in I}t_i\prod_{j\in I}(D_j+\lambda_jt_j)\det\mathbf{A}
+^{(\lambda t)}(\overline{I}|\overline I).
+\end{equation}
+Note that
+\begin{equation}\label{detK2}
+\det\mathbf{K}(t=1,t_1,\dots,t_n)=\sum_{I\in\mathbf{n}}(-1)^{\envert{I}}
+\prod_{i\in I}t_i\prod_{j\in I}(D_j+\lambda_jt_j)\det\mathbf{A}
+^{(\lambda)}(\overline{I}|\overline{I})=0.
+\end{equation}
+
+Let $t_i=\hat x_i,i=1,\dots,n$. Lemma ~\ref{lem-per} yields
+\begin{multline}
+\biggl(\sum_{\,i\in\mathbf{n}}a_{l _i}x_i\biggr)
+\det\mathbf{K}(t=1,x_1,\dots,x_n;l |l )\\
+=\biggl(\prod_{\,i\in\mathbf{n}}\hat x_i\biggr)
+\sum_{I\subseteq\mathbf{n}-\{l \}}
+(-1)^{\envert{I}}\per\mathbf{A}^{(\lambda)}(I|I)
+\det\mathbf{A}^{(\lambda)}
+(\overline I\cup\{l \}|\overline I\cup\{l \}).
+\label{sum-ali}
+\end{multline}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{multline}
+\biggl(\sum_{\,i\in\mathbf{n}}a_{l _i}x_i\biggr)
+\det\mathbf{K}(t=1,x_1,\dots,x_n;l |l )\\
+=\biggl(\prod_{\,i\in\mathbf{n}}\hat x_i\biggr)
+\sum_{I\subseteq\mathbf{n}-\{l \}}
+(-1)^{\envert{I}}\per\mathbf{A}^{(\lambda)}(I|I)
+\det\mathbf{A}^{(\lambda)}
+(\overline I\cup\{l \}|\overline I\cup\{l \}).
+\label{sum-ali}
+\end{multline}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+By \eqref{H-cycles}, \eqref{detprod}, and \eqref{sum-bij}, we have
+\begin{prop}\label{prop:eg}
+\begin{equation}
+H_c=\frac1{2n}\sum^n_{l =0}(-1)^{l}
+D_{l},
+\end{equation}
+where
+\begin{equation}\label{delta-l}
+D_{l}=\eval[2]{\sum_{I_{l}\subseteq \mathbf{n}}
+D(t_1,\dots,t_n)}_{t_i=\left\{\begin{smallmatrix}
+0,& \text{if }i\in I_{l}\quad\\% \quad added for centering
+1,& \text{otherwise}\end{smallmatrix}\right.\;,\;\; i=1,\dots,n}.
+\end{equation}
+\end{prop}
+
+\section{Application}
+\label{lincomp}
+
+We consider here the applications of Theorems~\ref{th-info-ow-ow} and
+~\ref{th-weak-ske-owf} to a complete
+multipartite graph $K_{n_1\dots n_p}$. It can be shown that the
+number of spanning trees of $K_{n_1\dots n_p}$
+may be written
+\begin{equation}\label{e:st}
+T=n^{p-2}\prod^p_{i=1}
+(n-n_i)^{n_i-1}
+\end{equation}
+where
+\begin{equation}
+n=n_1+\dots+n_p.
+\end{equation}
+
+It follows from Theorems~\ref{th-info-ow-ow} and
+~\ref{th-weak-ske-owf} that
+\begin{equation}\label{e:barwq}
+\begin{split}
+H_c&=\frac1{2n}
+\sum^n_{{l}=0}(-1)^{l}(n-{l})^{p-2}
+\sum_{l _1+\dots+l _p=l}\prod^p_{i=1}
+\binom{n_i}{l _i}\\
+&\quad\cdot[(n-l )-(n_i-l _i)]^{n_i-l _i}\cdot
+\biggl[(n-l )^2-\sum^p_{j=1}(n_i-l _i)^2\biggr].\end{split}
+\end{equation}
+\begin{verbatim}
+... \binom{n_i}{l _i}\\
+\end{verbatim}
+and
+\begin{equation}\label{joe}
+\begin{split}
+H_c&=\frac12\sum^{n-1}_{l =0}
+(-1)^{l}(n-l )^{p-2}
+\sum_{l _1+\dots+l _p=l}
+\prod^p_{i=1}\binom{n_i}{l _i}\\
+&\quad\cdot[(n-l )-(n_i-l _i)]^{n_i-l _i}
+\left(1-\frac{l _p}{n_p}\right)
+[(n-l )-(n_p-l _p)].
+\end{split}
+\end{equation}
+
+The enumeration of $H_c$ in a $K_{n_1\dotsm n_p}$ graph can also be
+carried out by Theorem ~\ref{thm-H-param} or ~\ref{thm-asym}
+together with the algebraic method of \eqref{multdef}.
+Some elegant representations may be obtained. For example, $H_c$ in
+a $K_{n_1n_2n_3}$ graph may be written
+\begin{equation}\label{j:mark}
+\begin{split}
+H_c=&
+\frac{n_1!\,n_2!\,n_3!}
+{n_1+n_2+n_3}\sum_i\left[\binom{n_1}{i}
+\binom{n_2}{n_3-n_1+i}\binom{n_3}{n_3-n_2+i}\right.\\
+&+\left.\binom{n_1-1}{i}
+\binom{n_2-1}{n_3-n_1+i}
+\binom{n_3-1}{n_3-n_2+i}\right].\end{split}
+\end{equation}
+
+\section{Secret Key Exchanges}
+\label{SKE}
+
+Modern cryptography is fundamentally concerned with the problem of
+secure private communication. A Secret Key Exchange is a protocol
+where Alice and Bob, having no secret information in common to start,
+are able to agree on a common secret key, conversing over a public
+channel. The notion of a Secret Key Exchange protocol was first
+introduced in the seminal paper of Diffie and Hellman
+\cite{dihe:newdir}. \cite{dihe:newdir} presented a concrete
+implementation of a Secret Key Exchange protocol, dependent on a
+specific assumption (a variant on the discrete log), specially
+tailored to yield Secret Key Exchange. Secret Key Exchange is of
+course trivial if trapdoor permutations exist. However, there is no
+known implementation based on a weaker general assumption.
+
+The concept of an informationally one-way function was introduced
+in \cite{imlelu:oneway}. We give only an informal definition here:
+
+\begin{defn} A polynomial time
+computable function $f = \{f_k\}$ is informationally
+one-way if there is no probabilistic polynomial time algorithm which
+(with probability of the form $1 - k^{-e}$ for some $e > 0$)
+returns on input $y \in \{0,1\}^{k}$ a random element of $f^{-1}(y)$.
+\end{defn}
+In the non-uniform setting \cite{imlelu:oneway} show that these are not
+weaker than one-way functions:
+\begin{thm}[\cite{imlelu:oneway} (non-uniform)]
+\label{th-info-ow-ow}
+The existence of informationally one-way functions
+implies the existence of one-way functions.
+\end{thm}
+We will stick to the convention introduced above of saying
+``non-uniform'' before the theorem statement when the theorem
+makes use of non-uniformity. It should be understood that
+if nothing is said then the result holds for both the uniform and
+the non-uniform models.
+
+It now follows from \thmref{th-info-ow-ow} that
+
+\begin{thm}[non-uniform]\label{th-weak-ske-owf} Weak SKE
+implies the existence of a one-way function.
+\end{thm}
+
+More recently, the polynomial-time, interior point algorithms for linear
+programming have been extended to the case of convex quadratic programs
+\cite{moad:quadpro,ye:intalg}, certain linear complementarity problems
+\cite{komiyo:lincomp,miyoki:lincomp}, and the nonlinear complementarity
+problem \cite{komiyo:unipfunc}. The connection between these algorithms
+and the classical Newton method for nonlinear equations is well
+explained in \cite{komiyo:lincomp}.
+
+\section{Review}
+\label{computation}
+
+We begin our discussion with the following definition:
+
+\begin{defn}
+
+A function $H\colon \Re^n \to \Re^n$ is said to be
+\emph{B-differentiable} at the point $z$ if (i)~$H$ is Lipschitz
+continuous in a neighborhood of $z$, and (ii)~ there exists a positive
+homogeneous function $BH(z)\colon \Re^n \to \Re^n$, called the
+\emph{B-derivative} of $H$ at $z$, such that
+\[ \lim_{v \to 0} \frac{H(z+v) - H(z) - BH(z)v}{\enVert{v}} = 0. \]
+The function $H$ is \textit{B-differentiable in set $S$} if it is
+B-differentiable at every point in $S$. The B-derivative $BH(z)$ is said
+to be \textit{strong} if
+\[ \lim_{(v,v') \to (0,0)} \frac{H(z+v) - H(z+v') - BH(z)(v
+ -v')}{\enVert{v - v'}} = 0. \]
+\end{defn}
+
+
+\begin{lem}\label{limbog} There exists a smooth function $\psi_0(z)$
+defined for $\abs{z}>1-2a$ satisfying the following properties\textup{:}
+\begin{enumerate}
+\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{(\roman{enumi})}
+\item $\psi_0(z)$ is bounded above and below by positive constants
+$c_1\leq \psi_0(z)\leq c_2$.
+\item If $\abs{z}>1$, then $\psi_0(z)=1$.
+\item For all $z$ in the domain of $\psi_0$, $\Delta_0\ln \psi_0\geq 0$.
+\item If $1-2a<\abs{z}<1-a$, then $\Delta_0\ln \psi_0\geq
+c_3>0$.
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{lem}
+
+\begin{proof}
+We choose $\psi_0(z)$ to be a radial function depending only on $r=\abs{z}$.
+Let $h(r)\geq 0$ be a suitable smooth function satisfying $h(r)\geq c_3$
+for $1-2a<\abs{z}<1-a$, and $h(r)=0$ for $\abs{z}>1-\tfrac a2$. The radial
+Laplacian
+\[\Delta_0\ln\psi_0(r)=\left(\frac {d^2}{dr^2}+\frac
+1r\frac d{dr}\right)\ln\psi_0(r)\]
+has smooth coefficients for $r>1-2a$. Therefore, we may
+apply the existence and uniqueness theory for ordinary differential
+equations. Simply let $\ln \psi_0(r)$ be the solution of the differential
+equation
+\[\left(\frac{d^2}{dr^2}+\frac 1r\frac d{dr}\right)\ln \psi_0(r)=h(r)\]
+with initial conditions given by $\ln \psi_0(1)=0$ and
+$\ln\psi_0'(1)=0$.
+
+Next, let $D_\nu$ be a finite collection of pairwise disjoint disks,
+all of which are contained in the unit disk centered at the origin in
+$C$. We assume that $D_\nu=\{z\mid \abs{z-z_\nu}<\delta\}$. Suppose that
+$D_\nu(a)$ denotes the smaller concentric disk $D_\nu(a)=\{z\mid
+\abs{z-z_\nu}\leq (1-2a)\delta\}$. We define a smooth weight function
+$\Phi_0(z)$ for $z\in C-\bigcup_\nu D_\nu(a)$ by setting $\Phi_
+0(z)=1$ when $z\notin \bigcup_\nu D_\nu$ and $\Phi_
+0(z)=\psi_0((z-z_\nu)/\delta)$ when $z$ is an element of $D_\nu$. It
+follows from \lemref{limbog} that $\Phi_ 0$ satisfies the properties:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{(\roman{enumi})}
+\item \label{boundab}$\Phi_ 0(z)$ is bounded above and below by
+positive constants $c_1\leq \Phi_ 0(z)\leq c_2$.
+\item \label{d:over}$\Delta_0\ln\Phi_ 0\geq 0$ for all
+$z\in C-\bigcup_\nu D_\nu(a)$,
+the domain where the function $\Phi_ 0$ is defined.
+\item \label{d:ad}$\Delta_0\ln\Phi_ 0\geq c_3\delta^{-2}$
+when $(1-2a)\delta<\abs{z-z_\nu}<(1-a)\delta$.
+\end{enumerate}
+Let $A_\nu$ denote the annulus $A_\nu=\{(1-2a)\delta<\abs{z-z_\nu}<(1-a)
+\delta \}$, and set $A=\bigcup_\nu A_\nu$. The
+properties (\ref{d:over}) and (\ref{d:ad}) of $\Phi_ 0$
+may be summarized as $\Delta_0\ln \Phi_ 0\geq c_3\delta^{-2}\chi_A$,
+where $\chi _A$ is the characteristic function of $A$.
+\end{proof}
+
+Suppose that $\alpha$ is a nonnegative real constant. We apply
+Proposition~\ref{prop:eg} with $\Phi(z)=\Phi_ 0(z) e^{\alpha\abs{z}^2}$. If
+$u\in C^\infty_0(R^2-\bigcup_\nu D_\nu(a))$, assume that $\mathcal{D}$
+is a bounded domain containing the support of $u$ and $A\subset
+\mathcal{D}\subset R^2-\bigcup_\nu D_\nu(a)$. A calculation gives
+\[\int_{\mathcal{D}}\abs{\overline\partial u}^2\Phi_ 0(z) e^{\alpha\abs{z}^2}
+\geq c_4\alpha\int_{\mathcal{D}}\abs{u}^2\Phi_ 0e^{\alpha\abs{z}^2}
++c_5\delta^{-2}\int_ A\abs{u}^2\Phi_ 0e^{\alpha\abs{z}^2}.\]
+
+The boundedness, property (\ref{boundab}) of $\Phi_ 0$, then yields
+\[\int_{\mathcal{D}}\abs{\overline\partial u}^2e^{\alpha\abs{z}^2}\geq c_6\alpha
+\int_{\mathcal{D}}\abs{u}^2e^{\alpha\abs{z}^2}
++c_7\delta^{-2}\int_ A\abs{u}^2e^{\alpha\abs{z}^2}.\]
+
+Let $B(X)$ be the set of blocks of $\Lambda_{X}$
+and let $b(X) = \abs{B(X)}$. If $\phi \in Q_{X}$ then
+$\phi$ is constant on the blocks of $\Lambda_{X}$.
+\begin{equation}\label{far-d}
+ P_{X} = \{ \phi \in M \mid \Lambda_{\phi} = \Lambda_{X} \},
+\qquad
+Q_{X} = \{\phi \in M \mid \Lambda_{\phi} \geq \Lambda_{X} \}.
+\end{equation}
+If $\Lambda_{\phi} \geq \Lambda_{X}$ then
+$\Lambda_{\phi} = \Lambda_{Y}$ for some $Y \geq X$ so that
+\[ Q_{X} = \bigcup_{Y \geq X} P_{Y}. \]
+Thus by M\"obius inversion
+\[ \abs{P_{Y}}= \sum_{X\geq Y} \mu (Y,X)\abs{Q_{X}}.\]
+Thus there is a bijection from $Q_{X}$ to $W^{B(X)}$.
+In particular $\abs{Q_{X}} = w^{b(X)}$.
+
+Next note that $b(X)=\dim X$. We see this by choosing a
+basis for $X$ consisting of vectors $v^{k}$ defined by
+\[v^{k}_{i}=
+\begin{cases} 1 & \text{if $i \in \Lambda_{k}$},\\
+0 &\text{otherwise.} \end{cases}
+\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[v^{k}_{i}=
+\begin{cases} 1 & \text{if $i \in \Lambda_{k}$},\\
+0 &\text{otherwise.} \end{cases}
+\]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{lem}\label{p0201}
+Let $\A$ be an arrangement. Then
+\[ \chi (\A,t) = \sum_{\B \subseteq \A}
+(-1)^{\abs{\B}} t^{\dim T(\B)}. \]
+\end{lem}
+
+In order to compute $R''$ recall the definition
+of $S(X,Y)$ from \lemref{lem-per}. Since $H \in \B$,
+$\A_{H} \subseteq \B$. Thus if $T(\B) = Y$ then
+$\B \in S(H,Y)$. Let $L'' = L(\A'')$. Then
+\begin{equation}\label{E_SXgYy}
+\begin{split}
+R''&= \sum_{H\in \B \subseteq \A} (-1)^{\abs{\B}}
+t^{\dim T(\B)}\\
+&= \sum_{Y \in L''} \sum_{\B \in S(H,Y)}
+(-1)^{\abs{\B}}t^{\dim Y} \\
+&= -\sum_{Y \in L''} \sum_{\B \in S(H,Y)} (-1)^
+{\abs{\B - \A_{H}}} t^{\dim Y} \\
+&= -\sum_{Y \in L''} \mu (H,Y)t^{\dim Y} \\
+&= -\chi (\A '',t).
+\end{split}
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{cor}\label{tripleA}
+Let $(\A,\A',\A'')$ be a triple of arrangements. Then
+\[ \pi (\A,t) = \pi (\A',t) + t \pi (\A'',t). \]
+\end{cor}
+
+\begin{defn}
+Let $(\A,\A',\A'')$ be a triple with respect to
+the hyperplane $H \in \A$. Call $H$ a \textit{separator}
+if $T(\A) \not\in L(\A')$.
+\end{defn}
+
+\begin{cor}\label{nsep}
+Let $(\A,\A',\A'')$ be a triple with respect to $H \in \A$.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{(\roman{enumi})}
+\item
+If $H$ is a separator then
+\[ \mu (\A) = - \mu (\A'') \]
+and hence
+\[ \abs{\mu (\A)} = \abs{ \mu (\A'')}. \]
+
+\item If $H$ is not a separator then
+\[\mu (\A) = \mu (\A') - \mu (\A'') \]
+and
+\[ \abs{\mu (\A)} = \abs{\mu (\A')} + \abs{\mu (\A'')}. \]
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{cor}
+
+\begin{proof}
+It follows from \thmref{th-info-ow-ow} that $\pi(\A,t)$
+has leading term
+\[(-1)^{r(\A)}\mu (\A)t^{r(\A)}.\]
+The conclusion
+follows by comparing coefficients of the leading
+terms on both sides of the equation in
+Corollary~\ref{tripleA}. If $H$ is a separator then
+$r(\A') < r(\A)$ and there is no contribution
+from $\pi (\A',t)$.
+\end{proof}
+
+The Poincar\'e polynomial of an arrangement
+will appear repeatedly
+in these notes. It will be shown to equal the
+Poincar\'e polynomial
+of the graded algebras which we are going to
+associate with $\A$. It is also the Poincar\'e
+polynomial of the complement $M(\A)$ for a
+complex arrangement. Here we prove
+that the Poincar\'e polynomial is the chamber
+counting function for a real arrangement. The
+complement $M(\A)$ is a disjoint union of chambers
+\[M(\A) = \bigcup_{C \in \Cham(\A)} C.\]
+The number
+of chambers is determined by the Poincar\'e
+polynomial as follows.
+
+\begin{thm}\label{th-realarr}
+Let $\A_{\mathbf{R}}$ be a real arrangement. Then
+\[ \abs{\Cham(\A_{\mathbf{R}})} = \pi (\A_{\mathbf{R}},1). \]
+\end{thm}
+
+\begin{proof}
+We check the properties required in Corollary~\ref{nsep}:
+(i) follows from $\pi (\Phi_{ l},t) = 1$, and (ii) is a
+consequence of Corollary~\ref{BI}.
+\end{proof}
+
+\begin{figure}
+\vspace{5cm}
+\caption[]{$Q(\A_{1}) = xyz(x-z)(x+z)(y-z)(y+z)$}
+\end{figure}
+
+\begin{figure}
+\vspace{5cm}
+\caption[]{$Q(\A_{2})= xyz(x+y+z)(x+y-z)(x-y+z)(x-y-z)$}
+\end{figure}
+
+
+\begin{thm}
+\label{T_first_the_int}
+Let $\phi$ be a protocol for a random pair $\XcY$.
+If one of $\st_\phi(x',y)$ and $\st_\phi(x,y')$ is a prefix of the other
+and $(x,y)\in\SXY$, then
+\[
+\langle \st_j(x',y)\rangle_{j=1}^\infty
+=\langle \st_j(x,y)\rangle_{j=1}^\infty
+=\langle \st_j(x,y')\rangle_{j=1}^\infty .
+\]
+\end{thm}
+\begin{proof}
+We show by induction on $i$ that
+\[
+\langle \st_j(x',y)\rangle_{j=1}^i
+=\langle \st_j(x,y)\rangle_{j=1}^i
+=\langle \st_j(x,y')\rangle_{j=1}^i.
+\]
+The induction hypothesis holds vacuously for $i=0$. Assume it holds for
+$i-1$, in particular
+$[\st_j(x',y)]_{j=1}^{i-1}=[\st_j(x,y')]_{j=1}^{i-1}$. Then one of
+$[\st_j(x',y)]_{j=i}^{\infty}$ and $[\st_j(x,y')]_{j=i}^{\infty}$ is a
+prefix of the other which implies that one of $\st_i(x',y)$ and
+$\st_i(x,y')$ is a prefix of the other. If the $i$th message is
+transmitted by $P_\X$ then, by the separate-transmissions property and
+the induction hypothesis, $\st_i(x,y)=\st_i(x,y')$, hence one of
+$\st_i(x,y)$ and $\st_i(x',y)$ is a prefix of the other. By the
+implicit-termination property, neither $\st_i(x,y)$ nor $\st_i(x',y)$
+can be a proper prefix of the other, hence they must be the same and
+$\st_i(x',y)=\st_i(x,y)=\st_i(x,y')$. If the $i$th message is
+transmitted by $\PY$ then, symmetrically, $\st_i(x,y)=\st_i(x',y)$ by
+the induction hypothesis and the separate-transmissions property, and,
+then, $\st_i(x,y)=\st_i(x,y')$ by the implicit-termination property,
+proving the induction step.
+\end{proof}
+
+If $\phi$ is a protocol for $(X,Y)$, and $(x,y)$, $(x',y)$ are distinct
+inputs in $\SXY$, then, by the correct-decision property,
+$\langle\st_j(x,y)\rangle_{j=1}^\infty\ne\langle
+\st_j(x',y)\rangle_{j=1}^\infty$.
+
+Equation~(\ref{E_SXgYy}) defined $\PY$'s ambiguity set $\SXgYy$
+to be the set of possible $X$ values when $Y=y$.
+The last corollary implies that for all $y\in\SY$,
+the multiset%
+\footnote{A multiset allows multiplicity of elements.
+Hence, $\{0,01,01\}$ is prefix free as a set, but not as a multiset.}
+of codewords $\{\st_\phi(x,y):x\in\SXgYy\}$ is prefix free.
+
+\section{One-Way Complexity}
+\label{S_Cp1}
+
+$\Cw1$, the one-way complexity of a random pair $\XcY$,
+is the number of bits $P_\X$ must transmit in the worst case
+when $\PY$ is not permitted to transmit any feedback messages.
+Starting with $\SXY$, the support set of $\XcY$, we define $\G$,
+the \textit{characteristic hypergraph} of $\XcY$, and show that
+\[
+\Cw1=\lceil\,\log\chi(\G)\rceil\ .
+\]
+
+Let $\XcY$ be a random pair. For each $y$ in $\SY$, the support set of
+$Y$, Equation~(\ref{E_SXgYy}) defined $\SXgYy$ to be the set of possible
+$x$ values when $Y=y$. The \textit{characteristic hypergraph} $\G$ of
+$\XcY$ has $\SX$ as its vertex set and the hyperedge $\SXgYy$ for each
+$y\in\SY$.
+
+
+We can now prove a continuity theorem.
+\begin{thm}\label{t:conl}
+Let $\Omega \subset\mathbf{R}^n$ be an open set, let
+$u\in BV(\Omega ;\mathbf{R}^m)$, and let
+\begin{equation}\label{quts}
+T^u_x=\left\{y\in\mathbf{R}^m:
+ y=\tilde u(x)+\left\langle \frac{Du}{\abs{Du}}(x),z
+\right\rangle \text{ for some }z\in\mathbf{R}^n\right\}
+\end{equation}
+for every $x\in\Omega \backslash S_u$. Let $f\colon \mathbf{R}^m\to
+\mathbf{R}^k$ be a Lipschitz continuous function such that $f(0)=0$, and
+let $v=f(u)\colon \Omega \to \mathbf{R}^k$. Then $v\in BV(\Omega
+;\mathbf{R}^k)$ and
+\begin{equation}
+Jv=\eval{(f(u^+)-f(u^-))\otimes \nu_u\cdot\,
+\mathcal{H}_{n-1}}_{S_u}.
+\end{equation}
+In addition, for $\abs{\wt{D}u}$-almost every $x\in\Omega $ the
+restriction of the function $f$ to $T^u_x$ is differentiable at $\tilde
+u(x)$ and
+\begin{equation}
+\wt{D}v=\nabla (\eval{f}_{T^u_x})(\tilde u)
+\frac{\wt{D}u}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}\cdot\abs{\wt{D}u}.\end{equation}
+\end{thm}
+
+Before proving the theorem, we state without proof three elementary
+remarks which will be useful in the sequel.
+\begin{rem}\label{r:omb}
+Let $\omega\colon \left]0,+\infty\right[\to \left]0,+\infty\right[$
+be a continuous function such that $\omega (t)\to 0$ as $t\to
+0$. Then
+\[\lim_{h\to 0^+}g(\omega(h))=L\Leftrightarrow\lim_{h\to
+0^+}g(h)=L\]
+for any function $g\colon \left]0,+\infty\right[\to \mathbf{R}$.
+\end{rem}
+\begin{rem}\label{r:dif}
+Let $g \colon \mathbf{R}^n\to \mathbf{R}$ be a Lipschitz
+continuous function and assume that
+\[L(z)=\lim_{h\to 0^+}\frac{g(hz)-g(0)}h\]
+exists for every $z\in\mathbf{Q}^n$ and that $L$ is a linear function of
+$z$. Then $g$ is differentiable at 0.
+\end{rem}
+\begin{rem}\label{r:dif0}
+Let $A \colon \mathbf{R}^n\to \mathbf{R}^m$ be a linear function, and
+let $f \colon \mathbf{R}^m\to \mathbf{R}$ be a function. Then the
+restriction of $f$ to the range of $A$ is differentiable at 0 if and
+only if $f(A)\colon \mathbf{R}^n\to \mathbf{R}$ is differentiable at 0
+and
+\[\nabla(\eval{f}_{\IM(A)})(0)A=\nabla (f(A))(0).\]
+\end{rem}
+
+\begin{proof}
+ We begin by showing that $v\in BV(\Omega;\mathbf{R}^k)$ and
+\begin{equation}\label{e:bomb}
+\abs{Dv}(B)\le K\abs{Du}(B)\qquad\forall B\in\mathbf{B}(\Omega ),
+\end{equation}
+where $K>0$ is the Lipschitz constant of $f$. By \eqref{sum-Di} and by
+the approximation result quoted in \secref{s:mt}, it is possible to find
+a sequence $(u_h)\subset C^1(\Omega ;\mathbf{R}^m)$ converging to $u$ in
+$L^1(\Omega ;\mathbf{R}^m)$ and such that
+\[\lim_{h\to +\infty}\int_\Omega \abs{\nabla u_h}\,dx=\abs{Du}(\Omega ).\]
+The functions $v_h=f(u_h)$ are locally Lipschitz continuous in $\Omega
+$, and the definition of differential implies that $\abs{\nabla v_h}\le
+K\abs{\nabla u_h}$ almost everywhere in $\Omega $. The lower semicontinuity
+of the total variation and \eqref{sum-Di} yield
+\begin{equation}
+\begin{split}
+\abs{Dv}(\Omega )\le\liminf_{h\to +\infty}\abs{Dv_h}(\Omega) &
+=\liminf_{h\to +\infty}\int_\Omega \abs{\nabla v_h}\,dx\\
+&\le K\liminf_{h\to +\infty}\int_\Omega
+\abs{\nabla u_h}\,dx=K\abs{Du}(\Omega).
+\end{split}\end{equation}
+Since $f(0)=0$, we have also
+\[\int_\Omega \abs{v}\,dx\le K\int_\Omega \abs{u}\,dx;\]
+therefore $u\in BV(\Omega ;\mathbf{R}^k)$. Repeating the same argument
+for every open set $A\subset\Omega $, we get \eqref{e:bomb} for every
+$B\in\mathbf{B}(\Omega)$, because $\abs{Dv}$, $\abs{Du}$ are Radon measures. To
+prove \lemref{limbog}, first we observe that
+\begin{equation}\label{e:SS}
+S_v\subset S_u,\qquad\tilde v(x)=f(\tilde u(x))\qquad \forall x\in\Omega
+\backslash S_u.\end{equation}
+In fact, for every $\varepsilon >0$ we have
+\[\{y\in B_\rho(x): \abs{v(y)-f(\tilde u(x))}>\varepsilon \}\subset \{y\in
+B_\rho(x): \abs{u(y)-\tilde u(x)}>\varepsilon /K\},\]
+hence
+\[\lim_{\rho\to 0^+}\frac{\abs{\{y\in B_\rho(x): \abs{v(y)-f(\tilde u(x))}>
+\varepsilon \}}}{\rho^n}=0\]
+whenever $x\in\Omega \backslash S_u$. By a similar argument, if $x\in
+S_u$ is a point such that there exists a triplet $(u^+,u^-,\nu_u)$
+satisfying \eqref{detK1}, \eqref{detK2}, then
+\[
+(v^+(x)-v^-(x))\otimes \nu_v=(f(u^+(x))-f(u^-(x)))\otimes\nu_u\quad
+\text{if }x\in S_v
+\]
+and $f(u^-(x))=f(u^+(x))$ if $x\in S_u\backslash S_v$. Hence, by (1.8)
+we get
+\begin{equation*}\begin{split}
+Jv(B)=\int_{B\cap S_v}(v^+-v^-)\otimes \nu_v\,d\mathcal{H}_{n-1}&=
+\int_{B\cap S_v}(f(u^+)-f(u^-))\otimes \nu_u\,d\mathcal{H}_{n-1}\\
+&=\int_{B\cap S_u}(f(u^+)-f(u^-))\otimes \nu_u\,d\mathcal{H}_{n-1}
+\end{split}\end{equation*}
+and \lemref{limbog} is proved.
+\end{proof}
+
+To prove \eqref{e:SS}, it is not restrictive to assume that $k=1$.
+Moreover, to simplify our notation, from now on we shall assume that
+$\Omega = \mathbf{R}^n$. The proof of \eqref{e:SS} is divided into two
+steps. In the first step we prove the statement in the one-dimensional
+case $(n=1)$, using \thmref{th-weak-ske-owf}. In the second step we
+achieve the general result using \thmref{t:conl}.
+
+\subsection*{Step 1}
+Assume that $n=1$. Since $S_u$ is at most countable, \eqref{sum-bij}
+yields that $\abs{\wt{D}v}(S_u\backslash S_v)=0$, so that
+\eqref{e:st} and \eqref{e:barwq} imply that $Dv=\wt{D}v+Jv$ is
+the Radon-Nikod\'ym decomposition of $Dv$ in absolutely continuous and
+singular part with respect to $\abs{\wt{D} u}$. By
+\thmref{th-weak-ske-owf}, we have
+\begin{equation*}
+\frac{\wt{D}v}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}(t)=\lim_{s\to t^+}
+\frac{Dv(\interval{\left[t,s\right[})}
+{\abs{\wt{D}u}(\interval{\left[t,s\right[})},\qquad
+\frac{\wt{D}u}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}(t)=\lim_{s\to t^+}
+\frac{Du(\interval{\left[t,s\right[})}
+{\abs{\wt{D}u}(\interval{\left[t,s\right[})}
+\end{equation*}
+$\abs{\wt{D}u}$-almost everywhere in $\mathbf{R}$. It is well known
+(see, for instance, \cite[2.5.16]{ste:sint}) that every one-dimensional
+function of bounded variation $w$ has a unique left continuous
+representative, i.e., a function $\hat w$ such that $\hat w=w$ almost
+everywhere and $\lim_{s\to t^-}\hat w(s)=\hat w(t)$ for every $t\in
+\mathbf{R}$. These conditions imply
+\begin{equation}
+\hat u(t)=Du(\interval{\left]-\infty,t\right[}),
+\qquad \hat v(t)=Dv(\interval{\left]-\infty,t\right[})\qquad
+\forall t\in\mathbf{R}
+\end{equation}
+and
+\begin{equation}\label{alimo}
+\hat v(t)=f(\hat u(t))\qquad\forall t\in\mathbf{R}.\end{equation}
+Let $t\in\mathbf{R}$ be such that
+$\abs{\wt{D}u}(\interval{\left[t,s\right[})>0$ for every $s>t$ and
+assume that the limits in \eqref{joe} exist. By \eqref{j:mark} and
+\eqref{far-d} we get
+\begin{equation*}\begin{split}
+\frac{\hat v(s)-\hat
+v(t)}{\abs{\wt{D}u}(\interval{\left[t,s\right[})}&=\frac {f(\hat
+u(s))-f(\hat u(t))}{\abs{\wt{D}u}(\interval{\left[t,s\right[})}\\
+&=\frac{f(\hat u(s))-f(\hat
+u(t)+\dfrac{\wt{D}u}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}(t)\abs{\wt{D}u
+}(\interval{\left[t,s\right[}))}%
+{\abs{\wt{D}u}(\interval{\left[t,s\right[})}\\
+&+\frac
+{f(\hat u(t)+\dfrac{\wt{D}u}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}(t)\abs{\wt{D}
+u}(\interval{\left[t,s\right[}))-f(\hat
+u(t))}{\abs{\wt{D}u}(\interval{\left[t,s\right[})}
+\end{split}\end{equation*}
+for every $s>t$. Using the Lipschitz condition on $f$ we find
+{\setlength{\multlinegap}{0pt}
+\begin{multline*}
+\left\lvert\frac{\hat v(s)-\hat
+v(t)}{\abs{\wt{D}u}(\interval{\left[t,s\right[})} -\frac{f(\hat
+u(t)+\dfrac{\wt{D}u}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}(t)
+\abs{\wt{D}u}(\interval{\left[t,s\right[}))-f(\hat
+u(t))}{\abs{\wt{D}u}(\interval{\left[t,s\right[})}\right\rvert\\
+\le K\left\lvert
+\frac{\hat u(s)-\hat u(t)}
+ {\abs{\wt{D}u}(\interval{\left[t,s\right[})}
+-\frac{\wt{D}u}{\abs{
+\wt{D}u}}(t)\right\rvert.\end{multline*}
+}% end of group with \multlinegap=0pt
+By \eqref{e:bomb}, the function $s\to
+\abs{\wt{D}u}(\interval{\left[t,s\right[})$ is continuous and
+converges to 0 as $s\downarrow t$. Therefore Remark~\ref{r:omb} and the
+previous inequality imply
+\[\frac{\wt{D}v}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}(t)=\lim_{h\to 0^+}
+\frac{f(\hat u(t)+h\dfrac{\wt{D}u}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}
+(t))-f(\hat u(t))}h\quad\abs{\wt{D}u}\text{-a.e. in }\mathbf{R}.\]
+By \eqref{joe}, $\hat u(x)=\tilde u(x)$ for every
+$x\in\mathbf{R}\backslash S_u$; moreover, applying the same argument to
+the functions $u'(t)=u(-t)$, $v'(t)=f(u'(t))=v(-t)$, we get
+\[\frac{\wt{D}v}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}(t)=\lim_{h\to 0}
+\frac{f(\tilde u(t)
++h\dfrac{\wt{D}u}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}(t))-f(\tilde u(t))}{h}
+\qquad\abs{\wt{D}u}\text{-a.e. in }\mathbf{R}\]
+and our statement is proved.
+
+\subsection*{Step 2}
+
+Let us consider now the general case $n>1$. Let $\nu\in \mathbf{R}^n$ be
+such that $\abs{\nu}=1$, and let $\pi_\nu=\{y\in\mathbf{R}^n: \langle
+y,\nu\rangle =0\}$. In the following, we shall identify $\mathbf{R}^n$
+with $\pi_\nu\times\mathbf{R}$, and we shall denote by $y$ the variable
+ranging in $\pi_\nu$ and by $t$ the variable ranging in $\mathbf{R}$. By
+the just proven one-dimensional result, and by \thmref{thm-main}, we get
+\[\lim_{h\to 0}\frac{f(\tilde u(y+t\nu)+h\dfrac{\wt{D}u_y}{\abs{
+\wt{D}u_y}}(t))-f(\tilde u(y+t\nu))}h=\frac{\wt{D}v_y}{\abs{
+\wt{D}u_y}}(t)\qquad\abs{\wt{D}u_y}\text{-a.e. in }\mathbf{R}\]
+for $\mathcal{H}_{n-1}$-almost every $y\in \pi_\nu$. We claim that
+\begin{equation}
+\frac{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }{\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle
+}}(y+t\nu)=\frac{\wt{D}u_y}
+{\abs{\wt{D}u_y}}(t)\qquad\abs{\wt{D}u_y}\text{-a.e. in }\mathbf{R}
+\end{equation}
+for $\mathcal{H}_{n-1}$-almost every $y\in\pi_\nu$. In fact, by
+\eqref{sum-ali} and \eqref{delta-l} we get
+\begin{multline*}
+\int_{\pi_\nu}\frac{\wt{D}u_y}{\abs{\wt{D}u_y}}\cdot\abs{\wt{D}u_y
+}\,d\mathcal{H}_{n-1}(y)=\int_{\pi_\nu}\wt{D}u_y\,d\mathcal{H}_{n-1}(y)\\
+=\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle =\frac
+{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }{\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle}}\cdot
+\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }=\int_{\pi_\nu}\frac{
+\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }{\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }}
+(y+\cdot \nu)\cdot\abs{\wt{D}u_y}\,d\mathcal{H}_{n-1}(y)
+\end{multline*}
+and \eqref{far-d} follows from \eqref{sum-Di}. By the same argument it
+is possible to prove that
+\begin{equation}
+\frac{\langle \wt{D}v,\nu\rangle }{\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle
+}}(y+t\nu)=\frac{\wt{D}v_y}{\abs{\wt{D}u_y}}(t)\qquad\abs{
+\wt{D}u_y}\text{-a.e. in }\mathbf{R}\end{equation}
+for $\mathcal{H}_{n-1}$-almost every $y\in \pi_\nu$. By \eqref{far-d}
+and \eqref{E_SXgYy} we get
+\[
+\lim_{h\to 0}\frac{f(\tilde u(y+t\nu)+h\dfrac{\langle \wt{D}
+u,\nu\rangle }{\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }}(y+t\nu))-f(\tilde
+u(y+t\nu))}{h}
+=\frac{\langle \wt{D}v,\nu\rangle }{\abs{\langle
+\wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }}(y+t\nu)\]
+for $\mathcal{H}_{n-1}$-almost every $y\in\pi_\nu$, and using again
+\eqref{detK1}, \eqref{detK2} we get
+\[
+\lim_{h\to 0}\frac{f(\tilde u(x)+h\dfrac{\langle
+\wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }{\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }}(x))-f(\tilde
+u(x))}{h}=\frac{\langle \wt{D}v,\nu\rangle }{\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu
+\rangle }}(x)
+\]
+$\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle}$-a.e. in $\mathbf{R}^n$.
+
+Since the function $\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }/\abs{\wt{D}u}$
+is strictly positive $\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }$-almost everywhere,
+we obtain also
+\begin{multline*}
+\lim_{h\to 0}\frac{f(\tilde u(x)+h\dfrac{\abs{\langle
+\wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}(x)\dfrac{\langle \wt{D}
+u,\nu\rangle }{\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }}(x))-f(\tilde u(x))}{h}\\
+=\frac{\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}(x)\frac
+{\langle \wt{D}v,\nu\rangle }{\abs{\langle
+\wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }}(x)
+\end{multline*}
+$\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }$-almost everywhere in $\mathbf{R}^n$.
+
+Finally, since
+\begin{align*}
+&\frac{\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}
+\frac{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }{\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle}}
+=\frac{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }{\abs{\wt{D}u}}
+=\left\langle \frac{\wt{D}u}{\abs{\wt{D}u}},\nu\right\rangle
+ \qquad\abs{\wt{D}u}\text{-a.e. in }\mathbf{R}^n\\
+&\frac{\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}
+\frac{\langle \wt{D}v,\nu\rangle }{\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle}}
+=\frac{\langle \wt{D}v,\nu\rangle }{\abs{\wt{D}u}}
+=\left\langle \frac{\wt{D}v}{\abs{\wt{D}u}},\nu\right\rangle
+ \qquad\abs{\wt{D}u}\text{-a.e. in }\mathbf{R}^n
+\end{align*}
+and since both sides of \eqref{alimo}
+are zero $\abs{\wt{D}u}$-almost everywhere
+on $\abs{\langle \wt{D}u,\nu\rangle }$-negligible sets, we conclude that
+\[
+\lim_{h\to 0}\frac{f\left(
+\tilde u(x)+h\left\langle \dfrac{\wt{D}
+u}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}(x),\nu\right\rangle \right)-f(\tilde u(x))}h
+=\left\langle \frac{\wt{D}v}{\abs{\wt{D}u}}(x),\nu\right\rangle,
+\]
+$\abs{\wt{D}u}$-a.e. in $\mathbf{R}^n$.
+Since $\nu$ is arbitrary, by Remarks \ref{r:dif} and~\ref{r:dif0}
+the restriction of $f$ to
+the affine space $T^u_x$ is differentiable at $\tilde u(x)$ for $\abs{\wt{D}
+u}$-almost every $x\in \mathbf{R}^n$ and \eqref{quts} holds.\qed
+
+It follows from \eqref{sum-Di}, \eqref{detK1}, and \eqref{detK2} that
+\begin{equation}\label{Dt}
+D(t_1,\dots,t_n)=\sum_{I\in\mathbf{n}}(-1)^{\abs{I}-1}\abs{I}
+\prod_{i\in I}t_i\prod_{j\in I}(D_j+\lambda_jt_j)\det\mathbf{A}^{(\lambda)}
+(\overline I|\overline I).
+\end{equation}
+Let $t_i=\hat x_i$, $i=1,\dots,n$. Lemma 1 leads to
+\begin{equation}\label{Dx}
+D(\hat x_1,\dots,\hat x_n)=\prod_{i\in\mathbf{n}}\hat x_i
+\sum_{I\in\mathbf{n}}(-1)^{\abs{I}-1}\abs{I}\per \mathbf{A}
+^{(\lambda)}(I|I)\det\mathbf{A}^{(\lambda)}(\overline I|\overline I).
+\end{equation}
+By \eqref{H-cycles}, \eqref{sum-Di}, and \eqref{Dx},
+we have the following result:
+\begin{thm}\label{thm-H-param}
+\begin{equation}\label{H-param}
+H_c=\frac{1}{2n}\sum^n_{l =1}l (-1)^{l -1}A_{l}
+^{(\lambda)},
+\end{equation}
+where
+\begin{equation}\label{A-l-lambda}
+A^{(\lambda)}_l =\sum_{I_l \subseteq\mathbf{n}}\per \mathbf{A}
+^{(\lambda)}(I_l |I_l )\det\mathbf{A}^{(\lambda)}
+(\overline I_{l}|\overline I_l ),\abs{I_{l}}=l .
+\end{equation}
+\end{thm}
+
+It is worth noting that $A_l ^{(\lambda)}$ of \eqref{A-l-lambda} is
+similar to the coefficients $b_l $ of the characteristic polynomial of
+\eqref{bl-sum}. It is well known in graph theory that the coefficients
+$b_l $ can be expressed as a sum over certain subgraphs. It is
+interesting to see whether $A_l $, $\lambda=0$, structural properties
+of a graph.
+
+We may call \eqref{H-param} a parametric representation of $H_c$. In
+computation, the parameter $\lambda_i$ plays very important roles. The
+choice of the parameter usually depends on the properties of the given
+graph. For a complete graph $K_n$, let $\lambda_i=1$, $i=1,\dots,n$.
+It follows from \eqref{A-l-lambda} that
+\begin{equation}\label{compl-gr}
+A^{(1)}_l =\begin{cases} n!,&\text{if }l =1\\
+0,&\text{otherwise}.\end{cases}
+\end{equation}
+By \eqref{H-param}
+\begin{equation}
+H_c=\frac 12(n-1)!.
+\end{equation}
+For a complete bipartite graph $K_{n_1n_2}$, let $\lambda_i=0$, $i=1,\dots,n$.
+By \eqref{A-l-lambda},
+\begin{equation}
+A_l =
+\begin{cases} -n_1!n_2!\delta_{n_1n_2},&\text{if }l =2\\
+0,&\text{otherwise }.\end{cases}
+\label{compl-bip-gr}
+\end{equation}
+Theorem ~\ref{thm-H-param}
+leads to
+\begin{equation}
+H_c=\frac1{n_1+n_2}n_1!n_2!\delta_{n_1n_2}.
+\end{equation}
+
+Now, we consider an asymmetrical approach. Theorem \ref{thm-main} leads to
+\begin{multline}
+\det\mathbf{K}(t=1,t_1,\dots,t_n;l |l )\\
+=\sum_{I\subseteq\mathbf{n}-\{l \}}
+(-1)^{\abs{I}}\prod_{i\in I}t_i\prod_{j\in I}
+(D_j+\lambda_jt_j)\det\mathbf{A}^{(\lambda)}
+(\overline I\cup\{l \}|\overline I\cup\{l \}).
+\end{multline}
+
+By \eqref{H-cycles} and \eqref{sum-ali} we have the following asymmetrical
+result:
+\begin{thm}\label{thm-asym}
+\begin{equation}
+H_c=\frac12\sum_{I\subseteq\mathbf{n}-\{l \}}
+(-1)^{\abs{I}}\per\mathbf{A}^{(\lambda)}(I|I)\det
+\mathbf{A}^{(\lambda)}
+(\overline I\cup\{l \}|\overline I\cup\{l \})
+\end{equation}
+which reduces to Goulden--Jackson's formula when $\lambda_i=0,i=1,\dots,n$
+\cite{mami:matrixth}.
+\end{thm}
+
+\section{Various font features of the \pkg{amsmath} package}
+\label{s:font}
+\subsection{Bold versions of special symbols}
+
+In the \pkg{amsmath} package \cn{boldsymbol} is used for getting
+individual bold math symbols and bold Greek letters---everything in
+math except for letters of the Latin alphabet,
+where you'd use \cn{mathbf}. For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+A_\infty + \pi A_0 \sim
+\mathbf{A}_{\boldsymbol{\infty}} \boldsymbol{+}
+\boldsymbol{\pi} \mathbf{A}_{\boldsymbol{0}}
+\end{verbatim}
+looks like this:
+\[A_\infty + \pi A_0 \sim \mathbf{A}_{\boldsymbol{\infty}}
+\boldsymbol{+} \boldsymbol{\pi} \mathbf{A}_{\boldsymbol{0}}\]
+
+\subsection{``Poor man's bold''}
+If a bold version of a particular symbol doesn't exist in the
+available fonts,
+then \cn{boldsymbol} can't be used to make that symbol bold.
+At the present time, this means that
+\cn{boldsymbol} can't be used with symbols from
+the \fn{msam} and \fn{msbm} fonts, among others.
+In some cases, poor man's bold (\cn{pmb}) can be used instead
+of \cn{boldsymbol}:
+% Can't show example from msam or msbm because this document is
+% supposed to be TeXable even if the user doesn't have
+% AMSFonts. MJD 5-JUL-1990
+\[\frac{\partial x}{\partial y}
+\pmb{\bigg\vert}
+\frac{\partial y}{\partial z}\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[\frac{\partial x}{\partial y}
+\pmb{\bigg\vert}
+\frac{\partial y}{\partial z}\]
+\end{verbatim}
+So-called ``large operator'' symbols such as $\sum$ and $\prod$
+require an additional command, \cn{mathop},
+to produce proper spacing and limits when \cn{pmb} is used.
+For further details see \textit{The \TeX book}.
+\[\sum_{\substack{i<B\\\text{$i$ odd}}}
+\prod_\kappa \kappa F(r_i)\qquad
+\mathop{\pmb{\sum}}_{\substack{i<B\\\text{$i$ odd}}}
+\mathop{\pmb{\prod}}_\kappa \kappa(r_i)
+\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[\sum_{\substack{i<B\\\text{$i$ odd}}}
+\prod_\kappa \kappa F(r_i)\qquad
+\mathop{\pmb{\sum}}_{\substack{i<B\\\text{$i$ odd}}}
+\mathop{\pmb{\prod}}_\kappa \kappa(r_i)
+\]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Compound symbols and other features}
+\label{s:comp}
+\subsection{Multiple integral signs}
+
+\cn{iint}, \cn{iiint}, and \cn{iiiint} give multiple integral signs
+with the spacing between them nicely adjusted, in both text and
+display style. \cn{idotsint} gives two integral signs with dots
+between them.
+\begin{gather}
+\iint\limits_A f(x,y)\,dx\,dy\qquad\iiint\limits_A
+f(x,y,z)\,dx\,dy\,dz\\
+\iiiint\limits_A
+f(w,x,y,z)\,dw\,dx\,dy\,dz\qquad\idotsint\limits_A f(x_1,\dots,x_k)
+\end{gather}
+
+\subsection{Over and under arrows}
+
+Some extra over and under arrow operations are provided in
+the \pkg{amsmath} package. (Basic \LaTeX\ provides
+\cn{overrightarrow} and \cn{overleftarrow}).
+\begin{align*}
+\overrightarrow{\psi_\delta(t) E_t h}&
+=\underrightarrow{\psi_\delta(t) E_t h}\\
+\overleftarrow{\psi_\delta(t) E_t h}&
+=\underleftarrow{\psi_\delta(t) E_t h}\\
+\overleftrightarrow{\psi_\delta(t) E_t h}&
+=\underleftrightarrow{\psi_\delta(t) E_t h}
+\end{align*}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align*}
+\overrightarrow{\psi_\delta(t) E_t h}&
+=\underrightarrow{\psi_\delta(t) E_t h}\\
+\overleftarrow{\psi_\delta(t) E_t h}&
+=\underleftarrow{\psi_\delta(t) E_t h}\\
+\overleftrightarrow{\psi_\delta(t) E_t h}&
+=\underleftrightarrow{\psi_\delta(t) E_t h}
+\end{align*}
+\end{verbatim}
+These all scale properly in subscript sizes:
+\[\int_{\overrightarrow{AB}} ax\,dx\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[\int_{\overrightarrow{AB}} ax\,dx\]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Dots}
+
+Normally you need only type \cn{dots} for ellipsis dots in a
+math formula. The main exception is when the dots
+fall at the end of the formula; then you need to
+specify one of \cn{dotsc} (series dots, after a comma),
+\cn{dotsb} (binary dots, for binary relations or operators),
+\cn{dotsm} (multiplication dots), or \cn{dotsi} (dots after
+an integral). For example, the input
+\begin{verbatim}
+Then we have the series $A_1,A_2,\dotsc$,
+the regional sum $A_1+A_2+\dotsb$,
+the orthogonal product $A_1A_2\dotsm$,
+and the infinite integral
+\[\int_{A_1}\int_{A_2}\dotsi\].
+\end{verbatim}
+produces
+\begin{quotation}
+Then we have the series $A_1,A_2,\dotsc$,
+the regional sum $A_1+A_2+\dotsb$,
+the orthogonal product $A_1A_2\dotsm$,
+and the infinite integral
+\[\int_{A_1}\int_{A_2}\dotsi\]
+\end{quotation}
+
+\subsection{Accents in math}
+
+Double accents:
+\[\Hat{\Hat{H}}\quad\Check{\Check{C}}\quad
+\Tilde{\Tilde{T}}\quad\Acute{\Acute{A}}\quad
+\Grave{\Grave{G}}\quad\Dot{\Dot{D}}\quad
+\Ddot{\Ddot{D}}\quad\Breve{\Breve{B}}\quad
+\Bar{\Bar{B}}\quad\Vec{\Vec{V}}\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[\Hat{\Hat{H}}\quad\Check{\Check{C}}\quad
+\Tilde{\Tilde{T}}\quad\Acute{\Acute{A}}\quad
+\Grave{\Grave{G}}\quad\Dot{\Dot{D}}\quad
+\Ddot{\Ddot{D}}\quad\Breve{\Breve{B}}\quad
+\Bar{\Bar{B}}\quad\Vec{\Vec{V}}\]
+\end{verbatim}
+This double accent operation is complicated
+and tends to slow down the processing of a \LaTeX\ file.
+
+
+\subsection{Dot accents}
+\cn{dddot} and \cn{ddddot} are available to
+produce triple and quadruple dot accents
+in addition to the \cn{dot} and \cn{ddot} accents already available
+in \LaTeX:
+\[\dddot{Q}\qquad\ddddot{R}\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[\dddot{Q}\qquad\ddddot{R}\]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Roots}
+
+In the \pkg{amsmath} package \cn{leftroot} and \cn{uproot} allow you to adjust
+the position of the root index of a radical:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\sqrt[\leftroot{-2}\uproot{2}\beta]{k}
+\end{verbatim}
+gives good positioning of the $\beta$:
+\[\sqrt[\leftroot{-2}\uproot{2}\beta]{k}\]
+
+\subsection{Boxed formulas} The command \cn{boxed} puts a box around its
+argument, like \cn{fbox} except that the contents are in math mode:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\boxed{W_t-F\subseteq V(P_i)\subseteq W_t}
+\end{verbatim}
+\[\boxed{W_t-F\subseteq V(P_i)\subseteq W_t}.\]
+
+\subsection{Extensible arrows}
+\cn{xleftarrow} and \cn{xrightarrow} produce
+arrows that extend automatically to accommodate unusually wide
+subscripts or superscripts. The text of the subscript or superscript
+are given as an optional resp.\@ mandatory argument:
+Example:
+\[0 \xleftarrow[\zeta]{\alpha} F\times\triangle[n-1]
+ \xrightarrow{\partial_0\alpha(b)} E^{\partial_0b}\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[0 \xleftarrow[\zeta]{\alpha} F\times\triangle[n-1]
+ \xrightarrow{\partial_0\alpha(b)} E^{\partial_0b}\]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{\cn{overset}, \cn{underset}, and \cn{sideset}}
+Examples:
+\[\overset{*}{X}\qquad\underset{*}{X}\qquad
+\overset{a}{\underset{b}{X}}\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[\overset{*}{X}\qquad\underset{*}{X}\qquad
+\overset{a}{\underset{b}{X}}\]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The command \cn{sideset} is for a rather special
+purpose: putting symbols at the subscript and superscript
+corners of a large operator symbol such as $\sum$ or $\prod$,
+without affecting the placement of limits.
+Examples:
+\[\sideset{_*^*}{_*^*}\prod_k\qquad
+\sideset{}{'}\sum_{0\le i\le m} E_i\beta x
+\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[\sideset{_*^*}{_*^*}\prod_k\qquad
+\sideset{}{'}\sum_{0\le i\le m} E_i\beta x
+\]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{The \cn{text} command}
+The main use of the command \cn{text} is for words or phrases in a
+display:
+\[\mathbf{y}=\mathbf{y}'\quad\text{if and only if}\quad
+y'_k=\delta_k y_{\tau(k)}\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[\mathbf{y}=\mathbf{y}'\quad\text{if and only if}\quad
+y'_k=\delta_k y_{\tau(k)}\]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Operator names}
+The more common math functions such as $\log$, $\sin$, and $\lim$
+have predefined control sequences: \verb=\log=, \verb=\sin=,
+\verb=\lim=.
+The \pkg{amsmath} package provides \cn{DeclareMathOperator} and
+\cn{DeclareMathOperator*}
+for producing new function names that will have the
+same typographical treatment.
+Examples:
+\[\norm{f}_\infty=
+\esssup_{x\in R^n}\abs{f(x)}\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[\norm{f}_\infty=
+\esssup_{x\in R^n}\abs{f(x)}\]
+\end{verbatim}
+\[\meas_1\{u\in R_+^1\colon f^*(u)>\alpha\}
+=\meas_n\{x\in R^n\colon \abs{f(x)}\geq\alpha\}
+\quad \forall\alpha>0.\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[\meas_1\{u\in R_+^1\colon f^*(u)>\alpha\}
+=\meas_n\{x\in R^n\colon \abs{f(x)}\geq\alpha\}
+\quad \forall\alpha>0.\]
+\end{verbatim}
+\cn{esssup} and \cn{meas} would be defined in the document preamble as
+\begin{verbatim}
+\DeclareMathOperator*{\esssup}{ess\,sup}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\meas}{meas}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The following special operator names are predefined in the \pkg{amsmath}
+package: \cn{varlimsup}, \cn{varliminf}, \cn{varinjlim}, and
+\cn{varprojlim}. Here's what they look like in use:
+\begin{align}
+&\varlimsup_{n\rightarrow\infty}
+ \mathcal{Q}(u_n,u_n-u^{\#})\le0\\
+&\varliminf_{n\rightarrow\infty}
+ \left\lvert a_{n+1}\right\rvert/\left\lvert a_n\right\rvert=0\\
+&\varinjlim (m_i^\lambda\cdot)^*\le0\\
+&\varprojlim_{p\in S(A)}A_p\le0
+\end{align}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align}
+&\varlimsup_{n\rightarrow\infty}
+ \mathcal{Q}(u_n,u_n-u^{\#})\le0\\
+&\varliminf_{n\rightarrow\infty}
+ \left\lvert a_{n+1}\right\rvert/\left\lvert a_n\right\rvert=0\\
+&\varinjlim (m_i^\lambda\cdot)^*\le0\\
+&\varprojlim_{p\in S(A)}A_p\le0
+\end{align}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{\cn{mod} and its relatives}
+The commands \cn{mod} and \cn{pod} are variants of
+\cn{pmod} preferred by some authors; \cn{mod} omits the parentheses,
+whereas \cn{pod} omits the `mod' and retains the parentheses.
+Examples:
+\begin{align}
+x&\equiv y+1\pmod{m^2}\\
+x&\equiv y+1\mod{m^2}\\
+x&\equiv y+1\pod{m^2}
+\end{align}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align}
+x&\equiv y+1\pmod{m^2}\\
+x&\equiv y+1\mod{m^2}\\
+x&\equiv y+1\pod{m^2}
+\end{align}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Fractions and related constructions}
+\label{fracs}
+
+The usual notation for binomials is similar to the fraction concept,
+so it has a similar command \cn{binom} with two arguments. Example:
+\begin{equation}
+\begin{split}
+\sum_{\gamma\in\Gamma_C} I_\gamma&
+=2^k-\binom{k}{1}2^{k-1}+\binom{k}{2}2^{k-2}\\
+&\quad+\dots+(-1)^l\binom{k}{l}2^{k-l}
++\dots+(-1)^k\\
+&=(2-1)^k=1
+\end{split}
+\end{equation}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation}
+\begin{split}
+[\sum_{\gamma\in\Gamma_C} I_\gamma&
+=2^k-\binom{k}{1}2^{k-1}+\binom{k}{2}2^{k-2}\\
+&\quad+\dots+(-1)^l\binom{k}{l}2^{k-l}
++\dots+(-1)^k\\
+&=(2-1)^k=1
+\end{split}
+\end{equation}
+\end{verbatim}
+There are also abbreviations
+\begin{verbatim}
+\dfrac \dbinom
+\tfrac \tbinom
+\end{verbatim}
+for the commonly needed constructions
+\begin{verbatim}
+{\displaystyle\frac ... } {\displaystyle\binom ... }
+{\textstyle\frac ... } {\textstyle\binom ... }
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The generalized fraction command \cn{genfrac} provides full access to
+the six \TeX{} fraction primitives:
+\begin{align}
+\text{\cn{over}: }&\genfrac{}{}{}{}{n+1}{2}&
+\text{\cn{overwithdelims}: }&
+ \genfrac{\langle}{\rangle}{}{}{n+1}{2}\\
+\text{\cn{atop}: }&\genfrac{}{}{0pt}{}{n+1}{2}&
+\text{\cn{atopwithdelims}: }&
+ \genfrac{(}{)}{0pt}{}{n+1}{2}\\
+\text{\cn{above}: }&\genfrac{}{}{1pt}{}{n+1}{2}&
+\text{\cn{abovewithdelims}: }&
+ \genfrac{[}{]}{1pt}{}{n+1}{2}
+\end{align}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\text{\cn{over}: }&\genfrac{}{}{}{}{n+1}{2}&
+\text{\cn{overwithdelims}: }&
+ \genfrac{\langle}{\rangle}{}{}{n+1}{2}\\
+\text{\cn{atop}: }&\genfrac{}{}{0pt}{}{n+1}{2}&
+\text{\cn{atopwithdelims}: }&
+ \genfrac{(}{)}{0pt}{}{n+1}{2}\\
+\text{\cn{above}: }&\genfrac{}{}{1pt}{}{n+1}{2}&
+\text{\cn{abovewithdelims}: }&
+ \genfrac{[}{]}{1pt}{}{n+1}{2}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Continued fractions}
+The continued fraction
+\begin{equation}
+\cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+
+ \cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+
+ \cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+
+ \cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+
+ \cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+\dotsb
+}}}}}
+\end{equation}
+can be obtained by typing
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+
+ \cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+
+ \cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+
+ \cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+
+ \cfrac{1}{\sqrt{2}+\dotsb
+}}}}}
+\end{verbatim}
+Left or right placement of any of the numerators is accomplished by using
+\cn{cfrac[l]} or \cn{cfrac[r]} instead of \cn{cfrac}.
+
+\subsection{Smash}
+
+In \pkg{amsmath} there are optional arguments \verb"t" and \verb"b" for
+the plain \TeX\ command \cn{smash}, because sometimes it is advantageous
+to be able to `smash' only the top or only the bottom of something while
+retaining the natural depth or height. In the formula
+$X_j=(1/\sqrt{\smash[b]{\lambda_j}})X_j'$ \cn{smash}\verb=[b]= has been
+used to limit the size of the radical symbol.
+\begin{verbatim}
+$X_j=(1/\sqrt{\smash[b]{\lambda_j}})X_j'$
+\end{verbatim}
+Without the use of \cn{smash}\verb=[b]= the formula would have appeared
+thus: $X_j=(1/\sqrt{\lambda_j})X_j'$, with the radical extending to
+encompass the depth of the subscript $j$.
+
+\subsection{The `cases' environment}
+`Cases' constructions like the following can be produced using
+the \env{cases} environment.
+\begin{equation}
+P_{r-j}=
+ \begin{cases}
+ 0& \text{if $r-j$ is odd},\\
+ r!\,(-1)^{(r-j)/2}& \text{if $r-j$ is even}.
+ \end{cases}
+\end{equation}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation} P_{r-j}=
+ \begin{cases}
+ 0& \text{if $r-j$ is odd},\\
+ r!\,(-1)^{(r-j)/2}& \text{if $r-j$ is even}.
+ \end{cases}
+\end{equation}
+\end{verbatim}
+Notice the use of \cn{text} and the embedded math.
+
+\subsection{Matrix}
+
+Here are samples of the matrix environments,
+\cn{matrix}, \cn{pmatrix}, \cn{bmatrix}, \cn{Bmatrix}, \cn{vmatrix}
+and \cn{Vmatrix}:
+\begin{equation}
+\begin{matrix}
+\vartheta& \varrho\\\varphi& \varpi
+\end{matrix}\quad
+\begin{pmatrix}
+\vartheta& \varrho\\\varphi& \varpi
+\end{pmatrix}\quad
+\begin{bmatrix}
+\vartheta& \varrho\\\varphi& \varpi
+\end{bmatrix}\quad
+\begin{Bmatrix}
+\vartheta& \varrho\\\varphi& \varpi
+\end{Bmatrix}\quad
+\begin{vmatrix}
+\vartheta& \varrho\\\varphi& \varpi
+\end{vmatrix}\quad
+\begin{Vmatrix}
+\vartheta& \varrho\\\varphi& \varpi
+\end{Vmatrix}
+\end{equation}
+%
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{matrix}
+\vartheta& \varrho\\\varphi& \varpi
+\end{matrix}\quad
+\begin{pmatrix}
+\vartheta& \varrho\\\varphi& \varpi
+\end{pmatrix}\quad
+\begin{bmatrix}
+\vartheta& \varrho\\\varphi& \varpi
+\end{bmatrix}\quad
+\begin{Bmatrix}
+\vartheta& \varrho\\\varphi& \varpi
+\end{Bmatrix}\quad
+\begin{vmatrix}
+\vartheta& \varrho\\\varphi& \varpi
+\end{vmatrix}\quad
+\begin{Vmatrix}
+\vartheta& \varrho\\\varphi& \varpi
+\end{Vmatrix}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+To produce a small matrix suitable for use in text, use the
+\env{smallmatrix} environment.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{math}
+ \bigl( \begin{smallmatrix}
+ a&b\\ c&d
+ \end{smallmatrix} \bigr)
+\end{math}
+\end{verbatim}
+To show
+the effect of the matrix on the surrounding lines of
+a paragraph, we put it here: \begin{math}
+ \bigl( \begin{smallmatrix}
+ a&b\\ c&d
+ \end{smallmatrix} \bigr)
+\end{math}
+and follow it with enough text to ensure that there will
+be at least one full line below the matrix.
+
+\cn{hdotsfor}\verb"{"\textit{number}\verb"}" produces a row of dots in a matrix
+spanning the given number of columns:
+\[W(\Phi)= \begin{Vmatrix}
+\dfrac\varphi{(\varphi_1,\varepsilon_1)}&0&\dots&0\\
+\dfrac{\varphi k_{n2}}{(\varphi_2,\varepsilon_1)}&
+\dfrac\varphi{(\varphi_2,\varepsilon_2)}&\dots&0\\
+\hdotsfor{5}\\
+\dfrac{\varphi k_{n1}}{(\varphi_n,\varepsilon_1)}&
+\dfrac{\varphi k_{n2}}{(\varphi_n,\varepsilon_2)}&\dots&
+\dfrac{\varphi k_{n\,n-1}}{(\varphi_n,\varepsilon_{n-1})}&
+\dfrac{\varphi}{(\varphi_n,\varepsilon_n)}
+\end{Vmatrix}\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[W(\Phi)= \begin{Vmatrix}
+\dfrac\varphi{(\varphi_1,\varepsilon_1)}&0&\dots&0\\
+\dfrac{\varphi k_{n2}}{(\varphi_2,\varepsilon_1)}&
+\dfrac\varphi{(\varphi_2,\varepsilon_2)}&\dots&0\\
+\hdotsfor{5}\\
+\dfrac{\varphi k_{n1}}{(\varphi_n,\varepsilon_1)}&
+\dfrac{\varphi k_{n2}}{(\varphi_n,\varepsilon_2)}&\dots&
+\dfrac{\varphi k_{n\,n-1}}{(\varphi_n,\varepsilon_{n-1})}&
+\dfrac{\varphi}{(\varphi_n,\varepsilon_n)}
+\end{Vmatrix}\]
+\end{verbatim}
+The spacing of the dots can be varied through use of a square-bracket
+option, for example, \verb"\hdotsfor[1.5]{3}". The number in square brackets
+will be used as a multiplier; the normal value is 1.
+
+\subsection{The \cn{substack} command}
+
+The \cn{substack} command can be used to produce a multiline
+subscript or superscript:
+for example
+\begin{verbatim}
+\sum_{\substack{0\le i\le m\\ 0<j<n}} P(i,j)
+\end{verbatim}
+produces a two-line subscript underneath the sum:
+\begin{equation}
+\sum_{\substack{0\le i\le m\\ 0<j<n}} P(i,j)
+\end{equation}
+A slightly more generalized form is the \env{subarray} environment which
+allows you to specify that each line should be left-aligned instead of
+centered, as here:
+\begin{equation}
+\sum_{\begin{subarray}{l}
+ 0\le i\le m\\ 0<j<n
+ \end{subarray}}
+ P(i,j)
+\end{equation}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\sum_{\begin{subarray}{l}
+ 0\le i\le m\\ 0<j<n
+ \end{subarray}}
+ P(i,j)
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{Big-g-g delimiters}
+Here are some big delimiters, first in \cn{normalsize}:
+\[\biggl(\mathbf{E}_{y}
+ \int_0^{t_\varepsilon}L_{x,y^x(s)}\varphi(x)\,ds
+ \biggr)
+\]
+\begin{verbatim}
+\[\biggl(\mathbf{E}_{y}
+ \int_0^{t_\varepsilon}L_{x,y^x(s)}\varphi(x)\,ds
+ \biggr)
+\]
+\end{verbatim}
+and now in \cn{Large} size:
+{\Large
+\[\biggl(\mathbf{E}_{y}
+ \int_0^{t_\varepsilon}L_{x,y^x(s)}\varphi(x)\,ds
+ \biggr)
+\]}
+\begin{verbatim}
+{\Large
+\[\biggl(\mathbf{E}_{y}
+ \int_0^{t_\varepsilon}L_{x,y^x(s)}\varphi(x)\,ds
+ \biggr)
+\]}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\newpage
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\makeatletter
+
+%% This turns on vertical rules at the right and left margins, to
+%% better illustrate the spacing for certain multiple-line equation
+%% structures.
+\def\@makecol{\ifvoid\footins \setbox\@outputbox\box\@cclv
+ \else\setbox\@outputbox
+ \vbox{\boxmaxdepth \maxdepth
+ \unvbox\@cclv\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule\unvbox\footins}\fi
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}\gdef\@midlist{}\@combinefloats
+ \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\vrule width\marginrulewidth
+ \vbox to\@colht{\boxmaxdepth\maxdepth
+ \@texttop\dimen128=\dp\@outputbox\unvbox\@outputbox
+ \vskip-\dimen128\@textbottom}%
+ \vrule width\marginrulewidth}%
+ \global\maxdepth\@maxdepth}
+\newdimen\marginrulewidth
+\setlength{\marginrulewidth}{.1pt}
+\makeatother
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\appendix
+\section{Examples of multiple-line equation structures}
+\label{s:eq}
+
+\textbf{\large Note: Starting on this page, vertical rules are
+added at the margins so that the positioning of various display elements
+with respect to the margins can be seen more clearly.}
+
+\subsection{Split}
+The \env{split} environment is not an independent environment
+but should be used inside something else such as \env{equation}
+or \env{align}.
+
+If there is not enough room for it, the equation number for a
+\env{split} will be shifted to the previous line, when equation numbers are
+on the left; the number shifts down to the next line when numbers are on
+the right.
+\begin{equation}
+\begin{split}
+f_{h,\varepsilon}(x,y)
+&=\varepsilon\mathbf{E}_{x,y}\int_0^{t_\varepsilon}
+L_{x,y_\varepsilon(\varepsilon u)}\varphi(x)\,du\\
+&= h\int L_{x,z}\varphi(x)\rho_x(dz)\\
+&\quad+h\biggl[\frac{1}{t_\varepsilon}\biggl(\mathbf{E}_{y}
+ \int_0^{t_\varepsilon}L_{x,y^x(s)}\varphi(x)\,ds
+ -t_\varepsilon\int L_{x,z}\varphi(x)\rho_x(dz)\biggr)\\
+&\phantom{{=}+h\biggl[}+\frac{1}{t_\varepsilon}
+ \biggl(\mathbf{E}_{y}\int_0^{t_\varepsilon}L_{x,y^x(s)}
+ \varphi(x)\,ds -\mathbf{E}_{x,y}\int_0^{t_\varepsilon}
+ L_{x,y_\varepsilon(\varepsilon s)}
+ \varphi(x)\,ds\biggr)\biggr]\\
+&=h\wh{L}_x\varphi(x)+h\theta_\varepsilon(x,y),
+\end{split}
+\end{equation}
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation}
+\begin{split}
+f_{h,\varepsilon}(x,y)
+&=\varepsilon\mathbf{E}_{x,y}\int_0^{t_\varepsilon}
+L_{x,y_\varepsilon(\varepsilon u)}\varphi(x)\,du\\
+&= h\int L_{x,z}\varphi(x)\rho_x(dz)\\
+&\quad+h\biggl[\frac{1}{t_\varepsilon}\biggl(\mathbf{E}_{y}
+ \int_0^{t_\varepsilon}L_{x,y^x(s)}\varphi(x)\,ds
+ -t_\varepsilon\int L_{x,z}\varphi(x)\rho_x(dz)\biggr)\\
+&\phantom{{=}+h\biggl[}+\frac{1}{t_\varepsilon}
+ \biggl(\mathbf{E}_{y}\int_0^{t_\varepsilon}L_{x,y^x(s)}
+ \varphi(x)\,ds -\mathbf{E}_{x,y}\int_0^{t_\varepsilon}
+ L_{x,y_\varepsilon(\varepsilon s)}
+ \varphi(x)\,ds\biggr)\biggr]\\
+&=h\wh{L}_x\varphi(x)+h\theta_\varepsilon(x,y),
+\end{split}
+\end{equation}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newpage
+Unnumbered version:
+\begin{equation*}
+\begin{split}
+f_{h,\varepsilon}(x,y)
+&=\varepsilon\mathbf{E}_{x,y}\int_0^{t_\varepsilon}
+L_{x,y_\varepsilon(\varepsilon u)}\varphi(x)\,du\\
+&= h\int L_{x,z}\varphi(x)\rho_x(dz)\\
+&\quad+h\biggl[\frac{1}{t_\varepsilon}\biggl(\mathbf{E}_{y}
+ \int_0^{t_\varepsilon}L_{x,y^x(s)}\varphi(x)\,ds
+ -t_\varepsilon\int L_{x,z}\varphi(x)\rho_x(dz)\biggr)\\
+&\phantom{{=}+h\biggl[}+\frac{1}{t_\varepsilon}
+ \biggl(\mathbf{E}_{y}\int_0^{t_\varepsilon}L_{x,y^x(s)}
+ \varphi(x)\,ds -\mathbf{E}_{x,y}\int_0^{t_\varepsilon}
+ L_{x,y_\varepsilon(\varepsilon s)}
+ \varphi(x)\,ds\biggr)\biggr]\\
+&=h\wh{L}_x\varphi(x)+h\theta_\varepsilon(x,y),
+\end{split}
+\end{equation*}
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation*}
+\begin{split}
+f_{h,\varepsilon}(x,y)
+&=\varepsilon\mathbf{E}_{x,y}\int_0^{t_\varepsilon}
+L_{x,y_\varepsilon(\varepsilon u)}\varphi(x)\,du\\
+&= h\int L_{x,z}\varphi(x)\rho_x(dz)\\
+&\quad+h\biggl[\frac{1}{t_\varepsilon}\biggl(\mathbf{E}_{y}
+ \int_0^{t_\varepsilon}L_{x,y^x(s)}\varphi(x)\,ds
+ -t_\varepsilon\int L_{x,z}\varphi(x)\rho_x(dz)\biggr)\\
+&\phantom{{=}+h\biggl[}+\frac{1}{t_\varepsilon}
+ \biggl(\mathbf{E}_{y}\int_0^{t_\varepsilon}L_{x,y^x(s)}
+ \varphi(x)\,ds -\mathbf{E}_{x,y}\int_0^{t_\varepsilon}
+ L_{x,y_\varepsilon(\varepsilon s)}
+ \varphi(x)\,ds\biggr)\biggr]\\
+&=h\wh{L}_x\varphi(x)+h\theta_\varepsilon(x,y),
+\end{split}
+\end{equation*}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newpage
+If the option \env{centertags} is included in the options
+list of the \pkg{amsmath} package,
+the equation numbers for \env{split} environments will be
+centered vertically on the height
+of the \env{split}:
+{\makeatletter\ctagsplit at true
+\begin{equation}
+\begin{split}
+ \abs{I_2}&=\left\lvert \int_{0}^T \psi(t)\left\{u(a,t)-\int_{\gamma(t)}^a
+ \frac{d\theta}{k(\theta,t)}
+ \int_{a}^\theta c(\xi)u_t(\xi,t)\,d\xi\right\}dt\right\rvert\\
+&\le C_6\left\lvert \left\lvert f\int_\Omega\left\lvert \wt{S}^{-1,0}_{a,-}
+ W_2(\Omega,\Gamma_l)\right\rvert\right\rvert
+ \left\lvert \abs{u}\overset{\circ}\to W_2^{\wt{A}}
+ (\Omega;\Gamma_r,T)\right\rvert\right\rvert.
+\end{split}
+\end{equation}}%
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newpage
+Use of \env{split} within \env{align}:
+{\delimiterfactor750
+\begin{align}
+\begin{split}\abs{I_1}
+ &=\left\lvert \int_\Omega gRu\,d\Omega\right\rvert\\
+&\le C_3\left[\int_\Omega\left(\int_{a}^x
+ g(\xi,t)\,d\xi\right)^2d\Omega\right]^{1/2}\\
+&\quad\times \left[\int_\Omega\left\{u^2_x+\frac{1}{k}
+ \left(\int_{a}^x cu_t\,d\xi\right)^2\right\}
+ c\Omega\right]^{1/2}\\
+&\le C_4\left\lvert \left\lvert f\left\lvert \wt{S}^{-1,0}_{a,-}
+ W_2(\Omega,\Gamma_l)\right\rvert\right\rvert
+ \left\lvert \abs{u}\overset{\circ}\to W_2^{\wt{A}}
+ (\Omega;\Gamma_r,T)\right\rvert\right\rvert.
+\end{split}\label{eq:A}\\
+\begin{split}\abs{I_2}&=\left\lvert \int_{0}^T \psi(t)\left\{u(a,t)
+ -\int_{\gamma(t)}^a\frac{d\theta}{k(\theta,t)}
+ \int_{a}^\theta c(\xi)u_t(\xi,t)\,d\xi\right\}dt\right\rvert\\
+&\le C_6\left\lvert \left\lvert f\int_\Omega
+ \left\lvert \wt{S}^{-1,0}_{a,-}
+ W_2(\Omega,\Gamma_l)\right\rvert\right\rvert
+ \left\lvert \abs{u}\overset{\circ}\to W_2^{\wt{A}}
+ (\Omega;\Gamma_r,T)\right\rvert\right\rvert.
+\end{split}
+\end{align}}%
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align}
+\begin{split}\abs{I_1}
+ &=\left\lvert \int_\Omega gRu\,d\Omega\right\rvert\\
+&\le C_3\left[\int_\Omega\left(\int_{a}^x
+ g(\xi,t)\,d\xi\right)^2d\Omega\right]^{1/2}\\
+&\quad\times \left[\int_\Omega\left\{u^2_x+\frac{1}{k}
+ \left(\int_{a}^x cu_t\,d\xi\right)^2\right\}
+ c\Omega\right]^{1/2}\\
+&\le C_4\left\lvert \left\lvert f\left\lvert \wt{S}^{-1,0}_{a,-}
+ W_2(\Omega,\Gamma_l)\right\rvert\right\rvert
+ \left\lvert \abs{u}\overset{\circ}\to W_2^{\wt{A}}
+ (\Omega;\Gamma_r,T)\right\rvert\right\rvert.
+\end{split}\label{eq:A}\\
+\begin{split}\abs{I_2}&=\left\lvert \int_{0}^T \psi(t)\left\{u(a,t)
+ -\int_{\gamma(t)}^a\frac{d\theta}{k(\theta,t)}
+ \int_{a}^\theta c(\xi)u_t(\xi,t)\,d\xi\right\}dt\right\rvert\\
+&\le C_6\left\lvert \left\lvert f\int_\Omega
+ \left\lvert \wt{S}^{-1,0}_{a,-}
+ W_2(\Omega,\Gamma_l)\right\rvert\right\rvert
+ \left\lvert \abs{u}\overset{\circ}\to W_2^{\wt{A}}
+ (\Omega;\Gamma_r,T)\right\rvert\right\rvert.
+\end{split}
+\end{align}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newpage
+Unnumbered \env{align}, with a number on the second \env{split}:
+\begin{align*}
+\begin{split}\abs{I_1}&=\left\lvert \int_\Omega gRu\,d\Omega\right\rvert\\
+ &\le C_3\left[\int_\Omega\left(\int_{a}^x
+ g(\xi,t)\,d\xi\right)^2d\Omega\right]^{1/2}\\
+&\phantom{=}\times \left[\int_\Omega\left\{u^2_x+\frac{1}{k}
+ \left(\int_{a}^x cu_t\,d\xi\right)^2\right\}
+ c\Omega\right]^{1/2}\\
+&\le C_4\left\lvert \left\lvert f\left\lvert \wt{S}^{-1,0}_{a,-}
+ W_2(\Omega,\Gamma_l)\right\rvert\right\rvert
+ \left\lvert \abs{u}\overset{\circ}\to W_2^{\wt{A}}
+ (\Omega;\Gamma_r,T)\right\rvert\right\rvert.
+\end{split}\\
+\begin{split}\abs{I_2}&=\left\lvert \int_{0}^T \psi(t)\left\{u(a,t)
+ -\int_{\gamma(t)}^a\frac{d\theta}{k(\theta,t)}
+ \int_{a}^\theta c(\xi)u_t(\xi,t)\,d\xi\right\}dt\right\rvert\\
+&\le C_6\left\lvert \left\lvert f\int_\Omega
+ \left\lvert \wt{S}^{-1,0}_{a,-}
+ W_2(\Omega,\Gamma_l)\right\rvert\right\rvert
+ \left\lvert \abs{u}\overset{\circ}\to W_2^{\wt{A}}
+ (\Omega;\Gamma_r,T)\right\rvert\right\rvert.
+\end{split}\tag{\theequation$'$}
+\end{align*}
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align*}
+\begin{split}\abs{I_1}&=\left\lvert \int_\Omega gRu\,d\Omega\right\rvert\\
+ &\le C_3\left[\int_\Omega\left(\int_{a}^x
+ g(\xi,t)\,d\xi\right)^2d\Omega\right]^{1/2}\\
+&\phantom{=}\times \left[\int_\Omega\left\{u^2_x+\frac{1}{k}
+ \left(\int_{a}^x cu_t\,d\xi\right)^2\right\}
+ c\Omega\right]^{1/2}\\
+&\le C_4\left\lvert \left\lvert f\left\lvert \wt{S}^{-1,0}_{a,-}
+ W_2(\Omega,\Gamma_l)\right\rvert\right\rvert
+ \left\lvert \abs{u}\overset{\circ}\to W_2^{\wt{A}}
+ (\Omega;\Gamma_r,T)\right\rvert\right\rvert.
+\end{split}\\
+\begin{split}\abs{I_2}&=\left\lvert \int_{0}^T \psi(t)\left\{u(a,t)
+ -\int_{\gamma(t)}^a\frac{d\theta}{k(\theta,t)}
+ \int_{a}^\theta c(\xi)u_t(\xi,t)\,d\xi\right\}dt\right\rvert\\
+&\le C_6\left\lvert \left\lvert f\int_\Omega
+ \left\lvert \wt{S}^{-1,0}_{a,-}
+ W_2(\Omega,\Gamma_l)\right\rvert\right\rvert
+ \left\lvert \abs{u}\overset{\circ}\to W_2^{\wt{A}}
+ (\Omega;\Gamma_r,T)\right\rvert\right\rvert.
+\end{split}\tag{\theequation$'$}
+\end{align*}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newpage
+\subsection{Multline}
+Numbered version:
+\begin{multline}\label{eq:E}
+\int_a^b\biggl\{\int_a^b[f(x)^2g(y)^2+f(y)^2g(x)^2]
+ -2f(x)g(x)f(y)g(y)\,dx\biggr\}\,dy \\
+ =\int_a^b\biggl\{g(y)^2\int_a^bf^2+f(y)^2
+ \int_a^b g^2-2f(y)g(y)\int_a^b fg\biggr\}\,dy
+\end{multline}
+To test the use of \verb=\label= and
+\verb=\ref=, we refer to the number of this
+equation here: (\ref{eq:E}).
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{multline}\label{eq:E}
+\int_a^b\biggl\{\int_a^b[f(x)^2g(y)^2+f(y)^2g(x)^2]
+ -2f(x)g(x)f(y)g(y)\,dx\biggr\}\,dy \\
+ =\int_a^b\biggl\{g(y)^2\int_a^bf^2+f(y)^2
+ \int_a^b g^2-2f(y)g(y)\int_a^b fg\biggr\}\,dy
+\end{multline}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Unnumbered version:
+\begin{multline*}
+\int_a^b\biggl\{\int_a^b[f(x)^2g(y)^2+f(y)^2g(x)^2]
+ -2f(x)g(x)f(y)g(y)\,dx\biggr\}\,dy \\
+ =\int_a^b\biggl\{g(y)^2\int_a^bf^2+f(y)^2
+ \int_a^b g^2-2f(y)g(y)\int_a^b fg\biggr\}\,dy
+\end{multline*}
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{multline*}
+\int_a^b\biggl\{\int_a^b[f(x)^2g(y)^2+f(y)^2g(x)^2]
+ -2f(x)g(x)f(y)g(y)\,dx\biggr\}\,dy \\
+ =\int_a^b\biggl\{g(y)^2\int_a^bf^2+f(y)^2
+ \int_a^b g^2-2f(y)g(y)\int_a^b fg\biggr\}\,dy
+\end{multline*}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\iffalse % bugfix needed, error message "Multiple \tag"
+ % [mjd,24-Jan-1995]
+\newpage
+And now an ``unnumbered'' version numbered with a literal tag:
+\begin{multline*}\tag*{[a]}
+\int_a^b\biggl\{\int_a^b[f(x)^2g(y)^2+f(y)^2g(x)^2]
+ -2f(x)g(x)f(y)g(y)\,dx\biggr\}\,dy \\
+ =\int_a^b\biggl\{g(y)^2\int_a^bf^2+f(y)^2
+ \int_a^b g^2-2f(y)g(y)\int_a^b fg\biggr\}\,dy
+\end{multline*}
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{multline*}\tag*{[a]}
+\int_a^b\biggl\{\int_a^b[f(x)^2g(y)^2+f(y)^2g(x)^2]
+ -2f(x)g(x)f(y)g(y)\,dx\biggr\}\,dy \\
+ =\int_a^b\biggl\{g(y)^2\int_a^bf^2+f(y)^2
+ \int_a^b g^2-2f(y)g(y)\int_a^b fg\biggr\}\,dy
+\end{multline*}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+The same display with \verb=\multlinegap= set to zero.
+Notice that the space on the left in
+the first line does not change, because of the equation number, while
+the second line is pushed over to the right margin.
+{\setlength{\multlinegap}{0pt}
+\begin{multline*}\tag*{[a]}
+\int_a^b\biggl\{\int_a^b[f(x)^2g(y)^2+f(y)^2g(x)^2]
+ -2f(x)g(x)f(y)g(y)\,dx\biggr\}\,dy \\
+ =\int_a^b\biggl\{g(y)^2\int_a^bf^2+f(y)^2
+ \int_a^b g^2-2f(y)g(y)\int_a^b fg\biggr\}\,dy
+\end{multline*}}%
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+{\setlength{\multlinegap}{0pt}
+\begin{multline*}\tag*{[a]}
+\int_a^b\biggl\{\int_a^b[f(x)^2g(y)^2+f(y)^2g(x)^2]
+ -2f(x)g(x)f(y)g(y)\,dx\biggr\}\,dy \\
+ =\int_a^b\biggl\{g(y)^2\int_a^bf^2+f(y)^2
+ \int_a^b g^2-2f(y)g(y)\int_a^b fg\biggr\}\,dy
+\end{multline*}}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\fi % matches \iffalse above [mjd,24-Jan-1995]
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newpage
+\subsection{Gather}
+Numbered version with \verb;\notag; on the second line:
+\begin{gather}
+D(a,r)\equiv\{z\in\mathbf{C}\colon \abs{z-a}<r\},\\
+\seg(a,r)\equiv\{z\in\mathbf{C}\colon
+\Im z= \Im a,\ \abs{z-a}<r\},\notag\\
+c(e,\theta,r)\equiv\{(x,y)\in\mathbf{C}
+\colon \abs{x-e}<y\tan\theta,\ 0<y<r\},\\
+C(E,\theta,r)\equiv\bigcup_{e\in E}c(e,\theta,r).
+\end{gather}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{gather}
+D(a,r)\equiv\{z\in\mathbf{C}\colon \abs{z-a}<r\},\\
+\seg(a,r)\equiv\{z\in\mathbf{C}\colon
+\Im z= \Im a,\ \abs{z-a}<r\},\notag\\
+c(e,\theta,r)\equiv\{(x,y)\in\mathbf{C}
+\colon \abs{x-e}<y\tan\theta,\ 0<y<r\},\\
+C(E,\theta,r)\equiv\bigcup_{e\in E}c(e,\theta,r).
+\end{gather}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Unnumbered version.
+\begin{gather*}
+D(a,r)\equiv\{z\in\mathbf{C}\colon \abs{z-a}<r\},\\
+\seg (a,r)\equiv\{z\in\mathbf{C}\colon
+\Im z= \Im a,\ \abs{z-a}<r\},\\
+c(e,\theta,r)\equiv\{(x,y)\in\mathbf{C}
+ \colon \abs{x-e}<y\tan\theta,\ 0<y<r\},\\
+C(E,\theta,r)\equiv\bigcup_{e\in E}c(e,\theta,r).
+\end{gather*}
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{gather*}
+D(a,r)\equiv\{z\in\mathbf{C}\colon \abs{z-a}<r\},\\
+\seg (a,r)\equiv\{z\in\mathbf{C}\colon
+\Im z= \Im a,\ \abs{z-a}<r\},\\
+c(e,\theta,r)\equiv\{(x,y)\in\mathbf{C}
+ \colon \abs{x-e}<y\tan\theta,\ 0<y<r\},\\
+C(E,\theta,r)\equiv\bigcup_{e\in E}c(e,\theta,r).
+\end{gather*}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newpage
+\subsection{Align}
+Numbered version:
+\begin{align}
+\gamma_x(t)&=(\cos tu+\sin tx,v),\\
+\gamma_y(t)&=(u,\cos tv+\sin ty),\\
+\gamma_z(t)&=\left(\cos tu+\frac\alpha\beta\sin tv,
+ -\frac\beta\alpha\sin tu+\cos tv\right).
+\end{align}
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align}
+\gamma_x(t)&=(\cos tu+\sin tx,v),\\
+\gamma_y(t)&=(u,\cos tv+\sin ty),\\
+\gamma_z(t)&=\left(\cos tu+\frac\alpha\beta\sin tv,
+ -\frac\beta\alpha\sin tu+\cos tv\right).
+\end{align}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Unnumbered version:
+\begin{align*}
+\gamma_x(t)&=(\cos tu+\sin tx,v),\\
+\gamma_y(t)&=(u,\cos tv+\sin ty),\\
+\gamma_z(t)&=\left(\cos tu+\frac\alpha\beta\sin tv,
+ -\frac\beta\alpha\sin tu+\cos tv\right).
+\end{align*}
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align*}
+\gamma_x(t)&=(\cos tu+\sin tx,v),\\
+\gamma_y(t)&=(u,\cos tv+\sin ty),\\
+\gamma_z(t)&=\left(\cos tu+\frac\alpha\beta\sin tv,
+ -\frac\beta\alpha\sin tu+\cos tv\right).
+\end{align*}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+A variation:
+\begin{align}
+x& =y && \text {by (\ref{eq:C})}\\
+x'& = y' && \text {by (\ref{eq:D})}\\
+x+x' & = y+y' && \text {by Axiom 1.}
+\end{align}
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{align}
+x& =y && \text {by (\ref{eq:C})}\\
+x'& = y' && \text {by (\ref{eq:D})}\\
+x+x' & = y+y' && \text {by Axiom 1.}
+\end{align}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newpage
+\subsection{Align and split within gather}
+When using the \env{align} environment within the \env{gather}
+environment, one or the other, or both, should be unnumbered (using the
+\verb"*" form); numbering both the outer and inner environment would
+cause a conflict.
+
+Automatically numbered \env{gather} with \env{split} and \env{align*}:
+\begin{gather}
+\begin{split} \varphi(x,z)
+&=z-\gamma_{10}x-\gamma_{mn}x^mz^n\\
+&=z-Mr^{-1}x-Mr^{-(m+n)}x^mz^n
+\end{split}\\[6pt]
+\begin{align*}
+\zeta^0 &=(\xi^0)^2,\\
+\zeta^1 &=\xi^0\xi^1,\\
+\zeta^2 &=(\xi^1)^2,
+\end{align*}
+\end{gather}
+Here the \env{split} environment gets a number from the outer
+\env{gather} environment; numbers for individual lines of the
+\env{align*} are suppressed because of the star.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{gather}
+\begin{split} \varphi(x,z)
+&=z-\gamma_{10}x-\gamma_{mn}x^mz^n\\
+&=z-Mr^{-1}x-Mr^{-(m+n)}x^mz^n
+\end{split}\\[6pt]
+\begin{align*}
+\zeta^0 &=(\xi^0)^2,\\
+\zeta^1 &=\xi^0\xi^1,\\
+\zeta^2 &=(\xi^1)^2,
+\end{align*}
+\end{gather}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+The \verb"*"-ed form of \env{gather} with the non-\verb"*"-ed form of
+\env{align}.
+\begin{gather*}
+\begin{split} \varphi(x,z)
+&=z-\gamma_{10}x-\gamma_{mn}x^mz^n\\
+&=z-Mr^{-1}x-Mr^{-(m+n)}x^mz^n
+\end{split}\\[6pt]
+\begin{align} \zeta^0&=(\xi^0)^2,\\
+\zeta^1 &=\xi^0\xi^1,\\
+\zeta^2 &=(\xi^1)^2,
+\end{align}
+\end{gather*}
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{gather*}
+\begin{split} \varphi(x,z)
+&=z-\gamma_{10}x-\gamma_{mn}x^mz^n\\
+&=z-Mr^{-1}x-Mr^{-(m+n)}x^mz^n
+\end{split}\\[6pt]
+\begin{align} \zeta^0&=(\xi^0)^2,\\
+\zeta^1 &=\xi^0\xi^1,\\
+\zeta^2 &=(\xi^1)^2,
+\end{align}
+\end{gather*}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newpage
+\subsection{Alignat}
+Numbered version:
+\begin{alignat}{3}
+V_i & =v_i - q_i v_j, & \qquad X_i & = x_i - q_i x_j,
+ & \qquad U_i & = u_i,
+ \qquad \text{for $i\ne j$;}\label{eq:B}\\
+V_j & = v_j, & \qquad X_j & = x_j,
+ & \qquad U_j & u_j + \sum_{i\ne j} q_i u_i.
+\end{alignat}
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{alignat}{3}
+V_i & =v_i - q_i v_j, & \qquad X_i & = x_i - q_i x_j,
+ & \qquad U_i & = u_i,
+ \qquad \text{for $i\ne j$;}\label{eq:B}\\
+V_j & = v_j, & \qquad X_j & = x_j,
+ & \qquad U_j & u_j + \sum_{i\ne j} q_i u_i.
+\end{alignat}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Unnumbered version:
+\begin{alignat*}3
+V_i & =v_i - q_i v_j, & \qquad X_i & = x_i - q_i x_j,
+ & \qquad U_i & = u_i,
+ \qquad \text{for $i\ne j$;} \\
+V_j & = v_j, & \qquad X_j & = x_j,
+ & \qquad U_j & u_j + \sum_{i\ne j} q_i u_i.
+\end{alignat*}
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{alignat*}3
+V_i & =v_i - q_i v_j, & \qquad X_i & = x_i - q_i x_j,
+ & \qquad U_i & = u_i,
+ \qquad \text{for $i\ne j$;} \\
+V_j & = v_j, & \qquad X_j & = x_j,
+ & \qquad U_j & u_j + \sum_{i\ne j} q_i u_i.
+\end{alignat*}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newpage
+The most common use for \env{alignat} is for things like
+\begin{alignat}{2}
+x& =y && \qquad \text {by (\ref{eq:A})}\label{eq:C}\\
+x'& = y' && \qquad \text {by (\ref{eq:B})}\label{eq:D}\\
+x+x' & = y+y' && \qquad \text {by Axiom 1.}
+\end{alignat}
+Some text after to test the below-display spacing.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{alignat}{2}
+x& =y && \qquad \text {by (\ref{eq:A})}\label{eq:C}\\
+x'& = y' && \qquad \text {by (\ref{eq:B})}\label{eq:D}\\
+x+x' & = y+y' && \qquad \text {by Axiom 1.}
+\end{alignat}
+\end{verbatim}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newpage
+\setlength{\marginrulewidth}{0pt}
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{10}
+
+\bibitem{dihe:newdir}
+W.~Diffie and E.~Hellman, \emph{New directions in cryptography}, IEEE
+Transactions on Information Theory \textbf{22} (1976), no.~5, 644--654.
+
+\bibitem{fre:cichon}
+D.~H. Fremlin, \emph{Cichon's diagram}, 1983/1984, presented at the
+S{\'e}minaire Initiation {\`a} l'Analyse, G. Choquet, M. Rogalski, J.
+Saint Raymond, at the Universit{\'e} Pierre et Marie Curie, Paris, 23e
+ann{\'e}e.
+
+\bibitem{gouja:lagrmeth}
+I.~P. Goulden and D.~M. Jackson, \emph{The enumeration of directed
+closed {E}uler trails and directed {H}amiltonian circuits by
+{L}angrangian methods}, European J. Combin. \textbf{2} (1981), 131--212.
+
+\bibitem{hapa:graphenum}
+F.~Harary and E.~M. Palmer, \emph{Graphical enumeration}, Academic
+Press, 1973.
+
+\bibitem{imlelu:oneway}
+R.~Impagliazzo, L.~Levin, and M.~Luby, \emph{Pseudo-random generation
+from one-way functions}, Proc. 21st STOC (1989), ACM, New York,
+pp.~12--24.
+
+\bibitem{komiyo:unipfunc}
+M.~Kojima, S.~Mizuno, and A.~Yoshise, \emph{A new continuation method
+for complementarity problems with uniform p-functions}, Tech. Report
+B-194, Tokyo Inst. of Technology, Tokyo, 1987, Dept. of Information
+Sciences.
+
+\bibitem{komiyo:lincomp}
+\bysame, \emph{A polynomial-time algorithm for a class of linear
+complementarity problems}, Tech. Report B-193, Tokyo Inst. of
+Technology, Tokyo, 1987, Dept. of Information Sciences.
+
+\bibitem{liuchow:formalsum}
+C.~J. Liu and Yutze Chow, \emph{On operator and formal sum methods for
+graph enumeration problems}, SIAM J. Algorithms Discrete Methods
+\textbf{5} (1984), 384--438.
+
+\bibitem{mami:matrixth}
+M.~Marcus and H.~Minc, \emph{A survey of matrix theory and matrix
+inequalities}, Complementary Series in Math. \textbf{14} (1964), 21--48.
+
+\bibitem{miyoki:lincomp}
+S.~Mizuno, A.~Yoshise, and T.~Kikuchi, \emph{Practical polynomial time
+algorithms for linear complementarity problems}, Tech. Report~13, Tokyo
+Inst. of Technology, Tokyo, April 1988, Dept. of Industrial Engineering
+and Management.
+
+\bibitem{moad:quadpro}
+R.~D. Monteiro and I.~Adler, \emph{Interior path following primal-dual
+algorithms, part {II}: Quadratic programming}, August 1987, Working
+paper, Dept. of Industrial Engineering and Operations Research.
+
+\bibitem{ste:sint}
+E.~M. Stein, \emph{Singular integrals and differentiability properties
+of functions}, Princeton Univ. Press, Princeton, N.J., 1970.
+
+\bibitem{ye:intalg}
+Y.~Ye, \emph{Interior algorithms for linear, quadratic and linearly
+constrained convex programming}, Ph.D. thesis, Stanford Univ., Palo
+Alto, Calif., July 1987, Dept. of Engineering--Economic Systems,
+unpublished.
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
+\endinput
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/amsmath/testmath.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/README-doc.md
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/README-doc.md 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/README-doc.md 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-Documentation for the LaTeX kernel
-==================================
-
-Release 2019-10-01 pre-release 2
-
-Overview
---------
-
-This bundle provides the core documentation supporting the LaTeX kernel.
-
-For historical reasons, the base distribution and the core documentation
-are bundled separately. Documentation is found in the `doc` bundle. In an
-installed TeX system, `base` and `doc` should be placed within the same
-location; the distinction is therefore primarily of importance when looking
-at the development code.
-
-License
--------
-
-The contents of this bundle are distributed under the [LaTeX Project
-Public License](https://www.latex-project.org/lppl/lppl-1-3c/),
-version 1.3c or later.
-
------
-
-<p>Copyright (C) 2019 The LaTeX3 Project <br />
-<a href="http://latex-project.org/">http://latex-project.org/</a> <br />
-All rights reserved.</p>
-
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/README.md
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/README.md 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/README.md 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
The LaTeX kernel
================
-Release 2019-10-01 pre-release 2
+Release 2019-10-01 pre-release 3
Overview
--------
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/TEMPLATE-IncludeInRelease.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/TEMPLATE-IncludeInRelease.txt 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/TEMPLATE-IncludeInRelease.txt 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-%</2ekernel>
-%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2019/10/01}%
-%<latexrelease> {\XXX}{Info}%
-
-
-
-
-
-
-%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
-%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
-%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}%
-%<latexrelease> {\XXX}{Info}%
-
-%<latexrelease>
-
-%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease
-%<*2ekernel>
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/alltt.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cfgguide.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cfgguide.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cfgguide.tex 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cfgguide.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
% The latest version of this license is in
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% version 2008 or later.
%
% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes-doc.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes-doc.txt 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes-doc.txt 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-This file lists changes to the LaTeX2e files in reverse chronological order.
-It is provided for convenience only. It therefore makes no claims to
-completeness or accuracy and it contains some references to files that
-are not part of the distribution.
-=======================================================================
-
-2016-03-31 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
-
- * latexchanges.tex: Bring up to date to 2016/03/31
-
-2016-02-01 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
-
- * latexchanges.tex: Bring up to date to 2016/02/01
-
-2015-10-27 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
-
- * latexchanges.tex: Bring up to date to 2015/10/01 PL2
-
-2015-07-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
-
- * latexchanges.tex: describe the patch level system
-
-2015-04-05 Joseph Wright <joseph.wright at morningstar2.co.uk>
- * Clarify reason for \typein change in LuaTeX
-
-2015-04-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
-
- * ltnews22.tex: set date back to Jan
-
-2015-03-31 Joseph Wright <joseph.wright at morningstar2.co.uk>
- * New changes.txt file for LaTeX2e core documentation
-
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes.txt 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes.txt 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -4,6 +4,71 @@
are not part of the distribution.
=======================================================================
+2019-09-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltclass.dtx (subsection{Providing shipment}):
+ Support optional argument for filecontents to allow overwrite
+ and nosearch
+
+2019-08-30 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * lterror.dtx (subsection{Tracing}):
+ Dummy defs for \conditionally at traceon and \conditionally at traceoff added
+
+2019-08-29 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Environments}):
+ Make \begin/\end robust
+
+2019-08-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * lttab.dtx: Make various commands robust
+
+ * ltspace.dtx: Make various commands robust
+
+ * ltsect.dtx: Make various commands robust
+
+ * ltpictur.dtx: Make various commands robust
+
+ * ltpage.dtx: Make various commands robust
+
+ * ltoutput.dtx: Make \AtBeginDvi robust
+
+ * ltmiscen.dtx: Make various commands robust
+
+ * ltmath.dtx: Make various commands robust
+
+ * ltlogos.dtx: Make \TeX logo robust
+
+ * ltidxglo.dtx: Make \index and \glossary robust
+
+ * ltfssini.dtx: Various commands made robust
+
+ * ltfssdcl.dtx: Make math accents and delimiters robust
+
+ * ltfssbas.dtx: Various commands made robust
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: Make \IfFileExists and \InputIf FileExists robust
+
+ * ltdefns.dtx: Various commands made robust
+ Make assignments by \MakeRobust global as we need to apply them
+ in a group once in a while.
+
+ * ltclass.dtx: Various commands made robust
+
+ * ltboxes.dtx: Various commands made robust
+
+ * classes.dtx: Various commands made robust
+
+ * fontdef.dtx: Various commands made robust
+
+2019-08-22 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltxref.dtx (subsection{Cross Referencing}):
+ Allow \p at ... commands in \refstepcounter definition to have an
+ argument (receiving the \the...). This was previously only the
+ case when varioref was loaded.
+
2019-07-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
* utf8ienc.dtx (subsection{The mapping table}):
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/classes.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/clsguide.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/clsguide.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/clsguide.tex 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/clsguide.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
% The latest version of this license is in
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% version 2008 or later.
%
% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cmfonts.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cyrguide.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cyrguide.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cyrguide.tex 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cyrguide.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
% The latest version of this license is in
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% version 2008 or later.
%
% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/doc.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/docstrip.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/encguide.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/encguide.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/encguide.tex 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/encguide.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright 1993-2016
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
% The latest version of this license is in
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% version 2008 or later.
%
% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/exscale.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fntguide.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fntguide.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fntguide.tex 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fntguide.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright 1993-2019
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
%
% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
% The latest version of this license is in
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% version 2008 or later.
%
% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/graphpap.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ifthen.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/inputenc.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/kernel-external-commands.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/kernel-external-commands.txt 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/kernel-external-commands.txt 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,1356 +0,0 @@
-%%% list of externally accessible commands defined or used by the
-%%% kernel (not totally correct) --- these aren't necessarily
-%%% interface commands as primitives also have accessible names. This
-%%% is just a reference to help and was generated with some brute
-%%% force methods
-%%%
-%%% 2019/02
-
-\A
-\AA
-\AE
-\Alph
-\Arrowvert
-\AtBeginDocument
-\AtBeginDvi
-\AtEndDocument
-\AtEndOfClass
-\AtEndOfPackage
-\Big
-\Bigg
-\Biggl
-\Biggm
-\Biggr
-\Bigl
-\Bigm
-\Bigr
-\Box
-\CheckCommand
-\ClassError
-\ClassInfo
-\ClassWarning
-\ClassWarningNoLine
-\CountZero
-\CurrentOption
-\DH
-\DJ
-\DeclareCurrentRelease
-\DeclareErrorFont
-\DeclareFixedFont
-\DeclareFontEncoding
-\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults
-\DeclareFontFamily
-\DeclareFontShape
-\DeclareFontSubstitution
-\DeclareMathAccent
-\DeclareMathAlphabet
-\DeclareMathDelimiter
-\DeclareMathRadical
-\DeclareMathSizes
-\DeclareMathSymbol
-\DeclareMathVersion
-\DeclareOldFontCommand
-\DeclareOption
-\DeclarePreloadSizes
-\DeclareRelease
-\DeclareRelease:
-\DeclareRobustCommand
-\DeclareRobustCommand*
-\DeclareSizeFunction
-\DeclareSymbolFont
-\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet
-\DeclareTextAccent
-\DeclareTextAccentDefault
-\DeclareTextCommand
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault
-\DeclareTextComposite
-\DeclareTextCompositeCommand
-\DeclareTextFontCommand
-\DeclareTextSymbol
-\DeclareTextSymbolDefault
-\DeclareUnicodeCharacter
-\Delta
-\Diamond
-\Downarrow
-\E
-\EndIncludeInRelease
-\ExecuteOptions
-\Gamma
-\GenericError
-\GenericInfo
-\GenericWarning
-\H
-\I
-\IJ
-\IeC
-\IfFileExists
-\IfTargetDateBefore
-\Im
-\IncludeInRelease
-\InputIfFileExists
-\J
-\Join
-\L
-\LaTeX
-\LaTeX2e
-\LaTeXe
-\Lambda
-\LastDeclaredEncoding
-\Leftarrow
-\Leftrightarrow
-\LoadClass
-\LoadClassWithOptions
-\Longleftarrow
-\Longleftrightarrow
-\Longrightarrow
-\MakeLowercase
-\MakeRobust
-\MakeUppercase
-\MessageBreak
-\NG
-\NeedsTeXFormat
-\O
-\OE
-\Omega
-\OptionNotUsed
-\P
-\PackageError
-\PackageInfo
-\PackageWarning
-\PackageWarningNoLine
-\PassOptionsToClass
-\PassOptionsToPackage
-\Phi
-\Pi
-\Pr
-\ProcessOptions
-\ProcessOptions*
-\ProvideTextCommand
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault
-\ProvidesClass
-\ProvidesFile
-\ProvidesPackage
-\Psi
-\Re
-\Relbar
-\RequirePackage
-\RequirePackageWithOptions
-\Rightarrow
-\Roman
-\S
-\SS
-\SetMathAlphabet
-\SetSymbolFont
-\Sigma
-\T
-\TH
-\TeX
-\TextOrMath
-\TextSymbolUnavailable
-\Theta
-\Umathchar
-\Umathcode
-\UndeclareTextCommand
-\Uparrow
-\Updownarrow
-\Upsilon
-\UseRawInputEncoding
-\UseTextAccent
-\UseTextSymbol
-\Vert
-\XeTeXcharclass
-\XeTeXdashbreakstate
-\XeTeXmathcode
-\XeTeXrevision
-\XeTeXuseglyphmetrics
-\XeTeXversion
-\Xi
-\Z
-\_
-\`
-\a
-\aa
-\abovedisplayshortskip
-\abovedisplayskip
-\accent
-\active
-\acute
-\addcontentsline
-\addpenalty
-\addtocontents
-\addtocounter
-\addtolength
-\addvspace
-\adjdemerits
-\advance
-\ae
-\afterassignment
-\aftergroup
-\aleph
-\allocationnumber
-\allowbreak
-\alph
-\alpha
-\amalg
-\and
-\angle
-\approx
-\arabic
-\arccos
-\arcsin
-\arctan
-\arg
-\array
-\arraycolsep
-\arrayrulewidth
-\arraystretch
-\arrowvert
-\asciispace
-\ast
-\asymp
-\atopwithdelims
-\attribute
-\attributedef
-\attributezero
-\author
-\b
-\backslash
-\backslashH
-\bar
-\baselineskip
-\baselineskip4
-\baselinestretch
-\batchmode
-\begin
-\begingroup
-\belowdisplayshortskip
-\belowdisplayskip
-\beta
-\bezier
-\bfdefault
-\bfseries
-\bgroup
-\bibcite
-\bibdata
-\bibitem
-\bibliography
-\bibliographystyle
-\bibstyle
-\big
-\bigbreak
-\bigcap
-\bigcirc
-\bigcup
-\bigg
-\biggl
-\biggm
-\biggr
-\bigl
-\bigm
-\bigodot
-\bigoplus
-\bigotimes
-\bigr
-\bigskip
-\bigskipamount
-\bigsqcup
-\bigtriangledown
-\bigtriangleup
-\biguplus
-\bigvee
-\bigwedge
-\binoppenalty
-\bmod
-\boldmath
-\bordermatrix
-\bot
-\botfigrule
-\botmark
-\bottomfraction
-\bowtie
-\box
-\boxmaxdepth
-\brace
-\braceld
-\braceld$
-\bracelu
-\bracerd
-\braceru
-\bracevert
-\brack
-\break
-\breve
-\brokenpenalty
-\buildrel
-\bullet
-\c
-\cap
-\caption
-\cases
-\catcode
-\catcodetable
-\cdot
-\cdotp
-\cdots
-\center
-\centering
-\centerline
-\char
-\chardef
-\charsubdef
-\charzero
-\check
-\chi
-\choose
-\circ
-\circle
-\citation
-\cite
-\cleaders
-\cleardoublepage
-\clearpage
-\cline
-\closein
-\closeout
-\clubpenalty
-\clubsuit
-\colon
-\columnsep
-\columnseprule
-\columnwidth
-\cong
-\contentsline
-\coprod
-\copy
-\copyright
-\cos
-\cosh
-\cot
-\coth
-\count
-\countdef
-\counterwithin
-\counterwithout
-\cr
-\crcr
-\csc
-\csname
-\cup
-\d
-\dag
-\dagger
-\dashbox
-\dashv
-\date
-\day
-\dblfigrule
-\dblfloatpagefraction
-\dblfloatsep
-\dbltextfloatsep
-\dbltopfraction
-\ddag
-\ddagger
-\ddot
-\ddots
-\deadcycles
-\def
-\defaulthyphenchar
-\defaultscriptratio
-\defaultscriptscriptratio
-\defaultskewchar
-\deg
-\delcode
-\delimiter
-\delimiterfactor
-\delimitershortfall
-\delta
-\depth
-\det
-\dh
-\diamond
-\diamondsuit
-\dim
-\dimen
-\dimendef
-\dimenzero
-\directlua
-\discretionary
-\displaylines
-\displaymath
-\displaystyle
-\displaywidowpenalty
-\displaywidth
-\div
-\divide
-\dj
-\do
-\document
-\documentclass
-\documentstyle
-\dospecials
-\dot
-\doteq
-\dotfill
-\dots
-\doublehyphendemerits
-\doublerulesep
-\downarrow
-\downbracefill
-\dp
-\dump
-\edef
-\egroup
-\eject
-\ell
-\else
-\em
-\emergencystretch
-\eminnershape
-\emph
-\empty
-\emptyset
-\encodingdefault
-\end
-\endarray
-\endcenter
-\endcsname
-\enddisplaymath
-\enddocument
-\endenumerate
-\endeqnarray
-\endequation
-\endfilecontents
-\endflushleft
-\endflushright
-\endgraf
-\endgroup
-\endinput
-\enditemize
-\endline
-\endlinechar
-\endlist
-\endlrbox
-\endmath
-\endminipage
-\endpicture
-\endsloppypar
-\endtabbing
-\endtabular
-\endtrivlist
-\endverbatim
-\enlargethispage
-\enskip
-\enspace
-\ensuremath
-\enumerate
-\epsilon
-\eqnarray
-\eqno
-\equation
-\equiv
-\errhelp
-\errmessage
-\errorcontextlines
-\errorstopmode
-\escapechar
-\eta
-\evensidemargin
-\everycr
-\everydisplay
-\everyjob
-\everymath
-\everypar
-\exhyphenpenalty
-\exists
-\exp
-\expandafter
-\extracolsep
-\extrafloats
-\fam
-\familydefault
-\fbox
-\fboxrule
-\fboxsep
-\fi
-\filbreak
-\filecontents
-\fill
-\finalhyphendemerits
-\firstmark
-\flat
-\floatingpenalty
-\floatpagefraction
-\floatsep
-\flushbottom
-\flushleft
-\flushright
-\fmtname
-\fmtversion
-\fnsymbol
-\font
-\fontdimen
-\fontdimen8
-\fontencoding
-\fontfamily
-\fontname
-\fontseries
-\fontshape
-\fontsize
-\fontsize2
-\fontsubfuzz
-\footins
-\footnote
-\footnotemark
-\footnoterule
-\footnotesep
-\footnotesize
-\footnotetext
-\footskip
-\forall
-\frac
-\frame
-\framebox
-\frenchspacing
-\frown
-\fussy
-\futurelet
-\gamma
-\gcd
-\gdef
-\gdef_
-\ge
-\geq
-\gets
-\gg
-\global
-\globaldefs
-\glossary
-\glossaryentry
-\goodbreak
-\grave
-\halign
-\hangindent
-\hat
-\hbadness
-\hbar
-\hbox
-\headheight
-\headsep
-\heartsuit
-\height
-\hfil
-\hfil$
-\hfill
-\hfuzz
-\hglue
-\hideoutput
-\hideskip
-\hidewidth
-\hline
-\hom
-\hookleftarrow
-\hookrightarrow
-\hphantom
-\hrule
-\hrulefill
-\hsize
-\hskip
-\hskip2em
-\hspace
-\hss
-\ht
-\hyphenchar
-\hyphenpenalty
-\i
-\ialign
-\if
-\ifb
-\ifcase
-\ifcsname
-\ifdim
-\ifeof
-\iff
-\iffalse
-\ifhmode
-\ifinner
-\ifmmode
-\ifnum
-\ifnum0
-\ifnum7
-\ifodd
-\iftrue
-\ifvbox
-\ifvmode
-\ifvoid
-\ifx
-\ifx!
-\ignorespaces
-\ignorespacesafterend
-\ij
-\imath
-\immediate
-\in
-\include
-\includeonly
-\indent
-\index
-\indexentry
-\inf
-\infty
-\initcatcodetable
-\input
-\inputencodingname
-\inputlineno
-\insert
-\int
-\interdisplaylinepenalty
-\interfootnotelinepenalty
-\interlinepenalty
-\intextsep
-\intop
-\iota
-\itdefault
-\item
-\itemindent
-\itemize
-\itemsep
-\iterate
-\itshape
-\j
-\jmath
-\jobname
-\joinrel
-\jot
-\kappa
-\ker
-\kern
-\kern-
-\kern2
-\kern3
-\kern6
-\kern7
-\kill
-\l
-\label
-\labelsep
-\labelwidth
-\lambda
-\land
-\langle
-\language
-\lastbox
-\lastnamedcs
-\lastnodetype
-\lastpenalty
-\lastskip
-\lbrace
-\lbrack
-\lccode
-\lccode`
-\lceil
-\ldotp
-\ldots
-\le
-\leaders
-\leadsto
-\leavevmode
-\left
-\leftarrow
-\leftarrowfill
-\lefteqn
-\leftharpoondown
-\leftharpoondown$
-\leftharpoonup
-\leftline
-\leftmargin
-\leftmargini
-\leftmarginii
-\leftmarginiii
-\leftmarginiv
-\leftmarginv
-\leftmarginvi
-\leftmark
-\leftrightarrow
-\leftskip
-\leq
-\let
-\lfloor
-\lg
-\lgroup
-\lhd
-\lhook
-\lim
-\liminf
-\limits
-\limsup
-\line
-\linebreak
-\linepenalty
-\lineskip
-\lineskip-
-\lineskiplimit
-\linespread
-\linethickness
-\linewidth
-\list
-\listfiles
-\listparindent
-\ll
-\llap
-\lmoustache
-\ln
-\lnot
-\log
-\loggingall
-\loggingoutput
-\long
-\longleftarrow
-\longleftrightarrow
-\longmapsto
-\longrightarrow
-\loop
-\lor
-\lower
-\lowercase
-\lq
-\lrbox
-\luabytecode
-\luachunk
-\luafunction
-\luatexversion
-\magstep
-\magstephalf
-\makeatletter
-\makeatother
-\makebox
-\makeglossary
-\makeindex
-\makelabel
-\mapsto
-\mapstochar
-\marginpar
-\marginparpush
-\marginparsep
-\marginparwidth
-\mark
-\markboth
-\markright
-\marks
-\math
-\mathaccent
-\mathalpha
-\mathbf
-\mathbin
-\mathcal
-\mathchar
-\mathchardef
-\mathcharzero
-\mathchoice
-\mathclose
-\mathcode
-\mathdollar
-\mathellipsis
-\mathgroup
-\mathhexbox
-\mathinner
-\mathit
-\mathnormal
-\mathop
-\mathopen
-\mathord
-\mathpalette
-\mathparagraph
-\mathpunct
-\mathrel
-\mathring
-\mathrm
-\mathsection
-\mathsf
-\mathsterling
-\mathstrut
-\mathsurround
-\mathtt
-\mathunderscore
-\mathversion
-\matrix
-\max
-\maxdeadcycles
-\maxdepth
-\maxdimen
-\mbox
-\mddefault
-\mdseries
-\meaning
-\medbreak
-\medmuskip
-\medskip
-\medskipamount
-\message
-\mho
-\mid
-\min
-\minipage
-\mkern
-\models
-\month
-\moveright
-\mp
-\mskip
-\mu
-\mubyte
-\multicolumn
-\multiply
-\multiput
-\multispan
-\muskip
-\muskipdef
-\muskipzero
-\nabla
-\narrower
-\natural
-\ne
-\nearrow
-\neg
-\negthinspace
-\neq
-\newXeTeXintercharclass
-\newattribute
-\newbox
-\newcatcodetable
-\newcommand
-\newcount
-\newcounter
-\newdimen
-\newenvironment
-\newfam
-\newfont
-\newhelp
-\newif
-\newinsert
-\newlabel
-\newlanguage
-\newlength
-\newline
-\newlinechar`
-\newluabytecode
-\newluachunkname
-\newluafunction
-\newmarks
-\newmuskip
-\newpage
-\newread
-\newsavebox
-\newskip
-\newtheorem
-\newtoks
-\newwhatsit
-\newwrite
-\ng
-\ni
-\noalign
-\nobreak
-\nobreakdashes
-\nobreakspace
-\nocite
-\nocorr
-\nocorrlist
-\noexpand
-\noexpandinvalid
-\noexpandis
-\noexpandnot
-\nofiles
-\noindent
-\nointerlineskip
-\nolimits
-\nolinebreak
-\nonfrenchspacing
-\nonscript
-\nonumber
-\nopagebreak
-\noprotrusion
-\normalbaselines
-\normalbaselineskip
-\normalcolor
-\normalfont
-\normallineskip
-\normallineskiplimit
-\normalmarginpar
-\normalsfcodes
-\normalsize
-\not
-\notin
-\nu
-\null
-\nulldelimiterspace
-\nullfont
-\number
-\numberline
-\numexpr
-\nwarrow
-\o
-\oalign
-\obeycr
-\obeylines
-\obeyspaces
-\oddsidemargin
-\odot
-\oe
-\of
-\offinterlineskip
-\oint
-\ointop
-\oldstylenums
-\omega
-\ominus
-\omit
-\onecolumn
-\ooalign
-\openin
-\openout
-\openup
-\oplus
-\or
-\oslash
-\otimes
-\output
-\outputpenalty
-\oval
-\over
-\overbrace
-\overfullrule
-\overleftarrow
-\overrightarrow
-\owns
-\pagebreak
-\pagenumbering
-\pageref
-\pageshrink
-\pagestyle
-\pagetotal
-\paperheight
-\paperwidth
-\par
-\paragraphmark
-\parallel
-\parbox
-\parfillskip
-\parindent
-\parsep
-\parseunicodedataI
-\parseunicodedataII
-\parseunicodedataIII
-\parseunicodedataIV
-\parseunicodedataV
-\parshape
-\parskip
-\partial
-\partopsep
-\penalty
-\perp
-\phantom
-\phi
-\pi
-\picture
-\pm
-\pmatrix
-\pmod
-\poptabs
-\postdisplaypenalty
-\pounds
-\prec
-\preceq
-\predisplaypenalty
-\pretolerance
-\prevdepth
-\prime
-\prod
-\propto
-\protect
-\protected
-\providecommand
-\psi
-\pushtabs
-\put
-\qbezier
-\qbeziermax
-\qquad
-\quad
-\r
-\radical
-\raggedbottom
-\raggedleft
-\raggedright
-\raise
-\raisebox
-\rangle
-\rbrace
-\rbrack
-\rceil
-\read
-\ref
-\refstepcounter
-\relax
-\relaxs
-\relbar
-\relpenalty
-\removelastskip
-\renewcommand
-\renewenvironment
-\repeat
-\requestedLaTeXdate
-\requestedpatchdate
-\restorecr
-\reversemarginpar
-\rfloor
-\rgroup
-\rhd
-\rho
-\rhook
-\right
-\rightarrow
-\rightarrow$
-\rightarrowfill
-\rightharpoondown
-\rightharpoonup
-\rightharpoonup$
-\rightleftharpoons
-\rightline
-\rightmargin
-\rightmark
-\rightskip
-\rlap
-\rmdefault
-\rmfamily
-\rmoustache
-\roman
-\romannumeral
-\root
-\rootbox
-\rq
-\rule
-\samepage
-\savebox
-\savecatcodetable
-\sb
-\sbox
-\scdefault
-\scriptfont
-\scriptscriptfont
-\scriptscriptstyle
-\scriptspace
-\scriptstyle
-\scshape
-\searrow
-\sec
-\secdef
-\sectionmark
-\selectfont
-\seriesdefault
-\setattribute
-\setbox
-\setcounter
-\setlength
-\setminus
-\setrangecatcode
-\settodepth
-\settoheight
-\settowidth
-\sfcode
-\sfdefault
-\sffamily
-\shapedefault
-\sharp
-\shipout
-\shortstack
-\showboxbreadth
-\showboxdepth
-\showhyphens
-\showoutput
-\showoverfull
-\sigma
-\sim
-\simeq
-\sin
-\sinh
-\skew
-\skip
-\skipdef
-\skipzero
-\slash
-\sldefault
-\sloppy
-\sloppypar
-\slshape
-\smallbreak
-\smallint
-\smallskip
-\smallskipamount
-\smash
-\smash,because
-\smile
-\sp
-\space
-\spacefactor
-\spaceskip
-\spadesuit
-\span
-\splitfirstmark
-\splitmaxdepth
-\splittopskip
-\sqcap
-\sqcup
-\sqrt
-\sqrtsign
-\sqsubset
-\sqsubseteq
-\sqsupset
-\sqsupseteq
-\ss
-\stackrel
-\star
-\stepcounter
-\stop
-\storedpar
-\stretch
-\string
-\stringallowed
-\strut
-\strutbox
-\subparagraphmark
-\subsectionmark
-\subset
-\subseteq
-\subsubsectionmark
-\succ
-\succeq
-\sum
-\sup
-\suppressfloats
-\supset
-\supseteq
-\surd
-\swarrow
-\symbol
-\symletters
-\symoperators
-\t
-\tabbing
-\tabbingsep
-\tabcolsep
-\tabskip
-\tabular
-\tabularnewline
-\tan
-\tanh
-\tau
-\tencirc
-\tencircw
-\tenln
-\tenlnw
-\textasciicircum
-\textasciitilde
-\textasteriskcentered
-\textbackslash
-\textbar
-\textbardbl
-\textbf
-\textbraceleft
-\textbraceright
-\textbullet
-\textcircled
-\textcommaabove
-\textcommabelow
-\textcompwordmark
-\textcopyright
-\textdagger
-\textdaggerdbl
-\textdollar
-\textellipsis
-\textemdash
-\textendash
-\textexclamdown
-\textfloatsep
-\textfont
-\textfont2
-\textfraction
-\textgreater
-\textheight
-\textit
-\textless
-\textmd
-\textnormal
-\textordfeminine
-\textordmasculine
-\textparagraph
-\textperiodcentered
-\textquestiondown
-\textquotedblleft
-\textquotedblright
-\textquoteleft
-\textquoteright
-\textregistered
-\textrm
-\textsc
-\textsection
-\textsf
-\textsl
-\textsterling
-\textstyle
-\textsubscript
-\textsuperscript
-\texttrademark
-\texttt
-\textunderscore
-\textup
-\textvisiblespace
-\textwidth
-\th
-\thanks
-\the
-\theequation
-\thefootnote
-\thempfn
-\thempfootnote
-\thepage
-\theta
-\thicklines
-\thickmuskip
-\thinlines
-\thinmuskip
-\thinspace
-\thispagestyle
-\tilde
-\time
-\times
-\title
-\to
-\today
-\toks
-\toksdef
-\tokszero
-\tolerance
-\top
-\topfigrule
-\topfraction
-\topmargin
-\topmark
-\topsep
-\topskip
-\totalheight
-\tracingall
-\tracingassigns
-\tracingcommands
-\tracingfonts
-\tracinggroups
-\tracingifs
-\tracinglostchars
-\tracingmacros
-\tracingnesting
-\tracingnone
-\tracingonline
-\tracingoutput
-\tracingpages
-\tracingparagraphs
-\tracingrestores
-\tracingscantokens
-\tracingstats
-\triangle
-\triangleleft
-\triangleright
-\trivlist
-\ttdefault
-\ttfamily
-\twocolumn
-\typein
-\typeout
-\u
-\uccode
-\uchyph
-\unboldmath
-\undefinedpagestyle
-\underbar
-\underbrace
-\underline
-\unexpanded
-\unhbox
-\unhcopy
-\unicodedataline
-\unicoderead
-\unitlength
-\unkern
-\unless
-\unlhd
-\unpenalty
-\unrhd
-\unsetattribute
-\unskip
-\unvbox
-\unvcopy
-\uparrow
-\upbracefill
-\updefault
-\updownarrow
-\uplus
-\uppercase
-\upshape
-\upsilon
-\usebox
-\usecounter
-\usefont
-\usepackage
-\v
-\vadjust
-\value
-\varbigtriangledown
-\varbigtriangleup
-\varepsilon
-\varphi
-\varpi
-\varrho
-\varsigma
-\vartheta
-\vbadness
-\vbox
-\vcenter
-\vdash
-\vdots
-\vec
-\vector
-\vee
-\verb
-\verbatim
-\verbvisiblespace
-\vert
-\vfil
-\vfilneg
-\vfuzz
-\vglue
-\vline
-\vphantom
-\vrule
-\vsize
-\vskip
-\vspace
-\vsplit
-\vss
-\vtop
-\wd
-\wedge
-\whatsit
-\widehat
-\widetilde
-\widowpenalties
-\widowpenalty
-\width
-\wlog
-\wp
-\wr
-\write
-\x
-\xdef
-\xi
-\year
-\z
-\zeta
-\|
-\~
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/kernel-internal-commands.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/kernel-internal-commands.txt 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/kernel-internal-commands.txt 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,1268 +0,0 @@
-%%% list of internal commands defined by the kernel (not totally correct)
-%%% 2019/02
-
-\@
-\@@
-\@@enc at update
-\@@end
-\@@endpbox
-\@@eqncr
-\@@fileswith at pti@ns
-\@@hyph
-\@@if at newlist
-\@@ifdefinable
-\@@input
-\@@italiccorr
-\@@line
-\@@math at bgroup
-\@@math at egroup
-\@@par
-\@@protect
-\@@startpbox
-\@@underline
-\@@unprocessedoptions
-\@@warning
-\@Alph
-\@DeclareMathDelimiter
-\@DeclareMathSizes
-\@Esphack
-\@IncludeInRele at se
-\@IncludeInRelease
-\@M
-\@MM
-\@Mi
-\@Mii
-\@Miii
-\@Miv
-\@Roman
-\@TeXversion
-\@acci
-\@accii
-\@acciii
-\@acol
-\@acolampacol
-\@activechar at info
-\@addamp
-\@addfield
-\@addmarginpar
-\@addtobot
-\@addtocurcol
-\@addtodblcol
-\@addtofilelist
-\@addtonextcol
-\@addtopreamble
-\@addtoreset
-\@addtotoporbot
-\@afterheading
-\@afterindentfalse
-\@afterindenttrue
-\@alph
-\@ampacol
-\@arabic
-\@argarraycr
-\@argdef
-\@argtabularcr
-\@array
-\@arrayacol
-\@arrayc
-\@arrayclassiv
-\@arrayclassz
-\@arraycr
-\@arrayparboxrestore
-\@arrayrule
-\@arstrut
-\@arstrutbox
-\@author
-\@auxout
-\@backslashchar
-\@badend
-\@badlinearg
-\@badmath
-\@badpoptabs
-\@badrequireerror
-\@badtab
-\@begin at tempboxa
-\@begindocumenthook
-\@begindvi
-\@begindvibox
-\@beginparpenalty
-\@begintheorem
-\@bezier
-\@bibitem
-\@biblabel
-\@bitor
-\@botlist
-\@botnum
-\@botnum>
-\@botroom
-\@boxfpsbit
-\@break at tfor
-\@bsphack
-\@caption
-\@captype
-\@car
-\@carcube
-\@cclv
-\@cclvi
-\@cdr
-\@centercr
-\@centering
-\@cflb
-\@cflt
-\@changed at cmd
-\@charlb
-\@charrb
-\@chclass
-\@check at IncludeInRelease
-\@check at c
-\@check at eq
-\@checkend
-\@chnum
-\@circ
-\@circle
-\@circlefnt
-\@cite
-\@cite at ofmt
-\@citea
-\@citeb
-\@citex
-\@classi
-\@classii
-\@classiii
-\@classiv
-\@classoptionslist
-\@classv
-\@classz
-\@cline
-\@clnht
-\@clnwd
-\@cls at pkg
-\@clsextension
-\@clubpenalty
-\@colht
-\@colnum
-\@colroom
-\@combinedblfloats
-\@combinefloats
-\@comdblflelt
-\@comflelt
-\@cons
-\@contfield
-\@ctrerr
-\@curfield
-\@curline
-\@curr at enc
-\@currbox
-\@currdir
-\@current at cmd
-\@currentlabel
-\@currenvir
-\@currenvline
-\@currext
-\@currlist
-\@currname
-\@currnamestack
-\@curroptions
-\@currsize
-\@currtype
-\@curtab
-\@curtabmar
-\@dashbox
-\@dashcnt
-\@dashdim
-\@date
-\@dbflt
-\@dblarg
-\@dbldeferlist
-\@dblfloat
-\@dblfloatplacement
-\@dblfpbot
-\@dblfpsep
-\@dblfptop
-\@dbltoplist
-\@dbltopnum
-\@dbltoproom
-\@dec at text@cmd
-\@declaredoptions
-\@declareoption
-\@defaultsubs
-\@defaultunits
-\@defdefault at ds
-\@deferlist
-\@definecounter
-\@depth
-\@dischyph
-\@doclearpage
-\@documentclasshook
-\@doendpe
-\@dofilelist
-\@donoparitem
-\@dot
-\@dotsep
-\@dottedtocline
-\@downline
-\@downvector
-\@eha
-\@ehb
-\@ehc
-\@ehd
-\@elt
-\@empty
-\@emptycol
-\@end at check@IncludeInRelease
-\@end at tempboxa
-\@enddocumenthook
-\@endfloatbox
-\@endparenv
-\@endparpenalty
-\@endpbox
-\@endpefalse
-\@endpetrue
-\@endtheorem
-\@enlargepage
-\@ensuredmath
-\@enumctr
-\@enumdepth
-\@eqcnt
-\@eqncr
-\@eqnnum
-\@eqnsel
-\@eqnswfalse
-\@eqnswtrue
-\@eqpen
-\@err@
-\@esphack
-\@evenfoot
-\@evenhead
-\@expandtwoargs
-\@expast
-\@failedlist
-\@fcolmadefalse
-\@fcolmadetrue
-\@filef at und
-\@filelist
-\@fileswfalse
-\@fileswith at pti@ns
-\@fileswith at ptions
-\@fileswithoptions
-\@fileswtrue
-\@finalstrut
-\@firstampfalse
-\@firstamptrue
-\@firstcolfirstmark
-\@firstcoltopmark
-\@firstcolumnfalse
-\@firstcolumntrue
-\@firstofone
-\@firstoftwo
-\@firsttab
-\@flcheckspace
-\@flfail
-\@float
-\@floatboxreset
-\@floatpenalty
-\@floatplacement
-\@flsetnum
-\@flsettextmin
-\@flstop
-\@flsucceed
-\@fltovf
-\@flupdates
-\@flushglue
-\@fnsymbol
-\@font at info
-\@font at warning
-\@fontswitch
-\@footnotemark
-\@footnotetext
-\@for
-\@forloop
-\@fornoop
-\@fortmp
-\@fpbot
-\@fpmin
-\@fps
-\@fpsadddefault
-\@fpsep
-\@fpstype
-\@fptop
-\@frameb at x
-\@framebox
-\@framepicbox
-\@freelist
-\@getcirc
-\@getfpsbit
-\@getlarrow
-\@getlinechar
-\@getpen
-\@getrarrow
-\@glossaryfile
-\@gnewline
-\@gobble
-\@gobble at IncludeInRelease
-\@gobblecr
-\@gobblefour
-\@gobbletwo
-\@gtempa
-\@halfwidth
-\@halignto
-\@hangfrom
-\@height
-\@highpenalty
-\@hightab
-\@hline
-\@holdpg
-\@hspace
-\@hspacer
-\@hvector
-\@icentercr
-\@iden
-\@if
-\@if at pti@ns
-\@if at ptions
-\@ifatmargin
-\@ifbothcounters
-\@ifclasslater
-\@ifclassloaded
-\@ifclasswith
-\@ifdefinable
-\@iffileonpath
-\@ifl at aded
-\@ifl at t@r
-\@ifl at ter
-\@ifnch
-\@ifnextchar
-\@iforloop
-\@ifpackagelater
-\@ifpackageloaded
-\@ifpackagewith
-\@iframebox
-\@iframeboxc
-\@iframepicbox
-\@ifstar
-\@ifundefin at d@i
-\@ifundefin at d@ii
-\@ifundefined
-\@ignorefalse
-\@ignoretrue
-\@iiiminipage
-\@iiiparbox
-\@iiminipage
-\@iinput
-\@iiparbox
-\@iirsbox
-\@imakebox
-\@imakeboxc
-\@imakepicbox
-\@iminipage
-\@include
-\@includeinreleasefalse
-\@includeinreleasetrue
-\@index
-\@indexfile
-\@inlabelfalse
-\@inlabeltrue
-\@inmatherr
-\@inmathwarn
-\@inpenc at test
-\@input
-\@input@
-\@inputcheck
-\@inputcheck0
-\@insertfalse
-\@inserttrue
-\@iparbox
-\@irsbox
-\@isavebox
-\@isavepicbox
-\@ishortstack
-\@istackcr
-\@itabcr
-\@item
-\@itemdepth
-\@itemfudge
-\@itemitem
-\@itemlabel
-\@itempenalty
-\@iwhiledim
-\@iwhilenum
-\@iwhilesw
-\@ixpt
-\@ixstackcr
-\@killglue
-\@kludgeins
-\@labels
-\@largefloatcheck
-\@lastchclass
-\@latex at error
-\@latex at info
-\@latex at info@no at line
-\@latex at warning
-\@latex at warning@no at line
-\@latexbug
-\@latexerr
-\@lbibitem
-\@leftcolumn
-\@leftmark
-\@let at token
-\@lign
-\@linechar
-\@linefnt
-\@linelen
-\@listctr
-\@listdepth
-\@listfiles
-\@loadwithoptions
-\@lowpenalty
-\@ltab
-\@m
-\@mainaux
-\@makebox
-\@makecaption
-\@makecol
-\@makefcolumn
-\@makefnmark
-\@makefntext
-\@makeother
-\@makepicbox
-\@makespecialcolbox
-\@marbox
-\@marginparreset
-\@markright
-\@maxdepth
-\@maxtab
-\@medpenalty
-\@midlist
-\@minipagefalse
-\@minipagerestore
-\@minipagetrue
-\@minus
-\@missingfileerror
-\@mkboth
-\@mklab
-\@mkpream
-\@mparbottom
-\@mpargs
-\@mparswitchfalse
-\@mpfn
-\@mpfootins
-\@mpfootnotetext
-\@mplistdepth
-\@multicnt
-\@multiplelabels
-\@multiput
-\@multispan
-\@namedef
-\@nameuse
-\@nbitem
-\@ne
-\@needsf at rmat
-\@needsformat
-\@negargfalse
-\@negargtrue
-\@newcommand
-\@newctr
-\@newenv
-\@newenva
-\@newenvb
-\@newl at bel
-\@newline
-\@newlistfalse
-\@newlisttrue
-\@next
-\@nextchar
-\@nil
-\@nmbrlistfalse
-\@nmbrlisttrue
-\@nnil
-\@no at lnbk
-\@no at pgbk
-\@nobreakfalse
-\@nobreaktrue
-\@nocnterr
-\@nocounterr
-\@nodocument
-\@noitemargfalse
-\@noitemargtrue
-\@noitemerr
-\@noligs
-\@nolnerr
-\@nomath
-\@noparitemfalse
-\@noparitemtrue
-\@noparlistfalse
-\@noparlisttrue
-\@normalcr
-\@normalsize
-\@noskipsecfalse
-\@noskipsectrue
-\@notdefinable
-\@notprerr
-\@nthm
-\@nxttabmar
-\@obsoletefile
-\@oddfoot
-\@oddhead
-\@onefilewithoptions
-\@onelevel at sanitize
-\@onlypreamble
-\@opargbegintheorem
-\@opcol
-\@options
-\@othm
-\@outerparskip
-\@outputbox
-\@outputdblcol
-\@outputpage
-\@oval
-\@ovbtrue
-\@ovdx
-\@ovdy
-\@ovhlinefalse
-\@ovhlinetrue
-\@ovhorz
-\@ovltrue
-\@ovri
-\@ovro
-\@ovrtrue
-\@ovttrue
-\@ovvert
-\@ovvert0
-\@ovvlinefalse
-\@ovvlinetrue
-\@ovxx
-\@ovyy
-\@p at pfilename
-\@pagedp
-\@pageht
-\@par
-\@parboxrestore
-\@parboxto
-\@parmoderr
-\@parse at version
-\@parse at version@
-\@parse at version@dash
-\@partaux
-\@partlist
-\@partswfalse
-\@partswtrue
-\@pass at ptions
-\@pboxswfalse
-\@pboxswtrue
-\@penup
-\@percentchar
-\@picbox
-\@picht
-\@picture
-\@picture at warn
-\@pkgextension
-\@plus
-\@pnumwidth
-\@popfilename
-\@pr at videpackage
-\@preamble
-\@preamblecmds
-\@preamerr
-\@process at pti@ns
-\@process at ptions
-\@protected at testopt
-\@providesfile
-\@ptionlist
-\@pushfilename
-\@put
-\@qend
-\@qrelax
-\@rc at ifdefinable
-\@reargdef
-\@refundefined
-\@reinserts
-\@removeelement
-\@removefromreset
-\@reqcolroom
-\@reset at ptions
-\@resetactivechars
-\@resethfps
-\@restorepar
-\@reversemarginfalse
-\@reversemargintrue
-\@rightmark
-\@rightskip
-\@rjfieldfalse
-\@rjfieldtrue
-\@roman
-\@rsbox
-\@rtab
-\@rule
-\@sanitize
-\@savebox
-\@savemarbox
-\@savepicbox
-\@savsf
-\@savsk
-\@scolelt
-\@sdblcolelt
-\@seccntformat
-\@secondoftwo
-\@secpenalty
-\@sect
-\@seqncr
-\@setckpt
-\@setfloattypecounts
-\@setfontsize
-\@setfpsbit
-\@setmarks
-\@setminipage
-\@setnobreak
-\@setpar
-\@setref
-\@setsize
-\@settab
-\@settodim
-\@settopoint
-\@setupverbvisiblespace
-\@sharp
-\@shortstack
-\@shortstackc
-\@sline
-\@slowromancap
-\@spaces
-\@specialoutput
-\@specialpagefalse
-\@specialpagetrue
-\@specialstyle
-\@sptoken
-\@sqrt
-\@ssect
-\@stackcr
-\@star at or@long
-\@startcolumn
-\@startdblcolumn
-\@startfield
-\@startline
-\@startpbox
-\@startsection
-\@starttoc
-\@stopfield
-\@stopline
-\@stpelt
-\@svector
-\@sverb
-\@svsec
-\@svsechd
-\@swaptwoargs
-\@sxverbatim
-\@tabacckludge
-\@tabacol
-\@tabarray
-\@tabclassiv
-\@tabclassz
-\@tabcr
-\@tabfbox
-\@tablab
-\@tabminus
-\@tabplus
-\@tabpush
-\@tabrj
-\@tabular
-\@tabularcr
-\@tempboxa
-\@tempcnta
-\@tempcntb
-\@tempdima
-\@tempdima&
-\@tempdimb
-\@tempdimc
-\@tempskipa
-\@tempskipb
-\@tempswafalse
-\@tempswatrue
-\@temptokena
-\@testdef
-\@testfalse
-\@testfp
-\@testopt
-\@testpach
-\@testtrue
-\@testwrongwidth
-\@text at composite
-\@text at composite@x
-\@textbottom
-\@textfloatsheight
-\@textmin
-\@textsubscript
-\@textsuperscript
-\@texttop
-\@tf at r
-\@tfor
-\@tfor:
-\@tforloop
-\@thanks
-\@thefnmark
-\@thefoot
-\@thehead
-\@themargin
-\@themark
-\@thirdofthree
-\@thm
-\@thmcounter
-\@thmcountersep
-\@title
-\@tocrmarg
-\@toodeep
-\@toplist
-\@topnewpage
-\@topnum
-\@toproom
-\@topsep
-\@topsepadd
-\@totalleftmargin
-\@trivlist
-\@tryfcolumn
-\@trylist
-\@twoclasseserror
-\@twocolumnfalse
-\@twocolumntrue
-\@twoloadclasserror
-\@twosidefalse
-\@typein
-\@typeset at protect
-\@uclclist
-\@undefined
-\@unexpandable at protect
-\@unknownoptionerror
-\@unprocessedoptions
-\@unused
-\@unusedoptionlist
-\@upline
-\@upordown
-\@upvector
-\@use at ption
-\@use at text@encoding
-\@verb
-\@verbatim
-\@verbvisiblespacebox
-\@vereq
-\@viiipt
-\@viipt
-\@vipt
-\@vline
-\@vobeyspaces
-\@vpt
-\@vspace
-\@vspacer
-\@vtryfc
-\@vvector
-\@warning
-\@wckptelt
-\@whiledim
-\@whilenum
-\@whilesw
-\@wholewidth
-\@width
-\@wrglossary
-\@wrindex
-\@writeckpt
-\@writefile
-\@wrong at font@char
-\@wtryfc
-\@x at protect
-\@x at sf
-\@xDeclareMathDelimiter
-\@xaddvskip
-\@xarg
-\@xargarraycr
-\@xargdef
-\@xarraycr
-\@xbitor
-\@xcentercr
-\@xdblarg
-\@xdblfloat
-\@xdim
-\@xeqncr
-\@xexnoop
-\@xexpast
-\@xexpast*
-\@xfloat
-\@xfootnote
-\@xfootnotemark
-\@xfootnotenext
-\@xhline
-\@xifnch
-\@xiipt
-\@xipt
-\@xivpt
-\@xmpar
-\@xnewline
-\@xnext
-\@xnthm
-\@xobeysp
-\@xprocess at ptions
-\@xpt
-\@xsect
-\@xtabcr
-\@xtabularcr
-\@xthm
-\@xtryfc
-\@xtypein
-\@xverbatim
-\@xviipt
-\@xxDeclareMathDelimiter
-\@xxpt
-\@xxvpt
-\@xxxii
-\@xympar
-\@yarg
-\@yargarraycr
-\@yargd at f
-\@yargdef
-\@ydim
-\@yeqncr
-\@ympar
-\@ynthm
-\@ythm
-\@ytryfc
-\@yyarg
-\@ztryfc
-\DeclareFontEncoding@
-\DeclareFontEncoding at saved
-\DeclareFontShape@
-\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet@
-\G at refundefinedtrue
-\SetMathAlphabet@
-\SetSymbolFont@
-\UTFviii at four@octets
-\UTFviii at four@octets@@
-\UTFviii at invalid@err
-\UTFviii at invalid@err@@
-\UTFviii at three@octets
-\UTFviii at three@octets@@
-\UTFviii at two@octets
-\UTFviii at two@octets@@
-\UTFviii at undefined@err
-\UTFviii at undefined@err@@
-\accent at spacefactor
-\active at math@prime
-\add at accent
-\add at percent@to at temptokena
-\addto at hook
-\alloc@
-\alpha at elt
-\alpha at list
-\best at size
-\bm at b
-\bm at c
-\bm at l
-\bm at r
-\bm at s
-\bm at t
-\bx at A
-\bx at AA
-\bx at B
-\bx at BB
-\bx at C
-\bx at CC
-\bx at D
-\bx at DD
-\bx at E
-\bx at EE
-\bx at F
-\bx at FF
-\bx at G
-\bx at GG
-\bx at H
-\bx at HH
-\bx at I
-\bx at II
-\bx at J
-\bx at JJ
-\bx at K
-\bx at KK
-\bx at L
-\bx at LL
-\bx at M
-\bx at MM
-\bx at N
-\bx at NN
-\bx at O
-\bx at OO
-\bx at P
-\bx at PP
-\bx at Q
-\bx at QQ
-\bx at R
-\bx at RR
-\bx at S
-\bx at SS
-\bx at T
-\bx at TT
-\bx at U
-\bx at UU
-\bx at V
-\bx at VV
-\bx at W
-\bx at WW
-\bx at X
-\bx at XX
-\bx at Y
-\bx at YY
-\bx at Z
-\bx at ZZ
-\c at bottomnumber
-\c at dbltopnumber
-\c at equation
-\c at errorcontextlines
-\c at footnote
-\c at mpfootnote
-\c at ncel
-\c at page
-\c at secnumdepth
-\c at tocdepth
-\c at topnumber
-\c at totalnumber
-\calculate at math@sizes
-\catcodetable at atletter
-\catcodetable at initex
-\catcodetable at latex
-\catcodetable at string
-\cdp at elt
-\cdp at list
-\cf at encoding
-\ch at ck
-\chardef at text@cmd
-\check at command
-\check at icl
-\check at icr
-\check at mathfonts
-\check at nocorr@
-\check at range
-\check at single
-\cl@@ckpt
-\cl at page
-\col at number
-\color at begingroup
-\color at endbox
-\color at endgroup
-\color at hbox
-\color at setgroup
-\color at vbox
-\count@
-\counterwithin at s
-\counterwithin at x
-\counterwithout at s
-\counterwithout at x
-\curr at fontshape
-\curr at math@size
-\declare at robustcommand
-\default at M
-\default at T
-\default at ds
-\default at family
-\default at series
-\default at shape
-\define at newfont
-\dimen@
-\dimen at i
-\dimen at ii
-\displ at y
-\do at noligs
-\do at subst@correction
-\document at default@language
-\document at select@group
-\dorestore at version
-\ds@
-\dt at pfalse
-\dt at ptrue
-\e at alloc
-\e at alloc@attribute at count
-\e at alloc@bytecode at count
-\e at alloc@ccodetable at count
-\e at alloc@chardef
-\e at alloc@intercharclass at top
-\e at alloc@luachunk at count
-\e at alloc@luafunction at count
-\e at alloc@top
-\e at alloc@whatsit at count
-\e at ch@ck
-\e at insert@top
-\e at mathgroup@top
-\empty at sfcnt
-\enc at update
-\end at dblfloat
-\end at float
-\error at fontshape
-\every at math@size
-\execute at size@function
-\external at font
-\extract at alph@from at version
-\extract at font
-\extract at fontinfo
-\extract at rangefontinfo
-\extract at sizefn*
-\f at baselineskip
-\f at depth
-\f at encoding
-\f at family
-\f at linespread
-\f at series
-\f at shape
-\f at size
-\f at user@size
-\filec at ntents
-\filename at area
-\filename at base
-\filename at dot
-\filename at ext
-\filename at parse
-\filename at path
-\filename at simple
-\finph at nt
-\finsm at sh
-\fix at penalty
-\fixed at sfcnt
-\float at count
-\font at info
-\font at name
-\font at submax
-\frozen at everydisplay
-\frozen at everymath
-\g at addto@macro
-\gen at sfcnt
-\genb at sfcnt
-\genb at x
-\genb at y
-\get at cdp
-\get at external@font
-\getanddefine at fonts
-\glb at currsize
-\glb at settings
-\group at elt
-\group at list
-\h at false
-\h at true
-\hb at xt@
-\hexnumber@
-\hgl@
-\hmode at bgroup
-\hmode at start@before at group
-\if at afterindent
-\if at compatibility
-\if at endpe
-\if at eqnsw
-\if at fcolmade
-\if at filesw
-\if at firstamp
-\if at firstcolumn
-\if at ignore
-\if at includeinrelease
-\if at inlabel
-\if at insert
-\if at minipage
-\if at mparswitch
-\if at negarg
-\if at newlist
-\if at nmbrlist
-\if at nobreak
-\if at noitemarg
-\if at noparitem
-\if at noparlist
-\if at noskipsec
-\if at ovb
-\if at ovhline
-\if at ovl
-\if at ovr
-\if at ovt
-\if at ovvline
-\if at partsw
-\if at pboxsw
-\if at reversemargin
-\if at rjfield
-\if at specialpage
-\if at tempswa
-\if at test
-\if at twocolumn
-\if at twoside
-\ifdt at p
-\ifh@
-\ifin@
-\ifmath at fonts
-\ifmaybe at ic
-\ifnot at nil
-\ifv@
-\in@
-\in@@
-\in at false
-\in at true
-\init at restore@glb at settings
-\init at restore@version
-\input at path
-\input at path:
-\insc at unt
-\install at mathalphabet
-\is at range
-\kernel at ifnextchar
-\l at ngrel@x
-\l at nohyphenation
-\last at fontshape
-\leavevmode at ifvmode
-\load at onefilewithoptions
-\lower at bound
-\lower at bound0
-\ltx at sh@ft
-\m at ne
-\m at th
-\makeph at nt
-\makesm at sh
-\mandatory at arg
-\math at bgroup
-\math at egroup
-\math at fonts
-\math at fontsfalse
-\math at fontstrue
-\math at version
-\mathchar at type
-\mathph at nt
-\mathsm at sh
-\maybe at ic
-\maybe at ic@
-\maybe at icfalse
-\maybe at ictrue
-\mb at b
-\mb at l
-\mb at r
-\mb at t
-\n at space
-\new at command
-\new at environment
-\new at mathalphabet
-\new at mathgroup
-\new at mathversion
-\new at symbolfont
-\nfss at catcodes
-\nfss at text
-\no at alphabet@error
-\noaccents@
-\non at alpherr
-\not at base
-\not at math@alphabet
-\o at lign
-\on at line
-\operator at font
-\optional at arg
-\outer at nobreak
-\p@
-\p at equation
-\par at deathcycles
-\patch at level
-\ph at nt
-\pickup at font
-\pictur@
-\pkgcls at arg
-\pkgcls at candidate
-\pkgcls at debug
-\pkgcls at innerdate
-\pkgcls at mindate
-\pkgcls at name
-\pkgcls at parse@date at arg
-\pkgcls at parse@date at arg@
-\pkgcls at parse@date at arg@version
-\pkgcls at releasedate
-\pkgcls at rollbackdate@error
-\pkgcls at show@selection
-\pkgcls at targetdate
-\pkgcls at targetlabel
-\pkgcls at use@this at release
-\pr@@@s
-\pr@@@t
-\pr at m@s
-\prim at s
-\process at table
-\protected at edef
-\protected at file@percent
-\protected at write
-\protected at xdef
-\provide at command
-\ps at empty
-\ps at plain
-\r@@t
-\rem at pt
-\remove at angles
-\remove at star
-\remove at star*
-\remove at to@nnil
-\renew at command
-\renew at environment
-\reserved at a
-\reserved at b
-\reserved at c
-\reserved at d
-\reserved at e
-\reserved at f
-\reset at font
-\restglb at settings
-\restore at mathversion
-\restore at protect
-\rlh@
-\saved at space@catcode
-\scriptfont at name
-\select at group
-\set@@mathdelimiter
-\set at color
-\set at display@protect
-\set at fontsize
-\set at mathaccent
-\set at mathchar
-\set at mathdelimiter
-\set at mathsymbol
-\set at simple@size at args
-\set at size@funct at args
-\set at size@funct at args@
-\set at typeset@protect
-\sf at size
-\sh at ft
-\sixt@@n
-\size at update
-\sizefn at info
-\skip@
-\sp at n
-\split at name
-\ssf at size
-\strip at prefix
-\strip at pt
-\sub at sfcnt
-\subf at sfcnt
-\subst at correction
-\sw at slant
-\t at st@ic
-\text at command
-\textfont at name
-\tf at size
-\thr@@
-\toks@
-\try at load@fontshape
-\try at simple@size
-\try at simples
-\try at size@range
-\try at size@substitution
-\tryif at simple
-\tw@
-\two at digits
-\unrestored at protected@xdef
-\upper at bound
-\use at mathgroup
-\v at false
-\v at true
-\verb at balance@group
-\verb at egroup
-\verb at eol@error
-\verbatim at font
-\verbatim at nolig@list
-\version at elt
-\version at list
-\vgl@
-\voidb at x
-\wrong at fontshape
-\x at protect
-\xe at alloc@intercharclass
-\z@
-\z at skip
-\zap at space
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexchanges.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexchanges.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexchanges.tex 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexchanges.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright 2015-2019
+% Copyright (C) 2015-2019
% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
% The latest version of this license is in
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% version 2008 or later.
%
% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
@@ -34,6 +34,8 @@
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage{url}
+
\title{Changes to the \LaTeXe{} format}
\author{\copyright~Copyright 2015--2019, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\
@@ -55,16 +57,16 @@
\makeatother
\ifx\href\undefined
- \newcommand\ghissue[1]{#1}
- \newcommand\gnatsissue[1]{#1}
+ \newcommand\ghissue[1]{github #1}
+ \newcommand\gnatsissue[1]{gnats #1}
\newcommand\ltnewsissue[1]{\LaTeX\ News~#1}
- \newcommand\sxanswer[1]{https://tex.stackexchange.com\slash a\slash #1}
- \newcommand\sxquestion[1]{https://tex.stackexchange.com\slash q\slash #1}
+ \newcommand\sxanswer[1]{\url{https://tex.stackexchange.com\slash a\slash #1}}
+ \newcommand\sxquestion[1]{\url{https://tex.stackexchange.com\slash q\slash #1}}
\else
\newcommand\ghissue[1]{%
- \href{https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/issues/#1}{#1}}
+ \href{https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/issues/#1}{github #1}}
\newcommand\gnatsissue[1]{%
- \href{https://www.latex-project.org/cgi-bin/ltxbugs2html?pr=latex/#1}{#1}}
+ \href{https://www.latex-project.org/cgi-bin/ltxbugs2html?pr=latex/#1}{gnats #1}}
\newcommand\ltnewsissue[1]{%
\href{https://www.latex-project.org/news/latex2e-news/ltnews#1.pdf}{\LaTeX\ News~#1}}
\newcommand\sxanswer[1]{%
@@ -95,13 +97,91 @@
\section{Changes introduced in 2019-10-01}
-\emph{to be added}
+Introduced \LaTeX\texttt{-dev} formats for pre testing future \LaTeX{}
+releases. Now there's a \texttt{latex-base-dev} package on CTAN which
+contains a pre-release of the \LaTeXe{} kernel and both \TeX Live and
+MiK\TeX{} include the standard \LaTeX{} executables (\texttt{pdflatex},
+\texttt{lualatex}, etc.) with \texttt{-dev} appended, which use the
+pre-release format.
+The handling of Unicode characters was improved by making them safe
+inside \verb|\ref|s and \verb|\label|s, by using \verb|\ifincsname|
+to make these characters safe in these contexts (\ghissue{95}).
+
+In line with the better handling of Unicode characters, file names
+can now contain any Unicode character plus spaces, as these cases
+are now correctly handled by the kernel.
+
+An optional argument was added to the \texttt{filecontents} environment,
+to which a comma-separated list of options can be given. The options
+include \texttt{overwrite} (or \texttt{force}), \texttt{nosearch}, and
+\texttt{noheader} (which has the same effect as the starred form of the
+environment). The environment is now allowed anywhere in the document.
+
+A plethora of \LaTeX{} commands was made robust so that fewer
+\verb|\protect| are needed when using some commands in moving arguments.
+There are a few border cases where it's tricker to make the command
+robust or where it's not worth it to do so, but most reasonable use
+cases are covered. The most notable change was \verb|\begin| and
+\verb|\end|, which are now robust and won't break when used in moving
+arguments.
+
+An extra \verb|\hskip 1sp| was added to \verb|c|-column table cells to
+protect against the presence of an \verb|\unskip| in the table cell
+(\ghissue{102}).
+
+\texttt{U+012F} which is ``i with ogonek'' should produce an
+``i'' and not a ``dotless i''. This has been corrected
+(\ghissue{122}).
+
+The Unicode slots \texttt{27E8} and \texttt{27E9} have been mapped to
+\verb|textlangle| and \verb|textrangle| which is the recommended mapping
+(\ghissue{110}).
+
+Basic ligatures (ff, fi, fl, ffi, ffl, ft, st) can now be input as a
+single unicode character in pdf\TeX, which is useful when copy-pasting
+(\ghissue{154}).
+
+\verb|\InputIfFileExists{foo}{\input{bar}}{}|
+did not load the files \texttt{foo.tex} and \texttt{bar.tex} but
+would load \texttt{bar.tex} twice. This has been corrected (\ghissue{109}).
+
+The \textsf{fncylab} and \textsf{varioref} packages changed \LaTeX's internal
+counter prefix commands \verb|p at ...| so that they would take the counter
+value as an argument instead of just acting as a prefix to them. These
+packages also provided the \verb|\labelformat| macro to change the prefix
+macro and \verb|\Ref| so that using counters defined that way in the
+beginning of sentences would have the proper capitalisation. These features
+were added to the \LaTeXe{} kernel.
+
+The kernel now says ``Trying to load\ldots''
+instead of ``Try loading \ldots'' in one of its informal
+messages to match style of similar messages (\ghissue{107}).
+
+\verb|\DeclareErrorFont| would change the font size to 10\,pt which, when
+used in the wrong place, would make incorrect font settings in the document.
+This has now been fixed (\gnatsissue{4399}).
+
+The default action of the file \texttt{nfssfont.tex} was set to produce a
+font table, so that one can simply hit enter instead of having to write
+\verb=\table\bye=.
+
+The \LaTeX{} kernel now provides dummy (empty) definitions for the
+commands \verb|\conditionally at traceoff| and
+\verb|\conditionally at traceon| from the \texttt{trace} package so they
+can be used by package developers without worrying about them being
+defined or not (\ghissue{164}).
+
+
+
+
+
\section{Changes introduced in 2018-12-01}
Further additions to the characters supported by default in UTF-8.
-\verb|\guillemetleft| and \verb|\guillemetright| provided as alias for
-the names based on the Adobe font names (\ghissue{65}).
+The commands \verb|\guillemetleft| and \verb|\guillemetright| are
+provided as alias for the names based on the Adobe font names
+(\ghissue{65}).
The use of potrusion in tables of contents is suppressed by default,
see \sxquestion{172785}.
@@ -111,7 +191,7 @@
Spaces are removed from the argument passed to BiBTeX, \ghissue{88}.
-New commands \verb\Hwithstroke| and \verb|\hwithstroke| added to T1 encoding support.
+New commands \verb|\Hwithstroke| and \verb|\hwithstroke| added to T1 encoding support.
The internal box structure for floats is adjusted to preserve box
levels of split hyperlinks, avoiding a fatal pdftex error. \ghissue{94}.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexsym.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lb2.err
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lb2.err 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lb2.err 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,1622 +0,0 @@
-\newcommand\erratafiledate{2014-09-30}
-
-\def\comando#1{\texttt{\string#1}}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through
-% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and
-% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify
-% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata
-% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the
-% .cfg file.
-%
-% The current version of this file can be found at:
-%
-% https://www.latex-project.org/guides/books.html
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-
-\begin{filecontents}{ttcterrata.cls}
-%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1997,2004,2005,2007, 2014 Frank Mittelbach
-%% This class file is licenced under LPPL latest version;
-%% see https://www.latex-project.org/lppl
-%
-%
-% It sets up a few commands used to format the errata entries for books in the
-% Addison-Wesley Series:
-%
-% Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting
-%
-% hence the name. However, anybody who likes to use it is free to apply it for
-% errata files of other books.
-%
-% Changes:
-%
-% v1.0a - changed name from errata.cls to ttcterrata.cls
-
-\ProvidesClass{ttcterrata}
- [2007/11/10 v1.0a Mini class for errata files; subject to change (FMi)]
-
-\LoadClass{article}
-
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1}
-\addtolength\textwidth{5cm}
-\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm}
-
-\addtolength\textheight{36pt}
-
-\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
-\MakeShortVerb{\|}
-
-\RequirePackage{array,longtable}
-\RequirePackage{multicol}
-
-
-\newcommand\erratagetnumber{}
-\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3}
-
-
-\newcommand\gobbleerrata{%
- \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
- \let\endgobble\egroup
- \let\hideamp\relax
- \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par}
-
-\newcommand*\hideamp{&}
-
-\let\endgobble\relax
-
-
-\newcommand\erratastartdate{}
-\newcommand\myprinting{1}
-
-
-\newcommand\doweprint[2]{%
- \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else \ifx s#2 1000\else#2 \fi\fi
- \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber <
- \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax
- \@tempswatrue
- \else
- \@tempswafalse
- \fi
- \else
- \@tempswafalse
- \fi
-}
-
-
-
-\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate}
-\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and}
-
-\newcommand\showallerrors{%
- \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}%
- \renewcommand\printedentries{up to}
- \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}}
-
-
-\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{%
- \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi}
-
-\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{%
- \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}}
-
-\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg}
- {
- \input{\jobname.cfg}
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found }
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- \AtEndDocument{
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing}
- \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision}
- \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date}
- \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* Current settings are:}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting}
- \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- }}
- {}
-
-%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision>
-
-\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{%
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\newcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{%
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble
- &\\[4pt]%
- \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\}
-
-\newenvironment{erratalist}
- {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}}
- {\endgobble\end{longtable}}
-
-\newcommand\erratatitle[2]
- {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries
- Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt]
- \small Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2\\
- (For other periods/print runs reprocess this document
- with different config settings)
- \end{center}%
- \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}%
- \thispagestyle{plain}%
- \vspace{20pt}}
-
-\pagestyle{myheadings}
-
-\AtBeginDocument{\small}
-
-\setlength\parindent{0pt}
-\setlength\parskip{2pt}
-
-\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par}
-
-% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands:
-
-\let\u\underline
-\renewcommand\>{$\to$}
-
-%%% some code suggested by Thorsten Hansen to count the number of
-%%% contributions by individuals (will work only if we do not get
-%%% too many :-)
-
-\def\count at contributors#1/#2/#3\@nil{
- \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}}{}\stepcounter{#1}%
-%%% also count secondary:
-%%% \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}\stepcounter{#2}%
-}
-
-\renewcommand\erroronpage[5]{%
- \count at contributors#3/secondary/\@nil
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\renewcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{%
- \count at contributors#3/secondary/\@nil
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\renewcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{%
- \sffamily#1} #2\@ifundefined{c@#1}{}{ (\arabic{#1})}\par}
-
-\end{filecontents}
-
-
-\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg}
-%
-%
-% Configuration file for the errata listing of
-%
-% Der LaTeX-Begleiter 2 Auflage
-%
-%
-% \erratastartdate
-%
-% Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed.
-%
-% The format is YYYY/MM/DD.
-%
-% The default below ensures that all entries for a particular
-% printing are typeset.
-%
-
-\renewcommand\erratastartdate{2005/09/01}
-
-
-%
-% \myprinting
-%
-% Specifies which (revised) printing you own. For example, if you
-% have the second printing set this to 2 so that errors already
-% corrected in that printing will not appear in your errata
-% listing.
-%
-% The default below ensures that all entries relevant to the second
-% printing are typeset.
-%
-%
-
-\renewcommand\myprinting{2}
-
-%
-% \norevisionnumbers
-%
-% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same
-% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed
-% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in
-% italic and add the revision number as a superscript.
-
-%
-% \showallerrors
-%
-% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are
-% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and
-% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by
-% default.
-%
-%
-\endinput
-\end{filecontents}
-
-
-\documentclass{ttcterrata}[2005/11/10] % we want new class
-
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\let\u\underline % shortcut for this file
-
-\newcommand\meta[1]{$\langle$\textit{#1\/}$\rangle$}
-\newcommand\BibTeX{\textsc{Bib}\TeX}
-
-
-\usepackage{textcomp}
-
-\usepackage{url}
-
-\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
-
-
-\renewcommand\erratatitle[2]
- {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries
- Errataliste f\"ur #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ Druck)\\[10pt]
- \small Enth\"alt alle Eintr\"age die \printedentries\space #2
- gemeldet wurden \\
- (F\"ur andere Zeitr\"aume/Druckausgaben \"andert man die \texttt{.cfg}
- Datei und formatiert erneut.)
- \end{center}%
- \markright{Errata für #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}%
- \thispagestyle{plain}%
- \vspace{20pt}}
-
-\renewcommand\printedentries{zwischen \erratastartdate\space und}
-
-
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\erratatitle{Der \LaTeX{}-Begleiter, zweite Auf\/lage}{\erratafiledate}
-
-
-\vspace*{-\baselineskip}
-
-Hardcover-Ausgabe:
-\begin{verbatim}
- at book(Pearson:MG05,
- author = {Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens},
- title = {Der {\LaTeX}-Begleiter}, edition = 2,
- note = {Unter Mitarbeit von Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, und Chris Rowley},
- publisher = {Pearson Studium}, address = {M\"unchen}, year = 2005,
- pagenums = {1180}, bibliography = {yes}, index = {yes},
- isbn = {3-8273-7166-X},
-)
-\end{verbatim}
-Bafög-Ausgabe (Softcover) die inhaltlich identisch ist:
-\begin{verbatim}
- at book(Pearson:MG10,
- author = {Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens},
- title = {Der {\LaTeX}-Begleiter Baf\"og-Ausgabe}, edition = 2,
- note = {Unter Mitarbeit von Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, und Chris Rowley},
- publisher = {Pearson Studium}, address = {M\"unchen}, year = 2010,
- pagenums = {1180}, bibliography = {yes}, index = {yes},
- isbn = {3-8689-4088-X},
-)
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{3cm}}
-\item[]
-
-Diese Errata-Datei (\texttt{\jobname.err}) ist Teil der
-\LaTeX-Distribution und die neuste Version findet man auf der \LaTeX{}
-Project Webseite unter
-\url{https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/}\texttt{\jobname.err}. Dort
-findet man auch einige Abschnitte des Buches als PDF-Dateien.
-
-Die erste Spalte der Tabelle zeigt die Seitennummer des
-Errataeintrags. Hochgestellte Ziffern in der ersten Spalte verweisen
-auf den Nachdruck, in dem der beschriebene Fehler korrigiert wurde
-(ein \textit{s} zeigt, an, dass das Problem bisher nur in den
-"`S"'ourcen korrigiert wurde). Die zweite Spalte beschreibt die genaue
-Position (negative Zeilen- oder Absatznummern werden vom Fuß der Seite
-gezählt). Die dritte Spalte zeigt die Initialen der Person die den
-Fehler zuerst aufgespürt/gemeldet hat.
-
-
-Mithilfe der Konfigurationsdatei \texttt{\jobname.cfg} ist es möglich die
-Liste so anzupassen, dass nur Errataeinträge ab einem
-speziellen Nachdruck oder ab einem gewünschten Datum angezeigt werden.
-
-
-\begin{center}
- \Large \bfseries Irren ist menschlich -- Fehlerwettbewerb
-\end{center}
-
-
-Jeder gefundene und mitgeteilte Fehler ist ein Gewinn für alle Leser
-und Käufer unseres Buches. Aus diesem Grund schreiben wir, Pearson
-Studium und die Autoren, einen Preis aus -- halbjährlich, später (mehr)jährlich -- den
-die Person erhält, die die meisten Fehler innerhalb dieser Zeit findet
-(im Falle einer Überschneidung wird das Los zwischen den "`besten"'
-Fehlersuchern entscheiden). Eine Person kann nur einmal einen Preis
-bekommen; Fehler die durch die Autoren gefunden werden, zählen nicht.
-\begin{center}
-Ihr Preis: Ein Lehrbuch Ihrer Wahl!
-\end{center}
-Auswählen können Sie dieses unter \url{http://www.pearson-studium.de}.
-(Bundles und mehrbändige Bücher sind davon ausgenommen).
-
-Wie üblich behalten sich die Autoren und der Verlag das Recht vor,
-selbst zu entscheiden ob ein Fehler tatsächlich als Fehler anzusehen
-ist oder ob ein wiederholt vorkommender Fehler als ein oder mehrere Fehler
-gezählt wird.
-
-- Viel Erfolg -
-
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{clr@{ Eingaben}}
-Ende der Wettbewerbsperiode & Gewinner \\[4pt]
-2006/04 & Jens Mandavid & 121 \\
-2006/10 & Ralf Heckmann & 61 \\
-2008/04 & --- \\
-\ldots & Termin einer weiteren Verlosung offen
-%2008/10 & \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{list}
-
-\newpage
-
-
-%<--------------------------
-
-\begin{erratalist}
-
-\CHAPTER{Allgemein}
-
-\iffalse
-\seriouserroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/06/12}{}
-
- To help you in assessing this errata document we have placed
- exclamation marks in front of each entry that we consider essential
- for correctly understanding the book contents.
- \fi
-
-\erroronpage{}{}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{}
- Einzelne Teile mehrgliedriger Abkürzungen werden im deutschsprachigen
- Satz normalerweise durch einen kleinen Zwischenraum (Spatium) getrennt; nur in
- englischsprachigen Texten wird zwischen den Abkürzungsteilen kein
- Zwischenraum gesetzt.
- Beispiele: z.\,B., u.\,a.\ anstatt z.B., u.a.
-
- Dies wird im Buch \emph{vermutlich} nicht korrigiert werden.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Titelei}
-
-
-\erroronpage{iii}{bottom}{MHo}{2005/10/10}{2}
-LB2 mentions the fabled city of ``San Franciso'' which of course
-should be ``Francis\u{c}o''.
-
-\CHAPTER{Kapitel 1}
-
-\erroronpage{3}{Abs.4, Z.4}{JMa}{2005/12/26}{2}
- Ersetze: (NFSS) \> (\textsf{NFSS})
-
-\erroronpage{15}{Abs.5, Z.2}{ESt}{2006/03/11}{2}
- \texttt{info/examples/lb2} wird nicht gefunden. Kein wirklicher Fehler im
- Buch, sondern ein Versehen auf CTAN.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Kapitel 2}
-
-\erroronpage{24}{Abs.1, Z.1}{MLi}{2013/07/12}{}
- Das Kommando lautet \verb=\AskOption= (ohne ``s'')
-
-\erroronpage{26}{Abs.-3, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
- Zur schließenden Klammer in Zeile 5 gibt es keine öffnende; es sollte wohl
-heißen: (zum Beispiel \ldots{}
-
-\erroronpage{29}{Abs. nach 2-2-3, Z.7}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
- Es muss ``mit unterschiedliche\u{n} Definitionen'' heißen.
-
-\erroronpage{31}{Abs.3, Z.3}{FMi}{2006/02/28}{2}
-Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''.
-
-\erroronpage{33}{Abs.2, Z.-2}{FMi}{2006/02/28}{2}
-Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''.
-
-\erroronpage{37}{Abs.1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
-Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''.
-
-\erroronpage{39}{Abs.3, Z.4 und Z.7}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
-Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''.
-
-\erroronpage{42}{Absatz \textit{rechts}, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
-Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''.
-
-\erroronpage{56}{Abs.3, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
-Hier fehlt ein Buchstabe: ``Das Beispiel zeigt, das\u{s} es
-wahrscheinlich''.
-
-\erroronpage{59}{2.3.6 Abs.\ 4, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "`Um das \textsf{minitoc}-System zu initialisieren,
-muss ein \dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{60}{Tab.2.3, rechte Spalte, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
-Hier fehlt zu einer schließenden Klammer die öffnende.
-
-\erroronpage{61}{Abs.3, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
-\LaTeX-Trennfehler: Kapitel-eintr"age statt Kapite-leintr"age.
-
-\erroronpage{64}{Abs.3, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
-\LaTeX-Trennfehler: Abschnitts-eintrag statt Abschnitt-seintrag.
-
-\erroronpage{65}{Abs.1, Z.1-2}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
-Es muss ``Ein solcher Wechsel'' statt ``Eine solcher Wechsel'' heißen.
-
-\erroronpage{65}{Abs.-2, Z.1-2}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
-\LaTeX-Trennfehler: Verzeichnis-eintr"age statt Verzeichni-seintr"age.
-
-\erroronpage{70}{Abs.-1, Z.1-2}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
-Hier fehlt ein Komma am Ende der ersten Zeile und ein Punkt am Ende des
-ersten Satzes.
-
-\erroronpage{73}{Abs.2, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
-Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''.
-
-\erroronpage{74}{Abs.2, Z.12}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
-Hier fehlt ein Komma vor ``wenn sie durch''.
-
-\erroronpage{75}{Abs.3, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2}
-Es fehlen zwei Buchstaben: ``ohne daf"ur einen eigen\u{en} Abstand
-einzuf"ugen''.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Kapitel 3}
-
-\erroronpage{94}{Abs.-3, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/01/06}{2}
-Lösche s aus Grau\u{s}wertproblem
-
-
-\erroronpage{101}{Abs.3, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2}
-Kein Komma vor und bei einer Aufzählung.
-
-\erroronpage{109}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2}
- Streiche Kommata: "`Möglich\_ und absolut nicht unwahrscheinlich\_ ist
-beispielsweise, \dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{114}{para 3}{FMi/CBe}{2005/09/02}{2}
-Ersetze Absatz durch: "`Da es nicht empfehlenswert ist, die Einstellung von
-|\baselineskip|
-direkt zu ändern, verfügt \LaTeX{} über den Befehl |\lineskip|\,, mit
-dem sich |\baselineskip| global für alle Größen ändern lässt. Nach
-einer Anweisung wie etwa \verb!\linespread{1.5}\selectfont! tritt der neue
-Wert sofort in Kraft. [Fußnote: Die veraltete \LaTeX~2.09 Lösung
- \verb=\renewcommand\baselinestretch=\texttt{\textbraceleft
- 1.5\textbraceright} benötigt dagegen einen nachfolgenden
- Schriftgrößenwechsel (wie |\small| oder |\Large|), damit der neue
- Wert in Kraft tritt.]
-
-
-
-\erroronpage{117}{3.2.1 Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 7}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2}
- Trennung der Hauptsätze: "`\dots{} der Zähler \texttt{footnote} wird
-weiter hochgesetzt, und die Darstellung erfolgt \dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{119}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2}
- Da die Beispiele unmittelbar folgen: "`\dots{} schematisch
-dargestellt \u{und bedeuten}:"'
-
-%%Ebenfalls als Vorschlag zur Neuformulierung -- weil es um zwei
-%%unterschiedliche Aspekte geht, sollte durch Punkt oder Semikolon
-%%getrennt werden:
-%
-% -maybe differently
-\erroronpage{121}{3.2.3 Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2}
- "`\u{Es wird ausreichend} Abstand zwischen
-Fußnoten und Text gelassen
-und die Fußnoten werden in einem kleineren Schriftgrad
-gesetzt."'
-
-
-\erroronpage{123}{2. Abs, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2}
-\ldots \u{auf denen} die Auswirkung\u{en} von \textsf{perpage} deutlich zu sehen sind.
-
-\erroronpage{143}{3. Abs, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2}
-Am Ende der Zeile fehlt ein Komma.
-
-\erroronpage{144}{1. Abs, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2}
-Es muss \u{kein} statt keinen hei\ss{}en.
-
-\erroronpage{147}{Bsp.3-3-19}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2}
-Der \LaTeX{}-Begleiter sollte stets mit Bindestrich geschrieben werden.
-
-\erroronpage{149}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2}
- Streiche Anführungszeichen bei "`theoremähnliche"'.
-
-
-\erroronpage{149}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 3}{RHe/FMi}{2006/06/10}{2}
-Ersetze: "`Bei vielen dieser Argumente wird der unten aufgeführte, voreingestellte
-Wert verwendet, wenn ein leeres Argument angegeben wird.
-\>
-"`Bei vielen dieser Argumente erhält man den unten aufgeführten voreingestellten
-Wert, wenn ein leeres Argument angegeben wird."'
-
-
-
-
-\erroronpage{149}{Argument \textit{kopf-nach-abstand}, Z.\
-2}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2}
- Streiche Anführungszeichen bei "`Interpunktion"'.
-
-\erroronpage{155}{Bsp. 3-3-25}{RHe/FMi}{2006/06/10}{2}
- Benutze babel Paket und ersetze englische Anführungszeichen durch deutsche.
-
-\erroronpage{158}{Bsp.3-3-28}{FMi/JBez}{2005/09/02}{}
- The vertical space above ``Return values'' is too small.
-
- Das ist ein ziemlich versteckter \LaTeX-Fehler, mit dem man wohl
- leben muss.
-
-\erroronpage{159}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2}
- "`\dots{} unverändert, also "`wie über die Tastatur eingegeben"'\u{,}
-darstellen."'
-
-\erroronpage{160}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2}
- Anstelle "`extensiv"': "`\dots{} in der Vergangenheit \emph{intensiv}
-genutzt wurden, \dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{163}{Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2}
-Ersetze: "`fontenc"' \> "`\textsf{fontenc}"'
-
-\erroronpage{174}{3. Abs, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2}
-Ersetze: "`diesen"' \> "`diesem"'
-
-\erroronpage{175}{Z. -4}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2}
-Streiche einmal das Wort "`sich"'.
-
-\erroronpage{182}{Abs -1, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2}
-Es geht um eine Untermenge \u{von} \ldots
-
-\erroronpage{184}{Z.3}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2}
-Streiche einmal das Wort "`Beispiel"'.
-
-\erroronpage{192}{3. Abs, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2}
-Es soll wohl "`von dieser \u{durch} das Resultat von \ldots"' hei\ss{}en.
-
-\erroronpage{195}{4. Abs, Z.5}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2}
-Ersetze: "`ausgeben"' \> "`aus\u{ge}geben"'
-
-\erroronpage{197}{2. Abs, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2}
-Streiche das zweite t aus setz\u{t}en.
-
-
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Kapitel 4}
-
-% - but also a national one, so could stay
-%
-% \erroronpage{204}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ -2}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{}
-% Streiche "`DIN"' in "`DIN A4"', da A4 nationaler (DIN 476),
-% europ\"{a}ischer (EN 20 216) und internationaler (ISO 216) Standard ist.
-
-\erroronpage{205}{Tab.\ 4.2}{YiL}{2012/05/07}{}
-
- Die in der Tabelle aufgelisteten Werte sind nur ann\"aherend korrekt
- -- einige Werte h\"angen von der gew\"ahlten Papier-Option (etwa |a4paper|) ab.
-
-
-
-\erroronpage{205}{4.2, Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2}
- F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} nicht v\"{o}llig unm\"{o}glich ist\u, sie
-\dots{} zu \"{a}ndern, \dots{}"'.
-
-\erroronpage{208}{Z. 1}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2}
-Fehlendes Komma: "`zwei Pakete\u, mit deren"'
-
-\erroronpage{210}{Abs.\ 5, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2}
- Streiche Komma vor der Klammer: "`\dots{} von Listen Verwendung
-finden\_ (\dots{})."'
-
-\erroronpage{210}{Abs.6, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2}
-Fehlendes Komma: "`abliest), kann man"'
-
-\erroronpage{213}{Abs.\ 3, Z.\ -1}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2}
- F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} kann es angebracht sein, ihn
-einzubeziehen."'
-
-\erroronpage{213}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\-1}{FMi}{2006/09/25}{2}
- Ersetze "`muss die ein oder andere Einstellung"' \>
- "` müssen die Einstellungen"'
-
-\erroronpage{215}{Z.1}{ChB}{2006/06/29}{2}
- Es sollte wohl "`die ein\u{e} oder andere Einstellung"' hei"sen.
-
-\erroronpage{218}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 6}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2}
- F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} ist es jedoch besser,
-\texttt{ignorehead} \dots{} zu verwenden."'
-
-% Über das nächste Infinitivproblem kann man sich durchaus streiten:
-\erroronpage{218}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ -2}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2}
- F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} liegt es beim Anwender,
-sicherzustellen, dass \dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{218}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ -3}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2}
- F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`Da diese Option Fonts skaliert, anstatt
-Originalfonts \dots{} einzusetzen, \dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{219}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ -4ff}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2}
- F\"{u}ge "`werden"' ein und streiche Komma vor dem letzten Abschnitt
-der Aufz\"{a}hlung: "`Zun\"{a}chst wird das Paket geladen, alle
-R\"{a}nder \u{werden} auf einen Zoll gesetzt\_ und die Kolumnentitel \dots{}
-festgelegt; \dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{220}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2}
- F\"{u}ge Komma zwischen den Haupts\"{a}tzen ein: "`\dots{} des
-Paketes wieder her, und bei \verb"pass" wird das Paket deaktiviert."'
-
-\erroronpage{221}{Aufz. cam, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2}
- F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} welche die Ma{\ss}e der Nettoseite
-anzeigen, ohne sie zu ber\"{u}hren (\dots{})."'
-
-\erroronpage{221}{para 4, l.4}{FMi}{2006/09/09}{2}
- Option \texttt{b3} ist zweifach gelistet.
-
-\erroronpage{221}{Abs.\ -2, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2}
- Entferne:
- "`Die Beschreibungen \dots{} sollten deutlich machen, dass \u{das}
-\textsf{crop} erst \dots{} geladen werden sollte."'
-
-\erroronpage{221}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2}
- F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} normalerweise ist es n\"{u}tzlich, ihn
-beizubehalten."'
-
-\erroronpage{222}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2}
- F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} versucht das Paket, den Druckertreiber
-\dots{} zu bestimmen."'
-
-\erroronpage{223}{4.3, Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} sammelt genug Material, um gut eine Seite
-\dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{224}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} entspricht dem Inhalt von \verb"\thepage",
-wie er auf der \dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{225}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} mithilfe von \verb"\AtEndDocument", um
-sicherzugehen, dass \dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{229}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 8,10,-1}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2}
- Füge Leerstellen nach der Ellipse ein: "`\dots{} geht weiter"'
-
-\erroronpage{229}{Bsp.\ 4-3-3}{FMi}{2006/06/17}{2}
- Füge Leerstelle nach der Ellipse ein: \verb=\dots geht=
- \> \verb=\dots{} geht=
-
-
-\erroronpage{233}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} um Längenparameter, sondern um Befehle
-\dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{234}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 7}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2}
- Ersetze Semikolon durch Komma und füge Wort ein: "Der Seitentyp wird mit `\dots{}
-ausgewählt\u, der Bereich \u{dagegen} mit \dots{}"'
-
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Kapitel 5}
-
-
-\erroronpage{247}{Abs.\ 3, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} dass sie fähig sein müssen, innerhalb des
-Textes \dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{249}{Abs.3 in 5.1.1}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2}
-Dieser Satz steht schon am Ende des ersten Absatzes dieses
-Abschnitts.
-
-\erroronpage{251}{Abs.\ -1}{FMi/CBe}{2005/09/02}{2}
- Ersetze Absatz: "`Dezimalwert, mit dem die voreingestellte Minimalhöhe von Tabellenzellen
- multipliziert wird. Ein Wert von 1.5 würde z.B. normalgroße
- Zeilen um 50\% weiter voneinander entfernen. Er wird mit
- dem Befehl \verb=\renewcommand= eingestellt (Standardwert \texttt{1.0})."'
-
-% -check
-\erroronpage{252}{Tabelle 5.2}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2}
- Ersetze alle amerikanischen Auslassungszeichen \{..\} durch deutsche
-\{\dots{}\}.
-
-\erroronpage{253}{Z. -2}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2}
-Kein Komma vor "`erzeugt wurden"'
-
-\erroronpage{267}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/20}{2}
- "`Letztere"' ist klein zu schreiben
-
-\erroronpage{267}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/20}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} üblicher, Farben \dots{} einzusetzen"'
-
-\erroronpage{269}{Abs.5, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2}
-\LaTeX-Trennfehler: Standar-dumgebung. \> Standard-umgebung
-
-\erroronpage{277}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/20}{2}
- Ersetze Anfang durch: "`Eine der Schwierigkeiten, \LaTeX{}-Tabellen mit außergewöhnlich
-großen Einträgen zu setzen, ist eine gute Raumverteilung um diese Einträge herum zu erreichen,
- \dots"'
-
-\erroronpage{277}{Abs.\ -2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/20}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} optionales Argument, ähnlich dem von
-\verb"\\"\u, erweitert."'
-
-\erroronpage{277}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/20}{2}
- Ersetze Anfang durch: "`Die vertikalen Linien in einer \texttt{tabular}-Umgebung
- werden aus einer Reihe von Linienelementen gebildet, jeweils eines pro
- Tabellenzelle."'
-
-\erroronpage{278}{editorial change}{FMi}{2006/06/20}{2}
-Änderung auf Seite 277 erzeugt neuen Zeilenverlauf.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Kapitel 6}
-
-
-\erroronpage{292}{Abs.-1, Z.2}{MSch}{2006/01/04}{2}
- Füge hinzu: "`z.B. bedeutet \u{\texttt{0.2}}, dass 20\% von Gleitobjekten
- belegt sein darf"'
-
-\erroronpage{298}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/08/07}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "Das \textsf{afterpage}-Paket ermöglicht
-stattdessen\u{,} \verb"\afterpage{\clearpage}" zu verwenden."'
-
-\erroronpage{301}{Z.1}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2}
-Fehlendes Komma: "`Hilfsdatei, in der"'
-
-\erroronpage{301}{Abs.-2,Z.3}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2}
-Falsche Anf"uhrungszeichen bei "`eingerahmt"'
-
-\erroronpage{302}{exa 6-3-1}{FMi/CBe}{2005/09/02}{}
-The Euler constant must be typeset in roman type according
-to the ISO rules; $e$ is the charge of the electron.
-
-\erroronpage{304}{Z.2}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2}
-Es muss "`in den Abschnitte\u{n} 6.2.1 bzw. 6.2.2"' hei\ss{}en.
-
-\erroronpage{304}{Z.-5}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2}
-Es muss "`{}"uber ein zus"atzliche\u{s} obligatorisches Argument"'
-hei\ss{}en.
-
-\erroronpage{306}{Abs.\ -2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/08/07}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "\dots{} manchmal günstiger\u{,} nur die Legende zu
-drehen."'
-
-\erroronpage{315}{Abs.-3,Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2}
-Streiche den letzten Buchstaben von "`Bed"urfnisse\u{n}"'.
-
-\erroronpage{315}{Abs.\ -2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/08/07}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "\dots{} die es ermöglichen\u{,} Gleitobjekte \dots{}
-zu untergliedern."'
-
-\erroronpage{317}{6.5.1, Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/08/07}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "\dots{} das Paket \textsf{caption}\u{,} um Legenden
-\dots{} anzupassen."'
-
-\erroronpage{318}{Bsp.6-5-2, Abb.2}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2}
-Fehlendes Komma: "`Eine Legende, die mehrere"'
-
-\erroronpage{319}{\texttt{font}}{RHe}{2006/06/11}{2}
- "`Diese Option legt die Fontcharakteristika \dots{} fest, sofern sie
-nicht \dots{} überschrieben \u{werden}."'
-
-\erroronpage{319}{Bsp.6-5-3, Tab.1}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2}
-Fehlendes Komma: "`Eine Legende, die mehrere"'
-
-\erroronpage{321}{Option \texttt{position}}{FMi/JS}{2005/09/14}{2}
- Beschreibe, dass der Schlüssel \texttt{bottom} die Voreinstellung ist.
-
-\erroronpage{322}{Abs.-1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2}
-Streiche ein "`es"'.
-
-\erroronpage{327}{Abs.-1, Z.3 und Z.5}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2}
-Ersetze: \textsl{typ} \> \textsl{klasse}
-
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Kapitel 7}
-
-\erroronpage{337}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/07}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} Erscheinung, nachdem \dots {}"'
-
-\erroronpage{338}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/07}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "`(\dots{} sehr ähnlich, soweit es \dots {})"'
-
-\erroronpage{340}{Fußnote 2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Fehlendes Komma: "`verwandelt, ist dabei"'
-
-\erroronpage{344}{Abs.3, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Schließende Klammer nach "`Abbildung 7.3"' fehlt.
-
-\erroronpage{348}{Abs.-1, Z.3-4}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Trennfehler: Es muss Pa-ketnamen statt Pak-etnamen hei\ss{}en.
-
-\erroronpage{349}{}{FMi}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Änderung auf Seite 348 ändert Seitenumbruch.
-
-\erroronpage{352}{Abs.-1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Fehlendes Komma: "`einnimmt, ist der"'
-
-% - no, would break the example spacing
-%\erroronpage{356}{Bsp.7-3-7}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{}
-%Ersetze: NFSS \> \textsf{NFSS}
-%
-
-\erroronpage{358}{Abs.5, Z.6+7}{JS}{2006/11/08}{2}
- Ersetze:
- "`Die \u{Computer Modern Typewriter und} Computer Modern Sans Fonts
- verfügen nicht über \u{breite} sondern nur über breitfette"'
- \>
- "`Die Computer Modern Sans Fonts
- verfügen nicht über \u{fette} sondern nur über breitfette"'
-
-\erroronpage{361}{Tab 7.4}{AFV}{2008/08/08}{s}
-Die Tabelle zeigt |\mathtt| als Sans Serif Typewriter Font. Dies ist
-normalerweise nicht der Fall -- fast jede \LaTeX{} Installation verwendet
-Computer Modern Typewriter.
-
-\erroronpage{362}{Abs.-1, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Streiche das mittlere s in Symbol\u{s}fonts.
-
-\erroronpage{364}{Abs.-2, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Ersetze: hinzu-f"ugt \> hinzu-\u{ge}f"ugt
-
-\erroronpage{367}{Ab.-2, Z.-1}{MSch}{2006/01/06}{2}
- Der Abstand vor dem Punkt am Satzende ("`T1-Kodierung ."') ist zu
- entfernen.
-
-\erroronpage{369}{Abs.-3, Z.-3}{PEb}{2006/05/12}{2}
-Ersetze "`Oktette (von Zahlen)"' \> "`Oktette (acht Bits)"'
-
-\erroronpage{371}{Abs. \texttt{cp437de}}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Falsche Anführungszeichen beim \ss
-
-\erroronpage{371}{Abs \texttt{utf8}}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Das Leerzeichen vor dem Punkt ist zu entfernen.
-
-\erroronpage{394}{letzte Z.}{MSch}{2006/01/06}{2}
- Der Abstand vor der schlie\ss enden Klammer "`(in Abschnitt 7.5.4\_)"'
- ist zu entfernen.
-
-\erroronpage{399}{Abs.-3, Z.2+3}{FMi}{2006/06/14}{2}
- Füge Bindestrich ein: "`AMS-Font"'
-
-\erroronpage{401}{Abs.-2, Z.4}{FMi}{2006/06/14}{2}
- Füge Bindestrich ein: "`AMS-Mathematikfont"'
-
-\erroronpage{404}{Abs.-1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Streiche das n aus Name\u{n}.
-
-\erroronpage{406}{Abs.3, Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Fehlendes Komma: "`werden, normalerweise ohnehin"'
-
-\erroronpage{407}{Bsp. 7-7-21, 7-7-22}{TNdz}{2006/01/20}{2}
- Fehlendes Komma: "`\ldots ist ein Blindtext, an dem sich
- verschiedene \ldots"´
-
-\erroronpage{416}{Kapitel 7.8.6, Z.8}{RSi}{2005/12/07}{2}
- Leerzeichen nach dem kleinen Omega (|\textscomega|) fehlt.
-
-\erroronpage{420}{Abs.3, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Ersetze: L"ander \> L"ander\u{n}
-
-\erroronpage{420}{Abs.4, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Streiche eines der beiden "`auf"'.
-
-\erroronpage{422}{Abs.3, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Fehlendes Komma: "`zur Verf"ugung, um auf die"'
-
-\erroronpage{423}{Abs.1, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Ersetze: zum \> zu
-
-\erroronpage{425}{Fu\ss note}{hv}{2008/10/30}{s}
-Der Befehl hei\ss t |\pscharpath| [das s fehlt] und |pst-char| existiert zwar
-noch, l\"adt aber gleich |pst-text|, dass die Funktionen von |pst-char|
-integriert hat.
-
-\erroronpage{428}{Tabelle 7.27, Z.~1}{MSch}{2005/12/31}{2}
- Ersetze: \dq`Cork\dq'-Kodierung durch "`Cork"'-Kodierung
-
-\erroronpage{428}{Abs1., Z.4-5}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Trennfehler: Es muss Pro-zent statt Proz-ent hei\ss{}en.
-
-
-\erroronpage{435}{Abs.-2, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Fehlendes Komma vor "`werden"'
-
-\erroronpage{445}{Abs.-3, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Streiche das s aus Namen\u{s}
-
-\erroronpage{445}{Abs.-3, Z.2}{RHe}{2006/06/11}{2}
- Füge Bindestrich ein: "`AMS-Font"'
-
-\erroronpage{454}{Abs.4, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Ersetze: dass \> das
-
-\erroronpage{454}{Abs.5, Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Ersetze: dier \> die
-
-\erroronpage{456}{Abs.2, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Fehlendes Komma: "`Befehle, die"'
-
-\erroronpage{458}{Abs.2, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Fehlendes Komma: "`Zeichen, die in"'
-
-\erroronpage{458}{Abs.2, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Fehlendes Komma: "`solchen, die in"'
-
-\erroronpage{458}{Abs.4, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Fehlendes Komma vor "`wurden"'
-
-\erroronpage{464}{Abs.1, Z.3-4}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2}
-Trennfehler: Es muss Ak-zentzeichen statt Akz-entzeichen hei\ss{}en.
-
-\erroronpage{468}{Tab.7.33}{FMi}{2006/05/12}{2}
-Die "`Tabellen"uberschrift"' ist nicht im \textsf{sf}-Format.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Kapitel 8}
-
-\erroronpage{478}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 2}{FMi/RHe}{2008/09/19}{2}
-Ersetze: "`gültigen US-Praxis"' \> "`vorherrschenden Praxis"'
-
-\erroronpage{494}{8.2.12 Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2}
- Füge Kommata ein: "`Die Schwierigkeit\u{,} eine abgesetzte Formel
-korrekt zu gestalten\u{,} kann \dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{496}{Abs.2, Z.1/2}{JMa}{2006/03/05}{2}
-Trennfehler: Mark-up sieht deutlich besser aus als Mar-kup.
-
-\erroronpage{496}{Abs.\ 3 (nach Bsp. 8-2-28), Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} allerdings \emph{nur}\u{,} wenn sie \dots{}
-verschoben wurde."'
-
-\erroronpage{503}{8.4.4 Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2}
- Lösche Komma (Regel §~72.2 "`gleichrangige Wortgruppen oder Wörter in
-Aufzählungen (entweder -- oder)"'): "`\dots{} können entweder \dots{}
-positioniert werden\u{ } oder \dots{} rechts der Operatoren."'
-
-\erroronpage{504}{Abs.-2,Z.3}{JMa}{2006/03/05}{2}
-Kein Komma vor "`oder"' bei einer Aufz"ahlung.
-
-
-\erroronpage{507}{Abs.-2, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/05}{2}
-Streiche die beiden letzten Buchstaben von Paket\u{es}.
-
-\erroronpage{510}{Abs.-1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/05}{2}
-Streiche einmal das Wort "`Tabelle"'.
-
-\erroronpage{512}{Z.1}{FMi}{2006/09/19}{2}
-Füge folgenden Satz an: "`Im folgenden Beispiel wird |\sqrtsign| direkt
-verwendet:"'
-
-\erroronpage{515}{Abs.-3, Z.2}{HjG}{2006/10/19}{2}
-Ersetze: "`Bei den \u{Hauptversionen} ($D'$,~$T'$~usw.{})"' \>
- "`Bei den \u{Versionen mit Strich} ($D'$,~$T'$~usw.{})"'
-
-\erroronpage{516}{Abs.-3, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/05}{2}
-Streiche ein "`die"'.
-
-\erroronpage{518}{8.7.5 Abs.\ 3 , Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} und verhält sich somit\u{,} als wären beide
-Maße gleich null."'
-
-\erroronpage{535}{Abs. 1, Z. 5}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2}
-Ersetze: "`\ldots{} existierenden, neu belebten Mediävalschriften."'
- \> "\ldots{} existierenden Renaissance-Antiqua-Schriften."'
-
-\erroronpage{544}{Tab. 8-10/11}{FMi}{2006/08/09}{2}
- Fehlende Symbole aus amssymb hinzugef"ugt: |\circledR|, |\yen|,
- |\checkmark| und |\maltese|.
-
-\erroronpage{544}{Tab. 8.11}{LHe}{2008/02/08}{s}
- |\dag| und |\ddag| sind |\mathord|s und nicht |\mathbin| wie in Tabelle
- 8.13 behauptet.
-
-\erroronpage{546}{Tab. 8.13}{LHe}{2008/02/08}{s}
- |\dag| und |\ddag| sind keine |\mathbin|s. Sie geh"oren deshalb nicht in
- diese Tabelle und sind auch nicht (wie behauptet) Synonyme f"ur |\dagger|
- und |\ddagger|.
-
-\erroronpage{552}{8.9.6 Abs.\ 1 , Z.\ 4}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} nicht der Symbolklasse Punctuation\u{,}
-sondern Ordinary \dots{} zugeordnet sind."'
-
-\erroronpage{554}{Tab. 8-27}{DIs/FMi}{2006/08/09}{2}
- Fehlende Symbole aus amssymb hinzugef"ugt: |\llcorner|, |\lrcorner|,
- |\ulcorner| und |\urcorner|. Tabbellennotiz und Absatz unter der Tabelle
- entsprechend ge"andert.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Kapitel 9}
-
-\erroronpage{556}{Nummer 1, Item 1}{RHe}{2008/09/20}{2}
-Ersetze: "`Unterstützung für den Satz \ldots{}"'
- \> "`Unterstützen des Setzens in` \ldots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{560}{2. Snippet}{MSch/FMi}{2006/01/06}{2}
- Der vertikale Abstand vor dem Codebeispiel ist im Verh"altnis zum
- darauffolgenden Abstand erheblich zu gro\ss.
-
- Und zudem die Seite eine Zeile zu lang.
-
-\erroronpage{560}{Z.\ -5}{RHe/FMi}{2006/09/21}{2}
-Ersetze: "`der Übersetzungen \u{für} Texte"' \>
- "`der Übersetzungen generierter Texte"'
-
-
-\erroronpage{563}{Abs.1, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/03/14}{2}
-Die "offnende Klammer fehlt vor "`zum Beispiel"'.
-
-\erroronpage{565}{Abs.-2, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/14}{2}
-Streiche den letzten Buchstaben von sprachspezifische\u{n}.
-
-
-\erroronpage{567}{tab 9.3}{FMi/CBe}{2005/09/27}{}
- I am surprised that in Russian there is no word for ``Glossary''.
-
- Frank: It most certainly exits :-), but right now Babel doesn't
- know about it---so there is nothing we can do about it at the
- moment. Actually the same problem exists with Polish, although here
- I got a translation ``s\l ownik termin{\'o}w'' which will eventually
- find its way into Babel.
-
- Tja, so gehts. Auch als das deutsche Buch gesetzt wurde, waren die Begriffe
- auch noch nicht bekannt.
-
-\erroronpage{570}{Abs. -4("`Die Tilde"' , Z. 2}{RHe}{2006/09/20}{2}
-Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} nicht für ein geschütztes Leerzeichen\u{,}
-sondern für andere \dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{570}{Abs. -4("`Die Tilde"' , Item 1}{RHe}{2006/09/20}{2}
-Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} niedriger gesetzt werden\u{,} als dies
-normalerweise \dots{}"'
-
-% "`Gemäß"' wird mit dem Dativ verwendet:
-\erroronpage{571}{Abs. 2 ("`Doppelpunkt usw."' , Z. -2}{RHe}{2006/09/20}{2}
-Ersetze: "`Gemäß der \ldots{} Konventionen \ldots{}"'
- \> "`Gemäß den \ldots{} Konventionen \ldots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{579}{Abs.3, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/03/14}{2}
-Streiche die beiden letzten Buchstaben von ein\u{en}.
-
-\erroronpage{579}{Abs.2, Z.3}{RHe}{2006/06/11}{2}
- Streiche Komma: "Wie der Befehl \verb"\nombre"\_ verfügt er \dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{590}{Abs.1, Z.5/6}{JMa}{2006/03/14}{2}
-Wenn "`rumakeindex"' getrennt werden muss, sieht "`rumake-index"' deutlich
-besser aus.
-
-\erroronpage{599}{Abs.2, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/14}{2}
-Zu der schließenden Klammer gibt es keine "offnende.
-
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Kapitel 10}
-
-\erroronpage{612}{lfd. Nr. 1, Z. 1}{RHe}{2006/10/16}{2}
-Ersetze: "`ASCII-Zeichnung"'
- \> "`ASCII-Zeichnung\u{en}"'
-
-\erroronpage{628}{Abs.-3, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2}
-Der Bruch $\displaystyle\frac{\pi}{2}$ ragt in die Zeile darunter.
-
-\erroronpage{633}{Tab.\ 10.1}{FMi}{2006/10/21}{2}
-Es fehlt "`vtex"' als wichtiger Treiber; andererseits sind einige der
-aufgelisteten Treiber nur von historischer Bedeutung.
-
-\erroronpage{634}{Abs. 1, Z. 1}{RHe}{2006/10/16}{2}
-Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} reelle Werte haben)\u{,} anstatt nach
-\dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{637}{Abs. 1, Z. 1}{RHe}{2006/10/16}{2}
-Füge Komma ein: "`Lässt \LaTeX{} nach \dots{} suchen\u{,} anstatt nach
-\dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{637}{viewport}{BMo/FMi}{2007/10/20}{s}
-Füge am Anfang ein: "` Definiert den Bereich der Graphik für den \LaTeX{} Platz reservieren
- soll. Material außerhalb wird auch gedruckt (falls nicht \texttt{clip}
- verwendet wird) und überdruckt dann gegebenenalls anderes Material auf der Seite."'
-
-\erroronpage{638}{}{FMi}{2007/10/20}{s}
- Setzer-Kommentar:
-Seite mu\ss{} neu gesetzt werden, da sich der Seitenumbruch ge\"andert hat.
-
-\erroronpage{638}{Abs.3, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2}
-Streiche den letzten Buchstaben von ausf"uhrliche\u{n}.
-
-\erroronpage{647}{Abs.4, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2}
-Streiche den letzten Buchstaben von vertikale\u{r}.
-
-\erroronpage{649}{Abs.2, Z.8}{FMi/HjG}{2006/10/22}{2}
- Ersetze: "`\u{Dieser Punkt} ist in \ldots"' \>
- "`\u{Dies} ist in \ldots"'
-
-\seriouserroronpage{651}{Beispielmatrix}{HjG}{2006/10/21}{2}
- The first column shows incorrect output: instead of x=0mm it uses some
- internal default.
-
-\erroronpage{651}{Abs. -1, Z. 1}{RHe}{2006/10/16}{2}
-Ersetze: "`Die \dots{} Funktion ähnelt dem des \textsf{rotating}-Paketes
-\dots{}"'
- \>"`Die \dots{} Funktion ähnelt der des \textsf{rotating}-Paketes
-\dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{652}{editorial change}{FMi}{2006/10/21}{2}
- Fix on previous page will change page break.
-
-
-\erroronpage{661}{Abs.-3, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2}
-Ersetze: "`verf"ugt"' \> "`verf"ugen"'
-
-\erroronpage{661}{para -2, l.1}{FMi}{2005/11/11}{2}
- Leider ist Th\`anhs Name falsch geschrieben. Die korrekte Schreibweise
- ist "`H\`an Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}} Th\`anh"'.
-
-\erroronpage{672}{letzte Zeile}{BvdW}{2014/02/19}{}
-Ersetze ``wir'' durch ``wird''.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Kapitel 11}
-
-\erroronpage{686}{Abs.-2, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2}
-Streiche das Komma vor "`und"'.
-
-\erroronpage{691}{Abs.4, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2}
-Ersetze: "`eigene"' \> "`eigenen"'
-
-\erroronpage{697}{Abs. \texttt{-o} \textsl{ind}}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2}
-Streiche die letzten Buchstaben von Verwendung\u{Index}.
-
-\erroronpage{703}{Z.2}{AFe}{2006/01/13}{2}
- Extra Buchstabe: |\mark|\texttt{\u k}|both| \>
- |\markboth|
-
-\erroronpage{704}{Abs.1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2}
-Streiche den letzten Buchstaben von Teil\u{s}.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Kapitel 12}
-
-\erroronpage{709}{Abs.3, Z.-5}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-Entferne das Komma vor l"asst.
-
-\erroronpage{711}{Abs.2, Z.3/4}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-Trennfehler: Schreibe Layout-richtlinien statt Layou-trichtlinien.
-
-\erroronpage{717}{Abs.3, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`definieren"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{719}{Abs.-1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`mit dessen Hilfe"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{721}{Abs.-1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`die nicht unterst"utzt"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{728}{Abs.2, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-Es hei\ss{}t \u{der} Apostroph, nicht "`das"'.
-
-\erroronpage{734}{Abs.-3, Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-F"uge ein "offnende Klammer vor "`zum Beispiel"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{735}{Abs.3, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`wo im"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{737}{Abs.-3, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`die normalerweise"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{740}{Abs.-3, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-Streiche den letzten Buchstaben von wurde\u{n}.
-
-\erroronpage{745}{Abs.-1, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-Ersetze: "`ein solche"' \> "`eine solche"'
-
-\erroronpage{746}{Abs.-4, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`wo im"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{752}{Abs.1, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-Zur schlie\ss{}enden Klammer gibt es keine "offnende.
-
-\erroronpage{752}{Abs.3, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-Streiche die letzten drei Buchstaben von "`aufauf"'.
-
-\erroronpage{755}{Abs.-1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-Ersetze: "`eine vollst"andigen"' \> "`einen vollst"andigen"'
-
-\erroronpage{763}{Abs.3, Z.6}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-Streiche das Komma vor "`und"'.
-
-\erroronpage{767}{Abs.-3, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-Ersetze: "`L"adt"' \> "`l"adt"'
-
-\erroronpage{772}{Tab.12.2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`die eine bestimmte Wahl"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{777}{Abs.3, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-Füge einen Punkt nach "`zeigt"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{781}{Abs.1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2}
-Ersetze: "`Diese"' \> "`Dieses"'
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Kapitel 13}
-
-\erroronpage{791}{Tab.13.1, \texttt{inbook}}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2}
-Streiche einmal das Wort "'oder"'.
-
-\erroronpage{792}{Tab13.2, \texttt{crossref}}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`auf den"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{795/796}{mehrere Stellen}{FMi/DAl}{2005/09/12}{2}
- Der Name "`Miguel Lopez Fernandez"' sollte durch "`Miguel Parra Benavides"'
- ersetzt werden, da der bisher verwendete eigentlich Akzente besitzen würde,
- die an der Stelle im Buch noch nicht diskutiert wurden.
-
-\erroronpage{796}{Abs.-5, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2}
-F"uge einen Punkt nach "`erscheinen"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{799}{Abs.-2, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2}
-Streiche das Komma vor "'und"'.
-
-\erroronpage{802}{Abs.-1, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2}
-Streiche das Komma vor "'und"'.
-
-\erroronpage{819}{Abs.-1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2}
-Ersetze: BibTexMng \> \textsf{BibTexMng}
-
-\erroronpage{820}{Abs.2, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2}
-Streiche das Komma nach \texttt{size}.
-
-\erroronpage{821}{Tab.13.4, Z.-4}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2}
-F"uge ein Leerzeichen nach "`Fachzeitschriften"' ein. Ferner ist die
-"'Tabellen"uberschrift"' nicht im \textsf{sf}-Format.
-
-\erroronpage{828}{Tab. 13.5, Z. 1-2}{MSch}{2006/01/06}{2}
- Donald Ervin Knuths Name ist falsch geschrieben. Ersetze: "`Erwin"' \>
- "`Ervin"'
-
-\erroronpage{830}{Tab.13.6}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2}
-Ersetze: Italienische \> Italienisch
-
-\erroronpage{832}{Abs.1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2}
-Ersetze: Abschnitte \> Abschnitten
-
-\erroronpage{839}{Tab.13.8, \texttt{substring}}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2}
-F"uge ein Leerzeichen vor "`hat"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{842}{Abs.1, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2}
-Entweder fehlt hier eine "offnende Klammer -- oder die schlie\ss{}ende ist
-zu viel.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Kapitel 14}
-
-\erroronpage{853}{Tab.14.1}{FMi}{2006/05/12}{2}
-Die "`Tabellen"uberschrift"' ist nicht im \textsf{sf}-Format.
-
-\erroronpage{858}{Abs.4, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/03}{2}
-F"uge ein "`zu"' zwischen "`Kommentare"' und "`entfernen"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{865}{1. Snippet, Z. 2}{MSch}{2006/01/06}{2}
- Ersetze: |text/latex/base| \> |tex/latex/base|
-
-\erroronpage{867}{Abs.5}{FMi}{2007/11/13}{s}
- Explain that |\cmd| can't be used with conditionals, e.g., those produced
- with |\newif| .
-
-\erroronpage{865}{l.-7}{FMi/HjG}{2005/09/02}{2}
- Underline, as it is command line input.
-
-\erroronpage{871}{Abs.2, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/05/03}{2}
-Ersetze entg"ultig \> endg"ultig
-
-\erroronpage{870-872}{}{FMi}{2007/01/08}{}
- Setzer-Kommentar:
- Beispiele m"ussen neu kompiliert werden und
- Seiten m"ussen immer dann neu gedruckt werden, wenn etwas am Kapitel ge"andert
- wird --- genauer auf \emph{einer} der drei Seiten (da sich das CVS-Tag in
- den Beispielen und im "`code"' auf
- Seite 871/Mitte "andert).
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Anhang A}
-
-
-\erroronpage{880}{Abs.1, Z.6}{VVo}{2008/09/02}{s}
-Ersetze: "`so wird eine Fehlermeldung ausgegeben."'
-\> "`so wird eine Warnung ausgegeben."'
-
-
-\erroronpage{882}{Abs.1, Z.2}{FMi}{2006/05/12}{2}
-Ersetze: Abschnitte \> Abschnitten
-
-\erroronpage{888}{fig A.1, l.4}{FMi/JAn}{2005/09/09}{2}
- ``Did\^ot'' \> ``Didot'' und entferne Komma nach "`Zoll"'
-
-\erroronpage{891}{Tab.A.3, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/03}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`der eine feste oder"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{899}{A.2.3 Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2}
- Füge Komma ein: "`Diese Struts sind sehr nützlich, um die Höhe oder
-\dots{}"'
-
-\erroronpage{903}{Abs.-2, Z.1}{FMi}{2006/06/14}{2}
-Füge Wort ein: "`nach der \u{letzten} Klammer \verb=}= und\ldots"'
-
-\erroronpage{906}{Abs.1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/03}{2}
-Ersetze \textsl{text} \> \textsl{test}
-
-\erroronpage{909}{Abs.2, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/03}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`ob"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{918}{Abs.-1, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/05/03}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`wird"' ein.
-
-
-\erroronpage{918}{Abs.-1, Z.4}{FMi}{2006/09/23}{2}
-Ersetze: "`und alle Prozesse angehalten. "'
-\> "`und \u{die Verarbeitung} angehalten."'
-
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Anhang B}
-
-\erroronpage{925}{Abs.-2, Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`\textit{geben Sie}"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{960}{Abs.-2, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-Der Punkt am Ende des Absatzes fehlt.
-
-\erroronpage{969}{Abs.-3, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-Ersetze das \> dass
-
-\erroronpage{971}{Abs.1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-Ersetze einen \> ein
-
-\erroronpage{973}{Abs.1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-Ersetze Seite 973 \> dieser Seite
-
-\erroronpage{973}{Abs.5, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-Ersetze \TeX{}war \> \TeX\ war
-
-\erroronpage{977}{Z.3}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-Entferne das Komma vor "`\textit{wurde}"'.
-
-\erroronpage{977}{Z.5}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-Entferne das Komma vor "`als"'.
-
-\erroronpage{980}{Abs.1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma nach "`wird"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{987}{Abs.-2, Z.5}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`wobei"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{988}{Abs.-1, Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`gilt"' ein.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Anhang C}
-
-\erroronpage{998}{Abs.2, Z.5}{FMi}{2006/09/12}{2}
-Ersetze: Abbildung C.\u{2} \> Abbildung C.\u{1}
-
-\erroronpage{998}{Abs.-1, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-Streiche das Komma vor "`ausgew"ahlt"'.
-
-\erroronpage{1001}{Bsp.1, Z.1}{SNe}{2009/05/10}{s}
-Ersetze "\texttt{wgetftp}"' \> "`\texttt{wget ftp}"'
-
-\erroronpage{1003}{Abs.-1, Z.5/6}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-Streiche eines der beiden Worte "`eingeblendet"'.
-
-\erroronpage{1004}{\textbf{esc:}}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-Ersetze Kalanien \> Katalonien
-
-\erroronpage{1005}{\textbf{fra:}}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-Ersetze Orleans \> Orl\'{e}ans
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Bibliographie}
-
-\erroronpage{1017}{[57]}{RHe}{2006/06/07}{2}
-Ersetzte Erl\"auterung durch: "`Die
-\u{englische} erste Ausgabe dieses Buches."'
-
-\erroronpage{1017/1018}{[58]}{FMi}{2009/08/01}{s}
-Eintrag sollte auf die zweite (aktuelle) Ausgabe verweisen.
-(Ab dem korrigierten Nachdruck von 2010 befindet sich [58] ganz auf seite 1018.)
-
-\erroronpage{1019}{[67], Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-Schreibe "`Sprachengetrennt"' getrennt.
-
-\erroronpage{1019}{[71]}{RHe}{2006/06/07}{2}
- streiche "`international"; ISO ist per se international
-
-\erroronpage{1020}{[74]}{FMi}{2006/09/18}{2}
- Füge ``Lars Hellstr\"om'' als Autor hinzu. Datum ``Dezember 2004''
-
-\erroronpage{1025}{[116, Z.\ 2]}{RHe}{2006/06/07}{2}
- Vergleich mit "`(eben)so \dots{} setzen kann, wie sonst \dots{}"'
-erfordert Komma
-
-\erroronpage{1026}{[127], Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`welche"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{1026}{[128]}{FMi}{2005/11/07}{2}
- Der Titel lautet: ``E-\TeX: Guidelines for Future \TeX{} Extensions''.
-
-\erroronpage{1028}{[140], Z.2}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-F"uge ein Komma vor "`die auf"' ein.
-
-\erroronpage{1028}{[140], Z.-5}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2}
-Ersetze Tinagh \> Tifinagh
-
-
-\erroronpage{1030}{[162]-[163]}{FMi/RKo}{2005/11/11}{2}
-
- Leider ist Th\`anhs Name falsch geschrieben (Akzente) . Die
- korrekte Schreibweise ist "`H\`an Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}}
- Th\`anh"'.
-
-\erroronpage{1030}{[159]-[163]}{FMi/RKo}{2005/11/11}{}
-
- "`Han"' ist der Familienname, müsste also korrekterweise unter H
- einsortiert werden (letzteres lässt sich aber nur schwer korrigieren, da
- wegen der gänderten Nummerierung dann nahezu das gesamte Buch neu gesetzt
- werden müsste).
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Index}
-
-
-\erroronpage{1033}{2. Absatz, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/01/05}{2}
-Die Abkürzung NFSS sollte \textsf{NFSS} geschrieben werden.
-
-
-\erroronpage{1040}{rechte Spalte, Zeile 8}{BvdW}{2014/02/19}{}
-\verb=\AskOption= (ohne das ``s'' am Ende, siehe Errata Seite 2 zu Kapitel 2)
-
-
-
-\iffalse Nicht wirklich, aber auch nicht schoen so ... mal sehen
-
-\erroronpage{1068}{"`Gleichheits- und Relationszeichen"'}{MSch}{2005/12/31}{}
- Die beiden Einträge zu Gleichheits- und Relationszeichen sind durch
- die Verwendung unterschiedlicher Trennzeichen falsch sortiert;
- vertausche "`negierte, mathematische Symbole"' und "`mathematische
- Symbole"'.
-\fi
-
-
-
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Biographien}
-
-\erroronpage{1129}{Abs. 2, Z.3}{SZi}{2005/11/24}{2}
- l"osche g aus Dok\u{g}umente
-
-\end{erratalist}
-
-
-\setcounter{collectmore}{3}
-
-\begin{multicols}{3}[Dank an alle die Fehler oder Auslassungen
- gemeldet haben. Gelistet sind jeweils die Personen die ein Problem
- zuerst entdeckt haben. Einige Fehler wurden im englischen Original
- gefunden, weshalb auch ein paar Namen ohne Fehlerzahl auftauchen.]
-\contributor{AFe}{Alfonso Fernandez-Vazquez}
-\contributor{BvdW}{Berend G. van der Wall}
-\contributor{CBe}{Claudio Beccari}
-\contributor{ChB}{Christof B\"ockler}
-\contributor{DAl}{Daniel Alonso i Alemany}
-\contributor{DIs}{Daniel Isaacson}
-\contributor{ESt}{Eckhard Stein}
-\contributor{FMi}{Frank Mittelbach}
-\contributor{HjG}{Hubert G\"a\ss lein}
-\contributor{JAn}{Jacques Andr\'e}
-\contributor{JBez}{Javier Bezos}
-\contributor{JMa}{Jens Mandavid}
-\contributor{JS}{Joachim Schrod}
-\contributor{LHe}{Lars Hellstr\"om}
-\contributor{MHo}{Morten H\o gholm}
-\contributor{MLi}{Martin Liebmann}
-\contributor{MSch}{Michael Schutte}
-\contributor{PEb}{Paul Ebermann}
-\contributor{RHe}{Ralf Heckmann}
-\contributor{RKo}{Reinhard Kotucha}
-\contributor{RSi}{Roman Sigg}
-\contributor{SNe}{Stefan Neuhaus}
-\contributor{SZi}{Stefan Ziesemer}
-\contributor{TNdz}{Timo Niedenzu}
-\contributor{VVo}{Vladimir Volovich}
-\contributor{YiL}{Yiannis Lazarides}
-\end{multicols}
-
-
-Sollten Sie einen weiteren Fehler entdecken, melden Sie diesen bitte an
-\begin{quote}\ttfamily
- frank.mittelbach at latex-project.org
-\end{quote}
-wenn möglich gleich in der für diese Datei benötigte Form, d.h.
-\begin{flushleft}
-|\erroronpage{|\textit{Seitennummr}|}{|\textit{Zeilenidentifikation}|}{|%
- \textit{Initialen}|}{|\textit{JJJJ/MM/DD}|}{}| \\
- \hspace*{2em}\textit{Beschreibung des Fehlers}
-\end{flushleft}
-Hier ist ein Beispiel:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\erroronpage{5}{Abs.3, Z.1}{MOs}{2005/09/01}{}
- Ersetze: "`LaTeX"' \> "`\LaTeX{}"'
-\end{verbatim}
-Die Verwendung von Babelkommandos (etwa |"`|) ist möglich, aber Umlaute
-sollten möglichst nicht als 8-bit Zeichen eingegeben werden (also besser |"a|
-oder |\"a|) um Probleme mit der Kodierung zu verhindern.
-
-\end{document}
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lb2.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/legal.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/legal.txt 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/legal.txt 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@
The latest version of this license is in
https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2005/12/01 or later.
+version 2008 or later.
The use of LaTeX is unrestricted.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/letter.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lgc2.err
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lgc2.err 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lgc2.err 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,697 +0,0 @@
-\newcommand\erratafiledate{2008-06-13}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through
-% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and
-% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify
-% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata
-% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the
-% .cfg file.
-%
-% The current version of this file can be found at:
-%
-% https://www.latex-project.org/guides/books.html
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-
-\begin{filecontents}{ttcterrata.cls}
-%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1997,2004,2005,2007 Frank Mittelbach
-%% This class file is licenced under LPPL latest version;
-%% see https://www.latex-project.org/lppl
-%
-%
-% It sets up a few commands used to format the errata entries for books in the
-% Addison-Wesley Series:
-%
-% Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting
-%
-% hence the name. However, anybody who likes to use it is free to apply it for
-% errata files of other books.
-%
-% Changes:
-%
-% v1.0a - changed name from errata.cls to ttcterrata.cls
-
-\ProvidesClass{ttcterrata}
- [2007/11/10 v1.0a Mini class for errata files; subject to change (FMi)]
-
-\LoadClass{article}
-
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1}
-\addtolength\textwidth{5cm}
-\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm}
-
-\addtolength\textheight{36pt}
-
-\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
-\MakeShortVerb{\|}
-
-\RequirePackage{array,longtable}
-\RequirePackage{multicol}
-
-
-\newcommand\erratagetnumber{}
-\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3}
-
-
-\newcommand\gobbleerrata{%
- \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
- \let\endgobble\egroup
- \let\hideamp\relax
- \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par}
-
-\newcommand*\hideamp{&}
-
-\let\endgobble\relax
-
-
-\newcommand\erratastartdate{}
-\newcommand\myprinting{1}
-
-
-\newcommand\doweprint[2]{%
- \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else \ifx s#2 1000\else#2 \fi\fi
- \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber <
- \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax
- \@tempswatrue
- \else
- \@tempswafalse
- \fi
- \else
- \@tempswafalse
- \fi
-}
-
-
-
-\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate}
-\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and}
-
-\newcommand\showallerrors{%
- \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}%
- \renewcommand\printedentries{up to}
- \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}}
-
-
-\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{%
- \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi}
-
-\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{%
- \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}}
-
-\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg}
- {
- \input{\jobname.cfg}
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found }
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- \AtEndDocument{
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing}
- \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision}
- \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date}
- \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* Current settings are:}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting}
- \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- }}
- {}
-
-%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision>
-
-\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{%
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\newcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{%
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble
- &\\[4pt]%
- \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\}
-
-\newenvironment{erratalist}
- {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}}
- {\endgobble\end{longtable}}
-
-\newcommand\erratatitle[2]
- {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries
- Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt]
- \small Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2\\
- (For other periods/print runs reprocess this document
- with different config settings)
- \end{center}%
- \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}%
- \thispagestyle{plain}%
- \vspace{20pt}}
-
-\pagestyle{myheadings}
-
-\AtBeginDocument{\small}
-
-\setlength\parindent{0pt}
-\setlength\parskip{2pt}
-
-\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par}
-
-% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands:
-
-\let\u\underline
-\renewcommand\>{$\to$}
-
-%%% some code suggested by Thorsten Hansen to count the number of
-%%% contributions by individuals (will work only if we do not get
-%%% too many :-)
-
-\def\count at contributors#1/#2/#3\@nil{
- \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}}{}\stepcounter{#1}%
-%%% also count secondary:
-%%% \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}\stepcounter{#2}%
-}
-
-\renewcommand\erroronpage[5]{%
- \count at contributors#3/secondary/\@nil
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\renewcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{%
- \count at contributors#3/secondary/\@nil
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\renewcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{%
- \sffamily#1} #2\@ifundefined{c@#1}{}{ (\arabic{#1})}\par}
-
-\end{filecontents}
-
-
-\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg}
-%
-%
-% Configuration file for the errata listing of
-%
-% The LaTeX Graphics Companion, Second Edition
-%
-%
-% \erratastartdate
-%
-% Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed.
-%
-% The format is YYYY/MM/DD.
-%
-% The default below ensures that all entries for a particular
-% printing are typeset.
-%
-
-\renewcommand\erratastartdate{2007/06/30}
-
-
-%
-% \myprinting
-%
-% Specifies which (revised) printing you own. For example, if you
-% have the second printing set this to 2 so that errors already
-% corrected in that printing will not appear in your errata
-% listing.
-%
-% The default below ensures that all entries relevant to the x-th
-% printing are typeset.
-%
-%
-
-\renewcommand\myprinting{2}
-
-%
-% \norevisionnumbers
-%
-% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same
-% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed
-% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in
-% italic and add the revision number as a superscript.
-
-%
-% \showallerrors
-%
-% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are
-% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and
-% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by
-% default.
-%
-%
-\endinput
-\end{filecontents}
-
-
-\documentclass{ttcterrata}[2005/11/10] % we want new class
-
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\let\u\underline % shortcut for this file
-\newcommand\meta[1]{$\langle$\textit{#1\/}$\rangle$}
-
-\usepackage{textcomp}
-
-\usepackage{url}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\erratatitle{The \LaTeX{} Graphics Companion, Second Edition}{\erratafiledate}
-
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- at book(A-W:GMRRV07,
- author = {Michel Goossens and Frank Mittelbach and Sebastian Rahtz
- and Denis Roegel and Herbert Vo{\ss}},
- title = {The {\LaTeX} Graphics Companion},
- edition = 2,
- series = {Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting},
- publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
- address = {Boston, Massachusetts},
- year = 2007,
- pagenums = {976},
- bibliography = {yes},
- index = {yes},
- isbn = {978-0-321-50892-8},
-)
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{3cm}}
-\item[]
-
-This file (\texttt{\jobname.err}) can be found as part of the \LaTeX{}
-distribution and its latest version is maintained on the \LaTeX{}
-project site at \texttt{https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/\jobname.err}
-where you will also find extracts of the book.
-
-The first column in the table shows the page number of the errata
-entry. Superscript numbers in the first column refer to the printed
-revision in which this entry was corrected (\textit{s} indicates a
-correction in the sources only). The second
-column gives the precise location (negative line or paragraph numbers
-are counted from the bottom of the page). The third column shows the
-first finder of the problem.
-
-You can customize this list to only show errata related to the printing
-you own by changing the configuration in the file \texttt{\jobname.cfg}.
-
-\begin{center}
- \Large \bfseries To Err is Human --- Bug Contest
-\end{center}
-
-Any mistake found and reported is a gain for all readers of our book.
-For this reason Addison-Wesley and the authors offer a prize (for 6
-periods) to the eligible person who finds the largest
-number of bugs during that period (in case of a draw a random choice
-will be made between all those with the largest number of findings).
-A person can receive at most one prize, ever; errors found by any of
-the authors do not count.
-
-Each prize is a free choice of any single computing book found on the
-AW Professional web site \texttt{http://www.awprofessional.com} (that
-is, no boxed sets or multiple volume offers).
-
-
-As usual, the authors and publisher reserve the right to make various
-decisions such as whether a reported feature is an error for
-competitive purposes or whether similar features count as a single or
-multiple errors. ---
-Good luck!
-
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{clr}
-Contest period ends & Winner \\[4pt]
-2008/05 & Milan Vujtek & 16 suggestions\\
-2010/05 & & \\
-\ldots
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{list}
-
-\newpage
-
-
-%<--------------------------
-
-\newcommand\BibTeX{\textsc{Bib}\TeX}
-
-\begin{erratalist}
-
-\CHAPTER{General }
-
-\seriouserroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2007/07/01}{}
-
- To help you in assessing this errata document we have placed
- exclamation marks in front of each entry that we consider essential
- for correctly understanding the book contents.
-
-\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2007/07/01}{}
-
- Due to the printing process there may be small alignment problems
- between blue and black text on some pages. These can vary from book
- to book depending on how the paper was handled between print
- runs---such is the analog nature of printing on a press.
-
-\CHAPTER{Front matter}
-
-\erroronpage{xxix}{para 4, l.1}{FMi/hv}{2007/08/23}{2}
-Add ``In case of \textsf{PSTricks} \u{and, for example, the \textsf{beamer}
-class} the syntax \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{xxix}{para 5, code}{FMi}{2007/08/24}{2}
-There should be a bit more space in front of the code block
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 1}
-
-\erroronpage{2}{para 3, l.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
- ``First.'' \> ``First,''
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 2}
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 3}
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 4}
-
-\seriouserroronpage{152}{exa 4-1-15}{HjG}{2007/08/17}{2}
- Output of example is missing! Oops \ldots\ it was there honest
-
-\erroronpage{177}{para 2, l.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
-Missing interword space: ``Flowcharts\u{ }are''
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 5}
-
-
-\erroronpage{221}{last line}{RSh}{2008/02/13}{2}
-``down'' should be ``up''.
-
-\erroronpage{223}{}{hv}{2008/02/22}{2}
-Changed explanation for example 5-4-1 slightly (since example changed).
-
-\erroronpage{224}{exa. 5-4-1}{hv}{2008/02/22}{2}
-Coding changed to:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{pspicture}(-1,-1)(2,2)
- \psaxes{->}(0,0)(-1,-1)(2,2)
- \parabola[linewidth=1.5pt](1,2)(-0.5,-0.5)
- \parabola[origin={0.25,-0.5},
- linestyle=dashed](1,2)(-0.5,-0.5)
- \psaxes[origin={0.25,-0.5},linestyle=dashed,
- linewidth=0.2pt]{->}(0,0)(-1,-1)(2,2)
-\end{pspicture}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\erroronpage{240}{para 4, l.8}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
-Remove backslash in:
- ``keyword setting \verb/\showpoints=true/''
-
-\erroronpage{254}{Ex 5-9-1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{}
-The blue circle shouldn't be visible behind the black circle. This is a
-problem due to the printing process used for the book---it does not show up on
-all books.
-
-\erroronpage{290}{Ex 5-13-22}{MSh}{2008/06/11}{2}
-Inside |\pscustom| the |\psbezier| macro needs four arguments in case
-there exists no current point (always for the first macro) and three
-arguments if the bezier curve connects to an existing line
-or curve (path).
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 6}
-
-\erroronpage{335}{para 5, l.4}{JMi}{2008/06/23}{2}
-``\ldots{} summarized in \u{Table} 5.2 \ldots" \> ``\ldots{} summarized in
-\u{Figure} 5.2 \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{406}{margin}{hv}{2007/08/20}{2}
- Missing interword space:
- ``The\u{ }plotpoints \ldots''.
-
-\erroronpage{416}{exa 6-6-34}{hv}{2007/08/20}{2}
- The filling (crosshatch) of the example isn't quite correct.
-
-\erroronpage{458}{para 2, l.1}{HjG}{2007/08/17}{2}
- Missing interword space:
- ``The\u{ }\textsf{pst-pdf} package \dots''
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 7}
-
-\erroronpage{491}{2nd line}{yhj}{2008/01/06}{2}
-The name of author of xytree package should be ``Koaunghi Un''
-but not ``Koaungli Un''. Sorry for the mistake.
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 8}
-
-\erroronpage{514}{tab. 8.3}{FMi}{2008/012/21}{2}
-Slightly increase spacing after hline.
-
-\erroronpage{515}{tab. 8.4}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
-There should be vertical spacing in the first line (superscript $10^{24}$
-touches top line)
-
-\seriouserroronpage{579}{para 2, l.3}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
- \verb=\ln= \> \verb=\nl= (this will also change the index entry)
-
-\erroronpage{583}{para 4, l.9}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
-Replace: ``of the voltage $V_C$'' \> ``of the voltage $v_C$''
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 9}
-
-\erroronpage{598/599}{several}{FMi}{2007/08/19}{2}
- The text and the displayed logs talk about example 7-2-6 but afterwards two
- more chapters got added (without the logs being regenerated), i.e., this
- should now be 9-2-6.
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 10}
-
-\seriouserroronpage{683}{exa. 10-1-22}{FMi}{2007/08/26}{2}
-The example unfortunately highlights a bug in the current texmate package: a
-linebreak (in contrast to a space) is not recognized as a move separator
-resulting in all moves getting scrambled in the output, e.g., you see
-\texttt{dxe5 Bxf3 Qxf5} put together under move 4.
-
-Fix: use \texttt{;} to separate moves on linebreaks or wait for the next
-release of the package.
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 11}
-
-\erroronpage{720}{6th item}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
-Replace: ``documentwide'' \> ``\u{D}ocumentwide''
-
-\erroronpage{726}{para 2, l.2}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
-Extra space after
-parenthesis: ``( in practice''
-
-\erroronpage{740}{para 2, l.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
-Replace: ``given
-by \textit{start\u{ row}}'' \> ``given by \textit{start} row''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{741}{Ex 11-3-5}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
-Usage of
-\verb=\cellcolor= might introduce extra space in the output (as one can see in
-the example).
-
-This can be argued as being a bug in the \texttt{colortbl} package. Given that the
-basic \verb=\color= command ignores spaces after it, \verb=\cellcolor= should
-behave similarly.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{744}{line after Ex 11-3-9}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
-Replace: ``This does \u{not}, of course, affect'' \>
-``This does, of course, \u{also} affect''
-
-\erroronpage{758}{para 3, l.2}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
-Add small space between values and units in frame dimension
-
-\erroronpage{760}{fig. 11.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
-
-why differs section names (``Introduction to encoding'' vs. ``Introduction''
-etc.)?
-
-Frank: because the author of this section used a real live example where he had
-used an optional argument to |\section| to make the toc have special text for
-some reason (should be mentioned in the source though).
-
-\erroronpage{774}{2nd snytax box}{hv}{2009/05/8}{2}
-The |\transduration| command takes ``time in seconds'' as mandatory argument
-(and not ``key/vals'')
-
-\erroronpage{779}{para 3, l.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
-``in not shown''\>
-``\u{is} not shown''
-
-\erroronpage{794}{exa 11--4-36}{hv}{2009/05/12}{2}
-Replace ``pic2e'' \> ``pic\u{t}2e'' in output, corresponding input not
-displayed in the book.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Appendix A}
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Appendix B}
-
-\erroronpage{809}{para -1, l.-1}{HjG}{2007/08/17}{2}
- Missing interword space before opening parenthesis:
- ``\dots \texttt{faq}\u{ }(or \dots''
-
-
-Frank: actually there is nothing missing in the source. It is a deficiency of
-the fonts.
-
-\CHAPTER{Appendix C}
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Bibliography}
-
-\erroronpage{822}{entry [32]}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2}
-Use capital C in ``Lecture Notes in computer Science''
-
-\erroronpage{823}{entry [35]}{JPFD}{2007/09/05}{2}
- The author name ``Eitan M. Gurai'' should be ``Eitan M. Gurari''.
-
-\erroronpage{824}{entry [47]}{GTa}{2010/02/10}{}
- An updated version of the manual can be downloaded from
- \url{https://www.tug.org/docs/metapost/mpman.pdf}
-
-\erroronpage{825}{entry [50]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2}
-Use capital C in ``Lecture Notes in computer Science''
-
-\erroronpage{826}{entry [59]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2}
- Add web url: \url{http://archiv.dante.de/DTK/PDF/komoedie_2002_1.pdf}
-
-\erroronpage{826}{entry [60]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2}
- Add web url: \url{http://archiv.dante.de/DTK/PDF/komoedie_2002_2.pdf}
-
- \erroronpage{828}{entry [60]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2}
- Add web url: ``Sample chapter
- at: \url{https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/}''
-
- \erroronpage{829/830}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2}
- Page breaks changed due to other changes
-
-\erroronpage{833}{entry [128]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2}
- Url changed to: \url{obsolete/graphics/pstricks/doc/code/pst-code.pdf}
-
-
-\erroronpage{833}{entry [129]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2}
- Url changed to: \url{macros/generic/multido/}
-
-
-\erroronpage{833}{entry [135]}{ADo}{2008/01/02}{2}
-An ``s'' is missing in ``using'' (end of the first line of comment)
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Index}
-
- \erroronpage{856/860/866}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2}
- changed index entries due to changes above
-
-\erroronpage{886}{col.2, l.-7}{GTa}{2010/02/10}{}
- image(METAPOST) should also reference example on p.145
-
- \erroronpage{891}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2}
- changed index entries due to changes above
-
- \erroronpage{910/911}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2}
- changed index entries due to changes above
-
- \erroronpage{925}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2}
- changed index entries due to changes above
-
-\end{erratalist}
-
-
-\setcounter{collectmore}{3}
-
-\begin{multicols}{3}[Thanks to all who have found errors or
- omissions. Listed are the people who found an errata entry first.]
-\contributor{ADo}{Alain Dondelinger}
-\contributor{FMi}{Frank Mittelbach}
-\contributor{GTa}{Gr\'egoire Taviot}
-\contributor{HjG}{Hubert G\"a\ss lein}
-\contributor{JPFD}{Jean-Pierre Drucbert}
-\contributor{JMi}{John Middlekauff}
-\contributor{MSh}{Michael Sharpe}
-\contributor{MiV}{Milan Vujtek}
-\contributor{RSh}{Richard Shepard}
-\contributor{hv}{Herbert Vo\ss}
-\contributor{yhj}{You Hyun Jo}
-\end{multicols}
-
-
-Other people have sent us corrections for errors already found.
-Thanks to all of you!
-
-If you find
-further
-errors please report them to one of the authors, e.g.,
-\begin{quote}\ttfamily
- frank.mittelbach at latex-project.org
-\end{quote}
-preferably in a form usable directly in this file, i.e.,
-\begin{flushleft}
-|\erroronpage{|\textit{page-number}|}{|\textit{line-identification}|}{|%
- \textit{your-initials}|}{|\textit{date}|}{}| \\
- \hspace*{2em}\textit{description of the the erratum}
-\end{flushleft}
-Here is an example:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\erroronpage{5}{para 3, l.1}{MOs}{2007/07/01}{}
- ``LaTeX'' should be typeset ``\LaTeX''.
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\end{document}
-
-
-> > In addition, with regards to content of Section 8.1 it would be nice
-> > to use Roman ``d'' in integrands in examples 3-2-3, 3-5-83, 3-5-84,
-> > 5-12-21, 6-5-6 and 6-5-11.
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lgc2.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.tex 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,511 +0,0 @@
-%
-% Copyright 1999 2002-2011 LaTeX3 Project
-% Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this
-% license document, but modification of it is not allowed.
-%
-%
-% If you wish to load it as part of a ``doc'' source, you have to
-% ensure that a) % is a comment character and b) that short verb
-% characters are being turned off, i.e.,
-%
-% \DeleteShortVerb{\'} % or whatever was made a shorthand
-% \MakePercentComment
-% \input{lppl}
-% \MakePercentIgnore
-% \MakeShortVerb{\'} % turn it on again if necessary
-%
-%
-% By default the license is produced with \section* as the highest
-% heading level. If this is not appropriate for the document in which
-% it is included define the commands listed below before loading this
-% document, e.g., for inclusion as a separate chapter define:
-%
-% \providecommand{\LPPLsection}{\chapter*}
-% \providecommand{\LPPLsubsection}{\section*}
-% \providecommand{\LPPLsubsubsection}{\subsection*}
-% \providecommand{\LPPLparagraph}{\subsubsection*}
-%
-%
-% To allow cross-referencing the headings \label's have been attached
-% to them, all starting with ``LPPL:''. As by default headings without
-% numbers are produced, this will only allow page references.
-% However, you can use the titleref package to produce textual
-% references or you change the definitions of \LPPLsection, and
-% friends to generated numbered headings.
-%
-%
-% We want it to be possible that this file can be processed by
-% (pdf)LaTeX on its own, or that this file can be included in another
-% LaTeX document without any modification whatsoever.
-% Hence the little test below.
-%
-%
-\makeatletter
-\ifx\@preamblecmds\@notprerr
- % In this case the preamble has already been processed so this file
- % is loaded as part of another document; just enclose everything in
- % a group
- \let\LPPLicense\bgroup
- \let\endLPPLicense\egroup
-\else
- % In this case the preamble has not been processed yet so this file
- % is processed by itself.
- \documentclass{article}
- \let\LPPLicense\document
- \let\endLPPLicense\enddocument
-\fi
-\makeatother
-
-
-\begin{LPPLicense}
- \providecommand{\LPPLsection}{\section*}
- \providecommand{\LPPLsubsection}{\subsection*}
- \providecommand{\LPPLsubsubsection}{\subsubsection*}
- \providecommand{\LPPLparagraph}{\paragraph*}
- \providecommand*{\LPPLfile}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
- \providecommand*{\LPPLdocfile}[1]{`\LPPLfile{#1.tex}'}
- \providecommand*{\LPPL}{\textsc{lppl}}
-
- \LPPLsection{The \LaTeX\ Project Public License}
- \label{LPPL:LPPL}
-
- \emph{LPPL Version 1.3c 2008-05-04}
-
- \textbf{Copyright 1999, 2002--2008 \LaTeX3 Project}
- \begin{quotation}
- Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this
- license document, but modification of it is not allowed.
- \end{quotation}
-
- \LPPLsubsection{Preamble}
- \label{LPPL:Preamble}
-
- The \LaTeX\ Project Public License (\LPPL) is the primary license
- under which the \LaTeX\ kernel and the base \LaTeX\ packages are
- distributed.
-
- You may use this license for any work of which you hold the
- copyright and which you wish to distribute. This license may be
- particularly suitable if your work is \TeX-related (such as a
- \LaTeX\ package), but it is written in such a way that you can use
- it even if your work is unrelated to \TeX.
-
- The section `WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS
- LICENSE', below, gives instructions, examples, and recommendations
- for authors who are considering distributing their works under this
- license.
-
- This license gives conditions under which a work may be distributed
- and modified, as well as conditions under which modified versions of
- that work may be distributed.
-
- We, the \LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you
- the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of your work
- that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while
- maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of that
- work. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while meeting
- these conditions, then read the document \LPPLdocfile{cfgguide} and
- \LPPLdocfile{modguide} in the base \LaTeX\ distribution for suggestions.
-
-
- \LPPLsubsection{Definitions}
- \label{LPPL:Definitions}
-
- In this license document the following terms are used:
-
- \begin{description}
- \item[Work] Any work being distributed under this License.
-
- \item[Derived Work] Any work that under any applicable law is
- derived from the Work.
-
- \item[Modification] Any procedure that produces a Derived Work under
- any applicable law -- for example, the production of a file
- containing an original file associated with the Work or a
- significant portion of such a file, either verbatim or with
- modifications and/or translated into another language.
-
- \item[Modify] To apply any procedure that produces a Derived Work
- under any applicable law.
-
- \item[Distribution] Making copies of the Work available from one
- person to another, in whole or in part. Distribution includes
- (but is not limited to) making any electronic components of the
- Work accessible by file transfer protocols such as \textsc{ftp} or
- \textsc{http} or by shared file systems such as Sun's Network File
- System (\textsc{nfs}).
-
- \item[Compiled Work] A version of the Work that has been processed
- into a form where it is directly usable on a computer system.
- This processing may include using installation facilities provided
- by the Work, transformations of the Work, copying of components of
- the Work, or other activities. Note that modification of any
- installation facilities provided by the Work constitutes
- modification of the Work.
-
- \item[Current Maintainer] A person or persons nominated as such
- within the Work. If there is no such explicit nomination then it
- is the `Copyright Holder' under any applicable law.
-
- \item[Base Interpreter] A program or process that is normally needed
- for running or interpreting a part or the whole of the Work.
-
- A Base Interpreter may depend on external components but these are
- not considered part of the Base Interpreter provided that each
- external component clearly identifies itself whenever it is used
- interactively. Unless explicitly specified when applying the
- license to the Work, the only applicable Base Interpreter is a
- `\LaTeX-Format' or in the case of files belonging to the
- `\LaTeX-format' a program implementing the `\TeX{} language'.
- \end{description}
-
- \LPPLsubsection{Conditions on Distribution and Modification}
- \label{LPPL:Conditions}
-
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item Activities other than distribution and/or modification of the
- Work are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope.
- In particular, the act of running the Work is not restricted and
- no requirements are made concerning any offers of support for the
- Work.
-
- \item\label{LPPL:item:distribute} You may distribute a complete, unmodified
- copy of the Work as you received it. Distribution of only part of
- the Work is considered modification of the Work, and no right to
- distribute such a Derived Work may be assumed under the terms of
- this clause.
-
- \item You may distribute a Compiled Work that has been generated
- from a complete, unmodified copy of the Work as distributed under
- Clause~\ref{LPPL:item:distribute} above, as long as that Compiled Work is
- distributed in such a way that the recipients may install the
- Compiled Work on their system exactly as it would have been
- installed if they generated a Compiled Work directly from the
- Work.
-
- \item\label{LPPL:item:currmaint} If you are the Current Maintainer of the
- Work, you may, without restriction, modify the Work, thus creating
- a Derived Work. You may also distribute the Derived Work without
- restriction, including Compiled Works generated from the Derived
- Work. Derived Works distributed in this manner by the Current
- Maintainer are considered to be updated versions of the Work.
-
- \item If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may
- modify your copy of the Work, thus creating a Derived Work based
- on the Work, and compile this Derived Work, thus creating a
- Compiled Work based on the Derived Work.
-
- \item\label{LPPL:item:conditions} If you are not the Current Maintainer
- of the
- Work, you may distribute a Derived Work provided the following
- conditions are met for every component of the Work unless that
- component clearly states in the copyright notice that it is exempt
- from that condition. Only the Current Maintainer is allowed to
- add such statements of exemption to a component of the Work.
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item If a component of this Derived Work can be a direct
- replacement for a component of the Work when that component is
- used with the Base Interpreter, then, wherever this component of
- the Work identifies itself to the user when used interactively
- with that Base Interpreter, the replacement component of this
- Derived Work clearly and unambiguously identifies itself as a
- modified version of this component to the user when used
- interactively with that Base Interpreter.
-
- \item\label{LPPL:item:changelog} Every component of the Derived Work
- contains prominent
- notices detailing the nature of the changes to that component,
- or a prominent reference to another file that is distributed as
- part of the Derived Work and that contains a complete and
- accurate log of the changes.
-
- \item No information in the Derived Work implies that any persons,
- including (but not limited to) the authors of the original
- version of the Work, provide any support, including (but not
- limited to) the reporting and handling of errors, to recipients
- of the Derived Work unless those persons have stated explicitly
- that they do provide such support for the Derived Work.
-
- \item\label{LPPL:item:unmodifiedcopy} You distribute at least one of
- the following with the Derived Work:
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item A complete, unmodified copy of the Work; if your
- distribution of a modified component is made by offering
- access to copy the modified component from a designated place,
- then offering equivalent access to copy the Work from the same
- or some similar place meets this condition, even though third
- parties are not compelled to copy the Work along with the
- modified component;
-
- \item Information that is sufficient to obtain a complete,
- unmodified copy of the Work.
- \end{enumerate}
- \end{enumerate}
- \item If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may
- distribute a Compiled Work generated from a Derived Work, as long
- as the Derived Work is distributed to all recipients of the
- Compiled Work, and as long as the conditions of
- Clause~\ref{LPPL:item:conditions}, above, are met with regard to the
- Derived Work.
-
- \item The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence
- do not apply to, the modification, by any method, of any component
- so that it becomes identical to an updated version of that
- component of the Work as it is distributed by the Current
- Maintainer under Clause~\ref{LPPL:item:currmaint}, above.
-
- \item Distribution of the Work or any Derived Work in an alternative
- format, where the Work or that Derived Work (in whole or in part)
- is then produced by applying some process to that format, does not
- relax or nullify any sections of this license as they pertain to
- the results of applying that process.
-
- \item
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item A Derived Work may be distributed under a different license
- provided that license itself honors the conditions listed in
- Clause~\ref{LPPL:item:conditions} above, in regard to the Work, though it
- does not have to honor the rest of the conditions in this
- license.
-
- \item If a Derived Work is distributed under a different license,
- that Derived Work must provide sufficient documentation as part
- of itself to allow each recipient of that Derived Work to honor
- the restrictions in Clause~\ref{LPPL:item:conditions} above, concerning
- changes from the Work.
- \end{enumerate}
- \item This license places no restrictions on works that are
- unrelated to the Work, nor does this license place any
- restrictions on aggregating such works with the Work by any means.
-
- \item Nothing in this license is intended to, or may be used to,
- prevent complete compliance by all parties with all applicable
- laws.
- \end{enumerate}
-
- \LPPLsubsection{No Warranty}
- \label{LPPL:Warranty}
-
- There is no warranty for the Work. Except when otherwise stated in
- writing, the Copyright Holder provides the Work `as is', without
- warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but
- not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and
- fitness for a particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality
- and performance of the Work is with you. Should the Work prove
- defective, you assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair,
- or correction.
-
- In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
- writing will The Copyright Holder, or any author named in the
- components of the Work, or any other party who may distribute and/or
- modify the Work as permitted above, be liable to you for damages,
- including any general, special, incidental or consequential damages
- arising out of any use of the Work or out of inability to use the
- Work (including, but not limited to, loss of data, data being
- rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by anyone as a result of
- any failure of the Work to operate with any other programs), even if
- the Copyright Holder or said author or said other party has been
- advised of the possibility of such damages.
-
- \LPPLsubsection{Maintenance of The Work}
- \label{LPPL:Maintenance}
-
- The Work has the status `author-maintained' if the Copyright Holder
- explicitly and prominently states near the primary copyright notice
- in the Work that the Work can only be maintained by the Copyright
- Holder or simply that it is `author-maintained'.
-
- The Work has the status `maintained' if there is a Current
- Maintainer who has indicated in the Work that they are willing to
- receive error reports for the Work (for example, by supplying a
- valid e-mail address). It is not required for the Current Maintainer
- to acknowledge or act upon these error reports.
-
- The Work changes from status `maintained' to `unmaintained' if there
- is no Current Maintainer, or the person stated to be Current
- Maintainer of the work cannot be reached through the indicated means
- of communication for a period of six months, and there are no other
- significant signs of active maintenance.
-
- You can become the Current Maintainer of the Work by agreement with
- any existing Current Maintainer to take over this role.
-
- If the Work is unmaintained, you can become the Current Maintainer
- of the Work through the following steps:
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item Make a reasonable attempt to trace the Current Maintainer (and
- the Copyright Holder, if the two differ) through the means of an
- Internet or similar search.
- \item If this search is successful, then enquire whether the Work is
- still maintained.
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item If it is being maintained, then ask the Current Maintainer
- to update their communication data within one month.
-
- \item\label{LPPL:item:intention} If the search is unsuccessful or
- no action to resume active maintenance is taken by the Current
- Maintainer, then announce within the pertinent community your
- intention to take over maintenance. (If the Work is a \LaTeX{}
- work, this could be done, for example, by posting to
- \texttt{comp.text.tex}.)
- \end{enumerate}
- \item {}
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item If the Current Maintainer is reachable and agrees to pass
- maintenance of the Work to you, then this takes effect
- immediately upon announcement.
-
- \item\label{LPPL:item:announce} If the Current Maintainer is not
- reachable and the Copyright Holder agrees that maintenance of
- the Work be passed to you, then this takes effect immediately
- upon announcement.
- \end{enumerate}
- \item\label{LPPL:item:change} If you make an `intention
- announcement' as described in~\ref{LPPL:item:intention} above and
- after three months your intention is challenged neither by the
- Current Maintainer nor by the Copyright Holder nor by other
- people, then you may arrange for the Work to be changed so as to
- name you as the (new) Current Maintainer.
-
- \item If the previously unreachable Current Maintainer becomes
- reachable once more within three months of a change completed
- under the terms of~\ref{LPPL:item:announce}
- or~\ref{LPPL:item:change}, then that Current Maintainer must
- become or remain the Current Maintainer upon request provided they
- then update their communication data within one month.
- \end{enumerate}
- A change in the Current Maintainer does not, of itself, alter the
- fact that the Work is distributed under the \LPPL\ license.
-
- If you become the Current Maintainer of the Work, you should
- immediately provide, within the Work, a prominent and unambiguous
- statement of your status as Current Maintainer. You should also
- announce your new status to the same pertinent community as
- in~\ref{LPPL:item:intention} above.
-
- \LPPLsubsection{Whether and How to Distribute Works under This License}
- \label{LPPL:Distribute}
-
- This section contains important instructions, examples, and
- recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their
- works under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in
- this section.
-
- \LPPLsubsubsection{Choosing This License or Another License}
- \label{LPPL:Choosing}
-
- If for any part of your work you want or need to use
- \emph{distribution} conditions that differ significantly from those
- in this license, then do not refer to this license anywhere in your
- work but, instead, distribute your work under a different license.
- You may use the text of this license as a model for your own
- license, but your license should not refer to the \LPPL\ or
- otherwise give the impression that your work is distributed under
- the \LPPL.
-
- The document \LPPLdocfile{modguide} in the base \LaTeX\ distribution
- explains the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It
- explains, for example, why distributing \LaTeX\ under the
- \textsc{gnu} General Public License (\textsc{gpl}) was considered
- inappropriate. Even if your work is unrelated to \LaTeX, the
- discussion in \LPPLdocfile{modguide} may still be relevant, and authors
- intending to distribute their works under any license are encouraged
- to read it.
-
- \LPPLsubsubsection{A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution}
- \label{LPPL:WithoutDistribution}
-
- It is wise never to modify a component of the Work, even for your
- own personal use, without also meeting the above conditions for
- distributing the modified component. While you might intend that
- such modifications will never be distributed, often this will happen
- by accident -- you may forget that you have modified that component;
- or it may not occur to you when allowing others to access the
- modified version that you are thus distributing it and violating the
- conditions of this license in ways that could have legal
- implications and, worse, cause problems for the community. It is
- therefore usually in your best interest to keep your copy of the
- Work identical with the public one. Many works provide ways to
- control the behavior of that work without altering any of its
- licensed components.
-
- \LPPLsubsubsection{How to Use This License}
- \label{LPPL:HowTo}
-
- To use this license, place in each of the components of your work
- both an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year
- the work was authored and/or last substantially modified. Include
- also a statement that the distribution and/or modification of that
- component is constrained by the conditions in this license.
-
- Here is an example of such a notice and statement:
-\begin{verbatim}
- %% pig.dtx
- %% Copyright 2005 M. Y. Name
- %
- % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
- % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
- % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
- % The latest version of this license is in
- % https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
- % and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
- % version 2005/12/01 or later.
- %
- % This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
- %
- % The Current Maintainer of this work is M. Y. Name.
- %
- % This work consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins
- % and the derived file pig.sty.
-\end{verbatim}
-
- Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions given in
- this license document would apply, with the `Work' referring to the
- three files `\LPPLfile{pig.dtx}', `\LPPLfile{pig.ins}', and
- `\LPPLfile{pig.sty}' (the last being generated from
- `\LPPLfile{pig.dtx}' using `\LPPLfile{pig.ins}'), the `Base
- Interpreter' referring to any `\LaTeX-Format', and both `Copyright
- Holder' and `Current Maintainer' referring to the person `M. Y.
- Name'.
-
- If you do not want the Maintenance section of \LPPL\ to apply to
- your Work, change `maintained' above into `author-maintained'.
- However, we recommend that you use `maintained' as the Maintenance
- section was added in order to ensure that your Work remains useful
- to the community even when you can no longer maintain and support it
- yourself.
-
- \LPPLsubsubsection{Derived Works That Are Not Replacements}
- \label{LPPL:NotReplacements}
-
- Several clauses of the \LPPL\ specify means to provide reliability
- and stability for the user community. They therefore concern
- themselves with the case that a Derived Work is intended to be used
- as a (compatible or incompatible) replacement of the original
- Work. If this is not the case (e.g., if a few lines of code are
- reused for a completely different task), then clauses
- \ref{LPPL:item:changelog} and \ref{LPPL:item:unmodifiedcopy}
- shall not apply.
-
- \LPPLsubsubsection{Important Recommendations}
- \label{LPPL:Recommendations}
-
- \LPPLparagraph{Defining What Constitutes the Work}
-
- The \LPPL\ requires that distributions of the Work contain all the
- files of the Work. It is therefore important that you provide a way
- for the licensee to determine which files constitute the Work. This
- could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the files
- of the Work near the copyright notice of each file or by using a
- line such as:
-\begin{verbatim}
- % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
-\end{verbatim}
- in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be
- impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you
- to comprise the Work and, in such a case, the licensee would be
- entitled to make reasonable conjectures as to which files comprise
- the Work.
-
-\end{LPPLicense}
-\endinput
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltluatex.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews.tex 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
% Copyright 2006, 2009, 2011, 2014 Heiko Oberdiek
-% Copyright 2014-2018 The LaTeX3 Project
+% Copyright (C) 2014-2019 The LaTeX3 Project
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
% -------------------------------------------
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
% The latest version of this license is in
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% version 2008 or later.
%
% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
@@ -74,8 +74,9 @@
\RequirePackage{url,csquotes}
-\expandafter
-\DeclareRobustCommand\expandafter*\expandafter\small\expandafter{\small}
+% \small already robust so better not ...
+%\expandafter
+%\DeclareRobustCommand\expandafter*\expandafter\small\expandafter{\small}
\RequirePackage{hyperref}
\hypersetup{colorlinks}
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews01.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews01.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews01.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews01.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews01.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews01.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews01.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews01.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews01.tex
+
+% This is issue 1 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [type1fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1994}
+\publicationissue{1}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews}
+
+An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of
+\LaTeX. It will tell you about important events, such as major bug
+fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news.
+
+\section{\LaTeXe---the new \LaTeX{} release}
+
+The most important news is the release of \LaTeXe, the new version of
+the \LaTeX{} software. This version has better support for fonts,
+graphics and colour, and will be actively maintained by the \LaTeX3
+project team. Upgrades will be issued every six months, in June and
+December.
+
+\section{Why a new \LaTeX?}
+
+Over the years many extensions have been developed for \LaTeX. This
+is, of course, a sure sign of its continuing popularity but it has had
+one unfortunate result: incompatible \LaTeX{} formats came into use at
+different sites. Thus, to process documents from various places, a
+site maintainer was forced to keep \LaTeX{} (with and without \NFSS),
+\SLiTeX, \AmSLaTeX, and so on. In addition, when looking at a source
+file it was not always clear for which format the document was written.
+
+To put an end to this unsatisfactory
+situation a new release of \LaTeX{} was produced.
+It brings all such extensions back under a single format and thus
+prevents the proliferation of mutually incompatible dialects of
+\LaTeX~2.09. The new release was available for several months as a
+test version, and the final release of 1~June officially
+replaces the old version.
+
+\section{Processing documents with \LaTeXe}
+
+Documents written for \LaTeX~2.09 will
+still be read by \LaTeXe. Any such document is run in
+\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}.
+
+Unfortunately, compatibility mode comes with a price: it can run
+up to 50\% slower than \LaTeX~2.09 did. If you want to run your document
+in the faster \emph{native mode}, you should try replacing the line:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentstyle[<options>,<packages>]{<class>}
+\end{verbatim}
+with:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \documentclass[<options>]{<class>}
+ \usepackage{latexsym,<packages>}
+\end{verbatim}
+Unfortunately, this will not always work, because some \LaTeX~2.09
+packages will only work in \LaTeXe{} compatibility mode. You should find
+out if there is a \LaTeXe{} version of the package available.
+
+\LaTeXe{} native mode also gives access to the new features of \LaTeXe,
+described in \emph{\LaTeXe{} for authors}.
+
+\section{New packages}
+
+\LaTeXe{} has much better support for graphics, colour, fonts, and
+multi-lingual typesetting. The following software should be available
+from the distributor who brought you \LaTeXe:
+
+\begin{citations}
+\item[babel] for typesetting in many languages.
+\item[color] for colour support.
+\item[graphics] for including images.
+\item[mfnfss] for using bitmap fonts.
+\item[psnfss] for using Type~1 fonts.
+\item[tools] other packages by the \LaTeX3 team.
+\end{citations}
+The packages come with full documentation, and are also described in
+\emph{\LaTeX: A Document Processing System} or
+\emph{The \LaTeX{} Companion}.
+
+\section{Further information}
+
+More information about \LaTeXe{} is to be found in:
+
+\begin{citations}
+\item[\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System]
+ Leslie Lamport, \AW, 2nd ed, 1994.
+\item[The \LaTeX{} Companion]
+ Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin, \AW, 1994.
+\end{citations}
+The \LaTeX{} distribution comes with documentation on the new features of
+\LaTeX:
+
+\begin{citations}
+\item[\LaTeXe{} for authors]
+ describes the new features of \LaTeX{} documents,
+ in the file \verb|usrguide.tex|.
+\item[\LaTeXe{} for class and package writers]
+ describes the new features of \LaTeX{} classes and packages,
+ in the file \verb|clsguide.tex|.
+\item[\LaTeXe{} font selection]
+ describes the new features of \LaTeX{} fonts for
+ class and package writers,
+ in the file \verb|fntguide.tex|.
+\end{citations}
+For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local
+\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group,
+P.~O.~Box~869, Santa~Barbara, CA~93102-0869, USA, Fax:~+1~805~963~8358,
+EMail:~tug at tug.org.
+
+\end{document}
+
+
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews01.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews02.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews02.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews02.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews02.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews02.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews02.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews02.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews02.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews02.tex
+
+% This is issue 2 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1994}
+\publicationissue{2}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~2}
+
+An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of
+\LaTeX. It will tell you about important events, such as major bug
+fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news.
+
+\section{December 1994 release of \LaTeX}
+
+December 1994 sees the second release of \LaTeXe. We are on schedule
+to deliver a release of \LaTeX{} every six months, in December and
+June.
+
+This release has seen quite a lot of activity, which is not too
+surprising as it's only been a year since the first test release of
+\LaTeXe. We don't expect so much activity in the next six months.
+
+Many of the changes are minor improvements and bug-fixes---see
+\emph{\LaTeXe{} for authors} (\verb|usrguide.tex|), \emph{\LaTeXe{}
+font selection} (\verb|fntguide.tex|) and our change log
+(\verb|changes.txt|) for more details.
+
+However, there are two important new packages available for \LaTeX:
+\texttt{inputenc} and AMS-\LaTeX.
+
+\section{Accented input}
+
+One of the problems with writing non-English documents in \LaTeX{} is
+the accent commands. Reading documents containing text like
+\verb|na\"\i ve| is frustrating, especially if your keyboard allows
+you to type \texttt{na\"\i ve}.
+
+In the past, \LaTeX{} has not supported input containing accented
+characters such as \texttt{\"\i}, because Windows, Macintosh and Unix
+all have different ways of dealing with accented input, called
+\emph{input encodings}.
+
+However, the \verb|inputenc| package allows you to specify which input
+encoding your document is written with, for example to use the ISO
+Latin-1 encoding, you type:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\end{verbatim}
+At the moment, \verb|inputenc| supports the \verb|ascii| and
+\verb|latin1| input encodings, but more will be added with future
+releases.
+
+The \verb|inputenc| package is
+currently a test release. The user interface for the full release will
+be upwardly compatible with the test version.
+
+\section{AMS-\LaTeX{}}
+
+ AMS-\LaTeX{} is a set of miscellaneous extensions for \LaTeX{}
+ distributed by the American Mathematical Society. They provide superior
+ information structure and superior printed output for mathematical
+ documents.
+
+ There are far too many features of AMS-\LaTeX{} to list here.
+ AMS-\LaTeX{} is described in the accompanying documentation,
+ and in \emph{The \LaTeX{} Companion}.
+
+ Version 1.2beta of AMS-\LaTeX{} was released for testing by intrepid
+ users in October 1994. The full release of AMS-\LaTeX{}~1.2 is expected
+ in early January 1995.
+
+ It will be divided into two bundles:
+ \begin{itemize}
+
+ \item the \verb|amsfonts| packages, which give access to
+ hundreds of new mathematical symbols, and new math fonts
+ such as blackboard bold and fraktur.
+
+ \item the \verb|amsmath| packages, which provide finer control over
+ mathematical typesetting, such as multi-line subscripts,
+ enhanced theorem and proof environments,
+ and improved displayed equations,
+
+ \end{itemize}
+ For compatibility with older documents, an \verb|amstex| package will be
+ provided.
+
+\section{\LaTeX{} on the internet}
+
+\LaTeX{} has its own home page on the World Wide Web, with the URL:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ http://www.tex.ac.uk/CTAN/latex/
+\end{verbatim}
+This page describes \LaTeX{} and the \LaTeX3 project, and contains
+pointers to other \LaTeX{} resources, such as the user guides, the
+\TeX{} Frequently Asked Questions, and the \LaTeX{} bugs database.
+
+The electronic home of anything \TeX-related is the Comprehensive
+\TeX{} Archive Network (CTAN). This is a network of cooperating ftp
+sites, with over a gigabyte of \TeX{} material:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/
+ ftp://ftp.shsu.edu/tex-archive/
+ ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/
+\end{verbatim}
+For more information, see the \LaTeX{} home page.
+
+\section{Further information}
+
+For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local
+\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group,
+P.~O.~Box~869, Santa~Barbara, CA~93102-0869, USA, Fax:~+1~805~963~8358,
+EMail:~tug at tug.org.
+
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews02.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews03.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews03.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews03.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews03.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews03.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews03.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews03.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews03.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews03.tex
+
+% This is issue 3 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1995}
+\publicationissue{3}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~3}
+
+An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of
+\LaTeX. It will tell you about important events, such as major bug
+fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news.
+
+\section{June 1995 release of \LaTeX}
+
+June 1995 sees the third release of \LaTeXe. We are on schedule
+to deliver a release of \LaTeX{} every six months, in December and
+June.
+
+In the last \emph{\LaTeXNews}, we said ``we don't expect so much
+activity in the next six months,'' which has turned out not to be
+true!
+
+\section{Additional input encodings}
+
+In the last release of \LaTeX{} we distributed a test version of the
+\texttt{inputenc} package which allows the use of input characters
+other than just a--z and A--Z. The package has proved to be robust,
+so we are now distributing an expanded version.
+The new release comes with a number of input encodings:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \texttt{ascii} the standard encoding,
+\item \texttt{latin1} the ISO Western European alphabet,
+\item \texttt{latin2} the ISO Eastern European alphabet,
+\item \texttt{cp437} the IBM codepage 437,
+\item \texttt{cp850} the IBM codepage 850, and
+\item \texttt{applemac} the Apple Macintosh encoding.
+\end{itemize}
+These can be used by specifying an option to the \texttt{inputenc}
+package, for example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\end{verbatim}
+The new input encodings are currently being tested, but we don't
+expect any major changes.
+
+\section{\LaTeX\ getting smaller}
+
+In the past releases of \LaTeXe, the amount of memory \LaTeX{}
+requires has increased, but we are pleased to say that this trend has
+been reversed. We hope that future releases of \LaTeX{} will continue
+to get smaller.
+
+For example, on this document, the December 1994 release used 52,622
+words of memory, and the June 1995 release uses 51,216 words of
+memory, which is a 2.7\% reduction.
+
+We are currently experimenting with other ways of reducing the size of
+\LaTeX. For example, we are experimenting with an option to remove
+the \texttt{picture} and \texttt{tabbing} environments from the
+\LaTeX{} kernel, and to load them from a file the first time they are
+used. This should help \LaTeX{} to run on machines with limited
+memory. See \texttt{autoload.txt} for details.
+
+\section{Distribution and modification}
+
+One topic of discussion that has kept us busy is the distribution and
+modification conditions of \LaTeX. We are committed to keeping
+\LaTeX{} as free reliable software, and ensuring that (as far as
+possible) \LaTeX{} documents will produce the same results on all
+systems.
+
+The modification conditions are currently under discussion, and we
+would like to hear from anyone interested. Please read
+\texttt{modguide.tex} for more information.
+
+\section{AMS-\LaTeX\ full release}
+
+The AMS-\LaTeX\ packages were still in beta test in the December 1994
+release of \LaTeX, and the full release came out in January 1995.
+
+AMS-\LaTeX\ is described in the \emph{User's Guide}
+(\texttt{amsldoc.tex}) and in \emph{The \LaTeX{} Companion}.
+
+\section{PostScript fonts}
+
+There is a new test release of the PSNFSS packages for accessing
+PostScript fonts in \LaTeXe. This includes an update to all of the
+fonts, to remove many of the underfull and overfull \verb|\hbox|
+warnings, and improve the setting of non-English languages.
+
+The new release of \LaTeX{} removes all of the `hidden' uses of
+Computer Modern mathematics. For example, the footnote markers used
+to use math mode, so always used Computer Modern digits rather than
+ones from the current text font. This has now been fixed.
+
+\section{Further information}
+
+For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local
+\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group,
+P.~O.~Box~869, Santa~Barbara, CA~93102-0869, USA, Fax:~+1~805~963~8358,
+EMail:~tug at tug.org.
+
+The \LaTeX{} home page is \verb|http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/|
+and contains links to other WWW resources for \LaTeX.
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews03.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews04.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews04.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews04.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews04.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews04.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews04.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews04.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews04.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews04.tex
+
+% This is issue 4 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1995}
+\publicationissue{4}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~4}
+
+An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of
+\LaTeX. It will tell you about important events, such as major bug
+fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news.
+This issue accompanies the fourth release of \LaTeXe.
+
+
+\section{\LaTeX\ getting smaller}
+
+The last release in June started a trend of \LaTeX\ becoming
+smaller, we are pleased to announce that this has continued with this
+release. In particular the experimental `autoload' version described in
+\texttt{autoload.txt} is much smaller as more parts of \LaTeX\ are
+autoloaded.
+
+\section{New `concurrent' docstrip}
+
+The time taken to `unpack' this release from the documented sources
+should be much reduced (roughly half the time, depending on
+installation conditions). This is due to an improved version of the
+docstrip program that has been contributed by Marcin Woli\'nski.
+This can write up to 16 files at once. The
+previous version could only write one file at a time which meant that
+it was very slow when producing many small files from the same source
+file as the source needed to be re-read for each file written.
+
+\section{New T1 encoded fonts}
+
+This year J\"org Knappen has completed a new release of the `Cork'
+(T1) encoded Computer Modern fonts: the dc fonts release 1.2.
+
+This release of the dc fonts fixes many bugs (including the missing
+\verb|?`| (?`) and \verb|!`| (!`) ligatures) and improves the fonts in
+many other ways. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade as soon as
+possible if currently you are using the old dc fonts, release 1.1 or
+earlier. The new fonts are available from the CTAN archives, in
+\texttt{tex-archive/fonts/dc}.
+
+The names of the font files are \emph{different}. This does not affect
+\LaTeX\ documents but \emph{does} affect the installation procedure as
+it assumes that you have the \emph{new} fonts, and will write suitable
+`fd' files for those fonts. If you have not yet upgraded your dc fonts
+then, after unpacking the distribution, you \emph{must}
+\verb|latex olddc.ins| to produce `fd' files for the old dc fonts.
+This must be done \emph{before} the format is made. Running the test
+document at \texttt{ltxcheck.tex} the end of the installation will
+inform you if the wrong set of `fd' files has been installed.
+
+Note that this change does not affect the standard `OT1' Computer
+Modern fonts that \LaTeX\ uses by default.
+
+\section{More robust commands}
+
+The commands \verb|\cite| and \verb|\sqrt| are now robust.
+
+Although most commands with optional arguments are fragile, as
+documented, such commands defined using the second optional argument
+of \verb|\newcommand| and its derivatives are now \emph{robust}.
+
+\section{New Interface to building `extension' classes}
+
+The mechanism provided by \verb|\DeclareOption|, \verb|\ProcessOptions|
+and \verb|\LoadClass| has proved to be a powerful and expressive means
+of defining one class in terms of another `base' class. However there
+have been some requests to simplify the declaration of the common case
+where you want the `base' class to be called with \emph{all} the
+options that were specified to the extension class. This is now
+provided by the new command \verb|\LoadClassWithOptions|. A similar
+command \verb|\RequirePackageWithOptions| is provided for package use.
+More details of this feature are provided in \texttt{clsguide.tex} and
+\texttt{ltclass.dtx}.
+
+\section{More Input Encodings}
+
+The experimental \texttt{inputenc} package allows a more natural style
+of input of accented and other characters.
+
+Three new input encodings are now supported.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \texttt{ansinew} the Windows ansi encoding,
+ as used in Microsoft Windows 3.x.
+\item \texttt{cp437de} a variant of \texttt{cp437}, which uses \ss\
+ rather than $\beta$ in the appropriate slot.
+\item \texttt{next} the encoding used on Next computers.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Further information}
+
+For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local
+\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group,
+1850 Union Street, \#1637, San Francisco, CA~94123, USA,
+Fax:~+1~415~982~8559,
+EMail:~tug at tug.org.
+The \LaTeX{} home page is \verb|http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/|
+and contains links to other WWW resources for \LaTeX.
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews04.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews05.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews05.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews05.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews05.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews05.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews05.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews05.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews05.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews05.tex
+
+% This is issue 5 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1996}
+\publicationissue{5}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~5}
+This issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} accompanies the fifth release of the
+new standard \LaTeX{}, \LaTeXe.
+
+\section{Extra possibilities for section headings}
+Most \LaTeX\ sectioning commands are defined using
+\verb|\@startsection|.
+For example, the \textsf{article} class defines:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand\section{\@startsection
+ {section}{1}{0pt}{-3.5ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}%
+ {2.3ex plus.2ex}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+The last argument specifies the style in which the section heading is
+to be typeset.
+
+The new feature added at this release is that at the \emph{end} of
+this argument you may specify a command that \emph{takes an argument}.
+This command will be applied to the section number and heading.
+For example, one could use the \verb|\MakeUppercase| command to
+produce uppercase headings. A package or class file could contain:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand\section{\@startsection
+ {section}{1}{0pt}{-3.5ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}%
+ {2.3ex plus.2ex}{\normalfont\Large\MakeUppercase}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+to produce section headings using uppercase medium weight text, rather
+than the bold text used by \textsf{article}. Note that, like the font
+choice, the uppercasing applies only to the actual heading (including
+any automatically generated section number), not to the text as it may
+appear in the running head or table of contents.
+
+\section{The `openany' option in the `book' class}
+The \textsf{openany} option allows chapter and similar openings to
+occur on left hand pages. Previously this option only affected
+\verb|\chapter| and \verb|\backmatter|. It now also affects
+\verb|\part|, \verb|\frontmatter| and \verb|\mainmatter|.
+
+\section{More font (output) encodings}
+The font encoding name \texttt{T3} has been allocated to the encoding
+used in the new 256-character \textsc{IPA} fonts (for the phonetic
+alphabet) produced by Rei Fukui. His package, \textsf{tipa},
+gives access to these fonts and should soon be available. (The
+encoding named \texttt{OT3} is the 128-character encoding used in the
+\textsc{IPA} fonts produced by Washington State University.)
+
+
+
+\section{More input encodings supported}
+The \textsf{inputenc} package now supports the IBM codepage~852 used
+in Eastern Europe, with the option~\texttt{[cp852]} contributed by
+Petr~Sojka.
+
+Also, the \textsf{inputenc} package now activates most `control codes'
+with \textsc{ascii} values below 32.
+Currently none of the encodings in the standard distribution makes use
+of these positions.
+
+\section{Fixes and improvements}
+The \LaTeX\ kernel has only had minor changes, apart from
+\verb|\@startsection| mentioned above.
+However, some small fixes have been incorporated removing the
+following problems:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+ In tabular and array, previous versions of \LaTeX\ `lost' the
+ inter-column space from an `\texttt{l}'-column, when that column
+ was completely empty.
+
+\item
+ Previously, the use of the \verb|\nofiles| command could change
+ the \emph{vertical spacing} in a document.\\ A side effect of fixing
+ this is that when \verb|\nofiles| is used, \verb|\label| puts a
+ blank line in the log file.
+
+\item
+ \LaTeX~often loads fonts `on demand'. Previously, this could
+ happen inside the argument of an accent command and this would
+ cause the accent to appear in the wrong place.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Changes to the `tools' packages}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+ The \textsf{longtable} package now uses a modified algorithm,
+ contributed by David Kastrup, to align the `chunks' of a table.
+ It is now unnecessary to edit the document to add
+ \verb|\setlongtables| before the final run of \LaTeX.
+ In certain cases of overlapping \verb|\multicolumn| entries, the new
+ algorithm will produce better column widths than the old (at the
+ price of extra passes through \LaTeX).
+
+\item
+ The \textsf{dcolumn} package now has the extra possibility of
+ specifying the number of digits both \emph{before} and after the
+ `decimal point'. This makes it easy to centre the column of numbers
+ under a wide heading.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{New copy of the \LaTeX\ bug database}
+\verb|http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/bugs.html| will soon have links
+to a copy of the searchable \LaTeX\ bugs database at Mainz (Germany)
+as well as the original copy at Sussex (England).
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews05.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews06.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews06.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews06.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews06.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews06.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews06.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews06.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews06.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews06.tex
+
+% This is issue 6 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1996}
+\publicationissue{6}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~6}
+This issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} accompanies the sixth release of the
+new standard \LaTeX{}, \LaTeXe.
+
+\section{Mono-case file names}
+Previously \LaTeX\ has used some files with `mixed-case' file names
+such as \texttt{T1cmr.fd} and \texttt{T1enc.def}.
+
+These file names cause problems on some systems (in particular they
+are illegal on the ISO 9660 CDROM format) and so in this release
+all file names have been made lowercase (for example
+\texttt{t1cmr.fd} and \texttt{t1enc.def}).
+
+This change should \emph{not} affect any document. Within \LaTeX,
+encodings still have the usual uppercase names in uses such as
+\verb|\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}| and \verb|\fontencoding{T1}|.
+\LaTeX\ will automatically convert to the lowercase form while
+constructing the file name.
+\LaTeX\ will input the `fd' file under the old name if it fails to
+find the file with the new name, so existing collections of fd files
+should still work with this new release.
+
+The change \emph{does} affect the configuration files that may be used
+to make the \LaTeX\ format with initex. For example, the file
+\texttt{fonttext.ltx} previously specified \verb|\input{T1cmr.fd}|.
+It now has \verb|\input{t1cmr.fd}|.
+If you use a local file \texttt{fonttext.cfg}
+you will need to make similar changes, as \verb|\input{T1cmr.fd}|
+will not work as \texttt{T1cmr.fd} is no longer in the distribution.
+
+The files affected by this change all have names of the form
+\verb|*.fd| or \verb|*enc.def|.
+
+\section{Another input encoding}
+Thanks to work by S\o ren Sandmann, the \textsf{inputenc} package now
+supports the IBM codepage~865 used in Scandinavia.
+
+\section{Better user-defined math display environments}
+Suppose that you want to define an environment for displaying text
+that is numbered as an equation. A straightforward way to do this is
+as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newenvironment{texteqn}
+ {\begin{equation}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}}
+ {\end{minipage}
+ \end{equation}}
+\end{verbatim}
+However, if you have tried this then you will probably have noticed
+that it does not work perfectly when used in the middle of a paragraph
+because an inter-word space appears at the beginning of the first
+line after the environment.
+
+There is now an extra command (with a very long name) available that
+you can use to avoid this problem; it should be inserted as shown here:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newenvironment{texteqn}
+ {\begin{equation}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}}
+ {\end{minipage}
+ \end{equation}
+ \ignorespacesafterend}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Docstrip improvements}
+The \textsf{docstrip} program that is used to unpack the \LaTeX\
+sources has undergone further development. The new version should be
+able to process all old `batchfiles' but it allows a simpler syntax in
+new `batchfiles' (no need to define \verb|\def\batchfile{|\ldots).
+
+It also allows `target' directories to be specified when writing
+files. This directory support is disabled by default unless activated
+in a local \texttt{docstrip.cfg} configuration file.
+See \texttt{docstrip.dtx} for details.
+
+\section{AMS \LaTeX\ update}
+Since the last \LaTeX\ release in June, the American Mathematical
+Society have re-issued the `AMS\LaTeX' classes and packages, fixing
+several reported problems.
+
+\section{Graphics package update}
+The \LaTeX\ color and graphics packages have been updated slightly,
+principally to support more dvi drivers, see the readme file in the
+\textsf{graphics} distribution.
+
+\section{EC Fonts released}
+The first release of the Extended Computer Modern fonts has just been
+made. (In January 1997.)
+
+This release of \LaTeX\ does \emph{not} default to these `ec' fonts
+as its T1 encoded fonts. By default it will
+use the `dc' fonts if the T1 encoding is requested.
+
+As noted in \texttt{install.txt} you may run \TeX\ on the install file
+\texttt{ec.ins} \emph{after} unpacking the base distribution but
+\emph{before} making the \LaTeX\ format. This will produce
+suitable `fd' files making \LaTeX\ (including, for the first time, the
+\textsf{slides} class) use the `ec' fonts as the default T1 encoded
+font set.
+
+
+\end{document}
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews06.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews07.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews07.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews07.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews07.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews07.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews07.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews07.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews07.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews07.tex
+
+% This is issue 7 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1997}
+\publicationissue{7}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{T1 encoded Computer Modern fonts}
+As in the last release the base \LaTeX\ distribution contains
+three different sets of `fd' files for T1 encoded fonts.
+
+In this release the default installation uses \texttt{ec.ins}
+and so installs files suitable for the current `EC fonts'
+distribution. If you have still not updated to the EC fonts and
+are using the earlier test versions, known as DC then you should
+unpack \texttt{newdc.ins} (for DC release 1.2 or later) or
+\texttt{olddc.ins} (for the original releases of the DC fonts).
+This should be done after unpacking \texttt{unpack.ins} but
+before making the format by running ini\TeX{} on \texttt{latex.ltx}.
+There are further details in \texttt{install.txt}.
+
+
+\section{T1 encoded Concrete fonts}
+The Metafont sources for T1 encoded `Concrete' fonts have been
+removed from the \textsf{mfnss} distribution as they were based
+on the now obsolete DC fonts release 1.1. Similarly the
+\textsf{cmextra.ins} install file in the \textsf{base} distribution no
+longer generates fd files for the `Concrete' fonts.
+To use these fonts in either T1 or OT1 encoding it is
+recommended that you obtain Walter Schmidt's \textsf{ccfonts} package
+and fonts from CTAN \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/supported/ccfonts}.
+
+
+\section{Further input encodings}
+Two more \textsf{inputenc} packages have been added: for latin5,
+thanks to H. Turgut Uyar; and for latin3, thanks to J\"org Knappen.
+
+
+\section{Normalising spacing after punctuation}
+The command \verb|\normalsfcodes| was introduced at the last patch
+release. This is normally given the correct definition automatically
+and so need not be explicitly set. It is used to correct a problem,
+reported by Donald Arseneau, that punctuation in page headers has
+always (in all known \TeX\ formats) been potentially incorrect if the
+page break happens while a local setting of the space codes (for
+instance by the command \verb|\frenchspacing|) is in effect. A common
+example of this happening in \LaTeX\ is in the \textsf{verbatim}
+environment.
+
+
+\section{Accessing Bold Math Symbols}
+The \textsf{tools} distribution contains a new package, \textsf{bm},
+which defines a command \verb|\bm| that allows individual bold symbols
+to be accessed within a math expression (in contrast to
+\verb|\boldmath| which makes whole math expressions default to bold
+fonts). It is more general than the existing \textsf{amsbsy} package;
+however, to ease the translation of documents between these two
+packages, \textsf{bm} makes \verb|\boldsymbol| an alias for
+\verb|\bm|.
+
+This package was previously made available from the `contrib' area of
+the CTAN archives, and as part of Y\&Y's \LaTeX\ support for the
+MathTime fonts.
+
+
+\section{Policy on standard classes}
+
+Many of the problem reports we receive concerning the standard classes
+are not concerned with bugs but are suggesting, more or less politely,
+that the design decisions embodied in them are `not optimal' and
+asking us to modify them.
+
+There are several reasons why we have decided not to make such changes
+to these files.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+ However misguided, the current behaviour is clearly what was
+ intended when these classes were designed.
+\item
+ It is not good practice to change such aspects of `standard classes'
+ because many people will be relying on them.
+\end{itemize}
+
+We have therefore decided not to even consider making such
+modifications, nor to spend time justifying that decision. This does
+not mean that we do not agree that there are many deficiencies in the
+design of these classes, but we have many tasks with higher priority
+than continually explaining why the standard classes for \LaTeX{}
+cannot be changed.
+
+We would, of course, welcome the production of better classes, or of
+packages that can be used to enhance these classes.
+
+
+\section{New addresses for TUG}
+For information about joining the \TeX{} Users Group, and about lots
+of other \LaTeX-related matters, please contact
+them at their new address:
+\begin{quote}\small
+ \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 1239,\\
+ Three Rivers, CA~93271-1239, USA\\
+ Fax:~+1~209~561~4584\\
+ E-mail: \texttt{tug at mail.tug.org}\\
+ URL: \texttt{http://www.tug.org/}
+\end{quote}
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews07.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews08.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews08.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews08.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews08.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews08.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews08.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews08.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews08.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews08.tex
+
+% This is issue 8 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1997}
+\publicationissue{8}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{New supported font encodings}
+
+Two new font encodings are supported as options to the \textsf{fontenc}
+package:
+\begin{description}
+\item [OT4]
+This is a seven-bit encoding designed for Polish. The \LaTeX\ support
+was developed by Mariusz Olko.
+\item [TS1] This is the `Text Companion Encoding'; it contains symbols
+designed to be used in text, as opposed to mathematical formulas, and
+some accents designed for uppercase letters. It is currently
+supported by the `tc' fonts, which match the T1 encoded `ec' text
+fonts. A subset of the glyphs in this encoding is supported by
+virtual fonts distributed with the PostScript font metrics on the
+\textsc{ctan} archives. (This is the `8c' encoding in Karl Berry's
+fontname scheme.) The \textsf{textcomp} package provides access to
+this encoding but here is a warning to current users of that package:
+some of the internal names for the characters have changed.
+\end{description}
+
+
+\section{New input encodings}
+
+These additions to the \textsf{inputenc} package are
+\texttt{decmulti} (the DEC Multinational
+Character Set, contributed by M.~Y.~Chartoire)
+and \texttt{cp1250} (an MS-Windows encoding for Central and Eastern
+Europe, contributed by Marcin Woli\'nski). There is also a
+\texttt{cp1252} encoding that is identical to \texttt{ansinew}.
+
+
+\section{Tools}
+
+The \textsf{calc} package (used in many examples in \emph{The \LaTeX\
+Companion}) has been contributed to this distribution by Kresten Krab
+Thorup and Frank Jensen. This is essentially the same as the version
+that has been available from the \textsc{ctan} archives for some time,
+with one minor change: to use \LaTeX-style error messages. It enables
+the use of arithmetic expressions within arguments to standard
+\LaTeX{} commands where a length or a counter value is required. For
+example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \setcounter {page} { \value{page} * 2 + 1 }
+ \parbox { 3in - ( 2mm + \textwidth / 9 ) }
+\end{verbatim}
+
+There have also been some improvements to several other packages in
+this collection. In particular, \textsf{bm} now works correctly with
+constructions such as \verb|\bm{f'}| involving \texttt{'} or other
+characters which use \TeX's special ``\verb|\mathcode"8000|''
+feature. Also, \textsf{multicol} sets the length \verb|\columnwidth|
+to an appropriate value; this enables it to work with classes that
+support two-column setting, e.g.,~the AMS classes.
+
+
+\section{Graphics}
+
+The special \verb|oztex.def| driver file has been removed, and Oz\TeX\
+support has been merged with dvips, following advice from
+Andrew Trevorrow about Oz\TeX~3.x.
+
+The \textsf{keyval} package has had some internal improvements: to
+use \LaTeX\ format error messages; and to avoid `\verb|#| doubling'.
+This latter change means that the \verb|command| key for the
+\textsf{graphicx} version of \verb|\includegraphics| should now be used
+with one \verb|#| rather than two. For example, \verb|command = `gunzip #1|.
+Fortunately this key is almost never used in practice, so few if any
+documents should be affected by this change.
+
+
+\section{\LaTeX3 experimental programming conventions}
+
+As announced at the \TeX\ Users Group meeting (Summer 1997), a group of
+highly experimental packages will soon be released to allow experienced\\
+\TeX\ programmers to experiment with, and comment on, a proposed set
+of syntax conventions and basic data-types that might form
+the basis for programming large scale projects in \TeX.
+They will be located in\\
+this CTAN directory:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ CTAN:macros/latex/packages/expl3
+\end{verbatim}
+The documentation of this material is as follows: individual package
+files provide outline, draft documentation; there is an article that
+gives an overview of the syntax and related concepts; there is a
+\texttt{readme.txt} file containing a brief description of the
+collection.
+
+All aspects of these packages are liable, indeed likely, to change.
+They should not be used at this stage for anything
+that requires a stable system. However, we do encourage people to
+experiment with these packages, and to send comments on them to the
+\texttt{LaTeX-L} mailing list.
+To subscribe to this list, mail to:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ listserv at urz.uni-heidelberg.de
+\end{verbatim}
+the following one line message:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ subscribe LATEX-L <<first-name>> <<second-name>>
+\end{verbatim}
+
+% Revert to this if gets too full.
+% See \texttt{modguide.tex} for
+% information on how to subscribe to \texttt{LaTeX-L}.
+
+\end{document}
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews08.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews09.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews09.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews09.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews09.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews09.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews09.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews09.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews09.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews09.tex
+
+% This is issue 9 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}[1999/02/23]
+
+%\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1998}
+\publicationissue{9}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+
+\section{New math font encodings}
+
+A joint working group of the \TeX{} Users Group and the \LaTeX3
+Project is developing a new 8-bit math font encoding for \TeX{}.
+It is designed to overcome several limitations and implementation
+problems of the old math font encodings and to simplify switching
+between different sets of math fonts, much as the \LaTeX{} font
+selection interface has simplified switching between text fonts.
+
+Since the work on this project relies entirely on volunteer work, we
+cannot give a specific release date yet. However, a prototype
+implementation already exists. This contains several sets of virtual
+fonts, some \LaTeX{} packages and a kernel module; we hope to
+integrate it into the main \LaTeX{} distribution for the next
+release.
+
+Documents using only standard \LaTeX{} commands for math symbols
+should not be affected by switching to the new math font encodings
+However, documents, classes or packages making specific assumptions
+about the encoding of math symbol fonts are likely to break.
+
+Further information about the Math Font Group may be found on
+the World Wide Web at \texttt{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/}.
+
+
+\section{A new math accent}
+
+A new math accent, \verb|\mathring|, has been added. This is a math mode
+version of the ring accent (\r{}) which is available in text
+mode with the command \verb|\r|.
+
+\section{Extended \cs{DeclareMathDelimiter}}
+
+The command \verb|\DeclareMathDelimiter| has been extended.
+Normally this command takes six arguments. Previously, when being used
+to declare a character (such as \texttt{[}) as a delimiter, a variant
+form was used with only five arguments. The argument specifying the
+default `math class' was omitted. Now the full six-argument form may be
+used in this case. The extra information is used to implicitly declare
+the character via \verb|\DeclareMathSymbol| for use when the symbol is
+not used with \verb|\left| or \verb|\right|.
+
+The old five-argument form is detected and will work as before.
+
+\newpage
+
+\section{Tools distribution}
+
+The \texttt{multicol} package now supports the production of multiple
+columns without balancing the last page. To get this effect use the
+\texttt{multicols*} environment.
+
+The \texttt{layout} package was partly recoded by Hideo Umeki to
+display page layout effects in a better way.
+
+As suggested by Donald Arseneau, the \texttt{calc} package was extended
+to support the new commands \verb|\widthof{<text>}|,
+\verb|\heightof{<text>}|, and \verb|\depthof{<text>}| within a
+\texttt{calc}-expression. At the same time we modified a few kernel
+commands so that \texttt{calc}-expressions can now be used in various
+useful places such as the dimension arguments to the \texttt{tabular}
+environment and the \verb|\rule| command. For many other standard
+\LaTeX{} commands this was already possible.
+
+
+\section{Support for Cyrillic encodings}
+
+We are very pleased that, after a lengthy period of development, a set
+of fonts, encodings and support files for using \LaTeX\ with Cyrillic
+characters will soon be available.
+
+Test versions of the `LH' fonts for these Cyrillic encodings, based on
+the Computer Modern design, are available from CTAN archives in the
+directory \texttt{fonts/cyrillic/lh-test}. The \LaTeX\ support files
+(by Werner Lemberg and Vladimir Volovich) are also available from CTAN
+archives in\\
+ \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/supported/t2}
+
+
+\section{Default docstrip header}
+
+Many \LaTeX\ users now distribute packages in documented source form
+using the \textsf{docstrip} system. Docstrip allows a header to be
+placed on generated package files, suitable for giving copyright
+information, or distribution conditions.
+
+We have changed the default version of this header so that it allows
+stripped files to be distributed in ready-to-run installations such as
+the \TeX{}Live CD\@. If you use the default header for distributing
+your files you should check that the new copyright text is acceptable
+to you. The file \texttt{docstrip.dtx} explains how to produce your own
+header if you wish to do so.
+
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews09.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews10.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews10.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews10.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews10.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews10.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews10.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews10.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews10.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews10.tex 12/01/1998
+
+% This is issue 10 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts]
+ {ltnews}[1999/02/23]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1998}
+\publicationissue{10}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+
+\section{Five years of \LaTeXe}
+
+Since this is the 10th edition of \LaTeX{} News, the (no longer) New
+Standard \LaTeX{} must have hit the streets almost this long ago. In
+fact it was only the beta-version that some people got just in time for
+Christmas~1993, and since then there has been a lot of tidying-up and
+smoothing of rough edges (not to mention a few bug fixes!).
+
+Maybe it is time for something more radically different to emerge and
+be hungrily adopted by the world; but don't panic, we shall be
+maintaining what you have now for a long time yet. Amongst the more
+polite things that have been written about our efforts, we found that this
+quote (somewhat censored to protect the guilty) well reflects some of
+our feelings about working on \LaTeX{} over the years: \textit{the mere
+existence of \LaTeXe{} is a great miracle}.
+
+
+ \section{Restructuring the \LaTeX{} distribution}
+
+ Since the (once) `new' standard \LaTeX{} has reached such a venerable
+ age, we are reviewing the way in which the system is presented to the
+ world.
+
+ An early intention is to define, given the wide variety of good
+ packages now available, what now constitutes a useful installation of
+ \LaTeX{}. We also hope that such a definition will help document
+ portability if it leads to a future in which a \LaTeX{} class
+ designer can reasonably assume that a known list of
+ facilities will be there for all users (so that each class
+ need not supply them).
+
+ As a first small step towards this definition, we shall replace the
+ \texttt{latex/packages} subdirectory on \ctan{}.
+ This directory was a curious mixture of the important, such as the
+ \LaTeX{} \texttt{tools}, that any self-respecting \LaTeX{}
+ installation ought to have, and the esoteric or experimental.
+
+ The esoterica from \texttt{packages} will be moved to
+ new locations, as follows:
+ \begin{quote}
+ \texttt{expl3} to \texttt{latex/exptl/project}\\
+ \texttt{mfnfss} to \texttt{latex/contrib/supported/mfnfss}
+ \end{quote}
+
+ The subdirectory that replaces \texttt{packages} will be called
+ \texttt{latex/required}; all the other sub-directories of
+ \texttt{packages} will be moved there.
+
+\vspace{17pt}
+\pagebreak
+
+ \section{\LaTeX\ Project on the Internet}
+A new \texttt{latex-project.org} domain has been registered.
+The web site is not yet fully functional but the old \LaTeX\ pages from
+\ctan\ are available at \texttt{http://www.latex-project.org/} and the
+\LaTeX\ bug reporting address has been changed to
+\texttt{latex-bugs at latex-project.org}.
+
+ \section{Restructuring the \LaTeX{} package licenses}
+
+Several people have requested an easy mechanism for the distribution
+of \LaTeX\ packages and other software ``under the same conditions as
+\LaTeX''. The old \texttt{legal.txt} file was unsuitable as a general
+licence as it referred to specific \LaTeX\ authors, and to specific
+files.
+
+Therefore, in this release \texttt{legal.txt} contains just the
+copyright notice and a reference to the new \emph{\LaTeX\ Project
+Public License} (LPPL) for the distribution and modification
+conditions. The \texttt{tools}, \texttt{graphics}, and \texttt{mfnfss}
+packages also now refer to this license in their distribution notices.
+
+ \section{Support for Cyrillic encodings}
+
+Basic Cyrillic support, as announced in \LaTeX{} News~9, is now
+finally an official part of \LaTeX{}. It includes support for the
+following standard Cyrillic font encodings (this list may
+grow):~\mbox{\texttt{T2A T2B T2C X2}}.
+
+It also includes various Cyrillic input encodings (20~in total,
+including commonly used variants and Mongolian Cyrillic
+encodings). This provides platform independent and
+sophisticated basic support for high-quality typesetting in various
+Cyrillic-based languages.
+
+For further information see the file \texttt{cyrguide.tex}.
+
+\section{Tools distribution}
+
+The \texttt{varioref} package has been extended to support textual
+page references to a range of objects: e.g.,~if \texttt{eq-first}
+and \texttt{eq-last} are the label names for the first and last
+equation in a sequence, then you can now write
+\begin{verbatim}
+ see~\vrefrange{eq-first}{eq-last}
+\end{verbatim}
+This results in different text depending on whether both
+labels fall on the same page.
+
+Some additional user commands, as well as building-blocks for writing
+private extensions, are described in the accompanying documentation.
+
+
+
+\end{document}
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews10.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews11.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews11.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews11.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews11.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews11.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews11.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews11.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews11.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews11.tex 01/06/1999
+% This is issue 11 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Times
+ {ltnews}
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{1999}
+\publicationissue{11}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Back in sync}
+
+The last release of \LaTeX{} was delayed even longer than you have
+come to expect. We hope that it proved worth waiting for. It
+required a major integration of the code from several people and,
+independently, the introduction of the LPPL (see \LaTeX{} News~10) plus
+several related changes to our internal systems. It therefore seemed
+sensible to wait until everything was complete rather than do things
+in too much hurry.
+
+This seem to have been a successful strategy as
+the recent patch release was related to an isolated change that was
+done many months previously. If this release does not appear a lot
+closer to its nominal date then \ldots~well, you will not be reading
+this sentence!
+
+\section{Yearly release cycles}
+
+With the year 2000 rapidly approaching, we intend to switch to a
+release frequency of just one per year (with patches if necessary) for
+the core of \LaTeXe{}. These days the system is sufficiently stable
+that the original update policy is costing everybody more time than is
+now warranted.
+
+\section{LPPL update}
+
+Thanks to extensive and valuable input from Matt Swift
+(\email{swift at alum.mit.edu}) we now have a clearer and more detailed
+form of the \LaTeX{} Project Public Licence. This release contains
+both the original version (in \file{lppl-1-0.txt}) and the updated
+version, LPPL~1.1.
+
+\section{The future of Sli\TeX{}}
+
+We still get a very small trickle of reports about this part of the
+system (if you are no longer able to recall \LaTeX~2.09 then you will
+know it as the \class{slides} class). We have not classified them (in
+our minds at least) as bugs since we have always known that there are
+many problems with this class. It is clear to us that the only
+sensible action would be to redesign the system completely; in
+particular, to remove much of its complexity whose purpose is to
+support 10-year-old overlay technology. However, this would take a
+lot too much time and would be completely out of proportion to its
+current usage.
+
+We are therefore planning to make the \class{slides} class
+unsupported in the sense that any problem related to the use of
+invisible fonts is considered to be a feature (The \LaTeXe{} manual by
+Leslie Lamport doesn't even describe this part of the class any more).
+Of course, if it still has its enthusiasts then we are happy to cede
+it to their loving care (somewhat like a preserved steam locomotive,
+in some parts of the world).
+
+\section{Fontenc package peculiarities}
+
+The \verb=\usepackage= interface normally ensures that a package is
+loaded only once. The \pkg{fontenc} package has become an
+exception to this rule: it can be loaded several times using different
+options, e.g., allowing the user to add a font encoding in the
+preamble. This comes at a price for package writers: the low-level
+commands (see \file{ltclass.dtx}) used to check if a package was
+loaded, and with which options, do not work for the \pkg{fontenc}
+package.
+
+\section{New math font encodings}
+
+As we announced in \LaTeX{} News~9, a joint working group of the
+\TeX{} Users Group and the \LaTeX3 Project has developed a new
+\mbox{8-bit} math font encoding for \TeX{}.
+The reason why this work is not yet released is because of other
+exciting developments in the world of math fonts and math characters.
+It is obviously wise to ensure that the encoding work is fully
+integrated with the available fonts.
+
+Those interested are reminded that further information about the Math
+Font Group may be found on the World Wide Web at:\\
+\url{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/}.
+
+\section{Tools distribution}
+
+The \pkg{multicol} package has now got a small but useful extension
+which allows you to force a column break where this is really
+necessary. This is done with the command \verb=\columnbreak=, which
+can be used like \verb=\pagebreak= (e.g.,~within paragraphs) except
+that it cannot have an optional argument and thus it always forces a
+new column.
+
+\section{Coming soon}
+
+Major work on a new class file structure to support flexible
+designs is well under way; some of this work will be presented at the
+TUG'99 conference in Vancouver, Canada. With a bit of luck much of
+this work could be ready for integration into the next release---so
+watch this space!
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews11.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews12.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews12.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews12.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews12.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews12.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews12.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews12.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews12.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews12.tex
+%
+% This is issue 12 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Times
+ {ltnews}[1999/12/01]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{1999}
+\publicationissue{12}
+
+% Should go to .cls:
+\newcommand{\acro}[1]{\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{LPPL update}
+
+Since the release of the \LaTeX{} Project Public Licence version~1.1,
+we have received a small number of queries which resulted in some
+minor changes to improve the wording or explain the intentions better.
+As a consequence this release now contains LPPL~1.2 in the file
+\file{lppl.txt} and the previous versions as \file{lppl-1-0.txt} and
+\file{lppl-1-1.txt}.
+
+\section{fixltx2e package}
+
+ This package provides fixes to \LaTeXe{} which are desirable but
+ cannot be integrated into the \LaTeXe{} kernel directly as they
+ would produce a version incompatible to earlier releases (either
+ in formatting or functionality).
+
+ By having these fixes in the form of a package, users can benefit
+ from them without the danger that their documents will fail, or
+ produce unexpected results, at other sites; this works because a
+ document will contain a clear indication (the \verb=\usepackage=
+ line, preferably with a required date) that at least some of these
+ fixes are required to format it.
+
+\section{Outcome of TUG '99 (Vancouver)}
+
+The slides from the \acro{TUG}'99 presentation we gave on \emph{a
+new interface for \LaTeX\ class designers} are available from the
+\LaTeX\ Project website; look for the file \verb|tug99.pdf| at:
+\begin{quote}
+ \url{http://www.latex-project.org/talks/}
+\end{quote}
+
+Please note that this document was intended only to be informal
+``speaker's notes'' for our own use. We decided to make them available (the
+speaker's notes as well as the slides that were presented) because several
+people requested copies after the talk. However, they are \emph{not} in
+a polished copy-edited form and are not intended for publication.
+
+Prototype implementations of parts of this interface are now available from:
+\begin{quote}
+ \url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}
+\end{quote}
+
+We are continuing to add new material at this location so as to
+stimulate further discussion of the underlying concepts. As of
+December 1, 1999
+the following parts can be downloaded.
+\begin{description}
+
+ \item[xparse] Prototype implementation of the interface for declaring
+ document command syntax. See the \texttt{.dtx} files for
+ documentation.
+
+ \item[template] Prototype implementation of the template interface
+ (needs parts of \texttt{xparse}).
+
+ The file \texttt{template.dtx} in that directory has a large section
+ of documentation at the front describing the commands in the
+ interface and giving a `worked example' building up some templates
+ for caption formatting.
+
+ \item[xcontents] Interface description for table of contents data (no
+ code yet). Coding examples have been thoroughly discussed on the
+ \texttt{latex-l} list.
+
+ \item[xfootnote] Working examples for generating footnotes,
+ etc. Needs \texttt{xparse} and \texttt{template}.
+
+ \end{description}
+All examples are organised in subdirectories and additionally
+ available as \texttt{gzip} \texttt{tar} files.
+
+ Please remember
+that this material is intended only for experimentation and comments;
+thus any aspect of it, e.g., the user interface or the functionality,
+may change and, in fact, is very likely to change.
+For this reason it is explicitly forbidden to place this material on
+\acro{CD-ROM} distributions or public servers.
+
+These concepts, as well as their implementation, are under discussion
+on the list \texttt{LATEX-L}. You can join this list, which is
+intended solely for discussing ideas and concepts for future versions
+of \LaTeX, by sending mail to
+%\begin{quote}
+ \email{listserv at URZ.UNI-HEIDELBERG.DE}
+%\end{quote}
+containing the line
+ \begin{quote}
+ \texttt{SUBSCRIBE LATEX-L} \textit{Your Name}
+ \end{quote}
+
+This list is archived and, after subscription, you can retrieve older
+posts to it by sending mail to the above address, containing a command
+such as:
+\begin{quote}
+\texttt{GET LATEX-L LOGyymm}
+\end{quote}
+where \texttt{yy}=Year and \texttt{mm}=Month, e.g.
+\begin{quote}
+\texttt{GET LATEX-L LOG9910}
+\end{quote}
+for all messages sent in October 1999.
+
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews12.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews13.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews13.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews13.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews13.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews13.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews13.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews13.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews13.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews13.tex
+%
+% This is issue 13 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+ {ltnews}[2000/07/21]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{2000}
+\publicationissue{13}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\raisefirstsection
+\section{Yearly release cycle}
+
+We announced in \textit{\LaTeX{} News~11} that we intended to switch
+to a 12-monthly release schedule. With the present (June~2000)
+release, this switch is being made: thus the next release of \LaTeX{}
+will be dated June~2001. We shall of course continue, as in the past,
+to release patches as needed to fix significant bugs.
+
+
+\section{PSNFSS: \small Quote of the Month}
+
+\begin{quote}
+ You should say in the \LaTeX{} News that Walter Schmidt has taken over
+ \PSNFSS{} from me. It gives me a certain pleasure to be able to draw a
+ line under that part of my life\ldots
+
+ \begin{latexonly}
+ \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+ \end{latexonly}
+
+ \begin{flushright}
+ Sebastian Rahtz
+ \end{flushright}
+\end{quote}
+
+\begin{latexonly}
+ \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+\end{latexonly}
+
+\noindent
+The \PSNFSS{} material, which supports the use\latex{\\}
+of common PostScript fonts with \LaTeX{}, has been thoroughly updated.
+Most noticeably, the \package{mathpple} package, which used to be
+distributed separately, is now part of the basic \PSNFSS{} bundle;
+this package provides mathematical typesetting with the Palatino
+typeface family. In addition, numerous bugs and flaws have been fixed
+and the distribution has been `cleaned up'. The file
+\file{changes.txt} contains a detailed list of these changes.
+\latex{\looseness=-1} %%!!!!! It worked!
+
+The documentation (in \file{psnfss2e.pdf}) has been completely
+rewritten to provide a comprehensive introduction to the use
+of PostScript fonts.
+
+Notice that the new \PSNFSS{} needs updated files for font metrics,
+virtual fonts and font definitions. If you received the new
+version~(8.1) as part of a complete \TeX{} system then these new font
+files should also have been installed. However, if you intend to
+install or update \PSNFSS{} yourself, please read the instructions in
+the file \file{00readme.txt} of the new \PSNFSS{} distribution.
+
+Support for commercial PostScript fonts, such as
+Lucida~Bright, has been removed from the basic distribution;
+it is now available from \ctan{}:
+\begin{latexonly}
+ \file{\ctanhttp macros/latex/\\
+ contrib/supported/psnfssx}.
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+ \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/psnfssx}.
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+\section{New AMS-\LaTeX{}}
+
+Version 2.0 of AMS-\LaTeX{} was released on December 1, 1999. It can
+be obtained via \url{ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/tex/} or
+\url{http://www.ams.org/tex/amslatex.html}, as well from \ctan{}:
+\begin{latexonly}
+ \file{\ctanhttp macros/latex/\\
+ required/amslatex}.
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+ \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/amslatex}.
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+This release consists chiefly of bug fixes and consolidation of the
+existing features. The division of AMS-\LaTeX{} into two main parts
+(the math packages;\latex{\\}
+the AMS document classes) has been made more pronounced.
+The files \file{diffs-m.txt}, \file{diffs-c.txt},
+\file{amsmath.faq}, and \file{amsclass.faq} describe the\latex{\\}
+changes and address some common questions.
+
+The primary documentation files remain \file{amsldoc.tex}, for the
+\package{amsmath} package, and \file{instr-l.tex}, for the AMS
+document classes.\latex{\\}
+The documentation for the \package{amsthm} package,\latex{\\}
+however, has been moved from \file{amsldoc.tex}\latex{\\}
+to a separate document \file{amsthdoc.tex}.
+
+\begin{latexonly}
+ \vfill
+\end{latexonly}
+
+\section{New input encoding \package{latin4}}
+
+The package \package{inputenc} has, thanks to Hana Skoumalov\'a,
+been extended to cover the \package{latin4} input encoding; this
+covers Baltic and Scandinavian languages as well as Greenland
+Inuit and Lappish.
+
+\begin{latexonly}
+ \vfill
+\end{latexonly}
+
+\section{New experimental code}
+
+In \textit{\LaTeX{} News~12} we announced some ongoing work towards a
+`Designer Interface for \LaTeX' and we presented some early results
+thereof. Since then, at Gutenberg\,2000 in Toulouse and TUG\,2000 in
+Oxford, we described a new output routine and an improved method of
+handling vertical mode material between paragraphs. In combination
+these support higher quality \emph{automated}\footnote
+ {The stress here is on automated!}
+page-breaking and page make-up\latex{\\}
+for complex pages---the best yet achieved with \TeX{}!
+
+A paper describing the new output routine is
+\begin{latexonly}
+ at\\
+ \file{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf%
+ \hspace*{-16pt}}\\
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+ at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}.
+\end{htmlonly}
+All code examples and documentation are available
+\begin{latexonly}
+ at\\
+ \file{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/%
+ \latex{\hspace*{-5pt}}}.\\[3pt]
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+ at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}.
+
+\end{htmlonly}
+This directory has been extended to contain
+\begin{description}
+ \item[galley] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\}
+ for manipulating vertical material in galleys.
+ \item[xinitials] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\}
+ for paragraph initials (needs the \texttt{galley} package.
+ \item[xtheorem] Contributed example using the \texttt{template}
+ package to provide a designer interface for theorem environments.
+ \item[xoutput] A prototype implementation of the new output routine
+ as described in the \texttt{xo-pfloat.pdf} paper. Expected
+ availability: at or shortly after\latex{\\}
+ the TUG\,2000 conference.
+\end{description}
+
+\end{document}
+
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews13.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews14.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews14.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews14.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews14.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews14.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews14.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews14.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews14.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews14.tex
+%
+% This is issue 14 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+ {ltnews}[2001/07/12]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{2001}
+\publicationissue{14}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\raisefirstsection
+\section{Future releases}
+
+We are currently exploring how to best support the very large
+community of individuals, organisations and enterprises that depend on
+the robustness and availability of the current standard \LaTeX{}
+distribution. The results of this may lead to some changes in the
+regular release schedule and the handling of bug reports during the
+next year.
+
+\section{New release of \textsf{Babel} (required)}
+
+Earlier this year a new release of \textsf{Babel} (3.7) became
+available. You can read about its new features in
+\begin{latexonly}
+ \file{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/}\\
+ \hspace*{4em}\file{latex/required/babel/announce.txt}
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+ \url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/babel/announce.txt}
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+One of the bugs that got fixed in this release deals with how labels
+are handled by \LaTeX{}. Because this part of the kernel is modified
+by \textsf{babel}, the relevant changes need to be coordinated.
+Therefore to use \textsf{Babel} with this release of \LaTeX{} you will
+need to update your version of \textsf{babel} to at least 3.7.
+
+\section{New input encoding \package{latin9}}
+
+The package \package{inputenc} has, thanks to Karsten Tinnefeld, been
+extended to cover the \package{latin9} input encoding. The
+ISO-Latin~9 encoding is a useful modern replacement for ISO-Latin~1
+that contains a few characters needed for French and Finnish. Of wider
+interest, it also contains the euro currency sign; this could be the
+killer argument for many 8-bit texts to use Latin-9 in the future.
+
+According to a Linux manpage, ISO~Latin-9 supports Albanian, Basque,
+Breton, Catalan, Danish, Dutch, English, Estonian, Faroese, Finnish,
+French, Frisian, Galician, German, Greenlandic, Icelandic, Irish
+Gaelic, Italian, Latin, Luxembourgish, Norwegian, Portuguese,
+Rhaeto-Romanic, Scottish Gaelic, Spanish and Swedish.\\
+The characters added in \package{latin9} are (in \LaTeX{} notation):\\
+\begin{small}
+\verb| \texteuro \v S \v s \v Z \v z \OE \oe \" Y |
+\end{small}\\
+They displace the following characters from \package{latin1}:\\
+\begin{small}
+\verb| \textcurrency \textbrokenbar \"{} \'{} \c{} |\\
+\verb| \textonequarter \textonehalf \textthreequarters |
+\end{small}
+
+
+\section{New tools}
+
+The new package \package{trace} provides many commands to control
+\LaTeX{}'s tracing and debugging output, including the excellent new
+information available with \eTeX{} such as the extremely useful
+tracing of local assignments. You will find it in the tools
+distribution.
+
+It offers the command \verb|\traceon|, which is similar to
+\verb|\tracingall| but suppresses uninteresting stuff such as font
+loading by NFSS (which can go on for pages if you are unlucky). It
+also offers \verb|\traceoff| to \ldots\ guess what! Full details are
+in the documented source file, \file{trace.dtx}.
+
+In the base \package{ifthen} package we have added
+the uppercase synonyms \verb|\NOT| \verb|\AND| and \verb|\OR|.
+
+\section{New experimental code}
+
+In \textit{\LaTeX{} News~12} we announced some ongoing work towards a
+`Designer Interface for \LaTeX' and we presented some early results
+thereof. Since then, at Gutenberg\,2000 in Toulouse and TUG\,2000 in
+Oxford, we described a new output routine and an improved method of
+handling vertical mode material between paragraphs. In combination
+these support higher quality \emph{automated}\footnote
+ {The stress here is on automated!}
+page-breaking and page make-up\latex{\\}
+for complex pages---the best yet achieved with \TeX{}!
+
+More recently we have added material to handle the complex front
+matter requirements of journal articles; this was presented at
+Gutenberg\,2001 in Metz.
+
+A paper describing the new output routine is
+\begin{latexonly}
+ at\\
+\begin{small}
+ \file{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}\\
+\end{small}
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+ at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}.
+\end{htmlonly}
+All code examples and documentation are available
+\begin{latexonly}
+ at\\
+\begin{small}
+ \file{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental}
+\end{small}
+\end{latexonly}
+\begin{htmlonly}
+ at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}.
+\end{htmlonly}
+
+This directory has been extended to contain the following.
+\begin{description}
+ \item[galley] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\}
+ for manipulating vertical material in galleys.
+ \item[xinitials] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\}
+ for paragraph initials (needs the \texttt{galley} package).
+ \item[xtheorem] Contributed example using the \texttt{template}
+ package to provide a designer interface for theorem environments.
+ \item[xor] A prototype implementation of the new output routine
+ as described in the \texttt{xo-pfloat.pdf} paper.
+ \item[xfrontm] A prototype version of
+ the new font matter interface.
+\end{description}
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews14.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews15.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews15.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews15.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews15.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews15.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews15.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews15.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews15.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews15.tex
+%
+% This is issue 15 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+ {ltnews}[2004/02/28]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{2003}
+\publicationissue{15}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+%\raisefirstsection
+
+\section{Anniversary release}
+
+Yes, it's now 10~years since the first release in this series and, for
+Knuthists, this release also contains \textit{Issue 16}\,!
+
+Meanwhile this \textit{Issue~15} describes the major new features in
+the current release whilst \textit{Issue~16} looks\newline
+a little way into the future of \LaTeX{}.
+
+
+\section{LPPL -- new version}
+
+Most importantly, there is now a new version, 1.3, of the \LaTeX{}
+Project Public Licence. Many of you will\newline
+be thrilled to know that, following the exchange of over 1600 e-mail
+messages dissecting various aspects of its philosophy such as `how
+many angels can appear in the name of a file before it becomes
+non-free', this version\newline
+is now officially a DFSG (Debian Free Software Guidelines) approved license.
+The discussions start at
+\url{http://lists.debian.org/debian-legal/2002/debian-legal-200207/threads.html}
+with high traffic throughout August to October~2002 and further
+heated discussions starting in April~2003 and concluding
+around June at
+\url{http://lists.debian.org/debian-legal/2003/debian-legal-200306/msg00206.html}.
+
+The important features of the new version are useful clarifications in
+the wording, and revised procedures\newline
+for making a change to the Current Maintainer of a package. Special
+thanks to all those people from\newline Debian Legal who worked
+constructively with us\newline
+on this onerous task, especially but not exclusively\newline
+Jeff Licquia and Branden Robinson.
+
+
+\section{Small updates to varioref}
+
+The English has been corrected in \verb|\reftextbefore|
+(an incompatible change). There are other extensions
+such as \verb|\labelformat|, \verb|\Ref|, \verb|\Vref| and \verb|\vpagerefnum|.
+Some Dutch text has also been changed and two\newline
+new options added: \package{slovak} and \package{slovene}.
+
+
+\section{New and more robust commands}
+
+Many of the math mode commands for compound symbols have been made
+robust and a new robust command has been added: \verb|\nobreakdashes|.
+This last is a low-level command, borrowed from the \package{amsmath}
+package, for use only before hyphens or dashes. It prevents the line
+break that is normally allowed\newline
+after the following sequence of dashes.
+
+
+\section{Fixing font sizes}
+
+The new \package{fix-cm} package, by Walter Schmidt, changes the CM font
+definition (\texttt{.fd}) files so that similar design sizes are used
+in both the \texttt{OT1} and \texttt{T1} encodings.
+
+
+\section{Font encodings}
+
+A number of options have been added to the \package{textcomp} package,
+enabling only available glyphs to be used.
+Also, the `NFSS font families' are now divided into five different groups
+according to the subset of glyphs each provides from the full
+collection of symbols in the TS1 encoding.
+Given sufficient information about a font family
+\package{textcomp} will use this in order to limit the\newline
+typesetting to those glyphs that are available.
+
+Use of this mechanism has also enhanced \verb|\oldstylenums|
+to use the current font if possible.
+
+
+\section{Displaying font tables}
+
+With the \package{nfssfont} package you can now
+specify the font to display by giving its `NFSS classification',
+rather than needing to know its external font file's name.
+It is also now possible to generate large collections of font
+tables in batch mode by providing a suitable input file.
+
+
+\section{New input encodings}
+
+The \package{inputenc} package has been extended as follows:
+\package{macce} input encoding
+(Apple Central European),
+thanks to Radek Tryc and Marcin Wolinski; \package{cp1257}\newline
+for Baltic languages; \package{latin10},
+thanks to Ionel Ciob\^{i}c\u{a}.\newline
+The euro symbol has by
+now been added to several encodings:
+\package{ansinew}, \package{cp1250}
+and \package{cp1252} (which also\newline
+has another addition), whilst \package{cp858}
+adds it to \package{cp850}.
+
+
+\section{Unicode input}
+
+Partial, experimental support for text files that use the Unicode
+encoding form UTF-8 is now provided by the option \package{utf8} for
+the \package{inputenc} package.
+
+The only Unicode text file characters supported by the current version
+are those based on the most common inputs for glyphs from the small
+collection\newline
+of standard \LaTeX{} Latin encodings.
+
+
+\section{And finally \ldots\ pict2e}
+
+The old, non-functional version of this package has been removed
+ as there is now a fully working version from Hubert G\"a{\ss}lein
+ and Rolf Niepraschk. It is described
+ in \textit{The \LaTeX{} Manual}.
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews15.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews16.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews16.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews16.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews16.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews16.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews16.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews16.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews16.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews16.tex
+%
+% This is issue 16 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+ {ltnews}[2004/02/28]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{2003}
+\publicationissue{16}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+%\raisefirstsection
+
+\section{Anniversary news}
+
+This anniversary \textit{Issue~16} takes a brief look into the future work of
+the \LaTeX3 Project Team, both short and and longer range. Please let
+us know if you want %\newline
+to get involved with us in any of this work (see below).
+
+An overview of the 10th Anniversary Release, dated 2003/12/01, is
+can be found in \textit{Issue~15}.
+
+
+\section{TLC2: The \LaTeX{} Companion -- 2nd edition!}
+
+Since you are reading this newsletter, there is a good chance that
+you, or a friend, has already bought this encyclopedic volume: the
+incomparable Second\newline
+Edition of this work that is every \LaTeX{}ie's\newline
+ultimate lucky charm.
+
+If by some chance you have not yet purchased your own copy then get
+into training, get shopping, and get flexing your muscles (both
+physical---it's $1100+$~pages,\newline
+and intellectual) by using it to discover
+masses of invaluable `insider information' about:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the latest release of Standard \LaTeX{};
+\item over~200~extension packages;
+\item plus related software and systems.
+\end{itemize}
+For more information on this all new (??\ldots OK,\newline
+not \emph{all}, but over 90\%!!),
+all accurate (we hope!)\newline
+10th~Anniversary Edition, check out\newline
+ \mbox{\url{http://www.awprofessional.com/titles/0201362996}}.
+
+
+\section{Future maintenance}
+
+We are currently exploring how best to support the very large and
+rapidly growing community of individuals, organisations and
+enterprises that depend on the robustness and availability of the
+current standard \LaTeX{} distribution. Although we remain firmly\newline
+resolved not to make changes in the base distribution (the kernel) of
+Standard \LaTeX{}, there is still much that needs doing to maintain
+its reliability and utility and to keep up the necessary level of
+communication with users and supporters. Also, as with all advanced
+software systems, bugs are still turning up occasionally so %\newline
+some fixes are still essential.
+
+One major impediment to providing adequate service levels in this area
+is, of course, the difficulties inherent in obtaining the time and
+commitment of skilled minds---hence the appeal above to anyone
+interested %\newline
+in getting involved.
+
+
+\section{LPPL certification}
+
+There are still some outstanding diplomatic tasks around the
+\LaTeX{} Project Public Licence: these include
+e.g.,~getting it `OSF certified' and ensuring that it gains
+more support and wider use, even in the FSF world\newline
+where it has long been tolerated.
+
+
+\section{Use of \eTeX/pdf\TeX}
+
+We expect that within the next two years, releases of \LaTeX{} will
+change modestly in order to run best under an extended \TeX{} engine
+that contains the \eTeX{} primitives, e.g., \eTeX{} or pdf\TeX{}.
+The details of this possible upgrade need further work so we are not
+making a definite announcement yet.
+
+Although the current release does not \emph{require} \eTeX{} features,
+we certainly recommend using an extended \TeX{}, especially if you
+need to debug macros.
+
+
+\section{End of `autoload' support}
+
+As computer systems generally grow in capacity, requirements change
+and so we believe that the \package{autoload} variant of \LaTeX{} is
+no longer required. Thus, although the code remains it is no longer
+supported. We hope this does not cause any problems.
+
+
+\section{New models, new code}
+
+In the period 1999--2001 we published many results of our work over
+the previous decade on the development of new concepts and models
+for automated typesetting based on \TeX{} as the underlying platform.
+These can be found at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/}
+and
+\mbox{\url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}}.
+
+Since then a very large proportion of the The Team's efforts have been
+diverted to provide the core author team for TLC2, which provides
+over 1000 pages of carefully researched and tested documentation of
+many aspects of the vast world of \LaTeX{} related software that
+was developed over that same time period and that continues
+to grow and improve prodigiously.
+
+Completion of that task \ldots\ until TLC3!! \ldots\ presents the
+possibility of getting back to this more exciting development work,
+or even to more radical work on non-\TeX{}-based models and
+implementations.
+
+Of course, any such ideas are predicated on our ability to organise
+(with you, we hope) an efficient\newline
+but responsive maintenance and support system\newline
+for Standard \LaTeX{}.
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews16.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews17.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews17.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews17.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews17.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews17.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews17.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews17.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews17.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,230 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews17.tex
+%
+% This is issue 17 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+ {ltnews}[2004/02/28]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{2005}
+\publicationissue{17}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% \raisefirstsection
+
+\section{Project licence news}
+
+The \LaTeX{} Project Public License has been updated slightly so that
+it is now version 1.3c. In the warranty section the
+phrase ``unless required by applicable law'' has been reinstated,
+having got lost at some point. Also,
+it now contains three clarifications: of the difference between
+``maintained'' and ``author-maintained''; of the
+term ``Base Interpreter''; and when clause 6b and 6d shall not apply.
+
+Following requests, we now also provide the text of the licence as a
+\LaTeX{} document (in the file \texttt{lppl.tex}). This file can be
+processed either as a stand-alone document or it can be included
+(without any modification) into another \LaTeX{} document, e.g., as an
+appendix, using \verb|\input| or \verb|\include|.
+
+
+\section{New guide on font encodings}
+
+Way back in 1995 work was started on a guide to document the
+officially allocated \LaTeX{} font encoding names. However, for one
+reason or another this guide (named \textit{\LaTeX{} font encodings})
+was, until now, not added to the distribution. It describes the major
+7-bit and 8-bit font encodings used in the \LaTeX{} world and explains
+the restrictions required of conforming text font encodings. It also
+lists all the `encoding specific commands' (the LICR or \LaTeX{}
+Internal Character Representation) for characters supported by the
+encodings \texttt{OT1} and \texttt{T1}.
+
+When the file \texttt{encguide.tex} is processed by \LaTeX{}, it will
+attempt to typeset an encoding table for each encoding it describes.
+For this to be possible, \LaTeX{} must be able to find \texttt{.tfm}
+files for a representative example font for each encoding. If
+\LaTeX{} cannot find such a file then a warning is issued and the
+corresponding table is omitted.
+
+
+\section{Robust commands in math}
+
+The font changing commands in text-mode have been robust commands for years,
+but the same has not been true for the math versions such as
+\verb|\mathbf|. While the math-mode commands worked correctly in
+section heads, they could cause problems in other places such as index
+entries. With this release, these math-mode commands are now robust in
+the same way as their text-mode counterparts.
+
+%%
+\pagebreak
+%%
+
+
+\section{Updates of required packages}
+
+Several of the packages in the \package{tools} bundle have been updated
+for this release.
+
+The \package{xspace} package has some new features. One is an
+interface for adding and removing the exceptions it knows about and
+another is that it works with active characters. These remove problems
+of incompatibility with the \package{babel} system.
+
+In \textit{\LaTeX\ News~16} we announced that some packages might
+begin to take advantage of \eTeX{} extensions on systems where these
+are available: and the latest version of \package{xspace} does just
+that. Note also that \package{fixltx2e} will make use of the
+facilities in \eTeX{} whenever these are present (see below).
+
+The \package{calc} package has also been given an update with a few
+extra commands.
+The commands \verb|\maxof| and \verb|\minof|, each with two
+brace-delimited arguments, provide the usual numeric $\max$ and $\min$
+operations. The commands \verb|\settototalheight| and
+\verb|\totalheightof| work like \verb|\settoheight| and
+\verb|\heightof|. There are also some internal improvements to make
+\package{calc} work with some more primitive \TeX\ constructs, such as
+\verb|\ifcase|.
+
+The \package{varioref} package has acquired a few more default
+strings but there are still a number of languages for
+which good strings are still missing.
+
+The \package{showkeys} package has also been updated slightly to work
+with more recent developments in \package{varioref}. Also, it now
+provides an easy way to define the look of the printed labels with
+the command \verb|\showkeyslabelformat|.
+
+\section{Work on \LaTeX{} fixes}
+
+The package known as \package{fixltx2e} has three new additions. A new
+command \verb|\textsubscript| has been added as a complement to the
+command \verb|\textsuperscript| in the kernel. Secondly, a new form of
+\verb|\DeclareMathSizes| that allows all of its arguments to have a
+dimension suffix. This means you can now use expressions such as
+\verb|\DeclareMathSizes{9.5dd}{9.5dd}{7.4dd}{6.6dd}|.
+
+The third new
+addition is the robust command \verb|\TextOrMath| which takes two
+arguments and executes one of them when typesetting in text or math
+mode respectively. This command also takes advantage of \eTeX{}
+extensions if available; more specifically,
+%%
+%%\pagebreak
+%%
+when the \eTeX{} extensions are available, it does not
+destroy kerning between previous letters and the text to be typeset.
+The command is also used
+internally in \package{fixltx2e} to resolve a problem with
+\verb|\fnsymbol|.
+
+Also, further work has been done on reimplementing
+the command \verb|\addpenalty|, which is used internally in several
+places: we hope it is an improvement!
+
+\section{The graphics bundle}
+
+The \package{graphics} bundle now supports the
+\package{dvipdfmx} post-processor and Jonathan Kew's XE\TeX\
+program. By support we mean that the graphics packages recognize the
+new options \texttt{xetex} and \texttt{dvipdfmx} but we do not
+distribute the respective driver files.
+
+This leads elegantly to a description of the
+new policy concerning such driver files in the \package{graphics} bundle.
+Most driver files for our graphics packages are maintained by the
+developers of the associated post-processor or \TeX\ programs.
+The teams developing these packages are working very hard: their rapid
+development offers a stark contrast to the current schedule of \LaTeX\
+releases. It is therefore no longer practical
+for the \LaTeX\ Team to be responsible for distributing the
+latest versions of these driver files.
+
+Therefore the installation files for \package{graphics} have been
+split: there is now \file{graphics.ins} to install the package files and
+\file{graphics-drivers.ins} for the driver files (located in
+\file{drivers.dtx}).
+There is no need
+to install all those provided in the file \file{drivers.dtx}.
+
+Please also note that, as requested by the maintainers of
+\package{PStricks}, we have removed the package \package{pstcol} as
+current versions of \package{PSTricks} make it obsolete.
+
+%%
+\newpage
+%%
+
+
+\section{Future development}
+
+The title of this section is a little misleading as it actually
+describes \emph{current} development. In 1998 the \package{expl3}
+bundle of packages was put on \ctan\ to demonstrate a possible \LaTeX3
+programming environment. These packages have been lying dormant for some
+time while the \LaTeX\ Project Team were preoccupied by other things
+such as developing the experimental packages \package{xor},
+\package{template}, etc., (and also writing that indispensable
+and encyclopaedic volume,\\
+The \LaTeX{} Companion -- 2nd edition).
+
+In October 2004 work on this code base was resumed with the goal of
+some day turning it into a kernel for \LaTeX3. This work can now
+also make full use of the widely accepted \eTeX\ extensions. Currently
+two areas are central to this work.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Extending the
+ kernel code of \LaTeX3.
+\item Converting the experimental packages
+ such as \package{xor}, \package{template} to use the new
+ syntax internally.
+\end{itemize}
+
+Beware! Development of
+\package{expl3} is happening so fast that the descriptions above might
+be out of date when you read this! If you wish to see what's going on
+then go to
+\url{http://www.latex-project.org/code.html} where you can download
+ fully working code (we hope!).
+
+\end{document}
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews17.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews18.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews18.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews18.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews18.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews18.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews18.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews18.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews18.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews18.tex
+%
+% This is issue 18 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass
+ [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Palatino
+ {ltnews}[2004/02/28]
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{2007}
+\publicationissue{18}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\noindent This news never existed.
+
+\end{document}
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews18.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews19.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews19.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews19.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews19.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews19.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews19.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews19.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews19.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews19.tex
+%
+% This is issue 19 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass{ltnews}
+
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\usepackage{lmodern,url}
+
+\publicationmonth{September}
+\publicationyear{2009}
+
+\publicationissue{19}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{New \LaTeX\ release}
+
+This issue of \LaTeX~News marks the first release of a new version of
+\LaTeXe\ since the publication of The \LaTeX\ Companion in 2005--2006.
+
+Just in time for \TeX\ Live 2009, this version is a maintenance
+release and introduces no new features. A number of small changes have
+been made to correct minor bugs in the kernel, slightly extend the Unicode
+support, and improve various
+aspects of some of the \texttt{tools} packages.
+
+\section{New code repository}
+
+Since the last \LaTeX\ release, the entire code base has been moved
+to a public \textsc{svn} repository%
+\footnote{\url{http://www.latex-project.org/svnroot/latex2e-public/}}
+and the entire build architecture re-written. In fact, it has only
+been possible for us to consider a new \LaTeX\ release since earlier
+this year when the test suite was finally set up with the new system.
+In the process, a bug in the \LaTeX\ picture fonts distributed with
+\TeX\ Live was discovered, proving that the
+tests are working and are still very valuable.
+
+Now that we can easily generate new packaged versions of the \LaTeXe\
+distribution, we expect to be able to roll out bug fixes in a much
+more timely manner than over the last few years. New versions should
+be distributed yearly with \TeX\ Live. Having said this, the
+maintenance of the \LaTeXe\ kernel is slowing down as the bugs become
+fewer and more subtle. Remember that we cannot change any of the
+underlying architecture of the kernel or any design decisions of the
+standard classes because we must preserve backwards compatibility with
+legacy documents at all costs.
+
+Even new features cannot be added, because any new documents using
+them will not compile in systems (such as journal production engines)
+that are generally not updated once they've been proven to work as
+necessary.
+
+None of this is to say that we consider \LaTeXe\ to be any less
+relevant for document production than in years past: a stable system
+is a useful one.
+Moreover, the package system continues to provide a flourishing and stable
+means
+for the development of a wide range of extensions.
+
+\newpage
+
+\section{Babel}
+
+One area of the \LaTeXe\ code base that is still receiving feedback to
+be incorporated into the main distribution is the Babel system for
+multilingual typesetting.
+While the Babel sources have already been added to the \textsc{svn} repository the
+integration of the test system for Babel is still outstanding.
+
+
+\section{The future}
+
+While work on \LaTeXe\ tends to maintenance over active development,
+the \LaTeX3 project is
+seeing new life. Our goals here are to provide a transition from the
+\LaTeXe\ document processing model to one with a more flexible
+foundation. Work is continuing in the \textsf{expl3} programming
+language and the \textsf{xpackages} for document design. Future
+announcements
+about \LaTeX3 will be available via the \LaTeX\ Project
+website and in TUGboat.
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews19.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews20.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews20.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews20.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews20.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews20.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews20.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews20.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews20.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993--2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews20.tex
+%
+% This is issue 20 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass{ltnews}
+
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\usepackage{lmodern,url}
+
+\publicationmonth{June}
+\publicationyear{2011}
+
+\publicationissue{20}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Scheduled \LaTeX\ bug-fix release}
+
+This issue of \LaTeX~News marks the first bug-fix release of
+\LaTeXe\ since shifting to a new build system in 2009.
+Provided sufficient changes are made each year, we expect to
+repeat such releases once per year to stay in sync with \TeX\ Live.
+Due to the excitement of \TeX's $2^5$-th birthday last year,
+we missed our window of opportunity to do so for 2010.
+This situation has been rectified this year!
+
+\section{Continued development}
+
+The \LaTeXe\ program is no longer being actively developed, as any non-negligible changes now could have dramatic backwards compatibility issues with old documents. Similarly, new features cannot be added to the kernel since any new documents written now would then be incompatible with legacy versions of \LaTeX.
+
+The situation on the package level is quite different though. While most of us have stopped developing packages for \LaTeXe{} there are many contributing developers that continue to enrich \LaTeXe{} by providing or extending add-on packages with new or better functionality.
+
+However, the \LaTeX\ team certainly recognises that there are improvements to be made to the kernel code; over the last few years we have been working on building, expanding, and solidifying the \textsf{expl3} programming layer for future \LaTeX\ development. We are using \textsf{expl3} to build new interfaces for package development and tools for document design. Progress here is continuing.
+
+\section{Release notes}
+
+In addition to a few small documentation fixes, the following changes have been made to the \LaTeXe\ code; in accordance with the philosophy of minimising forwards and backwards compatibility problems, most of these will not be noticeable to the regular \LaTeX\ user.
+
+\paragraph{Font subsets covered by Latin Modern and \TeX\ Gyre}
+
+The Latin Modern and \TeX\ Gyre fonts are a modern suite of families based
+on the well-known Computer Modern and `PostScript 16' families with many additional
+characters for high-quality multilingual typesetting.%
+\footnote{%
+ See their respective TUGboat articles for more information:\\
+ \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb24-1/jackowski.pdf}\\
+ \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb27-2/tb87hagen-gyre.pdf}%
+}
+
+Information about their symbol coverage in the \verb|TS1| encoding is now included
+in \texttt{textcomp}'s default font definitions.
+
+% \paragraph{Private conditional switch in italic correction}
+% negligible improvement/only useful to LaTeX programmers: not worth documenting I think?
+
+% \paragraph{Improve formatting in \texttt{doc} for filenames with some punctuation}
+% negligible improvement, again?
+
+\paragraph{Redefinition of \cs{enddocument}}
+
+Inside the definition of \verb=\end{document}= the \texttt{.aux} file is read back in to resolve cross-references and build the table of contents etc. From 2.09 days this was done using \verb=\input= without any surrounding braces which could lead to some issues in boundary cases, especially if \verb=\input= was redefined by some package. It was therefore changed to use \LaTeXe{}'s internal name for this function. As a result, packages that modify \verb=\enddocument= other than through the officially provided hooks may need to get updated.
+
+\paragraph{Small improvement with split footnotes in \texttt{ftnright}}
+
+If in the first column there is more than a full column worth of footnote
+material the material will be split resulting in footnotes out of
+order. This issue is now at least detected and generates an error but the algorithm used by the package is
+unable to gracefully handle it in an automated fashion (some alternatives for resolving the problem if it happens are given in the package documentation).
+
+\paragraph{Improvement in \texttt{xspace} and font-switching}
+
+The \texttt{xspace} package provides the command \verb|\xspace|
+which attempts to be clever about inserting spaces automatically
+after user-defined control sequences.
+An important bug fix has been made to this command to correct its
+behaviour when used in conjunction with font-switching commands
+such as \verb|\emph| and \verb|\textbf|.
+Previously, writing
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \newcommand\foo{foo\xspace}
+ ... \emph{\foo} bar baz
+ ... \emph{\foo}, bar baz
+\end{verbatim}
+would result in an extraneous space being inserted after `foo' in
+both cases; this has now been corrected.
+
+
+\paragraph{RTL in \texttt{multicol}}
+
+ The 1.7 release of \texttt{multicol} adds support for languages that are typeset
+ right-to-left. For those languages the order of the columns on the page
+ also needs to be reversed---something that wasn't possible in earlier releases.
+
+The new feature is supported through the
+commands \verb|\RLmulticolcolumns| (switching to right-to-left typesetting)
+and \verb|\LRmulticolcolumns| (switching to left-to-right typesetting) the
+latter being the default.
+
+\paragraph{Improve French \texttt{babel} interaction with \texttt{varioref}}
+
+ Extracting and saving the page number turned out to be a source of subtle
+ bugs. Initially it was done through an \verb"\edef" with a bunch of
+\verb"\expandafter" commands inside. This posed a problem if the page number
+ itself contained code which needed protection (e.g., pr/4080) so this got
+ changed in the last release to use \verb"\protected at edef". However, that in turn failed with Babel
+(bug report/4093) if the label contained active characters, e.g., a ``:'' in French. So now
+we use (after one failed attempt pr/4159) even more \verb"\expandafter" commands and \verb"\romannumeral" trickery to avoid any expansion other
+ than what is absolutely required---making the code in that space absolutely unreadable.
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{%
+ \romannumeral
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \z@
+ \expandafter \@cdr
+ \romannumeral
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \z@
+ \csname r@#2\endcsname\@nil}%
+\end{verbatim}
+Code like this nicely demonstrates the limitations in the programming layer of \LaTeXe{} and the advantages that \textsf{expl3} will offer on this level.
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews20.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews21.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews21.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews21.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews21.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews21.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews21.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews21.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews21.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews21.tex
+%
+% This is issue 21 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass{ltnews}
+\def\ConTeXt{C\kern-.0333emon\-\kern-.0667em\TeX\kern-.0333emt}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\usepackage{lmodern,url,hologo}
+
+\publicationmonth{May}
+\publicationyear{2014}
+
+\publicationissue{21}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Scheduled \LaTeX\ bug-fix release}
+
+This issue of \LaTeX~News marks the second bug-fix release of
+\LaTeXe\ (standard \LaTeX) since shifting to a new build system in 2009.
+Provided sufficient changes are made, we expect to
+make such releases yearly or every two years, in sync with \TeX\ Live.
+
+
+
+\subsection{Release notes}
+
+This release makes no changes to the core code in the \LaTeXe\ format
+but there are a small number of documentation fixes (not listed
+here). In addition several packages in the \textsf{base} and
+\textsf{required} areas have been updated as detailed below.
+
+
+This has been done in accordance with the philosophy of minimising
+problems in both forwards and backwards compatibility, so most of
+these changes should not be noticed by the regular \LaTeX\ user.
+
+References in the text below of the form ``graphics/3873'' are to
+bug reports listed
+at:\\ \url{http://latex-project.org/cgi-bin/ltxbugs2html}
+
+
+\let\paragraph\subsubsection
+
+\paragraph{\textsf{fixltx2e} updates}
+
+
+
+There are a number of bugs and faulty design decisions in \LaTeXe{}
+that should have been corrected long ago in the kernel code. However,
+such corrections cannot be done as this would break backwards
+compatibility in the following sense. A large number of documents
+exist by now that have worked around the bug or have even made use of
+a particular misfeature. Thus changing the kernel code would break
+too many existing documents.
+
+The corrections for these types of bug have therefore been collected together
+in a package that can be loaded only when needed; its name is \textsf{fixltx2e}.
+For this release we made the following changes to this package:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+ Misspelled float placement specifiers such as
+ \verb=\begin{figure}[tv]= instead of \texttt{tb} are silently
+ ignored by the kernel code. Now we test for such letters and issue
+ an error message.
+\item
+ \LaTeX's float handling algorithm can get out of sync if you mix
+ single and double-column floats (as they are placed independently
+ of each other). This was corrected in \textsf{fixltx2e} a few years ago
+ but the fix was not perfect as one situation using
+ \verb=\enlargethispage= generated a low-level \TeX{} error.
+ This behaviour of the package is now improved.
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+
+
+\paragraph{New \textsf{fltrace} package}
+
+For years the file \texttt{ltoutput.dtx} contained some hidden code to
+trace the detailed behaviour of the float placement algorithm of
+\LaTeX. Prompted by questions on StackExchange we now extract this
+code into a new \textsf{fltrace} package. To see the float algorithm
+in action (or to understand why it decides to place all your floats at
+the very end of the document) use
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage{fltrace} \tracefloats
+\end{verbatim}
+To stop tracing somewhere in the document use
+\verb=\tracefloatsoff= and to see the current value of various float
+parameters use \verb=\tracefloatvals=. As the package is identical to
+the kernel code with tracing added, it may or may not work if you load any
+other package that manipulates that part of the kernel code. In such a
+case your best bet is to load \textsf{fltrace} first.
+
+\paragraph{\textsf{inputenc} package updates}
+
+The \textsf{inputenc} package allows different input encodings for
+\LaTeX\ documents to be specified including the important
+\texttt{utf8} option used to specify the Unicode UTF-8 encoding. A
+common mistake in documents has been to also include this option when
+using the Unicode-based \TeX\ engines \hologo{LuaTeX} and \hologo{XeTeX}
+producing strange errors as these engines natively deal with UTF-8
+characters.
+
+If a document stored in an 8bit encoding is processed by
+\hologo{pdfTeX}, it needs the \textsf{inputenc} package to work
+correctly. However, if such a document is processed unchanged by
+\hologo{LuaTeX} or \hologo{XeTeX}, then accented characters may
+silently get dropped from the output.
+
+The package has been modified so that if used with \hologo{LuaTeX} or
+\hologo{XeTeX}, then it just issues a warning if \texttt{utf8} or
+\texttt{ascii} is specified, and stops with an error for any other
+encoding requested.
+
+
+
+One further improvement has been made to the encoding definition files
+(\texttt{.def}) used by \textsf{inputenc}: the catcode of \texttt{@}
+is now saved and restored when reading them instead of always using
+\verb=\makeatother= inside the files (latex/4192).
+
+
+
+\paragraph{The tools directory}
+
+In the past each of the sub-directories in the ``required'' section of
+the \LaTeX{} distribution contained a single \texttt{.ins} file to
+generate the code files from the source files. We have now
+started to provide individual \texttt{.ins} files for each of those
+packages that are likely to require updates outside a major
+\LaTeX{} release.
+
+\paragraph{\textsf{multicol} updates}
+
+Version 1.8 of \textsf{multicol} implements some improvements/fixes
+and one extension. In the past the balancing algorithm enlarged the
+column height until it found a solution that satisfied all
+constraints. If there were insufficient break points then the final
+column height could have been much larger than expected and if that
+happened near the end of the page it resulted in the text overflowing
+into the bottom margin. This situation is now detected and in that
+case a normal page is cut and balancing is resumed on the next
+page. Some overflow is still allowed and controlled via the parameter
+\verb=\maxbalancingoverflow=.
+
+The use of \verb=\enlargethispage= is now properly supported within
+the environment. Finally a new command \verb=\docolaction= was added
+to allow the execution of code depending on the column in which the
+command is executed. See the documentation for details.
+
+Bug fixes: the new version fixes both a color leak that could happen
+in certain situations and the problem that \texttt{multicols} could
+mess up the positioning of \verb=\marginpar=s that followed the
+environment.
+
+
+\paragraph{\textsf{tabularx} updates}
+
+The restrictions on embedding \verb|\tabularx| \verb|\endtabularx|
+into the definition of a new environment have been relaxed
+slightly. See the package documentation for details.
+
+\paragraph{\textsf{showkeys} updates}
+
+The \textsf{showkeys} package has been updated to fix problems if used
+at the start of list items, and to work if brace groups (\verb|{| and
+\verb|}|) are used in the optional argument of
+\verb|\cite|. (tools/4162, tools/4173)
+
+
+\paragraph{\textsf{color} updates}
+
+The \verb|\nopagecolor| command suggested by Heiko Oberdiek,
+available for some years in the \textsf{pdftex} option, has been
+added to the core package as suggested in graphics/3873. Currently
+this is supported in the driver files for \textsf{dvips} and
+\textsf{pdftex}. Patches to support other drivers are welcome.
+
+ \paragraph{\textsf{graphicx} updates}
+
+The \textsf{graphicx} version of \verb|\rotatebox| now allows
+\verb|\par| (and blank lines) in values, to match the change made
+to the \textsf{graphics} version some years ago. See graphics/4296.
+
+
+\paragraph{\textsf{keyval} updates}
+
+All parsing used in the \textsf{keyval} package has been changed
+to allow \verb|\par| (and blank lines) in values.
+(A second change, to parsing of brace groups
+in a construct such as \texttt{key=\{\{\{value\}\}\}}, was reverted in v1.15.)
+See graphics/3446.
+
+
+
+
+\vfill
+
+\section{Standard \LaTeX\ (\LaTeXe) and \textsf{expl3}}
+
+The substantial collection of innovative code in \textsf{expl3}
+implements a new programming language that has for a while now been
+used by some writers of \LaTeXe\ packages. This code has recently
+also been made available for use on top of plain \TeX\ or {\ConTeXt},
+largely to support generic packages that are supposed to work with
+different flavours of \TeX. These uses in no way affect authors of
+\LaTeX\ documents and such \LaTeXe\ packages will continue to work as
+advertised by their authors with standard \LaTeX.
+
+This code base will also become an important foundation for the kernel
+of \LaTeX3 and so the new programming language can be described as
+`The \LaTeX3 Programming Language'. However, if you see or hear that a
+package `uses \LaTeX3' then it remains very unlikely (as yet) to mean
+that the package is part of some `new version of \LaTeX'.
+
+News about the development and use of \textsf{expl3} and about other
+developments in the \LaTeX3 code base is reported regularly in the
+\LaTeX3~News series (\url{http://latex-project.org/l3news/}), the most
+recent issue of which was published in March 2014.
+
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews21.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews22.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews22.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews22.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews22.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews22.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews22.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews22.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews22.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2015-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews22.tex
+%
+% This is issue 22 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass{ltnews}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\usepackage{lmodern,url,hologo}
+
+\publicationmonth{January}
+\publicationyear{2015}
+
+\publicationissue{22}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{New \LaTeXe\ bug-fix policy}
+
+\subsection{Introduction}
+
+For some years we have supplied bug fixes to the \LaTeXe\ kernel via the
+\textsf{fixltx2e} package. This
+kept the kernel stable, but at the expense of meaning that most users did not
+benefit from bug fixes, and that some compromises
+which were made to save space in the
+machines of the time are still affecting most users today.
+
+In this release we have started a new update policy. All the fixes previously
+available via \textsf{fixltx2e} are now enabled \emph{by default} in the
+format, as are some further extensions for extended \TeX\ engines, \eTeX,
+\hologo{XeTeX} and \hologo{LuaTeX}. Compatibility and stability are still
+important considerations, and while most users will not notice these
+improvements, or will want to benefit from them, a new \textsf{latexrelease}
+package is provided that will revert all the changes and re-instate the
+definitions from earlier releases. The package can also be used with older
+releases to effectively \emph{update} the kernel to be equivalent to this 2015
+release.
+
+A new document, \textsf{latexchanges}, is distributed with the release
+that documents all the changes to documented commands since the 2014
+\LaTeX\ release, and will be updated in future releases if further
+changes have been made.
+
+\subsection{The \textsf{latexrelease} package}
+
+As noted above a new package is available to manage differences between \LaTeX\
+releases. If you wish to revert all changes back to the definitions as they
+were in previous releases you may start your document requesting the \LaTeX{} release from May~2014:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\RequirePackage[2014/05/01]{latexrelease}
+\documentclass{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+Conversely if you start a large project now and want to protect yourself
+against possible future changes, you may start your document
+\begin{verbatim}
+\RequirePackage[2015/01/01]{latexrelease}
+\documentclass{article}
+\end{verbatim}
+Then the version of \textsf{latexrelease} distributed with any future \LaTeX\
+release will revert any changes made in that format, and revert to the
+definitions as they where at the beginning of 2015.
+
+If you wish to share a document using the latest features with a
+user restricted to using an older
+format, you may use the form above and make the \textsf{latexrelease} package
+available on the older installation. The package will then update the format
+definitions as needed to enable the older format to work as if dated on the date
+specified in the package option.
+
+\subsection{The \cs{IncludeInRelease} command}
+
+The mechanism used in the \textsf{latexrelease} package is available for use in
+package code. If in your \textsf{zzz} package you have
+\begin{verbatim}
+\RequirePackage{latexrelease}
+\IncludeInRelease{2015/06/01}
+ {\zzz}{\zzz definition}
+ \def\zzz......new code
+\EndIncludeInRelease
+\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}
+ {\zzz}{\zzz definition}
+ \def\zzz....original
+\EndIncludeInRelease
+\end{verbatim}
+then in a document using a format dated 2015/06/01 or later, the ``new code''
+will be used, and for documents being processed with an older format, the
+``original'' code will be used. Note the format date here may be the original
+format date as shown at the start of every \LaTeX\ run, or a format date
+specified as a package option to the \textsf{latexrelease} package.
+
+So if the document has
+\begin{verbatim}
+\RequirePackage[2014/05/01]{latexrelease}
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{zzz}
+\end{verbatim}
+then it will use the \emph{original} definition of \verb|\zzz| even if
+processed with the current format, as the format acts as if dated 2014/05/01.
+
+
+\subsection{Limitations of the approach}
+
+The new concept provides full backward and forward compatibility for
+the \LaTeX{} format, i.e., with the help of a current
+\textsf{latexrelease} package the kernel can emulate all released
+formats (starting with 2014/06/01\footnote{Patching an older format
+ most likely works too, given that the changes in the past have been
+ minimal, though this isn't guaranteed and hasn't been tested.}).
+
+
+However, this is not necessarily true for all packages.
+ Only if a package makes use of the \cs{IncludeInRelease}
+functionality will it adjust to the
+requested \LaTeX{} release date. Initially this will only be true for
+a few selected packages and in general it may not even be advisable for packages
+that have their own well-established release cycles and methods.
+
+Thus, to regenerate a document with 100\,\% compatible behavior
+it will still be necessary
+to archive it together with all its inputs, for example, by archiving
+the base distribution trees (and any modifications made). However, the
+fact that a document requests a specific \LaTeX{} release date should
+help identifying what release tree to use to achieve perfect accuracy.
+
+
+\section{Updates to the kernel}
+
+\subsection{Updates incorporated from \textsf{fixltx2e}}
+
+The detailed list of changes incorporated from \textsf{fixltx2e} is
+available in the new \textsf{latexchanges} document that is
+distributed with this release. The main changes are that $2$-column
+floats are kept in sequence with one column floats, corrections are
+made to the \verb|\mark| system to ensure correct page headings in
+$2$-column documents, several additional commands are made robust.
+
+\subsection{\eTeX\ register allocation}
+
+\LaTeX\ has traditionally used allocation routines inherited from plain \TeX\
+that allocated registers in the range $0$--$255$. Almost all distributions have
+for some years used \eTeX\ based formats (or \hologo{XeTeX} or \hologo{LuaTeX})
+which have $2^{15}$ registers of each type ($2^{16}$ in the case of
+\hologo{LuaTeX}). The \textsf{etex} package has been available to provided an
+allocation mechanism for these extended registers but now the format will by
+default allocate in a range suitable for the engine being used. The new
+allocation mechanism is different than the \textsf{etex} package mechanism, and
+supports \hologo{LuaTeX}'s full range and an allocation mechanism for \LaTeX\
+floats as described below.
+
+On \eTeX\ based engines, an additional command, \verb|\newmarks| is available
+(as with the \textsf{etex} package) that allocates extended \eTeX\ marks, and
+similarly if \hologo{XeTeX} is detected a new command
+\verb|\newXeTeXintercharclass| is available, this is similar to the command
+previously defined in the \texttt{xelatex.ini} file used to build the
+\texttt{xelatex} format.
+
+\subsection{Additional \LaTeX{} float storage}
+
+\LaTeX's float placement algorithm needs to store floats (figures and tables)
+until it finds a suitable page to output them. It allocates $18$ registers for
+this storage, but this can often be insufficient.
+ The contributed \textsf{morefloats} package has
+been available to extend this list; however, it also only allocates from the
+standard range $0$--$255$ so cannot take advantage of the extended registers.
+The new allocation mechanism in this release incorporates a new command
+\verb|\extrafloats|. If you get the error:
+\mbox{\texttt{Too many unprocessed floats.}}
+then you can add (say) \verb|\extrafloats{500}| to the document preamble to
+make many more boxes available to hold floats.
+
+
+\subsection{Built-in support for Unicode engines}
+
+The kernel sources now detect the engine being used and adjust definitions
+accordingly, this reduces the need for the ``\texttt{.ini}'' files used to make
+the formats to patch definitions defined in \texttt{latex.ltx}.
+
+As noted above the format now includes extended allocation routines.
+
+The distribution includes a file \textsf{unicode-letters.def} derived from the
+Unicode Consortium's Unicode Character Data files that details the upper and
+lower case transformation data for the full Unicode range. This is used to set
+the \verb|lccode| and \verb|uccode| values if a Unicode engine is being used,
+rather than the values derived from the T1 font encoding which are used with
+8-bit engines.
+
+Finally \verb|\typein| is modified if \hologo{LuaTeX} is detected
+such that it works with this engine.
+
+\section{l3build}
+
+This release has been tested and built using a new build system implemented in
+\textsf{Lua}, intended to be run on the \textsf{texlua} interpreter distributed
+with modern \TeX\ distributions. It is already separately available
+from CTAN. This replaces earlier build systems (based at various times on
+\textsf{make}, \textsf{cons}, and Windows \textsf{bat} files). It allows the
+sources to be tested and packaged on a range of platforms (within the team,
+OS X, Windows, Linux and Cygwin platforms are used). It also allows the
+format to be tested on \hologo{XeTeX} and \hologo{LuaTeX} as well as the
+standard \hologo{pdfTeX}/\eTeX\ engines.
+
+\section{Hyperlinked documentation and TDS zip files}
+
+As well as updating the build system, the team have looked again at exactly
+what gets released to \textsc{ctan}. Taking inspiration from Heiko Oberdiek's
+\textsf{latex-tds} bundle, the PDF documentation provided now includes
+hyperlinks where appropriate. This has been done without modifying the sources
+such that users without \textsf{hyperref} available can still typeset the
+documentation using only the core distribution. At the same time, the release
+now includes ready-to-install TDS-style zip files. This will be of principal
+interest to \TeX\ system maintainers, but end users with older machines who
+wish to manually update \LaTeX\ will also benefit.
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews22.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews23.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews23.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews23.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews23.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews23.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews23.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews23.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews23.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,257 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2015-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews23.tex
+%
+% This is issue 23 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass{ltnews}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\usepackage{lmodern,url,hologo}
+
+\makeatletter % -- provide command introduced in new release
+ % so this typesets with an old format
+
+% Check we are not in the preamble of a composite document
+\def\@tempa{\@latex at error{Can be used only in preamble}\@eha}
+\ifx\DeclareTextCommandDefault\@tempa
+\else
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault\textcommabelow[1]
+ {\hmode at bgroup\ooalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\raise-.31ex
+ \hbox{\check at mathfonts\fontsize\ssf at size\z@
+ \math at fontsfalse\selectfont,}\hidewidth}\egroup}
+\fi
+\makeatother
+
+\publicationmonth{October}
+\publicationyear{2015}
+
+\publicationissue{23}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Enhanced support for \hologo{LuaTeX}}
+
+As noted in \LaTeX\ News 22, the 2015/01/01 release of \LaTeX{}
+introduced built-in support for extended \TeX\ systems.
+
+The range of allocated register numbers (for example, for count
+registers) is now set according to the underlying engine capabilities
+to 256, 32768 or 65536. Additional allocators were also added for the
+facilities added by \hologo{eTeX} (\verb|\newmark|) and \hologo{XeTeX}
+(\verb|\newXeTeXintercharclass|). At that time, however, the work to
+incorporate additional allocators for \hologo{LuaTeX} was not ready for
+distribution.
+
+The main feature of this release is that by default it includes
+allocators for \hologo{LuaTeX}-provided features, such as Lua
+functions, bytecode registers, catcode tables and Lua callbacks.
+Previously these features have been provided by the contributed
+\package{luatex} (Heiko Oberdiek) and \package{luatexbase}
+(\'{E}lie Roux,
+ Manuel P\'{e}gouri\'{e}-Gonnard and Philipp Gesang)
+packages. However, just as
+noted with the \package{etex} package in the previous release, it is
+better if allocation is handled by the format to avoid problems with
+conflicts between different allocation schemes, or definitions made
+before a package-defined allocation scheme is enabled.
+
+The facilities incorporated into the format with this release, and
+described below, are closely modelled on the \package{luatexbase}
+package and we thank the authors, and especially \'{E}lie Roux, for
+help in arranging this transition.
+
+The implementation of these \hologo{LuaTeX} features has been
+redesigned to match the allocation system introduced in the 2015/01/01
+\LaTeX\ release, and there are some other differences from the previous
+\package{luatexbase} package. However, as noted below,
+\package{luatexbase} is being updated in line with this \LaTeX\ release
+to provide the previous interface as a wrapper around the new
+implementation, so we expect the majority of documents using
+\package{luatexbase} to work without change.
+
+\subsection{Names of \hologo{LuaTeX} primitive commands}
+
+The 2015/01/01 \LaTeX\ release for the first time initialised
+\hologo{LuaTeX} in \textsf{latex.ltx} if \hologo{LuaTeX} is being
+used. Following the convention used in the contributed
+\textsf{lualatex.ini} file used to set up the format for earlier
+releases, most \hologo{LuaTeX}-specific primitives were defined with
+names prefixed by \texttt{luatex}. This was designed to minimize name
+clashes but had the disadvantage that names did not match the
+\hologo{LuaTeX} manual, or the names used in other formats, and
+produced some awkward command names such as \verb|\luatexluafunction|.
+From this release the names are enabled without the \texttt{luatex}
+prefix.
+
+In practice this change should not affect many documents; relatively
+few packages access the primitive commands, and many of those are
+already set up to work with prefixed or unprefixed names, so that they
+work with multiple formats.
+
+For package writers, if you want to ensure that your code works with
+this and earlier releases, use unprefixed names in the package and
+ensure that they are defined by using code such as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\directlua{tex.enableprimitives("",
+ tex.extraprimitives(
+ "omega", "aleph", "luatex"))}
+\end{verbatim}
+Conversely if your document uses a package relying on prefixed names
+then you can add:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\directlua{tex.enableprimitives("luatex",
+ tex.extraprimitives(
+ "omega", "aleph", "luatex"))}
+\end{verbatim}
+to your document.
+
+Note the compatibility layer offered by the \package{luatexbase} package
+described below makes several commands available under both names.
+
+As always, this change can be reverted using:\\
+\verb|\RequirePackage[2015/01/01]{latexrelease}|\\
+at the start of the document.
+
+
+
+\subsection{\TeX\ commands for allocation in \hologo{LuaTeX}}
+For detailed descriptions of the new allocation commands see the
+documented sources in \textsf{ltluatex.dtx} or chapter N of
+\textsf{source2e}; however, the following new allocation commands are
+defined by default in \hologo{LuaTeX}:
+\verb|\newattribute|,
+\verb|\newcatcodetable|,
+\verb|\newluafunction| and
+\verb|\newwhatsit|.
+In addition, the commands \verb|\setattribute| and
+\verb|\unsetattribute| are defined to set and unset Lua attributes
+(integer values similar to counters, but attached to nodes). Finally
+several catcode tables are predefined:
+\verb|\catcodetable at initex|,
+\verb|\catcodetable at string|,
+\verb|\catcodetable at latex|,
+\verb|\catcodetable at atletter|.
+
+\subsection{Predefined Lua functions}
+If used with \hologo{LuaTeX}, \LaTeX\ will initialise a Lua table,
+\textsf{luatexbase}, with functions supporting allocation and also
+the registering of Lua callback functions.
+
+\subsection{Support for older releases and plain \TeX}
+The \hologo{LuaTeX} allocation functionality made available in this
+release is also available in plain \TeX\ and older \LaTeX\ releases
+in the files \textsf{ltluatex.tex} and \textsf{ltluatex.lua} which may be
+used simply by including the \TeX\ file: \verb|\input{ltluatex}|.
+An alternative for old \LaTeX\ releases is to use:\\
+\verb|\RequirePackage[2015/10/01]{latexrelease}|\\
+which will update the kernel to the current release, including
+\hologo{LuaTeX} support.
+
+\subsection{Additional \hologo{LuaTeX} support packages}
+In addition to the base \LaTeX\ release two packages have been
+contributed to the \textsf{contrib} area on CTAN. The
+\package{ctablestack} package offers some commands to help package
+writers control the \hologo{LuaTeX} \textsf{catcodetable}
+functionality, and the \package{luatexbase} package replaces the
+previously available package of the same name, providing a compatible
+interface but implemented over the \package{ltluatex} code.
+
+\section{More Floats and Inserts}
+If \hologo{eTeX} is available, the number of registers allocated in
+the format to hold floats such as figures is increased from 18 to 52.
+
+The extended allocation system introduced in 2015/01/01 means that in
+most cases it is no longer necessary to load the \package{etex}
+package. Many classes and packages that previously loaded this package
+no longer do so. Unfortunately in some circumstances where a package
+or class previously used the \package{etex} \verb|\reserveinserts|
+command, it is possible for a document that previously worked to
+generate an error ``no room for a new insert''. In practice this error
+can always be avoided by declaring inserts earlier, before the
+registers below 256 are all allocated. However, it is better not
+to require packages to be re-ordered and in some cases the re-ordering
+is complicated due to delayed allocations in \verb|\AtBeginDocument|.
+
+In this release, a new implementation of
+\verb|\newinsert| is used which allocates inserts from the previously
+allocated float lists once the classical register allocation has run
+out. This allows an extra 52 (or in \hologo{LuaTeX}, 64~thousand)
+insert allocations which is more than enough for practical documents
+(by default, \LaTeX\ only uses two insert allocations).
+
+\section{Updated Unicode data}
+
+
+The file \textsf{unicode-letters.def} recording catcodes, upper and
+lower case mappings and other properties for Unicode characters has
+been regenerated using the data files from Unicode~8.0.0.
+
+\section{Support for Comma Accent}
+The command \verb|\textcommabelow| has been added to the format.
+This is mainly used for the Romanian letters
+\textcommabelow{S}\textcommabelow{s}\textcommabelow{T}\textcommabelow{t}.
+This was requested in latex/4414 in the \LaTeX\ bug tracker.
+
+\section{Extended \package{inputenc}}
+The \texttt{utf8} option for \package{inputenc} has been extended to support
+the letters s and t with comma accent,
+U+0218\,--\,U+021b. Similarly circumflex w and y U+0174\,--\,U+0177 are defined.
+Also U+00a0 and U+00ad are declared by default, and defined to be
+\verb|\nobreakspace| and \verb|\-| respectively.
+
+The error message given on undefined UTF-8 input characters
+now displays the Unicode number
+in U+\textit{hex} format in addition
+to showing the character.
+
+\section{Pre-release Releases}
+The patch level mechanism has been used previously to identify \LaTeX\
+releases that have small patches applied to the main release, without
+changing the main format date.
+
+The mechanism has now been extended to allow identification of
+pre-release versions of the software (which may or may not be released
+via CTAN) but can be identified with a banner such as\\
+{\catcode`\<=13 \def<{\string<} \catcode`\>=13 \def>{\string>}%
+\verb|LaTeX2e <2015/10/01> pre-release-1|}\\
+Internally this is identified as a patch release with a negative patch
+level.
+
+\section{Updates in tools}
+
+The \package{multicol} package has been updated to fix the interaction
+with ``here'' floats that land on the same page as the start or end of
+a \textsf{multicols} environment.
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews23.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews24.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews24.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews24.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews24.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews24.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews24.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews24.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews24.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,263 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2015-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews24.tex
+%
+% This is issue 24 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass{ltnews}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\usepackage{lmodern,url,hologo}
+
+\makeatletter % -- provide command introduced in new release
+ % so this typesets with an old format
+
+% Check we are not in the preamble of a composite document
+\def\@tempa{\@latex at error{Can be used only in preamble}\@eha}
+\ifx\DeclareTextCommandDefault\@tempa
+\else
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault\textcommabelow[1]
+ {\hmode at bgroup\ooalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\raise-.31ex
+ \hbox{\check at mathfonts\fontsize\ssf at size\z@
+ \math at fontsfalse\selectfont,}\hidewidth}\egroup}
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault\textcommaabove[1]{%
+ \hmode at bgroup
+ \ooalign{%
+ \hidewidth
+ \raise.7ex\hbox{%
+ \check at mathfonts\fontsize\ssf at size\z@\math at fontsfalse\selectfont`%
+ }%
+ \hidewidth\crcr
+ \null#1\crcr
+ }%
+ \egroup
+ }
+\fi
+
+\makeatother
+
+\publicationmonth{February}
+\publicationyear{2016}
+
+\publicationissue{24}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{\hologo{LuaTeX} support}
+
+This release refines the \hologo{LuaTeX} support introduced in the
+2015/10/01 release. A number of patches have been added to improve the
+behavior of \package{ltluatex} (thanks largely to code review by Philipp Gesang).
+The kernel code has been adjusted to
+allow for changes in \hologo{LuaTeX} v0.85--v0.88. Most notably, newer
+\hologo{LuaTeX} releases allow more than $16$ write streams and these are now
+enabled for use by \verb|\newwrite|, but also the experimental
+\texttt{newtoken} Lua library has been renamed back to \texttt{token}
+which required small adjustments in the \hologo{LuaTeX} setup.
+
+The biggest change in \hologo{LuaTeX} v0.85--v0.87 compared to previous
+versions is that all the primitives (originally defined in
+\hologo{pdfTeX}) dealing with the PDF ``back end''
+are no longer defined, being replaced by a much smaller set of new primitives.
+This does not directly affect the core \LaTeX{}
+files in this release but has required major changes to the
+\texttt{.ini} files used by \TeX{} Live and similar distributions to
+set up the format files. These changes in the \hologo{LuaTeX} engine
+will affect any packages using these back end commands (packages such
+as \package{graphics}, \package{color}, \package{hyperref}, etc.).
+Until all contributed packages are updated to the new syntax users may
+need to add aliases for the old \hologo{pdfTeX} commands. A new
+\package{luapdftexalias} package has been contributed to CTAN (not part of the
+core \LaTeX\ release) that may be used for this purpose.
+
+See also the sections below for related changes in the
+\textsf{tools} and \textsf{graphics} bundles.
+
+
+\section{Unicode data}
+
+As noted in \LaTeX{} News~22, the 2015/01/01 release of \LaTeX{} introduced
+built-in support for extended \TeX{} systems. In particular, the kernel now
+loads appropriate data from the Unicode Consortium to set \verb|\lccode|,
+\verb|\uccode|, \verb|\catcode| and \verb|\sfcode| values in an automated
+fashion for the entire Unicode range.
+
+The initial approach taken by the team was to incorporate the existing model
+used by (plain) \hologo{XeTeX} and to pre-process the ``raw'' Unicode data into
+a ready-to-use form as \verb|unicode-letters.def|. However, the relationship
+between the Unicode Consortium files and \TeX{} data structures is non-trivial and still
+being explored. As such, it is preferable to directly parse the original
+(\verb|.txt|) files at point of use. The team has therefore ``spun-out'' both
+the data and the loading to a new generic package, \package{unicode-data}. This
+package makes the original Unicode Consortium data files available in the
+\verb|texmf| tree (in \verb|tex/generic/unicode-data|) and provides generic
+loaders suitable for reading this data into the plain, \LaTeXe{}, and other,
+formats.
+
+At present, the following data files are included in this new package:
+\begin{itemize}\parskip=0pt
+ \item \verb|CaseFolding.txt|
+ \item \verb|EastAsianWidth.txt|
+ \item \verb|LineBreak.txt|
+ \item \verb|MathClass.txt|
+ \item \verb|SpecialCasing.txt|
+ \item \verb|UnicodeData.txt|
+\end{itemize}
+These files are used either by \LaTeXe{} or by \package{expl3}
+(i.e.~they represent the set currently required by the team). The
+Unicode Consortium provides various other data files and we would be happy to add
+these to the generic package, as it is intended to provide a single place
+to collect this material in the \verb|texmf| tree. Such requests can be
+mailed to the team as~usual or logged at the package home page:
+\url{https://github.com/latex3/unicode-data}.
+
+The new approach extends use of Unicode data in setting \TeX{} information in
+two ways. First, the \verb|\sfcode| of all end-of-quotation/closing punctuation
+is now set to $0$ (transparent to \TeX{}). Second, \verb|\Umathcode| values are
+now set using \verb|MathClass.txt| rather than setting up only letters (which
+was done using an arbitrary plane~$0$/plane~$1$ separation). There are also
+minor refinements to the existing code setting, particularly splitting the
+concepts of case and letter/non-letter category codes.
+
+For \hologo{XeTeX}, users should note that \verb|\xtxHanGlue| and
+\verb|\xtxHanSpace| are \emph{no longer defined}, that no assignments are made
+to \verb|\XeTeXinterchartoks| and that no \verb|\XeTeXintercharclass| data is
+loaded into the format. The values which were previously inherited from
+the plain \hologo{XeTeX} setup files are \emph{not} suitable for properly
+typesetting East Asian text. There are third-party packages addressing this
+area well, notably those in the \package{CTeX} bundle. Third-party packages
+may need adjustment to load the data themselves; see the \textsf{unicode-data}
+package for one possible loader.
+
+\section{More support for east European accents}
+
+As noted in \LaTeX{} News~23, comma accent support was added for \texttt{s} and
+\texttt{t} in the 2015/10/01 release. In this release a matching
+\verb|\textcommaabove| accent has been added for U+0123 (\verb|\c{g}|,
+\textcommaabove{g}) which is the lower case of U+0122 (\verb|\c{G}|,
+\textcommabelow{G}). In the OT1 and T1 encodings the combinations are
+declared as composites with the \verb|\c| command, which matches the
+Unicode names ``\textsf{latin (capital|small) letter g with cedilla}'' and
+also allows \verb|\MakeUppercase{\c{g}}| to produce \verb|\c{G}|, as
+required. In T1 encoding, the composite of \verb|\c| with \texttt{k}, \texttt{l},
+\texttt{n} and \texttt{r} are also
+declared to use the comma below accent rather than cedilla to match the
+conventional use of these letters.
+
+The UTF-8 \texttt{inputenc} option \texttt{utf8} has been extended to
+support all latin combinations that can be reasonably constructed with a
+(single) accent command an a base character for the T1 encoding so
+\textcommaabove{g}, \k{u} and similar characters may be directly input
+using UTF-8 encoding.
+
+\section{Changes in Graphics}
+
+The changes in \hologo{LuaTeX}~v0.87 mean that the \package{color} and
+\package{graphics} packages no longer share the \texttt{pdftex.def} file
+between \hologo{LuaTeX} and \hologo{pdfTeX}. A separate file
+\texttt{luatex.def} (distributed separately) has been produced, and
+distributions are encouraged to modify \texttt{graphics.cfg} and
+\texttt{color.cfg} configuration files to default to the \texttt{luatex}
+option if \hologo{LuaTeX}~v0.87 or later is being used. The team has
+contributed suitable \texttt{.cfg} files to CTAN to be used
+as models.
+
+Normally it is best to let the local \texttt{graphics.cfg}
+automatically supply the right option depending on the \TeX\ engine
+being used; however the \package{color} and \package{graphics} (and so
+\package{graphicx}) packages have been extended to have an explicit
+\texttt{luatex} option comparable to the existing \texttt{pdftex} and
+\texttt{xetex} options.
+
+The \package{trig} package has been updated so that pre-computed values
+such as $\sin(90)$ now expand to digits (\texttt{1} rather than the
+internal token \verb|\@one| in this case). This allows them to be used
+directly in PDF literal strings.
+
+\section{Changes in Tools}
+
+\hologo{LuaTeX} from version v0.87 no longer supports the
+\verb|\write18| syntax to access system commands. A new package
+\package{shellesc} has been added to \textsf{tools} that defines a new
+command \verb|\ShellEscape| that may be used in all \TeX\ variants to
+provide a consistent access to system commands. The package also
+defines \verb|\write18| in \hologo{LuaTeX} so that it continues to access
+system commands as before; see the package documentation for details.
+
+\section{Improving support for Unicode engines}
+
+\looseness=-1
+Stability concerns are always paramount when considering any change to
+the \LaTeXe{} kernel. At the same time, it is important that the format
+remains usable and gives reliable results for users. For the Unicode
+\TeX{} engines \hologo{XeTeX} and \hologo{LuaTeX} there are important
+differences in behavior from classical ($8$-bit) \TeX{} engines which
+mean that identical default behaviors are not appropriate. Over the
+past 18 months the team has addressed the most pressing of these
+considerations (as detailed above and in \LaTeX{} News~22 and 23),
+primarily by integrating existing patches into the kernel. There are,
+though, important areas which still need consideration, and which
+\emph{may} result in refinements to kernel support in this area in
+future releases.
+
+The default font setup in \LaTeXe{} at present is to use the \texttt{OT1}
+encoding. This assumes that hyphenation patterns have been read using
+appropriate codes: the \texttt{T1} encoding is assumed. The commonly-used
+hyphenation patterns today, \package{hyph-utf8}, are set up in this
+way for $8$-bit engines (\hologo{pdfTeX}) but for Unicode engines use
+Unicode code points. This means that hyphenation will be incorrect
+with Unicode engines unless a Unicode font is loaded. This requires
+a concept of a Unicode font encoding, which is currently provided by
+the \package{fontspec} package in two versions, \texttt{EU1} and
+\texttt{EU2}. The team is working to fully understand what is meant
+by a ``Unicode font encoding'', as unlike a classical \TeX{} encoding
+it is essentially impossible to know what glyphs will be provided
+(though each slot is always defined with the same meaning). There
+is also an overlap between this area and ideas of language and writing
+system, most obviously in documents featuring mixed scripts (for example
+Latin and Cyrillic).
+
+As well as these font considerations, the team is also exploring
+to what extent it is possible to allow existing ($8$-bit)
+documents to compile directly with Unicode engines without requiring
+changes in the sources. Whether this is truly possible remains an open
+question.
+
+It is important to stress that changes will only be made in this area where
+they do \emph{not} affect documents processed with
+\hologo{eTeX}/\hologo{pdfTeX} (i.e.~documents which are written for
+``classical'' $8$-bit \TeX{} engines). Changes will also be made only where
+they clearly address deficiencies in the current setup for Unicode engines
+(i.e.~where current behaviors are wrong).
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews24.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews25.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews25.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews25.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews25.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews25.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews25.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews25.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews25.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,137 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2016-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews25.tex
+%
+% This is issue 25 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass{ltnews}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\usepackage{lmodern,url,hologo}
+
+
+\publicationmonth{March}
+\publicationyear{2016}
+
+\publicationissue{25}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Lua\TeX}
+This \LaTeX\ release sees several internal changes designed to ensure
+that the system is still usable with Lua\TeX\ versions greater than
+0.80, which have introduced many changes into the engine, most notably
+the removal or renaming of most of the primitive commands introduced by
+pdf\TeX. Also the lists of Lua callbacks handled by the callback
+allocation mechanism has been updated to match the callbacks defined
+in Lua\TeX\ version 0.90.
+
+These changes have also required updates in \textsf{tools}
+and \textsf{amsmath} as described below.
+
+This is the first release of \LaTeX\ for which the test suite reports
+no failures when used with Lua\TeX.
+
+\section{Documentation checksums}
+The \package{doc} package has always provided two mechanisms that were
+mainly intended to guard against file truncation or corruption when
+files were commonly distributed by email through unreliable mail
+gateways: a Character Table of the ASCII character set could be
+inserted (and checked) and a ``checksum'' (count of the number of
+backslashes in the code sections) could be checked. These features
+are not really needed with modern distribution mechanisms and can be a
+distraction when reading the source code and so have been removed. The
+\package{doc} package has been updated so that if you use a
+\verb|\CheckSum| command then, as before, the number is checked;
+however, if you omit the command then no error or warning is given.
+
+
+\section{Updates to \package{inputenc}}
+
+The UTF-8 support in \package{inputenc} has been further extended with
+support for non-breaking hyphens and more dashes.
+
+\section{Updates in Tools}
+
+The \package{varioref} package has been updated with improved
+documentation of multi\-lingual support, and avoiding unnecessary warnings in
+some cases with \verb|\reftextfaraway|.
+
+The \package{tabularx} package's handling of \verb|\endtabularx| in
+environment definitions has been fixed to again match its documentation.
+
+The \package{bm} package has been updated as required by the changes
+to \verb|\mathchardef| in Lua\TeX.
+
+
+\section{amsmath}
+
+Since the launch of \LaTeXe\ in 1993, the \textsf{amsmath} bundle has
+been part of the \emph{required} packages in the core \LaTeX\
+distribution, with bug reports handled by the \LaTeX\ bug database at
+\url{https://latex-project.org/bugs-upload.html}.
+
+The \textsf{amsmath} packages and the \textsf{amscls} classes have
+been maintained by the American Mathematical Society.
+
+With this release a new arrangement has been agreed between the
+American Mathematical Society and the \LaTeX3 project. The \LaTeX3
+project will take over maintenance of the \textsf{amsmath} bundle,
+with the American Mathematical Society retaining maintenance of
+\textsf{amscls}.
+
+The recommended installation of these files in the \TeX\ directory
+structure remains unchanged as \path|tex/latex/amsmath| and
+\path|tex/latex/amscls| respectively.
+
+This release of \package{amsmath} includes several updates so that
+\package{amsmath} does not generate errors when math is used with
+Lua\TeX\ v0.87+, which has changes to \verb|\mathchardef| that are
+incompatible with the previous version of \package{amsmath}. It also
+improves \verb|\dots| handling so that \verb|\long| macros are
+correctly handled (for example, \verb|\dots \Rightarrow| now
+uses centered dots), as well as commands expanding to character tokens
+(for example, \verb|\times \dots \times| will use centered dots with
+\verb|\times| defined as in the \package{unicode-math} package).
+
+\section{Related updates}
+In addition to the updates in the core \LaTeX\ release, some files in
+the CTAN ``contrib'' area have also been updated. Notably there have
+been further updates to the \textsf{unicode-data} files; also, the
+files required to build plain and \LaTeX\ formats have now been
+submitted to CTAN as \textsf{tex-ini-files}. The
+addition of a new \texttt{luatex} option for \textsf{graphics}-related
+packages (\textsf{luatex-def} on CTAN) has required updates to the
+configuration files to select a
+default option and these have similarly been uploaded to CTAN as
+\textsf{graphics-cfg}. (Previously these files were maintained
+directly in the \TeX\ Live repository, and were not available on CTAN.)
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews25.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews26.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews26.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews26.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews26.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews26.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews26.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews26.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews26.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,239 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2017-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews26.tex
+%
+% This is issue 26 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass{ltnews}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\usepackage{lmodern,url,hologo}
+
+\publicationmonth{January}
+\publicationyear{2017}
+
+\publicationissue{26}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+
+\setlength\rightskip{0pt plus 3em}
+\section{\eTeX{}}
+
+In \LaTeX{} News~16 (December 2003) the team announced
+\begin{quotation}
+We expect that within the next two years, releases of \LaTeX{} will
+change modestly in order to run best under an extended \TeX{} engine
+that contains the \eTeX{} primitives, e.g., \eTeX{} or pdf\TeX{}.
+\end{quotation}
+and also said
+\begin{quotation}
+Although the current release does not \emph{require} \eTeX{} features, we
+certainly recommend using an extended \TeX{}, especially if you need to debug
+macros.
+\end{quotation}
+
+For many years the team have worked on the basis that users will have \eTeX{}
+available but had not revisited the above statements formally. As of the
+January 2017 release of \LaTeXe{}, \eTeX{} is \emph{required} to build the
+format, and attempting to build a format without the extensions will fail.
+
+Practically, modern \TeX{} distributions provide the extensions in all engines
+other than the ``pure'' Knuth \texttt{tex}, and indeed parts of the
+format-building process already require \eTeX{}, most notably some of the UTF-8
+hyphenation patterns. As such, there should be no noticeable effect on users of
+this change.
+
+The team expect to make wider use of \eTeX{} within the kernel in future;
+details will be announced where they impact on end users in a visible way.
+
+\section{Default encodings in \hologo{XeLaTeX} and \hologo{LuaLaTeX}}
+The default encoding in \LaTeX\ has always been the original
+128-character encoding \texttt{OT1}. For Unicode based \TeX\ engines, this
+is not really suitable, and is especially problematic with
+\hologo{XeLaTeX} as in the major distributions this is built with
+Unicode based hyphenation patterns in the format. In practice this has
+not been a major problem as documents use the contributed
+\textsf{fontspec} package in order to switch to a
+Unicode encoded font.
+
+In this release we are adding \texttt{TU} as a new supported
+encoding in addition to the previously supported encodings such as \texttt{OT1}
+and \texttt{T1}. This denotes a Unicode based font encoding. It is essentially
+the same as the \texttt{TU} encoding that has been on trial with the
+experimental \texttt{tuenc} option to \textsf{fontspec} for the past
+year.
+
+The \hologo{XeLaTeX} and \hologo{LuaLaTeX} formats will now default
+to \texttt{TU} encoding and \texttt{lmr} (Latin Modern) family. In the
+case of \hologo{LuaLaTeX} the contributed \textsf{luaotfload} Lua
+module will be loaded at the start of each run to enable the loading
+of OpenType fonts.
+
+The \textsf{fontspec} package is being adjusted in a companion release
+to recognise the new encoding default arrangements.
+
+Note that in practice no font supports the full Unicode range, and so
+\texttt{TU} encoded fonts, unlike fonts specified for \texttt{T1}, may be
+expected to be incomplete in various ways. In the current release the file
+\texttt{tuenc.def} that implements the \texttt{TU} encoding-specific commands
+has made some basic assumptions for (for example) default handling of
+accent commands, and the set of command names is derived from the
+command names used for the UTF-8 support in the \textsf{inputenc} package,
+restricted roughly to the character ranges classically provided by
+the \texttt{T1} and \texttt{TS1} encodings, but is part of a longer term plan
+seen over recent releases to increase support for Unicode based \TeX\ engines
+into the core \LaTeX\ support.
+
+
+
+If for any reason you need to process a document with the previous
+default \texttt{OT1} encoding, you may switch encoding in the usual ways, for
+example
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[OT1]{fontenc}
+\end{verbatim}
+or you may roll back all the changes for this release by starting the
+document with
+\begin{verbatim}
+\RequirePackage[2016/12/31]{latexrelease}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{\cs{showhyphens} in \hologo{XeLaTeX}}
+Due to the way \hologo{XeLaTeX} interfaces to font libraries, the
+standard definition of \cs{showhyphens} does not work. A variant
+definition has been available in the contributed \textsf{xltxtra}
+package, however a (slightly different) definition for \cs{showhyphens}
+is now included in \hologo{XeLaTeX} by default. As usual
+this change will be undone if an earlier
+release is specified using the \textsf{latexrelease} package.
+
+\section{The \textsf{fixltx2e} package}
+As described in \LaTeX{} News~22, the \textsf{fixltx2e} package has become
+obsolete with the new update policy. Since 2015 it has just made a
+warning and exited. In this release we have re-introduced all
+the code from the original fixes in the 2014 \LaTeX\ but guarded by
+\verb|\IncludeInRelease{2015/01/01}|.
+So for current releases \textsf{fixltx2e} still just displays a warning
+but for old releases, whether that is an old format, or a format with
+the version date reset via the \textsf{latexrelease} package, the
+fixes in the original \textsf{fixltx2e} will be applied.
+
+This improves the ability to run old documents in a way that is compatible
+with contemporary formats. If you have a 2014 document that used
+\verb|\usepackage{fixltx2e}| and you add
+\verb|\RequirePackage[2014/01/01]{latexrelease}| and process it with the
+current format then \textsf{latexrelease} will undo most changes made
+since 2014, but now when the document includes \textsf{fixltx2e} it
+will act like a 2014 version of the package and apply the code fixes,
+not just give a warning that the package is obsolete.
+
+\section{The \textsf{latexbug} package}
+
+As explained in more detail
+at the \LaTeX\ Project
+ website\footnote{\url{https://www.latex-project.org/bugs/}}
+a new package, \textsf{latexbug}, has been produced to help produce
+test files to accompany bug reports on the core \LaTeX\ distribution.
+This is being published separately to CTAN at the same time as this
+release. By using the \textsf{latexbug} package you can easily check
+that the packages involved in the test are all part of the core
+release. The \LaTeX\ project cannot handle bug reports on contributed
+packages, which should be directed to the package maintainer as given
+in the package documentation.
+
+\section{Updates to \textsf{amsmath}}
+The \textsf{amsmath} package has two updates at this release.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item The spacing to the left of the \texttt{aligned} and
+ \texttt{gathered} environments has been fixed: the spurious thin
+ space is no longer added by default. Package options control this
+ to revert to the original behaviour where required; see the
+ \textsf{amsldoc} guide for further details.
+\item The large delimiters around generalised fractions (for example
+ in the \cs{binom} construct) did not work in previous releases if
+ using \hologo{LuaTeX} or \hologo{XeTeX} with OpenType math fonts. This is
+ related to the lack of specific metrics for this use in the OpenType Math
+ table. In principle \hologo{LuaTeX} has two additional named metrics
+ to control the delimiters but these are not initialised by default,
+ and in \hologo{XeTeX} it does not seem possible to make them work at all.
+ So for Unicode \TeX\ systems, a new implementation of
+ \cs{genfrac} is used at this release that uses \verb|\left\right|
+ internally but parameterised to give spacing as close to the
+ original as possible. The implementation in (pdf)\TeX\ is
+ unaffected.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Updates to \textsf{tools}}
+The \textsf{array} package has been updated to fix a longstanding but
+previously unreported issue with unwanted interactions between tables
+in the page head or foot and the body of the page, as reported in
+\href{http://www.latex-project.org/cgi-bin/ltxbugs2html?pr=tools/4488}{PR
+ tools/4488}.
+There is also an update to the \hologo{LuaTeX} support in \textsf{bm}.
+
+\section{An addendum to the release changes in 2015: page breaks and vertical spacing}
+
+In 2015 we announced the introduction of the roll-back\slash
+roll-forward concept to manage bug fixes and additions to core
+\LaTeX{} in a manageable way. We also announced at that time
+that we now incorporate all fixes from \textsf{fixltx2e} into the
+kernel (as the old mechanism produced problems instead of improving
+the situation). Refer to
+\href{https://www.latex-project.org/news/latex2e-news/ltnews22.pdf}{\texttt{ltnews22.pdf}}
+for details.
+
+One of the fixes from \textsf{fixltx2e} was for a glaring bug in
+\cs{addvspace} that was originally detected in the mid-nineties and
+back then added to the \textsf{fixltx2e} support package. In certain
+situations \cs{addvspace} would result in a page/column break below
+the baseline of the last line. As a result documents using
+\cs{flushbottom} would show a clear misalignment (even more prominent
+when typesetting in two-column mode).
+
+Starting with release 2015/01/01 this is now finally corrected already
+in the kernel and not only in \textsf{fixltx2e}. In nearly all
+circumstances this will either make no difference to existing
+documents, or it will locally improve the visual appearance of that
+document without changing anything on other pages. However, by the
+nature of the change it is also possible that there are further
+non-local changes to the page breaks due to the different break
+positions introduced by the fix.
+
+Thus, for documents that have been written before 2015 and that should
+be preserved unchanged at all costs you may have to add
+\begin{verbatim}
+\RequirePackage[2014/01/01]{latexrelease}
+\end{verbatim}
+at the top of the document, to roll back the format to a date before
+the policy change.
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews26.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews27.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews27.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews27.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews27.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews27.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews27.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews27.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews27.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2017-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews27.tex
+%
+% This is issue 27 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass{ltnews}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\usepackage{lmodern,url,hologo}
+
+\publicationmonth{April}
+\publicationyear{2017}
+
+\publicationissue{27}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+
+\setlength\rightskip{0pt plus 3em}
+
+\section{ISO 8601 Date format}
+Since before the first releases of \LaTeXe, \LaTeX\ has used a date
+format in the form \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}. This has many advantages over more
+conventional formats, as it is easy to sort and avoids the unfortunate
+ambiguity between different communities as to whether 01/02/2017 is the
+1st of February or 2nd of January.
+
+However there is another date format, formalised by the
+International Standard ISO~8601. The basic format defined by this
+standard is functionally equivalent to the \LaTeX\ format, but using
+\texttt{-} rather than \texttt{/}. This date format is now supported
+in many Operating Systems and applications
+(for example the \verb|date --iso-8601| command in Linux and similar systems).
+
+From this release, \LaTeX\ will accept ISO format date strings in the
+date argument of \verb|\ProvidesPackage|, \verb|\usepackage|, etc.
+Currently we recommend that you do not use this format in any packages
+that need to work with older \LaTeX\ releases;
+the \textsf{latexrelease} package may be used with older releases to
+ add this functionality. This change is handled in a special way by
+ \textsf{latexrelease}: The package always adds support for ISO dates
+whatever format date is requested; this is required so that the
+necessary date comparisons may be made.
+
+The new functionality can be seen in the startup banner which
+advertises \texttt{LaTeX2e <2017-04-15>}.
+
+\section{Further TU encoding improvements}
+The 2017/01/01 release saw the introduction of the new TU encoding for
+specifying Unicode fonts with \hologo{LuaTeX} and
+\hologo{XeTeX}. There were a number of small corrections and additions
+in the patch releases updating 2017/01/01, and a further addition in
+this release, notably extended support for the dot-under accent,
+\verb|\d|.
+
+
+\section{Disabling hyphenation}
+The existing \LaTeX\ code for \verb|\verb| and \verb|verbatim| had some
+issues when used with fonts that were not loaded with hyphenation
+disabled via setting \verb|\hyphenchar| to $-1$. In this release these
+verbatim environments use a \verb|\language| setting,
+\verb|\l at nohyphenation|, that has no hyphenation patterns associated.
+
+The format ensures that a language has been allocated with this name.
+For most users this will in fact be no change as the standard
+\textsf{babel} language has for a long time allocated a language with
+this name.
+
+In order that page breaks in \texttt{verbatim} do not influence the
+language used in the page head and foot, the format now normalises the
+language used in the output routine to a default language as described
+below.
+
+\section{Discretionary hyphenation}
+The \LaTeX\ definition of \verb|\-| has been adjusted so that it will
+insert the current font's \verb|\hyphenchar|, as would the
+\TeX\ primitive. A comment in \textsf{source2e} has given
+this new definition since the first releases of \LaTeXe, and in this
+release we finally acted upon this comment. Previously \verb|\-|
+always inserted a \texttt{-} at a break point even if a different
+character would be used for automatic hyphenation with the current font.
+
+\section{Default document language}
+
+A new integer parameter \verb|\document at default@language| is
+introduced; this is initialised to $-1$ but is set at
+\verb|\begin{document}| to the language in force at that time if it
+ has not been set by preamble code. This is very similar to the
+ handling of the default color, and is used in a similar way to
+ normalise the settings for page head and foot as described above.
+Users should not normally need to set this explicitly but it is expected that
+language packages such as \textsf{babel} may set this if the default
+behaviour is not suitable.
+
+\section{Line spacing in parboxes}
+Inside a \verb|\parbox|
+\LaTeX\ normalises the baseline spacing. However it has not
+previously reset \verb|\lineskiplimit|. This meant that
+lines of a paragraph that have ascenders or descenders could be set
+with \emph{closer} line spacing than lines without. This can easily
+happen if you use a \verb|\parbox| in an AMS alignment, as they use a
+relatively large value of \verb|\lineskiplimit|.
+As usual, the \textsf{latexrelease} package may be used to
+force the older behavior.
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews27.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews28.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews28.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews28.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews28.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews28.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews28.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews28.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews28.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,365 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2017-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews28.tex
+%
+% This is issue 28 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass{ltnews}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\usepackage{lmodern,url,hologo}
+
+\providecommand\acro[1]{\textsc{#1}}
+\providecommand\meta[1]{$\langle$\textit{#1}$\rangle$}
+
+
+\publicationmonth{April}
+\publicationyear{2018}
+
+\publicationissue{28}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+
+\setlength\rightskip{0pt plus 3em}
+
+\section{A new home for \LaTeXe{} sources}
+
+In the past the development version of the \LaTeXe{} source files has
+been managed in a Subversion source control system with read access
+for the public. This way it was possible to download in an emergency
+the latest version even before it was released to CTAN and made its
+way into the various distributions.
+
+We have recently changed this setup and now manage the sources using
+Git and placed the master sources on GitHub at
+\begin{quote}
+\url{https://github.com/latex3/latex2e}
+\end{quote}
+where we already store the sources
+for \pkg{expl3} and other work. As before, direct write access is restricted
+to \LaTeX{} Project Team members, but everything is publicly accessible
+including the ability to download, clone (using Git) or checkout
+(using SVN). More details are given in~\cite{Mittelbach:TB39-1}.
+
+\section{Bug reports for core \LaTeXe{}}
+
+For more than two decades we used GNATS, an open source bug tracking
+system developed by the FSF. While that has served us well in the past
+it started to show its age more and more. So as part of this move we
+also decided to finally retire the old \LaTeX{} bug database and replace
+it with the standard ``Issue Tracker'' available at Github.
+
+The requirements and the workflow for reporting a bug in the core
+\LaTeX{} software is documented at
+\begin{quote}
+\url{https://www.latex-project.org/bugs/}
+\end{quote}
+and with further details also discussed in~\cite{Mittelbach:TB39-1}.
+
+
+\section{UTF-8: the new default input encoding}
+
+The first \TeX{} implementations only supported reading 7-bit
+\acro{ascii} files---any accented or otherwise ``special'' character
+had to be entered using commands, if it could be represented at
+all. For example to obtain an ``\"a'' one would enter \verb=\"a=, and to
+typeset a ``\ss'' the command \verb=\ss=. Furthermore fonts at that
+time had 128 glyphs inside, holding the \acro{ascii} characters, some
+accents to build composite glyphs from a letter and an accent, and a
+few special symbols such as parentheses, etc.
+
+With 8-bit \TeX{} engines such as \hologo{pdfTeX} this situation changed
+somewhat: it was now possible to process 8-bit files, i.e., files that
+could encode 256 different characters. However, 256 is still a fairly
+small number and with this limitation it is only possible to encode a
+few languages and for other languages one would need to change the
+encoding (i.e., interpret the character positions 0--255 in a
+different way). The first code points 0--127 were essentially normed
+(corresponding to \acro{ascii}) while the second half 128--255 would
+vary by holding different accented characters to support a certain set
+of languages.
+
+Each computer used one of these encodings when storing or interpreting
+files and as long as two computers used the same encoding it was
+(easily) possible to exchange files between them and have them
+interpreted and processed correctly.
+
+But different computers may have used different encodings and given
+that a computer file is simply a sequence of bytes with no indication for
+which encoding is intended, chaos could easily happen and has
+happened. For example, the German word ``Gr\"o\ss e'' (height) entered on a
+German keyboard could show up as ``Gr\v T\`ae'' on a different
+computer using a different encoding by default.
+
+So in summmary the situation wasn't at all good and it was clear in
+the early nineties that \LaTeXe{} (that was being developed to provide
+a \LaTeX{} version usable across the world) had to provide a solution
+to this issue.
+
+The \LaTeXe{} answer was the introduction of the \package{inputenc}
+package~\cite{Mittelbach:Brno95} through which it is possible to
+provide support for multiple encodings. It also allows to correctly
+process a file written in one encoding on a computer using a different
+encoding and even supports documents where the encoding changes
+midway.
+
+Since the first release of \LaTeXe{} in 1994, \LaTeX{} documents that
+used any characters outside \acro{ascii} in the source (i.e. any
+characters in the range of 128--255) were supposed to load
+\package{inputenc} and specify in which file encoding they were
+written and stored.
+%
+If the \package{inputenc} package was not loaded then \LaTeX{} used a
+``raw'' encoding which essentially took each byte from the input file
+and typeset the glyph that happened to be in that position in the
+current font---something that sometimes produces the right result but
+often enough will not.
+
+In 1992 Ken Thompson and Rob Pike developed the UTF-8 encoding scheme
+which enables the encoding of all Unicode characters within 8-bit sequences.
+Over time this encoding has gradually taken over the world,
+replacing the legacy 8-bit encodings used before. These days all major
+computer operating systems use UTF-8 to store their files and it
+requires some effort to explicitly store files in one of the legacy
+encodings.
+
+As a result, whenever \LaTeX{} users want to use any accented
+characters from their keyboard (instead of resorting to \verb=\"a= and
+the like) they always have to use
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\end{verbatim}
+in the preamble of their documents as otherwise \LaTeX{} will produce
+gibberish.
+
+\subsection{The new default}
+
+With this release, the default encoding for \LaTeX\ files has been
+changed from the ``fall through raw'' encoding to UTF-8 if used with
+classic \TeX\ or \hologo{pdfTeX}. The implementation is essentially
+the same as the existing UTF-8 support from
+\verb|\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}|.
+
+The \hologo{LuaTeX} and \hologo{XeTeX} engines always supported the
+UTF-8 encoding as their native (and only) input encoding, so with
+these engines \package{inputenc} was always a no-op.
+
+This means that with new documents one can assume UTF-8 input and it
+is no longer required to always specify
+\verb|\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}|. But if this line is present it
+will not hurt either.
+
+
+\subsection{Compatibility}
+
+For most existing documents this change will be transparent:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item documents using only \acro{ascii} in the input file and
+ accessing accented characters via commands;
+\item documents that specified the encoding of their file via an
+ option to the \package{inputenc} package and then used 8-bit
+ characters in that encoding;
+\item documents that already had been stored in UTF-8 (whether or not
+ specifying this via \package{inputenc}).
+\end{itemize}
+Only documents that have been stored in a legacy encoding and used
+accented letters from the keyboard \emph{without} loading
+\package{inputenc} (relying on the similarities between the input used
+and the T1 font encoding) are affected.
+
+These documents will now generate an error that they contain invalid
+UTF-8 sequences. However, such documents may be easily processed by
+adding the new command \verb|\UseRawInputEncoding| as the first line
+of the file. This will re-instate the previous ``raw'' encoding
+default.
+
+\verb|\UseRawInputEncoding| may also be used on the command line to
+process existing files without requiring the file to be edited
+\begin{verbatim}
+ pdflatex '\UseRawInputEncoding \input' file
+\end{verbatim}
+will process the file using the previous default encoding.
+
+Possible alternatives are reencoding the file to UTF-8 using a tool
+(such as recode or iconv or an editor) or adding the line
+\begin{flushleft}
+\verb= \usepackage[=\meta{encoding}\verb=]{inputenc}=
+\end{flushleft}
+to the preamble specifying the \meta{encoding} that fits the file
+encoding. In many cases this will be \texttt{latin1} or
+\texttt{cp1252}. For other encoding names and their meaning see the
+\package{inputenc} documentation.
+
+As usual, this change may also be reverted via the more general
+\package{latexrelease} package mechanism, by speciying a release date
+earlier than this release.
+
+
+\subsection{BOM: byte order mark handling}
+
+When using Unicode the first bytes of a file may be a, so called, BOM
+character (byte order mark) to indicate the byte oder used in the
+file. While this is not required with UTF-8 encoded files (where the
+byte order is known) it is nevertheless allowed by the standard and
+some editors add that byte sequence to the beginning of a file. In the
+past such files would have generated a ``Missing begin document''
+error or displayed strange characters when loaded at a later stage.
+
+With the addition of UTF-8 support to the kernel it is now possible to
+identify and ignore such BOMs characters even before
+\verb=\documentclass= so that these issues will no longer be showing
+up.
+
+
+
+\section[A general rollback concept]
+ {A general rollback concept for packages and classes}
+
+ In 2015 a rollback concept for the \LaTeX{} kernel was introduced.
+ Providing this feature allowed us to make corrections to the
+ software (which more or less didn't happen for nearly two decades)
+ while continuing to maintain backward compatibility to the highest
+ degree.
+
+ In this release we have now extended this concept to
+ the world of packages and classes which was not covered
+ initially. As the classes and the extension packages have different
+ requirements compared to the kernel, the approach is different (and
+ simplified). This should make it easy for package developers to
+ apply it to their packages and authors to use when necessary.
+
+ The documentation of this new feature is given in an article
+ submitted to TUGboat and also available from our
+ website~\cite{Mittelbach:TB39-2}.
+
+
+\section[Integration of \pkg{remreset} and \pkg{chngcntr} packages]
+ {Integration of \pkg{remreset} and \pkg{chngcntr} packages
+ into the kernel}
+
+With the optional argument to \cs{newcounter} \LaTeX{} offers to
+automatically reset counters when some counter is stepped, e.g.,
+stepping a \texttt{chapter} counter resets the \texttt{section}
+counter (and recursively all other heading counters). However, what
+was until now missing was a way to undo such a link between counters
+or to link two counters after they have been defined.
+
+This can be now be done with \cs{counterwithin} and \cs{counterwithout},
+respectively. In the past one had to load the \pkg{chngcntr} package
+for this. For the programming level we also added
+\cs{@removefromreset} as the counterpart of the already existing
+\cs{@addtoreset} command. Up to now this was offered by the
+\pkg{remreset} package.
+
+\section{Testing for undefined commands}
+\LaTeX\ packages often use a test \verb|\@ifundefined| to test if a command
+is defined. Unfortunately this had the side effect of \emph{defining}
+the command to \verb|\relax| in the case that it had no definition.
+ The new release uses a modified definition
+(using extra testing possibilities available in \hologo{eTeX}. The new definition
+is more natural, however code that was relying on the side effect of the
+command being tested being defined if it was previously undefined may have to add
+\verb|\let\|\meta{command}\verb|\relax|.
+
+
+\section{Changes to packages in the tools category}
+
+\subsection{\LaTeX{} table columns with fixed widths}
+
+Frank published a short paper in
+TUGboat~\cite{Mittelbach:TB38-2-213} on producing tables that have
+columns with fixed widths. The outlined approach using column
+specifiers ``\texttt{w}'' and ``\texttt{W}'' has now been integrated
+into the \pkg{array} package.
+
+\subsection{Obscure overprinting with \pkg{multicol} fixed}
+
+A rather peculiar bug was reported on StackExchange for
+\pkg{multicol}. If the column/page breaking was fully controlled by
+the user (through \cs{columnbreak}) instead of letting the environment
+do its job and if then more \cs{columnbreak} commands showed up on the
+last page then the balancing algorithm was thrown off track.
+As a result some parts of the columns did overprint each other.
+
+The fix required a redesign of the output routines used by
+\pkg{multicol} and while it ``should'' be transparent in other cases
+(and all tests in the regession test suite came out fine) there is the
+off-chance that code that hooked into internals of \pkg{multicol}
+needs adjustment.
+
+
+\section{Changes to packages in the amsmath category}
+
+With this release of \LaTeX{} a few minor issues with \pkg{amsmath}
+have been corrected.
+
+\subsection{Updated user's guide}
+
+Furthermore, \texttt{amsldoc.pdf}, the AMS user's
+guide for the \pkg{amsmath} package~\cite{amsldoc}, has been updated
+from version~2.0 to~2.1 to incorporate changes and corrections made
+between 2016 and 2018.
+
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{9}
+
+\bibitem{Mittelbach:TB39-1} Frank Mittelbach:
+ \emph{New rules for reporting bugs in the \LaTeX{} core software}.
+ In: TUGboat, 39\#1, 2018.
+ \url{https://www.latex-project.org/publications/}
+
+\bibitem{Mittelbach:Brno95} Frank Mittelbach:
+ \emph{\LaTeXe{} Encoding Interface --- Purpose, concepts, and
+ Open Problems}.
+ Talk given in Brno June 1995.
+ \url{https://www.latex-project.org/publications/}
+
+\bibitem{Mittelbach:TB39-2} Frank Mittelbach:
+ \emph{A rollback concept for packages and classes}.
+ Submitted to TUGboat.
+ \url{https://www.latex-project.org/publications/}
+
+\bibitem{Mittelbach:TB38-2-213} Frank Mittelbach:
+ \emph{\LaTeX{} table columns with fixed widths}.
+ In: TUGboat, 38\#2, 2017.
+ \url{https://www.latex-project.org/publications/}
+
+\bibitem{amsldoc} American Mathematical Society and The \LaTeX3 Project:
+ \emph{User's Guide for the \texttt{amsmath} package} (Version 2.1).
+ April 2018.
+ Available from
+ \url{https://www.ctan.org}
+ and distributed as part of every \LaTeX{} distribution.
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews28.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews29.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews29.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews29.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews29.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews29.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews29.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews29.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews29.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,526 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2018-2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews29.tex
+%
+% This is issue 29 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass{ltnews}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\usepackage{lmodern,url,hologo}
+
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+
+\providecommand\acro[1]{\textsc{#1}}
+\providecommand\meta[1]{$\langle$\textit{#1}$\rangle$}
+
+
+\providecommand\XeTeX{\hologo{XeTeX}}
+\providecommand\LuaTeX{\hologo{LuaTeX}}
+\providecommand\pdfTeX{\hologo{pdfTeX}}
+
+\newcommand\githubissue[2][]{\ifhmode\unskip\fi
+ \quad\penalty500\strut\nobreak\hfill
+ \mbox{\small\slshape(%
+ \href{https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/issues/\getfirstgithubissue#2 \relax}%
+ {github issue#1 #2}%
+ )}%
+ \par}
+
+% simple solution right now (just link to the first issue if there are more)
+\def\getfirstgithubissue#1 #2\relax{#1}
+
+\newcommand\sxissue[1]{\ifhmode\unskip\fi
+ \quad\penalty500\strut\nobreak\hfill
+ \mbox{\small\slshape(\url{https://tex.stackexchange.com/#1})}\par}
+
+\let\cls\pkg
+\newcommand\env[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iffalse % only for TUB production
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\makeatletter
+% Xe\TeX{} requires reflecting the first E, hence we complain if the
+% graphics package is not present. (For plain documents, this can be
+% loaded via Eplain.) Also, at Barbara's suggestion, if the current
+% font is slanted, we rotate by 180 instead of reflecting so there is at
+% least a chance to look ok. (The magic values here seem more or less
+% ok for \texttt{cmsl} and \texttt{cmti}.)
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tubreflect#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{reflectbox}{%
+ \TBerror{A graphics package must be loaded for \string\XeTeX}%
+ }{%
+ \ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt
+ \raise 1.6ex \hbox{\kern.1em\rotatebox{180}{#1}}\kern-.1em
+ \else
+ \reflectbox{#1}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+\def\tubhideheight#1{\setbox0=\hbox{#1}\ht0=0pt \dp0=0pt \box0 }
+\def\XekernbeforeE{-.125em}
+\def\XekernafterE{-.1667em}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\Xe}{\leavevmode
+ \tubhideheight{\hbox{X%
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\TeX}\setbox1=\hbox{E}%
+ \ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt \def\XekernbeforeE{0em}\fi
+ \lower\dp0\hbox{\raise\dp1\hbox{\kern\XekernbeforeE\tubreflect{E}}}%
+ \kern\XekernafterE}}}
+\def\XeTeX{\Xe\TeX}
+\def\XeLaTeX{\Xe{\kern.11em \LaTeX}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\publicationmonth{December}
+\publicationyear{2018}
+
+\publicationissue{29}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+%\addtolength\textheight{4.2pc} % only for TUB
+
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+
+\setlength\rightskip{0pt plus 3em}
+
+\bigskip
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+The December 2018 release of \LaTeX{} is a maintenance release in
+which we have fixed a few bugs in the software: some are old, some
+newer, and they are mostly rather obscure.
+
+\section[Bug reports for core \LaTeXe{} and packages]
+ {Bug reports for core \LaTeXe{} and packages maintained by the Project Team}
+
+In Spring 2018 we established a new issue tracking system
+(Github issues at \url{https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/issues}) for both
+the \LaTeX{} core and the packages maintained by the
+\LaTeX{} Project Team, with an updated procedure for how to report a
+bug or problem.
+
+Initial experience with this system is good, with people who report
+problems following the guidelines and including helpful working
+examples to show the problem---thanks for doing this.
+
+The detailed requirements and the workflow for reporting a bug in the
+core \LaTeX{} software is documented at
+\begin{quote}
+\url{https://www.latex-project.org/bugs/}
+\end{quote}
+with further details and discussion in~\cite{29:Mittelbach:TB39-1}.
+
+
+\section{Changes to the \LaTeX{} kernel}
+
+\subsection{UTF-8:\ updates to the default input encoding}
+
+In the April 2018 release of \LaTeX{} we changed the default encoding
+from 7-bit \acro{ascii} to \acro{utf}-8 when using classic \TeX\ or
+\hologo{pdfTeX}; see \textit{\LaTeX{} News~28}~\cite{29:ltnews28} for
+details.
+
+Now, after half a year of experience with
+this new default,
+we have
+made a small number of adjustments to further improve the user experience.
+These include:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+ Some improvements when displaying error messages about \acro{utf}-8
+ characters that have not been set up for use with \LaTeX{},
+ or are invalid for some other reason;
+%
+\githubissue[s]{60, 62 and 63}
+%
+\item
+ The addition of a number of previously missing declarations for
+ characters that are in fact available with the default fonts, e.g.,
+ \cs{j} \enquote{\j} (0237), \cs{SS} \enquote{\SS} (1E9E),
+ \verb=\k{}= \enquote{\k{ }} (02DB) and \verb=\.{}= \enquote{\.{ }}
+ (02D9);
+\item
+ Correcting the names for \cs{guillemetleft}
+ \enquote{\guillemotleft} and \cs{guillemetright}
+ \enquote{\guillemotright} in all encoding files. These correct
+ names are in addition to the old (but wrong) Adobe names: Adobe
+ mistakenly called them Guillemot, which is a sea bird.
+%
+ \githubissue{65}
+%
+\item
+ Added \cs{Hwithstroke} (\enquote{\Hwithstroke}) and \cs{hwithstroke}
+ (\enquote{\hwithstroke}) necessary for typesetting Maltese.
+%
+ \sxissue{q/460110}
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+
+\subsection{Fixed \cs{verb*} and friends in \texorpdfstring{\XeTeX}{XeTeX} and \LuaTeX{}}
+
+
+The original \cs{verb*} and \texttt{verbatim*} in \LaTeX{} were coded
+under the assumption that the position of the space character (i.e.,
+\acro{ascii} 32) in a typewriter font contains a visible space glyph
+``\verb*= =''. This is correct for \pdfTeX{} with the most used font
+encodings \texttt{OT1} and \texttt{T1}. However, this unfortunately
+does not work for Unicode engines using the \texttt{TU} encoding since
+the space character slot (\acro{ascii} 32) then usually contains a real
+(normal) space, which has the effect that \cs{verb*} produces the same
+results as \cs{verb}.
+
+The \cs{verb*} code now always uses the newly introduced command
+\cs{verbvisiblespace} to produce the visible space character and this
+command will get appropriate definitions for use with the different
+engines. With \pdfTeX{} it will simply use \cs{asciispace}, which is
+a posh name for ``select character 32 in the current font'', but with
+Unicode engines the default definition is
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand\verbvisiblespace
+ {\leavevmode
+ {\usefont{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{n}\asciispace}}
+\end{verbatim}
+which uses the visible space from the font Computer Modern Typewriter,
+regardless of the currently chosen typewriter font. Internally the
+code ensures that the character used has exactly the same width as the
+other characters in the current (monospaced) font; thus, for example,
+code displays line up properly.
+
+It is possible to redefine this command to select your own character,
+for example
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand\verbvisiblespace
+ {\textvisiblespace}
+\end{verbatim}
+will select the the ``official'' visible space character of the
+current font. This may look like the natural default, but it wasn't
+chosen as our default because many fonts just don't have that Unicode
+character, or they have one with a strange shape.
+%
+\githubissue[s]{69 and 70}
+
+
+\subsection{Error message corrected}
+Trying to redefine an undefined command could in a few cases generate
+an error message with a missing space, e.g.,
+\verb=\renewcommand\1{...}= gave
+\begin{verbatim}
+ LaTeX Error: \1undefined.
+\end{verbatim}
+This is now fixed.
+%
+\githubissue{41}
+
+
+\subsection{Fixed fatal link error with \pkg{hyperref}}
+
+If an \cs{href} link text gets broken across pages, \pdfTeX{} and
+\LuaTeX{} will generate a fatal error unless both parts of the link
+are internally at the same boxing level. In two-column mode that was
+not the case if one of the pages had spanning top floats. This has now
+been changed so that the error is avoided.
+%
+\githubissue{94}
+
+
+\subsection{Avoid page breaks caused by invisible commands}
+
+Commands like \cs{label} or \cs{index} could generate a potential page
+break in places where a page break was otherwise prohibited, e.g.,
+when used between two consecutive headings. This has now been
+corrected. If for some reason you really want a break and you relied
+on this faulty behavior, you can always add one using \cs{pagebreak},
+with or without an optional argument.
+%
+\githubissue{81}
+
+
+
+\subsection{Prevent spurious spaces when reading table of contents data}
+
+When table of contents data is read in from a \texttt{.toc} file, the
+new-line character at the end of each line is converted by \TeX{} to a
+space. In normal processing this is harmless (as \TeX{} is doing this
+input reading whilst in vertical mode and each line in the file
+represents a single line (paragraph) in the table of contents. If,
+however, this is done in horizontal mode, which is sometimes the case,
+then these spaces will appear in the output. If you then omit some of
+the input lines (e.g., because you do not display \acro{toc} data below a
+certain level), then these spaces accumulate in the typeset output and
+you get surprising, and unwanted, gaps inside the text.
+
+The new code now adds a \texttt{\%} sign at the end of problematic
+lines in the \texttt{.toc} file so that \TeX{} will not generate such
+spaces that may survive to spoil the printed result. As some third
+party packages have augmented or changed the core \LaTeX{}
+functionality in that area (for example, by adding additional
+arguments to the commands in \acro{toc} files) the code uses a conservative
+approach and the \texttt{\%} signs are added only when certain
+conditions are met. Therefore some packages might require updates if
+they want to benefit from this correction, especially if they
+unconditionally overwrite \LaTeX{}'s \cs{addcontentsline} definition.
+%
+\githubissue{73}
+
+
+\subsection{Prevent protrusion in table of contents lines}
+
+In \TeX{}'s internal processing model,
+paragraph data is one of the
+major data structures. As a result,
+many things are internally modeled
+as paragraphs even if they are not conceptually
+``text paragraphs'' in
+the traditional sense.
+In a few cases this has some surprising effects
+that are not always
+for the better. One example is
+standard \acro{toc} entries,
+where you have
+heading data followed by some dot leaders and a page
+number at the right, produced, for example, from this:
+\begin{quote}
+ \contentsline {subsection}{Error message corrected}{2}{section*.7}
+\end{quote}
+The space reserved for the page number is of a fixed width, so that
+the dots always end in the same place. Well, they did end in the same
+place until the advent of protrusion support in the \TeX{} engines.
+Now, with the \pkg{microtype} package loaded, it is possible that the
+page number will protrude slightly into the margin (even though it’s
+typeset inside a box) and as a result this page number box gets
+shifted. With enough bad luck this can get you another dot in the
+line, sticking out like the proverbial sore thumb, as exhibited in the
+question on StackExchange that triggered the correction.
+
+\LaTeX{} now takes care that there will be no protrusion happening on
+such lines, even if it is generally enabled for the whole document.
+%
+\sxissue{q/172785}
+
+
+
+\subsection{Start L-R mode for \cs{thinspace} and friends}
+
+In \LaTeX{}, commands that are intended only for paragraph (L-R) mode
+are generally careful to start paragraph mode if necessary; thus they
+can be used at the start of a paragraph without surprising and
+unwanted consequences. This important requirement had been overlooked
+for a few horizontal spacing commands, such as \cs{thinspace}
+(a.k.a.\ ``\cs{,}''), and for some other support commands such as
+\cs{smash} or \cs{phantom}. Thus they ended up adding vertical space
+when used at the beginning of a paragraph or, in the case of
+\cs{smash}, creating a paragraph of their own. This has now been
+corrected, and a corresponding update has been made to the
+\pkg{amsmath} package, in which these commands are also defined.
+%
+\githubissue[s]{49 and 50}
+
+
+
+\subsection{Guarding \cs{pfill} in \pkg{doc}}
+
+For presenting index entries pointing to
+code fragments and the like,
+the \pkg{doc} package has a \cs{pfill} command that
+generates within the index a line of dots leading from
+the command name to the page or code line numbers.
+If necessary it would automatically split the entry
+over two lines. That worked well enough for a quarter century, but we
+discovered recently that it is broken inside
+the \cls{ltugboat} class,
+where it sometimes produces
+bad spacing within continuation lines.
+
+The reason turned out to be a redefinition of the \LaTeX{} command
+\cs{nobreakspace} (\verb=~=) inside the class \cls{ltugboat}, which
+removed any preceding space (and thus unfortunately also removed the
+dots on the continuation line). While one can argue that this is a
+questionable redefinition (if only done by a single class and not generally),
+it has been in the class so long that changing it would
+certainly break older documents. So instead we now guard against that
+removal of space.
+%
+\githubissue[s]{25 and 75}
+
+
+
+
+
+\section{Changes to packages in the \pkg{tools} category}
+
+\subsection{Sometimes the \pkg{trace} package turned off too much}
+
+The \pkg{trace} package is a useful little tool for tracing macro
+execution: it hides certain lengthy and typically uninteresting
+expansions resulting from font changes and similar activities.
+However, it had the problem that it also reset other tracing settings
+such as \cs{showoutput} in such situations, so that you couldn't use
+\cs{showoutput} in the preamble to get symbolic output of all the
+pages in the document. This has now been corrected.
+
+
+
+
+\subsection{Update to \pkg{xr}}
+
+The \pkg{xr} package has been updated so that the code that reads the
+\texttt{.aux} file has been made more robust. It now correctly
+ignores conditionals (added by \pkg{hyperref} and other packages)
+rather than generating low level parsing errors.
+\sxissue{a/452321}
+
+
+\subsection{Column data for \env{multicols*} sometimes vanished}
+
+In certain situations involving \env{multicols*}, when there are more
+explicit \cs{columnbreak} requests than there are columns on the
+current page, data could vanish due to the removal of an internal
+penalty marking the end of the environment. This has been corrected by
+explicitly reinserting that penalty if necessary.
+%
+\githubissue{53}
+
+\subsection{Extension to \cs{docolaction} in \pkg{multicol}}
+
+The \cs{docolaction} command can be used to carry out actions
+depending on the column you are currently in, i.e., first, any inner
+one (if more than two) or last. However, if the action generates text
+then there is the question: is this text part of the current column or
+the one after? That is, on the next run, do we test before or after it,
+to determine in which column we are?
+
+This is now resolved as follows: if you use \cs{docolaction*} any
+generated text by the chosen action is considered to be after the test
+point. But if you use the command without the star then all the material
+it generates will be placed before the test point to determine the
+current column, i.e., the text will become part of the current column
+and may affect the test result on the next run.
+
+
+
+\subsection{Prevent color leak in \pkg{array}}
+
+In some cases the color used inside a \env{tabular} cell could ``leak
+out'' into the surrounding text. This has been corrected.
+%
+\githubissue{72}
+
+\subsection{Support fragile commands in \texttt{array} or \texttt{tabular} column templates}
+
+The preamble specifiers \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} and \texttt{b} each receives
+a user supplied argument: the width of the paragraph column. Normally
+that is something harmless, like a length or a simple length
+expression. But in more complicated settings involving the \pkg{calc}
+package it could break with a low-level error message. This has now
+been corrected.
+%
+\sxissue{q/459285}
+
+
+
+\section{Changes to packages in the amsmath category}
+
+The changes in the kernel made for \cs{thinspace}, \cs{smash},
+etc.\ (see above) have been reflected in the \pkg{amsmath} package
+code, so that loading this package doesn't revert them.
+%
+\githubissue[s]{49 and 50}
+
+
+
+
+
+\section{Website updates}
+
+\subsection{Publications area reorganized and extended}
+
+To help readers to find relevant information in more convenient and
+easy ways, the area of the website covering publications by the
+\LaTeX{} Project Team was reorganized and extended (many more
+abstracts added). We now provide the articles, talks and supplementary
+data structured both by year and also by major
+topics~\cite{29:site-pub}. Feel free to take a look.
+
+\subsection{Japanese translations of the user's guide}
+
+Yukitoshi Fujimura has kindly translated
+into Japanese two documents that are
+distributed with standard \LaTeX{}.
+These are:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+ \LaTeXe{} for authors;
+\item
+ User's Guide for the \pkg{amsmath}~Package~\cite{29:amsldoc}.
+\end{itemize}
+They can be found on the website documentation page~\cite{29:site-doc}.
+You will now also find there a typeset version of the full \LaTeXe{}
+source code (with index etc.\@) and a number of other goodies.
+
+
+
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{9}
+
+\bibitem{29:Mittelbach:TB39-1} Frank Mittelbach:
+ \emph{New rules for reporting bugs in the \LaTeX{} core software}.
+ In: TUGboat, 39\#1, 2018.
+ \url{https://latex-project.org/publications/}
+
+\bibitem{29:ltnews28}
+ \emph{\LaTeX{} News, Issue 28}.
+ In: TUGboat, 39\#1, 2018.\\
+ \rlap{\url{https://latex-project.org/news/latex2e-news/}}
+
+\bibitem{29:site-doc}
+ \emph{\LaTeX{} documentation on the \LaTeX{} Project Website}.\\
+ \url{https://latex-project.org/documentation/}
+
+\bibitem{29:site-pub}
+ \emph{\LaTeX{} Project publications on the \LaTeX{} Project Website}.\\
+ \url{https://latex-project.org/publications/}
+
+\bibitem{29:amsldoc} American Mathematical Society and The \LaTeX3 Project:
+ \emph{User's Guide for the \texttt{amsmath} Package} (Version 2.1).
+ April 2018.
+ Available from
+ \url{https://www.ctan.org}
+ and distributed as part of every \LaTeX{} distribution.
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews29.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews30.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews30.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews30.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews30.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews30.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews30.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews30.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews30.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,665 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 2019
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2008 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% Filename: ltnews30.tex
+%
+% This is issue 30 of LaTeX News.
+
+\documentclass{ltnews}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\usepackage{lmodern,url,hologo}
+
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+
+\providecommand\acro[1]{\textsc{#1}}
+\providecommand\meta[1]{$\langle$\textit{#1}$\rangle$}
+\providecommand\option[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\providecommand\env[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+
+\providecommand\XeTeX{\hologo{XeTeX}}
+\providecommand\LuaTeX{\hologo{LuaTeX}}
+\providecommand\pdfTeX{\hologo{pdfTeX}}
+\providecommand\MiKTeX{\hologo{MiKTeX}}
+\providecommand\CTAN{\textsc{ctan}}
+\providecommand\TL{\TeX{}Live}
+
+\providecommand\githubissue[2][]{\ifhmode\unskip\fi
+ \quad\penalty500\strut\nobreak\hfill
+ \mbox{\small\slshape(%
+ \href{https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/issues/\getfirstgithubissue#2 \relax}%
+ {github issue#1 #2}%
+ )}%
+ \par}
+
+% simple solution right now (just link to the first issue if there are more)
+\def\getfirstgithubissue#1 #2\relax{#1}
+
+\providecommand\sxissue[1]{\ifhmode\unskip\fi
+ \quad\penalty500\strut\nobreak\hfill
+ \mbox{\small\slshape(\url{https://tex.stackexchange.com/#1})}\par}
+
+\providecommand\gnatsissue[2]{\ifhmode\unskip\fi
+ \quad\penalty500\strut\nobreak\hfill
+ \mbox{\small\slshape(%
+ \href{https://www.latex-project.org/cgi-bin/ltxbugs2html?pr=#1\%2F#2}%
+ {gnats issue #1/#2}%
+ )}%
+ \par}
+
+\let\cls\pkg
+\providecommand\env[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\iffalse % only for TUB production
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\makeatletter
+% Xe\TeX{} requires reflecting the first E, hence we complain if the
+% graphics package is not present. (For plain documents, this can be
+% loaded via Eplain.) Also, at Barbara's suggestion, if the current
+% font is slanted, we rotate by 180 instead of reflecting so there is at
+% least a chance to look ok. (The magic values here seem more or less
+% ok for \texttt{cmsl} and \texttt{cmti}.)
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tubreflect#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{reflectbox}{%
+ \TBerror{A graphics package must be loaded for \string\XeTeX}%
+ }{%
+ \ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt
+ \raise 1.6ex \hbox{\kern.1em\rotatebox{180}{#1}}\kern-.1em
+ \else
+ \reflectbox{#1}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+\def\tubhideheight#1{\setbox0=\hbox{#1}\ht0=0pt \dp0=0pt \box0 }
+\def\XekernbeforeE{-.125em}
+\def\XekernafterE{-.1667em}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\Xe}{\leavevmode
+ \tubhideheight{\hbox{X%
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\TeX}\setbox1=\hbox{E}%
+ \ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt \def\XekernbeforeE{0em}\fi
+ \lower\dp0\hbox{\raise\dp1\hbox{\kern\XekernbeforeE\tubreflect{E}}}%
+ \kern\XekernafterE}}}
+\def\XeTeX{\Xe\TeX}
+\def\XeLaTeX{\Xe{\kern.11em \LaTeX}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\publicationmonth{October}
+\publicationyear{2019}
+
+\publicationissue{30}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+%\addtolength\textheight{4.2pc} % only for TUB
+
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+
+\setlength\rightskip{0pt plus 3em}
+
+%\newpage
+
+\medskip
+
+
+%%CCC Does it need an intro?
+%% \section{Introduction}
+
+%% This document is under construction \ldots
+
+
+\section{\LaTeX\texttt{-dev} formats now available}
+
+
+We know that many of you, especially developers and maintainers of
+important packages, have a strong interest in a stable \LaTeX{}
+environment.
+
+In order to keep \LaTeX{} very stable for users whilst allowing for
+further development to continue, we now have a development branch of
+\LaTeX{} on GitHub containing development code for the upcoming
+release. When this code is ready for wider consumption and testing, we
+generate a pre-release of \LaTeX{} from this development branch and make
+it available on \CTAN.
+
+For users of the \TL{} and \MiKTeX{} distributions it is therefore now
+straightforward to test their documents and code against the upcoming
+\LaTeX{} release with ease, simply by selecting a different program name
+(when using the command line) or by selecting a menu entry (after
+setting it up, see below).
+
+If you do this then the latest version of the \LaTeX{} development format
+will be used to process your document, allowing you to test the
+upcoming release with your own documents and packages. For example, if
+you run
+\begin{verbatim}
+ pdflatex-dev myfile
+\end{verbatim}
+then you will be greeted on the screen with something like \texttt{LaTeX2e
+ <2019-10-01> pre-release-2} (identifying the pre-release format)
+instead of the normal \texttt{LaTeX2e <2018-12-01>}. In this
+pre-release you will find the latest new features that we have
+developed.
+
+\subsection{Our hopes}
+
+We don’t expect everybody to start using the development formats to
+participate in testing, but we hope that people with a strong interest
+in a stable \LaTeX{} environment (especially developers and maintainers
+of important packages) will use the new facilities and help us to
+ensure that future public releases of \LaTeX{} do not (as has happened in
+the past) require some immediate patches because of issues that were
+not identified by our internal regression test suite or by other
+testing
+we do.
+
+Any issue identified when using the development format should
+preferably be logged as an issue on GitHub, following the procedure
+outlined on our website at \url{https://www.latex-project.org/bugs/}
+including the use of the \pkg{latexbug} package as described.
+
+Our bug reporting process normally states that issues involving
+third-party software are out of scope as we can’t correct external
+packages, see~\cite{30:Mittelbach:TB39-1}. However, in the particular
+case of the development format showing an incompatibility with a
+third-party package, it is fine to open an issue with us (in addition,
+please, to informing the maintainer of that package) so that we know
+about the problem and can jointly work on resolving it.
+
+\subsection{Details please \ldots}
+
+More details and some background information about the concepts and
+the process is available in an upcoming TUGboat article: \enquote{The
+ \LaTeX{} release workflow and the \LaTeX{} dev
+ formats}~\cite{devformat}.
+
+\subsection{Setting up menu items}
+
+While the command line call works out of the box if you have a recent
+\TL{} or \MiKTeX{} installation, the use within an integrated
+editing environment doesn’t at this point in time (maybe the
+developers of these editors will include it in the future). However,
+it is normally fairly simple to enable it as most (or even all?) of
+them provide simple ways to call your own setup. How this works in
+detail depends very much on the environment you use, so we can’t give
+much help here.
+
+But as an example: to provide an additional menu entry for
+\texttt{XeLaTeX-dev} on a MacBook all that was necessary was to copy
+the file \texttt{XeLaTeX.engine} to XeLaTeX-dev.engine and change the
+call from \texttt{xelatex} to \texttt{xelatex-dev} inside.
+
+
+
+
+\section{Improving Unicode handling in \pdfTeX{}}
+
+Perhaps the most important improvement in this release is
+even
+better support for UTF-8 characters when using \pdfTeX{}.\footnote{The
+ Japanese engines e-p\TeX{} and e-up\TeX{} can't use these features
+ yet as they don't support the primitive \cs{ifincsname}. Work is
+ under way to resolve this in the engines.}
+
+When using a \enquote{Unicode engine},
+any Unicode character (that is not acting as a command,
+i.e., is not \enquote{active})
+can be used as part of the
+\cs{label}/\cs{ref} mechanism or can be displayed in a message or
+written to a file. In 8-bit engines, however, this was severely
+restricted:
+essentially you had to limit yourself to using
+\acro{ascii} letters, digits and a few punctuation symbols. With the
+new release most of these restrictions have been removed and you now
+can write labels such as
+\begin{verbatim}
+ \label{eq:größer}
+\end{verbatim}
+or use accented characters, etc.\ as part of a \cs{typeout} message.
+The only requirement remaining is that only those UTF-8 characters
+that are also available for typesetting can be used, i.e., only those
+characters for
+which adequate font support is loaded. Otherwise you will get an
+error message stating that
+the
+particular Unicode character is not set
+up for use with \LaTeX{}.
+
+Note, however, that the restrictions on what characters can be
+used in the names of commands have not changed.
+
+What is not possible when using
+an 8-bit engine such as \pdfTeX{} is to use
+characters other than \acro{ascii} letters as part of a command
+name. This is due to the fact that all other characters in such
+engines are not single character tokens, but in fact consist of a
+sequence of bytes and this is not supported in command names.
+
+\section{Improving file name handling in \pdfTeX{}}
+
+A related change is that file names used as part of \cs{input},
+\cs{includegraphics}, etc.\ commands
+can now contain any
+Unicode characters allowed by the File System in use,
+including spaces.
+In this case,
+ even characters that can't be typeset
+(due to lack of font support) can be used.
+
+
+\section{Improving the \env{filecontents} environment}
+
+The \env{filecontents} environment now supports an optional argument
+in which you can specify that it is allowed to \option{overwrite} an
+already existing file;
+ by default nothing is written if a file with the given name
+exists anywhere in the search tree. An alternative name for this
+option is \texttt{force}.
+Even then the environment will refuse to write
+to \cs{jobname}\texttt{.tex} to avoid clobbering its own input
+file. However, if you use a different extension on your input file you
+could still overwrite it (there is no way to test for that).
+
+There is also an
+option
+\option{nosearch},
+which specifies that only the current directory is
+examined for an existing file, not the whole \TeX{} inputs tree.
+This is useful if you want to write a
+local copy of a standard system file.
+Finally, \option{noheader} prevents writing a preamble to the file
+(this
+is the same as using the star form of the environment).
+
+Another change is that this
+environment is
+now allowed anywhere in the document,
+which means
+it provides everything (and more) of what the now obsolete
+\pkg{filecontents} package provided.
+
+
+
+\section{Making more user commands robust}
+
+In the early days of \LaTeX{} many commands were fragile, i.e., they
+needed \cs{protect} in front of them when used in places such as
+section headings and other \enquote{moving arguments}, etc.
+In \LaTeXe{} many of these commands were made robust,
+but still a fairly huge number remained unnecessarily fragile.
+
+In this release of \LaTeX{} we have now
+made a lot more commands robust.
+There is a very small collection of commands that must stay fragile
+because their expansion (maybe partially) at just the right time is critical.
+Yet others are unlikely to ever be needed in an \enquote{moving argument}.
+
+Doing this for \cs{begin} and \cs{end} was rather tricky as the
+standard mechanism with \cs{DeclareRobustCommand} doesn't work here,
+at least not for \cs{end} as that needs to expand during typesetting
+without generating a \cs{relax} (from the \cs{protect}. Such a token
+would start a new row in table environments, such as \texttt{tabular}
+etc. Furthermore some packages try to look into the definition of
+\cs{end} by expanding it several times. Thus expansion with
+\cs{expandafter} had to produce exactly the same result as before. But
+in the end we overcame that hurdle too, so now environments are
+automatically robust if used in places like headings or
+\verb=\typeout= and so forth.
+
+%%CCC do we need to say something about possible problems if other packages
+%% or documents have redefined commands whose robustness has changed?
+
+What hasn't been tackled yet is the redefinitions in \pkg{amsmath}:
+this package
+redefines a number of basic math constructs
+that are now robust, so that
+they become fragile again
+once the package is loaded.
+This area will be addressed in a follow up release.
+
+\githubissue{123}
+
+
+
+\section{Other changes to the \LaTeX{} kernel}
+
+\subsection{Guard against \cs{unskip} in tabular cells}
+
+If a \env{tabular} or \env{array} cell started with a
+command that started with an
+\cs{unskip}
+then centering the column broke
+ because the stretching glue
+ on the left got removed. The fix for this was to add
+ a minuscule, and hence unnoticeable, additional space after the stretching space:
+removing this extra space causes no problems.
+
+This change was also applied in the \pkg{array} package.
+
+\githubissue{102}
+
+
+\subsection{Fix Unicode table data}
+
+\texttt{U+012F} which is \enquote{i with ogonek} produced a
+\enquote{dotless i with ogonek} by mistake. This has been corrected.
+
+\githubissue{122}
+
+The Unicode slots \texttt{27E8} and \texttt{27E9} have been mapped to
+\cs{textlangle} and \cs{textrangle} which is the recommended mapping.
+In the past they raised a \LaTeX{} error.
+
+\githubissue{110}
+
+When doing cut-and-paste from other documents or websites f-ligatures and others ligatures
+might end up as
+single Unicode characters in your file. In the past those got rejected by \LaTeX{}.
+ We
+ now define those Unicode slots and map them back to the sequence of
+ individual characters constituting the ligature.
+If supported by the current font
+(which is normally the case) they
+are then reconstructed as ligatures and thus get typeset
+as desired.
+Otherwise they will come out as individual characters which
+is still better than an error message.
+
+\githubissue{154}
+
+
+\subsection{Improve \cs{InputIfFileExists}'s handling of file names}
+
+In rare circumstances it was possible that \cs{InputIfFileExists}
+would work incorrectly, e.g., a construction such as
+\begin{verbatim}
+\InputIfFileExists{foo}{\input{bar}}{}
+\end{verbatim}
+Would not load the files \texttt{foo.tex} and \texttt{bar.tex} but
+would load \texttt{bar.tex} twice. This has been corrected.
+
+\githubissue{109}
+
+
+\subsection{Improve interface for cross-references}
+
+%%CCC should be 'provide' as they still exist. FMi - no they no longer do that
+The packages \pkg{fcnylab} and \pkg{varioref} provided
+a slightly
+improved definition of \cs{refstepcounter} which allowed
+the internal
+\cs{p at ..} commands to receive the counter value as an argument,
+instead of
+acting as a simple prefix. This supports
+more complex
+formatting of the value in the reference.
+
+
+These packages also provided
+the command \cs{labelformat} to help in the specification of
+such formatting in an easy way. For
+example, \verb=\labelformat{equation}{eq.~(#1}}= specifies that
+references to equations
+automatically come out as
+\enquote{eq.~(5)} or similar. As this means a \cs{ref} command can no
+longer be used at the start of a sentence, the packages also
+provided \cs{Ref} for such scenarios.
+
+Both of these commands, cs{labelformat} and \cs{Ref},
+are now removed from the packages and instead made available in
+the kernel so there is no
+need to load additional packages.
+
+
+
+
+\subsection{Improve wording of a warning message}
+
+The kernel now says \enquote{Trying to load \ldots}
+instead of \enquote{Try loading \ldots} in one of its informal
+messages to match style of similar messages.
+
+\githubissue{107}
+
+
+\subsection{Avoid bad side-effects of cs{DeclareErrorFont}}
+
+As a side effect of setting up the error font for NFSS, this
+declaration also changed the current font-size back to 10pt.
+In most
+circumstances that doesn't matter, because that declaration was meant
+to be used only during the format generation and not during
+a \LaTeX{} run.
+However, it has turned out to
+used by some developers in other places
+(incorrectly in fact:
+e.g., inside some \texttt{.fd} files) where
+resetting the size causes
+havoc
+seemingly at random.
+The command has now changed to not produce such side effects.
+
+\gnatsissue{latex}{4399}
+
+
+
+\subsection{\pkg{nfssfont}: Generate a font table as the default action}
+
+With the small file \texttt{nfssfont.tex} it is possible to produce
+font tables and other font tests
+in the style set up by Don Knuth.
+In nearly all cases
+a font table is wanted,
+so this action has been made the default.
+Now one can simply hit enter
+instead of having to write \verb=\table\bye=.
+
+
+\subsection{\pkg{trace} package support in the kernel}
+
+The \pkg{trace} package implements the commands \cs{traceon}
+and \cs{traceoff} that work like
+\cs{tracingall} but skip
+certain code blocks that produce a lot of tracing output.
+%%CCC being of no interest to anyone!! -- FMi I love your encouragement
+This is useful when debugging, to suppress uninteresting tracing
+from, for example, loading a font.
+Code blocks that should not be traced
+need to be surrounded by the commands
+\cs{conditionally at traceoff} and \cs{conditionally at traceon}.
+
+The \LaTeX{} kernel now provides dummy definitions for these two
+commands so that package writers can use them in their packages
+regardless of \pkg{trace} being loaded or not.
+
+
+
+
+\section{Changes to packages in the \pkg{tools} category}
+
+\subsection{\pkg{array}: Warn if primitive column specifiers are overwritten}
+
+With \cs{newcolumntype} it is possible to define your own column
+specifiers for a \texttt{tabular} preamble, it is also possible to
+change existing ones. However, doing that for a primitive column
+specifier, such a \texttt{c}, is seldom a good idea, since then its
+functionality becomes unavailable.
+The package was therefore supposed
+to warn the user in this case, but due to a missing \cs{expandafter}
+in the code it never did---now it does.
+
+\githubissue{148}
+
+
+\subsection{\pkg{multicol}: Introduce \texttt{minrows} counter for balancing}
+
+When there are only a few lines of text on a page at the end of a
+\env{multicols} environment,
+balancing the columns often looks rather odd: such as
+three columns each containing a single line. The balancing behavior
+can now be controlled through the counter \texttt{minrows}
+(default is~1) which specifies that,
+after balancing, there must be at least that many lines in the first column.
+Thus, if you set \texttt{minrows}
+to \texttt{2} then you
+would get a
+distribution of \texttt{2+1+0} lines and if set
+to three, the result
+would be
+\texttt{3+0+0} instead of the default \texttt{1+1+1}.
+
+What is most appropriate really depends on the circumstances, but this
+now gives you the tools to make local or global adjustments.
+
+
+\subsection{\pkg{varioref}: better support for \pkg{cleveref}}
+
+The \pkg{varioref} package has been internally updated to provide
+better interfaces for packages such as \pkg{hyperref} and
+\pkg{cleveref}.
+
+It also
+has a new package option \option{nospace} that stops
+\pkg{varioref} from meddling with space in front of
+its commands. The
+original behavior was always somewhat problematical and it is
+suggested that
+all new documents
+use this option (which
+should really have been the default).
+
+Support was also added for the Arabic language through the option
+\option{arabic}.
+
+
+
+
+\subsection{\pkg{xr}: Support citations to bibliographies in external documents}
+
+The \pkg{xr} package can be used to cross-reference an external \LaTeX{}
+document.
+This means that even when a work is split over different documents (that
+need to be processed separately) \cs{ref} or \cs{pageref} can use labels from
+any document, creating links between them. This facility has now been extended
+so that \cs{cite} commands and
+their cousins can now also reference bibliographies in external
+documents; this feature was first provided in the package
+\pkg{xcite} by Enrico Gregorio.
+
+Note that for technical reasons \pkg{xr} doesn't work with
+\pkg{hyperref}. Use \pkg{xr-hyper} instead if you need the latter
+package.
+
+
+\section{Changes to packages in the \pkg{amsmath} category}
+
+\subsection{\pkg{amsmath}: Introduce \texttt{overunderset} command}
+
+The \pkg{amsmath} package has always offered
+the commands \cs{overset} and
+\cs{underset} to produce binary operators with something set above or
+below. But sometimes one needs to put something above and something below:
+The newly added \cs{overunderset} makes this
+easily possible.
+
+
+
+\section{Documentation updates}
+
+There are a number of
+%small
+documentation updates in files
+on the documentation page of the project website~\cite{30:site-doc}.
+
+\subsection{Highlighting the standard NFSS codes for series}
+
+The \emph{Font Selection Guide}~\cite{fntguide} has been
+updated to strongly recommend that the standard codes should be used
+when providing font support. The reason for this recommendation is explained here.
+
+
+The font selection scheme uses a number of standard codes for
+\cs{fontseries} and \cs{fontshape} to ensure that different fonts are
+comparable, e.g., that you get a \enquote{light} weight if you specify
+\texttt{l} and \enquote{extra bold} when you write \texttt{eb},
+etc. Over the years people came up with a number of other creative
+short codes like \texttt{k}, \texttt{j}, \texttt{t} and others with
+the result that changing a font family required different codes and
+thus prevented user from easily mixing and matching different
+families.
+Some work has been undertaken to get back to a coherent scheme and
+all the font families supported through the program \texttt{autoinst}
+are now producing the standard codes again.
+
+
+\subsection{\LaTeX{} \texttt{base} and \texttt{doc} distribution reunited}
+
+For a long time the \LaTeX{} distribution available from \CTAN{} was
+split into several parts to allow them to be uploaded or downloaded
+separately. As this is these days more confusing than helpful we have
+recombined the base part with the documentation part (as both are
+anyway always updated jointly. Thus the package \texttt{latex-doc}
+is no longer separately available from \CTAN{} but contained in the
+\texttt{latex-base} distribution.
+
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{9}
+
+%\fontsize{9.3}{11.3}\selectfont
+
+\bibitem{30:Mittelbach:TB39-1} Frank Mittelbach:
+ \emph{New rules for reporting bugs in the \LaTeX{} core software}.
+ In: TUGboat, 39\#1, 2018.
+ \url{https://latex-project.org/publications/}
+
+\bibitem{devformat} Frank Mittelbach:
+ \emph{The
+ \LaTeX{} release workflow and the \LaTeX{} dev formats}.
+ In: TUGboat, 40\#2, 2019.
+ \url{https://latex-project.org/publications/}
+
+\bibitem{fntguide} \LaTeX{} Project Team:
+ \emph{\LaTeXe{} font selection}.\\
+ \url{https://latex-project.org/documentation/}
+
+\bibitem{30:site-doc}
+ \emph{\LaTeX{} documentation on the \LaTeX{} Project Website}.\\
+ \url{https://latex-project.org/documentation/}
+
+%\bibitem{30:site-pub}
+% \emph{\LaTeX{} Project publications on the \LaTeX{} Project Website}.\\
+% \url{https://latex-project.org/publications/}
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews30.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltx3info.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltx3info.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltx3info.tex 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltx3info.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
% The latest version of this license is in
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% version 2008 or later.
%
% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltxdoc.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/makeindx.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manual.err
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manual.err 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manual.err 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,365 +0,0 @@
-\documentclass{article}
-
-\newcommand{\reportedby}[2]{{\small [First reported by #1 on \mbox{#2}.]}}
-\newcommand{\erratum}[1]{\subsubsection*{#1}}
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% MODIFICATION DATE %
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% %
-% Defines \moddate to expand to modification date such as %
-% %
-% 5 Aug 1991 %
-% %
-% and \prdate to print it in a large box. Assumes editor %
-% updates modification date in standard SRC Gnu Emacs style. %
-% (should work for any user name). %
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\def\ypmd{% %
-% %
-% %
- Last modified on Sat 13 October 2018 at 12:56:41 PST by lamport %
- endypmd} %
-% %
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\newcommand{\moddate}{\expandafter\xpmd\ypmd} %
-\def\xpmd Last modified %
-on #1 #2 #3 #4 at #5:#6:#7 #8 by #9 endypmd{#2 #3 #4} %
-\newcommand{\prdate}{\noindent\fbox{\Large\moddate}} %
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\newcommand{\mytt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}
-\newcommand{\cindex}{\index}
-\newcommand\bs{\char '134 } % A backslash character for \tt font
-
-\title{Errata to the Second Edition of the \LaTeX\ Manual}
-\author{Leslie Lamport}
-\date{\moddate}
-
-\begin{document}
-\maketitle
-
-\noindent These are all the errors and omissions to the manual,
-\LaTeX: {\em A Document Preparation System}, second edition, published
-by Addison-Wesley, reported as of \moddate. Positions in the book are
-indicated by page and line number, where the top line of a page is
-number 1 and the bottom line is number $-1$. A running head and a
-page number are not considered to be lines, but all other lines are.
-Please report any additional errors to The \LaTeX\ Project at
-\texttt{www.latex-project.org/bugs/}\,.
-
-
-\subsection*{Errors Corrected in the First Printing}
-
-\erratum{page 25, example of \texttt{verse} environment}
-Replace \verb|{\em all\/}| by \verb|\emph{all}|.
- \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994}
-
-\erratum{page 28, first paragraph}
-Not an error, but it would be
-helpful to add the following sentence to the end of that paragraph:
- ``(If a declaration has arguments, they become additional
-arguments of the corresponding environment's \verb|\begin| command.)''
-
-
-\erratum{page 33, line 10}
-Add \verb|\]| to the list of fragile commands.
- \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994}
-
-\erratum{page 43, table 3.5}
-Add an entry for \verb|\notin| ($\notin$).
- \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994}
-
-\erratum{page 72, two examples}
-Change \verb|{\em ...}| to \verb|\emph{...}|
- \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994}
-
-\erratum{page 101}
-This is not an error, but some readers will find it helpful if, in the
-descriptions of \verb|\setlength| and \verb|\addtolength|,
-\verb|\gnat| were replaced by \verb|\parskip|.
- \reportedby{Ellen Gilkerson}{9 Aug 1994}
-
-\erratum{page 108, lines 7 and 10}
-This is not an error, but it might be easier to understand
-the example if \verb|\len| were replaced by something like \verb|\saved|.
- \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994}
-
-\erratum{page 139, lines $-8$ and $-9$}
-
-The funny break between these two lines should be eliminated.
-\reportedby{Malcolm Clark}{9 Aug 1994}
-
-\erratum{page 177, line $-12$}
-
-The \verb|twocolumn| option cannot be used with the \verb|letters|
-class.
-
-\erratum{page 197, lines 7 and 9}
-
-The \verb|figure*| environment is ended by \verb|\end{figure*}|, and
-the \verb|table*| environment is ended by \verb|\end{table*}|.
-\reportedby{Malcolm Clark}{9 Aug 1994}
-
-\erratum{page 228}
-
-Add a note that, before running a LaTeX2.09 file in compatibility mode
-in LaTeX2e, you should delete the old versions of the auxiliary files.
-
-\subsection*{Errors Corrected in the Second Printing}
-
-\erratum{page xv, line 10}
-``Chris Rowley'' should come after ``Sebastian Rahtz''.
-\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{24 April 1995}
-
-
-
-\erratum{page 29, line $-10$}
-Change ``error indicator line'' to ``error locator line''.
-\reportedby{Xavier Perramon}{2 Jan 1995}
-
-\erratum{page 37, lines 26--28}
-Change the two sentences ``None of these \ldots formula.'' to:
-\begin{quote}
-These text-producing commands can be used in math mode to put ordinary
-text in a formula. (When the command is used in math mode, its
-argument is processed in LR mode.) The declarations cannot be used in
-math mode. Section 3.3.8 explains how to change the type style of a
-formula's math-mode symbols.
-\end{quote}
-\reportedby{Mike Piff}{7 Mar 1995}
-
-\erratum{page 39, line 6}
-Replace ``any mode'' with ``paragraph and LR mode''. Also,
-after line 8, add:
-\begin{quote}
-The commands \verb|\dag|, \verb|\ddag|, \verb|\S|, and \verb|\P|
-can also be used in math mode.
-\end{quote}
-
-\erratum{page 53, line 24}
-Change ``are needed in the'' to ``are used in the''
-\reportedby{Mike Piff}{21 Oct 1994}
-
-\erratum{page 80, line 1}
-The section heading should not be outdented.
-\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{23 Jan 1995}
-
-\erratum{page 83, line $-8$}
-Change ``\verb|\resettime|'' to ``\verb|\settime|''.
-
-\erratum{page 84, after line $11$} Add the following sentence: ``The
-\hbox{\verb|\onlyslides|} and \hbox{\verb|\onlynotes|} commands may
-not work right if a \texttt{slide}, \texttt{overlay}, or \texttt{note}
-environment appears in the argument of any command.''
-\reportedby{Eike Ritter}{May 1996}
-
-\erratum{page 153, line 1}
-Add ``or subentry'' after ``entry''.
-\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{22 Feb 1995}
-
-\erratum{page 171}
-Add the following before line $-4$:
-\begin{description}
-\item[\mytt \bs columnwidth]
-Normal width
- \cindex{columnwidth}%
-of a column;
-% \index{column!width}%
- \index{width!of column}%
-equals \verb|\textwidth| except for multiple-column styles.
-Its value should not be changed with the length-setting commands.
-\end{description}
-Also, in line $-4$, change \verb|\textwidth| to \verb|\columnwidth|.
-%\reportedby{Volker Kuhlmav}{20 Jan 1995}
-\reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{9 Sep 1994}
-
-\erratum{page 180, lines 15--19}
-%
-Replace these five lines (which begin ``These commands are overridden'')
-with:
-\begin{itemize} \item[]
-To override a heading on a right-hand page (any page for one-sided
-printing), put a \verb|\markright| after the sectioning command and in
-its mandatory argument, and add an optional argument without the
-\verb|markright|, as in
-\begin{itemize}
-\item[]
- \verb|\chapter[Gnu Scents]{Gnu Scents\markright{|\textit{right\_head}\verb|}}|\\
- \verb|\markright{|\textit{right\_head}\verb|}|
-\end{itemize}
-To change the heading on a left-hand page, put a \verb|\markboth|
-command immediately after the sectioning command.
-\end{itemize}
-\reportedby{Jerome Breitenbach}{14 Dec 1995}
-
-\erratum{page 182}
-The dimensions
-\verb|\pageheight| and \verb|\pagewidth|
-should be \verb|\paperheight| and \verb|\paperwidth|,
-respectively. (The index entries on page 260 should also be changed.)
-\reportedby{Alan Jeffrey, on behalf of a user}{12 Sep 1995}
-\erratum{page 192, line 19}
-Change ``\emph{cmd}'' to ``\emph{def}''.
-\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{9 Mar 1995}
-
-
-\erratum{page 195, line 14}
-Change ``numbered `within' it'' to ``numbered directly `within' it''.
-\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{5 Dec 1994}
-
-\erratum{page 197, line 14}
-After ``\verb|\textwidth|'' add ``or \verb|\columnwidth|''
-\reportedby{Volker Kuhlmann}{22 Jan 1995}
-
-\erratum{page 226}
-
-After line 7, add
-\begin{quote}
-These declarations may not be used in math mode.
-\end{quote}
-Replace lines 16-19 (beginning ``None of these commands'') with
-\begin{quote}
-When these commands are used in math mode, the \emph{text}
-argument is processed in LR mode.
-
-These commands and declarations are robust. Words typeset in
-typewriter style are not hyphenated except where permitted by \verb|\-|
-commands.
-\end{quote}
-\reportedby{Marc Lavine}{22 Aug 1995}
-
-\erratum{page 228}
-To the section ``Type Styles and Sizes'', add the following sentence:
-A few mathematical symbols now require the \texttt{latexsym} package---see
-Tables 3.4--3.7.
-
-\subsection*{Errors Corrected in the Sixteenth Printing}
-
-\erratum{page 42, line 14}
-Change ``through a symbol'' by ``through a relation symbol''.
-\reportedby{Frank Mittelbach}{15 Nov 1996}
-
-\erratum{page 42, Table 3.4}
-\verb|\land| should be listed as a synonym for \verb|\wedge|, and
-\verb|\lor| should be listed as a synonym for \verb|\vee|.
-\reportedby{Chris Rowley}{28 Oct 1998}
-
-\erratum{page 43, Table 3.7}
-\verb|\lnot| should be listed as a synonym for \verb|\neg|.
-\reportedby{Chris Rowley}{15 Oct 1998}
-
-\erratum{page 137} This is not an error, but it would be better to
-change lines 23 and 24 to:
-\begin{quote}
-\LaTeX\
- \index{file!not found error}%
- \index{file!nonexistent}%
-is trying to read a file that apparently doesn't exist. If the missing
-file has the extension \texttt{tex}, then \LaTeX\ is trying to
- \index{input)@\verb+\input+!of nonexistent file}%
- \index{include)@\verb+\include+!of nonexistent file}%
-\verb|\input| or \verb|\include| it; if it
-\end{quote}
-
-\erratum{page 171, line 19}
-Change the description of \verb|\indent| to:
-\begin{description}
-\item[\mytt \bs indent]
-Produces a
-% \cindex{indent}%
-% \index{paragraph!indentation}%
-horizontal space whose width equals the width of the
-paragraph indentation. It can be used to add a paragraph indentation
-where one would otherwise be suppressed. (If it doesn't work,
-try typing \verb|\indent\indent|.) Robust.
-\end{description}
-\reportedby{Chris Rowley}{15 Oct 1998}
-
-\erratum{page 179, line 19}
-%
-Change to:
-\begin{quote}
-page style for the \texttt{article} and \texttt{report} document classes.
-\end{quote}
-\reportedby{Stephen J. Alter}{17 Sep 1997}
-
-\erratum{page 195, line 28}
-Replace ``\textit{num}$_1$ and \textit{num}$_1$ are numbers''
-with ``\textit{num}$_1$ and \textit{num}$_2$ are numbers''.
-\reportedby{Magnus Lewis-Smith}{14 Jan 1999}
-
-\erratum{page 196, line $-5$}
-Change \verb|\newboolean{|\emph{name}\verb|}| to
-\verb|\newboolean{|\emph{nam}\verb|}|.
-\reportedby{Christopher von B\"{u}low}{28 Aug 2000}
-
-
-\erratum{page 198, line 14}
-Change ``it will not be printed'' to ``it will usually not be printed''.
-
-\erratum{page 218, line $-14$}
-Change ``\texttt{tabular}'' to ``\texttt{tabbing}''.
-\reportedby{Carlos Pita}{27 Aug 2001}
-
-\erratum{foldout, column 3, line 3}
-Replace \emph{style} with \emph{class}. \reportedby{Christopher von B\"{u}low}{28 Aug 2000}
-
-\subsection*{Errors Corrected in the Seventeenth Printing}
-
-\erratum{page 51, line 8}
-Change ``The \verb|\,| command'' to ``The \verb|\,| and \verb*|\ | commands''.
-\reportedby{Phillip J Shelton}{2 Jul 1999}
-
-\erratum{page 61, second example (middle of page)}
-Remove the \verb|\mbox{}| following the \texttt{tabbing} environment.
-\reportedby{Marcin Wolinski}{17 Sep 2003}
-
-\erratum{page 210, line 20}
-Add a space after ``bibliography''.
-\reportedby{Marcin Wolinski}{17 Sep 2003}
-
-\subsection*{Error Corrected in the Twenty-First Printing}
-\erratum{page 198, line $-11$}
-The sentence beginning ``The last three rules'' is hard to read. Better
-would be:
-\begin{quote}
-\noindent The last three rules are suspended when a
- \verb|\clearpage|,\linebreak
- \verb|\cleardoublepage|, or
- \verb|\end{document}| command occurs,
-at which point all unprocessed figures and tables are allowed a
-\hbox{\mytt p} option and printed.
-\end{quote}
-\reportedby{Paul Stanford}{9 Oct 2004}
-
-\subsection*{Error Corrected in the Twenty-Second Printing}
-
-\erratum{page 253, column 2, lines $-5$ and $-6$}
-
-The two index entries for \verb|\ldots| should be combined.
-
-
-\reportedby{Christopher Dutchyn}{22 July 2005}
-
-
-\subsection*{Uncorrected Errors}
-
-\erratum{page 206, line 17 (\texttt{\string\multicolumn} explanation)}
-
-Insert the following text right after ``\texttt{l}, and \texttt{r}.''
-\begin{quote}
-If the part of the environment's \emph{cols} argument being replaced
-immediately follows an \texttt{@} expression, then the \emph{item}
-will be preceded by a normal intercolumn space unless the
-\verb|\multicolumn| command's \emph{col} argument begins with an
-\texttt{@} expression. In particular, beginning the \emph{col}
-argument with \verb|@{}| will suppress that space.
-\end{quote}
-\reportedby{Ulrike Fischer, Frank Mittelbach}{23 Sep 2018}
-
-\end{document}
-
-%try
-%try
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manual.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/modguide.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/modguide.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/modguide.tex 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/modguide.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
% The latest version of this license is in
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% version 2008 or later.
%
% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/proc.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/slides.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/slifonts.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/source2e.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/source2e.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/source2e.tex 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/source2e.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright 1993-2016
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
% The latest version of this license is in
% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% version 2008 or later.
%
% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/syntonly.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/texpert.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/texpert.txt 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/texpert.txt 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -207,4 +207,4 @@
to install the new version before you can typeset these files.
---- Copyright 1995-2016 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved ---
+--- Copyright 1995-2019 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved ---
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tlc2.err
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tlc2.err 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tlc2.err 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,4630 +0,0 @@
-\newcommand\erratafiledate{2014-09-30}
-
-\def\comando#1{\texttt{\string#1}}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through
-% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and
-% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify
-% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata
-% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the
-% .cfg file.
-%
-% The current version of this file can be found at:
-%
-% https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-
-\begin{filecontents}{ttcterrata.cls}
-%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1997,2004,2005,2007, 2014 Frank Mittelbach
-%% This class file is licenced under LPPL latest version;
-%% see https://www.latex-project.org/lppl
-%
-%
-% It sets up a few commands used to format the errata entries for books in the
-% Addison-Wesley Series:
-%
-% Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting
-%
-% hence the name. However, anybody who likes to use it is free to apply it for
-% errata files of other books.
-%
-% Changes:
-%
-% v1.0a - changed name from errata.cls to ttcterrata.cls
-
-\ProvidesClass{ttcterrata}
- [2007/11/10 v1.0a Mini class for errata files; subject to change (FMi)]
-
-\LoadClass{article}
-
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1}
-\addtolength\textwidth{5cm}
-\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm}
-
-\addtolength\textheight{36pt}
-
-\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
-\MakeShortVerb{\|}
-
-\RequirePackage{array,longtable}
-\RequirePackage{multicol}
-
-
-\newcommand\erratagetnumber{}
-\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3}
-
-
-\newcommand\gobbleerrata{%
- \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
- \let\endgobble\egroup
- \let\hideamp\relax
- \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par}
-
-\newcommand*\hideamp{&}
-
-\let\endgobble\relax
-
-
-\newcommand\erratastartdate{}
-\newcommand\myprinting{1}
-
-
-\newcommand\doweprint[2]{%
- \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else \ifx s#2 1000\else#2 \fi\fi
- \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber <
- \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax
- \@tempswatrue
- \else
- \@tempswafalse
- \fi
- \else
- \@tempswafalse
- \fi
-}
-
-
-
-\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate}
-\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and}
-
-\newcommand\showallerrors{%
- \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}%
- \renewcommand\printedentries{up to}
- \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}}
-
-
-\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{%
- \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi}
-
-\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{%
- \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}}
-
-\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg}
- {
- \input{\jobname.cfg}
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found }
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- \AtEndDocument{
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing}
- \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision}
- \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date}
- \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* Current settings are:}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting}
- \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- }}
- {}
-
-%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision>
-
-\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{%
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\newcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{%
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble
- &\\[4pt]%
- \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\}
-
-\newenvironment{erratalist}
- {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}}
- {\endgobble\end{longtable}}
-
-\newcommand\erratatitle[2]
- {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries
- Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt]
- \small Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2\\
- (For other periods/print runs reprocess this document
- with different config settings)
- \end{center}%
- \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}%
- \thispagestyle{plain}%
- \vspace{20pt}}
-
-\pagestyle{myheadings}
-
-\AtBeginDocument{\small}
-
-\setlength\parindent{0pt}
-\setlength\parskip{2pt}
-
-\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par}
-
-% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands:
-
-\let\u\underline
-\renewcommand\>{$\to$}
-
-%%% some code suggested by Thorsten Hansen to count the number of
-%%% contributions by individuals (will work only if we do not get
-%%% too many :-)
-
-\def\count at contributors#1/#2/#3\@nil{
- \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}}{}\stepcounter{#1}%
-%%% also count secondary:
-%%% \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}\stepcounter{#2}%
-}
-
-\renewcommand\erroronpage[5]{%
- \count at contributors#3/secondary/\@nil
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\renewcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{%
- \count at contributors#3/secondary/\@nil
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\renewcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{%
- \sffamily#1} #2\@ifundefined{c@#1}{}{ (\arabic{#1})}\par}
-
-\end{filecontents}
-
-
-\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg}
-%
-%
-% Configuration file for the errata listing of
-%
-% The LaTeX Companion, Second Edition
-%
-%
-% \erratastartdate
-%
-% Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed.
-%
-% The format is YYYY/MM/DD.
-%
-% The default below ensures that all entries for a particular
-% printing are typeset.
-%
-
-\renewcommand\erratastartdate{2004/04/22}
-
-
-%
-% \myprinting
-%
-% Specifies which (revised) printing you own. For example, if you
-% have the second printing set this to 2 so that errors already
-% corrected in that printing will not appear in your errata
-% listing.
-%
-% The default below ensures that all entries relevant to the x-th
-% printing are typeset.
-%
-%
-
-\renewcommand\myprinting{1}
-\renewcommand\myprinting{2} % 3rd printing was without corrections
-\renewcommand\myprinting{4} % September 2005
-
-%
-% \norevisionnumbers
-%
-% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same
-% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed
-% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in
-% italic and add the revision number as a superscript.
-
-%
-% \showallerrors
-%
-% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are
-% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and
-% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by
-% default.
-%
-%
-\endinput
-\end{filecontents}
-
-
-\documentclass{ttcterrata}[2005/11/10] % we want new class
-
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\let\u\underline % shortcut for this file
-\newcommand\meta[1]{$\langle$\textit{#1\/}$\rangle$}
-
-\usepackage{textcomp}
-
-\usepackage{url}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\erratatitle{The \LaTeX{} Companion, Second Edition}{\erratafiledate}
-
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- at book(A-W:MG04,
- author = {Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens},
- title = {The {\LaTeX} Companion},
- edition = 2,
- note = {With Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley},
- series = {Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting},
- publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
- address = {Boston, Massachusetts},
- year = 2004,
- pagenums = {1120},
- bibliography = {yes},
- index = {yes},
- isbn = {0-201-36299-6},
-)
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{3cm}}
-\item[]
-
-This file (\texttt{\jobname.err}) can be found as part of the \LaTeX{}
-distribution and its latest version is maintained on the \LaTeX{}
-project site at \texttt{https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/\jobname.err}
-where you will also find extracts of the book.
-
-The first column in the table shows the page number of the errata
-entry. Superscript numbers in the first column refer to the printed
-revision in which this entry was corrected (\textit{s} indicates a
-correction in the sources only). The second
-column gives the precise location (negative line or paragraph numbers
-are counted from the bottom of the page). The third column shows the
-first finder of the problem.
-
-You can customize this list to only show errata related to the printing
-you own by changing the configuration in the file \texttt{\jobname.cfg}.
-
-\begin{center}
- \Large \bfseries To Err is Human --- Bug Contest
-\end{center}
-
-Any mistake found and reported is a gain for all readers of our book.
-For this reason Addison-Wesley and the authors offer a prize (for 6
-periods) to the eligible person who finds the largest
-number of bugs during that period (in case of a draw a random choice
-will be made between all those with the largest number of findings).
-A person can receive at most one prize, ever; errors found by any of
-the authors do not count.
-
-Each prize is a free choice of any single computing book found on the
-AW Professional web site \texttt{http://www.awprofessional.com} (that
-is, no boxed sets or multiple volume offers).
-
-
-As usual, the authors and publisher reserve the right to make various
-decisions such as whether a reported feature is an error for
-competitive purposes or whether similar features count as a single or
-multiple errors. ---
-Good luck!
-
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{clr}
-Contest period ends & Winner \\[4pt]
-2004/10 & Hubert G\"a\ss lein & 287 suggestions\\
-2005/04 & Ulrich Dirr & 11 suggestions\\
-2005/10 & Daniel Alonso i Alemany & 13 suggestions\\
-2006/04 & Michael Schutte & 2 suggestions\\
-2008/05 & Brooks Moses & 1 suggestion \\
-\ldots & -- final draw eventually --
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{list}
-
-\newpage
-
-
-%<--------------------------
-
-\newcommand\BibTeX{\textsc{Bib}\TeX}
-
-\begin{erratalist}
-
-\CHAPTER{General }
-
-\seriouserroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/06/12}{}
-
- To help you in assessing this errata document we have placed
- exclamation marks in front of each entry that we consider essential
- for correctly understanding the book contents.
-
-\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/05/14}{}
-
- Due to the printing process there may be small alignment problems
- between blue and black text on some pages. These can vary from book
- to book depending on how the paper was handled between print
- runs---such is the analog nature of printing on a press.
-
-
-
-\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/07/28}{}
- Slightly updated examples matching the second printing will be made
- available at CTAN: \texttt{info/examples/tlc2}. The book CD will
- have the original examples from the first printing.
-
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Front matter}
-
-\erroronpage{iv}{bottom}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2}
- Some updates indicating second printing (with corrections)
-
-\erroronpage{v}{l.7}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{}
- For the record: the term ``for ever'' is the British spelling and a
- conscious decision.
-
-\erroronpage{xiii}{\S 8.6.2}{FMi}{2004/06/21}{2}
- Change section heading: ``Operator \u{and function} names''
-
-\erroronpage{xxiii}{11.2}{FMi}{2004/07/26}{2}
- Change table caption: ``Languages supported by \u{\texttt{texindy}}''
-
-\erroronpage{xxvii}{para 1, l.1+6+7}{CAR}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Each time a space is missing between package names in parentheses.
-
-\erroronpage{xxvii}{para 1, l.-2}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2}
- Add: ``Thorsten Hansen (\textsf{bibunits}\u{, \textsf{multibib}})
-
-\erroronpage{xxvii}{para 4, l.2}{NBe}{2004/04/23}{2}
- Replace ``Wai Wing'' with ``Wai Wong'' (very sorry for this typo).
-
-\erroronpage{xxvii}{para 4, l.2}{MHCL/CAR}{2004/06/09}{2}
- Kai Tek airport is correctly named Kai Tak airport but the photo
- was actually taken at Hong Kong International Airport
-
-\erroronpage{xxvii}{after para 4}{FMi}{2004/06/09}{2}
- Add following paragraph:
-``Any mistake found and reported is a gain for all readers of our
-book. We would therefore like to thank those readers who reported
-any of the mistakes which had been overlooked so far.
-The latest version of the errata file can
-be found on the \LaTeX{} project site at
-\texttt{https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/tlc2.err} where you will also
-find an on-line version of the index and other extracts from the book.''
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 1}
-
-\erroronpage{2}{para 5, l.1}{MSc}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Replace: LaTeX \> \LaTeX{}
-
-\erroronpage{7}{para 5, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Missing word and wrong designation of acronym:
- ``\ldots\
- languages such \u{as} the \u{Portable Document} Format (PDF)
- \ldots''
-
-
-\erroronpage{7}{para 5, l.-2}{MSc/CAR}{2004/06/06}{2}
-Replace: ``\ldots produce other device-independent
- output forms in proprietary languages such as the Portable Document
- Format~(PDF) (extension~\texttt{.pdf}).'' \> \\
- ``\ldots produce device-independent
- file formats including the Portable Document Format~(PDF)
- (extension~\texttt{.pdf}), which is the native file format of Adobe
- Acrobat.''
-
-
-\erroronpage{13}{para -2, l.5}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2}
- Replace ``writes'' with ``write''.
-
-%\erroronpage{13}{last para, l.1}{MSc}{2004/06/08}{}
-% ``blue notes`` vertically misaligned
-
-\erroronpage{14}{para 2, l.2}{FMi}{2004/06/12}{2}
- Bug in \texttt{url.sty} generated extra space.
-
-\erroronpage{14}{para 2, l.6}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2}
- Printing problem: ``or'' only half visible.
-
-\erroronpage{14}{para 3, l.3}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Printing problem: ``d'' in ``document'' only half visible.
-
-\erroronpage{14}{exa 1-3-5, l.6}{DHL}{2004/05/14}{2}
- Printing problem: ``i'' in ``\verb=\section='' not visible.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 2}
-
-\erroronpage{16}{para 4,ll.2--4}{HjG}{2005/04/03}{4}
- Nitpicking? Code for class options will not be in a package file!\\
- ``Code for \u{class} options is sometimes stored in files
- (in \u{this case} with the extension \texttt{.clo}) but is normally
- directly specified in the class or package file (\dots).''
- \>\\
- ``Code for options is sometimes stored in files
- (in \u{the case of classes} with the extension \texttt{.clo}) but
- is normally
- directly specified in the class or package file (\dots).''
-
-\erroronpage{16}{para 4, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/10/10}{4}
- Although not wrong, better:
- ``For example,
- the option \texttt{11pt} \u{might be} related to
- \u{\texttt{art11.clo}} when\ldots''
- \>
- ``For example,
- the option \texttt{11pt} \u{is} related to
- \u{\texttt{size11.clo}} when\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{20}{para 1, l.-2}{BMo}{2004/05/14}{2}
- Words need to be swapped: ``\ldots can achieve \u{this effect} by
- \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{20}{footnote, l.2}{MSc/FMi}{2004/06/10}{2}
- Replace ``e.g.,'' with ``i.e.,''
-
-\erroronpage{21}{para 1 of 2.1.4, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Words need to be swapped:
- ``\ldots package \u{created by} Donald Arseneau.''
-
-\erroronpage{21}{para -2, l.2}{MLi}{2013/07/12}{}
- The command is called \verb=\AskOption= (without ``s'')
-
-\erroronpage{24}{para -2,ll.-3\slash -2}{HjG}{2005/04/03}{4}
- \LaTeX{}nically not correct:\\
- ``\u{all} lower-level counter\u{s} (i.e., \u{those} with
- higher-level number\u{s}) \u{are} reset.''\>\\
- ``\u{the next} lower-level counter (i.e., \u{that} with \u{the next}
- higher-level number) \u{is} reset.''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{26}{footnote}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Misplaced closing brace (see example 2-2-3):\\
- \verb=\fbox{\csname thesection\endcsname\hspace{0.5em}=%
- \u{\texttt{\textbraceright}}
- \>
- \verb=\fbox{\csname thesection\endcsname=%
- \u{\texttt{\textbraceright}}\verb=\hspace{0.5em}=
-
-\erroronpage{27}{exa 2-2-4}{MBr}{2004/08/01}{2}
- Rewrite example text to avoid overfull hbox.
-
-\erroronpage{27}{para -2, l.4}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Missing italic correction:
- \verb=\=\emph{name}\verb=mark=
-
-
-\seriouserroronpage{28}{afterskip item, ll.3--4}{HjG}{2005/04/03}{4}
- \LaTeX{}nically not correct (cf.\ latex/3463):\\
- ``\dots\ whether a display heading (\textit{afterskip}${}\geq0$) or a
- run-in heading (\textit{afterskip}${}<0$) is produced.''\>\\
- ``\dots\ whether a display heading (\textit{afterskip}${}>0$) or a
- run-in heading (\textit{afterskip}${}\leq0$) is produced.''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{32}{para -1,l.4--7}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Replace: ``The modified |\section| command
-also starts a new page, which is typeset with a special page style
-(see Chapter~4) and with
-top floats suppressed.
-The indentation of the first paragraph in a
-section is also suppressed by using the low-level kernel command
- |\@afterheading| and setting
-the Boolean switch \texttt{@afterindent} to \texttt{false}.
-For details on the use of these commands see the |\chapter| implementation in
-the standard classes (file \texttt{classes.dtx}).''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{33}{code}{FMi}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Replace code as follows to make statement on p.32 true:\\
-\hspace{0pt minus\linewidth}\begin{minipage}{1.35\linewidth}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\makeatletter
- \renewcommand\appendix{%
- \renewcommand\section{% % Redefinition of \section...
- \newpage\thispagestyle{plain}% % new page, folio bottom
- \suppressfloats[t]\@afterindentfalse % no top floats, no indent
- \secdef\Appendix\sAppendix}% % call \Appendix or \sAppendix
- \setcounter{section}{0}\renewcommand\thesection{\Alph{section}}}
-
- \newcommand\Appendix[2][?]{% % Complex form:
- \refstepcounter{section}% % step counter/ set label
- \addcontentsline{toc}{appendix}% % generate toc entry
- {\protect\numberline{\appendixname~\thesection}#1}%
- {\raggedleft\large\bfseries \appendixname\ % typeset the title
- \thesection\par \centering#2\par}% % and number
- \@afterheading % prepare indentation handling
- \sectionmark{#1}% % add to running header
- \addvspace{\baselineskip}} % space after heading
-
- \newcommand\sAppendix[1]{% % Simplified (starred) form
- {\raggedleft\large\bfseries\appendixname\par \centering#1\par}%
- \@afterheading\addvspace{\baselineskip}}
-\makeatother
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{minipage}
-
-\erroronpage{30}{para-3, l.-2}{RPa}{2004/09/14}{4}
- ``page 426'' should be ``page 428''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{33}{code}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Definitions of \verb=\Appendix= and \verb=\sAppendix= use
- \verb=\flushright= instead of \verb=\raggedleft=!
-
- Editorial note: already addressed in previous major change.
-
-\erroronpage{33}{exa 2-2-11}{MBr}{2004/08/01}{2}
- Text contains two spaces after period (not wrong but unnecessary).
-
-\erroronpage{33}{exa 2-2-11}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2}
- Comment only needs one \% not two.
-
-% not really a bug but ...
-\erroronpage{35}{para 1}{hajk}{2005/09/29}{}
- Package fncychap also makes unwanted ``Chapter 0'' heading for
- |\chapter{Preface}| in |\frontmatter| of book.
-
- Comment: I don't really consider this a bug (as it is not surprising
- with such designs) but will see if it can be explicitly mentioned.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{45}{para 2, l.13}{DHL}{2004/05/27}{2}
- In the displayed code, the second occurrence of
- ``\verb=\renewcommand\theBhead=\dots'' \>
- ``\verb=\renewcommand\theChead=\dots''
-
-\erroronpage{37}{para 3, l.-2}{FMi}{2004/10/21}{4}
- Replace: ``\ldots title in lowercase'' \>
- ``\ldots title in \u{small capitals}''
-
-\erroronpage{46}{para -2,l.3}{HjG}{2005/04/03}{4}
- Delete: ``need\u{ed}'' \> ``need''
-
-\erroronpage{48}{para 2, l.5}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Delete doubled word:
- ``(\ldots\ to the \u{the} table of contents)''
-
-\erroronpage{49}{para 3, l.2}{DHL/CAR}{2004/05/27}{2}
- Replace: ``Thereby, the result of'' \>
- ``The exact effect of''
-
-\erroronpage{50}{para -4, l.3}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Add remark:
- ``\ldots, so that the standard document classes have definitions
- for \verb=\l at part= and \verb=\l at chapter=
- \u{(or \texttt{\char`\\l at section} with \textsf{article})}
- that do not use \verb=\@dottedtocline=.''
-
-\erroronpage{50}{para --1}{FMi}{2004/10/22}{4}
- Replace para with:
- The nesting level of the entry.
- With the help of the counter \texttt{tocdepth} the user can
- control how many nesting levels will be displayed.
- Levels greater than the value of this counter
- will not appear in the table of contents.
-
-
-\erroronpage{51}{fig.~2.3}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- The lines of the ``heading text'' are wrapped at a place different
- from that indicated by the \verb=|<- \@tocrmarg ->|=.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{51}{descr. of
- \texttt{\textbackslash
- @pnumwidth}}{CBa}{2005/04/04}{4}
- Needs changing with |\renewcommand|!
-
-\seriouserroronpage{51}{descr. of
- \texttt{\textbackslash @tocrmarg}}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Add additional sentence:
- ``It can be set to a rubber length, which results in the TOC being set
- unjustified.''
-
-\erroronpage{51}{footnote}{FMi}{2004/09/19}{4}
- Add: ``\ldots See Section 7.10.3 \u{on page 428} for more\ldots''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{52}{para 2, exa}{CBa}{2005/04/04}{4}
- As |\@pnumwidth| is actually a macro the assignment using
- |\settowidth| unfortunately doesn't work at all.
- Instead a value needs to be assigned via |\renewcommand|.
-
-\erroronpage{52}{para 3, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Printing problem: ``w'' in ``down'' only half visible.
-
-\erroronpage{52}{middle}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2}
- Add after code line:
- ``When adjusting \verb=\@pnumwidth= this way it is likely that the
- value of \verb=\@tocrmarg= needs to be changed as well to keep the
- layout of the table of contents consistent.''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{52}{para 3, l.-1}{JJN}{2004/08/17}{4}
- Replace ``and section'' with ``section, and subsection''.
- (or replace code above to use |\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}| and speak
- of "first" level)
-
-\erroronpage{55}{ll.-8/-7}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2}
- Missing word: ``\ldots\ is defined by \u{the} second argument.''
-
-\erroronpage{56}{footnote}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2}
-Remove: ``\ldots are limited to three characters, like MS-DOS \u{or Windows}.''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{57}{tab.~2.3}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2}
- \verb=\mtcPSfont= \> \verb=\mtcSPfont=\\
- \verb=\nomtcrules= \> \verb=\nomtcrule=\\
- \verb=\mtcrules= \> \verb=\mtcrule=
-
-\seriouserroronpage{57}{para-2, l.-3}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2}
- \verb=\partoc= \> \verb=\parttoc=
-
- \erroronpage{58}{exa 2-3-8}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2}
- km2 appears two times in the code and in the printed output;
- it should be \verb=km\textsuperscript={2} in the code
- and km\textsuperscript{2} in the output.
-
-\erroronpage{62}{l.-11}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2}
- ``recourse'' \> ``recur''
-
-\erroronpage{63}{para 1, l.1}{FMi}{2004/11/11}{4}
- Typo: ``This artific\u{i}al example shows how''
-
-\erroronpage{65}{para 2, l.-1}{CKr}{2004/10/15}{4}
- Correct: ``formated'' \> ``format\u{t}ed''
-
-\erroronpage{66}{marginal note}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2}
- Restrictions on keys deserve a dangerous bend sign.
-
-\erroronpage{68}{exa 2-4-3}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2}
- The box in the margin ``\fbox{2-4-3}'' is shifted right
- (with respect to other such boxes).
-
-\erroronpage{72}{para 3, l.-3}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/21}{2}
- Change/add:
- ``\ldots by comparing \u{the number of the chapter} in which the
-|\label| \u{occurred} with the current\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{75}{para -1, l.2}{CKr}{2004/10/17}{4}
- Change: ``provided the \textit{keys}'' \>
- ``provided the \textit{key}\u{s}''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{76}{para -2, l.5--8}{DAr/FMi}{2004/07/24}{2}
-Change marginal to ``{\itshape Unnumbered sections get moving
-arguments}''
-
-Change text to: ``As a consequence, \u{the
-arguments of unnumbered sectioning commands} are turned into
-moving arguments, \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{77}{para -1, l.-4}{DAr}{2004/07/24}{2}
- Add: ``In addition, no \u{unrelated} |\addcontentsline| command is
-allowed to intervene between heading and label.''
-
-\erroronpage{78}{\S 2.4.5, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2}
- Add: ``Sebastian
- Rahtz \u{(with contributions by Heiko Oberdiek and
- David Carlisle)} has developed\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{78}{para 3, l.3}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2}
- Program name changed: ``Acrobat Reader'' \> ``Adobe Reader''
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 3}
-
-\erroronpage{84}{}{DAr}{2004/07/23}{2}
-Change: ``For example, if the current size is \u{\ttfamily\textbackslash Large} then
-\verb=\relsize{-2}= would change to \u{\ttfamily\textbackslash normalsize}\,.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{84}{exa 3-1-7}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2}
- To avoid extra space in the output, second line should read:\\
- \verb*= {\relsize{-2}small words} inside.=
-
-\erroronpage{85}{para -1, l.5}{WaS/FMi}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Change: ``ON 28TH \u{OF} JULY 2003'' \> ``ON 2ND AUGUST 2004''
- (no OF generated)
-
-\seriouserroronpage{87}{para 3, l.1}{DAr}{2004/07/24}{2}
- Replace: |\uuline| \> |\uline|
-
-\erroronpage{87}{exa. 3-1-15}{V-Li}{2004/08/14}{}
- \verb+\-+ should be used on a word that is actually hyphenated.
-
- Well, would be nice but not easy to find one.
-
-\erroronpage{87}{exa. 3-1-16}{DHL}{2004/06/07}{2}
- The solid band produced by |\xout| is actually supposed to come
- out as a series of separated ``/'' symbols. With the
- \texttt{ulem} package used for the first printing that works well
- for most text fonts, but
- with Times Roman (used in the example) you get the result shown.
- The new package version fixes this defect.
-
-\erroronpage{92}{para 3, l.1+4}{UFi}{2004/07/31}{2}
-Change: ``The position and the \u{height} of the line
-produced by the |\ul| command can be customized using either
-|\setul| or |\setuldepth|\,. The command |\setul| takes two
-dimensions as arguments: the position of the line in relation to the
-baseline and the \u{height} of the line.
-
-\erroronpage{92}{para -1}{FMi}{2004/07/31}{2}
-Add: ``\ldots can use colored rules instead and, if desired, modify the
-highlighting color\u{ as demonstrated below}:
-
-\erroronpage{95}{exa 3-1-33}{MHo/FMi}{2004/05/17}{2}
- Replace: ``setup'' by ``set-up'' for consistency.
-
-\erroronpage{102}{para 1, l.-3}{CBC}{2004/05/18}{2}
- Replace: ``in great \u{of} detail'' with ``in great detail''.
-
-\erroronpage{103}{l.8}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Replace: ``arbitrary bad lines'' \> ``arbitrar\u{il}y bad lines''
-
-\erroronpage{105}{para -3, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Replace: ``typesetting'' \> ``typing''
-
-
-
-\erroronpage{107}{l.3--7}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{4}
- |\linespread| is the \LaTeXe\ command for
- setting up the value of \comando{\baselinestretch}; it is not necessary
- to use |\renewcommand| and in particular it is not necessary to
- activate the new interline spacing by changing font; it suffices the command
- |\selectfont|; the procedure described in this paragraph,
- although still possible, was the one to use with \LaTeX\,209 and with the
- early versions of \LaTeXe, and it was the only way when the First Edition was
- published. The command |\linespread| is introduced the first
- time on page~204, but section 3.1.13 was the right place to do it.
-
-
-\erroronpage{107}{para 4, l.3}{HjG}{2004/05/25}{2}
- Delete word: ``\ldots\ single\u{ (default)}, \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{107}{para -1, l.3--5}{DHL/FMi}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Add/change:
- ``\ldots leading is increased twice---once by |\baselineskip| (where
- \LaTeX{} already adds about 20\% space between baselines)\ldots'' \>
-``\ldots leading is \u{effectively} increased twice---once by |\baselineskip| (\u{which
- \LaTeX{} already sets to about 20\% above the font size})\ldots''
-
-
-\erroronpage{116}{Footnote 1, line 1}{CBC}{2004/05/18}{2}
- Replace: ``I managed to confuse'' with ``we managed to confuse''.
-
-\erroronpage{117}{para 2, l.2}{HjG}{2004/05/25}{2}
- Missing letter: ``It take\u{s} two \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{117}{para 3, l.3}{CBC}{2004/05/18}{2}
- Tense correction: ``\ldots they did not change when the text font
- \u{was} modified''.
-
-\erroronpage{117}{para 3,l.-3}{FMi}{2004/05/31}{2}
- Change: ``your list consist of'' \> ``your list\u{s} consist of''.
-
-\erroronpage{117}{para 3,l.-2}{CBC}{2004/05/18}{2}
- Change: ``lists consist\u{s} of'' \> ``lists consist of''.
-
-\erroronpage{117}{footnote}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Missing word: ``See, \ldots, the \textsf{ledmac} package [171]
- \u{for} the kinds of \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{119}{para 2, l.1}{DHL}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Replace word: ``By default, the footnote text is \u{justified}\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{121}{para 2, l.4}{HjG}{2004/05/25}{2}
- Missing word: ``the \texttt{symbol*} \u{option}''
-
-\erroronpage{124}{middle para, ll. -3/-2}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Missing word: ``It is even possible \u{to} use \ldots''
-
-\iffalse
-%% only do if real error on page
-\erroronpage{125}{para 3 of \S 3.2.7, ll.-2/-1}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{}
- Word position: ``\ldots\ whenever |\endnote| or |\endnotemark|
- \u{is used} without an optional argument.''
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{127}{para 3, l.last}{PYu}{2004/07/01}{2}
- Replace: ``ragged left'' \> ``ragged right''.
-
-\erroronpage{131}{footnote, l.1}{CBC}{2004/05/19}{2}
- Change: ``is not producing'' \> ``does not produce''.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{141}{syntax box}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Replace:
- \emph{body-font} \> \emph{body-style}\\
- \emph{head-font} \> \emph{head-style}\\
- \emph{head-after-format} \> \emph{head-after-space}
-
-\erroronpage{142}{exa 3-3-21/22}{UZi}{2005/03/15}{}
- With the newest version of \texttt{amsthm} the font setting for the headline
- is ignored for the optional description of the theorem (looks like a
- bug in amsthm).
-
-\erroronpage{142}{exa 3-3-21}{FMi}{2005/08/15}{4}
- There is an incompatibility between \texttt{amsthm} and
- \texttt{ragged2e}. If the latter is used then the use of |\newline|
- in a theorem declaration doesn't work.
-
-\erroronpage{142}{para -2, l.1}{DHL}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Missing word: ``make'' \> ``\u{to} make''.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{148}{exa 3-3-26}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2}
- In the example, |\hfil| is used; the text immediately before says:
- ``By using |\hfill| \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{150}{exa 3-3-28}{HjG}{2004/05/27}{2}
- Nit-picking :-)\\
- Comment should read: ``|%|\quad\texttt{term <\u{=} labelwidth}''\\
- And in ll.2/3 of the text following the example:
- ``If the label is \u{smaller} than |\labelwidth|, \ldots'' \>
- ``\ldots\ \u{not wider} \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{150}{Example 3-3-28, line 7}{UF}{2004/06/27}{2}
-In the code of the parbox there should be a |\mbox{}| or something
-similar after the |\\| to prevent an underfull hbox-warning.
-
-\erroronpage{150}{exa 3-3-28}{JBez}{2004/07/20}{}
- The vertical space above "Return values" is too small.
-
-\erroronpage{151}{para 3, l.2}{DHL}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Wrong word: to match the example,
- ``\textsc{Notes}'' should be ``\textsc{Note}''
-
-\erroronpage{152}{l.-1 before exa 3-4-2}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2}
- Replace: ``(see page 167)'' \> ``(see page 168)''
-
-\erroronpage{155}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2}
- Replace: ``behaves similarly to''
- \> ``is much like''
-
-\erroronpage{155}{para -2, l.5}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2}
- Replace: ``behave in similar fashion to''
- \> ``\ldots in \u{a fashion similar} to''
-
-\erroronpage{156}{para -1, l.4}{CBC}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Change: ``There is also the possibility to operate'' \> ``It is also
- possible to operate''.
-
-\erroronpage{157}{para 2, l.-4}{CBC}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Change: ``\ldots discussed below) are potentially'' \> ``\ldots
- discussed below) \u{is} potentially''.
-
-\erroronpage{158}{para3, l.3}{DHL/FMi}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Change word: ``tiny white rules \u{behind} the lines'' \> ``tiny white
- rules \u{between} the lines''.
-
-\erroronpage{166}{syntax box}{CAR}{2004/06/02}{2}
- Remove extra space: ``\ldots\verb*/}=/\u{~}\emph{data}\texttt=''
-
-\erroronpage{167}{para 1, l.2}{DAl}{2005/01/11}{4}
- Missing letter: ``\ldots bold italic face exi\u{s}ts.''
-
-\erroronpage{168}{para 3, l.2}{MLa}{2004/05/10}{2}
- Letter missing: ``While on\u{e} can successfully deploy a
- package\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{169}{tab.~3.7}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Spurious space: ``Pascal (\u{ \strut}Borland, \ldots)''
-
-\erroronpage{169}{tab.~3.7}{THa/FMi}{2004/06/21}{2}
- Move the information about blue entries to a separate table note.
-
-\erroronpage{173}{para 2, l.2}{FMi}{2004/11/11}{4}
- Typo: ``to indicate that the line was artific\u{i}ally broken''
-
-\erroronpage{175}{para 1, l.6}{FMi}{2005/02/22}{4}
- Replace: \textsf{inputenclistings} \> \textsf{inputenc}
-
-\erroronpage{177}{exa 3-5-1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/31}{2}
- In the first paragraph, the ``\ldots \verb*=.\para='' yields a
- single (sentence ending) interword space; but in the following
- three, ``\ldots \verb*=. \para='' yields doubled space.
- (Due to the leading space in the definition of |\para|.)
- The same problem is in exa 3-5-2 except that there is does not show
- in the output due to a linebreak.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{177/178}{ll.-2/-1/1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/01}{2}
- Missing word and references to wrong paragraphs of exa 3-5-2:\\
- ``The line numbers in the second |\marginpar| continue the
- numbering on the main vertical list (the last line of \u{first}
- paragraph was~5) and the \u{second} paragraph then continues with
- line number~9.''
- \\ \>
- ``\ldots\ (the last line of \u{the} \u{preceding} paragraph was~5) and
- the \u{third} paragraph \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{179}{exa 3-5-5}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2}
- In the first paragraph, the two instances of
- ``|\linelabel{|\ldots|}|\verb*= \sample=''
- yield double (sentence ending) interword space.
- (Due to the leading space in the definition of |\sample|.)
-
-\erroronpage{179}{Example 3-5-5, l.-2}{CBC}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Change: ``we see to refer to'' \> ``we see references to''.
-
-\erroronpage{182}{para 2, l.-2}{CBC}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Change: ``of an \verb=\Parallel..Text='' \> ``of \u{a}
- \verb=\Parallel..Text=.
-
-\erroronpage{182}{para 3, l.1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/31}{2}
- ``computer \u{lingua}'' \> ``computer \u{jargon}''
-
-\erroronpage{182}{exa 3-5-11}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/31}{2}
- Small improvement:\\
- |\setlength\parindent{|\u{\texttt{-10pt}}|}| \>
- \ldots \u{\texttt{\char`\{-\char`\\leftskip\char`\}}}
-
-\iffalse only on some books
-\erroronpage{183}{exa 3-5-13}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{}
- Printing problem:
- ``|[|'' in ``|\begin{Parallel}[v]{}{}|'' only half visible.
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{184}{footnote 1, l.1--2}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2}
- Rewrite beginning: ``Although the \textsf{multicol} package is
- distributed under LPPL (\LaTeX{} Project Public License)~[111], for
- historical reasons its copyright contains an additional ``moral
- obligation'' clause\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{189}{para 3, l.2}{MHo}{2004/05/08}{2}
- Spurious extra letter: ``If this is a
- possibility, \texttt{multicols}\u{t} produces a warning.''
-
-\erroronpage{189}{para -2, ll.2/3}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2}
- Extra word: ``bars in the margin, \u{the} known as \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{189}{par -1, l.4/5}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2}
- Add comma: ``However, if \ldots\ another\u{,} the \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{190}{}{FMi}{2004/06/13}{2}
- Editorial comment: changes for page 189 affect page break position
- so 190 has to be retypeset for second printing.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 4}
-
-\erroronpage{196}{table 4.2}{YiL}{2012/05/07}{}
- The values shown in the table aren't any quite correct. These days
- some of them are calculated depending on the chosen paper size option
- and so have slightly different values from what is listed in the table.
- The values listed are those that have been used in 2.09 (i.e., they
- would be fully correct in compatibility mode, that is for documents
- starting with |\documentstyle|).
-
-\erroronpage{199}{code block}{UFi}{2004/07/31}{2}
- Change:
- \texttt{\u{1in}+}|\oddsidemargin+\textwidth+\evensidemargin|\texttt{\u{+1in}}
-
-
-\erroronpage{202}{para 3, l.4}{CBC}{2004/05/21}{2}
- Change: ``list-related parameter'' \> ``list-related parameters''.
-
-\erroronpage{202}{para 3, l.4}{PYu}{2004/07/07}{2}
- Remove surplus word: ``in \u{in} figure 3.3''
-
-\erroronpage{203}{para 3, l.3}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2}
- ``one or the other criteri\u{a}''
- \> ``\ldots\ criteri\u{on}'' (singular)
-
-\seriouserroronpage{205}{para 2, l.2}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2}
- Delete backslash: ``an option of the type
- \u{\texttt{\char`\\}}\emph{num}|headlines|''
-
-\erroronpage{205}{para 3, l.1}{CBC}{2004/05/21}{2}
- Swap words: ``header \u{is size} enlarged'' \> ``header \u{size is}
- enlarged''.
-
-\erroronpage{205}{para 4, l.4}{CAR}{2004/06/06}{2}
- Delete word: ``\ldots taken up by the binding\u{ method}. For
- example,\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{205}{para 5, l.2}{CBC}{2004/05/21}{2}
-Omitted word: ``one can \u{perform} the parameter calculations''.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{205}{para 5}{FMi}{2004/06/06}{2}
-Append: For details see the KOMA-Script documentation.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{205}{Example 4-2-6, 1.3}{CBC}{2004/05/21}{2}
-Add a comment line: ``\verb=% syntax: \typearea[<binding corr.>]{<slices>}=''
-
-\erroronpage{206}{para 2, l.6}{FMi}{2004/06/06}{2}
-
- Replace: ``\ldots shows a layout \u{identical} to the one
- produced\ldots'' \>
- ``\ldots shows a layout \u{very similar} to the one produced\ldots''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{206}{para 2, l.6}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2}
- Wrong references:\\
- ``Example \u{4-2-4} on page \u{204}'' \>
- ``Example \u{4-2-5} on page \u{205}''
-
-\erroronpage{209}{para 1, l.1--2}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2}
- Replace:
- ``\ldots and does not leave sufficient space for marginal notes
- that fall outside the page.''
- \>
- ``\ldots but does not adjust the size of the marginal boxes to fit
- in the remaining margin.''
-
-
-\erroronpage{210}{para -1, l.3}{CBC}{2004/05/21}{2}
- Omitted word: ``allow you \u{to} set several values''.
-
-\erroronpage{211}{para 4, l.6}{FMi}{2004/08/30}{4}
- Add: ``\ldots be called multiple times \u{in the preamble},
- each time overwriting the previous settings.''
-
-\erroronpage{212}{para -1, l.2}{CKr}{2004/11/11}{4}
- Remove surplus: ``the \emph{logical} page
- \u{you} you want to produce.''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{213}{para 1, l.2}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2}
- Option \texttt{executive} is listed twice, replace once with
- \texttt{letter}.
-
-\erroronpage{213}{para 2, l.1}{CKr}{2004/11/11}{4}
- Typo: ``The following example sets up an artific\u{i}ally small logical page''
-
-\erroronpage{213}{para 1, l.1--2}{FMi}{2006/09/09}{4}
- Option \texttt{b3} is listed twice.
-
-\erroronpage{213/214}{exa 4-2-11/13}{FMi}{2004/06/05}{2}
- The picture (|rosette.ps|) is clipped a tiny bit at the left side.
- That's actually an error in the |.ps| file itself and can be seen
- in all other examples where the file is used.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{214}{para 1, l.6}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2}
- ``\ldots\ \texttt{notext} \ldots'' should be ``\ldots\
- \texttt{nographics} \ldots''.
-
-\erroronpage{217}{para -2, l.1}{HjG}{2005/05/08}{4}
- Replace (since the package's default is different):\\
- Finally the \u{en dash} between the prefix and the page number \dots\ \>\\
- Finally the \u{separator} between the prefix and the page number \dots
-
-\erroronpage{219}{l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Missing italic correction:
- \verb=\=\emph{name}\verb=mark=
-
-\erroronpage{219}{para -1,l.2}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4}
- Reference to wrong section:\\
- ``Table~9.2 on page~547 in Section~\u{9.1.3}'' \>\\
- ``Table~9.2 on page~547 in Section~\u{9.2.1}''
- (or omit section refence completely)
-
-\erroronpage{223}{tab 4.3}{THa}{2004/06/22}{2}
- Spurious space after superscript \textsuperscript{a} in footnote.
-
-\erroronpage{226}{para. 5, l.2}{PYu}{2004/07/05}{2}
- Change to plural: ``The headers and footers are typeset \u{in boxes}
- that, by default, \u{have} the same width as |\textwidth|\,. The
- \u{boxes} can be made wider (or narrower)\ldots''
-
-
-\erroronpage{227}{para 2,l.1}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4}
- Replace:
- ``running \u{heading}'' \>
- ``running \u{header}''
-
-\erroronpage{227}{para 3,l.1}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4}
- Replace:
- ``the \u{heading} is extended'' \>
- ``the \u{header} is extended'' \>
-
-\erroronpage{229}{2.-1}{CBC}{2004/05/24}{2}
- Change: ``if the first B-head\ldots would have already been'' \> ``if
- the first B-head\ldots had already been''.
-
-\erroronpage{229}{para -2,l.-2}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4}
- Replace:
- ``the \u{heading}'' \>
- ``the \u{header}''
-
-\erroronpage{230}{exa 4-4-3}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4}
- Add |%| character:
- ``|\fancyfoot[R]{\scriptsize\today}|\texttt{\u{\char`\%}}''
-
-% not a bug, but heh ho
-\erroronpage{232}{ll.1/2}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Add words: ``With a similar mechanism we prepared \u{the running
- headers of} the index for this book.''
-
-\erroronpage{232}{ll.1/2}{CKr}{2004/11/17}{4}
- Remove surplus: ``With a similar mechanism we prepared \u{the} the running\ldots''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{234}{First boxed command}{CBC}{2004/05/24}{2}
- Change: ``\verb=\enlargethispage*{=size\verb=}='' \>
- ``\verb=\enlargethispage{=size\verb=}=''.
-
-\erroronpage{237}{para 1, l.3}{MKo}{2004/08/06}{2}
- Change: ``\textsf{scrpage}'' \> ``\textsf{scrpage2}''
-
-\erroronpage{237}{para 4, l.3}{DAl}{2005/01/11}{4}
- Change: ``also works as \u{an} replacement'' \> ``also works as
- \u{a} replacement''
-
-\erroronpage{237}{para 5, l.2}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2}
- Change: ``14pt'' \> ``17pt''
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 5}
-
-\erroronpage{239}{para -1, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Extra word: ``After \u{a} taking a quick look \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{241}{Example 5-1-1}{CBC}{2004/05/24}{2}
-
- Change: ``esprit trouble'' \> ``esprit troubl\'e''.
-
-The whole example has been changed to better demonstrate
-the \verb|\kill| command.
-
-\erroronpage{242}{para -2}{DSch/FMi}{2005/09/19}{4}
- Replace para with:
-``The \texttt{tabular*} environment has an additional width argument that
-specifies the required total width of the table.
-It needs stretchable spaces between columns, that have to be added using
-|\extracolsep| (see page~246).''
-
-\iffalse
-%% check, maybe (if other error
-\erroronpage{243}{para 1, l.3/4}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{}
- Change: ``Their scope can be \u{general} or local.''
- \> ``\u{global}''
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{243}{}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{4}
- The explanation of the command \comando{\arraystretch} is
- wrong; in fact it does not multiply the inter-row space by the specified
- factor, so that a factor of 1.5 would move the rows 50\% farther apart.
- \comando{\arraystretch} scales by the specified factor the height and depth of
- the invisible strut that is in the first cell of every row of tabular and array
- environments. If all the cells of the row are smaller than the strut the effect
- is more or less similar to an enlargement of the inter-row space, while if at
- least one cell in the row is larger than the strut no spreading apart takes
- place other than that required by the largest cell.
-
-
-
-\erroronpage{243/244}{tab.~5.1/5.2}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2}
- In the left columns of these tables, typewriter font should be used
- for the braces, to better match the appearance in the syntax boxes.
-
-\erroronpage{244}{tab.~5.2}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2}
- 1. In the |m| row, the braces in |\parbox|\u{\{}\emph{width}\u{\}}
- are not from the typewriter font, as they are in the |b| row.\\
- 2. In the |>| and |<| rows, the |p|, |m|, and |b| options are
- listed once without and once with their |{..}| arguments.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{244}{para -1, l.3--4}{FMi/DCa}{2005/02/05}{4}
- Replace: ``the sum of its value,
- added to the product
- |\baselineskip|${}\times{}$|\arraystretch}|''
- \>
- `` $|\arraystretch| \times (|\extrarowheight| + 0.7 |\baselineskip|)$''
-
-
-\erroronpage{246}{para 3}{FMi}{2005/09/19}{4}
- Add blue marginal note: ``Making \texttt{tabular*} stretch to the
- required width''
-
-\erroronpage{246}{para 3, l.3/4}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Change:
- ``The use \ldots\ is subject\u{ed} to two restrictions: \ldots''
- \> ``\ldots~subject \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{247}{exa 5-2-9}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2}
- Add hyphenation points for |Possibi\-li\-t\'es|
-
-\erroronpage{248}{para 1}{FMi}{2005/09/19}{4}
- Replace para with: ``A
- common use of |@{}| is to remove the space equal to
-the value of |\tabcolsep| (for \texttt{tabular}) that, by default,
-appears on each side of the table,
-except when the column specification starts or ends in a \verb=|=.''
-
-
-\erroronpage{249}{exa 5-2-11}{FMi}{2004/07/27}{2}
- Add hyphenation points for |Possibi\-li\-t\'es|
-
-\seriouserroronpage{249}{l.-2}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Change:
- ``\ldots\ the \textsf{array} package \texttt{m} and \u{\texttt{t}}
- types, \ldots''
- \> ``\ldots\ \u{\texttt{b}} \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{252}{para 2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Missing word: ``\ldots\ the last entry in \u{a} row \ldots''\\
- Missing word: ``This specification may \u{be} saved \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{252}{para 3, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Either add: ``The |X| columns are set using the |p| column
- \u{type}, \ldots''\\
- or change (cf.~l.2: an |m| column): ``\ldots\ using \u{a} |p|
- column \ldots''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{257}{syntax box~2}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Typo: ``\texttt{\char`\\botto\u{m}caption}''
-
-\erroronpage{261}{para 3, l.3}{HPB/FMi}{2004/07/16}{2}
-Add: ``\ldots may be typeset using
- \u{the packages \textsf{array} and} \textsf{longtable} \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{262}{para -1, l.2}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/04}{2}
- Missing characters:
- ``in standard \LaTeX{}\u{'s} \textsf{article} class''
-
-\erroronpage{270}{exa 5-6-7}{DCa}{2004/07/22}{2}
- Spurious `` d'' after ``Beef'' should be deleted.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{270}{para 3 l.1}{UFi}{2004/07/31}{2}
- Change: |\botrule| \> |\bottomrule|
-
-\seriouserroronpage{271}{para 3}{FMi}{2004/12/17}{4}
- Replace para by: ``By default, the rule extends all the way to the left, but is
- ``trimmed'' from the rightmost column by the length specified in the
- length parameter |\cmidrulekern|. The optional (\emph{trim})
- \u{argument may contain the characters
- \texttt{l} and \texttt{r},
- indicating that the rule}
- \u{is to be trimmed from the left or right, respectively.}
- Each \texttt{l} and \texttt{r} may optionally be followed by a width
- argument \u{specified using \texttt{\{}\emph{widths}\texttt{\}}},
- in which case the rule is trimmed by this amount rather than by the default
- |\cmidrulekern|.
-
-
-\seriouserroronpage{271}{syntax box~1}{HjG}{2004/06/04}{2}
- Argument is optional, not mandatory:
- |\addlinespace|\texttt{\u[}\emph{width}\texttt{\u]}
-
-\erroronpage{273}{para 3, l.3}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Missing word: ``not accounted for \u{by} |\multirow|''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{278}{para 2, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Replace: ``Section 6-3-4'' \> ``Example 6-3-4''
-
-\erroronpage{279}{list, item 1}{CKr}{2004/11/30}{4}
- Correct typo: ``forced line b\u{r}eaks.''
-
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 6}
-
-\erroronpage{283}{para 2, l.5--8}{FMi}{2005/01/15}{4}
-Replace with: ``We then continue by
- explaining how you can define and use your own floating environments (Section~6.3.1),
- or, conversely, how captioning commands can be used to enter
- information into the list of figures and tables for nonfloating
- material (Section~6.3.2).
- Then methods for rotating the content of a float are described
- (Section~6.3.3).
-
-\erroronpage{284}{}{FMi}{2005/01/15}{4}
- Editorial comment: needs reprinting since one line moved from
- 283 to the current page.
-
-\erroronpage{285}{item 3, l.3}{FMi}{2005/02/13}{4}
- Use typewriter: ``the default is \texttt{12pt}
- \texttt{plus} \texttt{2pt} \u{\texttt{minus}}
- \texttt{2pt} for 10\,pt''
-
-\erroronpage{285}{item 3, l.3}{HjG}{2005/02/06}{4}
- Default for 12pt document size is given wrong:\\
- ``\texttt{\u{14pt} plus 2pt minus 4pt}'' \>
- ``\texttt{\u{12pt} plus 2pt minus 4pt}''
-
-\erroronpage{285}{item 3, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/05}{2}
- Should be singular: ``for 12pt document size\u{s}).''
-
-\erroronpage{285}{item 7, l.3}{HjG/FMi}{2005/02/06}{4}
- Replace (as it is rubbish):
- ``(the default is like |\textfloatsep| on a text page,
- but is |8pt plus 2fil| on a page that contains only floats)'' \>\\
- ``(the default is like |\textfloatsep|)''
-
-\erroronpage{288}{para -1, l.4--7}{DAr/FMi}{2004/07/23}{2}
- Replace part with:
-``However, by itself this option
-forces all floats to appear \emph{before} the next section material is
-typeset, since the |\FloatBarrier| prevents a float from a current
- section from appearing below
-the start of the new section, even if some material of the current
-section is present on the same page. ''
-
-\erroronpage{292}{para 4, ll.1/2}{HjG}{2004/06/05}{2}
- Replace: ``combination \u{to}'' \> ``combination \u{of}''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{292}{para -1, l-2}{FMi}{2005/01/08}{4}
-Add sentence:
- ``Because the float styles define the placement of the caption,
-floats can contain only a single \verb=\caption= command which is a
-restriction compared to standard \LaTeX's behavior.''
-
-Also add marginal warning: ``Only one \verb=\caption= supported''
-
-
-\erroronpage{293}{para 1, l.3}{J-CCh}{2005/06/01}{4}
-Remove surplus char: ``package documentation in
-\texttt{float\u{s}.dtx}.''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{293}{exa 6-3-1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/05}{2}
- Wrong command used (or misplaced opening brace) in preamble code:\\
- |\newcommand\xmlcode[1]{\|\u{\ttfamily ttfamily}|{#1}}|
- \>\\
- |\newcommand\xmlcode[1]{\|\u{\ttfamily texttt}|{#1}}| \\
- only by chance this doesn't do any harm in the example!
-
-\erroronpage{293}{exa 6-3-1}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{4}
-The Euler constant must be typeset in roman type according
-to the ISO rules; $e$ is the charge of the electron.
-
-\erroronpage{294}{exa 6-3-3}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/05}{2}
- The picture (|rosette.ps|) is clipped a tiny bit at the left side.
- That's actually an error in the |.ps| file itself and can be seen
- in all other examples where the file is used.
-
-\erroronpage{295}{para -2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/05}{2}
- Missing word: ``The |[H]| \u{float} is \ldots''
-
-
-\erroronpage{298}{para 1, l.4}{AMa}{2005/01/13}{4}
- The word ``caption'' should be should typeset in sans serif.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{298}{para 3, l.5}{HjG}{2004/06/06}{2}
- Missing argument: ``|\newfloat{XMLexa}|%
- \u{\texttt{\textbraceleft\meta{placement}\textbraceright}}|{lox}|''
-
-\erroronpage{299}{para 2, ll.-2/-1}{HjG}{2004/06/06}{2}
- Missing word: ``so that it \u{is} not worth''
-
-\erroronpage{301}{exa 6-4-2}{HjG}{2004/06/06}{2}
- Misspelled word (both in source and output):\\
- ``\texttt{ex-\u{s}ample}'' \> ``\texttt{ex-ample}''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{302}{para 2, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/06}{2}
- Missing argument: ``|\newfloat{XML}|%
- \u{\texttt{\textbraceleft\meta{placement}\textbraceright}}|{lox}|''
-
-\erroronpage{304/305}{exa 6-4-4}{HjG}{2004/06/06}{2}
- The |\FIG| command is different from the one from
- exa 6-4-3 (p.303).
- Add a line:\\
- |\newcommand\FIG{\includegraphics[width=10mm]{elephant}}|\\
- in the preamble part of the example's source.\\
- (But that will probably spoil your hand-optimized page breaks. ---
- Actually it will improve them: by getting the example larger on
- line will carry over from 304 to 305 avoiding the widow there
- without changing that page otherwise)
-
-\erroronpage{307}{l.-4}{HjG}{2005/02/12}{4}
- Surplus closing brace:\\
- ``|\makebox[\linewidth][c]{\usebox\@tempboxa}|%
- |\par|\texttt{\u\textbraceright}|% single line|''
-
-\iffalse
-\erroronpage{307}{l.3--4}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{}
-The Runaway error may be explained in a better way: the
- \emph{short-text} cannot exceed one paragraph; the \emph{long-text} may be
- several paragraphs long; if the optional argument \emph{short-text} is missing
- the \emph{long-text} replaces it, therefore the macros that should process the
- single paragraph \emph{short-text} get terribly shaken and produce the Runaway
- argument error. A reference to Appendix~B and the long\slash short definition
- of commands should be helpful.
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{309}{para 4, l.3}{DAl}{2005/06/29}{4}
- Missing comma: ``\ldots you will get a typical ``standard \LaTeX''
- format\u{,} that is, \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{312}{\texttt{position} option}{JS/FMi}{2005/09/14}{4}
- State that key \texttt{bottom} is the default.
-
-\erroronpage{312}{para 2, l.2}{DAl}{2005/06/29}{4}
- Word in wrong position: ``for example, ``above'' the caption if
- caption is \u{the} placed at the bottom.''
- \>
- ``for example, ``above'' the caption if \u{the} caption is \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{317}{para -4, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/06}{2}
- Extra letter: ``The \textsf{subfig} package\u{s} \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{319}{para 1, l.5}{C-JCh}{2005/06/10}{4}
- Incorrect right quote: ``numbers like ``11.3\u{''}\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{319}{para 2, l.3}{C-JCh}{2005/06/10}{4}
- Incorrect right quote: ``such as ``Figure 1(a-c)\u{''}.''
-
-\erroronpage{321}{exa 6-5-13, l.2}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/06}{2}
- Change value:
- ``|listofindent=4em|'' \> ``|listofindent=5em|''.\\
- Looks better and also makes description on page 320 correct.
-
-\erroronpage{321}{para 3, l.2}{UFi}{2004/07/31}{2}
-Remove: ``approach is to \u{to} specify\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{326}{para -1, l.4}{DAl}{2005/07/14}{4}
- Missing letter: ``floats appear to\u{o} close to each other\ldots''
-
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 7}
-
-\erroronpage{332}{para -2,l.2}{THa}{2004/07/21}{2}
- SinCE SEriFS arE noT alwayS horizonTaL: ``Serifs are the tiny
- horizontal strokes\dots'' \> ``Serifs are the tiny strokes\dots''
-
-\erroronpage{338}{para -1, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/29}{2}
- Missing word: ``command \u{and} declarative forms''
-
-\erroronpage{341}{para -2, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/06/29}{2}
- Missing comma: ``such as |\OE|\u, to lowercase).''
-
-\erroronpage{342}{tab 7.1}{CBe/FMi}{2004/07/27}{2}
- Add footnote: ``\textit{The actual sizes shown above are those specially
- tailored for use in this book}''
-
-\erroronpage{347}{para 2, l.5+6}{JS/FMi}{2006/11/08}{s}
-Replace: ``\u{Computer Modern Typewriter and}
-Computer Modern Sans \u{have} only bold extended variants.''
-\>
- ``\u{In contrast} Computer Modern Sans \u{has} only bold extended variants.''
-
-\erroronpage{349}{Table 7.4}{AFV}{2008/08/08}{}
-The font associated with the command |\mathtt| is a sans typewriter font. This
-differs from nearly all TeX set ups where the math typewriter font is Computer
-Modern Typewriter.
-
-\erroronpage{349}{para -1, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/29}{2}
- Missing comma:
- ``\ldots\ where commands, such as |\rm|\u, would cause \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{351}{para -2, l.5}{HjG}{2004/06/29}{2}
- Surplus word:
- ``\ldots\ belongs to the text \u{the} surrounding the formula.''
-
-\erroronpage{353}{para 4, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/29}{2}
- Replace:
- ``\u{Extended} Computer Modern'' \>
- ``\u{European} Computer Modern''
-
-\erroronpage{354/355}{marginal 3}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2}
- Should be on top of page 355.
-
-\erroronpage{354}{table caption}{AFV/FMi}{2009/01/5}{}
- Replace: ``Classification of the Computer Modern font families'' \>
- ``Classification of \u{most} Computer Modern font families''
- as not all fonts are listed.
-
-\erroronpage{355}{para 4, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/29}{2}
- Missing character: ``on\u{e} can simply exchange''
-
-\erroronpage{356}{para 2, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/30}{2}
- Correct: ``\u{ZE}-fonts'' \> ``\u{EZ}-fonts''
- (Index entry is OK!)
-
-\erroronpage{357}{exa 7-5-5, last line}{RSt}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Reference [174] instead of [175].
-
-\erroronpage{357}{exa 7-5-5}{HjG}{2004/06/30}{2}
- Add page entries for ``Clasen, Matthias'', ``Vieth, Ulrik'', and
- ``Ziegler, Justin'' to ``People'' index (pp.1080+1082)
-
-\erroronpage{357}{l.-2}{HjG}{2004/06/30}{2}
- Add word:
- ``Clearly, no one wants to type \u{text} like this \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{358}{para -1, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/30}{2}
- Change word order:\\
- ``The list of \u{currently} \u{supported encodings} by
- \textsf{inputenc} \ldots'' \>\\
- ``The list of \u{encodings} \u{currently supported} by
- \textsf{inputenc} \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{359}{several places}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2}
- Replace: ISO-8859 \> ISO 8859
-
-\erroronpage{360}{item 8}{CKr}{2004/12/30}{4}
- Replace: Next Computer encoding \> Ne\u{XT} Computer encoding
-
-\erroronpage{360}{item 9}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2}
- Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8
-
-\erroronpage{360}{para -1}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2}
- Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8 (several times)
-
-\erroronpage{361}{para 2+3}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2}
- Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8 (several times)
-
-\erroronpage{361}{l.-14}{CBe/FMi}{2004/07/27}{2}
- Replace: ``preamble or the document class'' \>
- ``document class, a package, or in the preamble''
-
-
-\erroronpage{362}{l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/30}{2}
- Swap phrases:\\
- ``\ldots\ the user \u{in the preamble} \u{to load still
- more encodings}.'' \\\>\\
- ``\ldots\ the user \u{to load still more encodings}
- \u{in the preamble}.''
-
-\erroronpage{362}{para 1, l.1}{SCo}{2004/05/17}{2}
- Printing problem in some books: ``still'', second `l' only half visible.
-
-\erroronpage{367}{para 2, l.3}{CKr}{2005/01/03}{4}
- Wrong font: ``old-style numerals by simply switching to the \u{\texttt{TS1}}''
-
-\erroronpage{368}{para -4, l.3}{HjG}{2004/07/01}{2}
- Change:\\
- ``\ldots\ only. \u{Only} real errors will be shown.'' \>\\
- ``\ldots\ only. \u{However,} real errors will be shown
- \u{on the terminal}.''
-
-\erroronpage{370}{para 2, l.-1}{RSt}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Replace: ``ran run'' with ``\u{you ran}''.
-
-\erroronpage{370}{para 4, l.5}{HjG}{2004/07/06}{2}
- Add: ``\ldots\ in one of the three \u{text font} categories.''
-
-\erroronpage{371}{para 1, l.4}{HjG}{2004/07/06}{2}
- Add: ``\ldots, such as via a call to |\usefont|\u{ (see Example
- 7-6-1 below)}.''
-
-\erroronpage{373}{first line of 7.6.1}{UFi}{2004/07/31}{2}
- Remove ``the \u{the} fonts''
-
-\erroronpage{373}{first para, l.-1}{BeB}{2004/06/28}{2}
- ``collection'' is (at least seems to me) singular:\\
- Typo: ``appear'' \> ``appears''
-
-\erroronpage{374}{`Bookman', l.1}{HjG}{2004/07/08}{2}
- Typo: ``Bookman was originally design\u{ed} \ldots''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{380}{para 1, l.4--5}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2}
- Better show octal numbers: ``\ldots starting positions like
- \texttt{'254}, \texttt{'266}, \texttt{'300}, and \texttt{'312}
- (i.e., in octal notation) in\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{380}{exa. 7-6-10}{J-CCh}{2005/07/06}{4}
- Replace: AGEWMET\u{P}HTOS \> AGEWMET\u{R}HTOS
-
-\erroronpage{386}{para -1, l.2}{RWa}{2004/05/31}{2}
- Replace ``the X Window\u{s} system'' with ``the X Window \u{S}ystem''.
-
-\erroronpage{387}{para -1, ll.3/4}{HjG}{2004/07/09}{2}
- Missing word: ``\texttt{0.87478} should \u{be} used''\\
-
-\iffalse
-% no idea if we can fit that in:
-\erroronpage{387}{para -1, ll.3/4}{HjG}{2004/07/09}{}
- Value for 12\,pt?
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{388}{tab. 7.14}{HjG}{2004/07/09}{2}
- Row~1: Thickness of vertical line between first two columns too
- wide (printing problem).
-
-\erroronpage{388}{tab 7.14, l.-2}{RPa}{2004/09/14}{4}
- Missing space between ``m,'' and ``bx'' in the middle column.
-
-\erroronpage{391}{tab. 7.15}{FMi}{2004/07/09}{2}
- Row~1: Thickness of vertical line between first two columns too
- wide (printing problem).
-
-\erroronpage{391}{tab 7.15, l.-2}{RPa}{2004/09/14}{4}
- Missing space between ``m,'' and ``bx'' in the middle column.
-
-\erroronpage{392}{tab 7.16, l.3}{RPa}{2004/09/14}{4}
- ``(bx)'' should be moved to the second column.
-
-\erroronpage{393}{tab 7.17, l.3}{RPa}{2004/09/14}{4}
- Missing space between ``(it),'' and ``sc'' in the third column.
-
-\erroronpage{395}{exa 7-7-20}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2}
- Commands need to be swapped to match text:\\
- ``|\gothfamily| Swab'' \> ``|\swabfamily| Swab''\\
- ``|\swabfamily| Gothic'' \> ``|\gothfamily| Gothic''
-
-\erroronpage{395}{exa 7-7-21}{TSS}{2004/05/25}{2}
- The ``s'' in word ``dies'' should be the ``short s'' (ligature
- ``s:'') since it occurs in a syllable-final position.
-% others wrong???
-%According to page 765 of "The World's Writing Systems" (edited by P.T.
-%Daniels and W. Bright, ISBN 0-19-507993-0, Oxford University Press,
-%1996), a syllable-final "s" in fraktur text should be the "short s".
-
-\erroronpage{396}{para 3, l.5}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2}
- Should be: ``\ldots on the \u{third} line.''
-
-\erroronpage{396}{exa 7-7-22}{TSS}{2004/05/25}{2}
- The ``s'' in word ``dies'' should be the ``short s'' (ligature
- ``s:'') since it occurs in a syllable-final position.
-
-\erroronpage{403}{para 1, ll.1/2}{HjG}{2004/07/09}{2}
- Change: ``by using \u{G}lyph \u{C}hart''
- \> ``by using \u{the} \u{g}lyph \u{c}hart''\\
- (cf.\ para 3, l.1)
-
-\erroronpage{405}{para 3, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2}
- Missing word:
- ``of \u{the} International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA)''
-
-\erroronpage{405/406}{ll.-1/1/2}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2}
- Move closing parenthesis:\\
- ``\ldots (based on \ldots\ by Donald Knuth, \ldots \u).'' \> \\
- ``\ldots (based on \ldots\ by Donald Knuth\u), \ldots \,.''
-
-\erroronpage{406}{exa 7-8-11}{HjG}{2004/07/09}{2}
- Add comma (?): ``|k\ae{}t|\texttt{\u,}''
-
-\erroronpage{407}{para -2, l.1}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2}
- Missing word: ``With popular fonts designed for use with \TeX{},
- the euro symbol \u{is} usually available\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{413}{para -2, l-1}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{4}
- ``local guide''; I believe this is an obsolete concept, dating back to
- the times when \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ were used on multitasking mainframes;
- commercial distributions might still have a ``local guide'', but I have never
- seen one.
-
-
-\erroronpage{414}{footnote}{hv}{2008/10/30}{}
-Replace: |\pcharpath| \> |\pscharpath|.
-
-These days the package |pst-char| has been integrated into |pst-text|.
-
-\erroronpage{416}{tab. 7.27}{HjG}{2004/07/09}{2}
- Uppercase vs.\ lowercase in entries for \texttt{T3} and
- \texttt{TS3}:\\
- ``\LaTeX{} \u{P}honetic \u{A}lphabet encoding'' $\leftrightarrow$\\
- ``\LaTeX{} \u{p}honetic \u{a}lphabet encoding''
-
-\erroronpage{417}{para 4, l.6}{HjG}{2004/07/10}{2}
- Correct case:
- ``\ldots\ in front of it. \u For example,''
-
-\erroronpage{418}{para 2, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/07/10}{2}
- Add:
- ``a typewriter font \u{in medium series} with italic shape''
-
-\erroronpage{420}{table 7.28}{CKr}{2005/04/08}{4}
- For consistency: ``narrow'' \> ``\u{N}arrow''
-
-\erroronpage{420}{para 1, l.6}{FMi}{2004/06/24}{2}
- Replace: ISO-9660 \> ISO 9660
-
-\erroronpage{426}{para 1, l.-2}{CKr}{2005/01/17}{4}
- Remove surplus: ``\ldots---other declarations that use this \u{the}
- font will benefit automatically.''
-
-\erroronpage{426}{para 1, last sentence}{CAR}{2005/01/22}{4}
- Replace with following sentence:
- ``This may seem like a strange usage but it has the advantage that when
- such additional
- fonts become available you will need to change
- only one font shape group declaration---all declarations that
- refer indirectly to these fonts will then benefit automatically.''
-
-
-\erroronpage{426}{para 5}{HjG}{2004/07/10}{2}
- Surplus word: ``\ldots, this function \u{it} writes \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{426}{l.-2}{HjG}{2004/07/10}{2}
- Add word: ``The \u{third} argument''
-
-\erroronpage{428}{item 6}{CKr}{2005/01/18}{4}
- Replace: ``Specified the quad width'' \> ``Specifie\u{s} the quad
- width''
-
-\erroronpage{432}{para 4, l.9}{HjG}{2004/07/11}{2}
- Not plural: ``\ldots: the outer text size\u{s} and the three math
- sizes for this text size.''
-
-\erroronpage{433}{l.-10}{HjG}{2004/07/11}{2}
- Not start of a sentence, hence \> lowercase:
- ``\u{a}nd are usually placed in an \texttt{.fd} file.''
-
-\erroronpage{441}{para 5, l.1}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2}
- Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8
-
-\erroronpage{442}{footnote, l.2}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4}
- Sentence begins with lowercase 's'.
-
-\erroronpage{443}{para 1, l.1--2}{FMi}{2005/06/10}{4}
-Replace the parentheses with: ``(for the latter people sometimes use
-the single character \verb="=\,, but this is incorrect as it may
-produce a straight double quote, i.e., ")''
-
-\erroronpage{443}{para 3, l.4}{CKr}{2005/01/21}{4}
- Correct order: ``Instead, these commands have been implemented in
- \u{such a} way that \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{444}{para 2, l.4}{DAl}{2005/08/01}{4}
- Missing word: ``\ldots associates the number 224 \u{with} the
-command |\alpha|.''
-
-\erroronpage{445}{para 4, ll.3--5}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2}
- Move closing parenthesis:\\
- ``\ldots, which normally denote certain accents (i.e.,
- are encoding-specific commands, but \ldots\ environment\u).''
- \\ \> \\
- ``\ldots, which normally denote certain accents (i.e.,
- are encoding-specific commands\u), but \ldots\ environment.''
-
-\erroronpage{446}{footnote, l.1}{CKr}{2005/01/21}{4}
- Correct order: \ldots ``\textthreesuperior'' \u{was a}
- math glyph---comprehensible?
-
-\erroronpage{447}{Heading}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2}
- Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8
-
-\erroronpage{451}{para 4, l.2}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2}
- Wrong number:
- ``\texttt{\u{'240}} octal'' \> ``\texttt{\u{'344}} octal''
-
-\erroronpage{453}{para 2, l.2}{DAl}{2005/08/01}{4}
- Missing word : ``\ldots an \emph{LICR-object} that is \u{to} be
-used whenever\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{455}{para 3, l.-1}{JCh}{2004/07/17}{2}
- Typo (characters need to be swapped):
- ``L\u{CI}R'' \> ``L\u{IC}R''
-
-\erroronpage{457}{tab. 7.33}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2}
- Wrong sort order (table rows need to be swapped):\\
- |\OE| $\leftrightarrow$ |\O| -- cf.\ |\o| and |\oe| on p.459
-
-\erroronpage{457}{tab. 7.33}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2}
- Entry |\`i|: ``(\u{avail})'' \> ``(\u{alias})''
-
-\erroronpage{458}{\texttt{\string\copyright}}{FMi/usw}{2005/01/11}{4}
- Natively available in LY1 encoding
-
-\seriouserroronpage{458}{l. 27--30}{JLV}{2005/05/31}{4}
- Unfortunately |\guillemotleft|, |\guillemotright|, |\guilsinglleft|, and
- |\guilsinglright| have no ``default'' and only function in |OT1| if
- \textsf{babel} is loaded
-
-
-\erroronpage{458}{\texttt{\string\k} entries}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4}
- All |\k| entries should be |<constr.>| in LY1 encoding
-
-\erroronpage{459}{\texttt{\string\r A}}{FMi}{2005/04/09}{4}
- |\r A| is |<constr.>| in OT1 encoding
-
-\erroronpage{459}{\texttt{\string\r} entries}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4}
- All |\r| entries should be |<constr.>| in LY1 encoding
-
-\erroronpage{459}{\texttt{\string\textcelsius}}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4}
- Default from |constr./TS1|.
-
-\erroronpage{460}{\texttt{\string\textcopyright}}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4}
- Natively available in LY1 encoding
-
-\erroronpage{460}{\texttt{\string\textdiv}}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4}
- Natively available in LY1 encoding
-
-\erroronpage{460}{\texttt{\string\texteuro}}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4}
- Defined in the newer versions of the encoding (but not available in
- all fonts!)
-
-\erroronpage{460}{tab. 7.33}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2}
- Wrong sort order (table rows need to be swapped):\\
- |\textdblhyphenchar| $\leftrightarrow$ |\textdblhyphen|
-
-\erroronpage{461}{\texttt{\string\textlnot}}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4}
- Natively available in LY1 encoding
-
-\erroronpage{461}{\texttt{\string\textpertenthousand}}{DAl}{2005/08/01}{4}
- Constructed in T1 encoding
-
-\erroronpage{461}{\texttt{\string\textperthousand}}{DAl}{2005/08/01}{4}
- Constructed in T1 encoding
-
-\erroronpage{461}{\texttt{\string\textpm}}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4}
- Natively available in LY1 encoding
-
-\erroronpage{461}{table, l. -12}{usw}{2004/05/24}{2}
- ``\verb=\textquotedblleft=" is indented by accident.
-
-\erroronpage{462}{\texttt{\string\texttimes}}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4}
- Natively available in LY1 encoding
-
-\erroronpage{462}{tab. 7.33}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2}
- Wrong sort order (table rows need to be swapped):\\
- |\textthreequartersemdash| $\leftrightarrow$ |\textthreequarters|
-
-\erroronpage{463}{para 1, ll.1/2}{HjG}{2004/06/28}{2}
- Add: ``prior \u{to} 1990''
-
-\erroronpage{463}{para 1, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/28}{2}
- Change:
- ``\ldots integrated in \u{1993})'' \>
- ``\ldots integrated in \u{1994})''
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 8}
-
-\erroronpage{465}{para 4, ll.2+4}{HjG}{2004/06/20}{2}
- Add page entry for ``Swanson, Ellen'' to ``People'' index
- (p.1082). \\
- Add page entry for ``Knuth, Donald'' to ``People'' index
- (p.1081).
-
- Editorial comment: no need for reprinting this page.
-
-
-\erroronpage{466}{para 2, ll.3+6}{HjG}{2004/06/20}{2}
- Add page entry for ``Spivak, Michael'' to ``People'' index
- (p.1082).\\
- Add page entry for ``Jones, David'' to ``People'' index
- (p.1081).
-
-\erroronpage{466}{para 3 l.1}{UFi}{2004/06/04}{2}
- Remove comma: ``Michael\u, would have been\ldots''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{468}{para 3, ll.10+11}{JTa}{2004/08/31}4{}
- Extra closing brace after the second argument of
- \texttt{\textbackslash newenvironment} on both lines.
-
-\erroronpage{471}{para 2, l.4}{VPe}{2004/06/02}{2}
- Extra word: ``\ldots this change \u{can} are discussed\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{478}{exa 8-2-19}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2}
-Poor Maxwell's equations! No doubt there are mathematical
- physicists or physical mathematicians that write Maxwell's equations that way.
- This is a good example for showing some capabilities of the
- \textsf{amsmath} package and its possible extensions by means of the
- \comando{\newenvironment} command, but it is an example where all possible ISO
- rules are violated! Physical equations deal with quantities, not with
- mathematical variables; and quantities have dimensions; as such they have to
- comply with the rules established by the Sisth\`{e}me International (SI) and the
- various obsolete ``cgm'' systems are officially deprecated; the partial
- derivative sign $\partial$ has exactly that meaning and it cannot substitute
- the ``nabla'' $\nabla$ sign; finally the $j$ symbol probably indicates the
- current density, but in an equation that does not comply with the ISO rules it
- might indicate the imaginary unit (which, on the opposite, is prescribed to be
- typeset in roman or upright shape as well as $\pi$); treating with vectorial
- quantities these should be well marked either with a vector math accent or
- must be set in bold italic; with variables depending from four quantities the
- apex for indicating the derivative is not univocal for specifying the quantity
- with respect to which the derivative is taken. I repeat: the example is good
- for describing the math extension capabilities but it could induce the casual
- reader to believe that this is the correct form for writing down the Maxwell's
- equations; unfortunately it is not.
-
-\erroronpage{480}{para -2, ll.8/9}{HjG}{2004/06/20}{2}
- ``(there must be no space before the \texttt[)'' --- why?\\
- (Would be ignored by \TeX{} as the end of the cs-name!)
-
- Deleted this text.
-
-\erroronpage{484}{para 3, ll.1/2}{HjG}{2004/06/20}{2}
- Add word: ``\ldots\ the \texttt{equation} \u{environment} is
-\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{488}{para 1, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/20}{2}
- Add word: ``\ldots\ as a subscript \u{or} superscript.''
-
-\erroronpage{488}{para 1, l.1}{FMi}{2005/04/23}{4}
- Replace word: ``Note that both \u{environments} \ldots''
- \> ``Note that both \u{structures} \ldots'' (as one is a command)
-
-\erroronpage{489}{para -2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/20}{2}
- Missing closing parenthesis: ``(see Section 8.5.3\u)''
-
-\erroronpage{489}{exa. 8-3-9.1}{DAl}{2005/08/21}{4}
- The third array actually only needs \texttt{c} as preamble even
- though \texttt{cc} is not wrong. as empty columns on the right are ignored
-
-\erroronpage{491}{para -2, l.3}{BMo}{2004/05/21}{2}
- Replace: ``aside'' \> ``at the side''
-
-\erroronpage{493--95}{ll.-1/-2}{HjG}{2004/06/21}{2}
- Perhaps a note regarding the defaults should be added:\\
- ``The first two parameters, \emph{ldelim} and \emph{rdelim}, are
- the left and right delimiters, respectively.
- \u{They must be either both empty or both non-empty;}
- \u{to place a single delimiter, use a period ``\texttt.'' on the
- ``empty'' side.}''
-
- Editorial comment: affects pagebreaks for 494/95 as well
-
-\iffalse % more blue align stuff
-\erroronpage{498}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{}
- Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned.
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{499}{\S 8.6.2}{HjG}{2004/06/21}{2}
- Change section heading: ``Operator \u{and function} names''
-
-\iffalse % more blue align stuff
-\erroronpage{500}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{}
- Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned.
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{501}{exa 8-6-4}{HjG}{2004/06/21}{2}
- Surplus word (in source comment):\\
- ``\texttt{\% the old \u{the} definition of \textbackslash csc}''
-
-\erroronpage{507}{footnote}{CKr}{2005/02/16}{4}
- Good try but wrong word: ``Technically this is due to the denominator being
- wider than the \u{numerator} in this case\ldots''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{508}{table 8.6, col.5}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2}
- The bad alignment (in some books) of the blue color probably makes
- the illustrations in this column useless.
-
-\iffalse % more blue align stuff
-\erroronpage{510}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{}
- Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned.
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{511}{marginal note}{MHe}{2004/05/22}{2}
- Swap words: ``\ldots change \u{the existing} math font
- set-up''
-
-\erroronpage{512}{para 3, l.6}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2}
- Surplus closing brace:
- ``|\bm{\alpha}|\texttt{\u\textbraceright}''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{513}{Figure 8.1}{LSchu}{2004/05/22}{2}
- Text font is Times, but should be Computer Modern (rather
- embarrassing that).
-
-\erroronpage{513}{para 3, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2}
- Change: ``In this section show a sample text'' \>\\
- ``In this section \u{we} show a sample text''
-
-\iffalse % more blue align stuff
-\erroronpage{513}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{}
- Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned.
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{515}{para 1, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2}
- Wrong reference: ``Figure~8.3'' \> ``Figure~8.2''
-
-\erroronpage{515}{para -1, l.1}{BMo/CAR}{2004/05/21}{2}
- Replace: ``The Metafont versions of Concrete Roman and Math\ldots''
- \> ``The Metafont versions of Concrete, both Roman and Math,\ldots''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{516}{fig.~8.6}{CKr/FMi}{2005/02/18}{4}
- The txfonts have the symbols |\succapprox| and |\precapprox| in the
- wrong position in the fonts.
- Until the fonts are corrected one can manually fix the problem by
- redeclaring them after loading the \texttt{txfonts} package, i.e.,
-\begin{verbatim}
-\usepackage{txfonts}
-\DeclareMathSymbol{\succapprox}{\mathrel}{AMSb}{119}
-\DeclareMathSymbol{\precapprox}{\mathrel}{AMSb}{118}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\erroronpage{517}{footnote}{FMi}{2005/06/03}{4}
- Y\&Y has unfortunately folded and their domain was taking over by a
- seller for ``latex'' clothing (interesting isnt it?).
- Some information about Y\&Y can be found at
- \texttt{https://www.tug.org/yandy}.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{518}{fig.~8.9}{CKr/FMi}{2005/02/18}{4}
- The pxfonts have the symbols |\succapprox| and |\precapprox| in the
- wrong position in the fonts.
- Until the fonts are corrected one can manually fix the problem by
- redeclaring them after loading the \texttt{pxfonts} package, i.e.,
-\begin{verbatim}
-\usepackage{pxfonts}
-\DeclareMathSymbol{\succapprox}{\mathrel}{AMSb}{119}
-\DeclareMathSymbol{\precapprox}{\mathrel}{AMSb}{118}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\erroronpage{521}{para 2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/26}{2}
- Missing interword space: ``Section\u~7.6.1''
-
-\erroronpage{521}{footnote}{FMi}{2005/06/03}{4}
- Y\&Y has unfortunately folded and their domain was taking over by a
- seller for ``latex'' clothing (interesting isnt it?).
- Some information about Y\&Y can be found at
- \texttt{https://www.tug.org/yandy}.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{523}{figure 8.16}{MHe}{2004/05/22}{2}
- The symbols to the left and right of ``Q(t)'' in the middle of
- the figure are wrong (this is
- actually a bug in the informal math set-up which has now been
- corrected).
-
-\erroronpage{523}{figure 8.16, caption}{BMo}{2004/05/21}{2}
- Replace: ``Info Math fonts'' with ``Informal Math fonts''.
-
-\erroronpage{523}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/26}{2}
- Change:\\
- ``The HV math fonts \u{are} designed at MicroPress'' \>\\
- ``The HV math fonts \u{have been} designed at MicroPress''
-
-\erroronpage{524}{para 1, ll.4--6}{HjG}{2004/06/27}{2}
- Change:\\
- ``This \u{package} extends the \ldots\ font collections\u{ and}
- should normally be loaded \ldots'' \>\\
- ``This \u{font} extends the \ldots\ font collections\u{; the
- corresponding \textsf{stmaryrd} package} should normally be loaded
- \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{524}{para 2, l.7}{HjG}{2004/06/27}{2}
- The text states: ``\u{\raisebox{1ex}{\scriptsize(\emph{kernel})}}
- identifies symbols \ldots''. However, later on only
- ``\u{\raisebox{1ex}{\scriptsize(\emph{ker})}}'' is used.
- [E.g., Table~8.10 on page~527 (|\hbar|)
- and Table~8.11 on page~528 (|\angle|).]
-
-\erroronpage{524}{para 2, l.-3}{HjG}{2004/06/27}{2}
- The text speaks of ``Alphabetic symbols'' -- but the referenced
- Table~7.30 on page~435 calls it ``Alphabet character''~!?
-
-\erroronpage{524}{exa 8-9-1}{HjG}{2004/06/27}{2}
- The |fleqn| option is used, but in the output, the two equations
- seem to be right aligned rather than left aligned!\\
- Indeed true: this is because in \textsf{amsmath} the |\mathindent|
- added on the left is
- actually a rubber length (see page 471) that is automatically
- shortend if there is not enough space.
-
-\iffalse % more blue align stuff
-\erroronpage{524}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{}
- Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned.
-
-\erroronpage{525}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{}
- Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned.
-\fi
-
-
-\erroronpage{526}{para -1, l.1}{CKr/FMi}{2005/02/20}{4}
-Change: ``The unaccented ASCII Latin letters and Arabic
- numeral digits (see Table~8.8) \u{all} referred to\ldots''
- \> ``\ldots \u{are} referred to\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{527}{para 2, l.1}{HjG}{2005/05/21}{4}
- Replace:\\
- ``in the first \u{columns} of Table~8.9'' \>
- ``in the first \u{rows} of Table~8.9''
-
-\erroronpage{527}{para 2, l.5}{HjG}{2004/06/27}{2}
- Change:
- ``Similarly, the list of lowercase Greek letters \u{there is}
- no omicron'' \>\\
- ``Similarly, the list of lowercase Greek letters \u{contains}
- no omicron''
-
-\iffalse % more blue align stuff
-\erroronpage{528}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{}
- Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned.
-\fi
-
- \erroronpage{527}{table 8.10}{BMo/CAR}{2004/05/21}{2}
- This table would be
- better if reordered, in particular so that the first row
- contains: \verb=\aleph \beth \gimmel \daleth=. This would
- make the this text correct: ``The first four [entries in
- table 8.10] are Hebrew letters.''
-
-
-\erroronpage{527,528}{table 8-10/11}{FMi}{2006/08/09}{s}
- Added the missing symbol from amssymb: |\circledR|, |\yen|,
- |\checkmark|, and |\maltese|.
-
- The general distribution of symbols between the two tables is a bit
- questionable, but this will stay as it is.
-
-\erroronpage{528}{table 8-11}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2}
- Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table
- entries.
-
-\erroronpage{528}{table 8.11}{LHe}{2008/02/08}{}
- |\dag| and |\ddag| are |\mathord|s not |\mathbin| as claimed in table
- 8.13.
-
-
-\seriouserroronpage{529}{table 8.12, l.3}{JGr}{2004/06/10}{2}
- \verb=\mathring{x}= is missing its accent.
-
-\erroronpage{529}{para 1, l.2}{CKr}{2005/04/24}{4}
- Replace: ``looked up |\neq|'' \> ``looked up |\ne|\u{\texttt{g}}''
-
-\erroronpage{530}{table 8-13}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2}
- Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table
- entries.
-
-\erroronpage{530}{table 8.13}{LHe}{2008/02/08}{}
- |\dag| and |\ddag| are not |\mathbin|s, hence don't belong in this table
- and they
- aren't (as claimed in legend) synonyms of |\dagger|
- and |\ddagger| respectively.
-
-\erroronpage{531}{table 8.15}{BMo/FMi}{2004/05/21}{2}
- The commands starting with |\var...| are only partially in blue to
- indicate their relationship with those commands missing the ``var'' in their
- names. But this is more confusing than helpful, so they are now made
- fully blue.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{531}{table 8.15}{CAR/FMi}{2004/06/05}{2}
- |\obar| is listed twice while |\obslash| (also from stmaryrd) is missing
-
-\erroronpage{531}{table 8-15}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2}
- Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table
- entries.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{532}{tables 8-16, 8-17}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2}
- Since |\precsim| is not a negated symbol, it should be moved from
- Table~8-17 to Table~8-16, where its sibling |\succsim| already
- lives.
-
-\erroronpage{532}{tables 8-16/17}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2}
- Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table
- entries.
-
-\erroronpage{532}{table 8.17}{CKr}{2005/02/22}{4}
- Add: ``\ldots or, \u{if} flagged\ldots''
-
-\iffalse % more blue align stuff
-\erroronpage{533}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{}
- Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned.
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{533}{tables 8-18/19}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2}
- Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table
- entries.
-
-\iffalse % more blue align stuff
-\erroronpage{534}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{}
- Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned (horizontally).
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{534}{table 8-20}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2}
- Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table
- entries.
-
-\erroronpage{534}{tab. 8.20}{HjG}{2004/06/28}{2}
- 1. |\hookleftarrow| is listed twice.\\
- 2. Some ``compound'' symbols have different line widths in their
- ``head'' and ``tail'' parts:
- |\Longleftarrow|, |\Longmapsfrom|, |\Longmapsto|, |\Longrightarrow|.
-
-
-\erroronpage{534}{table 8-21}{MBr}{2004/08/02}{2}
- Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table
- entries.
-
-\erroronpage{535}{table 8-22/23}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2}
- Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table
- entries.
-
-\erroronpage{537}{table 8-27}{DIs/FMi}{2006/08/09}{s}
- Added the four missing delimiters from amssymb: |\llcorner|, |\lrcorner|,
- |\ulcorner|, and |\urcorner|. Updated the table note and galley text accordingly.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 9}
-
-\erroronpage{540}{para -2, l.6}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2}
- Replace: ISO-8859-x \> ISO 8859-x
-
-\erroronpage{540}{para -1, l.4}{FMi}{2004/07/20}{2}
-Plural: ``Clearly, 8 bits \u{are} not sufficient\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{541}{para 1, l.-2}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2}
- Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8
-
-\seriouserroronpage{543}{table 9.1}{MHe/JBr}{2004/06/10}{}
- The Babel implementation on the CD is missing the australian and
- newzealand
- options. If you need them, download a new version of Babel.
-
-\erroronpage{543}{table 9.1}{JBr/WaS}{2004/07/31}{2}
- Replace: ``\texttt{english}, \texttt{USenglish}
- (\texttt{\itshape american}, \texttt{\itshape canadian}), \texttt{UKenglish}
- (\texttt{\itshape british}), \texttt{australian} (\texttt{\itshape
- newzealand})''
-
- Add footnote: ``\textit{The option \texttt{\upshape english}
- combines American hyphenation patterns
- with a British date format.}''
-
-
-\erroronpage{545}{exa 9-2-1}{JAn}{2005/09/09}{4}
- The quotes surrounding R\'ef\'erences and Chapitre
- should be the french ones: use |\og| and |\fg{}|. And similar those
- around German words should use |"`| and |"'|.
-
-
-\erroronpage{546}{para 3, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2}
- Typo: ``pattern\u{s}''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{548}{para 2, l.4}{UFi}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Replace: |\aliasshorthand{"}{/}| should be \verb=\aliasshorthand{"}{|}=
-
-\erroronpage{549}{para 1, l.5}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2}
- Characters should be in `typewriter font' (as in l.2):\\
- ``\,``;'' and ``?''\,'' \> ``\,``|;|'' and ``|?|''\,''
-
-\erroronpage{550}{para -2, l.1--2}{CKr}{2005/02/28}{4}
- Correct: ``Some are
- meant to ease typing, wher\u{e}as others\ldots''
-
-
-\erroronpage{551}{tab 9.3}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{}
- I am surprised that in Russian there is no word for ``Glossary''.
-
- Frank: It most certainly exits :-), but right now Babel doesn't
- know about it---so there is nothing we can do about it at the
- moment. Actually the same problem exists with Polish, although here
- I got a translation ``s\l{}ownik termin\'ow'' which will eventually
- find its way into Babel.
-
-\erroronpage{552}{exa 9-3-4}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2}
- The words \texttt{i"lusio} and il$\cdot$lusio in the example are
- incorrect. They should be \texttt{i"lusi\string\'o} and il$\cdot$lusi\'{o}
- respectively %(ref: TB 14-3-252-259)
-
-
-\seriouserroronpage{553}{para 4}{UFi}{2004/06/03}{2}
-
- Replace with: ``Another popular shorthand is |"-|, which indicates a
- hyphenation point (like |\-|), but without supressing
- hyphenation in the remainder of the word:''
-
-\erroronpage{553}{exa 9-3-8}{FMi}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Replace the example body with:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\fbox{\parbox[t]{1cm}{minister"-president}} \quad
-\fbox{\parbox[t]{1cm}{minister\-president}} \quad
-\fbox{\parbox[t]{1cm}{ministerpresident}}
-\end{verbatim}
-to show the differences between |"-|, |\-|, and no hyphen.
-
-\erroronpage{553}{exa 9-3-9}{FMi}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Replace the example body with:
-\begin{verbatim}
-1. \present{Gutenberg-Universit"at}
-2. \present{Gutenberg"-Universit"at}
-3. \present{Gutenberg""Universit"at}
-4. \present{Gutenberg"=Universit"at}
-5. \present{Gutenberg"~Universit"at}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\erroronpage{554}{para 4, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2}
- Replace: ``|~n~|\meta{letter}'' \> ``|~n|''
- and ``|~N~|\meta{letter}'' \> ``|~N|''
-
-\erroronpage{554}{exa 9-3-11}{UFi/MGo}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Replace body with:
- ``|En fran\c{c}ais on doit mettre un \fg petit espace\fg\|
- |devant la ponctuation double: comme cela!|
- \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{556}{item 2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2}
- Remove:
- ``\ldots\u{, with the addition that also \texttt{'u} and
- \texttt{'U} are made available}.''
-\iffalse
-auf s.556 unten (1. item) steht, dass der ' fuer Catalan mit allen
-vokalen verwendet werden kann; das gilt auch fuer Galician (2. item);
-deswegen macht der u.g. nebensatz wenig sinn, denn U gehoert ja zu den
-vokalen! -- war vielleicht 'N gemeint? (aber auch das wird bei
-Galician schon erwaehnt!)
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{556}{para 4, l.2}{UFi}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Correct spelling: ``\ldots optional \u{because} the acute accent has\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{557}{exa 9-3-19}{FMi/JBe}{2005/03/20}{4}
- Replaced the example text with a spanish example showing 3 levels of
- quotations.
-
-\erroronpage{558}{para -1, l.2}{UFi}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Add comma: ``day, month\u, year''
-
-\iffalse % alternative (but needs to change two pages)
- Replace:
- ``\ldots |\hebdate| to translate any Gregorian date, given \u{the three
- arguments \emph{day}, \emph{month},
- and \emph{year},}
- into a Gregorian date in Hebrew.''
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{561--562}{para 2, l.-1; para 2, l.1}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2}
- The number 999999 (and 1000, in the second instance) should not
- be written with a period as thousands-separator as this is
- confusing for readers used to a different convention.
-
-\erroronpage{562}{para 2, l.1+2}{FMi/DPa}{2004/07/24}{2}
- Change: ``digits \u{before the decimal point} are expressed'' \>
- ``digits \u{denoting multiples of a thousand} are expressed''
-
-\erroronpage{563}{l -18/-17}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{4}
-The non zero \texttt{lccode} for the apostrophe is not
- a speciality of the Italian language; this non null assignment is made at least
- also for Catalan and for French; it should be done for all languages that use
- the apostrophe for replacing an elided vowel.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{564}{table 9.5}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2}
- Add a note that the definition of \verb=\th= conflicts with its standard
- definition as the LICR object ``\th{}'' (thorn).
-
-\erroronpage{564}{tab. 9.5}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/18}{2}
- In the `Serbian' column, ``|\sh| sh'' is listed twice;
- replace the second instance with ``|\arsh| arsh''.
-
-\erroronpage{564}{para -1, l.5}{ERy}{2004/08/06}{2}
- Change: ``helpfull'' \> ``helpful''
-
-\erroronpage{565}{line 1}{JGr}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Missing space in: Anotherlayout
-
-\erroronpage{569}{l.-2}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2}
- Misspelled name:
- ``Andrew Janishe\u{w}sky'' \> ``Andrew Janishe\u{v}sky''
- (This affects p.1081, too!)
-
-\erroronpage{571}{l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2}
- Replace: ``UNIX-like'' \> ``UN*X-like''
- (to match spelling elsewhere in the book)
-
-\erroronpage{571}{ll.3+4}{MKu/FMi}{2004/08/03}{2}
- Change: ``ISO-IR-111'' \> ``ISO-IR~111'' \\
- and ``ISO-IR-144'' \> ``ISO-IR~144''
-
-\erroronpage{571}{para 4}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2}
- Code page ``|mnk|'' listed twice.
-
-%\erroronpage{572}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{}
-% Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned.
-
-\erroronpage{573}{descr. env.}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2}
- Items \texttt{T2B:} and \texttt{T2C:} ``Crimean~Tatar'' \> ``Crimean-Tatar''
-
-\erroronpage{573}{para 3, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2}
- Typo: ``pac\u{ak}ge'' \> ``pac\u{ka}ge''
-
-\erroronpage{574}{para 6, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2}
- Replace: ``The |cb| font use\u{s} \ldots''
- \> ``The |cb| font\u{s} use \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{574}{para 7, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2}
- Replace: ``translation'' \> ``transliteration''
-
-\erroronpage{575}{tab 9.7}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2}
- I do not recognize my \texttt{grmn1000} font table; at least
- it is incomplete compared with the one that has been uploaded on CTAN in 2002,
- well ahead of the publication of this Second Edition.
-
- (Unfortunately an older tfm file was used so that some glyphs do not
- show up in the table)
-
-\erroronpage{576}{tab. 9.9}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2}
- Replace: ``Diaresis'' \> ``Dia\u{e}resis''
-
-\erroronpage{576}{tab 9.9}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2}
-|<'otan| does not produce the Greek word on its right,
- which was by mistake obtained with |<'o|\texttt{\'otan}
-
-\erroronpage{576}{tab 9.10}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2}
- In the first line all the examples with upper case letters
- are wrong in the sence that these glyphs cannot appear in real text,
- hence they are removed.
- The last two lines are wrong with both lower and upper case
- letters. The former error implies a hiatus between an initial capital letter
- and a preceding vowel that by definition of ``initial'' is missing. The latter
- error is related to the fact that spirit and accent are separated, the former
- to the left of the vowel, the latter over the vowel.
-
- Part of the problems are due to a missing |\languageattribute{greek}{polutoniko}|.
-
-\erroronpage{579}{table 9.12, l.7}{HjG}{2005/06/02}{4}
- Remove extra right brace: ``|\fontfamily{fr}|\u{\texttt{\textbraceright}}''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{580}{example file \texttt{language.dat}}{WaS}{2004/06/14}{2}
- \u{\texttt{us}}\texttt{english} \> \texttt{\u{US}english}\\
- \u{\texttt{uk}}\texttt{english} \> \texttt{\u{UK}english}
-
-\seriouserroronpage{580}{\texttt{language.dat} on CD}{WaS}{2004/06/14}{}
-The language name problem, i.e.,
-
- \u{\texttt{us}}\texttt{english} \> \texttt{\u{US}english}\\
- \u{\texttt{uk}}\texttt{english} \> \texttt{\u{UK}english}
-
-is also present in the language.dat file on
-the book CD.
-
-\erroronpage{581}{para 2, l.2}{UFi}{2004/06/04}{2}
- Six "languages" are loaded ...: seven?
-
-\erroronpage{581}{para 1, l.2}{WaS/FMi}{2004/06/14}{2}
- Change: ``\ldots loaded first by INI\TeX{}; English in the example
- above).''
- \> ``\ldots loaded first by INI\TeX{}); for compatibility reasons this language
- should contain US-English hyphenation patterns.''
-
-\erroronpage{581}{para 2, l.2}{WaS}{2004/06/14}{2}
- Language names are to be corrected according to p.580.
-
-\iffalse
-% no space. do what? probably nothing right now
-\erroronpage{581}{para 2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{}
- Add a footnote to explain the meaning of the term
- ``hyphenation trie''?
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{583}{para 1, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2}
- Wrong number: ``(line 32)'' \> ``(line 34)''
-
-\erroronpage{583}{para 1, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2}
- Replace: ``\texttt{welsh.\u{sty}}'' \> ``\texttt{welsh.\u{ldf}}''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{585}{}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2}
-The line:\\
- \comando{\adddialect\{austrian\}\{german\}}\\
- and the following one correspond neither to lines 102\textendash 103 of the language
- skeleton, nor to the grammar of the \comando{\adddialect} on page 584; this
- description as well as the skeleton file apparently require that the language
- name be preceded by \comando{\l@}; in facts, for example,
- the \texttt{germanb.ldf} contains the line:\\
- \comando{\adddialect}\comando{\l at austrian}\comando{\l at german}
-
-\seriouserroronpage{586}{code line 2}{TSS}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Extra closing brace after \verb|\def\germanhyphenmins|.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{589}{syntax box}{UFi}{2004/06/04}{2}
- Change: |\addto\csname[code]| \> |\addto\csname{code}| (wrong braces)
-
-\erroronpage{591}{para 1, l.5}{UFi}{2004/06/04}{2}
- Extra character: ``The third argument, \emph{ex\u{c}ec}, contains\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{592}{para 3, l.2+4}{PPN}{2004/05/25}{2}
- Replace: ``Panday'' \> ``Pand\u{e}y'' (sorry)
-
-\seriouserroronpage{592}{para 3, l.3}{PPN}{2004/05/25}{2}
- Replace ``\textsf{bang}'' with ``\textsf{bengali}''. This
- package is available on CTAN in the \textsf{languages/bengali/pandey}.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{592}{para 3, l.4 }{PPN}{2004/05/25}{2}
- Replace ``\textsf{denag}'' with ``\textsf{devnag}''.
- This package is on CTAN \texttt{languages/devanagari/velthuis}.
-
-\erroronpage{592}{para 5, l.1}{CKr}{2004/10/15}{4}
- Replace: ``E\u{hit}opian'' \> ``E\u{thi}opian''
-
-\erroronpage{592}{general remarks}{PPn}{2004/05/25}{}
-Additional remarks not for inclusion in the book: For \TeX{}, \LaTeX{}
-in languages of India,
-there are several nice packages. An overview can be found in the
-following {\sc TUGboat} Articles;
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Anshuman Pandey, \textsl{An overview of Indic Fonts for \TeX{}},
-{\sc TUGboat} Volume 19, Number 2 / June 1998 115---119
-\item Anshuman Pandey, \textsl {Typesetting Bengali in \TeX{}}, {\sc
-TUGboat} Volume 20, Number 2, June 1999 119---126
-\item C. V. Radhakrishnan, \textsl{A case for \TeX{} in India}, {\sc
-TUGboat} Volume 19, Number 1, March 1998, 6---9.
-\item Karel P\'{\i}\v{s}ka, \textsl{A conversion of public Indic fonts
-from METAFONT into Type I format with} {\sc TeX{}TRACE}, Volume
-23, Number 1, 2002, 70---73
-\item
-Yannis Haralambous and John Plaice, \textsl{Low-level Devan\=agari
-support for Omega-- Adapting {\sf devnag}}, i
-Volume 23, Number 1, 2002, 50---56
-\end{enumerate}
-
-In addition to these articles, TUGIndia has uploaded two
-\LaTeXe{} packages (i) Malayalam for \LaTeXe{}, and (ii) Kannada
-\LaTeX{}, both available from www.sarovar.org.
-
-A remark on {\sf devnag} package:-- Originally developed by Frans
-Velthuis in 1991, it was upgraded for use with \LaTeXe{} (made
-NFSS-complaint), and maintained by a team consisting of Dominik
-Wujastyk, John Smith, Anshuman Pandey, Fran\c{c}ois Patte, and
-Zden\v{e}k Wagner. Very recently, the project has
-been handed over to TUGIndia, for further development,
-and as of May 2004, it has moved from sourceforge.net to
-sarovar.org.
-
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 10}
-
-\erroronpage{chap.10}{boxed texts}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2}
- In addition to what has been reported elsewhere, here's an overview
- of some more inconsistencies in (some of) the ``syntax boxes'' of
- this chapter. \\
- With parenthesized arguments, commas are part of the syntax;
- hence they should be set in `typewriter font' (???). \\
- The space after these commas should also be uniform.
- \\ \vspace{.5\baselineskip}
- %
- \begin{tabular}{@{}rrllp{44mm}@{}} \hline
- page(s) & box(es) & comma & space & remark \\ \hline
- 599 & & |\rm| & no & asterisk should be in |\tt| \\
- 602/3 & all & |\rm| & yes & ``...'' vs.\ ``\ldots'' \\
- 606 & 1 & |\rm| & no & ``...'' vs.\ ``\ldots'' \\
- 606 & 2 & |\it| & no & \\
- 607 & & |\rm| & yes & \\
- 608 & all & |\it| & no & \\
- 610 & 1--2 & |\rm| & yes & ``...'' vs.\ ``\ldots'' \\
- 616 & & |\it| & no & \raggedright
- also in text after box! \\
- (ll.1+5 in first para)
- \tabularnewline
- 639 & & |\it| & no & \\
- 641 & 1--2 & $^*$ & no & \raggedright
- $^*$various flaws; \\
- see separate error entry.
- \tabularnewline \hline
- \end{tabular}
-
-
-\erroronpage{596}{para 4, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Replace: ``is the same as \u{those} produced''
- \> ``\ldots \u{that} \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{597}{para -1, l.-4/-3}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Replace: ``\ldots, in case \u{they are} changed''
- \> ``\ldots, in case \u{it is} changed''
-
-\erroronpage{597/598}{para -1, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Delete word: ``which again \u{that} expects one argument.''
-
-\erroronpage{599}{boxed text}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2}
- The asterisk after |\fancyput| should be centred and the `(' and `)'
- should be in typewriter.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{599}{boxed text}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2}
- Replace brackets by braces. (The \emph{horizontal-material}
- argument is not an optional, but a mandatory one.)
-
-\erroronpage{600}{para 2, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Replace: ``\u{don't} work'' \> ``\u{does not} work''
-
-\erroronpage{600}{exa 10-1-12}{GBa}{2004/07/28}{2}
- The optional parameter ``[t]'' in the second example is printed as text
-in line (1).
-
- Remove in code: ``\texttt{[t]}''
-
- Append to previous paragraph: ``An optional position argument is not supported.''
-
-\erroronpage{601}{l.-17}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2}
-Add word: Calculating the horizontal and vertical \u{distance}
-
-\erroronpage{602--603}{all boxed texts}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2}
- All the parentheses `(' and `)' (9 pairs in total)
- should be in `typewriter font'.
-
-\erroronpage{604,605,609}{}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2}
- On p.604 (l. -2) and p.605 (ll. 1, 2) we have ``|join|
- environment(s)''.\\
- On p.605 (ll. -6, -1) these are called ``|..join| environments''.\\
- On p.609 (para 3, l.5) it's ``|join| environments'' again.
-
-\erroronpage{606}{para 2, l.1}{HjG}{2005/05/16}{4}
- ``The \textsf{epic} \ldots'' \>
- either: ``\textsf{epic} \ldots''
- or: ``The \textsf{epic} package \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{606}{para 3, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Delete comma and move word:\\
- ``This command\u{, which} is a variant \ldots\ command, allows
- \ldots'' \>\\
- ``This command is a variant \ldots\ command, \u{which} allows
- \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{606}{second boxed text}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Brackets should also be in `typerwriter font'.
-
-\erroronpage{606}{para -1}{HjG/FMi}{2005/05/19}{4}
- The arguments ``\textit{$\Delta$width}'' and
- ``\textit{$\Delta$height}'' are mistakenly used in math mode. In
- the book that means a different font and different kerning.
-
-\erroronpage{606--608}{all boxed texts}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2}
- All the parentheses `(' and `)' (9 pairs in total)
- should be in `typewriter font'.
-
-\erroronpage{609}{}{FMi}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Editorial comment: reprinted see earlier summary entries.
-
-\erroronpage{610}{first two boxed texts}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2}
- All the parentheses `(' and `)' (6 pairs in total)
- should be in `typewriter font'.
-
-\erroronpage{612}{exa 10-1-25}{PYu/FMi}{2004/07/05}{2}
- The |\protect| in front of |\footnotesize| (twice) is not necessary.
-
-\erroronpage{613}{para 1, ll.2/3}{HjG}{2004/06/21}{2}
- Citations disrupt sentence!\\
- ``\ldots\ bundle [48,49] or [57, Chapter~6] for \ldots'' \> \\
- ``\ldots\ bundle \u{(see }[48,49] or [57, Chapter~6]\u)''\\
- and move the parenthesised citations to the end of the sentence.
-
-\erroronpage{614}{para 1, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Missing closing quotes:
- ``the ``extended\u{\strut''} or ``enhanced'' \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{615}{Tab.\ 10.1}{FMi}{2006/10/21}{s}
-The important driver ``vtex'' is missing. On the other hand
-some of the listed drivers are only of historical interest.
-
-\erroronpage{616}{boxed texts}{FMi}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Corrections as outlined in summary entry above.
-
-\erroronpage{618}{boxed text}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Replace: ``\textit{key val list}'' \> ``\textit{key/val-list}''
- (also in following text).
-
-\erroronpage{619}{viewport}{BMo/FMi}{2007/10/20}{s}
- Explanation of \texttt{viewport} key changed to better explain that it only
- changes the space reserved but doesn't prevent printing the whole graphic
- (unless \texttt{clip} is used additionally)
-
-\erroronpage{620}{editorial change}{FMi}{2007/10/20}{s}
- Text changes on previous page results in different page break.
-
-\erroronpage{620}{para 1, l.1; para 2, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Replace:
- ``the first \u{seven} keys'' \> ``the first \u{eight} keys''\\
- ``The first \u{nine} keys'' \> ``The first \u{ten} keys''
-
-\erroronpage{620}{para 5, l.2}{FMi}{2005/04/27}{4}
- Replace:
- ``\ldots in the \u{optional arguments}.'' \>
- ``\ldots in the \textit{key/val-list}.''
-
-%\erroronpage{621}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{}
-% Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned.
-
-\erroronpage{623}{para 1, l.7}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Delete word: ``some \u{of} key combinations''
-
-\erroronpage{623}{boxed text}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Replace: ``\textit{key val list}'' \> ``\textit{key/val-list}''
- (also in following text).
-
-\erroronpage{630}{para 3, l.3}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2}
- Replace: ``the next |\parbox| examples'' \> ``the next
- \u{\texttt{tabular}} examples''
-
-\erroronpage{631}{para.2, l.6}{FMi/HjG}{2006/10/22}{s}
- Ersetze: "`\u{This point} is shown \ldots"' \>
- "`\u{This} is shown \ldots"'
-
-\erroronpage{631}{para -1, l.-1}{JBr}{2004/08/02}{2}
- Replace: ``\textit{key val}'' \> ``\textit{key/val}''
-
-\erroronpage{632}{fig. 10.2}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2}
- The horizontal extent of the box is called ``|length|'' \>
- probably better: ``|width|''.\\
- Missing standalone horizontal specs:
- ``|[l]|'' $\equiv$ ``|[lc]|'';
- ``|[r]|'' $\equiv$ ``|[rc]|''.
-
-\erroronpage{632}{boxed text}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Replace: ``\textit{key val list}'' \> ``\textit{key/val-list}''
-
-\erroronpage{633}{para 1, ll.4/5}{HjG}{2005/05/16}{4}
- Add character: ``A matrix \ldots\ appear\u{s} below.''
-
-\erroronpage{633}{l.-2}{HjG/DPa}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Replace: ``The material in the section can be compared to
- Sebastian\ldots'' \>
- ``The material in this section is similar to that of Sebastian\ldots''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{633}{example}{HjG}{2006/10/21}{s}
- The first column shows incorrect output: instead of x=0mm it uses some
- internal default.
-
-\erroronpage{634}{editorial change}{FMi}{2006/10/21}{s}
- Fix on previous page will change page break.
-
-
-\erroronpage{637}{footnote 2}{FMi}{2004/06/12}{2}
- Bug in \texttt{url.sty} generated extra space.
-
-\erroronpage{639}{boxed text}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2}
- The parentheses `(' and `)' should be in `typewriter font'.
-
-\erroronpage{640}{para -1, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2}
- ``the second |\vector| is truncated'' \>
- ``the second |\vector| is not rendered correctly''
-
-\erroronpage{641}{first two boxed texts}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2}
- The parentheses `(' and `)' around ``x1,y1'' (3 pairs in total)
- should be in `typewriter font'.\\
- All coordinates should be in (math) italic with subscripts
- (cf., e.g., pp.607/610): $x_1$, $y_1$, $x_2$, $y_2$.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{641}{para 2 l.1}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2}
- Replace: ``between points (x1,y2)'' \> ``between points (x1,\u{y1})''
-
-\erroronpage{641}{syntax boxes}{FMi}{2004/06/01}{2}
- The variable parts do not show the right fonts.
-
-\erroronpage{641}{para 3, l.1}{ReSt}{2005/04/17}{4}
- Remove: ``The |\Curve| command\u{s} is similar\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{641}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Second occurrence of mandatory argument should use the same font as
- the first one, i.e., ``\textit{m}'' instead of ``\texttt{m}''.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{641}{para 4, ll.2/3}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Change sentence:\\
- ``Like |\linethickness|, it is an absolute value \u{in points}
- (i.e., not affected by |\unitlength|)\u{ with the unit omitted}.''
- \>\\
- ``Like |\linethickness|, it is an absolute value (i.e., not
- affected by |\unitlength|)\u{, given in any of \LaTeX's units}.''
-
-\erroronpage{642}{item 6, l.2}{ReSt}{2005/04/28}{4}
- Remove: ``font information \u{information} to allow\ldots''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{643}{para 4, l.3}{MSc}{2004/06/04}{2}
- delete ``,and .gif''
-
-\erroronpage{643}{para 3, l.1}{FMi}{2005/11/11}{s}
- Unfortunately Th\`anh's name is misspelled. The correct spelling
- is ``H\`an Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}} Th\`anh''.
-
-\erroronpage{643}{para 4, l.5}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2}
-Add: ``\ldots can be converted to PDF by
-ImageMagick's \texttt{convert} utility\u{, \texttt{eps2pdf}} (\u{both
-of} which call \texttt{ghostscript}
-internally), \texttt{Acrobat Distiller}, or\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{646}{l.1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/08}{2}
-Add:
- ``(If the \texttt{dvi} file contains more than one
-page several output files are generated.)''
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 11}
-
-\erroronpage{651}{1st example}{PYu}{2004/07/01}{2}
- ``Page 9 :'' should be typeset ``Page 9:''.
-
-\erroronpage{652}{2nd example}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2}
- Missing colon: ``Page 22\u{\strut:}''
-
-\erroronpage{652}{l.-3}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2}
- Surplus words: ``The latter case \u{is for} allows for \ldots''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{654}{para 2 l.7}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2}
- Missing |}|: ``like
- |\index{\texttt{|\emph{key}|}|\u{\texttt{\textbraceright}} and''
-
-
-
-%That's a nice one: somehow the copy-editor has but the output is one
-%of the few remaining graphics in the book, sigh
-
-\seriouserroronpage{656}{figs. 11.3+4}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2}
- The text on p.649, l.1 claims:
- ``Figures 11.3 and 11.4 on page 656 show the input and generated
- output of a small \LaTeX{} document, \ldots, together with the
- result of including the \textsf{showidx} package \ldots''
- This does not quite hold: There are some differences in the text
- and the output of \textsf{showidx} contains some index entries not
- present in the source.
-
-\vspace{.5\baselineskip}
- %
-\hspace*{-100pt}\begin{minipage}[b]{\linewidth}
- \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} \hline
- \multicolumn{3}{c}{Differences in the text} \\ \hline
- & source (fig. 11.3) & output (fig. 11.4) \\ \hline
- \S1 & \ldots actually written into that file \u{only} \ldots
- & \ldots actually \u{only} written into that file \ldots \\
- \S2 & \u{To} prepare the index \ldots
- & \u{In order to} prepare the index \ldots\\
- \S2 & \ldots, \u {such as} \ldots
- & \ldots, \u{like} \ldots \\
- \S3 & \ldots by \u{the index processor} \ldots
- & \ldots by \u{\texttt{makeindex}} \ldots \\ \hline
- \multicolumn{3}{c}{Missing index entries} \\ \hline
- & \multicolumn{2}{l}{include index} \\
- & \multicolumn{2}{l}{Final production run} \\
- & \multicolumn{2}{l}{makeindex@\texttt{makeindex} program
- \emph{(2nd instance)}} \\ \hline
- \end{tabular}
-\end{minipage}
-
-\vspace{.5\baselineskip}
-The source has now been edited to match the printed output.
-
-
-\erroronpage{656}{}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{s}
- How horrible the page rotated counterclockwise!
-
-\erroronpage{657}{\texttt{-p} item, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2}
- Add word: ``\ldots the three \u{special} cases \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{660}{tab 11.1, note}{JMH}{2005/08/06}{4}
- Swap the words ``single'' and ``double''
-
-\iffalse
-% not a bug make it look nicer
-\erroronpage{661}{tab. 11.2, right col.}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{}
- Inter-line spacing in multiple-line entries ???\\(Keywords:
- |headings_flag|, |item_x1|, |delim_0|, |page_precedence|)
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{661}{tab. 11.2, l.12}{JMH}{2005/08/06}{4}
- The identifier referred is ``\texttt{heading\_flag}'', but the
- description uses the word ``\texttt{flag}''.
-
-
-\erroronpage{662}{l.6}{RPa}{2004/09/14}{4}
- The |-p| option is described on page 657.
-
-
-% in short rnaRA is correct
-\seriouserroronpage{664/665}{para -2/-1}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2}
- Confusion: default value of |page_precedence|:\\
- In para~\mbox{-2}, l.\mbox{-1}:
- ``\ldots; the default is |rRnaA|, as noted in Table~11.2 on
- page~661.''
- But in that table, ``|"rnaRA"|'' is given!\\
- In para~\mbox{-1}, l.\mbox{-2}:
- ``\ldots\ default |page_precedence| of |rnaRA| \ldots''!\\
- (Also note that the remarks on p.666, para~2, suggest |rRnaA|,
- referring to the same table as above.)
-
-Changed to consistently refer to rnaRA.
-
-page 666 changed to reflect rnaRA:\\
-`` \ldots\ assumes that pages numbered with lowercase Roman
-numerals precede those numbered with Arabic numerals, which in turn
-precede those numbered with the lowercase alphabet, uppercase Roman
-numerals and finally the uppercase alphabet.
-
-
-\seriouserroronpage{661/664-5}{}{FMi}{2005/08/14}{4}
-
- Confusion: the changes made in the second printing were wrong! The
- default for |page_precedence| is |rRnaA| after all. (Or more
- precisely: the program code shows |rnaRA| as the default but that
- value is never used and the program logic implements |rRnaA| -- what
- a mess.)
-
- Most of that section rewriten to better explain the limitations of
- MakeIndex in the area of ``funny'' page numbers.
-
-
-\seriouserroronpage{666}{para 4 l.5 and l.6}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2}
- Add extra visual space in second index: ``Likewise,
- \verb*=\index{a space}= and
- \verb*=\index{a space}= produce\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{668}{boxed text}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2}
- Slight inconsistency (also in subsequent text: para~\mbox{-2}):
- File arguments named ``\emph{idx1 idx2 \ldots}'' -- as opposed to
- pp.~655 and~674, where they're named ``\emph{idx0 idx1 \ldots}''.
-
-\erroronpage{669}{para 3}{JS}{2004/07/24}{2}
- Since xindy ignores all macros, it has no problems at all with
- formatting macros, but more problems with macros producing text.
- Substituted this paragraph with:
-
- ``\texttt{texindy} ignores unknown
- \TeX{} commands by default under the assumption that they do not
- produce text. It also knows about typical text-producing commands
- like \verb=\LaTeX= and \verb=\BibTeX= and handles them correctly.
- If you have your own command definition that produces text, or if you
- use one supplied by a package, then the entry is sorted
- incorrectly. You will either need to specify an explicit sort key
- in your index entry, as in \verb=\index{prog@\Prog}=, or write a
- \texttt{xindy} style file with a merge rule, as explained in
- Section~11.3.4.
-
- Be aware that producing index entries in arguments of commands has
- its own pitfalls, e.g., in
- \verb=\command{Properties of \Prog\index{\Prog}}=.
- Then \LaTeX{} commands might be expanded
- before they are written to the \texttt{idx} file and the placement
- in the index will depend on the expansion of \verb=\Prog=.''
-
-\erroronpage{669}{para -2, l.3}{MKu/FMi}{2004/07/01}{2}% already done by fmi
- Add: ``\ldots \verb|\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}| to all her
- documents \u{(or on recent Linux distributions the
- option \texttt{utf8})}, while\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{669}{section 11.3.2, para 2, L.3}{JMH}{2005/08/06}{4}
-"*her* documents": why a female *her*?
-
-\erroronpage{670}{table 11.3}{TMW/JS}{2004/06/07}{2}
- texindy can only work with Latin scripts out of the box. Removed
- all other languages, and checked list of supported languages with
- current xindy ``\LaTeX{} Companion Release''.
-
-\erroronpage{671}{para 2}{JS}{2004/06/07}{2}
-Replace with: ``There are about 50 predefined languages available, 35 of them are
-readily usable with \texttt{texindy}. They are listed in
-Table~11.3 on the facing page; you select one of them with the
-\texttt{texindy} option~\texttt{-L}. The other predefined
-languages have non-Latin scripts, their usage is described in the
-\texttt{xindy} documentation.
-
-
-\erroronpage{672}{table 11.4}{TSS/JS/CAR}{2004/05/26}{2}
- The \verb|word-order| module has two essentially equivalent
- descriptions. The |letter-order| module doesn't mention that
- it's turned on by texindy option \texttt{-l}. Use ``so-called'' as
- an example for |ignore-hyphen|. Add table footnote ``When two
- entries are identical except for ignored characters, those
- characters are not ignored any more.''
-
-\erroronpage{673}{para 5, ll.2/3}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2}
- Words need to be swapped:
- ``multiple \u{characters may} form a unit''
-
-\erroronpage{674}{para 1 l.1}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2}
- Extra word: ``those \u{of} available''
-
-\erroronpage{674/675}{boxed text and item list below}{JS}{2004/07/24}{2}
- Add option |[-C codepage]|. Add explanation between option |-L|
- and |-q|: ``Use \textit{codepage} as internal base
- encoding for sorting. This is used for fine-grained control of language
- module selection, needed only for non-Latin scripts.''
-
-\erroronpage{675}{example code}{JS}{2004/07/24}{2}
- Exchange xindy example style file with one that works. (Half of the
- lines were problematic in subtle ways.)
-
-\erroronpage{679}{example 3, para after the source}{JMH}{2005/08/06}{4}
- \texttt{:define-attributes} \> \texttt{define-attributes}
-
-\seriouserroronpage{679}{descr of theindex}{DSch}{2005/05/23}{4}
- Comparing the code in TLC2 with \texttt{book.cls} made me realize
-that the |\columnsep| command must come \emph{before} |\twocolumn| in
-order to have the desired effect.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{680}{descr of theindex}{DSch}{2005/05/23}{4}
- Comparing the code in TLC2 with \texttt{book.cls} made me realize
-that the |\columnsep| command must come \emph{before} |\twocolumn| in
-order to have the desired effect.
-
-\erroronpage{680}{First code block}{AFV}{2006/01/13}{s}
- Correct: |\mark|\texttt{\u k}|both| \>
- |\markboth|
-
-\erroronpage{681}{para 1 of \S 11.4.3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Extra word: ``augments \u{the} \LaTeX's indexing mechanism''
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 12}
-
-\erroronpage{general}{several pages}{HVo/FMi}{2004/05/21}{}
- The German word ``Schuldrecht'' is incorrectly hyphenated as
- ``Schul\-drecht'' in several examples due to the fact that English
- hyphenation patterns are used unless the language is
- explicitly marked. This is a deliberate effect, see pages 719 and
- 733--734.
-
-\erroronpage{683}{para 3, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/12}{2}
- Missing word:
- ``The chapter begins \u{with} a short introduction \ldots''
-
-
-\erroronpage{684/685}{exa 12-1-2, l.-2 of source}{BMo/FMi}{2004/05/16}{2}
- ``But then it might not'' should be ``But then they might not''
- for parallelism with the ``Multiple authors'' to which it is
- referring.
-
- Also changed: ``Multiple authors'' \> ``Entries with multiple
- authors''
- so that it is clear that not the authors are a problem (though
- come to think of it: given the example's authors\ldots)
-
-\erroronpage{685}{exa 12-1-1/2}{FMi}{2004/06/20}{2}
- Editorial comment: due to the modification of the \BibTeX{} data
- base \texttt{tex.bib} on page 690 the example output will change
- slightly in a reprint.
-
-
-\erroronpage{687}{para 1}{FMi}{2004/08/03}{2}
-Add: ``Depending on the layout produced by the class,
-it may result in \u{a normal space,} some extra space\u, or in starting a new line.''
-
-\erroronpage{688}{figure 12.1}{JMH}{2005/07/18}{4}
- Replace in first item: |\cite| \> |\citation|
-
-\erroronpage{690}{entry test97}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/18}{2}
- Add ``\texttt{and others}'' to the author field. Otherwise the
- example explanations in chapter 13 (pages 793--797) are
- partially wrong.
-
- Editorial comment: This change will affect the output of a
- number of examples in chapter 12 as well.
-
-\erroronpage{691}{syntax box}{HjG}{2004/06/13}{2}
- Set commas in `typewriter font'
-
-\erroronpage{694}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/13}{2}
- Missing comma: `\,``see [2--3,7\u,13]''\,'
-
-\erroronpage{696}{para 1, l.1}{DAl}{2005/08/21}{4}
- Missing word: ``\ldots option \u{is} shown in Example 12-2-9\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{697}{para 3, l.5}{HjG}{2004/06/13}{2}
- Move period: `\,``Ref\u{''.}\,' \> `\,``Ref\u{.''}\,'
-
-%%\erroronpage{702}{para 2, l.2}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{}
-%% ``Evidently'' does not seem to me to be quite the right word here.
-%
-% not convinced yet /FMi
-
-\erroronpage{705}{exa 12-3-17/18}{FMi}{2004/06/20}{2}
- Editorial comment: due to the modification of the \BibTeX{} data
- base \texttt{tex.bib} on page 690 the example output will change
- slightly in a reprint.
-
-\erroronpage{705}{para 3, l.5}{TMi}{2004/08/27}{4}
- Replace ``Geophysics'' with ``Geophysical''.
-
-\erroronpage{707}{exa 12-3-22}{FMi}{2004/06/20}{2}
- Editorial comment: due to the modification of the \BibTeX{} data
- base \texttt{tex.bib} on page 690 the example output will change
- slightly in a reprint.
-
-\erroronpage{707}{exa 12-3-22, l.-2 of source}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2}
- ``But then it might not'' should be ``But then they might not''
- for parallelism with the ``Multiple authors'' to which it is
- referring.
-
- Also changed: ``Multiple authors'' \> ``Entries with multiple
- authors''
-
-
-\erroronpage{708}{para 3, l.6}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2}
- Replace: ``situati\u{ui}n'' \> ``situation''
-
-\erroronpage{708}{para 4, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/14}{2}
- Add: ``when using \u{the} \texttt{chicago} \u{\BibTeX\ style}.''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{710}{para 4, l.2}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2}
- Replace:
- ``locate the printed version.'' \> ``locate the
- article within the journal.''
-
-\erroronpage{713}{para 1, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/14}{2}
- Replace: ``|\citep|'' \> ``|\citealp|''
-
-\erroronpage{717}{para 1, l.4}{JMH}{2005/07/18}{4}
-Add word: ``If you \u{only} want to specify an \textit{annotator},
-\ldots''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{719}{para 4, l.-2/-1}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2}
- Extra word: ``the \u{the} journal'' \\
- Correct explanation: ``\ldots the journal name\u{, volume number,}
- and year of publication, which is why we got ``TUGboat \u{10
- [}1989\u]''.''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{719}{syntax box}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/14}{2}
- Order of optional arguments are like |\cite| (i.e., swapped):\\
- |\citetitle[|\emph{post-note}|]{|\emph{key(s)}|}| or
- |\citetitle[|\emph{annotator}|][|\emph{post-note}|]{|\emph{key(s)}|}|\\
- |\cite*[|\emph{post-note}|]{|\emph{key(s)}|}| or
- |\cite*[|\emph{annotator}|][|\emph{post-note}|]{|\emph{key(s)}|}|
-
-\seriouserroronpage{722}{para 2, ll.2/3}{HjG}{2004/06/14}{2}
- Correct explanation: ``\ldots is always ``author name, journal,
- \u{volume,} and year''.''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{723}{syntax box}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/14}{2}
- Order of optional arguments are like with |\cite|:\\
- |\fullcite[|\emph{post-note}|]{|\emph{key(s)}|}| or
- |\fullcite[|\emph{annotator}|][|\emph{post-note}|]{|\emph{key(s)}|}|
-
-\erroronpage{726}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/14}{2}
- Delete comma:
- ``\ldots\ when used together\u, with \ldots''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{727}{para 3, l.-3}{JBe}{2004/06/01}{2}
- Replace: \texttt{\textbackslash jbnovarioref} \>
- \texttt{\textbackslash jbignorevarioref}
-
-\erroronpage{727}{examples 12-5-21/22}{FMi}{2004/06/03}{2}
- Not wrong, but it looks funny: due to the chosen example height the
- footnote from the previous page (not shown) is partially carried
- over so we get ``43311-7'' as the first item in the footnote. That
- is the last part of the ISBN number see example 12-5-20.
-
- Previous page enlarged by one line to avoid this.
- \verb|\AtBeginDocument{\enlargethispage*{\baselineskip}}|
- added to (hidden) preamble commands.
-
-\erroronpage{729}{para 1, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/14}{2}
- Correct: ``to ``Ibid.\u{, \S\,3}''.''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{730}{example 12-5-28}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2}
- Citation 7 and 8 are similar, but the description above says
- something else...
-
- To correct this mistake and to better show what happens, the example
- was changed to contain a slightly different set of citations (same
- change was made to example 12-5-27):
-\begin{verbatim}
- Full citations: \cite{aschur} \cite{bschur}
- not shown on the left!
-\newpage
- text \cite[\S\,7]{aschur} text
- \cite[\S\,8]{aschur} \cite[\S\,16]{zpo}
- text \cite[\S\,7]{bschur} \cite{aschur}
- text \cite[\S\,3]{zpo}
-\end{verbatim}
-And the text above the example was changed as follows:
-
- ``If \texttt{name\&title\&auto} was selected (either implicitly or
-explicitly), then the following happens: the first citation of a
-publication automatically displays the full entry (citation~5 in the
-next example). In case of repeated citations to unambiguous works
-only the name of the author(s) are shown (citation~8). For ambiguous citations
-this will be done only for immediately following citations
-(citation~4). However, if there are
-intervening citations, then the name(s) and short titles are shown
-(citations~3, 6, and~7).''
-
-\erroronpage{731}{para 1, l.4}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/15}{2}
- Correct/change to: ``that \u{two}
- citation\u{s} \ldots\ \u{are} actually wrong:''
-
-\erroronpage{732}{para 3. l.2}{JMH}{2005/07/18}{4}
-Replace: ``in which case \u{the first} cross-reference \ldots''
-\> ``in which case \u{a} cross-reference \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{734}{para 1, l.2}{CKr}{2005/05/7}{4}
- Correct: |\bibgerman| \> |\bib|\u{\texttt s}|german|
-
-\erroronpage{734}{para 2, l.-1}{CKr}{2005/03/24}{4}
- Remove surplus letters: ``get the correct\u{ion} hyphenation.''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{741}{l.-5}{HjG}{2004/06/15}{2}
- Missing closing brace:
- |\renewcommand\opcit{\textit{supra}|\u{\texttt{\textbraceright}}
-
-\seriouserroronpage{743}{item 3}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2}
- Equal sign missing: \texttt{sortkey\u{ = }"Bismarck, Otto von"}.
-
-\erroronpage{744}{exa 12-5-48/49}{HjG}{2004/06/15}{}
- There's a spurious space before all occurrences of
- ``\textsc{D. E. Knuth}''! \\ This is (partly, ie in the footnote)
- due to a missing percent in the definition of |\@realcite| and
- |\@printbibliography| in the camel package. Seems that a problem
- with the volume parsing in camel is the reason for the surplus
- spaces showing up in the bibliography output. Reported to the
- author.
-
-\erroronpage{745}{ll.3/4}{HjG}{2004/06/15}{2}
- Missing metaness:\\
- ``\ldots\ \texttt{jobname.tts}'' \>
- ``\ldots\ \meta{jobname}\texttt{.tts}''\\
- ``\ldots\ \texttt{jobname.lts}'' \>
- ``\ldots\ \meta{jobname}\texttt{.lts}''
-
-\erroronpage{746}{tab 12.2}{HjG}{2004/06/15}{2}
- Replace (`bibtopic' column, row 4; `multibib' column, row 7):\\
- ``no'' \> ``No''
-
-\erroronpage{746}{Tab. 12.2}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2}
- Change ``Requires tailored .bib files'' \> ``Works with standard
- .bib files''
- (and change matching row entries)
-
-\erroronpage{746}{Tab. 12.2}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2}
- Change: ``Above typeset together somewhere'' \>
- ``Group bibliographies together''
-
-\erroronpage{749}{para -1, l.1}{THa}{2004/06/22}{2}
- Missing accents: ``Jose Alberto Fernandez'' \> ``Jos\'e Alberto
- Fern\'andez''
-
-\erroronpage{750}{para -3, l.-2}{CKr}{2005/03/31}{4}
- Delete surplus word: ``\ldots as \u{the} the auxiliary files would be
- overwritten.''
-
-\erroronpage{752}{para 1, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/15}{2}
- Delete backslash:
- ``\ldots in an \texttt{\u\textbackslash article} class).''
-
-\erroronpage{753}{para 4, l.5}{HjG}{2004/06/15}{2}
- Replace: ``|\bibliography|'' \> ``|\bibliographystyle|''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{755/756}{}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2}
- Wrong limitation of multibib: The whole passage from ``A final
- difference'' up to ``|nocite|.'' should be replaced with something
- like: ``The multibib package (since version 2.3 of 2004/01/24) is
- compatible with most other packages that provide extensions to the
- cite mechanisms, including \textsf{cite}, \textsf{natbib}, and
- {jurabib}. Moreover, the package provides a general interface which
- allows to add arbitrary extensions of cite commands to be recognized
- by \textsf{multibib}.''
-
- Editorial comment: change affects pagebreak position.
-
-\erroronpage{756}{Ex. 12-6-10}{THa/FMi}{2004/06/21}{2}
- Replace source text with:
- |\LaTeX{} offers an interface to include|\\
- |graphics \citelatex{LGC97}. \LaTeX's|\\
- |default citation scheme is| \\
- |number-only \cite{vLeunen:92}.|\\
- i.e., move/remove the sentence periods. This should not affect the
- output as the superscript is moved and double periods are removed.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 13}
-
-% perhaps
-\erroronpage{758}{para 3, ll.1/2}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Delete word: ``\ldots\ to look for
- \u{management} tools that help in managing such databases.''
-
-\erroronpage{758}{para 4}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Add+change: ``Once everything is under control, we return in
- \u{Section~13.5} to the task of typesetting
-and look at how different \BibTeX{} styles can be used to produce
-different bibliography layouts from the same input. As there may not
-be a suitable style for a particular set of layout requirements
-available, Section~\u{13.5.2} discusses how to
-generate\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{763}{tab. 13.1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/16}{2}
- In the explanation for \texttt{misc}, replace:\\
- ``(i.e., the entire field is empty)'' \>
- ``(i.e., the entire entry is empty or has only ignored fields).''
-
-\erroronpage{764}{para -3, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Add: ``following a field \u{name (and \texttt= sign)}''
-
-\erroronpage{765}{tab. 13.2}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- In the explanation for \texttt{type}:\\
- l.2: Add word:
- ``For the \u{entry} type \texttt{phdthesis} \ldots''\\
- l.3: Punctuation is not part of string:
- ``|type = "{Ph.D.} dissertation|\texttt{\u.}|"|'' \>
- ``|type = "{Ph.D.} dissertation"|\u.''\\
- l.5: Punctuation is not part of strings:\\
- ``\texttt{chapter = "1.2\u," type = "Section\u."}'' \> \\
- ``\texttt{chapter = "1.2"}\u{ and} \texttt{type = "Section"}\u.''
-
-\erroronpage{765}{`key's description, l.1}{JMH}{2005/06/29}{4}
-Remove ``cross-referencing'': cross-referencing just uses key appearing in
-|\cite| commands.
-
-\erroronpage{766/767}{several places}{DAl}{2005/09/12}{4}
- Replaced ``Miguel Lopez Fernandez'' by ``Miguel Parra Benavides''
- as the original name would really require accents that are not yet
- discussed at this point.
-
-\erroronpage{766}{para 6, l.1 }{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2}
- Move comma: Fernandez\u{,''} should be Fernandez\u{'',}
-
-\erroronpage{767}{l.7}{SPe}{2007/05/21}{s}
-``Miguel Parra Benavides'' is missing closing quotes.
-
-\erroronpage{767}{l.10}{SPe}{2007/05/21}{s}
-``Parra'' and ``Benavides'' are missing closing quotes.
-
-\erroronpage{768}{para 4, l.4}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2}
- Replace: ``(see Section 13.2.2)'' \> ``(see below)'' \\
- After all we are in 13.2.2 :-)
-
-\erroronpage{770}{para 1, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Replace: ``text \u{field} of \BibTeX\ \u{entries}'' \>
- ``text \u{part} of \BibTeX\ \u{fields}''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{771}{verb. text}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Surplus closing brace:
- ``|"\providecommand\url[1]{\texttt{#1}}|\texttt{\u\textbraceright}|"|''
-
-\erroronpage{771}{l.-3}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Change: ``different sorting rules from English'' \>
- ``sorting rules different from those of English''
-
-\erroronpage{772}{l.-5}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Shell command line should be underlined (as on pp.~775--778).
-
-\erroronpage{773}{para 3, ll.2/3}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Change: ``put \u{from \BibTeX}\ into the \texttt{.bbl} file'' \>
- ``put into the \texttt{.bbl} file \u{by \BibTeX}''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{773}{para 3, ll.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Change: ``and \u{an} additional \LaTeX\ run'' \>
- ``and \u{two} additional \LaTeX\ run\u{s}''
-
-\erroronpage{773}{para -2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Add: ``articles and book\u{s}''
-
-\erroronpage{775}{para -2, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Change font: ``in the \texttt{\u{string}} parameter'' \>
- ``in the \emph{\u{string}} parameter''
-
-\erroronpage{777}{program output}{FMi}{2004/08/03}{2}
-After changing the bib file this line comes out as:
-\begin{verbatim}
-%% "EX/tex.bib", line 92: Unexpected value in ``year = "1980ff"''.
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\erroronpage{777}{para -1, l.-3}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Change: ``all \u{entries} are examined'' \>
- ``all \u{fields of an entry} are examined''
-
-\erroronpage{777}{para -1, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Change: ``value part of the \u{entries}'' \>
- ``value part of the \u{fields}''
-
-\erroronpage{778}{para 4,l.2}{JMH}{2005/07/18}{4}
- Replace: ``\texttt{year=1980ff}'' \> ``|year={1980ff}|''
-
-\erroronpage{779--784}{throughout}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Shell command lines should be underlined (as on pp.~775--778).
-
-\erroronpage{779}{para 3, l.2/3}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Add: ``one ore more \BibTeX\ databases as its argument\u{(s)}''
-
-\erroronpage{779}{footnote 2}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Add second hyphen: ``after the \texttt{-} option.''
- \> ``after the \texttt{-\u-} option.''
-
-\erroronpage{780}{top}{FMi}{2004/08/03}{2}
- Spurious space on top of page.
-
-\erroronpage{784}{para 1, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Typo (forgotten backslash!?):
- ``Progpybliographer'' \> ``\textsf{pybliographer}''
-
-\erroronpage{787}{l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Shell command line should be underlined (as on pp.~775--778).
-
-\erroronpage{787}{para -2, l.1}{CKr}{2005/04/20}{4}
- Remove surplus letter: ``The \textsf{JBibtexManager} program
- develop\u{p}ed by Nizar Batada''
-
-\erroronpage{788}{fig. caption}{FMi}{2004/05/14}{2}
- Add: The \textsf{JBibtexManager} workspace with the \u{(German locale)}
-
-\erroronpage{788}{footnote}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2}
- Replace: ``Most of these restrictions have been lifted in the
- new version of JBibtexManager.''
-
-\erroronpage{789}{para 2, l.1}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2}
- Replace: ``\ldots are kept unchanged but they are
- neither visible nor modifiable from within the program.'' \\
- \>
- ``\ldots are neither visible nor modifiable
- except when using the ``raw \BibTeX'' mode in the newest version of
- the program. ''
-
-
-\erroronpage{789}{para 3}{FMi}{2005/06/02}{4}
-Replace whole paragraph with:
-``The program is not available on CTAN. Its current home is
-\texttt{https://www.jabref.org}, where it was merged
-with a similar project called \textsf{BibKeeper}
-under the new name \textsf{JabRef}.''
-
-\erroronpage{789}{para 5, l.3}{FMi}{2004/05/14}{2}
- Small rewrite:
- The only ``foreign'' export formats supported are \texttt{.bbl} files
- \u{and \texttt{.htm} files} (i.e., processing a selection of entries with
- \BibTeX{} or \BibTeX8 from within the program and producing HTML
- from a selection of entries\u{)}.
-
-\erroronpage{791--793}{tab 13.4}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- \texttt{apa.bst} -- add:
- ``American Psychology Association \u{\BibTeX\ style}'' \\
- \texttt{jmb.bst} -- add:
- ``\emph{Journal of Molecular Biology} \u{\BibTeX}\ style''\\
- Some journal names are written in italic, other's aren't:
- Astronomy; Behavioral and Brain Sciences; Human Biology.
-
-
-\erroronpage{793}{para 1, l.2}{SN}{2004/06/11}{2}
- Remove surplus word: ``using another \u{the} \BibTeX{} style''.
-
-\erroronpage{793}{para 2,l.5}{DAl}{2005/09/03}{4}
- Remove comma: ``\ldots wich will show us\u{,} how different\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{794}{exa 13-5-1/2}{FMi}{2004/06/20}{2}
- Editorial comment: due to the modification of the \BibTeX{} data
- base \texttt{tex.bib} on page 690 the example output will change
- slightly in a reprint.
-
-\erroronpage{795}{exa 13-5-3/4}{FMi}{2004/06/20}{2}
- Editorial comment: due to the modification of the \BibTeX{} data
- base \texttt{tex.bib} on page 690 the example output will change
- slightly in a reprint.
-
-\erroronpage{795}{para 2, l.2}{JMH}{2005/07/18}{4}
- Replace: ``author's name'' \> ``authors' names''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{795}{para 2, ll.4/5}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2}
- The text states: ``Also note the interesting label produced for the
- reference with more than three authors.'' \\
- However, example 13-5-4 cannot show this, as there are only three
- authors (item~[GUD97]).
-
-\erroronpage{796}{exa 13-5-5/6}{FMi}{2004/06/20}{2}
- Editorial comment: due to the modification of the \BibTeX{} data
- base \texttt{tex.bib} on page 690 the example output will change
- slightly in a reprint.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{796}{para 1, ll.-2/-1}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2}
- The text states: ``Note that the entry with more than three authors
- has now been collapsed, showing only the first one.'' \\
- Again, example 13-5-5 does not show this, as there are only three
- authors, and all three are shown (item~[5]).
-
-\seriouserroronpage{797}{para 3, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2}
- Replace:
- ``\ldots; as a result, we get an incomplete \u{first} entry.'' \>
- ``\ldots; as a result, we get an incomplete \u{second} entry.'' \\
- (Obviously, the citation of \texttt{LGC97} has been added to
- example 13-5-7 \emph{after} this text was written.)
-
-\erroronpage{797}{exa 13-5-7}{FMi}{2004/06/20}{2}
- Editorial comment: due to the modification of the \BibTeX{} data
- base \texttt{tex.bib} on page 690 the example output will change
- slightly in a reprint.
-
-\erroronpage{798}{tab 13.5, l. 1-2}{MSch}{2006/01/06}{s}
- Replace: ``Erwin'' \>
- '`Ervin''
-
-\erroronpage{798}{para 1, l.3}{CKr}{2005/04/23}{4}
- Remove surplus word: ``\ldots, then it is all that \u{it} is necessary.''
-
-\erroronpage{800}{Citation scheme,l.2}{DAl}{2005/09/03}{4}
- Replace letter: ``\ldots different questions th\u{a}n if you
- choose\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{802}{para 2, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2}
- Replace: ``derivation'' \> ``deviation''
-
-\erroronpage{802}{para -1, l.3}{FMi}{2005/06/02}{4}
- Replace wrong braces:
- ``|\urlprefix\url[|\textit{field-value}|]|'' \>
- ``|\urlprefix\url{|\textit{field-value}|}|''
-
-\erroronpage{803}{para -2, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2}
- Replace: ``in the second phase of the \u{formatting}'' \>
- ``in the second phase of the \u{processing}''
-
-
-\erroronpage{806}{list, item 3}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2}
- Extra character: ``Printed in the order in which the\u{e}
- references\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{806}{para -3}{FMi}{2005/06/02}{4}
- Move this paragraph to the bottom of the page since it is really an
- explanation about the functions defined for each publication type.
-
-\erroronpage{808}{table 13.8}{JMH}{2005/07/18}{4}
- Replace description for |int.to.chr$| with:
- ``Translates integers into a characters using the ASCII mapping''
-
-\erroronpage{810}{\texttt{fin.entry} example}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2}
- Replace in ``\emph{After Modification}'' part (2~times):
- ``|\sc|'' \> ``|\scshape|''
-
-\erroronpage{811}{para 2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2}
- Replace: ``at the beginning of this section'' \>
- ``on the facing page''
-
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 14}
-
-\erroronpage{814}{para 6, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2}
- Delete doubled word:
- ``The most important \u{important} commands \ldots''
-
-%% not really a bug but inconsistent
-\erroronpage{814}{para -1, l.-2}{HOb}{2004/05/28}{2}
- Explicitly show spaces: \verb*=% \iffalse= \ldots\ \verb*=% \fi=
-
-\erroronpage{815}{syntax boxes 2+3}{HOb}{2004/05/28}{2}
- For clarification the argument of |\DescribeMacro| and that of
- |\begin{macro}| should both start with a |\|.
-
-\erroronpage{816}{para -3, l.4+}{HOb}{2004/05/28}{2}
- Change sentence:
- Note that \u{such short forms for \texttt{\textbackslash verb},
- just} like \texttt{\textbackslash verb} itself,
- cannot appear in the argument of another command, but
- \u{the characters} may be used
- freely inside \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{macrocode} environments.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{820}{para 2, last line}{DHL}{2004/05/16}{2}
- Change to: ``lines 1, 2, and \u{4} if \texttt{Bname} is also
-asked for, and lines 1, \u{3}, and 4 otherwise.''
-
-\erroronpage{820}{para 3, l.5}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2}
- Remove surplus space: ``behind \%\u{~} signs\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{820}{table 14.1}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2}
- Entries not sorted correctly: swap |\CheckSum| and |\CheckModules|
-
-\seriouserroronpage{821}{descr.\ of
- \ttfamily\textbackslash DeleteShortVerb}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- \verb=\MakeshortVerb= should be \verb=\Make=\u{S}\texttt{hortVerb}\\
- \verb=\MakeshortVerb*= should be \verb=\Make=\u{S}\texttt{hortVerb*}
-
-\erroronpage{821}{table 14.1}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2}
- As suggested by HOb (p.815):
- ``|\DescribeMacro{\|\emph{cmd}|}|'' and
- ``|\begin{macro}{\|\emph{cmd}|}|''.
-
-\erroronpage{822}{table 14.1, entry 2}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2}
- |\meta{|\emph{arg}|}| ``Print \u{the} argument \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{822}{table 14.1, entry 3}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2}
- Replace with: \verb=\SpecialEscapechar{\=\emph{char\/}\verb=}=
-
-\seriouserroronpage{822}{table 14.1, entry -2}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2}
- Wrong default: ``(default |*|)'' \> ``(default |!|)''
-
-\erroronpage{823}{table 14.1}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2}
- As suggested by HOb (p.815):
- ``|\SpecialIndex{\|\emph{cmd}|}|'',
- ``|\SpecialMainIndex{\|\emph{cmd}|}|'', and
- ``|\SpecialUsageIndex{\|\emph{cmd}|}|''.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{824}{table 14.1, entry 6}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2}
- Typo: |\MakePercentCommand| \> |\MakePercentComment|
-
-\erroronpage{825}{para 3, l.1}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2}
- ``\% sign'' \> ``|%| sign''
-
-\erroronpage{825}{para 5, l.1}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2}
- ``target'' \> ``target machine''
-
-% making the syntax box bigger affects next page as well:
-\seriouserroronpage{826/827}{code box}{UFi/FMi}{2004/05/24}{2}
- Closing brace of \verb=\generate{...}= is missing. Also it would be
- better if the box shows that several |\file| commands can be used.
-
-\erroronpage{826/827}{para -1\slash para 2}{HjG}{2005/05/15}{4}
- The descriptions referring to the syntax box do not characterize
- the changed contents of that box (due to a previous error report).
-
- Not only a single \textit{result-file} is possible:\\
- ``Within the argument to |\generate| you specify the
- \textit{result-file} you want to produce by using a |\file|
- declaration.''
-
- The text ``as given above'' does no longer hold:\\
- ``With the syntax specification for |\generate| as given above,
- you can produce one \textit{result-file} from one or more
- \textit{source-files}.''
-
-\erroronpage{826}{l.2}{HjG}{2005/02/26}{4}
- Replace: LaTeX \> \LaTeX{}
-
-\erroronpage{826}{para -2, l.-3}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2}
- Add: ``only the code piece\u{s}''
-
-\erroronpage{827}{para 2, l.-1}{HjG}{2005/05/15}{4}
- ``source files'' \> ``\emph{source-files}''
-
-\erroronpage{827}{}{FMi}{2004/06/08}{2}
- Editorial comment: reprinted because of pagebreak changes.
-
-\erroronpage{828}{para 3, l.2}{DHL}{2004/05/16}{2}
- Extra word: ``If so, \u{case}'' \> ``If so,''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{829}{syntax box}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2}
- |\preamble|, |\endpreamble|, |\postamble|, and |\endpostamble| all
- have to be on lines by themselves, so the displayed syntax is a bit
- misleading (to say it nicely).
-
-\erroronpage{829}{para -2, l.-2/-1}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2}
- Add word: ``in \u{the} \textsc{docstrip} package documentation''
-
-\erroronpage{830}{para 4, ll.5/6}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2}
- Change:
- ``In addition, the user \u{has configured} the \textsc{docstrip}
- program \ldots'' \>
- ``\ldots\ \u{has to configure} \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{830}{para 5, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2}
- Add: ``in the \textsc{docstrip} \u{script}''
-
-\erroronpage{831}{ll. 4 to 15}{UFi/FMi}{2004/05/27}{2}
- The |\usedir| declarations in the example are not in accordance
- with the TDS set-up. They show what \textsf{jurabib}
- currently implements in its \texttt{.ins} files.
- However, the correct set-up would be:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \usedir{tex/latex/jurabib}
- \file{jurabib.sty}{\from{jurabib.dtx}{package}}
- \file{dejbbib.ldf}{\from{jurabib.dtx}{german}}
- ...
- \usedir{bibtex/bst/jurabib}
- \file{jurabib.bst}{\from{jurabib.dtx}{jurabst}}
- ...
- \usedir{doc/latex/jurabib}
- \file{jbtest.tex}{\from{jurabib.dtx}{test}}
- ...
-\end{verbatim}
- This also requires to change the text following.
-
-\erroronpage{831}{ll.16/17}{HjG}{2004/06/09}{2}
- Double interword space?
- (if so: 2x visible, 1x vanished in line break)\\
- ``in \ |tex/...|'' \qquad yes, bug in \texttt{url}.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{831/832}{general}{HjG}{2004/06/09}{2}
- Replace throughout: |\DeclareDirectory| \> |\DeclareDir|.\\
- Unfortunately, \texttt{docstrip} is not consistent in its command names.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{832}{l. 5}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2}
- Missing \texttt{*}: |\DeclareDir|\u{\texttt{*}}|{tex/bibtex/...|
-
-\erroronpage{832}{code blocks}{DPa}{2004/08/04}{2}
- Three instances of |tex/bibtex| in |\DeclareDir| should lose the |tex/| to
- conform to TDS and change made on page 831
-
-\erroronpage{832}{2. code block}{MSch}{2006/01/06}{s}
- Replace: |text/latex/base| \> |tex/latex/base|
-
-\erroronpage{832}{para 4, l.-2}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2}
- Change: ``\ldots a single |\UseTDS| in\ldots'' \>
- ``a |\UseTDS| and a |\BaseDirectory| declaration in\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{832}{para 5, l. -3}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- The ``\TeX{} Live CD'' is spelled incorrectly as
- ``\TeX{} live'' or ``\TeX live''
-
-\erroronpage{832}{l.-2}{HjG}{2005/05/15}{4}
- Underline, as it is command line input.
-
-\erroronpage{833}{para -1, l.1}{J-CCh}{2005/07/17}{4}
- Spurious extra blank between ``Another potential''.
-
-
-\erroronpage{834}{para 4, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/09}{2}
- Change: ``These command\u{s}''
-
-\erroronpage{834}{para 5, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/09}{2}
- Closing parenthesis should not be in `typewriter font':\\
- ``(after |\begin{document}|\u)''
-
-\erroronpage{834}{para 5}{FMi}{2007/11/13}{}
- Explain that |\cmd| can't be used with conditionals, e.g., those produced
- with |\newif| .
-
-\erroronpage{835}{para 6, l.2}{DHL}{2004/05/16}{2}
-Missing letter: ``the source files into a
-``user'' documentation and a\u{n} ``implementation'' part.''
-
-\erroronpage{835}{para 6, l.5}{DHL}{2004/05/16}{2}
-Missing word: ``as the \textsf{doc} package \u{is} loaded''
-
-\erroronpage{835}{ll.-6/-4}{HjG}{2004/06/09}{2}
- Replace:
- ``\ldots\ \u{and no} configuration file.'' \>
- ``\ldots\ \u{without a} configuration file.''
-
-\erroronpage{837}{exa 14-4-1}{FMi}{2004/06/12}{}
- Editorial comment: example has to be reprocessed whenever this
- chapter is modified to show correct rcs checkin (otherwise input
- and output will not match).
-
-\erroronpage{837}{para 2,l.3}{DAl}{2005/09/03}{4}
- Replace:
- ``running \u{heading}'' \>
- ``running \u{header}''
-
-\erroronpage{838}{code box}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2}
- \texttt{\$Id\$}: first |$| uses wrong font (2 times)
-
-\erroronpage{839}{exa 14-4-2}{FMi}{2004/06/12}{}
- Editorial comment: example has to be reprocessed whenever this chapter is modified to
- show correct rcs checkin (otherwise input and output will not match).
-
-\seriouserroronpage{839}{item 1, l.1 and l.3}{AHo}{2004/09/02}{4}
- Replace: \texttt{nottoday} \> \texttt{notoday}
-
-\seriouserroronpage{839}{item 2, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/09}{2}
- Replace brackets with braces: ``\texttt{%
- \char`\\pagestyle\u\textbraceleft fancy\u\textbraceright}''
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Appendix A}
-
-\erroronpage{842}{para 2, l.5}{PYu/FMi}{2004/07/03}{2}
- Remove: ``\ldots
- \texttt{A}\ldots\texttt{Z})\u{ in case of command names prefixed with a
- backslash}.''
-
-\erroronpage{842}{para 3, marginal}{FMi}{2004/08/01}{2}
- Change: ``Environments and command names'' \> ``Environments''
-
-\erroronpage{842}{para 3}{PYu/FMi}{2004/08/01}{2}
- Remove: ``On
- the other hand, names of environments \u{and counters}
- are different.''
-
-Add: ``In this case the
-\texttt{*} is part of the name \u{and spaces preceding it are not ignored}. Thus, when writing
-\verb*=\begin{figure *}=, the space would become part of the name \u{and
-is not recognized as the start of a \texttt{figure*} environment}.''
-
-
-\erroronpage{843}{para 3, l.2}{YvH}{2004/05/28}{2}
- Missing word: ``and |\z@| contain |@| \u{in} their name''
-
-\erroronpage{843}{para 4, l.3}{PYu}{2004/07/03}{2}
- Change: ``to do: the difficult'' \> ``to do\u; the difficult''
-
-\erroronpage{844}{para 4, l.4}{PYu/FMi}{2004/07/04}{2}
- Replace: ``Thus, the above example could be shortened to'' \>
- ``Thus, the definition in the above example should be
- replaced as follows:''
-
-\erroronpage{846}{para 1, l.2}{ARi}{2004/07/02}{2}
- A period should follow the right parenthesis and ``without''
- should be capitalized.
-
-\iffalse
-% maybe
-\erroronpage{845/846/847}{syntax boxes and text}{FMi}{2004/07/04}{}
- Replace: ``\textit{command definition}'' \>
- ``\textit{command-definition}''
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{847}{para. 5, ll. 2-3}{PYu}{2004/07/04}{2}
- For consistency replace \meta{cmd}with \textit{cmd}
-and \meta{command definition} with \textit{command definition}.
-
-
-\erroronpage{847}{para -2, l.3}{VVo}{2008/09/02}{}
-Replace: ``An error is raised if the definitions differ, ldots''
-\> ``A warning is shown if the definitions differ, \ldots''
-
-
-\erroronpage{851}{para 5, l.-2}{FMi}{2004/07/20}{2}
- Add + change font: ``It also defines \u{the command}
- |\the|\u{\textit{newctr}} to\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{852}{code block 1, l.2}{JGr}{2004/06/10}{2}
- Second \verb=\makeatletter= should be \verb=\makeatother=
-
-\erroronpage{852}{para 3, l.-3}{FMi}{2004/06/23}{2}
- ``\u{For that reason} the next example'' \> ``\u{As a result} the next example''
-
-\erroronpage{852}{para -1, l.3}{FMi}{2004/07/24}{2}
-Move word: ``|\setcounter| or |\addtocounter| \u{command} or when\ldots'' \>
- ``\u{command} |\setcounter| or |\addtocounter| or when\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{852}{para -1, l.-3}{THa/FMi}{2004/06/23}{2}
-Change:
- ``It is \emph{not} suitable to print that number! For that reason a
- set\ldots'' \>
- ``However, the command cannot be used to typeset the value of the
- counter! For that purpose a set\ldots''
-
-
-\erroronpage{853}{l.6}{THa/FMi}{2004/06/23}{2}
- Missing space: ``c,\u{~}\dots, z''
-
-\erroronpage{853}{para 4,ll.2+3}{HjG}{2004/05/25}{2}
- Add word: ``\ldots definitions for sectioning \u{counters}''
-
-\erroronpage{853}{counter code block}{FMi}{2005/06/09}{4}
-The order of declarations of the counters is incorrect; they have to be
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newcounter{part}
-\newcounter{section}
-\newcounter{subsection}[section]
-\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
-\end{verbatim}
-or you will receive a ``counter not defined'' error.
-
-\iffalse
-\erroronpage{853}{general}{THa/FMi}{2004/06/23}{}
- Perhaps ``|\the|\meta{ctr}'' should be written without the meta
- braces to match the form used on p.~852. \\
- Then again, perhaps not.
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{854}{ll. 1+2}{FMi}{2004/05/25}{2}
- Add word and commata: ``Only the representation\u{, prefix,} and
- label field commands
- are defined \ldots''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{854}{code block 1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/25}{2}
-Replace with approx:\\[6pt]
-\hspace*{-140pt}\begin{minipage}[b]{\linewidth}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\renewcommand\theenumi {\arabic{enumi}} \renewcommand\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
-\renewcommand\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} \renewcommand\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}
-\end{verbatim}
-\begin{verbatim}
- \renewcommand\p at enumii{\theenumi}
-\renewcommand\p at enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} \renewcommand\p at enumiv{\p at enumiii\theenumiii}
-\end{verbatim}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newcommand\labelenumi {\theenumi.} \newcommand\labelenumii{(\theenumii)}
-\newcommand\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.} \newcommand\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-\erroronpage{855}{fig A.1, l.4}{JAn}{2005/09/09}{4}
- Change ``Did\^ot'' \> ``Didot'' (no caret); and delete the
-comma after inch
-
-
-\erroronpage{855}{fig A.1}{CBe/FMi}{2004/07/27}{2}
-Add: \texttt{ex} \quad Height of a small ``x'' in the current font \u{(approximately)}
-\\
-Add: \texttt{em} \quad Width
- of capital ``M'' in current font \u{(approximately)}
-
-
-
-\erroronpage{856}{tab A.2, ll.1-3}{YvH}{2004/05/28}{2}
- Correct: ``horizonal'' \> ``horizon\u{t}al'' (three times)
-
-\erroronpage{856}{tab A.2, l.6}{PYu}{2004/07/05}{2}
- Add: ``a \u{solid} horizontal line''
-
-\erroronpage{857}{table A.3}{V-Li}{2004/09/14}{4}
- |\vspace{len}| is missing
-
-\erroronpage{858}{l.-8}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Add: ``\u{missing or} misplaced |\item|''
-
-\erroronpage{858}{syntax box}{PYu}{2004/07/03}{2}
- |\addvspace{|\textit{space}|}| should be typeset in a smaller font.
-
-\erroronpage{859}{para -4, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Typo: ``ar\u{r}ises'' \> ``arises''
-
-\erroronpage{860}{para 1 of \S A.2, l.5}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Replace: ``that behaves similarly to a\ldots''
- \> ``that behaves \u{much like} a\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{861}{l.-2}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2}
- The \(\Longleftrightarrow\) in the margin seems to sport a tiny
- gap in the middle (seems to be a lucida set-up problem).
-
-\erroronpage{866}{para 2 of \S A.2.3, l.5}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2}
- Words need to be swapped: ``height of a \u{box framed} with
- |\fbox| or |\framebox|''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{867}{ll.1/2 after exa A-2-17}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2}
- \(2 \times 5.3\,\mathrm{pt} + 0.4\,\mathrm{pt} = 11\,\mathrm{pt}
- \ne 12\,\mathrm{pt}\) so skip should be $5.8\,\mathrm{pt}$.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{868}{Table A4.}{UFi}{2004/05/22}{2}
- Default value of depth of \verb=\hrule= should be 0.0pt (not 0.4pt).
-
-\seriouserroronpage{871}{para 2, l.2}{UFi}{2004/05/21}{2}
- ``binary operators (, , , )'' should be typeset
- ``binary operators (\texttt{+}, \texttt{-}, \texttt{*}, \texttt{/})''.
-
-
-\erroronpage{875/876}{tab. A.5}{FMi}{2004/07/28}{2}
- Add: ``\TeX{} switches \u{(can only be queried)}'' \\
- Add: ``\LaTeX{} switches \u{(last two can be set)}'' \\ \qquad (these are
- |@afterindent| and |@tempswa|)\\
- Add row:\\
- |@afterindent| \quad \parbox[t]{7cm}{Switch checked by command
- |\@afterheading| (usually used in headings) to
- prevent (if |false|) indentation of next
- paragraph.}
-
- Editorial comment: change moves pagebreak.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{878}{codeline 4 (?)}{UFi}{2004/05/22}{2}
- |\usepackage[german]{varioref}[2001/09/0]:| day number is missing
- (test for version doesn't work then anymore!)
-
-\erroronpage{886}{fig.~A.1}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2}
- Add: \verb=\ProcessOptions= \u{\texttt{\char`\\relax}}
- (cf. hint on p.~882!)
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Appendix B}
-
-\erroronpage{891}{para 1, l.7}{DHL}{2004/05/16}{2}
-Missing letter: ``\verb=l.167 \par=\u{\texttt{t}}\verb={Text}=''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{892}{para 1, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2}
- ``\verb=\romen= (lines 1 and~2)''
- \>
- ``\verb=\romen= (lines 2 and~3)''
-
-\erroronpage{892}{para -1, ll.2--4}{HOb/FMi}{2004/05/22}{2}
- Add: ``Technically, a moving argument is an argument
- that is internally expanded by \LaTeX{} without typesetting it
- directly\u{ (e.g.}, by using the internal \LaTeX{} construct
- |\protected at edef|\textsuperscript{1}\u).''
-
-\erroronpage{893}{para 2, l.8}{MHo/FMi}{2004/10/05}{4}
- Replace:
- ``On the other hand, |\cong| is fragile\ldots''
- \>
- ``On the other hand, |\[...\]| is fragile\ldots''
-
-
-\erroronpage{894}{l.-7}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2}
- Add word: \ldots still open) \u{or} will be swallowed\ldots
-
-\erroronpage{896}{item 1}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Not in alphabetical order: move one item down.
-
-\erroronpage{896}{item 4}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Not in alphabetical order: move four items down.
-
-\erroronpage{896}{item -1}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2}
- Whether or not the image size can be automatically determined
- depends on the graphics driver. Last sentence rewritten as follows:\\
- ``It usually does this automatically, for example, for
-\texttt{.eps} files by reading the bounding box
-information. However, depending on the graphics driver, it may be
-unable to extract this information from binary
-bitmap images such as \texttt{.jpg}, \texttt{.gif}, and \texttt{.png} files.''
-
-\erroronpage{897}{item 5}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Not in alphabetical order: move one item down.
-
-\erroronpage{899}{item 1}{JGr}{2004/06/10}{2}
- The extra \verb=\or= could result from bad use of \verb=\ifthenelse=
-
-\erroronpage{899}{item 5}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- The ``\TeX{} Live CD'' is spelled incorrectly as
- ``\TeX{} live'' or ``\TeX live''
-
-\erroronpage{901}{item 3}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- The ``\TeX{} Live CD'' is spelled incorrectly as
- ``\TeX{} live'' or ``\TeX live''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{902}{l.5}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2}
- Missing letter: ``\texttt{\char`\\dis\u{c}retionary}''
-
-\erroronpage{907}{item 5, l.2}{CKr}{2005/05/30}{4}
- Add missing word: ``\ldots or \texttt{figure}, \u{is} encountered\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{907--909}{item 2}{UFi/FMi}{2004/07/31}{2}
- \TeX{} error message missing: ``\texttt{No room for a new ...}''
-
- The packages loaded in your document require more internal registers
-(|\count|, |\dimen|, \ldots) than there are available in \TeX. Try
-processing your document with e\TeX{} and additionally load the
-\textsf{etex} package.
-
- Editorial comment: affects pagebreaks for 908/909 as well.
-
-
-
-\erroronpage{909}{middle}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2}
- In the sample output, the lines ``\texttt{<*> samplefile.tex}'' and
- ``\texttt{? }'' should be indented by the same amount as the first
- four lines.
-
-\erroronpage{909}{l.-2}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2}
- Missing interword space: ``an\u{ }\verb=\addvspace= command''
-
-%%check (that's me)
-\iffalse
-\erroronpage{911}{item 5}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{}
- ``To the author's knowledge, \ldots''
- \>
- ``To the authors' knowledge, \ldots''
-\fi
-
-\erroronpage{913}{item 1}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2}
- Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8
-
-\erroronpage{913}{item 1}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Not in alphabetical order: move four items down.
-
-\erroronpage{913}{item -3, l.-3/-1}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2}
- Replace word: ``\ldots commands \u{and}, if necessary, masking a line
- break in the source with a \verb=%= sign.''
-
-\erroronpage{914}{l.8}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2}
- Missing interword space: ``\verb=\spacefactor=\u{ }only''
-
-\erroronpage{917}{footnote}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2}
- Replace footnote with: ``In modern distributions \LaTeX{} is automatically
- using the e\TeX{} program. On older installations you may have to
- call a different program (e.g., \texttt{elatex} instead of
- \texttt{latex}) when processing a
- document.''
-
-
-\erroronpage{918}{l.-13}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2}
- Misplaced comma:\\
- ``\ldots\ arguments thereby, using up \ldots''
- \>\\
- ``\ldots\ arguments, thereby using up \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{920}{item 2}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Not in alphabetical order: move one item down.
-
-\erroronpage{921}{item -2}{MBr}{2004/08/03}{2}
- Not in alphabetical order: move item to top.
-
-\erroronpage{923}{item 1}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Not in alphabetical order: move one item down.
-
-\erroronpage{924}{item 2, para 2, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2}
- Typo: ``th\u{r}ough'' \> ``though''
-
-\erroronpage{925}{l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2}
- Missing interword space: ``the command\u{ }\verb=\symbol=''
-
-\erroronpage{925}{item -2, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2}
- Extra word: ``are \u{the} those'' \> ``are those''\\
- Surplus space: `` register~\u~0'' \> ``register~0''
-
-\erroronpage{925}{item -2}{MBr}{2004/08/03}{2}
- Not in alphabetical order: move item one up.
-
-\seriouserroronpage{926}{item 4, title}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- ``\verb=Overfull \hbox (badness= \meta{number}\texttt)'' should be
- ``\verb=Overfull \hbox (=\meta{number}\texttt{pt too wide)}''
-
-\erroronpage{926}{item 5, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Typo: ``built'' \> ``build''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{926}{item 5, title}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- ``\verb=Overfull \vbox (badness= \meta{number}\texttt)'' should be
- ``\verb=Overfull \vbox (=\meta{number}\texttt{pt too wide)}''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{928}{item 6, title}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- ``\verb=Tight \hbox='' should be ``\verb=Tight \vbox=''
-
-\erroronpage{930}{item 1, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Omit paragraph indentation!
-
-\erroronpage{930}{item 4, l.2}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Typo: ``i\u{t}entify'' \> ``identify''
-
-\erroronpage{931}{item 4, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Add: ``\ldots\ package \u{or class} in question.''
-
-\erroronpage{931}{item 4}{JGr}{2004/06/10}{2}
- The warning also happens if you give absolute or relative
- pathnames like \verb=\documentclass{base/article}=
-
-\erroronpage{931}{item 6}{MBr/FMi}{2004/08/03}{2}
- Order here is debatable but a ``,'' may not be good for visual
- sorting, so move this item one up (placeholder are always sorted to
- top so it doesn't pass ``package-or-class''.
-
-\erroronpage{932}{para 4, l.1}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Typo: ``\u{t}which \> ``which''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{935}{ll.3--5}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2}
- The text claims:\\
- ``The output is slightly different: the name \u{and the type} of a
- token are not shown by |\meaning|; instead, only its ``meaning'' is
- presented.''\\
- However, as example B-3-1 depicts, the type \emph{is} shown; hence,
- the sentence should be changed to:\\
- ``The output is slightly different: the name
- of the token \u{is} not shown by
- |\meaning|; instead, only \u{its type and} its ``meaning''
- \u{are} presented.''
-
-\erroronpage{936}{para 1, l.3}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Closing brace should be after ``19'' and not at end of line.
-
-\erroronpage{938}{para -1, l.3}{UFi/FMi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Difficult to understand; replace:
- ``\ldots a large \u{increase in} \texttt{t=} between''
-
-\erroronpage{939}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Words need to be swapped:
- ``\ldots\ \TeX{} indicates \u{this fact} with \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{941}{l.19/20}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2}
- Add: ``so-called demerits \u{(\texttt{d=})}''
-
-\erroronpage{942}{l.22}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2}
- Change: ``several ways to reach \u{\texttt{@@2}};''
- \> ``several ways to reach \u{\texttt{@@6}};''
-
-\erroronpage{943}{para -1 of \S B.3.3, l.-6}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2}
- Typo: ``shinkability'' \> ``shrinkability''
-
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Appendix C}
-
-\erroronpage{general}{several pages}{FMi}{2005/07/01}{4}
- Appendix was partially rewritten to reflect changes in the layout
- of the web sites. More importantly: CTAN changed their ftp
- software and stopped supporting the generation of directory
- archives on the fly. Instead they now offer precompiled
- \texttt{zip} files that can be downloaded.
-
-\erroronpage{947}{ll.-2/-1}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2}
- Missing word: ``it is best \u{to} access''
-
-\erroronpage{947}{para -1, l.5}{FMi}{2004/06/12}{2}
- Bug in \texttt{url.sty} generated extra space.
-
-\erroronpage{948}{para -1, l.5}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Show short name: ``\ldots\ \TeX{} Users Group (\u{TUG}, United States)''
-
-\erroronpage{950}{para 1, l.2}{FMi}{2006/09/12}{s}
- Replace: Figure C.\u{2} \> Figure C.\u{1}
-
-\erroronpage{950}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2}
- Typo: ``a site that i\u{s} not too distant''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{953}{l.11}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2}
- Replace line: ``\verb=>>>>>>> 1.6='' \>
- ``\texttt{200-index graphicx}''
- (probably due to an incomplete merge with CVS)
-
-\erroronpage{954}{para 3, l.1}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4}
- ``\TeX live'' \> ``\TeX{} Live''
-
-\erroronpage{955}{para 2, l.4}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4}
- Remove surplus word:
- ``in \u{the} Thomas Esser's \texttt{tetex} distribution''
-
-\erroronpage{955}{para -2, l.-4}{MHe}{2004/05/22}{2}
- Letters need to be swapped: ``eig\u{ht}eenth''
-
-\erroronpage{956}{cn: entry}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4}
- Replace:
- ``\u{name}: Hong Feng'' \> ``\u{contact}: Hong Feng''
-
-\erroronpage{957}{col. 2, l.15}{TMW}{2004/06/07}{2}
- This should read ``Lietuvos \TeX'o Vartotoj\k{u} Grup\.{e}''.
-
-\erroronpage{958}{col. 1, l.19}{TMW}{2004/06/07}{2}
- An acute accent should be added: ``Toru\'n''
-
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Bibliography}
-
-\erroronpage{963}{[1]}{CKr}{2005/06/20}{4}
- Url changed: \url{https://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/en/font/T1_SPEC.PDF}
- 2017: url no longer valid; maybe \url{https://www-cdf.fnal.gov/offline/PostScript/T1_SPEC.PDF}
-
-\erroronpage{963}{[2]}{CKr}{2005/06/20}{4}
- Url changed: \url{https://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/en/ps/5001.DSC_Spec.pdf}
- 2017: url no longer valid; maybe \url{https://www-cdf.fnal.gov/offline/PostScript/5001.PDF}
-
-\erroronpage{963}{[3]}{CKr}{2005/06/20}{4}
- Url changed:
- \url{https://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/en/ps/5002.EPSF_Spec.pdf}
- 2017: url no longer valid; maybe \url{https://archive.org/details/5002.EPSFSpec}
-
-\erroronpage{964}{[5]}{CKr}{2005/06/20}{4}
- Url changed:
- \url{https://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/en/pdf/PDFReference.pdf}
- 2017: url no longer valid; maybe \url{http://www.adobe.com/content/dam/acom/en/devnet/pdf/pdfs/PDF32000_2008.pdf}
-
-
-\erroronpage{965}{[17], l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2}
- Delete character: ``in a\u{n} multi-language setting''
-
-\erroronpage{966}{[25]}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- First line of online resources is not flush right but centered.
-
-\erroronpage{971}{[74]}{FMi}{2006/09/18}{s}
- Add ``Lars Hellstr\"om'' as author. Change date to December 2004.
- Change comment to ``Documentation for
- the fontinst utility package that supports \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{973}{[88]}{TSS}{2004/05/26}{2}
- The bibliography entry for "The Art of Computer Programming" lacks
- ISBN numbers: 0-201-89683-4, 0-201-03822-6, and 0-201-03803-X.
-
-\erroronpage{973}{[90], l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2}
- Words need to be swapped:
- ``\ldots do not look as \u{beautiful now} as they did in the past.''
-
-\erroronpage{973}{[91]}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- First line of online resources is not flush right but centered.
-
-\erroronpage{975}{[107], [109], [110], [111]}{HjG}{2004/06/21}{2}
- Incomplete URLs:\\
- \texttt{https://www.latex-project.org\u{/news/latex2e-news/}}\\
- \texttt{https://www.latex-project.org\u{/help/documentation/fntguide.pdf}}\\
- \texttt{https://www.latex-project.org\u{/help/documentation/cfgguide.pdf}}\\
- \texttt{https://www.latex-project.org\u{/lppl/}}
-
-\erroronpage{976}{[117]}{FMi}{2005/11/07}{s}
- The title is ``E-\TeX: Guidelines for Future \TeX{} Extensions''.
-
-\erroronpage{977}{[124]}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- First line of online resources is not flush right but centered.
-
-\erroronpage{977}{[124]}{FMi}{2005/07/09}{4}
- Link is missing a period:
- \url{https://www.latex-project.org/publications/tug99}\texttt{\u.pdf}
-
-\erroronpage{978}{[138]}{FMi}{2005/06/25}{4}
- Now has appeared: 24\#1, pp.~105--114, 2004. URL:
- \url{https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb24-1/plaice.pdf}
-
-\erroronpage{979}{[143]}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Missing period: Robert M\u. Ritter
-
-\erroronpage{979}{entry 146, l.3}{RWa}{2004/06/01}{2}
- Missing word: ``for \LaTeX\ \u{and} a possible''
-
-\erroronpage{980}{[151]}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2}
- Remove: ``\LaTeX\u{Joachim Schrod}.''
-
-\erroronpage{980}{[153]}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2}
- Swap words: ``often are'' \> ``are often''
-
-\erroronpage{980}{[155]}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2}
- Missing word: ``For \u{the} \textsf{kuvio} system\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{980}{[157]}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- First line of online resources is not flush right (stray space?).
-
-\erroronpage{981}{[158]-[162]}{RKo}{2005/11/11}{s}
- Unfortunately Th\`anh's name is misspelled (accents in [161/2]). The correct spelling
- is ``H\`an Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}} Th\`anh''.
-
- Furthermore, the surename is H\`an so the entries should have been sorted
- under H (something that can't be corrected easily).
-
-\erroronpage{981}{[161]}{CKr}{2005/07/06}{4}
- Remove surplus name in text: ``User\u{Sebastian Rahtz} manual \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{981}{[162/3], title}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2}
- Change: ``Makeindex'' \> ``makeindex''
-
-\erroronpage{982}{[168]}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- First line of online resources should be:\\
- \texttt{https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/\u{tb11-3/tb29vulis.pdf}}
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Index}
-
-\erroronpage{983--1082}{index}{FMi}{2004/06/11}{}
- I do not list changes to the index that are results of other errata
- entries as they are too difficult to track. Instead I will put an
- updated index on the web at
- \url{https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/tlc2-ap4.pdf} once in a while.
-
-\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/06/08}{2}
- Editorial comment: the whole index has been reprinted.
-
-\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2005/09/08}{4}
- Editorial comment: the whole index has been reprinted.
-
-\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/06/08}{2}
- Add index entries into production notes, e.g., for example setup,
- hanging punctuation, \ldots
-
-\erroronpage{983}{para 1, l.3}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Remove surplus word: ``\ldots one of \u{the} the following''
-
-\seriouserroronpage{983}{para -2}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- The text explains the meaning of bold and blue page numbers,
- but fails to point out the significance of slanted (italic)
- ones---there is none: blue italic indicates normal example blue bold
- indicates example and also important info.
-
-\erroronpage{988,1009}{}{CKr}{2004/10/10}{4}
- Replace: ``alphabetical document headings''
- \> ``alphabetically numbered document headings''
-
-and
-
- ``document headings / alphabetical''
- \>
- ``document headings / alphabetically numbered''
-
-\erroronpage{990}{}{J-CCh}{2005/07/17}{s}
- Correct range: author-date citations / history of (699, 700)
-
-\erroronpage{992}{}{J-CCh}{2005/07/17}{s}
- Correct: ``B\u{\'e}zier''
-
-\erroronpage{993}{}{SEg}{2005/04/26}{4}
- bibliographies/authors/name,formatting shows 798--1092 but should be
- just 798
-
-\erroronpage{1000}{}{J-CCh}{2005/07/17}{s}
- Correct range: Citation systems /
- author-date /
- history of (699, 700)
-
-\erroronpage{1007}{}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2}
- Add page entry for |\DeclareFontSubstitution|
- back to 431 (para~2).
-
-
-\erroronpage{1014}{secound col., l.8}{MSc}{2004/06/04}{2}
- missing index entry for ``eTeX, TeX extension''
-
-\erroronpage{1017}{}{FHa}{2004/10/05}{4}
- The index entry for "floats / placement control" lists pages 286-983
- for information. I think that is a bit too much. It should probably
- end at page 291.
-
-
-\erroronpage{1019}{}{J-CCh}{2005/07/17}{s}
- Correct range: fonts /
- oblique (333)
-
-\erroronpage{1020}{}{CKr}{2005/01/09}{4}
- Replace ``fonts / URW Antigua'' \> ``fonts / URW Anti\u{q}ua''
-
-\erroronpage{1034}{first col.}{FMi}{2004/05/15}{2}
- Add entry: ``lists / enumerated / user-defined, 151''
-
-\erroronpage{1035}{}{THa}{2004/07/02}{2}
- ``\textsf{makeindex}'' \> ``\textsl{MakeIndex}''
-
-\erroronpage{1041}{}{FMi}{2004/08/02}{2}
- ``\texttt{NACRO} \BibTeX{} command'' \>
- ``\texttt{MACRO} \BibTeX{} command''
-
-\erroronpage{1051}{secound col., l.14}{MSc}{2004/06/04}{2}
- missing index entries for ``pdftex'' on p.7 and p.643
-
-\erroronpage{1069}{}{FMi}{2004/11/07}{4}
- Replace: ``text symbols / setting-up'' \>
- ``\u{math} symbols / setting-up''
-
-
-\erroronpage{1076}{}{CKr}{2005/01/09}{4}
- Replace ``URW Antigua'' \> ``URW Anti\u{q}ua''
-
-
-\CHAPTER{People}
-
-\erroronpage{1080}{page}{FMi}{2004/07/26}{4}
- Editorial comment: Needs manual breaking in index output file for
- second and fourth printing.
-
-\erroronpage{1081}{col 1}{FMi}{2004/06/22}{2}
- Missing accents: ``Fernandez, Jose Alberto '' \> `Fern\'andez, Jos\'e Alberto''
-
-\erroronpage{1081}{col 1}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2}
- Change page number in entry:
- ``Fukui, Rei, xxvii, 405, \u{969}'' \> ``\ldots, \u{968}''
-
-\erroronpage{1081}{col 1}{LMa}{2004/05/14}{2}
- The name ``M\o ller Neergaard, Peter'' should be sorted as
- ``Neergaard, Peter M\o ller''.
-
-\erroronpage{1081}{col 2}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2}
- Change page number in entry:
- ``Hufflen, Jean-Michel, 761, \u{971}'' \> ``\ldots, \u{970}''
-
-\erroronpage{1081}{}{HjG}{2004/07/08}{2}
- Add page entries for ``Kettler, Howard'' and ``Frutiger, Adrian''
- to ``People'' index back to 374.
-
-\erroronpage{1082}{}{HjG}{2004/07/08}{2}
- Add page entry for ``Smith, Ralph'' to ``People'' index back to 376.
-
-
-\erroronpage{1082}{col 1, l.19 }{PPn}{2004/05/25}{2}
- Replace ``Panday'' with ``Pandey'' (very sorry for the typo).
-
-\erroronpage{1082}{col 1}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2}
- Replace ``Wing, Wai'' with ``Wong, Wai'' (very sorry for the typo).
-
-\erroronpage{1082}{col 1}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2}
- Change page numbers in entry:
- ``Mittelbach, Frank, \ldots, 976--\u{978, 980}, \ldots''
- \> ``\ldots, 976--\u{979}, \ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{1082}{}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2}
- Add page entry for ``Rahtz, Sebastian''
- back to 981 (bib-item [161]).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Biographies}
-
-\erroronpage{1084}{Goossens image}{THa}{2004/06/23}{2}
- Spurious gray square in upper right corner of framed image of Michel
- Goossens.
-
-\erroronpage{1085}{para 3, l.6}{MSc}{2004/05/19}{2}
- Replace ``TeX'' with ``\TeX''.
-
-
-\CHAPTER{Production Notes}
-
-\erroronpage{1089}{para 4, l.4}{FMi}{2004/07/21}{2}
- Add: ``\ldots this typographical icing \u{(package
- \textsf{pdfcprot})} was\ldots''
-
-\erroronpage{1089}{l.-5}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2}
- Missing period: \ldots files\u. It \ldots
-
-\erroronpage{1090}{para -3, l.-4}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2}
- Change/add: ``paragraphs ending \u{with a} single word \u{line}''
-
-\erroronpage{1091}{top}{WAd}{2004/05/08}{2}
- The series title in the box does not use a real caps and small caps
- font but a faked one (compare with the front cover where
- the font \emph{Christiana} designed by Gudrun Zapf-von Hesse is used).
-
-\end{erratalist}
-
-
-\setcounter{collectmore}{3}
-
-\begin{multicols}{3}[Thanks to all who have found errors or
- omissions. Listed are the people who found an errata entry first.]
-\contributor{AFV}{Alfonso Fernandez-Vazquez}
-\contributor{AHo}{Antti Honkela}
-\contributor{AMa}{Arni Magnusson}
-\contributor{ARi}{Alan Ristow}
-\contributor{BMo}{Brooks Moses}
-\contributor{BeB}{Bernd Burghardt}
-\contributor{CAR}{Chris A. Rowley}
-\contributor{CBC}{Charles B. Cameron}
-\contributor{CBa}{Cristian Battaglia}
-\contributor{CBe}{Claudio Beccari}
-\contributor{CKr}{Claudia Krysztofiak}
-\contributor{DAl}{Daniel Alonso i Alemany}
-\contributor{DAr}{Donald Arseneau}
-\contributor{DCa}{David Carlisle}
-\contributor{DHL}{Dan Luecking}
-\contributor{DIs}{Daniel Isaacson}
-\contributor{DSch}{Dirk Schlimm}
-\contributor{ERy}{Elizabeth Ryan}
-\contributor{FHa}{Ferdy Hanssen}
-\contributor{FMi}{Frank Mittelbach}
-\contributor{GBa}{Gerhard Bachmaier}
-\contributor{HOb}{Heiko Oberdiek}
-\contributor{HPB}{Harold P. Boas}
-\contributor{HVo}{Herbert Voss}
-\contributor{HjG}{Hubert G\"a\ss lein}
-\contributor{J-CCh}{Jean-C\^ome Charpentier}
-\contributor{JAn}{Jacques Andr\'e}
-\contributor{JBez}{Javier Bezos}
-\contributor{JBe}{Jens Berger}
-\contributor{JBr}{Johannes Braams}
-\contributor{JCh}{Joel Chan}
-\contributor{JGr}{Jose Grimm}
-\contributor{JJN}{Jarmo Niemel\"a}
-\contributor{JLV}{Juan Luis Varona}
-\contributor{JMH}{Jean-Michel Hufflen}
-\contributor{JS}{Joachim Schrod}
-\contributor{JTa}{Juhani Takkinen}
-\contributor{LHe}{Lars Hellstr\"om}
-\contributor{LMa}{Lars Madsen}
-\contributor{LSchu}{Lothar Schumacher}
-\contributor{MBr}{Marion Braams}
-\contributor{MGo}{Michel Goossens}
-\contributor{MHCL}{Martin Hiu Chung Law}
-\contributor{MHe}{Martin Hensel}
-\contributor{MHo}{Morten H\o gholm}
-\contributor{MKo}{Markus Kohm}
-\contributor{MKu}{Markus Kuhn}
-\contributor{MLa}{Mark Laplante}
-\contributor{MLi}{Martin Liebmann}
-\contributor{MSc}{Martin Schr\"oder}
-\contributor{MSch}{Michael Schutte}
-\contributor{NBe}{Nelson Beebe}
-\contributor{PPN}{P.P. Narayanaswami}
-\contributor{PYu}{Peng Yu}
-\contributor{RKo}{Reinhard Kotucha}
-\contributor{RPa}{Reimo Palm}
-\contributor{RSt}{Ralf Stubner}
-\contributor{RWa}{Richard Walker}
-\contributor{ReSt}{Rebecca Stiels}
-\contributor{SCo}{Steven Douglas Cochran}
-\contributor{SEg}{Stephen Eglen}
-\contributor{SPe}{Sa\v sa Petrovi\' c}
-\contributor{THa}{Thorsten Hansen}
-\contributor{TMW}{Thomas Widmann}
-\contributor{TMi}{Tom Micevski}
-\contributor{TSS}{Tommi Syrj\"anen}
-\contributor{UFi}{Ulrike Fischer}
-\contributor{UZi}{Uwe Ziegenhagen}
-\contributor{V-Li}{Christian Faulhammer}
-\contributor{VPe}{Vivi Petersen}
-\contributor{VVo}{Vladimir Volovich}
-\contributor{WAd}{William Adams}
-\contributor{WaS}{Walter Schmidt}
-\contributor{YiL}{Yiannis Lazarides}
-\contributor{YvH}{Yvon Henel}
-\contributor{hajk}{Henk Koster}
-\contributor{usw}{Ulrich Dirr}
-\end{multicols}
-
-
-Other people have sent us corrections for errors already found.
-Thanks to all of you!
-
-If you find further errors please report them to one of the authors, e.g.,
-\begin{quote}\ttfamily
- frank.mittelbach at latex-project.org
-\end{quote}
-preferably in a form usable directly in this file, i.e.,
-\begin{flushleft}
-|\erroronpage{|\textit{page-number}|}{|\textit{line-identification}|}{|%
- \textit{your-initials}|}{|\textit{date}|}{}| \\
- \hspace*{2em}\textit{description of the the erratum}
-\end{flushleft}
-Here is an example:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\erroronpage{5}{para 3, l.1}{MOs}{1997/06/01}{}
- ``LaTeX'' should be typeset ``\LaTeX''.
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\end{document}
-
-
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tlc2.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tulm.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/usrguide.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/usrguide.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/usrguide.tex 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/usrguide.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
-% Copyright 1993-2019
+% Copyright (C) 1993-2019
% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
% in this file.
%
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
% The latest version of this license is in
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+% version 2008 or later.
%
% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/utf8ienc.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/webcomp.err
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/webcomp.err 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/webcomp.err 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,381 +0,0 @@
-\newcommand\erratafiledate{1999/06/05}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through
-% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and
-% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify
-% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata
-% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the
-% .cfg file.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-
-\begin{filecontents}{ttcterrata.cls}
-%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1997,2004,2005,2007 Frank Mittelbach
-%% This class file is licenced under LPPL latest version;
-%% see https://www.latex-project.org/lppl
-%
-%
-% It sets up a few commands used to format the errata entries for books in the
-% Addison-Wesley Series:
-%
-% Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting
-%
-% hence the name. However, anybody who likes to use it is free to apply it for
-% errata files of other books.
-%
-% Changes:
-%
-% v1.0a - changed name from errata.cls to ttcterrata.cls
-
-\ProvidesClass{ttcterrata}
- [2007/11/10 v1.0a Mini class for errata files; subject to change (FMi)]
-
-\LoadClass{article}
-
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1}
-\addtolength\textwidth{5cm}
-\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm}
-
-\addtolength\textheight{36pt}
-
-\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
-\MakeShortVerb{\|}
-
-\RequirePackage{array,longtable}
-\RequirePackage{multicol}
-
-
-\newcommand\erratagetnumber{}
-\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3}
-
-
-\newcommand\gobbleerrata{%
- \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
- \let\endgobble\egroup
- \let\hideamp\relax
- \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par}
-
-\newcommand*\hideamp{&}
-
-\let\endgobble\relax
-
-
-\newcommand\erratastartdate{}
-\newcommand\myprinting{1}
-
-
-\newcommand\doweprint[2]{%
- \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else \ifx s#2 1000\else#2 \fi\fi
- \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber <
- \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax
- \@tempswatrue
- \else
- \@tempswafalse
- \fi
- \else
- \@tempswafalse
- \fi
-}
-
-
-
-\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate}
-\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and}
-
-\newcommand\showallerrors{%
- \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}%
- \renewcommand\printedentries{up to}
- \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}}
-
-
-\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{%
- \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi}
-
-\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{%
- \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}}
-
-\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg}
- {
- \input{\jobname.cfg}
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found }
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- \AtEndDocument{
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing}
- \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision}
- \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date}
- \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* Current settings are:}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting}
- \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries}
- \typeout{*}
- \typeout{***************************************************}
- }}
- {}
-
-%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision>
-
-\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{%
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\newcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{%
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble
- &\\[4pt]%
- \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\}
-
-\newenvironment{erratalist}
- {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}}
- {\endgobble\end{longtable}}
-
-\newcommand\erratatitle[2]
- {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries
- Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt]
- \small Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2\\
- (For other periods/print runs reprocess this document
- with different config settings)
- \end{center}%
- \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}%
- \thispagestyle{plain}%
- \vspace{20pt}}
-
-\pagestyle{myheadings}
-
-\AtBeginDocument{\small}
-
-\setlength\parindent{0pt}
-\setlength\parskip{2pt}
-
-\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par}
-
-% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands:
-
-\let\u\underline
-\renewcommand\>{$\to$}
-
-%%% some code suggested by Thorsten Hansen to count the number of
-%%% contributions by individuals (will work only if we do not get
-%%% too many :-)
-
-\def\count at contributors#1/#2/#3\@nil{
- \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}}{}\stepcounter{#1}%
-%%% also count secondary:
-%%% \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}\stepcounter{#2}%
-}
-
-\renewcommand\erroronpage[5]{%
- \count at contributors#3/secondary/\@nil
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\renewcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{%
- \count at contributors#3/secondary/\@nil
- \endgobble
- \doweprint{#4}{#5}%
- \if at tempswa
- \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \else
- \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}%
- \expandafter\gobbleerrata
- \fi
- \hideamp \\%
- \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill
- \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5}
- \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp
-}
-
-\renewcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{%
- \sffamily#1} #2\@ifundefined{c@#1}{}{ (\arabic{#1})}\par}
-
-\end{filecontents}
-
-
-\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg}
-%
-%
-% Configuration file for the errata listing of
-%
-% The LaTeX Web Companion
-%
-%
-% \erratastartdate
-%
-% Specifies the date from which on
-% errata entries should be listed.
-%
-% The format is YYYY/MM/DD.
-%
-% The default below ensures that all
-% entries are typeset.
-%
-\renewcommand\erratastartdate{1999/05/01}
-
-%
-% \myprinting
-%
-% Specifies which (revised) printing you
-% own. For example, if you have the second
-% printing set this to 2 so that errors
-% already corrected in that printing will not
-% appear in your errata listing.
-%
-% The default below ensures that all
-% entries are typeset.
-%
-\renewcommand\myprinting{1}
-%
-%
-% \norevisionnumbers
-%
-% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same
-% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed
-% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in
-% italic and add the revision number as a superscript.
-%
-%
-% \showallerrors
-%
-% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are
-% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and
-% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by
-% default.
-%
-%
-\endinput
-\end{filecontents}
-
-
-
-\documentclass{ttcterrata}
-
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\erratatitle{The \LaTeX{} Web Companion}{\erratafiledate}
-
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- at book(A-W:GR99,
- author = {Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz},
- title = {The {\LaTeX} Web Companion},
- substitle = {Integrating {\TeX}, HTML, and XML},
- series = "Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting",
- publisher = {Addison-Wesley},
- address = {Reading, Massachusetts},
- year = 1999,
- ISBN = "0-201-43311-7",
- LCCN = "QA76.76.H94G66 1999",
- pagenums = {xxii + 522},
- source-infos = {yes},
- bibliography = {yes},
- index = {yes},
- price = "US\$39.95",
- note = "With Eitan M. Gurari and Ross Moore and Robert S.
- Sutor.",
-)
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{5cm}}
-\item[]
-The latest version of this file (\texttt{\jobname.err}) can be found
-as part of the \LaTeX{} distribution.
-
-The first column in the table shows the page number of the errata
-entry. Superscript numbers in the first column refer to the printed
-revision in which this entry was corrected. The second column gives
-the precise location, negative line numbers are counted from the
-bottom of the page. The third column shows the first finder of the
-problem.
-
-\end{list}
-
-
-\begin{erratalist}
-
-%=======================================================================
-\CHAPTER{Chapter 6}
-
-\erroronpage{247}{3 para l.5}{MGo}{1999/06/05}{}
- GenCod \> GenCode
-
-\CHAPTER{Appendix B}
-
-\erroronpage{418}{3 para}{MGo}{1999/06/05}{}
- The \texttt{book} element types (lines 10--\u{15})
-
-\end{erratalist}
-
-
-
-%==========================================================================
-
-\bigskip
-
-
-\begin{multicols}{3}[Thanks to all who have found errors or
- omissions. Listed are the people who found an errata entry first.]
-\contributor{MGo}{Michel Goossens}
-\end{multicols}
-
-
-If you find further errors please report them to one of the authors
-\begin{quote}\ttfamily
- sebastian.rahtz at oucs.ox.ac.uk\\
- goossens at cern.ch
-\end{quote}
-preferable in a form usable for this file, i.e.,
-\begin{flushleft}
-|\erroronpage{|\textit{page-number}|}{|\textit{line-identification}|}{|%
- \textit{your-initials}|}{|\textit{date}|}{}| \\
- \hspace*{2em}\textit{description of the the errata}
-\end{flushleft}
-Here is an example:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\erroronpage{4}{l.-7}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{}
- surprisingly \> surprising
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-\end{document}
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/webcomp.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/README.md
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/README.md 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/README.md 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
The LaTeX `graphics` bundle
===========================
-Release 2019-10-01 pre-release 2
+Release 2019-10-01 pre-release 3
Overview
--------
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/color.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/drivers.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/epsfig.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/graphics.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/graphicx.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/grfguide.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/grfguide.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/grfguide.tex 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/grfguide.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
%% grfguide.tex Copyright (C) 1994 1995 1996 1998 1999 David Carlisle
-%% Copyright (C) 2005 2014 2016 2017 David Carlisle, LaTeX3 Project
+%% Copyright (C) 2005-2019 David Carlisle, LaTeX3 Project
%%
%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Graphics Bundle'.
%% It may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/keyval.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/lscape.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/rotating.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/rotex.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/trig.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/README.md
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/README.md (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/README.md 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+The LaTeX `tools` bundle
+========================
+
+Release 2019-10-01 pre-release 3
+
+Overview
+--------
+
+This bundle consists of packages providing a range of basic tools for
+LaTeX users. It is a required part of a LaTeX installation.
+
+Installation
+------------
+
+We no longer distribute installation instructions for the various TeX
+implementations. All modern TeX systems include `tools` as-standard, and end
+users should in general use the release versions supplied in this way.
+
+Release distribution is carried out only through the CTAN archives.
+
+Reporting Bugs
+--------------
+
+If you wish to report a problem or bug in the `tools` bundle
+please use the [Issue Tracker for LaTeX2e on
+GitHub](https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/issues)
+and follow the guidelines that pop up if you press the "New issue" button.
+
+In particular, to check that you are really seeing a bug, please write
+a short, self-contained document that shows the problem. This should
+include the `latexbug` package, which will warn if your test file is
+not suitable for one or the other reason. See the [CONTRIBUTING
+guide](https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/blob/master/CONTRIBUTING.md)
+for further details, or if you need to obtain the `latexbug` package.
+
+If the bug turns out to be with third-party software then please
+contact the developer, and not us!
+
+License
+-------
+
+The contents of this bundle are distributed under the [LaTeX Project
+Public License](https://www.latex-project.org/lppl/lppl-1-3c/),
+version 1.3c or later.
+
+Copyright
+---------
+
+Copyright is maintained on each of these packages by the author(s)
+of the package.
+
+-----
+
+<p>Copyright (C) 1993-2019 The LaTeX Project <br />
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/README.md
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/afterpage.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/afterpage.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/afterpage.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/afterpage.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/afterpage.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/array.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/array.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/array.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/array.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/array.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/bm.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/bm.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/bm.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/bm.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/bm.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/calc.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/calc.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/calc.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/calc.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/calc.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/changes.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/changes.txt (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/changes.txt 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,1671 @@
+=======================================================================
+This file lists changes to the LaTeX2e files in reverse chronological order.
+It is provided for convenience only. It therefore makes no claims to
+completeness or accuracy and it contains some references to files that
+are not part of the distribution.
+=======================================================================
+
+
+2019-09-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx (subsection{Options}:
+ Option arabic added
+
+2019-08-31 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx: Add a necessary \expandafter so that redefinitions
+ of primitive specifiers give a warning (github/148)
+
+2019-08-25 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: \labelformat and \Ref now available in the kernel
+ so removed from this package but only if running on new kernel
+
+ (subsection{Options}):
+ Provide options space and nospace
+
+ (subsection{Defining the main macros}):
+ Don't drop a preceding space completely but reinsert it later
+ after setting a label;
+ Command \vp at gerefstar, \vref at star and \Vref at star added to support
+ hyperref better
+
+ (subsubsection{Supporting ranges}):
+ Added \vpagerefcompare, \vpagrefnearby and \vpagerefcomparenearby
+
+2019-03-01 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx (subsection{The output routines}):
+ Provide minrows counter for balancing.
+
+2019-02-06 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: Document the extra color groups
+
+#########################
+# 2019-01-05 Release
+#########################
+
+2019-01-05 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle at latex-project.org>
+
+ * xr.dtx: Fix to last update to avoid breaking \include handling.
+ (gh/106)
+
+2018-12-30 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx (section{The macros \texttt{\textbackslash @classz}):
+ Add extra \hskip1sp to guard against an \unskip at the start of
+ a c-column cell (gh/102)
+
+2018-12-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx (subsection{The output routines}):
+ Removed dead code, the case where this can go wrong is too
+ obscure to worry about it (gh/101)
+
+#########################
+# 2018-12-01 Release
+#########################
+
+2018-11-13 <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx: Do not expand argument of \@startpbox
+ while building the tabular preamble (sx/459285)
+
+2018-11-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx:
+ Support star with \docolaction (test first then execute)
+
+2018-10-13 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * trace.dtx (section{Implementation}):
+ Only reset \tracingoutput if not set by \showoutput earlier
+
+2018-10-01 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle at latex-project.org>
+
+ * xr.dtx: Update to handle \if tests in the aux file.
+ https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/452321
+
+2018-09-13 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx (section{The macros \@classz):
+ Add group to prevent color leak (github/72)
+
+#########################
+# 2018-04-01 PL 5 Release
+#########################
+
+2018-06-26 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx (subsection{Not balancing the columns}):
+ Re-add end penalty for multicols* environment to guard
+ against leftovers (git/53)
+
+2018-04-30 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx Explicitly place the row strut inside \\ before
+ hitting \cr in case the last cell is a multicolumn cell
+ (issue 42)
+
+2018-04-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: restoring column status when leaving a boxed
+ multicols so that any further \docolaction will know the
+ currect column (issue/39)
+
+2018-04-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx: Renamed internal \mcell at box to
+ \ar at mcellbox and \align at mcell to \ar at align@mcell
+ to avoid conflict with makecell package
+
+2018-01-28 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: use a single output routine that does both
+ balancing and cutting rather than changing them
+
+2017-11-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx: fixed bug reported on stack exchange SX68732 about
+ bad vertical placement with last column being an m-column
+
+ * array.dtx: fixed bug with m-cells when \extrarowheight is used
+
+ * array.dtx: added w and W column types to support lcr columns with
+ fixed width
+ (see TUB paper in 38/2: https://www.latex-project.org/publications )
+
+2017-09-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tabularx.dtx: set \linewidth as well as \hsize in the column
+ widths documentation.
+
+2017-04-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Make \clearpage behave like \newpage (pr/4511)
+
+2017-01-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * bm.dtx: further fixes to luatex code branch for
+ https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/349001
+
+2016-10-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx: Fixed a 25 year old bug that surfaced for the first time.
+ \@halignto needs to be managed locally (pr/4488)
+
+2016-07-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * bm.dtx: additional tests to cope with luatex's new treatment of
+ \mathchar.
+
+2016-07-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tabularx.dtx: show [tcb] optional argument in tabularx
+ syntax description.
+
+2016-06-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * shellesc.dtx: typos in messages, and
+ improve use with plain etex or luatex
+
+2016-04-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * shellesc.dtx: in classic tex code accidentally defined
+ \ShellEscape twice instead of defining \DelayedShellEscape
+ (Ulrike Fischer)
+
+2016-04-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Reset \boxmaxdepth back to \maxdimen when outputting
+ pages (issue SX302532).
+
+2016-02-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * bm.dtx: add initial support for \Umathchardef defined tokens.
+
+2016-02-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Delay generating a "may loop" warning or error
+ until we know that we aren't using \reftextfaraway
+ -- thanks to Morten Hoegholm for the fix
+
+2016-02-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: revamped some of the documentation to better
+ explain how varioref could be used in a multi-lingual context
+
+2016-02-08 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Ensure we are back in vmode before using
+ \prevdepth (pr/4448)
+ \col at number already initialized in the kernel, so not initializing
+ it in the package in case the document is in two-column (pr/4435)
+
+2016-02-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tabularx.dtx: support end code of {foo\endtabulax bar} again
+ (Reported by Ulrike Fischer)
+
+2016-02-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * shellesc.dtx: Documentation typos (via Johannes_B at tex.sx)
+
+2016-01-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * shellesc.dtx: Added new package
+
+2015-09-22 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Fixed blunder from 2005 - galician option
+ clearly never used
+
+2015-08-19 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Reset \@textfloatsheight after page finishes (sx261884)
+
+2015-04-02 Joseph Wright <joseph.wright at morningstar2.co.uk>
+ * TDS-style zip improvements
+
+2015-04-02 Joseph Wright <latex-team at latex-project.org>
+ * Update CTAN link in README
+
+2015-03-31 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Another rewrite of \remove at discardable@items to
+ capture the case of \vspace (remove) and \vspace* (keep) correctly
+
+2015-03-25 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: additional tracing info if forced breaks result in
+ overflow of column heights
+
+2015-03-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Detect when columns get too large during balancing
+ because the user requested more forced breaks than available
+ columns.
+
+ Fixed the logic for removing excess white space at column bottoms
+ (this is a source of trouble for sure)
+
+2015-03-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: - Use only `0.0001fil' for stretching in \vfilmaxdepth
+ - Set \boxmaxdepth in multi at column@out to avoid material getting too
+ far down
+ - Redesign the implementation of \end{multicols*}
+
+2014-11-07 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * Rename 00readme.txt to README (named README.txt in the development
+ repository)
+
+2014-10-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: In \end{multicols*} only add vertical space if not
+ doing already doing \raggedcolumns and add \null to hide the final
+ fill if added so that it doesn't get removed again.
+
+2014-10-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+ * afterpage.dtx, array.dtx, bm.dtx, calc.dtx, dcolumn.dtx,
+ delarray.dtx, enumerate.dtx, ftnright.dtx, hhline.dtx, layout.dtx,
+ longtable.dtx, multicol.dtx, showkeys.dtx, tabularx.dtx,
+ theorem.dtx, trace.dtx, varioref.dtx, verbatim.dtx, xspace.dtx
+
+ Fixed typos found by Karl Berry in documentation (no version number change)
+
+2014-09-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: change ragged columns to not just fill the
+ column but also back up by \maxdepth if they otherwise become
+ overfull as adding glue at the bottom means the column will
+ never have any depth and before they had. (pr/4395)
+
+ \maxdepth is applied to all column boxes. That was initially not
+ necessary as \splitmaxdepth was doing the trick. However, the
+ moment those boxes get reboxed this information is lost and
+ resulted in some subtle errors. (pr/4395)
+
+ Suppress even really bad overfull warnings while looping
+
+2014-08-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: set \prevdepth to 0pt (in the right place)
+ after adding the multicol material. Was not happening in boxed mode.
+ Test for excessive depth of columns using > not = (which nearly
+ ever will be correct)
+
+2014-07-03 <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: correct Romanian default text as suggested
+
+2014-06-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: color-leak fix introduced a spacing problem in
+ boxed mode as the added color commands were hiding any space
+ at the bottom of the box material (which thus didn't get
+ discarded)
+
+2014-05-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * readme.txt: rename to 00readme.txt.
+
+2014-05-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tabularx.dtx: If \endtabularx not found, act as if it was at the start of
+ the end code.
+
+2014-04-24 David Carlisle <david.carlisle at latex-project.org>
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: modify \cite redefinition so {} in the optional argument
+ works (tools/4162)
+
+2014-04-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Support \docolaction
+
+2014-04-22 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx:
+ Bug fix: color leak (https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/138783)
+ Bug fix: space at column bottom (https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/121692)
+ Bug fix: Reset \@mparbottom after page finishes
+
+2014-04-22 David Carlisle <david.carlisle at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tabularx.dtx: allow code before \endtabularx (pr/3722)
+
+2012-02-06 David Carlisle <david.carlisle at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tabularx.dtx: Avoid exceeding maxdimen
+ https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/29194/how-to-typeset-tabularx-with-34-columns-error-message
+
+2011-12-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: RL language support fixed
+ Support for \enlargethispage
+ Balancing concept improved
+ Bug fix: Only re-add output penalty if it was
+ explicit in the source.
+
+2011/11/24 David Carlisle <david.carlisle at latex-project.org>
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: revert change made at v3.14 because of tools/4173
+
+2011-10-02 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Previous fix need one more expansion
+% (pr/4159,pr/4171)
+
+2010-11-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Avoid even \protected at edef in \vref at pagenum
+ to pacify french babel (pr/4093)
+
+2010-10-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: right-to-left language support added
+
+2010-08-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: typo corrections only -- thanks to Laurent Lyaudet
+
+2010-08-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Correct spacing -- same mistake as in \vref (pr/4123)
+ Defaults for esperanto added
+
+2010-04-06 Will Robertson <will.robertson at latex-project.org>
+
+ * xspace.dtx: Improve edge case for xspace (tools/3895)
+
+2010-02-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * ftnright.dtx: Check for split footnotes (pr/4099)
+
+2009-09-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Use \protected at edef to avoid problems
+ in complicated setups, e.g., microtype (pr/4080)
+
+2009-06-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Incorrect text in \reftextafter (pr/4070)
+
+2008-04-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: clarified customization with Babel in use.
+
+2007-09-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Added defaults for islandic
+
+2007-05-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: fixed missspellings of \extrasbazil and \extrasportuges
+
+2006-09-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Make the color of the rule between columns (if
+ any) a hook called \columnseprulecolor. Defaults to \normalcolor
+
+2006-05-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: support for bulgarian added.
+
+2006-05-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: support for croatian added.
+
+2006-05-08 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * xspace.dtx: Bug fix for verbatim in output routine.
+
+2006-02-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Added \@minipagefalse to \end at dblfloat. Otherwise
+ that switch may end up being true after a figure* has ended,
+ messing up spacing afterwards randomly.
+
+2006-02-12 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * xspace.dtx: Modified so the \@let at token can be \outer. Avoid
+ re-doing eTeX setup step multiple times for the original call of
+ \xspace.
+
+2006-01-09 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: Make \tag* and starred AMS environments work
+ (pr/3693). Fix varioref support so \vref* also works
+ (pr/3373). Added \showkeyslabelformat to avoid hard-wiring the
+ label format.
+
+2005-12-02 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Bahasa Malaysia defaults added.
+
+2005-11-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Single hyphen rather than -- in range for spanish
+ and galician.
+
+2005-11-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Added a few more brazil strings
+ Added a few more finnish strings
+ Added further galician defaults (and corrected spelling)
+ Corrections in italian strings
+
+2005-10-04 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * xspace.dtx: Improved expansion method. Added use of higher level
+ functions for conditional processing. Simplified the code so that
+ difference between eTeX and non-eTeX is minimal.
+
+2005-09-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: corrected typo in documentation
+
+2005-09-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: corrected one default for polish
+
+2005-08-23 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx: Removed spurious space.
+
+2005-08-06 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * calc.dtx: Improved expansion of arguments, added new
+ commands \maxof, \minof, \totalheightof and
+ \settototalheight.
+
+2005-07-26 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * xspace.dtx: Improve test by exiting if \@let at token is a
+ letter. Add \xspaceremoveexception.
+
+2005-07-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: small change in italian.
+ small fix in german and ngerman (pr/3793)
+
+2005-06-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: fixed bug in Dutch localization (pr/3791)
+ added localization for romanian (pr/3790)
+
+2005-05-07 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * xspace.dtx: Improve handling of active characters.
+
+2005-04-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Ukranian defaults added (by Mykola Lyakhovych)
+
+2005-04-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Basque defaults added (by I\~naki Larra\~naga
+ Murgoitio)
+
+2004-12-07 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * xspace.dtx: Make extensible (tools/3712), fix active
+ characters (tools/3747) and update documentation.
+
+2004-10-30 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Added missing defaults for italian (by Lapo Mori)
+
+2004-07-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: fixing errors that happen only if multicol is
+ compiled with a special combination of docstrip modules.
+
+2004-05-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Use \@nil for testing in \is at pos@num
+
+2004-02-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: fixed a bug in magyar option
+
+2004-02-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Avoid self-referencing definition of
+ \@footnotetext (pr/3618)
+
+2003-12-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * fileerr.dtx: attempt to set exit code when reading x.tex (pr/3538)
+
+2003-12-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx: add \arraybackslash
+
+2003-10-05 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * bm.dtx: AMS version of \sqrt not working
+
+2003-09-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * bm.dtx: Forgotten to check for \hskip (pr/3572)
+
+2003-08-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * verbatim.dtx: Added \@noligs again, as I can be sure that
+ it is defined in the LaTeX kernel, so that other packages
+ can rely on \@noligs always being used.
+
+2003-04-30 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * trace.dtx: added option full to trace everything; set a few more
+ switches back to no-tracing on exit; make \tracingall trace full
+ even when full is not specified
+
+2003-04-17 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Catch problem with \columnbreak
+ in last line (found by Ulrike Fischer)
+
+2003-04-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Collect one additional line per column to account
+ for vanishing space at column breaks
+
+2003-03-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx (subsection{Options}):
+ Afrikaans option contributed by Danie Els <dnjels at sun.ac.za>.
+
+2003-03-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: changed the tracing output a bit
+
+2003-03-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx:
+ Further corrections to the micro-spacing around the boxes produced
+ by multicols, so that grid typesetting (given right values for
+ other parameters) becomes a possibility.
+ Also added option "grid" which currently does nothing except
+ producing a warning if the grid might got lost.
+
+2003-02-17 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx:
+ Add a kern to cancel potential depth of previous line at the
+ beginning of a multicols and also suppsed \lineskip
+
+ \multicolovershoot set back to 0pt as a default 2pt was simply
+ wrong in some applications (pr/3465)
+
+2003-01-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: changed error message when possible loop was
+ detected.
+
+ * somedefs.dtx: added version number to \ProvidesPackage line
+ (pr/3490)
+
+ * varioref.dtx: typo added a blank line into one macro
+
+2003-01-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Use \vref at label instead of \label to avoid
+ problems with amsmath. (pr/3489)
+
+2002-11-22 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * bm.dtx: Get math alphabets right (pr/3476)
+
+2002-11-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Changed default for \reftextbefore for options
+ english and american.
+ This is an incompatible change, but the original was bad English!
+ Changed default for \reftext...range for dutch as well.
+
+2002-06-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * fileerr.dtx: added space after ! better to match TeX's error
+ style (pr/3414)
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Use \vpageref inside \ref not \@vpageref
+ to get spacing correct (pr/3403)
+
+2002-06-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: added \labelformat to support references that
+ automatically add "text" around the referenced number.
+
+ added \Ref and \Vref to generated references at the beinning of a
+ sentence (might be needed if \reformat is used)
+
+ added \vpagerefnum to support referencing the "number" within
+ commands like \refpageafter, e.g.
+
+ \renewcommand\reftextfaceafter {on page~\thevpagerefnum}
+
+ texts for "slovak" and "slovene" options added
+
+2001-09-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: correct typo in name \vref -> \vr at f
+
+2001-07-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * trace.dtx: use ltxdoc not ltugboat class for docu
+
+2001-05-28 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * dcolumn.dtx:
+
+ Documentation of centring improved (pr/3315)
+
+2001-04-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: changed my mind and also added \vpagerefrange*
+
+ * trace.dtx: added package to tools distribution
+
+2001-04-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx (subsection{Defining the main macros}): Added
+ \vref* and \vpageref* which do not add a space in front of the
+ generated text (ever) so that they can be used in situations like
+ (\vref{foo} ...) without added a space after the open parenthesis.
+
+2001-01-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Updated nynorsk defaults
+
+2000-12-30 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Updated Danish defaults
+
+2000-10-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx:
+
+ Added a \noexpand (as in array.sty) for mathtext.sty
+
+2000-09-25 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * layout.dtx: Added the option italian as suggested by Claudio
+ Beccari, back in august 1998...
+
+2000-09-21 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * layout.dtx: Added the option german as proposed by Karsten
+ Tinnefeld <karsten at tinnefeld.com> in PR 3259
+
+2000-08-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Updated defaults for catalan
+
+2000-08-21 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * verbatim.dtx:
+
+2000-07-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: fixed color problem with rules between columns
+ (their color did depend on the color of the text at the break)
+
+2000-07-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Don't output space if optional argument
+ to \vpageref is empty (pr/3230)
+
+2000-06-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx (subsection{The output routines}): when
+ doing boxed mode do not restrict height of columns to \@colroom
+ (pr/3212)
+
+2000-05-05 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx (subsection{Starting and ): Detect and fix
+ problem if a multicols ends at the top of a page
+
+2000-04-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: added defaults for Czech
+
+2000-04-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * ftnright.dtx: Don't use math mode for footnote symbol
+ (pr/3172)
+
+2000-01-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: added naustrian and ngerman options
+
+2000-01-07 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * verbatim.dtx: Disable hyphenation even if the font allows it.
+
+1999-12-14 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+1999-12-02 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: even more portugese defaults
+
+1999-11-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: added portuguese defaults
+
+1999-10-21 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: allow multi-paragraph footnotes again. This functionality
+ was lost when the footnotes got reimplemented some time ago. (Problem
+ reported by Niels Ferguson)
+
+1999-09-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * DEFAULT.hea: updated for LPPL 1.2
+
+ * DEFAULT.pre: updated for LPPL 1.2
+
+1999-07-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx:
+ Added some additional tracing code.
+ When balancing check that last column doesn't contain a forced
+ page break; if it does reject the solution.
+
+1999-07-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * updated headers to reflect LPPL 1.1
+
+1999-06-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: added documentation for \columnsep
+
+1999-06-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: minor documentation updates
+
+1999-05-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tools.ins: added colbreak guard for multicol.sty
+
+1999-05-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx (subsection{Manual column breaking}):
+ Added a \columnbreak command to allow manual column breaks.
+
+1999-05-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: reworded license text slightly
+
+1999-03-22 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: re-add \cs{mark} command which was commented out
+ by mistake at some point in 1998 (pr/2978)
+
+1999-03-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * enumerate.dtx: extension hook tools/2916}
+
+ * verbatim.dtx: Add \begingroup/\endgroup to definition of
+ \verbatim(*)/\endverbatim(*) so that they can safely be
+ used without \begin/\end. Suggested by Donald Arseneau.
+
+1999-03-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * manifest.txt: Corrected typo.
+
+1999-03-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tools.ins: New copyright info and preamble.
+
+1999-02-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: fixed reference to ltx3info.tex in license
+
+1999-02-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * readme.txt: lppl
+
+1999-02-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: changed license text
+
+1998-12-31 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx: Added \noexpand in front of \ialign
+ to guard against interesting :-) changes to \halign done to support
+ text glyphs in math
+
+1998-12-03 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * ftnright.dtx: Made \@makecol colorsafe by adding
+ \color at begingroup, \color at endgroup and \normalcolor.
+
+1998-11-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: taken out fix for (pr/1866) as it produce undesired
+ results (see comments in doc of \vref) (pr/2909)
+
+ * varioref.dtx: Added two new user commands \vrefrange and
+ \vpagerefrange to support referencing a range of labels.
+ Also added customising commands \reftextlabelrange and
+ \reftextpagerange to support the above commands.
+ Added draft and final option (draft will turn errors into warnings).
+ Added austrian defaults (same a german).
+ Added greek defaults.
+ Removed incorrect warning for italian.
+ Added hungarian defaults.
+ Added russian defaults.
+ Added utility command \vrefpagenum and used it to shorten code
+ this will also fix a problem that in certain circumstances varioref
+ was not warning that another run was needed.
+
+1998-09-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: test if document ends in middle of multicols
+ and if so issue an error message instead of dying with an OR loop
+ pr/2873
+
+1998-08-17 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: new logic for dealing with \@footnotetext macro:
+ instead of redefining its definition completely, thereby possibly
+ overwriting a class change, we locally set \columnwidth to \textwidth
+ and then call the original definition. this will also solves a problem
+ with the situation of a footnote inside multicols inside a minipage
+ would vanish.
+
+ * varioref.dtx: added defaults for greek contributed by
+ Apostolos Syropoulos <apostolo at obelix.ee.duth.gr>
+
+1998-06-22 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * layout.dtx: renamed \bs to \LayOutbs to avoid possible conflicts
+ with other packages using this command. Originally the package
+ redefined \bs in case it already had a definition.
+ Also rename \type to \LayOuttype for the same reason.
+
+ Added \@doendpe to definition of
+ \endverbatim(*) (pr/3234)
+
+1998-06-17 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * calc.dtx:
+
+ Added \widthof etc
+
+ Made \ratio and \real robust
+
+ Enhanced documentation
+2004-02-27 <david.carlisle at latex-project.org>
+
+ * bm.sty: fix for "new" AMS math accent code. tools/3256
+
+2004-02-01 <david.carlisle at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: \nobreak after table head, for tools/3484
+
+1998-05-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tabularx.dtx: Use \setlength so calc syntax may be used in
+ the width argument. tools/2793.
+
+ * longtable.dtx: Use \setlength so calc syntax may be used in p
+ arguments. tools/2793.
+
+1998-05-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx: also allow calc syntax in first arg of tabular*
+ (pr/2793)
+
+1998-05-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx: set the \hsize for p columns (and others) via
+ \setlength so that calc syntax can be applied (pr/2793)
+
+1998-05-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: support for amsmath displays (pr2175)
+ Actually this probably should be fixed in amsmath instead.
+
+1998-04-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: added galician defaults contributed by Matthias
+ Moebius.
+
+1998-03-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: replace ~ by \nobreak\space so that \vref obeys
+ setting of \frenchspacing (pr/1866)
+
+1998-01-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Removed group around contents of optional argument
+ to \begin{multicols}{2}[...] so that the use of \section within
+ this argument works better.
+
+ * array.dtx: made \multicolumn long to match kernel change for
+ pr/2180 (forgotten at that time)
+
+1998-01-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx (subsection{Not balancing the columns}):
+ added support for a version of multicols (star form) that doesn't
+ balance the columns on the last page.
+ Fixed a bit of the documentation (so that a toc is possible).
+
+1997-12-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx: moving a docstrip guard. this doesn't change
+ the style but prevents some code being added at the end of
+ the driver file
+
+1997-12-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: redefine \@footnotetext only within environment
+ not globally any longer. pr/2689 + some docu updates
+
+ * fileerr.dtx: fixed file date. pr/2689
+
+1997-12-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: added default for polish language.
+
+1997-11-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * bm.dtx: Make \bm{\hat{A}} work like \bm{\hat A} (from c.t.t).
+
+1997-11-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: now finally set \columnwidth to width of column
+ pr2664
+
+1997-11-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * bm.dtx: support mathcode hex 8000 (like prime) properly.
+ Support null delimiter \left. constructions.
+ Support breqn package.
+
+1997-11-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * calc.dtx: Fix error message inserted at the weekend.
+
+1997-11-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * manifest.txt: add calc.
+
+ * Makefile (FILES): add calc
+
+ * tools.ins: add calc.
+
+ * calc.dtx: Contributed to the distribution by
+ Kresten Krab Thorup and Frank Jensen. One minor change, use
+ \PackageError rather than the primitive \errormessge.
+
+1997-10-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: avoid using % in aux file. tools/2631
+
+1997-10-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * xspace.dtx: test for space token added for tools/2632
+
+1997-10-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * bm.dtx: Add extra braces around group code so \bm{\frac..} does
+ the right thing. (Spotted on c.t.t)
+
+1997-10-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * dcolumn.dtx: Document use of math mode. tools/2616.
+
+1997-09-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tabularx.dtx: Fix \write catch for tools/2607.
+ (Fix page 401 of TeXBook at same time...)
+
+1997-07-09 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * verbatim.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab at issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * tabularx.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab at issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab at issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab at issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * longtable.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab at issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * layout.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab at issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * delarray.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab at issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+ * array.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab
+ <schwab at issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+1997-07-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tools.ins: added q.tex and r.tex files so that "run" and
+ "quit" mode is now also supported.
+
+ * fileerr.dtx: added q.tex and r.tex files so that "run" and
+ "quit" mode is now also supported.
+
+1997-06-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: New email address for David K.
+
+1997-06-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: support cite package for tools/2490
+
+1997-06-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx: added support for catalan
+
+1997-06-05 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx: Applied improvement of documentation, kindly done
+ by Robin Fairbairns.
+
+1997-05-13 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontsmpl.dtx: Replaced \@changed at x@err by
+ \TextSymbolUnavailable, according to the change in ltoutenc.dtx.
+
+1997-04-30 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * verbatim.dtx (\verbatiminput): Added code to check for
+ existence of file to be input and print error message if not.
+
+1997-04-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tools.ins: add bm
+
+ * bm.dtx: Add to tools bundle.
+ Add \boldsymbol as alias for \bm
+
+1997-02-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tabularx.dtx: Spurious brace removed. Jean-Pierre Drucbert.
+
+1997-02-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tabularx.dtx: improve behaviour in case table too wide.
+
+1996-12-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * xspace.dtx: alltt support. tools/2322.
+
+1996-11-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: new page break control.
+
+1996-11-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * readme.txt: Add old docstrip note.
+
+1996-11-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: colour option. tools/2297.
+
+ * tools.ins: new style.
+
+1996-10-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * xspace.dtx: Fix guards for driver document. tools/2206
+
+1996-09-25 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * verbatim.dtx (\verbatiminput): Added \@addtofilelist and
+ \ProvidesFile so that the name of the file read in appears in the
+ \listfiles output.
+
+1996-09-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * dcolumn.dtx: Fix case where no decimal point is used
+ in the `new' case of a the third argument being n.m.
+
+Fri Sep 6 15:24:17 1996 David Carlisle <carlisle at cs.man.ac.uk>
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: more changes following from /2252.
+
+Fri Aug 30 18:09:48 1996 David Carlisle <carlisle at cs.man.ac.uk>
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: more fudges for AMS tools/2252, and extra
+ group from Donald A. tools/2147
+
+Wed Jul 10 11:15:30 1996 David Carlisle <carlisle at cs.man.ac.uk>
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: Missing percent added for tools/2215
+
+1996-06-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx: change \kern\z@ to \hskip1sp for latex/2160
+ A few long lines wrapped.
+
+1996-06-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * verbatim.dtx: \verbatim at noligs@list now processed after
+ \dospecials (PR 2138).
+
+1996-05-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx (subsection{Support for
+ \texttt{\textbackslash firsthline} and ):
+ Complete reimplementation after Mark Wooding pointed out that
+ they were everything else than correct --- hope i got it
+ right this time :-)
+
+1996-05-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: Add a warning to re run LaTeX \AtEndDocument if
+ any longtable has failed to align on this run.
+
+1996-05-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * xspace.dtx: Add / to list of punctuation characters.
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: use \protected at edef rather than \def
+ so that the expansion of any macros is printed. tools/2147
+
+1996-05-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: add \hfil to match array package change.
+
+ * array.dtx: add \hfil to \@endpbox for tools/2120 (and to match
+ kernel version).
+
+1996-04-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx: Extra \kern\z@ for empty l colummns. latex/2122
+
+1996-04-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: Version 4.02 using new algorithm of David Kastrup
+ to align tables without \setlongtables command.
+
+1996-02-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * dcolumn.dtx: New feature (tools/2093) D{.}{.}{3.2} specifies a
+ column of figures that should be centred, assuming 3 places to
+ the left of the decimal point and 2 to the right.
+
+1996-02-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: allow \multicolumn and \hline to work inside
+ tabulars inside longtables. tools/2068
+
+1996-01-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx:
+ Explain why with \OnlyDescription there will be an unresolved
+ reference pr/2047.
+
+1996-01-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: (Martin Schr"oder) remove ! which causes a
+ makeindex error in \changes entry. tools/2035
+
+1996-01-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * ftnright.dtx:
+ Finally got around to take out ltxdoc and use article for
+ documentation. pr/536
+ Also cleaned up use of ProvidesPackage.
+
+1995-12-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx:
+ Fixed section headings so that a toc is possible. pr/2033.
+
+ * multicol.dtx:
+ Fixed index entries. pr/2036
+
+1995-12-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tools.dst: Add trap for old docstrip.
+
+1995-11-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * theorem.dtx: Fix \@newctr usage (Ulrik Vieth)
+
+ * layout.dtx: Documentation fixes (J"org Knappen).
+
+ * indentfirst.dtx: (Ulrik Vieth) Fix \GetFileInfo usage.
+ In the documentation.
+
+1995-11-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tools.dst: New style concurrent generation.
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: Fix \harvarditem: add SK code after the implicit
+ \item (as for \cite) not before.
+
+1995-11-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * theorem.dtx:
+ Ensure that there is an error message if one of the counters
+ in newtheorem are undefined pr/1861.
+
+ * array.dtx (subsection{Getting the spacing around rules right}):
+ ensure that the space between \hline\hline is visually \doublerulesep
+ and does not depend of the rulewidth (as it does with standard latex)
+ pr/1945
+ Added some documentation about rule handling concepts.
+
+1995-11-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: (Anil K Goel) Really measure the size of the
+ first row of the table not `assume' the size from the array
+ strut. (Avoids really bad first page break with two headings)
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: Take more care over redefining \protect commands
+
+1995-11-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx: Minor doc changes, no more ooverfull hboxes...
+
+1995-10-30 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * layout.dtx : Added command \layout* wbhich recomputes the values
+ it needs before making the picture of the layout. (PR 1465)
+
+1995-10-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: Fix for tools/1744 (notref/varioref case)
+ Add final and draft options
+ Fix inner vmode case which could cause extra white space
+ to be added.
+
+1995-10-29 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * layout.dtx (section{The implementation}): Added the options
+ spanish, braziolian and portugues, as provided by
+ Ausberto S. Castro V. <ascv at inf.ufrgs.br> (PR 1837)
+
+1995-10-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * afterpage.dtx: tools/1579/1880/1884
+
+1995-10-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx:
+ Added defaults for Italian pr/1888
+
+ * multicol.dtx:
+ Added \@largefloatcheck so that floats being too large
+ will produce a warning. pr/1890
+
+1995-09-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * verbatim.dtx: Corrected vertical spacing if verbatim is nested
+ in quote (and other) environment. This error was introduced with
+ version v1.3c (1990/02/26). Clarified documentation on how to
+ define new verbatim-like environments.
+
+1995-08-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tools.dst:
+ Updated copying conditions so that it is allowed to distribute
+ unpacked files together with the sources.
+
+1995-08-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx:
+ Changed class used for documentation from
+ article to ltxdoc. pr/1788
+
+1995-06-25 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * layout.dtx : The june 1995 release of LaTeX no longer needs two
+ hash marks when defining a newcommand inside the argument of
+ \DeclareOption.
+
+1995-06-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: replace ## by # in \DeclareOption, latex/1557
+
+1995-05-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: Modify Caption handling again.
+
+1995-05-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx:
+ Updated \DeclareOption declarations to reflect ##1 -> #1 change. pr/1557
+
+1995-05-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * fontsmpl.dtx:
+ Removed \pagestyle{empty} so that all pages produced by fontsmpl.tex
+ are numbered. pr/1559
+
+1995-05-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * verbatim.dtx: Removed extra backslash in argument to \cs.
+
+1995-05-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: Explitly reset page height for tools/1584.
+ Modify caption handling.
+
+1995-04-26 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * verbatim.dtx: Removed \fileversion and \filedate.
+
+1995-04-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: Modify brace hacks cf tools/1571
+ Allow 1100 longtables in a single document---A bug reported on a
+ `real document' by Mike Van Geest!
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: Fix inner horz mode case.
+ Add option handling: notref and notcite to stop the
+ redefinitions of those commands.
+
+1995-04-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx (section{The line separator \\}):
+ Fixed a serious bug that was present right from the beginning:
+ in some cases the last column of an array line could get an extra
+ math ord messing up the spacing. pr/1571.
+ (subsection{Bugs and Features}):
+ Added comment about the fact that a column (execpt for the first) refers to
+ the column specifier plus intercolumn material to the *right*.
+ Therefore \multicolumn{2}{|c|} is normally incorrect. pr/1443
+
+1995-04-08 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * layout.dtx : Added the options 'integers' and 'reals'. The
+ default is the option 'integers'; this results in the 'old'
+ behaviour, where the values of parameters are presented
+ truncated. Using the option 'reals' will switch to presenting the
+ real val;ues of the parameters. This also affects the definition
+ of \Show and \Type.
+
+1995-04-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx (subsection{Options}):
+ Added norsk and nynorsk strings.
+ Modified Warning message about undefined Option texts.
+
+1995-04-03 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * layout.dtx : Simplified the definition of \Show and \Type, the
+ effect is that now the complete value is shown (PR #1520)
+
+1995-03-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tabularx.dtx: Allow \tabularx to be used inside
+ \newenvironment definitions
+
+1995-03-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: Fix for tools/1434 (showkeys affecting footnote
+ placement)
+
+1995-03-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx:
+ Fixed colour support (thanks to David)
+ Clarified copyright notice.
+ Updated driver file.
+
+1995-03-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: Fix for tools/1181 (Bad placement in with \item
+ and \bibitem) and tools/1496 (Working with new ams*)
+
+1995-03-14 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * layout.dtx : Added the options french and francais (thanks to
+ Eric Picheral <Eric.Picheral at univ-rennes1.fr> who provided the
+ translations); introduced \notshown
+
+1995-01-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx:
+ Added swedish strings.
+
+1994-12-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: Add \tabularnewline.
+
+ * array.dtx: Add \tabularnewline.
+
+1994-11-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tools.dst: Avoid generating error messages on `.tex'.
+
+1994-11-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * xspace.dtx: Make robust, add !
+
+1994-10-29 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * layout.dtx : Some of the dutch words should really be one word
+ instead of two (PR #1078)
+
+1994-10-25 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * verbatim.dtx: Changed code for handling verbatim as first thing
+ after an \item command. (This change had already been done in the
+ LaTeX2e kernel.)
+
+ * verbatim.dtx: Removed extra \typeout lines.
+
+1994-10-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx (subsection{Support for ...):
+ Added \firsthline and \lasthline from Companion.
+
+1994-10-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx:
+ Correct change from 26 of August. Leave old code only add the new
+ one.
+
+1994-09-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx:
+ Added strings for breton language, this also means adding a new option.
+
+1994-09-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx:
+ Added danish strings.
+
+1994-09-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx (subsection{Options}):
+ Added finnish strings.
+
+1994-09-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: add \citefullauthor for (forthcoming) natbib.
+
+1994-09-08 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * layout.dtx: Stored texts in control sequences to allow the use
+ of other languages. Added the options english (default) and
+ dutch.
+
+ * tools.dst: Added the layout package
+
+1994-09-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: Version 3, supports varioref ref styles, and
+ natbib and harvard citation styles.
+ Also modify `internal vertical mode' case, to cope with modified
+ \caption behaviour in the LaTeX2e classes.
+ Modify \GetFileInfo usage, as suggested by Patrick Daly.
+
+1994-08-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx (subsection{The output routines}):
+ Check explicitly for void boxes before assigning the current column
+ width to their width, because void boxes will not change.
+ Extract the kept marks before adding a penalty -10000 to the output box
+ when balancing, otherwise no marks will be found. (This bug was
+ introduced recently.
+
+1994-08-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * tools.dst:
+ Added a better informational message about the problems
+ that can arise when LaTeX tries to generate the file `.tex'
+
+1994-07-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx (subsection{Options}):
+ Added dutch defaults as suggested by Frank Poppe.
+ Explicitly expand label argument before passing it to \label, so that
+ varioref will work with babel.
+ Correct misspelling in spanish option.
+
+1994-07-14 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * layout.dtx: Moved the identification code to the front of the
+ file.
+ Needed to interchange to calls to \ttfamily and \footnotsize as
+ \footnotesize calls \normalfont in compatibility mode.
+ Added a check for negative arrowlength to \InsideHArrow
+
+1994-06-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * longtable.dtx: Obey a \nofiles declaration. Remove special
+ handling of letter class, not needed for the latex2e version of
+ letter.
+
+ * showkeys.dtx: Correct \ProvidesPackage usage (previously had two
+ \providesPackage commands),
+
+1994-06-21 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx (subsection{Options}):
+ Added french defaults as suggested by Daniel Flippo.
+
+1994-06-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx:
+ Correction was buggy, brace placed incorrectly.
+
+1994-06-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx:
+ \vpageref[above][one ]{one} didn't work because first
+ optional argument wasn't passed (found by Patrick Daly).
+
+1994-06-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx (section{New macros and hacks for version 1.2}):
+ Updated float commands to contain \color at endgroup etc. so
+ that they work together with the color.sty package.
+ (Found by SPQR)
+
+1994-06-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx:
+ Added \null to the end of \multicolumn. This fixes
+ a bug that was long fixed in the original but never made it
+ into array.sty.
+ Use PackageError/Warning interface.
+
+1994-06-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * somedefs.dtx: Use new style error commands.
+
+1994-05-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx:
+ Do not alloc \col at number any longer.
+ Use Standard Warning/info messages.
+
+ * fileerr.dtx:
+ Added file to the collection.
+
+1994-05-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * manifest.txt: First draft.
+
+ * readme.txt: First draft.
+1994-05-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx:
+ Warning about looping pages displayed in wrong order
+ (found by Wolfgang Christen).
+ (subsection{Defining the main macros}):
+ Added help message for loop error.
+ Use PackageError rather than \errmessage.
+ Use DeclareRobustCommand.
+ Added \NeedTeXFormat.
+
+1994-05-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * multicol.dtx (subsection{Starting and ):
+ fixed bug with "premulticols" not being a register
+ (tried to \the a string in tracing mode)
+
+1994-05-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * varioref.dtx:
+ Added defaults for brazil.
+
+1994-05-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx (section{The macros \texttt{\protect):
+ Use \@finalstrut in \@endpbox
+
+1994-03-23 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * layout.dtx : repaired bug in twosided mode.
+
+ Changed vertical positioning of the arrows identifying
+ \amrginparsep and \marginparwidth
+
+ Repaired bug in the preparation of the table of dimensions.
+
+ Produce two pages in twoside mode
+
+ Removed use of \wlog
+
+1994-03-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx:
+ Removed identification \typeout's.
+ Removed the check for the old version of the \@tfor macro.
+
+1994-02-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs at latex-project.org>
+
+ * array.dtx:
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * ftnright.dtx:
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * multicol.dtx:
+ Balance code rewritten; many changes to documentation etc.
+ Changed driver code slightly.
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
+ * theorem.dtx:
+ Changed driver code slightly.
+ Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be
+ processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e.
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/changes.txt
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/dcolumn.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/dcolumn.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/dcolumn.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/dcolumn.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/dcolumn.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/delarray.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/delarray.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/delarray.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/delarray.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/delarray.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/enumerate.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/enumerate.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/enumerate.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/enumerate.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/enumerate.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/fileerr.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/fileerr.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/fileerr.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/fileerr.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/fileerr.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/fontsmpl.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/fontsmpl.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/fontsmpl.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/fontsmpl.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/fontsmpl.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/ftnright.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/ftnright.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/ftnright.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/ftnright.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/ftnright.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/hhline.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/hhline.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/hhline.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/hhline.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/hhline.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/indentfirst.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/indentfirst.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/indentfirst.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/indentfirst.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/indentfirst.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/layout.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/layout.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/layout.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/layout.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/layout.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/longtable.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/longtable.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/longtable.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/longtable.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/longtable.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/manifest.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/manifest.txt (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/manifest.txt 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993-2016
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
+% -------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX `Tools Bundle' is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% CONTENTS OF THE TOOLS BUNDLE
+% ============================
+
+tools-overview.tex
+ Overview of the content of the tools bundle.
+
+array.dtx
+ Extended versions of the environments array, tabular and tabular*.
+dcolumn.dtx
+ Alignment on `decimal points' in tabular entries. Requires array.
+delarray.dtx
+ Adds `large delimiters' around arrays. Requires array.
+hhline.dtx
+ Finer control over horizontal rules in tables. Requires array.
+longtable.dtx
+ Multipage tables. (Does not require array, but uses the extended
+ features if both are loaded.)
+tabularx.dtx
+ Defines tabularx environment (similar to tabular*) but modifies
+ column widths, not inter-column space, to achieve a desired
+ table width.
+
+afterpage.dtx
+ Place text after the current page.
+
+bm.dtx
+ Access bold math symbols.
+
+calc.dtx
+ Infix arithmetic expresions. Contributed to the distribution by
+ Kresten Krab Thorup and Frank Jensen.
+
+enumerate.dtx
+ Extended version of the enumerate environment.
+
+fileerr.dtx
+ Suite of small files which may be used to control TeX's
+ missing file error loop.
+
+fontsmpl.dtx
+ Package and test file for producing `font samples'
+
+ftnright.dtx
+ Place footnotes in the right hand column in two-column mode.
+
+indentfirst.dtx
+ Indent the first paragraph of sections etc.
+
+layout.dtx
+ Produces an overview of the layout of the current document.
+
+multicol.dtx
+ Typeset text in columns, with the length of the final columns
+ `balanced'.
+
+rawfonts.dtx
+ Preload fonts under the old internal font names of LaTeX2.09.
+ Not recomended for new packages, but may help when updating old
+ files.
+
+shellesc.dtx
+ Unified interface for accessing system commands.
+
+showkeys.dtx
+ Draft mode showing the `keys' used by \label, \ref, \cite etc.
+
+somedefs.dtx
+ Selective handling of package options. (Used in rawfonts.sty.)
+
+theorem.dtx
+ Flexible definition of `theorem-like' environments.
+
+trace.dtx
+ The package helps to suppress and to control the amount of tracing
+ output (\tracingall) by taming calc and making NFSS less noisy.
+
+varioref.dtx
+ `Smart' handling of page references.
+
+verbatim.dtx
+ Flexible version of verbatim environment.
+
+xr.dtx
+ eXternall References. Extend \ref to access \label commands in
+ other documents.
+
+xspace.dtx
+ Smart space command that avoids the common mistake of missing
+ spaces after command names.
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/manifest.txt
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/multicol.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/multicol.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/multicol.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/multicol.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/multicol.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/rawfonts.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/rawfonts.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/rawfonts.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/rawfonts.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/rawfonts.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/shellesc.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/shellesc.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/shellesc.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/shellesc.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/shellesc.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/showkeys.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/showkeys.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/showkeys.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/showkeys.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/showkeys.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/somedefs.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/somedefs.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/somedefs.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/somedefs.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/somedefs.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tabularx.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tabularx.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tabularx.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tabularx.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tabularx.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/theorem.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/theorem.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/theorem.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/theorem.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/theorem.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tools-overview.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tools-overview.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tools-overview.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tools-overview.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tools-overview.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tools-overview.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tools-overview.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tools-overview.tex 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesFile{tools-overview.tex}[2015/03/31 v1.0 Tools overview]
+
+% Copyright (C) 2006-2019
+%
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% Copyright (c) 2006-2014 Heiko Oberdiek
+% (c) 2015-2019 The LaTeX3 Project
+%
+% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Tools Bundle'.
+% -------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX `Tools Bundle' is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'.
+%
+% This file is derived from `tools.tex' and `tools-overview.cls'
+% from the `latex-tds' bundle maintained by Heiko Oberdiek.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper,12pt]{article}
+
+% page layout
+\usepackage[
+ ignoreall,
+ hmargin=1in,
+ vmargin={.75in,1in},
+]{geometry}
+
+\pagestyle{empty}
+
+\usepackage{calc}[2005/08/06]
+
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\hypersetup{
+ colorlinks,
+ filecolor=blue,
+ pdftitle={LaTeX's Tools Bundle},
+ pdfsubject={Overview},
+ pdfauthor={Heiko Oberdiek},
+ pdfcreator={Project `latex-tds'},
+}
+\title{Contents of \LaTeX's Tools Bundle}
+
+\makeatletter
+
+\let\TO at document\document
+\let\TO at enddocument\enddocument
+
+\def\document{%
+ \TO at document
+ \maketitle
+ \toks@={}%
+ \setlength{\maxlen}{0pt}%
+}
+\newlength{\maxlen}
+\def\enddocument{%
+ \begin{list}{}{%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{\maxlen + \labelsep}%
+ \setlength{\labelwidth}{\maxlen}%
+ \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}%
+ }%
+ \the\toks@
+ \end{list}%
+ \TO at enddocument
+}
+\newcommand{\entry}[2]{%
+ \outline{#1}%
+ \toks@\expandafter{%
+ \the\toks@
+ \item[%
+ \href{file:#1.pdf}{\printpackage{#1}}%
+ \hfill
+ ]%
+ #2%
+ }%
+ \setlength{\maxlen}{%
+ \maxof{\maxlen}{\widthof{\printpackage{#1}}}%
+ }%
+ \global\maxlen\maxlen
+}
+\newcommand*{\printpackage}[1]{%
+ \textbf{\large #1:}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\outline}[1]{%
+ \pdfoutline
+ attr {/C[0 0 1]}
+ user {%
+ <<%
+ /S/GoToR%
+ /F(#1.pdf)%
+ /NewWindow true%
+ /D[0/XYZ null null null]%
+ >>%
+ }%
+ {[#1]}\relax
+}
+\renewcommand*{\maketitle}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \par
+ \centering
+ \bfseries
+ \LARGE
+ \@title
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+ \vspace{2em}%
+}
+
+\providecommand*{\cs}[1]{%
+ \texttt{\textbackslash#1}%
+}
+
+\makeatother
+
+\begin{document}
+\entry{afterpage}{%
+ Place text after the current page.
+}%
+\entry{array}{%
+ Extended versions of the environments array, tabular and tabular*.
+}%
+\entry{bm}{%
+ Access bold math symbols.
+}%
+\entry{calc}{%
+ Infix arithmetic expresions. Contributed to the distribution by
+ Kresten Krab Thorup and Frank Jensen.
+}%
+\entry{dcolumn}{%
+ Alignment on \emph{decimal points} in tabular entries. Requires array.
+}%
+\entry{delarray}{%
+ Adds \emph{large delimiters} around arrays. Requires array.
+}%
+\entry{enumerate}{%
+ Extended version of the enumerate environment.
+}%
+\entry{fileerr}{%
+ Suite of small files which may be used to control \TeX{}'s
+ missing file error loop.
+}%
+\entry{fontsmpl}{%
+ Package and test file for producing \emph{font samples}
+}%
+\entry{ftnright}{%
+ Place footnotes in the right hand column in two-column mode.
+}%
+\entry{hhline}{%
+ Finer control over horizontal rules in tables. Requires array.
+}%
+\entry{indentfirst}{%
+ Indent the first paragraph of sections etc.
+}%
+\entry{layout}{%
+ Produces an overview of the layout of the current document.
+}%
+\entry{longtable}{%
+ Multipage tables. (Does not require array, but uses the extended
+ features if both are loaded.)
+}%
+\entry{multicol}{%
+ Typeset text in columns, with the length of the final columns
+ \emph{balanced}.
+}%
+\entry{rawfonts}{%
+ Preload fonts under the old internal font names of \LaTeX{}2.09.
+ Not recomended for new packages, but may help when updating old
+ files.
+}%
+\entry{shellesc}{%
+ Unified interface to ``shell escape'' i.e., access to system commands
+ based on \texttt{\string\write18} or \texttt{os.execute} depending
+ on the system in use.
+}%
+\entry{showkeys}{%
+ Draft mode showing the \emph{keys} used by \cs{label}, \cs{ref}, \cs{cite} etc.
+}%
+\entry{somedefs}{%
+ Selective handling of package options. (Used in rawfonts.sty.)
+}%
+\entry{tabularx}{%
+ Defines tabularx environment (similar to tabular*) but modifies
+ column widths, not inter-column space, to achieve a desired
+ table width.
+}%
+\entry{theorem}{%
+ Flexible definition of \emph{theorem-like} environments.
+}%
+\entry{trace}{%
+ The package helps to suppress and to control the amount of tracing
+ output (\cs{tracingall}) by taming calc and making NFSS less noisy.
+}%
+\entry{varioref}{%
+ \emph{Smart} handling of page references.
+}%
+\entry{verbatim}{%
+ Flexible version of verbatim environment.
+}%
+\entry{xr}{%
+ eXternall References. Extend \cs{ref} to access \cs{label} commands in
+ other documents.
+}%
+\entry{xspace}{%
+ Smart space command that avoids the common mistake of missing
+ spaces after command names.
+}%
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/tools-overview.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/trace.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/trace.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/trace.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/trace.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/trace.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/varioref.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/varioref.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/varioref.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/varioref.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/varioref.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/verbatim.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/verbatim.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/verbatim.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/verbatim.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/verbatim.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/xr.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/xr.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/xr.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/xr.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/xr.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/xspace.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/xspace.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/xspace.pdf 2019-09-14 21:44:33 UTC (rev 52095)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/xspace.pdf 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/tools/xspace.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.dtx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.dtx (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.dtx 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+%
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1995, 1999 American Mathematical Society.
+% Copyright (C) 2016-2019 LaTeX3 Project and American Mathematical Society.
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+%
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is the LaTeX3 Project.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+%\iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{amsdtx}
+\def\MaintainedByLaTeXTeam#1{%
+\begin{center}%
+\fbox{\fbox{\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}%
+This file is maintained by the \LaTeX{} Project team.\\%
+Bug reports can be opened (category \texttt{#1}) at\\%
+\url{https://latex-project.org/bugs/}.\end{tabular}}}\end{center}}
+\usepackage{amsbsy}
+\GetFileInfo{amsbsy.sty}
+\begin{document}
+\title{The \pkg{amsbsy} package}
+\author{Frank Mittelbach\and Rainer Sch\"opf\and Michael Downes}
+\date{Version \fileversion, \filedate}
+\DocInput{amsbsy.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%\fi
+%
+% \maketitle
+% \MaintainedByLaTeXTeam{amslatex}
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb\|
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% The package \texttt{amsbsy}, first written in 1989, implements a
+% few commands for producing \textbf{bold} characters in the `normal'
+% \emph{math version}.
+% \begin{quote}\em
+% Note: It is recommended nowadays to use the \pkg{bm} package, which
+% became available in 1997.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% If we have bold fonts which contain the character in question then
+% we will use these fonts to produce the wanted character. But
+% sometimes math fonts are only available in a certain weight
+% (e.g.\ the AMS symbol fonts).
+% \DescribeMacro\pmb
+% For these cases we provide a command which is called \verb+\pmb+ (an
+% acronym for \textbf{p}oor \textbf{m}an's \textbf{b}old) with one argument.
+% The bolder weight is achieved by copying the argument three times in
+% slightly different positions which is better than nothing but no
+% match for a real bold font.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\boldsymbol
+% There also exists the \verb+\boldsymbol+ command which is better in
+% all cases where bold fonts exists. This command will internally
+% switch to the corresponding `bold' \emph{math version} typeset its
+% argument in this version.
+%
+% Both commands will preserve the nature of their arguments, i.e.\ if
+% they get a relational atom their result will again be a relation as
+% far as \tex/'s mathspacing is concerned.
+%
+% Since it is good policy to make at least a small test we try to
+% typeset the infinity sign ($\infty$) first with \verb+\pmb+ and then
+% with \verb+\boldsymbol+.
+% \[
+% \pmb{\infty} = \boldsymbol{\infty} \quad ?
+% \]
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% Standard package info.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% LaTeX 2.09 can't be used (nor non-LaTeX)
+[1994/12/01]% LaTeX date must December 1994 or later
+\ProvidesPackage{amsbsy}[1999/11/29 v1.2d Bold Symbols]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The implementation}
+%
+% We need some functions from the \pkg{amsgen} package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{amsgen}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\boldsymbol}
+% In implementing boldsymbol, we must take into account \tex/'s
+% limitation of only 16 mathgroups (math families, in Knuth's
+% terminology). If we wanted to maintain mathgroups for both the bold
+% and non-bold version of each math font, it would not take long to
+% run out of mathgroups. Therefore what we do instead for a bold
+% symbol is embed it in an \verb|\hbox|; inside that \verb|\hbox|,
+% when we start another math formula, we can change all the
+% mathgroups to their bold equivalents.
+%
+% However, to get the correct math style inside the hbox (display,
+% text, script or scriptscript) we have to use \verb|\mathchoice|.
+% Since \verb|\mathversion{bold}| has a lot of overhead, and
+% \verb|\mathchoice| typesets the argument text four times, we would
+% rather not put the \verb|\mathversion| command inside each
+% \verb|\hbox| in the \verb|\mathchoice|; on the other hand,
+% \verb|\mathversion| gives an error message if it's used in math
+% mode. Therefore if we want to execute \verb|\mathversion{bold}|
+% before starting the \verb|\mathchoice| we have to temporarily
+% disable the \verb|\@nomath| error. (The error message is intended
+% to keep people from accidentally emboldening a preceding part of a
+% math formula, since only the mathgroups defined at the end of a
+% math formula will determine the fonts used in that formula; but we
+% are going to typeset our bold symbol not in the current formula but
+% in an embedded formula, so that this danger doesn't apply here.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\boldsymbol}[1]{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Start a group to localize the change of \verb|\@nomath|:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Disable \verb|\@nomath| so that we don't have to leave math
+% mode before executing \verb|\mathversion|:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@nomath\@gobble \mathversion{bold}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{math at atom} is a test macro which looks at its argument and
+% produces a math atom of the proper class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \math at atom{#1}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Although it is tempting to use \verb|\text| here, to save some
+% main memory, that caused a bug in the past due to some internal
+% interactions with \verb|\mathversion|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \mathchoice%
+ {\hbox{$\m at th\displaystyle#1$}}%
+ {\hbox{$\m at th\textstyle#1$}}%
+ {\hbox{$\m at th\scriptstyle#1$}}%
+ {\hbox{$\m at th\scriptscriptstyle#1$}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End the group we started earlier.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math at atom}
+% The macro \verb+\math at atom+ looks at its argument and produce a
+% correct math atom, i.e.\ a primitive like \verb+\mathopen+.
+% Until the day we have a real implementation for all cases we use
+% the \verb+\binrel at + command from \amstex/ which can distinguish
+% between binary, relation and ord atoms.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\math at atom#1#2{%
+ \binrel@{#1}\binrel@@{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pmb}
+% Poor man's bold command, works by typesetting multiple copies of
+% the given argument with small offsets.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\pmb}{%
+ \ifmmode\else \expandafter\pmb@@\fi\mathpalette\pmb@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \cs{pmb@@} is called by \cn{pmb} in the non-math-mode case.
+% Discard the first two arguments which are for the math-mode case.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pmb@@#1#2#3{\leavevmode\setboxz at h{#3}%
+ \dimen at -\wdz@
+ \kern-.5\ex@\copy\z@
+ \kern\dimen@\kern.25\ex@\raise.4\ex@\copy\z@
+ \kern\dimen@\kern.25\ex@\box\z@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\pmbraise@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note: because of the use of \cs{mathpalette}, if \cs{pmb@} is applied to a
+% single math italic character (or a single character from some other
+% slanted math font), the italic correction will be added. This will
+% cause subscripts to fall too far away from the character in some
+% cases, e.g., $\pmb{T}_1$ or $\pmb{\mathcal{T}}_1$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pmb@#1#2{\setbox8\hbox{$\m at th#1{#2}$}%
+ \setboxz at h{$\m at th#1\mkern.5mu$}\pmbraise@\wdz@
+ \binrel@{#2}%
+ \dimen at -\wd8 %
+ \binrel@@{%
+ \mkern-.8mu\copy8 %
+ \kern\dimen@\mkern.4mu\raise\pmbraise@\copy8 %
+ \kern\dimen@\mkern.4mu\box8 }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\binrel@#1{\begingroup
+ \setboxz at h{\thinmuskip0mu
+ \medmuskip\m at ne mu\thickmuskip\@ne mu
+ \setbox\tw@\hbox{$#1\m at th$}\kern-\wd\tw@
+ ${}#1{}\m at th$}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \cn{noexpand} here should be unnecessary, but just in case
+% \ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\@tempa{\endgroup\let\noexpand\binrel@@
+ \ifdim\wdz@<\z@ \mathbin
+ \else\ifdim\wdz@>\z@ \mathrel
+ \else \relax\fi\fi}%
+ \@tempa
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For completeness, assign a default value for \cs{binrel@@}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\binrel@@\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The usual \cs{endinput} to ensure that random garbage at the end of
+% the file doesn't get copied by \fn{docstrip}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\endinput
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \CheckSum{131}
+% \Finale
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.dtx
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.ins
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.ins (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsbsy.ins 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+%%
+%% Copyright 2010 American Mathematical Society.
+%% Copyright 2016 LaTeX3 Project and American Mathematical Society.
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+%%
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is the LaTeX3 Project.
+%%
+%% ====================================================================
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\askforoverwritefalse
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\preamble
+
+Copyright 1995, 1999 American Mathematical Society.
+Copyright 2016 LaTeX3 Project and American Mathematical Society.
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+
+The Current Maintainer of this work is the LaTeX3 project.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\usedir{tex/latex/amsmath}
+
+\generate{
+ \file{amsbsy.sty}{\from{amsbsy.dtx}{}}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.dtx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.dtx (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.dtx 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,322 @@
+%
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1995, 1999 American Mathematical Society.
+% Copyright (C) 2016-2019 LaTeX3 Project and American Mathematical Society.
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+%
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is the LaTeX3 Project.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+%\iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{amsdtx}
+\def\MaintainedByLaTeXTeam#1{%
+\begin{center}%
+\fbox{\fbox{\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}%
+This file is maintained by the \LaTeX{} Project team.\\%
+Bug reports can be opened (category \texttt{#1}) at\\%
+\url{https://latex-project.org/bugs/}.\end{tabular}}}\end{center}}
+\usepackage{amscd}
+\GetFileInfo{amscd.sty}
+% Dummy citation to avoid error in an example.
+\bibcite{fre:cichon}{C}
+\begin{document}
+\title{The \pkg{amscd} package}
+\author{Frank Mittelbach\and Rainer Sch\"opf\and Michael Downes}
+\date{Version \fileversion, \filedate}
+\DocInput{amscd.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%\fi
+%
+% \maketitle
+% \MaintainedByLaTeXTeam{amslatex}
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb\|
+% \newcommand{\operatorname}[1]{\mathop{\mathrm{#1}}}
+% \newcommand{\per}{\operatorname{per}}
+% \newcommand{\cov}{\operatorname{cov}}
+% \newcommand{\non}{\operatorname{non}}
+% \newcommand{\cf}{\operatorname{cf}}
+% \newcommand{\add}{\operatorname{add}}
+% \newcommand{\End}{\operatorname{End}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% The \pkg{amscd} package provides a \env{CD} environment that
+% emulates the commutative diagram capabilities of \amstex/ version
+% 2.x. This means that only simple rectangular diagrams are
+% supported, with no diagonal arrows or more exotic features. Many
+% users will be better served by one of the more powerful diagram
+% packages such as \pkg{diagram}, \pkg{xypic}, or \pkg{kuvio}.
+%
+% Example:
+% \begin{equation}\begin{CD}
+% S^{{\mathcal{W}}_\Lambda}\otimes T @>j>> T\\
+% @VVV @VV{\End P}V\\
+% (S\otimes T)/I @= (Z\otimes T)/J
+% \end{CD}\end{equation}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \begin{equation}\begin{CD}
+% S^{{\mathcal{W}}_\Lambda}\otimes T @>j>> T\\
+% @VVV @VV{\End P}V\\
+% (S\otimes T)/I @= (Z\otimes T)/J
+% \end{CD}\end{equation}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% (assuming \cn{End} is defined as an `operator name'.
+%
+% Another example:
+%
+% We will make liberal use of Cichon's Diagram \cite{fre:cichon}:
+% \begin{equation}
+% \begin{CD}
+% \cov(\mathcal{L}) @>>> \non(\mathcal{K}) @>>> \cf(\mathcal{K}) @>>>
+% \cf(\mathcal{L})\\
+% @VVV @AAA @AAA @VVV\\
+% \add(\mathcal{L}) @>>> \add(\mathcal{K}) @>>> \cov(\mathcal{K}) @>>>
+% \non(\mathcal{L})
+% \end{CD}\end{equation}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \begin{equation}\begin{CD}
+% \cov(\mathcal{L}) @>>> \non(\mathcal{K}) @>>> \cf(\mathcal{K}) @>>>
+% \cf(\mathcal{L})\\
+% @VVV @AAA @AAA @VVV\\
+% \add(\mathcal{L}) @>>> \add(\mathcal{K}) @>>> \cov(\mathcal{K}) @>>>
+% \non(\mathcal{L})
+% \end{CD}\end{equation}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% Standard package info.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% LaTeX 2.09 can't be used (nor non-LaTeX)
+[1994/12/01]% LaTeX date must December 1994 or later
+\ProvidesPackage{amscd}[2017/04/14 v2.1 AMS Commutative Diagrams]
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{amsgen}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Better not to redefine \verb|\math at cr| if it is already defined,
+% because for CD use only we want to omit the part of the code
+% related to \verb|\dspbrk at lvl| (see \fn{amsmath.sty}).
+%
+% [mjd,1999/11/04] These definitions have gone somewhat obsolete; but
+% we had probably better leave them as they are for backward
+% compatibility.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{math at cr}{%
+ \def\math at cr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+ \@ifstar{\global\@eqpen\@M\math at cr@}%
+ {\global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \math at cr@}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following section merely duplicates some code from the
+% \pkg{amsmath} package, in case the \pkg{amscd} package is used by
+% itself. For documentation of the code refer to \fn{amsmath.dtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\math at cr@{\new at ifnextchar[\math at cr@@{\math at cr@@[\z@]}}
+ \def\math at cr@@[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\math at cr@@@
+ \noalign{\vskip#1\relax}}
+ \def\restore at math@cr{\def\math at cr@@@{\cr}}
+}{}
+\restore at math@cr
+% \end{macrocode}
+% [mjd,1999/11/04] These definitions too are somewhat obsolete;
+% but we had probably better leave them as they are for backward
+% compatibility.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{rightarrowfill@}{
+ \def\rightarrowfill@#1{\m at th\setboxz at h{$#1-$}\ht\z@\z@
+ $#1\copy\z@\mkern-6mu\cleaders
+ \hbox{$#1\mkern-2mu\box\z@\mkern-2mu$}\hfill
+ \mkern-6mu\mathord\rightarrow$}
+ \def\leftarrowfill@#1{\m at th\setboxz at h{$#1-$}\ht\z@\z@
+ $#1\mathord\leftarrow\mkern-6mu\cleaders
+ \hbox{$#1\mkern-2mu\copy\z@\mkern-2mu$}\hfill
+ \mkern-6mu\box\z@$}
+ \def\leftrightarrowfill@#1{\m at th\setboxz at h{$#1-$}\ht\z@\z@
+ $#1\mathord\leftarrow\mkern-6mu\cleaders
+ \hbox{$#1\mkern-2mu\box\z@\mkern-2mu$}\hfill
+ \mkern-6mu\mathord\rightarrow$}
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\atdef@#1{\expandafter\def\csname\space @\string#1\endcsname}
+\@ifundefined{Iat}{%
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\Iat}{\FN@\at@}
+}{}
+\begingroup \catcode`\@=\active
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Define math \qc{\@} to replicate its mathcode-dictated behavior.
+% This is in case \qc{\@} occurs outside of \env{CD}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\csname if\string @compatibility\endcsname
+\else \fam=\mathcode`\@
+ \xdef @{\mathchar\number\fam\space }
+\fi
+\gdef\CDat{\let @=\Iat}
+\endgroup
+\mathcode`\@="8000 % make @ pseudo-active in math
+\def\at@{\let\next@\at@@
+ \ifcat\noexpand\next a\else
+ \ifcat\noexpand\next0\else
+ \ifcat\noexpand\next\relax\else
+ \let\next@\at@@@\fi\fi\fi\next@}
+\def\at@@#1{\expandafter
+ \ifx\csname\space @\string#1\endcsname\relax
+ \DN@{\at@@@#1}%
+ \else
+ \DN@{\csname\space @\string#1\endcsname}%
+ \fi\next@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following items should be defined only if they are not
+% already defined, either to leave the package name untouched (in
+% the case of \cs{PackageError}) or to avoid redundant allocation
+% of token or dimen registers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{default at tag}{%
+ \def\default at tag{%
+ \def\tag{\PackageError{amscd}{\protect\tag\space not allowed
+ here}\@eha}}%
+}{}%
+\@ifundefined{at@@@}{%
+ \def\at@@@{\PackageError{amscd}{\Invalid@@ @}{\the\athelp@}\char64\relax}
+}{}
+\@ifundefined{athelp@}{\csname newhelp\endcsname\athelp@
+{Only certain combinations beginning with @ make sense to me.^^J%
+I'll assume you wanted @@ for a printed @.}}{}
+\@ifundefined{minaw@}{\newdimen\minaw@}{}
+\@ifundefined{bigaw@}{\newdimen\bigaw@}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Assignment of a couple of dimensions, and initialization of
+% \verb=\ampersand@=. We check to see if we need to define
+% \verb=\minaw@= and \verb=\bigaw@=.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\minaw at 11.111pt
+\newdimen\minCDarrowwidth
+\minCDarrowwidth2.5pc
+\newif\ifCD@
+\let\ampersand@\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Added \verb|\restore at math@cr\default at tag| to fix line numbering
+% problems, 7-JUN-1991. Suggested by I.~Zakharevich.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{CD}{%
+ \CDat
+ \bgroup\relax\iffalse{\fi\let\ampersand@&\iffalse}\fi
+ \CD at true\vcenter\bgroup\let\\\math at cr\restore at math@cr\default at tag
+ \tabskip\z at skip\baselineskip20\ex@
+ \lineskip3\ex@\lineskiplimit3\ex@\halign\bgroup
+ &\hfill$\m at th##$\hfill\crcr
+}{%
+ \crcr\egroup\egroup\egroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\CD at check}
+% This check is used by all macros that must not appear outside the
+% \env{CD} environment. The first argument is the symbol to be used
+% after \verb+ at +, the second one the action to be performed.
+%
+% Once again we use the trick of defining a temporary control
+% sequence \verb+\next at + and calling it after the final \verb+\fi+.
+% This is not absolutely necessary, but it ensures that the
+% conditional text is processed in one and the same column
+% of the enclosing alignment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\CD at check#1#2{\ifCD@\DN@{#2}\else
+ \DN@{\PackageError{amscd}{@\protect#1 not
+ allowed outside of the CD environment}\@eha}%
+ \fi\next@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\atdef@>#1>#2>{\ampersand@
+ \ifCD@ \global\bigaw@\minCDarrowwidth \else \global\bigaw@\minaw@ \fi
+ \setboxz at h{$\m at th\scriptstyle\;{#1}\;\;$}%
+ \ifdim\wdz@>\bigaw@\global\bigaw@\wdz@\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If \verb|#2| is empty we can save some work.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifnotempty{#2}{\setbox\@ne\hbox{$\m at th\scriptstyle\;{#2}\;\;$}%
+ \ifdim\wd\@ne>\bigaw@\global\bigaw@\wd\@ne\fi}%
+ \ifCD@\enskip\fi
+ \mathrel{\mathop{\hbox to\bigaw@{\rightarrowfill@\displaystyle}}%
+ \limits^{#1}\@ifnotempty{#2}{_{#2}}}%
+ \ifCD@\enskip\fi \ampersand@}
+%
+\atdef@<#1<#2<{\ampersand@
+ \ifCD@ \global\bigaw@\minCDarrowwidth \else \global\bigaw@\minaw@ \fi
+ \setboxz at h{$\m at th\scriptstyle\;\;{#1}\;$}%
+ \ifdim\wdz@>\bigaw@ \global\bigaw@\wdz@ \fi
+ \@ifnotempty{#2}{\setbox\@ne\hbox{$\m at th\scriptstyle\;\;{#2}\;$}%
+ \ifdim\wd\@ne>\bigaw@ \global\bigaw@\wd\@ne \fi}%
+ \ifCD@\enskip\fi
+ \mathrel{\mathop{\hbox to\bigaw@{\leftarrowfill@\displaystyle}}%
+ \limits^{#1}\@ifnotempty{#2}{_{#2}}}%
+ \ifCD@\enskip\fi \ampersand@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Variants of the above two arrows, using \verb|(| and \verb|)|
+% characters instead of \verb|<| and \verb|>| characters, are
+% provided for those whose keyboards don't have the latter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup \catcode`\~=\active \lccode`\~=`\@
+\lowercase{%
+ \global\atdef@)#1)#2){~>#1>#2>}
+ \global\atdef@(#1(#2({~<#1<#2<}
+}% end lowercase
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\atdef@ A#1A#2A{\CD at check{A..A..A}{\llap{$\m at th\vcenter{\hbox
+ {$\scriptstyle#1$}}$}\Big\uparrow
+ \rlap{$\m at th\vcenter{\hbox{$\scriptstyle#2$}}$}&&}}
+%
+\atdef@ V#1V#2V{\CD at check{V..V..V}{\llap{$\m at th\vcenter{\hbox
+ {$\scriptstyle#1$}}$}\Big\downarrow
+ \rlap{$\m at th\vcenter{\hbox{$\scriptstyle#2$}}$}&&}}
+%
+\atdef@={\CD at check={&\enskip\mathrel
+ {\vbox{\hrule\@width\minCDarrowwidth\vskip2\ex@\hrule\@width
+ \minCDarrowwidth}}\enskip&}}
+%
+\atdef@|{\CD at check|{\Big\Vert&&}}
+%
+\atdef@\vert{\CD at check\vert{\Big\Vert&&}}
+%
+\atdef at .{\CD at check.{&&}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \cn{pretend} command has weird syntax that doesn't fit well
+% with standard \latex/ syntax so we leave it undone, at least for
+% now. [mjd,1994/10/27]
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\pretend#1\haswidth#2{\setboxz at h{$\m at th\scriptstyle{#2}$}\hbox
+% to\wdz@{\hfill$\m at th\scriptstyle{#1}$\hfill}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The usual \cs{endinput} to ensure that random garbage at the end of
+% the file doesn't get copied by \fn{docstrip}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\endinput
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \CheckSum{459}
+% \Finale
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.dtx
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.ins
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.ins (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amscd.ins 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+%%
+%% Copyright 2010 American Mathematical Society.
+%% Copyright 2016 LaTeX3 Project and American Mathematical Society.
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+%%
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is the LaTeX3 Project.
+%%
+%% ====================================================================
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\askforoverwritefalse
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\preamble
+
+Copyright 1995, 1999 American Mathematical Society.
+Copyright 2016 LaTeX3 Project and American Mathematical Society.
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+
+The Current Maintainer of this work is the LaTeX3 project.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\usedir{tex/latex/amsmath}
+
+\generate{
+ \file{amscd.sty}{\from{amscd.dtx}{}}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.dtx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.dtx (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.dtx 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,386 @@
+%
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1995, 1999 American Mathematical Society.
+% Copyright (C) 2016-2019 LaTeX3 Project and American Mathematical Society.
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+%
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is the LaTeX3 Project.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{amsdtx}
+\def\MaintainedByLaTeXTeam#1{%
+\begin{center}%
+\fbox{\fbox{\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}%
+This file is maintained by the \LaTeX{} Project team.\\%
+Bug reports can be opened (category \texttt{#1}) at\\%
+\url{https://latex-project.org/bugs/}.\end{tabular}}}\end{center}}
+\usepackage{amsgen}
+\GetFileInfo{amsgen.sty}
+\begin{document}
+\title{The \pkg{amsgen} package}
+\author{American Mathematical Society\\Michael Downes}
+\date{Version \fileversion, \filedate}
+\DocInput{amsgen.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \maketitle
+% \MaintainedByLaTeXTeam{amslatex}
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb\|
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This is an internal package for storing common functions
+% that are shared by more than one package in the \amslatex/
+% distribution. Some of these might eventually make it into the \latex/
+% kernel.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% Standard package info.
+% Using \cs{ProvidesFile} rather than \cs{ProvidesPackage} because
+% the latter, when input by, e.g, \cls{amsbook}, results in
+% \texttt{LaTeX warning: You have requested document class `amsbook',
+% but the document class provides `amsgen'.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% LaTeX 2.09 can't be used (nor non-LaTeX)
+[1994/12/01]% LaTeX date must December 1994 or later
+\ProvidesFile{amsgen.sty}[1999/11/30 v2.0 generic functions]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+% Some general macros shared by \fn{amsart.dtx}, \fn{amsmath.dtx},
+% \fn{amsfonts.dtx}, \dots
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@saveprimitive}
+% The \pkg{amsmath} package redefines a number of \tex/ primitives.
+% In case some preceding package also decided to redefine one of
+% those same primitives, we had better do some checking to make
+% sure that we are able to save the primitive meaning for internal
+% use. This is handled by the \cs{@saveprimitive} function. We
+% follow the example of \cs{@@input} where the primitive meaning is
+% stored in an internal control sequence with a |@@| prefix.
+% Primitive control sequences can be distinguished by the fact that
+% \cs{string} and \cs{meaning} return the same information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\@saveprimitive}[2]{\begingroup\escapechar`\\\relax
+ \edef\@tempa{\string#1}\edef\@tempb{\meaning#1}%
+ \ifx\@tempa\@tempb \global\let#2#1%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Check to see if \arg{2} was already given the desired primitive
+% meaning somewhere else.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\@tempb{\meaning#2}%
+ \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \else
+ \@latex at error{Unable to properly define \string#2; primitive
+ \noexpand#1no longer primitive}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xp}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nx}
+% Shorthands for long command names.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@xp=\expandafter
+\let\@nx=\noexpand
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@emptytoks}
+% A token register companion for \cs{@empty}. Saves a little main mem and
+% probably makes initializations such as |\toks@{}| run faster too.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\@emptytoks
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@oparg}
+% Use of \cs{@oparg} simplifies some constructions where a macro
+% takes an optional argument in square brackets. We can't use
+% \cn{newcommand} here because this function might be previously
+% defined by the \pkg{amsmath} package in a loading sequence such as
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \usepackage{amsmath,amsthm}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@oparg#1[#2]{\@ifnextchar[{#1}{#1[#2]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifempty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnotempty}
+% |\@ifnotempty| and |\@ifempty| use category 11 |@| characters to
+% test whether the argument is empty or not, since these are highly
+% unlikely to occur in the argument. As with \cn{@oparg}, there is a
+% possibility that these commands were defined previously in
+% \fn{amsmath.sty}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@ifempty#1{\@xifempty#1@@..\@nil}
+\long\def\@xifempty#1#2@#3#4#5\@nil{%
+ \ifx#3#4\@xp\@firstoftwo\else\@xp\@secondoftwo\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{@ifnotempty} is a shorthand that makes code read better when
+% no action is needed in the empty case. At a cost of double
+% argument-reading---so for often-executed code, avoiding
+% \cs{@ifnotempty} might be wise.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@ifnotempty#1{\@ifempty{#1}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Some abbreviations to conserve token mem.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\FN@{\futurelet\@let at token}
+\def\DN@{\def\next@}
+\def\RIfM@{\relax\ifmmode}
+\def\setboxz at h{\setbox\z@\hbox}
+\def\wdz@{\wd\z@}
+\def\boxz@{\box\z@}
+\def\relaxnext@{\let\@let at token\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\new at ifnextchar}
+% This macro is a new version of \latex/'s \verb+\@ifnextchar+,
+% macro that does not skip over spaces.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\new at ifnextchar#1#2#3{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% By including the space after the equals sign, we make it possible
+% for \cs{new at ifnextchar} to do look-ahead for any token, including a
+% space!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\reserved at d= #1%
+ \def\reserved at a{#2}\def\reserved at b{#3}%
+ \futurelet\@let at token\new at ifnch
+}
+%
+\def\new at ifnch{%
+ \ifx\@let at token\reserved at d \let\reserved at b\reserved at a \fi
+ \reserved at b
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifstar}
+% There will essentially never be a space before the \qc{\*}, so
+% using \cs{@ifnextchar} is unnecessarily slow.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ifstar#1#2{\new at ifnextchar *{\def\reserved at a*{#1}\reserved at a}{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The hook \cs{every at size} was changed to \cs{every at math@size} in the
+% December 1994 release of \latex/ and its calling procedures changed.
+% If \cs{every at math@size} is undefined it means the user has an older
+% version of \latex/ so we had better define it and patch a couple of
+% functions (\cs{glb at settings} and \cs{set at fontsize}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{every at math@size}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Reuse the same token register; since it was never used except for
+% the purposes that are affected below, this is OK.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\every at math@size=\every at size
+\def\glb at settings{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname S@\f at size\endcsname\relax
+ \calculate at math@sizes
+ \fi
+ \csname S@\f at size\endcsname
+ \ifmath at fonts
+% \ifnum \tracingfonts>\tw@
+% \@font at info{Setting up math fonts for
+% \f at size/\f at baselineskip}\fi
+ \begingroup
+ \escapechar\m at ne
+ \csname mv@\math at version \endcsname
+ \globaldefs\@ne
+ \let \glb at currsize \f at size
+ \math at fonts
+ \endgroup
+ \the\every at math@size
+ \else
+% \ifnum \tracingfonts>\tw@
+% \@font at info{No math setup for \f at size/\f at baselineskip}%
+% \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Remove |\the\every at size| from \cs{size at update}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at fontsize#1#2#3{%
+ \@defaultunits\@tempdimb#2pt\relax\@nnil
+ \edef\f at size{\strip at pt\@tempdimb}%
+ \@defaultunits\@tempskipa#3pt\relax\@nnil
+ \edef\f at baselineskip{\the\@tempskipa}%
+ \edef\f at linespread{#1}%
+ \let\baselinestretch\f at linespread
+ \def\size at update{%
+ \baselineskip\f at baselineskip\relax
+ \baselineskip\f at linespread\baselineskip
+ \normalbaselineskip\baselineskip
+ \setbox\strutbox\hbox{%
+ \vrule\@height.7\baselineskip
+ \@depth.3\baselineskip
+ \@width\z@}%
+%%% \the\every at size
+ \let\size at update\relax}%
+ }
+}{}% end \@ifundefined test
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ex@}
+% The \cs{ex@} variable provides a small unit of space for use in
+% math-mode constructions, that varies according to the current type
+% size. For example, the \cn{pmb} command uses \cs{ex@} units.
+% Since a macro or mu unit solution for the \meta{dimen} \cs{ex@} won't
+% work without changing a lot of current code in the \pkg{amsmath}
+% package, we set \cs{ex@} through the \cs{every at math@size} hook.
+% The value of \cs{ex@} is scaled nonlinearly in a range of roughly
+% 0.5pt to 1.5pt, by the function \cs{compute at ex@}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\ex@
+\addto at hook\every at math@size{\compute at ex@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \cs{compute at ex@} computes \cs{ex@} as a nonlinear scaling from 10pt
+% to current font size (\cs{f at size}). Using .97 as the multiplier makes 1
+% |ex@| $\approx$ .9pt when the current type size is 8pt and 1 |ex@|
+% $\approx$ 1.1pt when the current type size is 12pt.
+%
+% The formula is essentially
+% \begin{displaymath}
+% \newcommand{\points}{\mbox{pt}}
+% \newcommand{\floor}[1]{\lfloor#1\rfloor}
+% 1\points \pm (1\points - (.97)^{\floor{\vert 10 - n\vert}})
+% \end{displaymath}
+% where $n$ = current type size, but adjusted to differentiate
+% half-point sizes as well as whole point sizes, and there is a
+% cutoff for extraordinarily large values of \cs{f at size} ($>$ 20pt)
+% so that the value of \cs{ex@} never exceeds 1.5pt.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\compute at ex@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \dimen at -\f at size\p@
+ \ifdim\dimen@<-20\p@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Never make \cs{ex@} larger than 1.5pt.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\ex@ 1.5\p@
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Adjust by the reference size and multiply by 2 to allow for
+% half-point sizes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance\dimen at 10\p@ \multiply\dimen@\tw@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Save information about the current sign of \cs{dimen@}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\@tempa{\ifdim\dimen@>\z@ -\fi}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Get the absolute value of \cs{dimen@}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \dimen@ \ifdim\dimen@<\z@ -\fi \dimen@
+ \advance\dimen at -\@m sp % fudge factor
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here we use \cs{vfuzz} merely as a convenient scratch register
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \vfuzz\p@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Multiply in a loop.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\do{\ifdim\dimen@>\z@
+ \vfuzz=.97\vfuzz
+ \advance\dimen@ -\p@
+%\message{\vfuzz: \the\vfuzz, \dimen@: \the\dimen@}%
+ \@xp\do \fi}%
+ \do
+ \dimen@\p@ \advance\dimen at -\vfuzz
+ \global\ex@\p@
+ \global\advance\ex@ \@tempa\dimen@
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+%\typeout{\string\f at size: \f at size}\showthe\ex@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Tests of the \cs{compute at ex@} function yield the following results:
+%
+% \begin{center}\begin{tabular}{rlrl}
+% \cs{f at size}& \cs{ex@}& \cs{f at size}& \cs{ex@}\\
+% 10& 1.0pt& 9& 0.94089pt\\
+% 11& 1.05911pt& 8.7& 0.91266pt\\
+% 12& 1.11473pt& 8.5& 0.91266pt\\
+% 14.4& 1.23982pt& 8.4& 0.88527pt\\
+% 17.28& 1.36684pt& 8& 0.88527pt\\
+% 20.74& 1.5pt& 7& 0.83293pt\\
+% 19.5& 1.4395pt& 6& 0.78369pt\\
+% && 5& 0.73737pt\\
+% && 1& 0.57785pt
+% \end{tabular}\end{center}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addpunct}
+% Use of the \cs{@addpunct} function allows ending punctuation in
+% section headings and elsewhere to be intelligently omitted
+% when punctuation is already present.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addpunct#1{\ifnum\spacefactor>\@m \else#1\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frenchspacing}
+% Change \cn{frenchspacing} to ensure that \cs{@addpunct} will
+% continue to work properly even when `french' spacing is in effect.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode`\.1006\sfcode`\?1005\sfcode`\!1004%
+ \sfcode`\:1003\sfcode`\;1002\sfcode`\,1001 }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Miscellaneous}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nomath at env{\@amsmath at err{%
+ \string\begin{\@currenvir} allowed only in paragraph mode%
+}\@ehb% "You've lost some text"
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A trade-off between main memory space and hash size; using
+% \verb+\Invalid@@+ saves 14 bytes of main memory for each use of
+% \verb+\Invalid at +, at the cost of one control sequence name.
+% \verb+\Invalid at + is currently used about five times and
+% \verb+\Invalid@@+ is used by itself in some other instances,
+% which means that it saves us more memory than \verb+\FN at +,
+% \verb+\RIfM at +, and some of the other abbreviations above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Invalid@@{Invalid use of \string}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The usual \cs{endinput} to ensure that random garbage at the end of
+% the file doesn't get copied by \fn{docstrip}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\endinput
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \CheckSum{337}
+% \Finale
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.dtx
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.ins
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.ins (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsgen.ins 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+%%
+%% Copyright 2010 American Mathematical Society.
+%% Copyright 2016 LaTeX3 Project and American Mathematical Society.
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+%%
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is the LaTeX3 Project.
+%%
+%% ====================================================================
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\askforoverwritefalse
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\preamble
+
+Copyright 1995, 1999 American Mathematical Society.
+Copyright 2016 LaTeX3 Project and American Mathematical Society.
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+
+The Current Maintainer of this work is the LaTeX3 project.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\usedir{tex/latex/amsmath}
+
+\generate{
+ \file{amsgen.sty}{\from{amsgen.dtx}{}}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.dtx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.dtx (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.dtx 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,6383 @@
+%
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1995, 2000, 2013 American Mathematical Society.
+% Copyright (C) 2016-2019 LaTeX3 Project and American Mathematical Society.
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+%
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is the LaTeX3 Project.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+%\iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{amsdtx}
+\def\MaintainedByLaTeXTeam#1{%
+\begin{center}%
+\fbox{\fbox{\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}%
+This file is maintained by the \LaTeX{} Project team.\\%
+Bug reports can be opened (category \texttt{#1}) at\\%
+\url{https://latex-project.org/bugs/}.\end{tabular}}}\end{center}}
+\raggedbottom
+\let\savedarg\arg
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\let\arg\savedarg
+\GetFileInfo{amsmath.sty}
+\begin{document}
+\title{The \pkg{amsmath} package}
+\author{Frank Mittelbach\and Rainer Sch\"opf\and Michael Downes\and
+ David M. Jones\and David Carlisle}
+\date{Version \fileversion, \filedate}
+\providecommand{\histnote}{}
+\renewenvironment{histnote}{%
+ \trivlist\item[\hspace{\labelsep}\bfseries Historical Note:]%
+}{%
+ \endtrivlist
+}
+\DocInput{amsmath.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%\fi
+%
+% \maketitle
+% \MaintainedByLaTeXTeam{amslatex}
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb\|
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% A \latex/ package named \pkg{amstex} was created in 1988--1989 by
+% adapting \fn{amstex.tex} for use within \latex/. The \pkg{amsmath}
+% package is the successor of the \pkg{amstex} package. It was
+% substantially overhauled to integrate it with \latex/2e, which
+% arrived on the scene in 1994. It provides more or less the same
+% features, but there are quite a few organizational differences as
+% well as some new features and bug fixes. For example, the
+% \pkg{amstex} package automatically loaded the \pkg{amsfonts}
+% package, but the \pkg{amsmath} package does not. At the present
+% time (November 1999) user-level documentation of the commands
+% provided here is found in the AMSmath Users' Guide,
+% \fn{amsldoc.tex}.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% Standard file identification.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% LaTeX 2.09 can't be used (nor non-LaTeX)
+[1994/12/01]% LaTeX date must be December 1994 or later
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Providing a rollback to earlier version(s)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\DeclareRelease[3]{}
+\providecommand\DeclareCurrentRelease[2]{}
+%
+\DeclareRelease{}{2018-12-01}{amsmath-2018-12-01.sty}
+\DeclareCurrentRelease{}{2019-04-01}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesPackage{amsmath}[2019/04/01 v2.17c AMS math features]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Catcode defenses}
+%
+% Some packages change the catcode of characters that are essential
+% in low-level \tex/ syntax. Any package that does so does not
+% qualify as a PWWO package (\qq{Plays Well With Others}) because it
+% can cause other packages to fail if they are loaded later. \LaTeX{}
+% is partly to blame for this because it fails to provide adequate
+% built-in safeguards in the package loading mechanisms. In the
+% absence of such safeguards, we will provide them here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\@temp{\catcode 96=\number\catcode 96 }
+\catcode\string `\`=12
+\def\do#1{\catcode\number`#1=\number\catcode`#1}
+\edef\@temp{%
+ \noexpand\AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \@temp
+ \do\"\do\'\do\(\do\)\do\*\do\+\do\,\do\-\do\.%
+ \do\/\do\<\do\=\do\>\do\[\do\]\do\^\do\_\relax
+ }%
+}
+\@temp
+\def\do#1{\catcode\number`#1=12 }
+\do\"\do\'\do\(\do\)\do\*\do\+\do\,\do\-\do\.
+\do\/\do\<\do\=\do\>\do\[\do\]
+\catcode`\^=7 \catcode`\_=8
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Declare some options}
+%
+% Handling of limits on integrals, sums, operatornames.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{intlimits}{\let\ilimits@\displaylimits}
+\DeclareOption{nointlimits}{\let\ilimits@\nolimits}
+\DeclareOption{sumlimits}{\let\slimits@\displaylimits}
+\DeclareOption{nosumlimits}{\let\slimits@\nolimits}
+\DeclareOption{namelimits}{\PassOptionsToPackage{namelimits}{amsopn}}
+\DeclareOption{nonamelimits}{%
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{nonamelimits}{amsopn}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following two switches might have been defined already by the
+% documentclass, but it doesn't hurt to re-execute the \cs{newif}'s.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifctagsplit@
+\newif\iftagsleft@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Right or left placement of equation numbers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{leqno}{\tagsleft at true}
+\DeclareOption{reqno}{\tagsleft at false}
+\DeclareOption{centertags}{\ctagsplit at true}
+\DeclareOption{tbtags}{\ctagsplit at false}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \opt{cmex10} option is an escape hatch for people who don't
+% happen to have sizes 7--9 of the \fn{cmex} fonts available to them
+% yet. (Strictly speaking they are considered part of a minimum
+% \latex/ distribution now, i.e., all \LaTeXe{} users should have
+% them, without needing to get the AMSFonts distrib.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{cmex10}{%
+ \ifnum\cmex at opt=\@ne \def\cmex at opt{0}%
+ \else \def\cmex at opt{10}\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To help things work out better with various package loading orders
+% of \pkg{amsmath} and \pkg{amsfonts}, we establish a variable to
+% communicate the status of the cmex font definition. If the
+% \pkg{amsfonts} package was loaded first this variable might be
+% already defined, in which case we want to preserve its value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{cmex at opt}{\def\cmex at opt{7}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Flush-left equations [DMJ]}
+%
+% The left margin of math enviroments is controlled by
+% \cs{@mathmargin}. This can be set to \cs{@centering} to
+% implement the default behaviour, i.e., centered equations, and to
+% something else to implement the flushleft style.
+%
+% In theory, all that's needed to activate the flushleft mode
+% in the AMS document classes is something like this:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareOption{fleqn}{%
+% \AtBeginDocument{\@mathmargin30pt\relax}%
+% }
+% \end{verbatim}
+% (In fact, unless the document class wants to specify the
+% \cs{@mathmargin}, it doesn't need to do anything with the
+% \opt{fleqn} option.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if at fleqn
+%
+\newskip\@mathmargin
+\@mathmargin\@centering
+%
+\DeclareOption{fleqn}{%
+ \@fleqntrue
+ \@mathmargin = -1sp
+ \let\mathindent=\@mathmargin
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifdim\@mathmargin= -1sp
+ \@mathmargin\leftmargini minus\leftmargini
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% DMJ: This ensures that \cs{@mathmargin} is given some sort of
+% sensible default if the class doesn't specify one, while still
+% allowing a user to override the default value in their document
+% preamble. (Incidentally, I'm initializing \cs{@mathmargin} to
+% \cs{leftmargini} for compatibility with \fn{fleqn.clo}, but I'm
+% not at all convinced that's the right thing to do.)
+%
+% The next question is what happens when amsmath is used with
+% one of the standard classes. Unfortunately, \latex/ implements
+% \opt{fleqn} somewhat clumsily; instead of paramaterizing the
+% definitions of the math structures (as I've attempted to do
+% here), \fn{fleqn.clo} declares a dimen \cn{mathindent} that is
+% much like my \cs{@mathmargin} and then redefines \cn\[, \cn\],
+% \cn{equation}, and \cn{eqnarray}. This means that things could
+% get rather messy in 2.09 compatibility mode, since \fn{fleqn.clo}
+% might be loaded after \fn{amsmath.sty}, which could cause a real
+% mess.
+%
+% [mjd,1999/07/07]: Let \cs{mathindent} = \cs{@mathmargin} as
+% envisioned by DMJ. Compatibility-mode documents will all use the
+% \pkg{amstex} package, not \pkg{amsmath}. There is a remote chance
+% of a problem if someone makes an assignment to \cs{mathindent} in a
+% way that implicitly assumes it is a dimen register (inasmuch as it
+% has now become a skip register), and the string ``plus'' follows in
+% the input stream, but if someone's document croaks in that way, I
+% think they will just have to bite the bullet and fix it. The
+% alternative is to penalize a lot of other users with a known
+% handicap.
+%
+% \section{Spacing around \cn{aligned} and \cn{gathered}}
+%
+% [dpc, 2016] Option to control the space to the left of aligned and gathered.
+%
+% Previously \cn{aligned} and \cn{gathered} inserted a thin space on
+% their left but not their right, there is no good reason for this
+% that anyone can remember, it has just always been that way
+% inherited from amstex. The usual advice to authors has been to use
+% |\!\begin{aligned}| to get better spacing.
+%
+% Here introduce:
+%
+% \opt{alignedleftspaceyes} to keep the behaviour of adding this space.
+%
+% \opt{alignedleftspaceno} to disable adding this space.
+%
+% \opt{alignedleftspaceyesifneg} the new default behaviour, do not add
+% the space unless the environment is preceded by a negative skip or
+% kern, so that |\!\begin{aligned}| works as before.
+%
+% \changes{v2.16a}{2016/11/05}{New options to control aligned spacing}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{alignedleftspaceyes}{\def\alignedspace at left{\null\,}}
+\DeclareOption{alignedleftspaceno}{\def\alignedspace at left{\null}}
+\DeclareOption{alignedleftspaceyesifneg}{%
+\def\alignedspace at left{%
+ \edef\@tempa{\expandafter\@car\the\lastskip\@nil}%
+ \if-\@tempa\null\,%
+ \else
+ \edef\@tempa{\expandafter\@car\the\lastkern\@nil}%
+ \if-\@tempa\null\,%
+ \else\null
+ \fi
+ \fi}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{?}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExecuteOptions{%
+ nointlimits,sumlimits,namelimits,centertags,alignedleftspaceyesifneg}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \cs{par} after \cs{ProcessOptions} is to ensure the correct
+% line number on screen if an error occurs during option processing;
+% otherwise the lookahead for a \qc{\*} option would result in \tex/
+% showing the following line instead.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions\par
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackagewith{amsmath}{?}{%
+ \typeout{^^J%
+Documentation for the amsmath package is found in amsldoc.dvi^^J%
+(or .pdf or .tex).^^J%
+^^J%
+See also https://www.ams.org/tex/amslatex.html.^^J%
+^^J%
+Note: Using the first edition of The LaTeX Companion (1994) without^^J%
+errata as a guide for amsmath use is not recommended.^^J%
+ }%
+}{%
+ \typeout{%
+For additional information on amsmath, use the \lq ?\rq\space option.%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Processing to handle the \opt{cmex10} option is a little tricky
+% because of different possible loading orders for \pkg{amsmath} and
+% \pkg{amsfonts}. The package \pkg{amsmath} sets the \cs{cmex at opt}
+% flag to 7 or 10, and the package \pkg{amsfonts} sets the flag to 1
+% or 0.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifnum\cmex at opt=7 \relax
+ \DeclareFontShape{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}{%
+ <-8>cmex7<8>cmex8<9>cmex9%
+ <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmex10%
+ }{}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname OMX/cmex/m/n/10\endcsname\relax
+\else
+ \ifnum\cmex at opt=\z@ % need to override cmex7 fontdef from amsfonts
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Force reloading of the OMX/cmex font definition file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \fontencoding{OMX}\fontfamily{cmex}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname OMX+cmex\endcsname\relax
+ \try at load@fontshape
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \fn{cmex10} font gets special preload handling in the building
+% of the \latex/ format file, need an extra bit here to work around
+% that.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\let\csname OMX/cmex/m/n/10\endcsname\relax
+ \def\cmex at opt{10}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Call some other packages}
+%
+% The \pkg{amstext} package provides the \cn{text} command. The
+% \pkg{amsbsy} package provides \cn{boldsymbol} and \cn{pmb}. (Since
+% 1997 it is usually better to use the \pkg{bm} package instead; but
+% I think we have to keep \pkg{amsbsy} here for backward
+% compatibility [mjd,1999/11/19].) The \pkg{amsopn} package provides
+% \cn{DeclareMathOperator}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{amstext}[1995/01/25]
+\RequirePackage{amsbsy}[1995/01/20]
+\RequirePackage{amsopn}[1995/01/20]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Miscellaneous}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ams at newcommand}
+% Where \pkg{stix} and \pkg{amsmath} define the same control
+% sequences, we want to avoid inadvertently overriding \pkg{stix}'s
+% definitions. If \pkg{stix} is loaded before \pkg{amsmath}, the
+% following conditional takes care of the problem. There is
+% similar code in the \pkg{stix} package in case \pkg{amsmath} is
+% loaded first.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{stix}{%
+ \let\ams at newcommand\providecommand
+ \let\ams at renewcommand\providecommand
+ \let\ams at def\providecommand
+ \let\ams at DeclareRobustCommand\providecommand
+}{%
+ \let\ams at newcommand\newcommand
+ \let\ams at renewcommand\renewcommand
+ \let\ams at def\def
+ \let\ams at DeclareRobustCommand\DeclareRobustCommand
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@amsmath at err}
+% Defining this error function saves main mem.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@amsmath at err{\PackageError{amsmath}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AmS}
+% The \cs{AmS} prefix can be used to construct the combination
+% |\AmS-\LaTeX|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\AmS}{{\protect\AmSfont
+ A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In \cn{AmSfont} we call cmsy directly in lieu of trying to access
+% it through the math fonts setup (e.g. |\the\textfont2|) because
+% math fonts can't be relied on to be properly set up if we are not
+% inside a math formula. This means that if this command is used in a
+% document where CM fonts are not wanted, then a font substitution
+% will need to be declared, e.g.:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}{ <-> sub * xxx/m/n }{}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% where |xxx| is some alternate font family.
+% Taking the first letter of \cs{f at series} will produce |b| or |m|
+% for the most common values (|b,bx,m|). It may produce nonsense for
+% more unusual values of \cs{f at series}, so for safety's sake we have
+% an additional \cs{if} test. We want to avoid setting the series to
+% |bx| because in a standard \latex/ installation the combination
+% |cmsy/bx/n| does not have a font definition, and the user
+% would get a font substitution warning on screen.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\AmSfont}{%
+ \usefont{OMS}{cmsy}{\if\@xp\@car\f at series\@nil bb\else m\fi}{n}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mathmeasure}
+% The function |\@mathmeasure| takes three arguments; the third arg
+% is typeset as a math formula in an hbox, using arg |#2| as the
+% mathstyle, and the result is left in the box named by the first
+% arg. It is assumed that we are already in math mode, so we can turn
+% off |\everymath| (in particular, |\check at mathfonts|).
+%
+% As of 2018/12 release we don't turn off |\evermath| as this
+% optimization can be harmful.
+% \changes{v2.17b}{2018/12/01}{Don't drop \cs{frozen at everymath}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\leavevmode at ifvmode\@undefined % kernel is < 2018/12
+\def\@mathmeasure#1#2#3{\setbox#1\hbox{\frozen at everymath\@emptytoks
+ \m at th$#2#3$}}
+\else
+\def\@mathmeasure#1#2#3{\setbox#1\hbox{%
+ \m at th$#2#3$}}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The \cs{inf at bad} constant is for testing overfull boxes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{inf at bad}{%
+ \newcount\inf at bad \inf at bad=1000000 \relax
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Math spacing commands}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tmspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\,}
+% \begin{macro}{\thinspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\!}
+% \begin{macro}{\negthinspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\:}
+% \begin{macro}{\medspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\negmedspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\;}
+% \begin{macro}{\thickspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\negthickspace}
+% Here we fill in some gaps in the set of spacing commands, and make them
+% all work equally well in or out of math.
+% We want all these commands to be robust but declaring them all with
+% \cs{DeclareRobustCommand} uses up an control sequence name per
+% command; to avoid this, we define a common command \cs{tmspace}
+% (text-or-math space) which carries the robustness burden for all of
+% them. The standard \cs{relax} before the \cs{ifmmode} is not
+% necessary because of the \cs{protect} added by
+% \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}.
+% \changes{v2.17b}{2018/12/01}{Start LR-mode for \cs{thinspace} and
+% friends if necessary (github/49)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\leavevmode at ifvmode\@undefined
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\tmspace}[3]{%
+ \ifmmode\mskip#1#2\else\kern#1#3\fi\relax}
+\else
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\tmspace}[3]{%
+ \ifmmode\mskip#1#2\else\leavevmode at ifvmode\kern#1#3\fi\relax}
+\fi
+\renewcommand{\,}{\tmspace+\thinmuskip{.1667em}}
+\let\thinspace\,
+\renewcommand{\!}{\tmspace-\thinmuskip{.1667em}}
+\let\negthinspace\!
+\renewcommand{\:}{\tmspace+\medmuskip{.2222em}}
+\let\medspace\:
+\newcommand{\negmedspace}{\tmspace-\medmuskip{.2222em}}
+\renewcommand{\;}{\tmspace+\thickmuskip{.2777em}}
+\let\thickspace\;
+\newcommand{\negthickspace}{\tmspace-\thickmuskip{.2777em}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mspace}
+% And while we're at it, why don't we provide an equivalent of
+% \cn{hspace} for math mode use. This allows use of |mu| units in
+% (for example) constructing compound math symbols.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mspace}[1]{\mskip#1\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical bar symbols}
+% \begin{macro}{\lvert}
+% \begin{macro}{\rvert}
+% \begin{macro}{\lVert}
+% \begin{macro}{\rVert}
+% Add left/right specific versions of \cn{vert}, \cn{Vert}. Don't
+% assume the delimiter codes are the CM defaults.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tempa#1#2\@nil{%
+ \ifx\delimiter#1\@tempcnta#2\relax\else\@tempcnta\z@\fi
+}
+\@xp\@tempa\vert\@empty\@nil
+\ifnum\@tempcnta>\z@
+ \advance\@tempcnta "4000000
+ \xdef\lvert{\delimiter\number\@tempcnta\space }
+ \advance\@tempcnta "1000000
+ \xdef\rvert{\delimiter\number\@tempcnta\space }
+\else
+ \ifx\@@undefined\lvert
+ % Fall back to cmex encoding since we don't know what else to do.
+ \DeclareMathDelimiter{\lvert}
+ {\mathopen}{symbols}{"6A}{largesymbols}{"0C}
+ \DeclareMathDelimiter{\rvert}
+ {\mathclose}{symbols}{"6A}{largesymbols}{"0C}
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@xp\@tempa\Vert\@empty\@nil
+\ifnum\@tempcnta>\z@
+ \advance\@tempcnta "4000000
+ \xdef\lVert{\delimiter\number\@tempcnta\space }
+ \advance\@tempcnta "1000000
+ \xdef\rVert{\delimiter\number\@tempcnta\space }
+\else
+ \ifx\@@undefined\lVert
+ \DeclareMathDelimiter{\lVert}
+ {\mathopen}{symbols}{"6B}{largesymbols}{"0D}
+ \DeclareMathDelimiter{\rVert}
+ {\mathclose}{symbols}{"6B}{largesymbols}{"0D}
+ \fi
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Fractions}
+% Bury the generalized fraction primitives \cs{over}, \cs{atop},
+% etc., because of their bizarre syntax, which is decidedly out of
+% place in a \latex/ document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@saveprimitive\over\@@over
+\@saveprimitive\atop\@@atop
+\@saveprimitive\above\@@above
+\@saveprimitive\overwithdelims\@@overwithdelims
+\@saveprimitive\atopwithdelims\@@atopwithdelims
+\@saveprimitive\abovewithdelims\@@abovewithdelims
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\primfrac}
+% If someone insists on using \cs{over}, give a warning the first
+% time and then resurrect the old definition. Laissez-faire policy.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\primfrac}[1]{%
+ \PackageWarning{amsmath}{%
+Foreign command \@backslashchar#1;\MessageBreak
+\protect\frac\space or \protect\genfrac\space should be used instead%
+\MessageBreak
+ }
+ \global\@xp\let\csname#1\@xp\endcsname\csname @@#1\endcsname
+ \csname#1\endcsname
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\over}{\primfrac{over}}
+\renewcommand{\atop}{\primfrac{atop}}
+\renewcommand{\above}{\primfrac{above}}
+\renewcommand{\overwithdelims}{\primfrac{overwithdelims}}
+\renewcommand{\atopwithdelims}{\primfrac{atopwithdelims}}
+\renewcommand{\abovewithdelims}{\primfrac{abovewithdelims}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \cn{frac} calls \cn{@@over} directly instead of via \cn{genfrac}, for
+% better speed because it is so common. \cn{tfrac} and \cn{dfrac} are
+% abbreviations for some commonly needed mathstyle overrides. To
+% conserve csnames we avoid making \cn{dfrac} and \cn{tfrac} robust
+% (\cn{genfrac} is itself robust).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\frac}[2]{{\begingroup#1\endgroup\@@over#2}}
+\newcommand{\dfrac}{\genfrac{}{}{}0}
+\newcommand{\tfrac}{\genfrac{}{}{}1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \cn{binom} command for binomial notation works like \cn{frac}
+% and has similar variants. Note that we do not use \cs{z@} in
+% \cn{dbinom} and \cn{tbinom} because they are not top-level robust
+% like \cn{binom}, and so the \cs{z@} with the potentially
+% problematic \qc{\@} character would become visible when writing one
+% of those commands to a \fn{.toc} file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\binom}{\genfrac()\z@{}}
+\newcommand{\dbinom}{\genfrac(){0pt}0}
+\newcommand{\tbinom}{\genfrac(){0pt}1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\genfrac}
+% \changes{v2.16a}{2016/11/05}{New genfrac implementation for extended
+% TeXs}
+% This command provides access to \tex/'s generalized fraction
+% primitives. Args: \arg{1} left delim, \arg{2} right delim, \arg{3}
+% line thickness, \arg{4} mathstyle override, \arg{5} numerator,
+% \arg{6} denominator. But we only read the first four args at first,
+% in order to give us a moment to select the proper generalized
+% fraction primitive. Any of those four args could be empty, and when
+% empty the obvious defaults are selected (no delimiters, default
+% line thickness (normally .4pt), and no mathstyle override).
+%
+% the |withdelims| primitives do not work in xetex with OpenType
+% fonts, and the relevant font dimen parameters are often not set
+% in luatex as theer are no matching values in the OpenType Math
+% table, so here we use variants that use the font parameters if
+% they are set, but scale using |\left\right| rather than the
+% |withdelims| primitives.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\directlua\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\XeTeXcharclass\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Classic version
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\genfrac}[4]{%
+ \def\@tempa{#1#2}%
+ \edef\@tempb{\@nx\@genfrac\@mathstyle{#4}%
+ \csname @@\ifx @#3 at over\else above\fi
+ \ifx\@tempa\@empty \else withdelims\fi\endcsname}
+ \@tempb{#1#2#3}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% XeTeX version
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\genfrac at rule#1#2#3#4{%
+\hbox{$\left#1\vcenter{\hrule \@width\z@
+ \@height
+ \ifdim\fontdimen#2#3\tw@=\z@
+ #4\fontdimen6#3\tw@
+ \else
+ \fontdimen#2#3\tw@
+ \fi
+ }\right.$}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\genfrac at choice#1#2{%
+\ifx @#2@\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.17a}{2017/09/02}{move \cs{nulldelimiterspace} correction}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx c#1\kern-\nulldelimiterspace\fi
+{\delimitershortfall\z@\delimiterfactor\@m
+ \mathsurround\z@\nulldelimiterspace\z@
+\mathchoice
+{\genfrac at rule{#2}{20}\textfont{2.39}}%
+{\genfrac at rule{#2}{21}\textfont{1}}%
+{\genfrac at rule{#2}{21}\scriptfont{1.45}}%
+{\genfrac at rule{#2}{21}\scriptscriptfont{1.35}}%
+}%
+\ifx o#1\kern-\nulldelimiterspace\fi
+\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\genfrac}[6]{{%
+\@mathstyle{#4}%
+\genfrac at choice o{#1}%
+{\begingroup#5\endgroup\ifx @#3@\@@over\else\@@above\fi#3\relax#6}%
+\genfrac at choice c{#2}%
+}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fi
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% LuaTeX version
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\genfrac at rule#1#2#3{%
+\hbox{$\left#1\vcenter{\hrule \@width\z@
+ \@height
+ \ifdim\Umathfractiondelsize#2=\z@
+ #3\fontdimen6#3\tw@
+ \else
+ \Umathfractiondelsize#2%
+ \fi
+ }\right.$}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\genfrac at choice#1#2{%
+\ifx @#2@\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.17a}{2017/09/02}{move \cs{nulldelimiterspace} correction}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx c#1\kern-\nulldelimiterspace\fi
+{\delimitershortfall\z@\delimiterfactor\@m
+ \mathsurround\z@\nulldelimiterspace\z@
+\mathchoice
+{\genfrac at rule{#2}\displaystyle{2.39}}%
+{\genfrac at rule{#2}\textstyle{1}}%
+{\genfrac at rule{#2}\scriptstyle{1.45}}%
+{\genfrac at rule{#2}\scriptscriptstyle{1.35}}%
+}%
+\ifx o#1\kern-\nulldelimiterspace\fi
+\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\genfrac}[6]{{%
+\@mathstyle{#4}%
+\genfrac at choice o{#1}%
+{\begingroup#5\endgroup\ifx @#3@\@@over\else\@@above\fi#3\relax#6}%
+\genfrac at choice c{#2}%
+}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of test for Lua\TeX/Xe\TeX.
+%
+% \cs{@genfrac} takes the preceding arguments and reads the
+% numerator and denominator. Note that there's no convenient way to
+% make the numerator and denominator \emph{contents}
+% displaystyle, through this interface.
+%
+% Args: \arg{1} mathstyle, \arg{2} fraction primitive,
+% \arg{3} delimiters and rule thickness,
+% \arg{4} numerator, \arg{5} denominator.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@genfrac#1#2#3#4#5{{#1{\begingroup#4\endgroup#2#3\relax#5}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Empty mathstyle arg: no change; 0 = displaystyle, 1 = textstyle, 2
+% = scriptstyle, 3 = scriptscriptstyle.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@mathstyle#1{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty\relax
+ \else\ifcase#1\displaystyle % case 0
+ \or\textstyle\or\scriptstyle\else\scriptscriptstyle\fi\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Sums and Integrals}
+% Default value for sum limits is \cs{displaylimits}, see option
+% `nosumlimits'.
+%
+% We redefine all the cumulative operator symbols to use
+% \cs{slimits@} so that switching between \cs{displaylimits} and
+% \cs{nolimits} can be controlled by package options. Also add
+% \cs{DOTSB} for the benefit of the dots lookahead. But we'd better
+% make sure \cn{coprod} and the others are simple mathchars; if not,
+% the attempted changes will probably fail miserably.
+%
+% \changes{v2.15}{2016/02/20}{Accept \cs{Umathchar}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\@tempa{\string\mathchar"}
+\edef\@tempd{\string\Umathchar"}
+\def\@tempb#1"#2\@nil{#1"}
+\edef\@tempc{\expandafter\@tempb\meaning\coprod "\@nil}
+\ifx\@tempc\@tempd\let\@tempc\@tempa\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@tempa\@tempc
+ \global\let\coprod@\coprod
+ \gdef\coprod{\DOTSB\coprod@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigvee@\bigvee
+ \gdef\bigvee{\DOTSB\bigvee@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigwedge@\bigwedge
+ \gdef\bigwedge{\DOTSB\bigwedge@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\biguplus@\biguplus
+ \gdef\biguplus{\DOTSB\biguplus@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigcap@\bigcap
+ \gdef\bigcap{\DOTSB\bigcap@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigcup@\bigcup
+ \gdef\bigcup{\DOTSB\bigcup@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\prod@\prod
+ \gdef\prod{\DOTSB\prod@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\sum@\sum
+ \gdef\sum{\DOTSB\sum@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigotimes@\bigotimes
+ \gdef\bigotimes{\DOTSB\bigotimes@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigoplus@\bigoplus
+ \gdef\bigoplus{\DOTSB\bigoplus@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigodot@\bigodot
+ \gdef\bigodot{\DOTSB\bigodot@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigsqcup@\bigsqcup
+ \gdef\bigsqcup{\DOTSB\bigsqcup@\slimits@}
+\fi
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Roots and radicals}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\root}
+% This root stuff needs syntax work and implementation work. Surely
+% something more compact can be done?? [mjd, 1994/09/05]
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\leftroot}{\@amsmath at err{\Invalid@@\leftroot}\@eha}
+\newcommand{\uproot}{\@amsmath at err{\Invalid@@\uproot}\@eha}
+\newcount\uproot@
+\newcount\leftroot@
+\renewcommand{\root}{\relaxnext@
+ \DN@{\ifx\@let at token\uproot\let\next@\nextii@\else
+ \ifx\@let at token\leftroot\let\next@\nextiii@\else
+ \let\next@\plainroot@\fi\fi\next@}%
+ \def\nextii@\uproot##1{\uproot@##1\relax\FN@\nextiv@}%
+ \def\nextiv@{\ifx\@let at token\@sptoken\DN at . {\FN@\nextv@}\else
+ \DN at .{\FN@\nextv@}\fi\next at .}%
+ \def\nextv@{\ifx\@let at token\leftroot\let\next@\nextvi@\else
+ \let\next@\plainroot@\fi\next@}%
+ \def\nextvi@\leftroot##1{\leftroot@##1\relax\plainroot@}%
+ \def\nextiii@\leftroot##1{\leftroot@##1\relax\FN@\nextvii@}%
+ \def\nextvii@{\ifx\@let at token\@sptoken
+ \DN at . {\FN@\nextviii@}\else
+ \DN at .{\FN@\nextviii@}\fi\next at .}%
+ \def\nextviii@{\ifx\@let at token\uproot\let\next@\nextix@\else
+ \let\next@\plainroot@\fi\next@}%
+ \def\nextix@\uproot##1{\uproot@##1\relax\plainroot@}%
+ \bgroup\uproot@\z@\leftroot@\z@\FN@\next@}
+\def\plainroot@#1\of#2{\setbox\rootbox\hbox{%
+ $\m at th\scriptscriptstyle{#1}$}%
+ \mathchoice{\r@@t\displaystyle{#2}}{\r@@t\textstyle{#2}}
+ {\r@@t\scriptstyle{#2}}{\r@@t\scriptscriptstyle{#2}}\egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v2.0}{1999/06/17}{Normalize @@sqrt to sqrtsign}
+
+% Name change from \cs{@@sqrt} to \cs{sqrtsign} happened in the
+% 1995/12/01 release of \latex/. If we were to assume that
+% \cs{sqrtsign} is defined then someone with the 1995/06/01 release
+% of \latex/ would have trouble using this package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{sqrtsign}{\let\sqrtsign\@@sqrt}{}
+\def\r@@t#1#2{\setboxz at h{$\m at th#1\sqrtsign{#2}$}%
+ \dimen@\ht\z@\advance\dimen at -\dp\z@
+ \setbox\@ne\hbox{$\m at th#1\mskip\uproot@ mu$}%
+ \advance\dimen@ by1.667\wd\@ne
+ \mkern-\leftroot@ mu\mkern5mu\raise.6\dimen@\copy\rootbox
+ \mkern-10mu\mkern\leftroot@ mu\boxz@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Et cetera}
+%
+% \changes{v2.0}{1999/06/18}{Leave Greek cap letters unaltered}
+%
+% Specific names for the variant italic cap Greek letters are not
+% defined by \latex/. If no preceding package defined these, we will
+% define them now.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{varGamma}{%
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varGamma}{\mathord}{letters}{"00}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varDelta}{\mathord}{letters}{"01}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varTheta}{\mathord}{letters}{"02}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varLambda}{\mathord}{letters}{"03}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varXi}{\mathord}{letters}{"04}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varPi}{\mathord}{letters}{"05}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varSigma}{\mathord}{letters}{"06}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varUpsilon}{\mathord}{letters}{"07}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varPhi}{\mathord}{letters}{"08}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varPsi}{\mathord}{letters}{"09}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varOmega}{\mathord}{letters}{"0A}
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\overline}
+% \amstex/ redefines \cn{overline} as shown here, for reasons that
+% are probably less important in \latex/: Make it read its argument
+% as a macro argument rather than a ``math field'' (\emph{The
+% \tex/book}, Chapter 26), to avoid problems when something that is
+% apparently a single symbol is actually a non-simple macro (e.g.,
+% \cn{dag}) \emph{and} is given as a single-token argument without
+% enclosing braces.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@saveprimitive\overline\@@overline
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\overline}[1]{\@@overline{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\boxed}
+% The \cs{boxed} command is specifically intended to put a box around
+% an equation or piece of an equation. (Not including the equation
+% number.) This isn't trivial for end-users to do it properly
+% with \cs{fbox} so we provide a command for them.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\boxed}[1]{\fbox{\m at th$\displaystyle#1$}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\implies}
+% \begin{macro}{\impliedby}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\implies}{\DOTSB\;\Longrightarrow\;}
+\newcommand{\impliedby}{\DOTSB\;\Longleftarrow\;}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\And}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\And{\DOTSB\;\mathchar"3026 \;}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nobreakdash}
+% The command \cn{nobreakdash} is designed only for use before a
+% hyphen or dash (|-|, |--|, or |---|).
+% Setting the hyphen in a box and then unboxing it means that the
+% normal penalty will not be added after it---and if the penalty is
+% not there a break will not be taken (unless an explicit penalty
+% or glue follows, thus the final \verb=\nobreak=).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\nobreakdash}{\leavevmode
+ \toks@\@emptytoks \def\@tempa##1{\toks@\@xp{\the\toks at -}\FN@\next@}%
+ \DN@{\ifx\@let at token-\@xp\@tempa
+ \else\setboxz at h{\the\toks@\nobreak}\unhbox\z@\fi}%
+ \FN@\next@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\colon}
+% \cs{colon} is for a colon in math that resembles a text colon:
+% small space on the left, larger space on the right. The \qc{\:}
+% character by itself is treated as a \cs{mathrel} i.e. large, equal
+% spacing on both sides.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\colon}{\nobreak\mskip2mu\mathpunct{}\nonscript
+ \mkern-\thinmuskip{:}\mskip6muplus1mu\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Ellipsis dots}
+%
+% We can't use \cs{newif} for \cs{ifgtest@} because we want
+% to include \cs{global} in the definitions of
+% \cs{gtest at true} and \cs{gtest at false}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ifgtest@\iffalse % initial value
+\def\gtest at true{\global\let\ifgtest@\iftrue}
+\def\gtest at false{\global\let\ifgtest@\iffalse}
+\let\DOTSI\relax
+\let\DOTSB\relax
+\let\DOTSX\relax
+{\uccode`7=`\\ \uccode`8=`m \uccode`9=`a \uccode`0=`t \uccode`!=`h
+ \uppercase{%
+ \gdef\math@#1#2#3#4#5#6\math@{\gtest at false\ifx 7#1\ifx 8#2%
+ \ifx 9#3\ifx 0#4\ifx !#5\xdef\meaning@{#6}\gtest at true
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}}}
+{\uccode`7=`c \uccode`8=`h \uccode`9=`\"
+ \uppercase{\gdef\mathch@#1#2#3#4#5#6\mathch@{\gtest at false
+ \ifx 7#1\ifx 8#2\ifx 9#5\gtest at true\xdef\meaning@{9#6}\fi\fi\fi}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.15}{2016/02/20}{Accept \cs{Umathchar}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{\uccode`(=`U \uccode`)=`m
+ \uppercase{\gdef\Umathch@#1#2#3#4"#5"#6\Umathch@{\gtest at false
+ \ifx(#2\ifx)#3\gtest at true
+ \ifcase"#5 \or\or\gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}\or\gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}\fi
+ \fi\fi
+ }}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.15}{2016/02/20}{Decode the mathcode of character tokens for Unicode TeX}
+% For Unicode TeXs, if the next token is a character token look up the (U)mathcode. Do not do this for classic TeX for compatibility reasons.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\Umathcharnumdef\@undefined
+\gdef\thecharacter@#1\thecharacter@{}
+\else
+{\uccode`(=`t \uccode`)=`c
+ \uppercase{\gdef\thecharacter@#1#2#3#4#5\thecharacter@{%
+ \ifx(#1\ifx)#4%
+ \@xp\getmathcode@\meaning@\getmathcode@
+ \fi\fi
+}}}
+\def\getmathcode@#1 #2 #3#4\getmathcode@{%
+ \Umathcharnumdef\@tempa\Umathcodenum`#3\relax
+ \edef\meaning@{\meaning\@tempa}%
+ \@xp\Umathch@\meaning@\Umathch@
+}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\classnum@
+\def\getmathch@#1.#2\getmathch@{\classnum@#1 \divide\classnum at 4096
+ \ifcase\number\classnum@\or\or\gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}\or
+ \gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}\fi}
+{\uccode`4=`b \uccode`5=`i \uccode`6=`n
+ \uppercase{\gdef\mathbin@#1#2#3{\relaxnext@
+ \def\nextii@##1\mathbin@{\ifx\@sptoken\@let at token\gtest at true\fi}%
+ \gtest at false\DN@##1\mathbin@{}%
+ \ifx 4#1\ifx 5#2\ifx 6#3\DN@{\FN@\nextii@}\fi\fi\fi\next@}}}
+{\uccode`4=`r \uccode`5=`e \uccode`6=`l
+ \uppercase{\gdef\mathrel@#1#2#3{\relaxnext@
+ \def\nextii@##1\mathrel@{\ifx\@sptoken\@let at token\gtest at true\fi}%
+ \gtest at false\DN@##1\mathrel@{}%
+ \ifx 4#1\ifx 5#2\ifx 6#3\DN@{\FN@\nextii@}\fi\fi\fi\next@}}}
+{\uccode`5=`m \uccode`6=`a \uccode`7=`c
+ \uppercase{\gdef\macro@#1#2#3#4\macro@{\gtest at false
+ \ifx 5#1\ifx 6#2\ifx 7#3\gtest at true
+ \xdef\meaning@{\macro@@#4\macro@@}\fi\fi\fi}}}
+\def\macro@@#1->#2\macro@@{#2}
+\newcount\DOTSCASE@
+{\uccode`6=`\\ \uccode`7=`D \uccode`8=`O \uccode`9=`T \uccode`0=`S
+ \uppercase{\gdef\DOTS@#1#2#3#4#5{\gtest at false\DN@##1\DOTS@{}%
+ \ifx 6#1\ifx 7#2\ifx 8#3\ifx 9#4\ifx 0#5\let\next@\DOTS@@
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+ \next@}}}
+{\uccode`3=`B \uccode`4=`I \uccode`5=`X
+ \uppercase{\gdef\DOTS@@#1{\relaxnext@
+ \def\nextii@##1\DOTS@{\ifx\@sptoken\@let at token\gtest at true\fi}%
+ \DN@{\FN@\nextii@}%
+ \ifx 3#1\global\DOTSCASE@\z@\else
+ \ifx 4#1\global\DOTSCASE@\@ne\else
+ \ifx 5#1\global\DOTSCASE@\tw@\else\DN@##1\DOTS@{}%
+ \fi\fi\fi\next@}}}
+{\uccode`5=`\\ \uccode`6=`n \uccode`7=`o \uccode`8=`t
+ \uppercase{\gdef\not@#1#2#3#4{\relaxnext@
+ \def\nextii@##1\not@{\ifx\@sptoken\@let at token\gtest at true\fi}%
+ \gtest at false\DN@##1\not@{}%
+ \ifx 5#1\ifx 6#2\ifx 7#3\ifx 8#4\DN@{\FN@\nextii@}\fi\fi\fi
+ \fi\next@}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.15}{2016/02/20}{macro added to strip \cs{long} during tests}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{\uccode`9=`\l %
+ \uppercase{\gdef\striplong@#1#2#3\relax{%
+ \ifx9#2 \@xp\@xp\@xp\zap at to@space\fi}}}
+\def\zap at to@space#1 {}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\keybin@{\gtest at true
+ \ifx\@let at token+\else\ifx\@let at token=\else
+ \ifx\@let at token<\else\ifx\@let at token>\else
+ \ifx\@let at token-\else\ifx\@let at token*\else\ifx\@let at token:\else
+ \gtest at false\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Patch to ensure \cs{@ldots} is defined. (Name changed to
+% \cn{mathellipsis} in Dec 94 release of \latex/.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{@ldots}{\def\@ldots{\mathellipsis}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\ldots}
+% \begin{macro}{\dots}
+% Reiterate the standard definition of \cs{ldots} to keep it from
+% being clobbered by the redefinition of \cs{dots}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\ldots}{%
+ \ifmmode \mathellipsis \else \textellipsis \fi
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\dots}{%
+ \ifmmode \@xp\mdots@\else \@xp\textellipsis \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tdots@{\leavevmode\unskip\relaxnext@
+ \DN@{$\m at th\@ldots\,
+ \ifx\@let at token,\,$\else\ifx\@let at token.\,$\else
+ \ifx\@let at token;\,$\else\ifx\@let at token:\,$\else
+ \ifx\@let at token?\,$\else\ifx\@let at token!\,$\else
+ $ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+ \ \FN@\next@}
+\def\mdots@{\FN@\mdots@@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.15}{2016/02/20}{Indent \cs{mdots@@} for readability and add additional tests}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mdots@@{\gdef\thedots@{\dotso@}%
+ \ifx\@let at token\boldsymbol
+ \gdef\thedots@\boldsymbol{\boldsymboldots@}%
+ \else
+ \ifx,\@let at token \gdef\thedots@{\dotsc}%
+ \else
+ \ifx\not\@let at token
+ \gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}%
+ \else
+ \keybin@
+ \ifgtest@ % if \keybin@ test
+ \gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.15d}{2016/06/28}{Add space token to prevent runaway argument error}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \xdef\meaning@{\meaning\@let at token. .........}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In previous versions \verb|\long| macros were not seen by the lokkahead.
+% That was bad as this file uses \verb|\(re)newcommand| for \verb|\implies| etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \xdef\meaning@@{\@xp\striplong@\meaning@\relax\meaning@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@xp\math@\meaning@\math@
+ \ifgtest@ % if \mathxxx test
+ \@xp\mathch@\meaning@\mathch@
+ \ifgtest@ % if \mathchar
+ \@xp\getmathch@\meaning@\getmathch@
+ \fi % end if \mathchar
+ \else % \not \mathxxx
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Test for \verb|\Umathchar| added.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@xp\Umathch@\meaning@"0"\Umathch@
+ \ifgtest@ % if \Umathchar
+ \else % else not \Umathcar
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@xp\macro@\meaning@@\macro@
+ \ifgtest@ % if macro test
+ \@xp\not@\meaning@\not@
+ \ifgtest@ % if macro starts \not test
+ \gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}%
+ \else% else not \not
+ \@xp\DOTS@\meaning@\DOTS@
+ \ifgtest@ % \if DOTS
+ \ifcase\number\DOTSCASE@ %ifcase dots
+ \gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}%
+ \or\gdef\thedots@{\dotsi}\else
+ \fi % endifcase dots
+ \else % not macro starts \DOTS
+ \@xp\math@\meaning@\math@
+ \ifgtest@ % \if macro starts \mathxxxx
+ \@xp\mathbin@\meaning@\mathbin@
+ \ifgtest@ % if macro starts \mathbin
+ \gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}%
+ \else % not macro starting \mathbin
+ \@xp\mathrel@\meaning@\mathrel@
+ \ifgtest@ % if macro starts \mathrel
+ \gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}%
+ \fi % endif macro starts \mathrel (no else)
+ \fi % endif macro starts \mathbin
+ \fi % endif macro starts with \mathxxx (no else)
+ \fi % endif macro starts \DOTS else
+ \fi % end macro starting \not \ifgtest@ test (no else)
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Additional test for a catcode 12 character.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \@xp\thecharacter@\meaning@\thecharacter@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \fi % end macro \ifgtest@ test (no else)
+ \fi % end if \Umathchar test
+ \fi % end \math@ \ifgtest@
+ \fi % end \keybin@ \ifgtest@ test (no else)
+ \fi % end if \not (no else)
+ \fi % end if comma (no else)
+ \fi % end if boldsymbol (no else)
+ \thedots@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \qc{\=} character is necessary in the two \cs{let} assignments
+% in \cs{boldsymboldots@}, because the symbol we are making
+% bold might be an \qc{\=} sign.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\boldsymboldots@#1{%
+ \bold at true\let\@let at token=#1\let\delayed@=#1\mdots@@
+ \boldsymbol#1\bold at false}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The definition of \cs{@cdots} is merely the \fn{plain.tex}
+% definition of \cs{cdots}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ams at def\@cdots{\mathinner{\cdotp\cdotp\cdotp}}
+\newcommand{\dotsi}{\!\@cdots}
+\let\dotsb@\@cdots
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If any new right delimiters are defined, they would need to be
+% added to the definition of \cs{rightdelim@} in order for \cn{dots}
+% to work properly in all cases.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rightdelim@{\gtest at true
+ \ifx\@let at token)\else
+ \ifx\@let at token]\else
+ \ifx\@let at token\rbrack\else
+ \ifx\@let at token\}\else
+ \ifx\@let at token\rbrace\else
+ \ifx\@let at token\rangle\else
+ \ifx\@let at token\rceil\else
+ \ifx\@let at token\rfloor\else
+ \ifx\@let at token\rgroup\else
+ \ifx\@let at token\rmoustache\else
+ \ifx\@let at token\right\else
+ \ifx\@let at token\bigr\else
+ \ifx\@let at token\biggr\else
+ \ifx\@let at token\Bigr\else
+ \ifx\@let at token\Biggr\else\gtest at false
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\extra@{%
+ \rightdelim@\ifgtest@
+ \else\ifx\@let at token$\gtest at true
+ \else\xdef\meaning@{\meaning\@let at token..........}%
+ \@xp\macro@\meaning@\macro@\ifgtest@
+ \@xp\DOTS@\meaning@\DOTS@
+ \ifgtest@
+ \ifnum\DOTSCASE@=\tw@\gtest at true\else\gtest at false
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+\newif\ifbold@
+\def\dotso@{\relaxnext@
+ \ifbold@
+ \let\@let at token\delayed@
+ \def\nextii@{\extra@\@ldots\ifgtest@\,\fi}%
+ \else
+ \def\nextii@{\DN@{\extra@\@ldots\ifgtest@\,\fi}\FN@\next@}%
+ \fi
+ \nextii@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Why not save some tokens? (space vs. time).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\extrap@#1{%
+ \DN@{#1\,}%
+ \ifx\@let at token,\else
+ \ifx\@let at token;\else
+ \ifx\@let at token.\else\extra@
+ \ifgtest@\else
+ \let\next@#1\fi\fi\fi\fi\next@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cdots}
+% \begin{macro}{\dotsb}
+% \begin{macro}{\dotsm}
+% \begin{macro}{\dotso}
+% \begin{macro}{\dotsc}
+% The \cn{cdots} command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ams at DeclareRobustCommand{\cdots}{\DN@{\extrap@\@cdots}\FN@\next@}
+\let\dotsb\cdots
+\let\dotsm\cdots
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\dotso}{\relax
+ \ifmmode \DN@{\extrap@\@ldots}%
+ \else \let\next@\tdots@\fi
+ \FN@\next@}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\dotsc}{%
+ \DN@{\ifx\@let at token;\@ldots\,%
+ \else \ifx\@let at token.\@ldots\,%
+ \else \extra@\@ldots \ifgtest@\,\fi
+ \fi\fi}%
+ \FN@\next@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\longrightarrow}
+% \begin{macro}{\Longrightarrow}
+% \begin{macro}{\longleftarrow}
+% \begin{macro}{\Longleftarrow}
+% \begin{macro}{\longleftrightarrow}
+% \begin{macro}{\Longleftrightarrow}
+% \begin{macro}{\mapsto}
+% \begin{macro}{\longmapsto}
+% \begin{macro}{\hookrightarrow}
+% \begin{macro}{\hookleftarrow}
+% \begin{macro}{\iff}
+% Various arrows.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\longrightarrow}{%
+ \DOTSB\protect\relbar\protect\joinrel\rightarrow}
+\renewcommand{\Longrightarrow}{%
+ \DOTSB\protect\Relbar\protect\joinrel\Rightarrow}
+\renewcommand{\longleftarrow}{%
+ \DOTSB\leftarrow\protect\joinrel\protect\relbar}
+\renewcommand{\Longleftarrow}{%
+ \DOTSB\Leftarrow\protect\joinrel\protect\Relbar}
+\renewcommand{\longleftrightarrow}{\DOTSB\leftarrow\joinrel\rightarrow}
+\renewcommand{\Longleftrightarrow}{\DOTSB\Leftarrow\joinrel\Rightarrow}
+\renewcommand{\mapsto}{\DOTSB\mapstochar\rightarrow}
+\renewcommand{\longmapsto}{\DOTSB\mapstochar\longrightarrow}
+\renewcommand{\hookrightarrow}{\DOTSB\lhook\joinrel\rightarrow}
+\renewcommand{\hookleftarrow}{\DOTSB\leftarrow\joinrel\rhook}
+\renewcommand{\iff}{\DOTSB\;\Longleftrightarrow\;}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\doteq}
+% The \cn{doteq} command formerly used \cs{buildrel}; we avoid that
+% because it requires `\cn{over}' as part of its syntax. Use 0pt
+% instead of \cs{z@} for robustitude.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\doteq}{%
+ \DOTSB\mathrel{\mathop{\kern0pt =}\limits^{\textstyle.}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Integral signs}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if at display}
+% The straightforward \cs{ifinner} test to see if the current math
+% context is non-display, fails if, for instance, we are typesetting
+% a multiline display within an \cs{halign}, with the pieces going
+% into constructions like
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% $\displaystyle...$
+% \end{verbatim}
+% So we need a better test to find out if we are `in a display'. We
+% therefore create \cs{if at display}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if at display
+\everydisplay\@xp{\the\everydisplay \@displaytrue}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\int}
+% \begin{macro}{\oint}
+% \begin{macro}{\iint}
+% \begin{macro}{\iiint}
+% \begin{macro}{\iiiint}
+% \begin{macro}{\idotsint}
+% Default value for integral limits is \cs{nolimits}, see the
+% definition of the `nointlimits' option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\int}{\DOTSI\intop\ilimits@}
+\renewcommand{\oint}{\DOTSI\ointop\ilimits@}
+\def\intkern@{\mkern-6mu\mathchoice{\mkern-3mu}{}{}{}}
+\def\intdots@{\mathchoice{\@cdots}%
+ {{\cdotp}\mkern1.5mu{\cdotp}\mkern1.5mu{\cdotp}}%
+ {{\cdotp}\mkern1mu{\cdotp}\mkern1mu{\cdotp}}%
+ {{\cdotp}\mkern1mu{\cdotp}\mkern1mu{\cdotp}}}
+%
+\ams at newcommand{\iint}{\DOTSI\protect\MultiIntegral{2}}
+\ams at newcommand{\iiint}{\DOTSI\protect\MultiIntegral{3}}
+\ams at newcommand{\iiiint}{\DOTSI\protect\MultiIntegral{4}}
+\newcommand{\idotsint}{\DOTSI\protect\MultiIntegral{0}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MultiIntegral}
+% If the \cs{limits} option is applied, use \cs{mathop} and fudge
+% the left-hand space a bit to make the subscript visually centered.
+%
+% \verb'#1' is the multiplicity.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\MultiIntegral}[1]{%
+ \edef\ints at c{\noexpand\intop
+ \ifnum#1=\z@\noexpand\intdots@\else\noexpand\intkern@\fi
+ \ifnum#1>\tw@\noexpand\intop\noexpand\intkern@\fi
+ \ifnum#1>\thr@@\noexpand\intop\noexpand\intkern@\fi
+ \noexpand\intop
+ \noexpand\ilimits@
+ }%
+ \futurelet\@let at token\ints at a
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ints at a{%
+ \ifx\limits\@let at token \ints at b
+ \else \ifx\displaylimits\@let at token \ints at b
+ \else\ifx\ilimits@\displaylimits \ints at b
+ \fi\fi\fi
+ \ints at c
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ints at b{%
+ \mkern-7mu\mathchoice{\mkern-2mu}{}{}{}%
+ \mathop\bgroup
+ \mkern7mu\mathchoice{\mkern2mu}{}{}{}%
+ \let\ilimits@\egroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Size dependent definitions}
+%
+% We now define all stuff which has to change whenever a new math
+% size is to be activated. \latex/ provides a hook called
+% |\every at math@size| to support such a need. All assignments in the
+% |\every at math@size| hook that need to take outside effect should be
+% global.
+%
+% \subsection{Struts for math}
+%
+% The various kinds of struts could use some analysis and perhaps
+% consolidation.
+%
+% For example perhaps the \cn{bBigg} delimiters could use
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% 1.2\ht\strutbox (1.8, 2.4, 3.0)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% instead of
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% 1.0\big at size (1.5, 2.0, 2.5)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% since \cs{strut} is reset with every size change [mjd, 1994/10/07].
+% But this change would introduce the possibility of changed line
+% and page breaks in existing documents, so would need to be
+% handled with care.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Mathstrut@}
+% \begin{macro}{\Mathstrutbox@}
+% \begin{macro}{\resetMathstrut@}
+% Here comes the code for Spivak's |\Mathstrut@|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\Mathstrutbox@
+\setbox\Mathstrutbox@=\hbox{}
+\def\Mathstrut@{\copy\Mathstrutbox@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The setting of the height and depth of the |\Mathstrutbox@| is done
+% in the |\every at math@size| hook since it depends on the height of a
+% paren. As \cs{every at math@size} is triggered by |$| after a font
+% size change, we want to avoid using another math formula |$...$| to
+% measure the math paren height; instead we go through the mathcode
+% of the \qc{\(} character. We assume that the mathcode has a leading
+% hex digit 4 indicating `open delimiter'; this allows us to make a
+% relatively simple function to get the correct font and character
+% position.
+%
+% \changes{v2.15}{2016/02/20}{Modify \cs{resetMathstrut@} for Unicode \TeX}
+% \changes{v2.15b}{2016/03/10}{Modify \cs{resetMathstrut@} for classic \TeX\ to preserve box 0}
+% Original code assuming |\mathcode| is kept for 8bit \TeX. Unicode \TeX{}
+% uses |\Umathcharnumdef| which works for xetex and luatex, which use
+% different forms for |\mathchardef|. (New luatex always reports
+% definitions using |\Umathchardef| syntax even if |\mathchardef| used.)
+%
+% The unicode version uses e-tex |\fontcharht| to avoid boxing which
+% could also be done for pdftex, but not done here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\Umathcharnumdef\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Original code
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\resetMathstrut@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{%
+ \mathchardef\@tempa\mathcode`\(\relax
+ \def\@tempb##1"##2##3{\the\textfont"##3\char"}%
+ \expandafter\@tempb\meaning\@tempa \relax
+ }%
+ \edef\@tempa{%
+ \ht\Mathstrutbox@\the\ht\z@\relax
+ \dp\Mathstrutbox@\the\dp\z@\relax}%
+ \expandafter\endgroup\@tempa
+}
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% xetex/luatex version
+% \changes{v2.15a}{2016/03/03}{missing percent added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\resetMathstrut@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \Umathcharnumdef\@tempa\Umathcodenum`\(\relax
+ \def\@tempb##1"##2"##3"##4\relax{%
+ \endgroup
+ \ht\Mathstrutbox@=\fontcharht\textfont"##3 "##4\relax
+ \dp\Mathstrutbox@=\fontchardp\textfont"##3 "##4\relax}%
+ \expandafter\@tempb\meaning\@tempa \relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% These height and depth assignments are implicitly global.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\addto at hook\every at math@size{\resetMathstrut@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\strut@}
+% \begin{macro}{\strutbox@}
+% Next follows a special internal strut which is supposed to match
+% the height and the depth of a normal |\strut| minus
+% |\normallineskiplimit| according to M. Spivak.
+%
+% This should really go into the definition of \cs{size at update}, and
+% then the box reset could be local; but \cs{size at update} doesn't
+% have any hook and is handled in such a way that it cannot even be
+% changed except by changing \cs{set at fontsize}. So instead we put
+% \cs{reset at strutbox@} into \cs{every at math@size} and make it global.
+% Then because of some complications in the way \cs{glb at settings} and
+% \cs{check at mathfonts} work, we have to re-invoke it at the beginning
+% of every environment that might use \cs{strut@}. Fortunately this
+% can be achieved (more or less) through the \cs{spread at equation}
+% hook. [mjd,2000/03/10]
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\strutbox@
+\def\strut@{\copy\strutbox@}
+\def\reset at strutbox@{%
+ \global\setbox\strutbox@\hbox{%
+ \lower.5\normallineskiplimit
+ \vbox{\kern-\normallineskiplimit\copy\strutbox}}}
+\addto at hook\every at math@size{\reset at strutbox@}
+\AtBeginDocument{\reset at strutbox@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Big delimiters}
+%
+% We are now going to redefine the plain \tex/ commands \cn{big},
+% \cn{bigl}, etc., to produce different results in different sizes.
+% Actually we only have to define \cn{big}, \cn{Big}, etc., since
+% they are used to construct the directional versions \cn{bigl},
+% \cn{bigr}, and the rest.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\big}
+% \begin{macro}{\Big}
+% \begin{macro}{\bigg}
+% \begin{macro}{\Bigg}
+% To save token space we put everything into the common macro
+% |\bBigg@|. The macros are now simply a call to |\bBigg@| with a
+% factor to determine the correct height of the delimiter as an
+% argument. This code should better go into a future version of
+% the \latex/ kernel; the macro |\n at space| is then superfluous (since
+% it is only used once) and should be removed to avoid wasting hash
+% table space unnecessarily.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\big}{\bBigg@\@ne}
+\renewcommand{\Big}{\bBigg@{1.5}}
+\renewcommand{\bigg}{\bBigg@\tw@}
+\renewcommand{\Bigg}{\bBigg@{2.5}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bBigg@}
+% Now we tackle the macro which has to do the real work. It
+% actually has two arguments, the factor and the wanted delimiter.
+% \changes{v2.17b}{2018/12/01}{Start LR-mode for \cs{bigl} and
+% friends if necessary (github/49)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\leavevmode at ifvmode\@undefined
+\def\bBigg@#1#2{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We start with an extra set of braces because we want
+% constructions like |\def\bigl{\mathopen\big}| to work without the
+% overhead of extra arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\@mathmeasure\z@{\nulldelimiterspace\z@}%
+ {\left#2\vcenter to#1\big at size{}\right.}%
+ \box\z@}}
+\else
+\def\bBigg@#1#2{\leavevmode at ifvmode
+ {\@mathmeasure\z@{\nulldelimiterspace\z@}%
+ {\left#2\vcenter to#1\big at size{}\right.}%
+ \box\z@}}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\big at size}
+% |\big at size| needs to be set to 1.2 times the height of a math
+% paren. This height is already recorded in |\Mathstrutbox@|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\addto at hook\every at math@size{%
+ \global\big at size 1.2\ht\Mathstrutbox@
+ \global\advance\big at size 1.2\dp\Mathstrutbox@ }
+\newdimen\big at size
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Math accents}
+%
+% We want to change the leading digit of math accents to be
+% \cs{accentclass@} so that it can vary according to certain internal
+% purposes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\accentclass@{7}
+\def\noaccents@{\def\accentclass@{0}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% There are a few \meta{math alphabet}s in the standard fonts where
+% we have to change the extra macros because the standard definitions
+% don't account for these accent problems. The first is for the
+% \cs{mathit} command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontEncoding{OML}{}{\noaccents@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next one corrects the \cs{cal} alphabet.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontEncoding{OMS}{}{\noaccents@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dddot}
+% \begin{macro}{\ddddot}
+% Triple and quadruple dot accents.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ams at newcommand{\dddot}[1]{%
+ {\mathop{#1}\limits^{\vbox to-1.4\ex@{\kern-\tw@\ex@
+ \hbox{\normalfont ...}\vss}}}}
+\ams at newcommand{\ddddot}[1]{%
+ {\mathop{#1}\limits^{\vbox to-1.4\ex@{\kern-\tw@\ex@
+ \hbox{\normalfont....}\vss}}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The following code deals with support for compound accents.
+% By redefining \cs{set at mathaccent} we ensure that
+% \cn{DeclareMathAccent} will define accent commands to run our
+% \cs{mathaccentV} function instead of the primitive \cs{mathaccent}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at mathaccent#1#2#3#4{%
+ \xdef#2{\@nx\protect\@nx\mathaccentV
+ {\@xp\@gobble\string#2}\hexnumber@#1#4}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hat}
+% \begin{macro}{\check}
+% \begin{macro}{\tilde}
+% \begin{macro}{\acute}
+% \begin{macro}{\grave}
+% \begin{macro}{\dot}
+% \begin{macro}{\ddot}
+% \begin{macro}{\breve}
+% \begin{macro}{\bar}
+% \begin{macro}{\vec}
+% \begin{macro}{\mathring}
+% We redefine the standard math accent commands to
+% call \cs{mathaccentV}, using the mathgroup/encoding-number
+% information embedded in their previous definitions. If the
+% definition of an accent command does not have the expected form, we
+% leave the accent command alone, but give a warning. For widehat and
+% widetilde, we need to avoid clobbering the definitions done by the
+% \pkg{amsfonts} package. Arbitrating the contention between
+% \pkg{amsmath} and \pkg{amsfonts} to allow doubling a widetilde
+% accent looks tricky, so for the time being [mjd,1999/07/19] we just
+% leave \cn{widehat} and \cn{widetilde} alone. As a result, if the
+% \pkg{amsmath} package is loaded on top of a vanilla \latex/
+% documentclass, everything runs through with no warnings. If a
+% Lucida Math or other math fonts package is loaded in addition to
+% \pkg{amsmath}, there are greater difficulties, but those are
+% addressed elsewhere.
+%
+%
+% \changes{v2.15}{2016/02/20}{Detect \cs{Umathaccent} on package load}
+% Adjust the test made at package load to recognise
+% |\Umathaccent|. Although currently it is just used to give a
+% modified warning that the accents will not be redefined.
+%
+% Note that the engines behave quite differently here, luatex
+% even without these definitions using the OpenType accent set up by
+% unicode-math stacks |\hat{hat{f}}| correctly but xetex acts like
+% classic tex and needs this adjustment. This difference is not
+% addressed here at all.
+%
+% This test is just at package loading and has no affect on the
+% definitions used in 8bit TeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\@tempa#1{\@xp\@tempb\meaning#1\@nil#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The extended definition below tests if the accent is already
+% robust (as newer \LaTeX{} kernels do this by default) and if so
+% picks up the robust definition. However, as of
+% now it still redefines it to be non-robust.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tempa#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{\@xp\@gobble\string#1\space}%
+ {\@xp\@tempb\meaning#1\@nil#1}%
+ {\@xp\@xp\@xp\@tempb\@xp\meaning
+ \csname\@xp\@gobble\string#1\space\endcsname\@nil#1}%
+}
+\def\@tempb#1>#2#3 #4\@nil#5{%
+ \@xp\ifx\csname#3\endcsname\mathaccent
+ \@tempc#4?"7777\@nil#5%
+ \else
+ \@xp\ifx\csname#3\endcsname\Umathaccent
+ \@tempd#4\@nil#5%
+ \else
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{amsmath}{%
+ Unable to redefine math accent \string#5}%
+ \fi\fi}
+\def\@tempc#1"#2#3#4#5#6\@nil#7{%
+ \chardef\@tempd="#3\relax\set at mathaccent\@tempd{#7}{#2}{#4#5}}
+\def\@tempd#1\@nil#2{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{amsmath}{%
+ Unable to redefine \string\Umathaccent\space\string#2}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@tempa{\hat}
+\@tempa{\check}
+\@tempa{\tilde}
+\@tempa{\acute}
+\@tempa{\grave}
+\@tempa{\dot}
+\@tempa{\ddot}
+\@tempa{\breve}
+\@tempa{\bar}
+\@tempa{\vec}
+\@ifundefined{mathring}{%
+ \DeclareMathAccent{\mathring}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"17}
+}{%
+ \@tempa{\mathring}
+}
+%%\@tempa\widetilde
+%%\@tempa\widehat
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Regression testing of amsmath 2.0 showed that in some documents
+% there occurred fragments of the form
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \hat\mathcal{G}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% This is not at all correct syntax for the argument of a \latex/
+% command but it produced the intended result anyway because of the
+% internal syntax of the \cs{mathaccent} primitive. With
+% \cs{mathaccentV}, it will yield an error message. We therefore do a
+% special check for such syntax problems in order to make the error
+% message more informative. (dmj: ??????)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\acc at check}{}
+\newcommand{\acc at error}{}
+\def\acc at check{\@ifnextchar\@empty\relax\acc at error}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We put most of the tokens in a separate macro so they do not get
+% scanned unless they are actually needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\acc at error{%
+ \@amsmath at err{%
+ Improper argument for math accent:\MessageBreak
+ Extra braces must be added to prevent wrong output%
+ }\@ehc
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% For \cs{mathaccentV} part of the processing is dependent on the
+% depth of nesting of math accent commands. We introduce a dedicated
+% counter for this instead of using chardef because we want to
+% increment/decrement it during processing, and incrementing a
+% chardef integer is more work.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\macc at depth
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Provide this function in case it is not already available.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@gobblethree#1#2#3{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \cs{mathaccentV} function first counts the number of nested
+% math accents by setting the argument in a throw-away box. (This is
+% not as risky as such an operation would normally be because the
+% argument is generally either a simple math symbol or a nested math
+% accent call with a simple math symbol at the bottom of the
+% nesting.)
+%
+% There are two benefits from counting the nesting levels first
+% before doing anything else: (1) we can fall back to a simple
+% \cs{mathaccent} call if the nesting depth is 1, and (2) if the
+% nesting depth is greater than 1, we would like to be able to tell
+% when we have reached the lowest level, because at that point we
+% want to save the argument for later use and place an accent on top
+% of a phantom copy.
+%
+% When we have multiple accents, they will be placed on top of the
+% invisible box, followed by some suitable kerns, then a visible copy
+% of the nucleus. To see why, let us look at what goes wrong with a
+% double application of the \cs{mathaccent} primitive. The standard
+% definition of \cs{hat} is \verb'\mathaccent"705E', so
+% \verb'\hat{\hat{F}}' expands to
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\mathaccent"705E{\mathaccent"705E{F}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% The result of this operation is
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\vbox(12.11111+0.0)x7.81946
+%.\hbox(6.94444+0.0)x0.0, shifted 1.40973
+%..\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ^
+%.\kern-4.30554
+%.\vbox(9.47221+0.0)x7.81946
+%..\hbox(6.94444+0.0)x0.0, shifted 2.24309
+%...\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ^
+%..\kern-4.30554
+%..\hbox(6.83331+0.0)x7.81946
+%...\OML/cmm/m/it/10 F
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \tex/ starts by constructing a vbox with the hat character on top
+% of the F. Then it puts another hat character on top of the vbox;
+% but without skew information, because that is only applied by
+% \cs{mathaccent} when the base object is a simple symbol. So the
+% first accent is skewed to the correct position but all later
+% accents are not. By the way, the actual width of the F in the above
+% example is less than 7.81946; the box in which it is packed was
+% automatically lengthened by the width of the F's italic correction
+% (without actually putting in a kern for it).
+%
+% To get the second accent shifted farther to the right we
+% artificially increase the width of the innermost box and add
+% a compensating kern afterward. Furthermore, to get proper placement
+% of a following subscript or superscript, we take the base symbol
+% out, leaving a phantom in its place, and print it by itself
+% following the kern. We then need to increase the kern amount to
+% move the base character backward under the accents again.
+% Here is what the results look like:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\vbox(12.11111+0.0)x9.48618
+%.\hbox(6.94444+0.0)x0.0, shifted 2.24309
+%..\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ^
+%.\kern-4.30554
+%.\vbox(9.47221+0.0)x9.48618
+%..\hbox(6.94444+0.0)x0.0, shifted 2.24309
+%...\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ^
+%..\kern-4.30554
+%..\hbox(6.83331+0.0)x9.48618
+%...\hbox(6.83331+0.0)x7.81946
+%...\kern 1.66672
+%\kern -9.48618
+%\OML/cmm/m/it/10 F
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Much of this implementation is based on code from the \pkg{accents}
+% package of Javier Bezos. I added the test to revert to a simple
+% \cs{mathaccent} when accents are not nested, and some other
+% refinements to reduce the number of kerns used (to conserve box
+% memory) and the number of cycles through \cs{mathchoice} (to make
+% things run a little faster). It was all rather difficult and my
+% first two attempts had serious bugs but I hope and believe that
+% this version will do better. [mjd,2000/03/15]
+%
+% The \qq{V} in \cs{mathaccentV} is just an indication that it takes
+% five arguments. It is important that the name includes
+% \texttt{mathaccent}, otherwise \cs{DeclareMathAccent} will balk at
+% redefining one of our accent commands, for example when an
+% alternative math font package is loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mathaccentV#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \ifmmode
+ \gdef\macc at tmp{\macc at depth\@ne}%
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{%
+ \let\mathaccentV\macc at test
+ \let\use at mathgroup\@gobbletwo \let\select at group\@gobblethree
+ \frozen at everymath{}$#5$%
+ }%
+ \macc at tmp
+ \ifnum\macc at depth=\@ne
+ \global\let\macc at nucleus\@empty
+ \mathaccent"\accentclass@
+ \else
+ \@xp\macc at nested
+ \fi
+ #2#3#4{#5}%
+ \macc at nucleus
+ \else
+ \@xp\nonmatherr@\csname#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\macc at test#1#2#3#4{\xdef\macc at tmp{\macc at tmp\advance\macc at depth\@ne}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\macc at group{-1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\macc at nested#1#2#3#4{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\math at bgroup\@empty \let\math at egroup\macc at set@skewchar
+ \mathsurround\z@ \frozen at everymath{\mathgroup\macc at group\relax}%
+ \macc at set@skewchar\relax
+ \let\mathaccentV\macc at nested@a
+ \macc at nested@a\relax#1#2#3{#4}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\macc at palette\mathpalette
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\macc at nested@a#1#2#3#4#5{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This test saves some work that would otherwise be always repeated
+% fourfold thanks to \cs{mathchoice}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\macc at group=\mathgroup
+ \else \macc at set@skewchar\relax \edef\macc at group{\the\mathgroup}%
+ \fi
+ \mathchardef\macc at code "\accentclass@ #2#3#4\relax
+ \macc at palette\macc at a{#5}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The reason that \cs{macc at set@skewchar} takes an argument is so that
+% it can serve as a direct substitute for \cs{math at egroup}, in
+% addition to being used separately.
+%
+% Setting a skewchar with this method works for symbols of variable
+% mathgroup (class 7, letters and numbers) but not necessarily for
+% special symbols like \cn{partial} or \cs{xi} whose mathgroup
+% doesn't change; fortunately the most commonly used ones come from
+% mathgroup one, which is the fall-back mathgroup for skewchar.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\macc at set@skewchar#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \ifnum\mathgroup=\m at ne \let\@tempa\@ne
+ \else
+ \ifnum\skewchar\textfont\mathgroup=\m at ne \let\@tempa\@ne
+ \else \let\@tempa\mathgroup
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \count@=\skewchar\textfont\@tempa
+ \advance\count@"7100
+ \edef\@tempa{\endgroup
+ \mathchardef\noexpand\macc at skewchar=\number\count@\relax}%
+ \@tempa
+ #1%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Arg1 is math-style, arg2 is accent base object. We assume that math
+% style doesn't change within the nested group of accents; this means
+% we can set \cs{macc at style} only once and redefine \cs{macc at palette}
+% to use it, in order to run \cs{mathchoice} only once instead of
+% multiplying the calls exponentially as the nesting level increases.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\macc at a#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\macc at style#1\relax
+ \def\macc at palette##1{##1\macc at style}%
+ \advance\macc at depth\m at ne
+ \ifnum\macc at depth=\z@
+ \gdef\macc at nucleus{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Extra \cs{@empty} tokens are to prevent low-level \tex/ errors from
+% the potential syntactic error that \cs{acc at check} checks for.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{$#1#2\@empty{}\macc at skewchar$}%
+ \setbox\tw@\hbox{$#1#2\@empty\macc at skewchar$}%
+ \dimen@\tw@\wd\tw@ \advance\dimen at -\tw@\wd\z@
+ \xdef\macc at kerna{\the\dimen@\relax}%
+ \setbox4\hbox{$#1#2\acc at check\@empty$}%
+ \global\setbox\@ne\hbox to\wd4{}%
+ \ht\@ne\ht4 \dp\@ne\dp4
+ \xdef\macc at kernb{\the\wd4\relax}%
+ \mathaccent\macc at code{\box\@ne\kern\macc at kerna}%
+ \else
+ \mathaccent\macc at code{\let\macc at adjust\@empty #1#2\@empty}%
+ \macc at adjust
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\macc at adjust{%
+ \dimen@\macc at kerna\advance\dimen@\macc at kernb
+ \kern-\dimen@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The commands \cs{Hat}, \cs{Tilde}, \ldots, are supported as
+% synonyms of \cs{hat}, \cs{tilde}, \ldots, for backward
+% compatibility.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Hat{\hat}
+\def\Check{\check}
+\def\Tilde{\tilde}
+\def\Acute{\acute}
+\def\Grave{\grave}
+\def\Dot{\dot}
+\def\Ddot{\ddot}
+\def\Breve{\breve}
+\def\Bar{\bar}
+\def\Vec{\vec}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This error message about math mode is used several times so we make
+% an abbreviation for it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nonmatherr@#1{\@amsmath at err{\protect
+ #1 allowed only in math mode}\@ehd}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Mods, continued fractions, etc.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bmod}
+% \begin{macro}{\pmod}
+% \begin{macro}{\pod}
+% \begin{macro}{\mod}
+% The commands \cn{bmod}, \cn{pmod}, \cn{pod}, \cn{mod} aren't
+% currently robust. [mjd, 1994/09/05]
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\bmod}{\nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip\mkern5mu\mathbin
+ {\operator at font mod}\penalty900
+ \mkern5mu\nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip}
+\newcommand{\pod}[1]{\allowbreak
+ \if at display\mkern18mu\else\mkern8mu\fi(#1)}
+\renewcommand{\pmod}[1]{\pod{{\operator at font mod}\mkern6mu#1}}
+\newcommand{\mod}[1]{\allowbreak\if at display\mkern18mu
+ \else\mkern12mu\fi{\operator at font mod}\,\,#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cfrac}
+% Continued fractions. The optional arg l or r controls horizontal
+% placement of the numerators. The |\kern-\nulldelimiterspace|
+% is needed in the definition if we want the right-hand sides of the
+% fraction rules to line up. The \cs{strut} keeps the numerator of
+% a subsidiary cfrac from coming too close to the fraction rule above
+% it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\cfrac}[3][c]{{\displaystyle\frac{%
+ \strut\ifx r#1\hfill\fi#2\ifx l#1\hfill\fi}{#3}}%
+ \kern-\nulldelimiterspace}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\overset}
+% \begin{macro}{\underset}
+% \cn{overset} and \cn{underset} put symbols above, respectively
+% below, a symbol that is not a \cs{mathop} and therefore does not
+% naturally accept limits. \cs{binrel@@} uses information collected
+% by \cs{binrel@} to make the resulting construction be of type
+% mathrel or mathbin if the base symbol is either of those types.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\overset}[2]{\binrel@{#2}%
+ \binrel@@{\mathop{\kern\z@#2}\limits^{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\underset}[2]{\binrel@{#2}%
+ \binrel@@{\mathop{\kern\z@#2}\limits_{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\overunderset}
+% This is the combination of the previous two commands which is
+% something that is sometimes needed.
+% \changes{v2.17c}{FMi}{New command \cs{overunderset}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\overunderset}[3]{\binrel@{#3}%
+ \binrel@@{\mathop{\kern\z@#3}\limits^{#1}_{#2}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sideset}
+% \cn{sideset} allows placing `adscript' symbols at the four
+% corners of a \cs{mathop}, \emph{in addition to} limits. Left-side
+% adscripts go into arg \arg{1}, in the form |_{...}^{...}|, and
+% right-side adscripts go into arg \arg{2}.
+%
+% As currently written [mjd, 1995/01/21] this is pretty haphazard.
+% In order to really make it work properly in full generality we'd
+% have to read and measure the top and bottom limits and use
+% mathchoice to always get the right mathstyle for each piece,
+% etc., etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\sideset}[3]{%
+ \@mathmeasure\z@\displaystyle{#3}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Use a global box assignment here since the depth override is
+% implicitly global. Then move the constructed box to a local box
+% register (2) to ensure it won't get destroyed during the next two
+% mathmeasure statements. This precaution may be more extreme than
+% necessary in practice.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\setbox\@ne\vbox to\ht\z@{}\dp\@ne\dp\z@
+ \setbox\tw@\box\@ne
+ \@mathmeasure4\displaystyle{\copy\tw@#1}%
+ \@mathmeasure6\displaystyle{#3\nolimits#2}%
+ \dimen at -\wd6 \advance\dimen@\wd4 \advance\dimen@\wd\z@
+ \hbox to\dimen@{}\mathop{\kern-\dimen@\box4\box6}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\smash}
+% We add to the \cn{smash} command an optional argument
+% denoting the part of the formula to be smashed.
+% \changes{v2.17b}{2018/12/01}{Start LR-mode for \cs{smash}
+% if necessary (github/49)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\leavevmode at ifvmode\@undefined
+\renewcommand{\smash}[1][tb]{%
+ \def\mb at t{\ht}\def\mb at b{\dp}\def\mb at tb{\ht\z@\z@\dp}%
+ \edef\finsm at sh{\csname mb@#1\endcsname\z@\z@\box\z@}%
+ \ifmmode \@xp\mathpalette\@xp\mathsm at sh
+ \else \@xp\makesm at sh
+ \fi
+}
+\else
+\renewcommand{\smash}[1][tb]{%
+ \def\mb at t{\ht}\def\mb at b{\dp}\def\mb at tb{\ht\z@\z@\dp}%
+ \edef\finsm at sh{\csname mb@#1\endcsname\z@\z@ \leavevmode at ifvmode\box\z@}%
+ \ifmmode \@xp\mathpalette\@xp\mathsm at sh
+ \else \@xp\makesm at sh
+ \fi
+}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Extensible arrows}
+%
+% The minus sign used in constructing these arrow fills is smashed so
+% that superscripts above the arrows won't be too high. This
+% primarily affects the \cn{xleftarrow} and \cn{xrightarrow} arrows.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\std at minus\mathcode`\-\relax
+\mathchardef\std at equal\mathcode`\=\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In case some alternative math fonts are loaded later:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \mathchardef\std at minus\mathcode`\-\relax
+ \mathchardef\std at equal\mathcode`\=\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\relbar}
+% \begin{macro}{\Relbar}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ams at def\relbar{\mathrel{\mathpalette\mathsm at sh\std at minus}}
+\ams at def\Relbar{\mathrel\std at equal}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\arrowfill@#1#2#3#4{%
+ $\m at th\thickmuskip0mu\medmuskip\thickmuskip\thinmuskip\thickmuskip
+ \relax#4#1\mkern-7mu%
+ \cleaders\hbox{$#4\mkern-2mu#2\mkern-2mu$}\hfill
+ \mkern-7mu#3$%
+}
+\def\leftarrowfill@{\arrowfill@\leftarrow\relbar\relbar}
+\def\rightarrowfill@{\arrowfill@\relbar\relbar\rightarrow}
+\def\leftrightarrowfill@{\arrowfill@\leftarrow\relbar\rightarrow}
+\def\Leftarrowfill@{\arrowfill@\Leftarrow\Relbar\Relbar}
+\def\Rightarrowfill@{\arrowfill@\Relbar\Relbar\Rightarrow}
+\def\Leftrightarrowfill@{\arrowfill@\Leftarrow\Relbar\Rightarrow}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\overarrow@#1#2#3{\vbox{\ialign{##\crcr#1#2\crcr
+ \noalign{\nointerlineskip}$\m at th\hfil#2#3\hfil$\crcr}}}
+\ams at renewcommand{\overrightarrow}{%
+ \mathpalette{\overarrow@\rightarrowfill@}}
+\ams at renewcommand{\overleftarrow}{%
+ \mathpalette{\overarrow@\leftarrowfill@}}
+\ams at newcommand{\overleftrightarrow}{%
+ \mathpalette{\overarrow@\leftrightarrowfill@}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\underarrow@#1#2#3{%
+ \vtop{\ialign{##\crcr$\m at th\hfil#2#3\hfil$\crcr
+ \noalign{\nointerlineskip\kern1.3\ex@}#1#2\crcr}}}
+\ams at newcommand{\underrightarrow}{%
+ \mathpalette{\underarrow@\rightarrowfill@}}
+\ams at newcommand{\underleftarrow}{%
+ \mathpalette{\underarrow@\leftarrowfill@}}
+\ams at newcommand{\underleftrightarrow}{%
+ \mathpalette{\underarrow@\leftrightarrowfill@}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\newcommand{\xrightarrow}[2][]{\ext at arrow 0359\rightarrowfill@{#1}{#2}}
+\def\ext at arrow#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%
+ \mathrel{\mathop{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Measure the superscript and subscript.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{#5\displaystyle}%
+ \setbox\tw@\vbox{\m at th
+ \hbox{$\scriptstyle\mkern#3mu{#6}\mkern#4mu$}%
+ \hbox{$\scriptstyle\mkern#3mu{#7}\mkern#4mu$}%
+ \copy\z@
+ }%
+ \hbox to\wd\tw@{\unhbox\z@}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We don't want to place an empty subscript since that will produce
+% too much blank space below the arrow.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \limits
+ \@ifnotempty{#7}{^{\if0#1\else\mkern#1mu\fi
+ #7\if0#2\else\mkern#2mu\fi}}%
+ \@ifnotempty{#6}{_{\if0#1\else\mkern#1mu\fi
+ #6\if0#2\else\mkern#2mu\fi}}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Some extensible arrows to serve as mathrels and taking
+% sub/superscripts. These commands are robust because they take an
+% optional argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\xrightarrow}[2][]{\ext at arrow 0359\rightarrowfill@{#1}{#2}}
+\newcommand{\xleftarrow}[2][]{\ext at arrow 3095\leftarrowfill@{#1}{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Array-related environments}
+% \subsection{Remarks}
+%
+% Because these environments can be nested within the equation
+% structures that allow \cn{tag}, there is some cross-influence in
+% the internal workings of the \cn{\\} command.
+%
+% \subsection{The \env{subarray} environment and \cn{substack} command}
+%
+% The \cn{substack} command can be used to set subscripts
+% and superscripts that consist of several lines. Usage:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% X_{\substack{a=1\\b=2}}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v2.0}{1999/06/17}{Removed environment definitions: Sb, Sp}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{subarray}
+% The \env{subarray} environment makes a small-size array suitable
+% for use in a subscript or superscript. At the moment the supported
+% arguments are not the full possibilities of \env{array} but only
+% |c| or |l| for centered or left-aligned. And only one column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{subarray}[1]{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note: The predecessors of \env{subarray} (\env{Sb} and \env{Sp},
+% inherited from \amstex/) used \cs{vbox} instead of \cs{vcenter}.
+% But when a multiline subscript is placed in \cs{limits} position
+% \cs{vcenter} is no worse than \cs{vbox}, and when it is placed
+% in the \cs{nolimits} position (e.g., for an integral), \cs{vcenter}
+% provides clearly better positioning than \cs{vbox}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \vcenter\bgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Use \cs{Let@} to set the proper meaning of the \cn{\\} and \cn{\\*}
+% commands. And restore the meaning of \cs{math at cr@@@} to \cs{cr}
+% (see above) in case \env{subarray} is used inside one of the more
+% complicated alignment macros where the meaning of \cs{math at cr@@@}
+% is different. Similarly, call \cs{default at tag} to ensure that a
+% line break here doesn't get an equation number!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Let@ \restore at math@cr \default at tag
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Set the line spacing to be the same as \cs{atop} (when \cs{atop}
+% occurs in \cs{textstyle} or smaller), cf \textit{The \tex/book},
+% Appendix G.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \baselineskip\fontdimen10 \scriptfont\tw@
+ \advance\baselineskip\fontdimen12 \scriptfont\tw@
+ \lineskip\thr@@\fontdimen8 \scriptfont\thr@@
+ \lineskiplimit\lineskip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Start the \cs{vbox} \cs{halign} structure that encloses the
+% contents. Notice that we never get \cs{scriptscriptstyle}. That
+% would require a \cs{mathchoice} (ugh).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ialign\bgroup\ifx c#1\hfil\fi
+ $\m at th\scriptstyle##$\hfil\crcr
+}{%
+ \crcr\egroup\egroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\substack}
+% The \cn{substack} command is just an abbreviation for the
+% most common use of \env{subarray}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\substack}[1]{\subarray{c}#1\endsubarray}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Matrices}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{smallmatrix}
+% \env{smallmatrix} is again an alignment, this time in a centered
+% box. The opening incantations are basically the same as those in
+% \cs{multilimits@}, followed by the alignment itself. A remark:
+% the baselineskip (|9\ex@|) used in \amstex/ is too large for
+% use in text with the usual baselineskip of $12$ or $13$ points; we
+% change it here to |6\ex@| and also adjust the \cs{lineskip}
+% and \cs{lineskiplimit} slightly to compensate. (MJD)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{smallmatrix}{\null\,\vcenter\bgroup
+ \Let@\restore at math@cr\default at tag
+ \baselineskip6\ex@ \lineskip1.5\ex@ \lineskiplimit\lineskip
+ \ialign\bgroup\hfil$\m at th\scriptstyle##$\hfil&&\thickspace\hfil
+ $\m at th\scriptstyle##$\hfil\crcr
+}{%
+ \crcr\egroup\egroup\,%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{matrix}
+% The \env{matrix} environment is just an \env{array} that provides
+% up to ten centered columns, so that users don't have to give the
+% col-spec argument explicitly---unless they want some of the columns
+% noncentered, that is. The maximum number of columns is actually not
+% fixed at ten but given by the counter |MatrixCols|, and can
+% therefore be increased by changing that counter.
+%
+% The extra space of \cn{arraycolsep} that \env{array} adds on each
+% side is a waste so we remove it here (perhaps we should instead
+% remove it from \env{array} in general, but that's a harder task).
+%
+% TODO: Think about re-implementing \cn{matrix} to get rid of the
+% \cs{c at MatrixCols} limit and have hard-wired preamble that doesn't
+% have to be rebuilt each time.
+%
+% We must use \cn{renewenvironment} for \env{matrix} and
+% \env{pmatrix} because \latex/ doesn't kill the definitions found in
+% \fn{plain.tex}, even though it probably should because of their
+% foreign syntax.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{matrix}{%
+ \matrix at check\matrix\env at matrix
+}{%
+ \endarray \hskip -\arraycolsep
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\env at matrix}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\env at matrix{\hskip -\arraycolsep
+ \let\@ifnextchar\new at ifnextchar
+ \array{*\c at MaxMatrixCols c}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c at MaxMatrixCols}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\c at MaxMatrixCols \c at MaxMatrixCols=10
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\matrix at check}
+% For various reasons, authors sometimes use the Plain \TeX{} form of
+% \cn{matrix} or \cn{pmatrix} in \LaTeX{} documents. If they later
+% add an invocation of the \pkg{amsmath} package to their document,
+% the Plain \TeX{} syntax would lead to rather unintelligible error
+% messages. The \cs{matrix at check} function does some checking to
+% forestall that problem.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\matrix at check#1{%
+ \@xp\ifx\csname\@currenvir\endcsname#1%
+ \else\matrix at error#1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This error recovery is not that good but is better than the
+% infinite loop that can result from calling \cs{array} without a
+% matching \cs{endarray}. (The array setup leaves \cs{par} empty.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@xp\@gobble
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\matrix at error}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\matrix at error#1{%
+ \@amsmath at err{%
+Old form `\string#1' should be \string\begin{\@xp\@gobble\string#1}%
+ }{%
+`\string#1{...}' is old Plain-TeX syntax whose use is
+ill-advised in LaTeX.%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{pmatrix}{%
+ \left(%
+ \matrix at check\pmatrix\env at matrix
+}{
+ \endmatrix\right)%
+}
+\newenvironment{bmatrix}{\left[\env at matrix}{\endmatrix\right]}
+\newenvironment{Bmatrix}{%
+ \left\lbrace\env at matrix
+}{%
+ \endmatrix\right\rbrace
+}
+\newenvironment{vmatrix}{\left\lvert\env at matrix}{\endmatrix\right\rvert}
+\newenvironment{Vmatrix}{\left\lVert\env at matrix}{\endmatrix\right\rVert}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\hdots\@ldots
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\hdotsfor}[1]{%
+ \ifx[#1\@xp\shdots at for\else\hdots at for\@ne{#1}\fi}
+\newmuskip\dotsspace@
+\def\shdots at for#1]{\hdots at for{#1}}
+\def\hdots at for#1#2{\multicolumn{#2}c%
+ {\m at th\dotsspace at 1.5mu\mkern-#1\dotsspace@
+ \xleaders\hbox{$\m at th\mkern#1\dotsspace at .\mkern#1\dotsspace@$}%
+ \hfill
+ \mkern-#1\dotsspace@}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{cases}
+% The easiest way to produce the \env{cases} environment is to base
+% it on the \env{array} environment. We must use
+% \cn{renewenvironment} to override the definition of \cn{cases} that
+% \latex/ (unwisely) leaves in place from \fn{plain.tex}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{cases}{%
+ \matrix at check\cases\env at cases
+}{%
+ \endarray\right.%
+}
+\def\env at cases{%
+ \let\@ifnextchar\new at ifnextchar
+ \left\lbrace
+ \def\arraystretch{1.2}%
+ \array{@{}l@{\quad}l@{}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Equation sub-numbering}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{parentequation}% Counter for ``parent equation''.
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We can't assume \cs{ignorespacesafterend} is defined since it was
+% not there in the earliest releases of \latex/ 2e. And we need to
+% include the \cs{global} for the same reason.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{ignorespacesafterend}{%
+ \def\ignorespacesafterend{\global\@ignoretrue}%
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{subequations}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{subequations}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Before sending down the `equation' counter to the subordinate
+% level, add 1 using standard \cn{refstepcounter}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \refstepcounter{equation}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Define \cn{theparentequation} equivalent to current
+% \cn{theequation}. \cn{edef} is necessary to expand the current
+% value of the equation counter. This might in rare cases cause
+% something to blow up, in which case the user needs to add
+% \cn{protect}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \protected at edef\theparentequation{\theequation}%
+ \setcounter{parentequation}{\value{equation}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% And set the equation counter to 0, so that the normal incrementing
+% processes in the various equation environments will produce the
+% desired results.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setcounter{equation}{0}%
+ \def\theequation{\theparentequation\alph{equation}}%
+ \ignorespaces
+}{%
+ \setcounter{equation}{\value{parentequation}}%
+ \ignorespacesafterend
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Equation numbering}
+%
+% In the multiline equation environments provided here, the task
+% of equation numbering is linked to the task of line breaking
+% in the sense that it is the \cn{\\} command that marks where an
+% equation number for the current line will be processed and added to
+% the page.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\numberwithin}
+% Provide a convenient way to specify that equations should be
+% numbered within sections.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\numberwithin}[3][\arabic]{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\@nocounterr{#2}}{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@#3}{\@nocnterr{#3}}{%
+ \@addtoreset{#2}{#3}%
+ \@xp\xdef\csname the#2\endcsname{%
+ \@xp\@nx\csname the#3\endcsname .\@nx#1{#2}}}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eqref}
+% To make references to equation numbers easier, we provide
+% \cn{eqref}. We almost don't need \cn{textup}, except that
+% \cs{tagform@} doesn't supply the italic correction.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\eqref}[1]{\textup{\tagform@{\ref{#1}}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Preliminary macros}
+%
+% The following macros implement the \latex/ syntax for the
+% \cn{\\} command, i.e. the possibility to add an asterisk to
+% inhibit a page break, or an optional argument to denote additional
+% vertical space. They are modelled more or less after the
+% corresponding macros for \latex/'s \env{eqnarray} and \env{array}
+% environments.
+%
+% [We can perhaps use the eqnarray mechanism if we change it so that
+% it also uses \cs{openup}.]
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dspbrk at lvl}
+% We begin by defining the \cs{dspbrk at lvl} counter. This counter
+% records the desirability of a break after the current row, as a
+% number between $0$ and $4$. Its default value is $-1$ meaning that
+% no explicit \cn{displaybreak} command was given, and the default
+% \cs{interdisplaylinepenalty} is to be used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\dspbrk at lvl
+\dspbrk at lvl=-1
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\interdisplaylinepenalty}
+% We set the \cs{interdisplaylinepenalty} to $10000$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\interdisplaylinepenalty\@M
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\allowdisplaybreaks}
+% The \cn{allowdisplaybreaks} command. Since this is intended for use
+% outside displayed formulas (typically in the preamble), it does not
+% need to use \cs{new at ifnextchar}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\allowdisplaybreaks}[1][4]{%
+ \interdisplaylinepenalty\getdsp at pen{#1}\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\getdsp at pen}
+% Modelled after \latex/'s \cs{@getpen}. We use higher numbers
+% than would normally be provided by \cs{@lowpenalty},
+% \cs{@medpenalty}, and \cs{@highpenalty}, since display
+% breaks are almost always less desirable.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\getdsp at pen#1{%
+ \ifcase #1\@M \or 9999 \or 6999 \or 2999 \or \z@\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\displaybreak}
+% \begin{macro}{\dspbrk@}
+% \begin{macro}{\dspbrk at context}
+% \begin{macro}{\nogood at displaybreak}
+% For breaks in a certain row of a alignment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\displaybreak}{\new at ifnextchar[\dspbrk@{\dspbrk@[4]}}
+\chardef\dspbrk at context=\sixt@@n
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dspbrk@[#1]{%
+ \ifmeasuring@
+ \else
+ \ifcase\dspbrk at context % case 0 --- OK
+ \global\dspbrk at lvl #1\relax
+ \or % case 1 --- inside a box
+ \nogood at displaybreak
+ \else % other cases --- outside of a display
+ \@amsmath at err{\Invalid@@\displaybreak}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This is the value of \cn{displaybreak} when it occurs inside some
+% structure where it will not work.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nogood at displaybreak{%
+ \@amsmath at err{\protect
+\displaybreak\space cannot be applied here}%
+{One of the enclosing environments creates an
+ unbreakable box\MessageBreak
+(e.g., split, aligned, gathered, ...).}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math at cr}
+% The macro \cs{math at cr} ends a row inside one of the equation
+% environments, i.e., this is the internal name of the \cn{\\}
+% commands in these environments. As usual for this kind of macro
+% inside of alignments we insert a special brace into \tex/'s input
+% stream. The initial \cs{relax} is needed to trigger entry into the
+% \textit{u} template of the current column if the author ended the
+% current row with an empty column (i.e., the mathcr was immediately
+% preceded by an ampersand).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\math at cr{\relax\iffalse{\fi\ifnum0=`}\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The first step is now to check whether an asterisk follows.
+% \cs{@eqpen} is used to hold the penalty value to be put on
+% the vertical list.
+% Then we call up \cs{math at cr@} which performs the next step.
+% If an asterisk is read page breaking is inhibited.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifstar{\global\@eqpen\@M\math at cr@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise we have to check the \cs{dspbrk at lvl} value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\global\@eqpen
+ \ifnum\dspbrk at lvl <\z@ \interdisplaylinepenalty
+ \else -\@getpen\dspbrk at lvl \fi
+ \math at cr@}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math at cr@}
+% The purpose of \cs{math at cr@} is to check whether an optional
+% argument follows. If not it provides \cs{z@} as default
+% value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\math at cr@{\new at ifnextchar[\math at cr@@{\math at cr@@[\z@]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math at cr@@}
+% \cs{math at cr@@} closes the special brace opened in
+% \cs{math at cr}, and calls \cs{math at cr@@@} which is supposed
+% the `real' row ending command. The meaning of this macro depends
+% on the environment in which it is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\math at cr@@[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi \iffalse}\fi\math at cr@@@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally we put the additional space onto the vertical list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \noalign{\vskip#1\relax}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Let@}
+% \cs{Let@} is called by all environments where \cn{\\}
+% ends a row of an alignment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Let@{\let\\\math at cr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\restore at math@cr}
+% We mentioned already that the exact meaning of \cs{math at cr@@@}
+% depends on the current environment. Since it is often a simple
+% \cs{cr} we provide \cs{restore at math@cr} to reset it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\restore at math@cr{\def\math at cr@@@{\cr}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This is also the default case.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\restore at math@cr
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\intertext}
+% \begin{macro}{\intertext@}
+% The \cn{intertext} command is used for inserting text between the
+% rows of an alignment. It might better be done as an environment,
+% but the \cs{begingroup} from \cn{begin} would cause the
+% \cs{noalign} to fail.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\intertext}{\@amsmath at err{\Invalid@@\intertext}\@eha}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{intertext@} is called by all environments that allow the use of
+% the \cn{intertext} command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\intertext@{%
+ \def\intertext##1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If current mode is not vmode, the most likely reason is that the
+% writer forgot the \cn{\\} that is supposed to precede
+% \cn{intertext}. All right, then, let's try adding it our ownself.
+% But, to be slightly careful: \cn{\\} does a futurelet, and it's
+% slightly dangerous to allow a letted token to barge around loose in
+% our internal code when it has been let to a conditional token
+% like \cs{fi}. So let's interpose something in front of the \cs{fi}
+% for the futurelet to take instead. (And careful again: it has to be
+% something evanescent, not (e.g.) \cs{relax} which would cause the
+% next halign cell to fire up and keep \cs{noalign} from working.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifvmode\else\\\@empty\fi
+ \noalign{%
+ \penalty\postdisplaypenalty\vskip\belowdisplayskip
+ \vbox{\normalbaselines
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We need to do something extra if the outside environment is a list
+% environment. I don't see offhand an elegant way to test ``are we
+% inside any list environment'' that is both easy and reliable (for
+% example, checking for zero \cs{@totalleftmargin} wouldn't catch the
+% case where \cs{@totalleftmargin} is zero but \cs{linewidth} is less
+% than \cs{columnwidth}), so it seems to me checking \cs{linewidth}
+% is the best practical solution.
+% \changes{v2.15c}{2016/05/23}{\cs{ignorespaces} at the start of the argument}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim\linewidth=\columnwidth
+ \else \parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
+ \fi
+ \noindent\ignorespaces##1\par}%
+ \penalty\predisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayskip%
+ }%
+}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Implementing tags and labels}
+%
+% In this section we describe some of the macros needed to make the
+% \cn{tag} command work in various places. We start by defining a
+% help text to be used when a \cn{tag} command is used somewhere
+% it should not appear.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tag at help}
+% This is the default error help text provided when \cn{tag}
+% generates an error message.
+% Note that \cs{newhelp} generates a control sequence name
+% from the string given as its argument so that a leading
+% backslash is provided automatically.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newhelp\tag at help
+ {tag cannot be used at this point.\space
+ If you don't understand why^^Jyou should consult
+ the documentation.^^JBut don't worry: just continue, and I'll
+ forget what happened.}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\gobble at tag}
+% This macro is to be used when \cn{tag} should silently
+% skip its argument.
+% It is made to handle the \qc{\*}-form of \cn{tag} as well.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\gobble at tag{\@ifstar\@gobble\@gobble}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\invalid at tag}
+% \cs{invalid at tag} is a macro that should be used whenever
+% \cn{tag} appears in an illegal place.
+% It sets up \cs{tag at help} (as defined above) as help message,
+% prints its argument as error message, and skips \cn{tag}'s
+% argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\invalid at tag#1{\@amsmath at err{#1}{\the\tag at help}\gobble at tag}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dft at tag}
+% \begin{macro}{\default at tag}
+% \cs{dft at tag} provides a convenient way to disallow the
+% use of \cn{tag} at certain points.
+% One simply has to write
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\let\tag\dft at tag
+% \end{verbatim}
+% and the \cn{tag} command will produce an error message,
+% with a suitable error help text, and discard its argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dft at tag{\invalid at tag{\string\tag\space not allowed here}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Since this is used several times we provide an abbreviation for
+% it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\default at tag{\let\tag\dft at tag}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Since this is also the default, i.e.\ the \cn{tag} command
+% should not be used except in special places, we issue a
+% \cs{default at tag} command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\default at tag
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now that we have taken care of the case that \cn{tag} is not
+% allowed we will provide some macros to process tags appropriately.
+% As the user documentation states, a \cn{tag} command (without
+% the asterisk typesets its argument according to the document
+% styles' conventions, whereas a \cn{tag*} command typesets its
+% argument exactly as given. We define therefore the following
+% interface:
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maketag@@}
+% \begin{macro}{\maketag@@@}
+% \begin{macro}{\tagform@}
+% \cn{tag} is supposed to call \cs{maketag@@} which checks
+% whether an asterisk follows. If this is the case it calls up
+% \cs{maketag@@@} which sets its argument `as is'. Otherwise
+% \cs{tagform@} is called to do the job. (This macro is to be
+% defined appropriately by the document style.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\maketag@@{\@ifstar\maketag@@@\tagform@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We define \cs{maketag@@@} to use the normal font of the document
+% text (since this is the usual practice for numbering of document
+% elements) and to put a box around the tag. Furthermore we use
+% \cs{m at th} for exceptional cases where the tag involves a
+% superscript or some such math. (Probably from an explicit use of
+% \cs{tag*} rather than from the automatic numbering.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\maketag@@@#1{\hbox{\m at th\normalfont#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We use the following default definition for \cs{tagform@}
+% that puts only parentheses around the tag.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tagform@#1{\maketag@@@{(\ignorespaces#1\unskip\@@italiccorr)}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We need to insinuate \cs{tagform@} into \cs{@eqnnum} in case
+% \env{eqnarray} is used (probably in a document that was originally
+% written without use of the \pkg{amsmath} package).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\iftagsleft@
+ \def\@eqnnum{\hbox to1sp{}\rlap{\normalfont\normalcolor
+ \hskip -\displaywidth\tagform@\theequation}}
+\else
+ \def\@eqnnum{{\normalfont\normalcolor \tagform@\theequation}}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thetag}
+% Sometimes one needs to set a literal tag according to the rules of
+% the document style. To achieve this we provide the \cn{thetag}
+% command. It typesets its argument by calling \cs{tagform@} on
+% it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\thetag}{\leavevmode\tagform@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\df at tag}
+% \begin{macro}{\make at df@tag}
+% \begin{macro}{\make at df@tag@@}
+% \begin{macro}{\make at df@tag@@@}
+% Sometimes it is necessary for a \cn{tag} command to store a tag
+% in a safe place and to process it later, e.g., for a tag in a row
+% of an alignment where the tag can only be typeset when the
+% \cn{\\} at the end of the row was seen. Such a tag is stored in
+% the macro \cs{df at tag} (for `deferred tag'). For this purpose we
+% provide the \cs{make at df@tag} macro. It is built very similar to
+% the \cs{maketag@@} macro above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\df at tag\@empty
+\def\make at df@tag{\@ifstar\make at df@tag@@\make at df@tag@@@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{make at df@tag} sets \cs{@currentlabel} and defines
+% \cs{df at tag} appropriately.
+%
+% To simplify the task of tracking \cs{tag} and \cs{label}
+% commands inside math display environments, we defer \cs{label}
+% commands until the tag is typeset, similar to the way that
+% \cs{tag}s themselves are deferred. This allows arbitrary
+% placement of \cs{label} and \cs{tag} commands and also means we
+% only increment the \cs{equation} counter when we really need to,
+% thus avoiding the \cs{setb at ck} nonsense that used to be required.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\make at df@tag@@#1{%
+ \gdef\df at tag{\maketag@@@{#1}\def\@currentlabel{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Autogenerated number:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\make at df@tag@@@#1{\gdef\df at tag{\tagform@{#1}%
+ \toks@\@xp{\p at equation{#1}}\edef\@currentlabel{\the\toks@}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx at label}
+% \begin{macro}{\label at in@display}
+% \begin{macro}{\df at label}
+% Next, we store the default definition of \cs{label} in
+% \cs{ltx at label} and then define a new version of \cs{label} for use
+% in math display environments. \cs{label at in@display} merely issues a
+% warning message if there is already a pending label (which will be
+% discarded) and then stores the label in \cs{df at label}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ltx at label\label
+%
+\def\label at in@display{%
+ \ifx\df at label\@empty\else
+ \@amsmath at err{Multiple \string\label's:
+ label '\df at label' will be lost}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \gdef\df at label
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In case there is an enumerate inside a minipage inside an equation,
+% we need to reset \cn{label} to its normal value:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\toks@\@xp{\@arrayparboxrestore \let\label\ltx at label}%
+\edef\@arrayboxrestore{\the\toks@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\df at label\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\make at display@tag}
+% Now we define a macro to process \cs{tag} and \cs{label} commands
+% in various display environments. If the |@eqnsw| switch is set,
+% then we should supply an equation number; otherwise, if the
+% |@tag| switch is set, we should use the tag stored in
+% \cs{df at tag}. Finally, we process any pending \cs{label}s.
+%
+% TODO: Arguably, \cs{make at display@tag} should issue a warning
+% message if there is a \cs{label} but neither a tag nor an
+% equation number. Also, it would probably be worthwhile to
+% explore whether \cs{iftag@} could be done away with and replaced
+% by checks to see if \cs{df at tag} is empty or not.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\make at display@tag{%
+ \if at eqnsw \incr at eqnum \print at eqnum
+ \else \iftag@ \df at tag \global\let\df at tag\@empty \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Need to check the \cs{ifmeasuring@} flag otherwise the \cs{write}
+% node from \cn{label} might be discarded in a temp box and clearing
+% \cs{df at label} will keep it from being reiterated on the real
+% typesetting pass.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifmeasuring@
+ \else
+ \ifx\df at label\@empty
+ \else
+ \@xp\ltx at label\@xp{\df at label}%
+ \global\let\df at label\@empty
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now we define the special versions of \cn{tag} used within the
+% \env{align} environments.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tag at in@align}
+% The \cn{tag} command may only appear once in a row of
+% an alignment. Therefore we first check the switch |tag@|
+% that is set to false at the begin of every row.
+% If this switch is true a \cn{tag} was already given in this
+% row and we define \cs{next@} to expand to a call to
+% \cs{invalid at tag}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tag at in@align{%
+ \relax
+ \iftag@
+ \DN@{\invalid at tag{Multiple \string\tag}}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise we set the |tag@| switch. But there is more to
+% be done: we must also prevent the automatic generation of a
+% tag. Therefore we also reset the |@eqnsw|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\tag at true
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Changed to \cs{nonumber}, since that seems to be all that's
+% required.---dmj, 1994/12/21
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \nonumber
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Within a row of an \env{align} environment the \cn{tag}
+% command must not typeset the tag immediately since its
+% position can be determined only later.
+% Therefore we use the \cs{make at df@tag} macro defined
+% earlier.
+% Finally we call \cs{next@} to process the argument
+% that follows.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\next@\make at df@tag
+ \fi
+ \next@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\raisetag}
+% Usage: \cn{raisetag} \meta{dimen}
+%
+% This will modify the vertical placement of the tag of the current
+% equation by \meta{dimen}. Note that according to the current uses
+% of \cs{raise at tag} in e.g., \cs{place at tag@gather}, no adjustment
+% occurs if the tag falls in its normal position; i.e., \cn{raisetag}
+% has no effect unless the tag has already been shifted off-line.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\raisetag}[1]{\skip@#1\relax
+ \xdef\raise at tag{\vskip\iftagsleft@\else-\fi\the\skip@\relax}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cn{raise at tag} will be reemptied at the beginning of each equation,
+% which might occur at a |\begin{xxx}| or \cn{\\}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\raise at tag\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\notag}
+% For consistency we provide \cn{notag}, equivalent to
+% \cn{nonumber}. The alternative would have been to rename
+% \cn{tag} as \cn{number} to go along with \cn{nonumber},
+% but of course \cs{number} is a \tex/ primitive that should not
+% be redefined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\notag}{\nonumber}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nonumber}
+% Need to add some additional code to \cn{nonumber} to deal with some
+% complications related to nested environments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\nonumber}{%
+ \if at eqnsw
+ \ifx\incr at eqnum\@empty \addtocounter{equation}\m at ne \fi
+ \fi
+ \let\print at eqnum\@empty \let\incr at eqnum\@empty
+ \global\@eqnswfalse
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\print at eqnum{\tagform@\theequation}
+\def\incr at eqnum{\refstepcounter{equation}\let\incr at eqnum\@empty}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{Multiline equation environments}
+%
+% \subsection{Remarks}
+%
+% In late 1994 David M. Jones did a thorough overhaul of these
+% environments so that the number placement and a few other aspects
+% are substantially improved over the original versions that were
+% ported essentially unchanged from \fn{amstex.tex} in 1989. Most of
+% the commentary in this section is DMJ's, and comments of any
+% significance that I added are marked by my initials and date
+% [mjd, 1995/01/11].
+%
+% \subsection{Preliminaries}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinalign@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifingather@}
+% We define two switches that are set to true in certain
+% alignments: |inalign@| and |ingather@| inside of
+% the \env{align} and \env{gather} environments.
+% These switches are needed to control certain actions that
+% depend on the surrounding conditions, more specifically:
+% on the setting already done by the surrounding environments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifinalign@
+\newif\ifingather@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{histnote}
+% Removed the \cs{ifinany@} test [mjd,1999/06/28] since it was mainly
+% used for the purpose now handled by \cs{spread at equation}.
+% \changes{v1.2g}{1999/06/28}{Removed ifinany@}
+% \end{histnote}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayparboxrestore}
+% Here we must reset a few additional parameters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@xp\def\@xp\@arrayparboxrestore\@xp{\@arrayparboxrestore
+ \ingather at false\inalign at false \default at tag
+ \let\spread at equation\@spread at equation
+ \let\reset at equation\@empty
+ \def\print at eqnum{\tagform@\theequation}%
+ \def\incr at eqnum{\refstepcounter{equation}\let\incr at eqnum\@empty}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\iftag@}
+% The switch |tag@| is set to false at the beginning of every
+% row and set to true by a \cn{tag} command.
+% This allows us to check whether there is more than one tag on
+% a row.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iftag@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifst at rred}
+% The switch |st at rred| is set to true by all starred
+% environments
+% and set to false by the unstarred versions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifst at rred
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmeasuring@}
+% All display environments get typeset twice---once during a
+% ``measuring'' phase and then again during a ``production'' phase;
+% \cs{ifmeasuring@} will be used to determine which case we're in,
+% so we can take appropriate action.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifmeasuring@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifshifttag@}
+% \cs{ifshifttag@} is used by \env{gather} to communicate between
+% \cs{calc at shift@gather} and \cs{place at tag@gather} whether an
+% equation tag should be shifted to a separate line. It's also
+% used by \env{multline}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifshifttag@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\row@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\row@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\column@}
+% The counter \cs{column@} is used by the alignment macros to
+% keep track of the current column.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\column@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\column at plus}
+% \cs{\column at plus} is a useful abbreviation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\column at plus{%
+ \global\advance\column@\@ne
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maxfields@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\maxfields@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\add at amp}
+% \begin{macro}{\add at amps}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\add at amp#1{\if m#1&\@xp\add at amp\fi}
+\def\add at amps#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \count@#1\advance\count at -\column@
+ \edef\@tempa{\endgroup
+ \@xp\add at amp\romannumeral\number\count@ 000q}%
+ \@tempa
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\andhelp@}
+% The help text stored in \cs{andhelp@} is used for errors
+% generated by too many \qc{\&} characters in a row.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newhelp\andhelp@
+{An extra & here is so disastrous that you should probably exit^^J
+and fix things up.}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eqnshift@}
+% \cs{eqnshift@} is used by \env{align} and \env{gather} as the
+% indentation of the lines of the environment from the left margin.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\eqnshift@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\alignsep@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\alignsep@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tagshift@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\tagshift@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mintagsep}
+% \cs{mintagsep} is the minimum allowable separation between an
+% equation and its tag. We set it to half a quad in
+% \cs{textfont}2, which is \tex/'s built-in value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mintagsep}{.5\fontdimen6\textfont\tw@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\minalignsep}
+% This should probably be a skip register [mjd,1999/06/18]
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\minalignsep}{10pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tagwidth@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\tagwidth@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\totwidth@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\totwidth@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lineht@}
+% The dimen register \cs{lineht@} is used to keep track of the
+% height (or depth, if tags are on the right) of a row in an
+% alignment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\lineht@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tag at width}
+% \begin{macro}{\savetaglength@}
+% \begin{macro}{\shift at tag}
+% \begin{macro}{\tag at shifts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tag at width#1{%
+ \ifcase\@xp#1\tag at lengths\fi
+}
+
+\def\savetaglength@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\or\relax
+ \xdef\tag at lengths{\tag at lengths\or \the\wdz@}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\shift at tag#1{%
+ \ifcase\@xp#1\tag at shifts\fi\relax
+}
+
+\let\tag at shifts\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\saveshift@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\saveshift@#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\or\relax
+ \xdef\tag at shifts{\or#1\tag at shifts}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\spread at equation}
+% This does the line-spacing adjustment that is normally wanted for
+% displayed equations. We also call \cs{reset at strutbox@} here because
+% otherwise a preceding font size change might leave \cs{strutbox@}
+% with wrong contents. This is a less-than-ideal solution but
+% probably good enough for now, until the situation can be
+% overhauled.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\spread at equation{\reset at strutbox@
+ \openup\jot \let\spread at equation\@empty}
+\let\@spread at equation\spread at equation
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\displ at y}
+% \begin{macro}{\displ at y@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@display at init}
+% \cs{displ at y} is from \fn{plain.tex}, with
+% \cs{interdisplaylinepenalty} changed to \cs{@eqpen}. Also we
+% transplanted most of its internal organs to \cs{@display at init} to
+% support \cs{displ at y@} and other possibilities. Don't try to make
+% sense of these naming conventions! They are a narrowly calculated
+% mishmash of Knuth/Spivak/Lamport/Mittelbach precedents. The reason
+% for not cleaning them up and forcing all names to a consistent
+% scheme is that then in principle we'd have to do it everywhere else
+% too. And we programmers are paranoid about the side effects of name
+% changes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\displ at y{\@display at init{}}
+\def\@display at init#1{%
+ \global\dt at ptrue \spread at equation
+ \everycr{%
+ \noalign{%
+ #1%
+ \ifdt at p
+ \global\dt at pfalse
+ \vskip-\lineskiplimit
+ \vskip\normallineskiplimit
+ \else
+ \penalty\@eqpen \global\dspbrk at lvl\m at ne
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{displ at y@} is nearly the same; it additionally sets the |tag@|
+% switch and the \cs{column@} and \cs{dspbrk at lvl} counters to their
+% default values. The argument is normally a bit of code to empty out
+% \cs{raise at tag}, but in \env{multline} we don't want that to happen
+% in \cs{everycr}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\displ at y@{\@display at init{%
+ \global\column@\z@ \global\dspbrk at lvl\m at ne
+ \global\tag at false \global\let\raise at tag\@empty
+}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\black@}
+% \changes{v2.17a}{2017/09/02}{add fixed width box so overfull warning generated in centred environments in lists}
+% This macro is made to produce an overfull box message and
+% possibly (depending on the value of \cs{overfullrule})
+% a rule in the margin if the total width of an alignment
+% is larger than the value of \cs{displaywidth}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\black@#1{%
+ \noalign{%
+ \ifdim#1>\displaywidth
+ \dimen@\prevdepth
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \vskip-\ht\strutbox@
+ \vskip-\dp\strutbox@
+ \vbox{\noindent\hbox to\displaywidth{\hbox to#1{\strut@\hfill}}}%
+ \prevdepth\dimen@
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\savecounters@}
+% \begin{macro}{\restorecounters@}
+% These are used during the measuring phase of the various display
+% math environments to save and restore the values of all \latex/
+% counters. We make these local to a group, so nested environments
+% works.
+%
+% Changed \cn{stepcounter} to |\csname c at ...\endcsname| to avoid
+% overhead of ifundefined test [mjd, 1995/01/20].
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\savecounters@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\@elt##1{%
+ \global\csname c@##1\endcsname\the\csname c@##1\endcsname}%
+ \xdef\@gtempa{%
+ \cl@@ckpt
+ \let\@nx\restorecounters@\@nx\@empty
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+ \let\restorecounters@\@gtempa
+}
+%
+\let\restorecounters@\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\savealignstate@}
+% \begin{macro}{\restorealignstate@}
+% These are used to save the values of various parameters that are
+% shared by \env{align} and \env{gather} when the former is used
+% inside the latter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\savealignstate@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\or\relax
+ \xdef\@gtempa{%
+ \global\totwidth@\the\totwidth@
+ \global\row@\the\row@
+ \gdef\@nx\tag at lengths{\tag at lengths}%
+ \let\@nx\restorealignstate@\@nx\@empty
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+ \let\restorealignstate@\@gtempa
+}
+
+\let\restorealignstate@\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\savecolumn@}
+% \begin{macro}{\restorecolumn@}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\savecolumn@{%
+ \edef\restorecolumn@{%
+ \global\column@\number\column@
+ \let\@nx\restorecolumn@\@nx\@empty
+ }%
+}
+\let\restorecolumn@\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Scanning the environment's body}
+%
+% Several of the math alignment macros must scan their body twice:
+% once to determine how wide the columns are and then to actually
+% typeset them. This means that we must collect all text in this body
+% before calling the environment macros.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@envbody}
+% We start by defining a token register to contain the body.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\@envbody
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addto at envbody}
+% Then we define a macro to add something (i.e.\ its argument) to the
+% token register \cs{@envbody}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addto at envbody#1{\global\@envbody\@xp{\the\@envbody#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\collect at body}
+% The macro \cs{collect at body} starts the scan for the |\end{...}|
+% command of the current environment. It takes a macro name as
+% argument. This macro is supposed to take the whole body of the
+% environment as its argument. For example, |\begin{align}| would
+% call |\collect at body\@align| if |@align#1{...}| is the macro that
+% sets the alignment with body \arg{1}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\collect at body#1{%
+ \@envbody{\@xp#1\@xp{\the\@envbody}}%
+ \edef\process at envbody{\the\@envbody\@nx\end{\@currenvir}}%
+ \@envbody\@emptytoks \def\begin at stack{b}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If we simply called \cs{collect@@body} directly,
+% the error message for a \cn{par} token (usually from a blank line)
+% would be
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ! Paragraph ended before \collect@@body was complete.
+% \end{verbatim}
+% But we use a little finesse to get a more intelligible error
+% message:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ! Paragraph ended before \multline* was complete.
+% \end{verbatim}
+% In order to avoid using up csnames unnecessarily we use the actual
+% environment name as the name of the temporary function that is
+% \cs{let} to \cs{collect@@body}; but then in order to preserve the
+% theoretical possibility of nesting for environments that use
+% \cs{collect at body} (not currently required by any \pkg{amsmath}
+% environment [mjd,1999/06/23]), we do the \cs{let} inside a group.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \@xp\let\csname\@currenvir\endcsname\collect@@body
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This small twist eliminates the need for \cs{expandafter}'s in
+% \cs{collect@@body}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\process at envbody{\@xp\@nx\csname\@currenvir\endcsname}%
+ \process at envbody
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\push at begins}
+% When adding a piece of the current environment's contents to
+% \cs{@envbody}, we scan it to check for additional \cn{begin}
+% tokens, and add a `b' to the stack for any that we find.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\push at begins#1\begin#2{%
+ \ifx\end#2\else b\@xp\push at begins\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\collect@@body}
+% \cs{collect@@body} takes two arguments: the first will consist of
+% all text up to the next \cn{end} command, the second will be the
+% \cn{end} command's argument. If there are any extra \cn{begin}
+% commands in the body text, a marker is pushed onto a stack by the
+% \cs{push at begins} function. Empty state for this stack means that we
+% have reached the \cn{end} that matches our original \cn{begin}.
+% Otherwise we need to include the \cn{end} and its argument in the
+% material that we are adding to our environment body accumulator.
+%
+% \begin{histnote}
+% In a former implementation, the error messages resulting from a
+% typo in the environment name were unsatisfactory, because it was
+% matching of the environment name that was used to determine the end
+% of our environment body, instead of counting begin-end pairs.
+% Thanks to Lars Hellstr\"{o}m for a suggestion that led to this
+% improvement. [mjd,1999/06/23]
+% \end{histnote}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\collect@@body#1\end#2{%
+ \edef\begin at stack{\push at begins#1\begin\end \@xp\@gobble\begin at stack}%
+ \ifx\@empty\begin at stack
+ \endgroup
+ \@checkend{#2}%
+ \addto at envbody{#1}%
+ \else
+ \addto at envbody{#1\end{#2}}%
+ \fi
+ \process at envbody % A little tricky! Note the grouping
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Simple aligning environments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math at cr@@@aligned}
+% From tabskip we get an extra space of minalignsep after every
+% second column; but when this falls at the right edge of the whole
+% aligned structure, we need to cancel that space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\math at cr@@@aligned{%
+ \ifodd\column@ \let\next@\@empty
+ \else \def\next@{&\kern-\alignsep@}%
+ \fi
+ \next@ \cr
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\start at aligned}
+% The \env{aligned} and \env{alignedat} environments are identical
+% except that the latter takes a mandatory argument to specify the
+% number of align structures, while the former allows any number of
+% align structures automatically (the use of \env{alignedat} is
+% deprecated). So, they will be defined in terms of
+% \cs{start at aligned}, which will take two arguments. The first
+% argument specifies the placement of the environments; it is
+% either |c|, |t|, or |b|. The second is the number of align
+% structures; a value of~$-1$ means that an arbitrary number are
+% allowed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\start at aligned}[2]{%
+ \RIfM@\else
+ \nonmatherr@{\begin{\@currenvir}}%
+ \fi
+ \savecolumn@ % Assumption: called inside a group
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \cs{null} here is to keep the \cs{,} glue from causing the
+% invocation of the clause in \tex/'s built-in tag placement
+% algorithm that can cause an equation to be shifted all the way over
+% to the margin.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \alignedspace at left
+ \if #1t\vtop \else \if#1b \vbox \else \vcenter \fi \fi \bgroup
+ \maxfields@#2\relax
+ \ifnum\maxfields@>\m at ne
+ \multiply\maxfields@\tw@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Introduced new \cs{math at cr@@@} so we can provide standard error
+% message for too many \qc{\&}'s in \env{alignedat}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\math at cr@@@\math at cr@@@alignedat
+ \alignsep@\z at skip
+ \else
+ \let\math at cr@@@\math at cr@@@aligned
+ \alignsep@\minalignsep
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Reset the meaning of \cn{\\}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Let@ \chardef\dspbrk at context\@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Restore the default definition of \cn{tag} (error message), in
+% case \env{aligned} is used inside, e.g., a \env{gather}
+% environment that accepts \cn{tag}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \default at tag
+ \spread at equation % no-op if already called
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally we start the alignment itself. For \env{aligned} we add
+% \cs{minalignsep} after every second column to mimic the
+% behavior of \env{align}. For \env{alignedat} the user has to
+% specify interalign space explicitly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\column@\z@
+ \ialign\bgroup
+ &\column at plus
+ \hfil
+ \strut@
+ $\m at th\displaystyle{##}$%
+ \tabskip\z at skip
+ &\column at plus
+ $\m at th\displaystyle{{}##}$%
+ \hfil
+ \tabskip\alignsep@
+ \crcr
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math at cr@@@alignedat}
+% \cs{math at cr@@@alignedat} checks to make sure the user hasn't put in
+% too many \qc{\&}s in \env{alignedat}. Since \env{alignedat}
+% doesn't use \cs{displ at y@}, we also reset \cs{column@} here. Note
+% than in \env{aligned}, \cs{column@} will increase without bound,
+% since it never gets reset, but this is harmless.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\math at cr@@@alignedat{%
+ \ifnum\column@>\maxfields@
+ \begingroup
+ \measuring at false
+ \@amsmath at err{Extra & on this line}%
+ {\the\andhelp@}% "An extra & here is disastrous"
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+ \global\column@\z@
+ \cr
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\alignsafe at testopt}
+% Testing for an optional argument can be really, really tricky in
+% certain complicated contexts. This we discovered by getting some
+% bug reports for uses of \env{aligned}. So here is a safer
+% form of \latex/'s \cs{@testopt} function.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\alignsafe at testopt#1#2{%
+ \relax\iffalse{\fi\ifnum`}=0\fi
+ \@ifnextchar[%
+ {\let\@let at token\relax \ifnum`{=\z@\fi\iffalse}\fi#1}%
+ {\let\@let at token\relax \ifnum`{=\z@\fi\iffalse}\fi#1[#2]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{aligned}
+% The \env{aligned} environment takes an optional argument that
+% indicates its vertical position in relation to surrounding
+% material: |t|, |c|, or |b| for top, center, or bottom.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{aligned}{%
+ \let\@testopt\alignsafe at testopt
+ \aligned at a
+}{%
+ \crcr\egroup
+ \restorecolumn@
+ \egroup
+}
+\newcommand{\aligned at a}[1][c]{\start at aligned{#1}\m at ne}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{alignedat}
+% To get a top or bottom positioned \env{alignedat} structure, you
+% would write something like
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \begin{alignedat}[t]{3}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{alignedat}{%
+ \let\@testopt\alignsafe at testopt
+ \alignedat at a
+}{%
+ \endaligned
+}
+\newcommand{\alignedat at a}[1][c]{\start at aligned{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{gathered}
+% The \env{gathered} environment is for several lines that are
+% centered independently.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{gathered}[1][c]{%
+ \RIfM@\else
+ \nonmatherr@{\begin{gathered}}%
+ \fi
+ \alignedspace at left
+ \if #1t\vtop \else \if#1b\vbox \else \vcenter \fi\fi \bgroup
+ \Let@ \chardef\dspbrk at context\@ne \restore at math@cr
+ \spread at equation
+ \ialign\bgroup
+ \hfil\strut@$\m at th\displaystyle##$\hfil
+ \crcr
+}{%
+ \endaligned
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The \env{gather} environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\start at gather}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\start at gather#1{%
+ \RIfM@
+ \nomath at env
+ \DN@{\@namedef{end\@currenvir}{}\@gobble}%
+ \else
+ $$%
+ #1%
+ \ifst at rred \else \global\@eqnswtrue \fi
+ \let\next@\gather@
+ \fi
+ \collect at body\next@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{gather}
+% \begin{environment}{gather*}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{gather}{%
+ \start at gather\st at rredfalse
+}{%
+ \math at cr \black@\totwidth@ \egroup
+ $$\ignorespacesafterend
+}
+
+\newenvironment{gather*}{%
+ \start at gather\st at rredtrue
+}{%
+ \endgather
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\gather@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\gather@#1{%
+ \ingather at true \let\split\insplit@
+ \let\tag\tag at in@align \let\label\label at in@display
+ \chardef\dspbrk at context\z@
+ \intertext@ \displ at y@ \Let@
+ \let\math at cr@@@\math at cr@@@gather
+ \gmeasure@{#1}%
+ \global\shifttag at false
+ \tabskip\z at skip
+ \global\row@\@ne
+ \halign to\displaywidth\bgroup
+ \strut@
+ \setboxz at h{$\m at th\displaystyle{##}$}%
+ \calc at shift@gather
+ \set at gather@field
+ \tabskip\@centering
+ &\setboxz at h{\strut@{##}}%
+ \place at tag@gather
+ \tabskip \iftagsleft@ \gdisplaywidth@ \else \z at skip \span\fi
+ \crcr
+ #1%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\gmeasure@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\gmeasure@#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \measuring at true
+ \totwidth@\z@
+ \global\let\tag at lengths\@empty
+ \savecounters@
+ \setbox\@ne\vbox{%
+ \everycr{\noalign{\global\tag at false
+ \global\let\raise at tag\@empty \global\column@\z@}}%
+ \let\label\@gobble
+ \halign{%
+ \setboxz at h{$\m at th\displaystyle{##}$}%
+ \ifdim\wdz@>\totwidth@
+ \global\totwidth@\wdz@
+ \fi
+ &\setboxz at h{\strut@{##}}%
+ \savetaglength@
+ \crcr
+ #1%
+ \math at cr@@@
+ }%
+ }%
+ \restorecounters@
+ \if at fleqn
+ \global\advance\totwidth@\@mathmargin
+ \fi
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \ifdim\totwidth@>\displaywidth
+ \global\let\gdisplaywidth@\totwidth@
+ \else
+ \global\let\gdisplaywidth@\displaywidth
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math at cr@@@gather}
+% Modified \cs{math at cr@@@gather} so that it always puts in the
+% final field, which needs to be done under the new method for
+% determining tag placement. This is probably more efficient
+% anyway.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\math at cr@@@gather{%
+ \ifst at rred\nonumber\fi
+ &\relax
+ \make at display@tag
+ \ifst at rred\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We advance \cs{row@} here, rather than at the beginning of the
+% preamble, because otherwise the \env{split} environment will
+% cause \cs{row@} to be advanced twice instead of once.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\advance\row@\@ne
+ \cr
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\calc at shift@gather}
+% \cs{calc at shift@gather} has must make two decisions: (1) whether the
+% equation tag for the current line should be put on a separate
+% line and (2) what the distance between the equation and the
+% equation tag should be. We implement \tex/'s built-in
+% tag-placement as well as possible, with one improvement: the
+% minimum separation between tag and equation is now a
+% user-settable parameter.
+%
+% [1995/01/17] Added a check to make sure that the width of the tag
+% on the current line is $>0$ before testing to see if tagwidth +
+% linewidth + mintagsep $>$ displaywidth. Since an imbedded align
+% shows up as line with width \cn{displaywidth}, and even lines
+% without a tag get processed as if an empty tag were present, the
+% result was that the empty tag assigned to the line containing the
+% align was being shifted downwards, creating extra space after the
+% align.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\calc at shift@gather{%
+ \dimen@\mintagsep\relax
+ \tagwidth@\tag at width\row@\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we're in \opt{fleqn} mode, there is no flexibility about
+% placement of the equation, so all we can do is see if there's
+% room for the tag in the given margin.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if at fleqn
+ \global\eqnshift@\@mathmargin
+ \ifdim\tagwidth@>\z@
+ \advance\dimen@\tagwidth@
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\@mathmargin
+ \global\shifttag at true
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \advance\dimen@\@mathmargin
+ \advance\dimen@\wdz@
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \global\shifttag at true
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \global\eqnshift@\displaywidth
+ \global\advance\eqnshift at -\wdz@
+ \ifdim\tagwidth@>\z@
+ \multiply\dimen@\tw@
+ \advance\dimen@\wdz@
+ \advance\dimen@\tagwidth@
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \global\shifttag at true
+ \else
+ \ifdim\eqnshift@<4\tagwidth@
+ \global\advance\eqnshift at -\tagwidth@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \global\divide\eqnshift@\tw@
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \global\eqnshift at -\eqnshift@
+ \global\advance\eqnshift@\displaywidth
+ \global\advance\eqnshift at -\wdz@
+ \fi
+ \ifdim\eqnshift@<\z@
+ \global\eqnshift@\z@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\place at tag@gather}
+% \begin{macro}{\set at gather@field}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\place at tag@gather{%
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \kern-\gdisplaywidth@
+ \ifshifttag@
+ \rlap{\vbox{%
+ \normalbaselines
+ \boxz@
+ \vbox to\lineht@{}%
+ \raise at tag
+ }}%
+ \global\shifttag at false
+ \else
+ \rlap{\boxz@}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifdim\totwidth@>\displaywidth
+ \dimen@\totwidth@
+ \advance\dimen at -\displaywidth
+ \kern-\dimen@
+ \fi
+ \ifshifttag@
+ \llap{\vtop{%
+ \raise at tag
+ \normalbaselines
+ \setbox\@ne\null
+ \dp\@ne\lineht@
+ \box\@ne
+ \boxz@
+ }}%
+ \global\shifttag at false
+ \else
+ \llap{\boxz@}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+%
+\def\set at gather@field{%
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \global\lineht@\ht\z@
+ \else
+ \global\lineht@\dp\z@
+ \fi
+ \kern\eqnshift@
+ \boxz@
+ \hfil
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The \env{align} family of environments}
+%
+% The \env{align}, \env{flalign}, \env{alignat}, \env{xalignat},
+% and \env{xxalignat} environments are virtually
+% identical, and thus will share much code. We'll refer to the
+% environments generically as ``\env{align}'' and will
+% distinguish between them explicitly
+% only when necessary.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifxxat@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifcheckat@}
+% \begin{macro}{\xatlevel@}
+% The \cs{xatlevel@} macro will be used, informally speaking, to
+% distinguish between the \env{alignat} and \env{xalignat}, and
+% \env{xxalignat} environments.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifxxat@
+
+\newif\ifcheckat@
+
+\let\xatlevel@\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\start at align}
+% \cs{start at align} will be called by all of the \env{align}-like
+% environments. The first argument will be the \cs{xatlevel@},
+% i.e., 0, 1, or~2; the second argument will be either
+% \cs{st at rredtrue} or \cs{st at rredfalse}. The third argument will
+% be the number of aligned
+% structures in the environment (either as supplied by the user, or
+% $-1$ to indicate that checking shouldn't be done). After
+% performing the appropriate error detection and initialization,
+% \cs{start at align} calls \cs{align@}.
+%
+% Note that the \cs{equation} counter is no longer stepped at the
+% beginning of these environments.
+%
+% TODO: Implement \cs{shoveleft} and \cs{shoveright} for
+% \env{align}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\start at align#1#2#3{%
+ \let\xatlevel@#1% always \z@, \@ne, or \tw@
+ \maxfields@#3\relax
+ \ifnum\maxfields@>\m at ne
+ \checkat at true
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@
+ \xxat at true
+ \fi
+ \multiply\maxfields@\tw@
+ \else
+ \checkat at false
+ \fi
+ \ifingather@
+ \iffalse{\fi\ifnum0=`}\fi
+ \DN@{\vcenter\bgroup\savealignstate@\align@#2}%
+ \else
+ \ifmmode
+ \if at display
+ \DN@{\align at recover}%
+ \else
+ \nomath at env
+ \DN@{\@namedef{end\@currenvir}{}\@gobble}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ $$%
+ \let\split\insplit@
+ \DN@{\align@#2}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \collect at body\next@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% With version 1.2 of \pkg{amsmath}, it was possible to use
+% \env{align*} and relatives in certain wrong contexts without
+% getting an error, e.g.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \begin{equation*}
+% \begin{align*}
+% ...
+% \end{align*}
+% \end{equation*}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% For backward compatibility we therefore give only a warning for
+% this condition instead of a full error, and try to recover using
+% the \env{aligned} environment. The alignment of the material may be
+% adversely affected but it will at least remain readable.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\align at recover#1#2#3{%
+ \endgroup
+ \@amsmath at err{%
+Erroneous nesting of equation structures;\MessageBreak
+trying to recover with `aligned'%
+ }\@ehc
+ \begin{aligned}\relax#1\end{aligned}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{align}
+% \begin{environment}{align*}
+% \begin{environment}{flalign}
+% \begin{environment}{flalign*}
+% \begin{environment}{alignat}
+% \begin{environment}{alignat*}
+% \begin{environment}{xalignat}
+% \begin{environment}{xalignat*}
+% \begin{environment}{xxalignat}
+% The definitions of the various \env{align} environments are quite
+% straight-forward.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{alignat}{%
+ \start at align\z@\st at rredfalse
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\newenvironment{alignat*}{%
+ \start at align\z@\st at rredtrue
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\newenvironment{xalignat}{%
+ \start at align\@ne\st at rredfalse
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\newenvironment{xalignat*}{%
+ \start at align\@ne\st at rredtrue
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\newenvironment{xxalignat}{%
+ \start at align\tw@\st at rredtrue
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\newenvironment{align}{%
+ \start at align\@ne\st at rredfalse\m at ne
+}{%
+ \math at cr \black@\totwidth@
+ \egroup
+ \ifingather@
+ \restorealignstate@
+ \egroup
+ \nonumber
+ \ifnum0=`{\fi\iffalse}\fi
+ \else
+ $$%
+ \fi
+ \ignorespacesafterend
+}
+\newenvironment{align*}{%
+ \start at align\@ne\st at rredtrue\m at ne
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\newenvironment{flalign}{%
+ \start at align\tw@\st at rredfalse\m at ne
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\newenvironment{flalign*}{%
+ \start at align\tw@\st at rredtrue\m at ne
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\align@}
+% TODO: Some of these sets of initializations show up in multiple
+% places. It might be worth making an abbreviation for them.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\align@#1#2{%
+ \inalign at true \intertext@ \Let@ \chardef\dspbrk at context\z@
+ \ifingather@\else\displ at y@\fi
+ \let\math at cr@@@\math at cr@@@align
+ \ifxxat@\else \let\tag\tag at in@align \fi
+ \let\label\label at in@display
+ #1% set st at r
+ \ifst at rred\else \global\@eqnswtrue \fi
+ \measure@{#2}%
+ \global\row@\z@
+ \tabskip\eqnshift@
+ \halign\bgroup
+ \span\align at preamble\crcr
+ #2%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math at cr@@@align}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\math at cr@@@align{%
+ \ifst at rred\nonumber\fi
+ \if at eqnsw \global\tag at true \fi
+ \global\advance\row@\@ne
+ \add at amps\maxfields@
+ \omit
+ \kern-\alignsep@
+ \iftag@
+ \setboxz at h{\@lign\strut@{\make at display@tag}}%
+ \place at tag
+ \fi
+ \ifst at rred\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi
+ \global\lineht@\z@
+ \cr
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math at cr@@@align at measure}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\math at cr@@@align at measure{%
+ &\omit
+ \global\advance\row@\@ne
+ \ifst at rred\nonumber\fi
+ \if at eqnsw \global\tag at true \fi
+ \ifnum\column@>\maxfields@
+ \ifcheckat@
+ \begingroup
+ \measuring at false
+ \@amsmath at err{Extra & on this line}%
+ {\the\andhelp@}% "An extra & here is disastrous"
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \global\maxfields@\column@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \setboxz at h{\@lign\strut@{%
+ \if at eqnsw
+ \stepcounter{equation}%
+ \tagform@\theequation
+ \else
+ \iftag@\df at tag\fi
+ \fi
+ }}%
+ \savetaglength@
+ \ifst at rred\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi
+ \cr
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\field at lengths}
+% \begin{macro}{\savefieldlength@}
+% \begin{macro}{\fieldlengths@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\field at lengths\@empty
+
+\def\savefieldlength@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\or\relax
+ \xdef\field at lengths{%
+ \field at lengths
+ \ifnum\column@=0
+ \or
+ \else
+ ,%
+ \fi
+ \the\wdz@
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\fieldlengths@#1{%
+ \ifcase\@xp#1\field at lengths\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maxcolumn at widths}
+% \cs{maxcolumn at widths} will be used to hold the widths of the
+% fields of the \env{alignat} environment. The widths will be
+% separated by the token \cn{or}, making it easy to extract a given
+% width using \cn{ifcase}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\maxcolumn at widths\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maxcol at width}
+% \cs{maxcol at width} $n$ = maximum width of $n$th column of the current
+% \env{alignat} (i.e., the $n$th field of \cs{maxcolumn at widths}.)
+% It expands to a \<dimen>, so it can be used as the right-hand
+% side of a \<variable assignment> or \<arithmetic> statement.
+% It's argument can be any \<number>, \<integer variable> or macro
+% that expands to one of these. [Check to make sure this is true.]
+%
+% This is subtler than it looks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\maxcol at width#1{%
+ \ifcase\@xp#1\maxcolumn at widths\fi\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now comes the real fun. A typical \env{align} environments looks
+% something like this, where the vertical bars mark the edges of
+% the fields of the underlying \cs{halign}:
+% \[
+% \makeatletter\tabskip\@centering\offinterlineskip
+% \halign to\displaywidth{%^^A
+% &$\strut$\vrule\hfil$\m at th\displaystyle{\@lign#}$\vrule
+% \tabskip1pt&\vrule$\m at th\displaystyle{\@lign#}$\hfil\vrule
+% \tabskip\@centering\cr
+% \omit\small\hfil 1\hfil &\omit\small\hfil 2 &\omit\small\hfil
+% 3\hfil &\omit\small\hfil 4\hfil & \omit\small\hfil 5\hfil
+% &\omit\small\hfil 6\hfil\cr
+% \noalign{\vskip8pt\relax}
+% V_i + q_i v_j & =v_i , & X_i & = x_i - q_i x_j,
+% & U_i & = u_i,\qquad
+% \hbox{for $i\ne j$;} %&\omit\hfill \llap{(3)}
+% \cr
+% V_j & = v_j, & X_j & = x_j,
+% & U_j & = u_j + \sum_{i\ne j} q_i u_i. %&\omit\hfill \llap{(4)}
+% \cr}
+% \]
+% Note that each align structure consists of two fields, with no
+% space between them (a small space has been added here to
+% highlight the boundaries). Furthermore, the text inside the
+% odd-numbered fields is flushright, while the text inside the
+% even-numbered fields is flushleft. The equation tags (shown on
+% the right here) can be on either the right or the left. If there
+% is not room (in a sense to be defined shortly) for the tag on the
+% same line as the equation, the tag will be shifted to a separate
+% line.
+%
+% Each environment also has a certain number of ``flexible
+% spaces,'' meaning spaces whose width we are allowed to adjust to
+% take up the amount of ``free space'' in the line, meaning the
+% space not taken up by the equation tag and the fields of the
+% underlying \cs{halign}.
+%
+% The flexible spaces come in two flavors: interalign spaces and
+% margin spaces. If there are $n$ align structures ($n=3$ in the
+% illustration above), there are $n-1$ interalign spaces, unless we
+% are in an \env{alignat} environment, in which case there are no
+% flexible interalign spaces.
+%
+% The number of margin spaces is a little more complicated:
+% Normally, there are two, but if we're in \opt{fleqn} mode, there
+% is only one. Furthermore, if we're in an \env{xxalignat} or
+% \env{flalign} environment (corresponding to $\cs{xatlevel@} = 2$,
+% then there are no flexible margin spaces.
+%
+% Calculating the interalign and margin spaces is done in two
+% stages.
+%
+% First, the total amount of free space is divided uniformly among
+% all the flexible spaces, without regard for the lengths of the tags
+% on the various lines. For the non-\opt{fleqn} case, this
+% corresponds to centering the align structures between the margins.
+% Note that in \opt{fleqn} mode, the right margin is still allowed to
+% be larger than \cs{@mathmargin}. This introduces an element of
+% asymmetry into the appearance of the environment, but it has the
+% advantage of leaving more space for equation tags in the right
+% margin. If the right margin were constrained to be equal to the
+% left margin in this case, tags would need to be shifted to a
+% separate line more often than would be desirable.
+%
+% Ordinarily, all flexible spaces will be given the same width.
+% However, this is not invariably true, since the interalign spaces
+% are constrained to be at least \cs{minalignsep} wide, while---in
+% the absence of equation tags, at least---the margin spaces are
+% allowed to shrink to zero. As we shall see in a minute, if there
+% are tags in the environment, then the margins are also bounded
+% below by \cs{mintagsep}.
+%
+% Next, we examine each line of the environment that has a tag to
+% see if there is a gap of at least \cs{mintagsep} between the
+% equation and its tag. If there isn't, we attempt to center the
+% equation between the tag and the opposite margin, leaving a gap
+% of at least \cs{mintagsep} on either side, in order to preserve
+% some symmetry, i.e., we want the equation to \emph{look} like
+% it's centered between the margin and the tag, so we don't want
+% the margin space to be less than the gap between the tag and the
+% equation. (Arguably, it would be better to allow the margin
+% space to shrink to zero in this case in order to avoid shifting
+% the tag to a separate line at any cost, but that would require
+% all of our calculations to be a little more complicated and hence
+% a little slower.) Finally, if no values of the interalign spaces
+% and the margins (with the constraints outlined above) will
+% produce an acceptable distance between the equation and its tag,
+% then the tag will be shifted to a separate line.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\measure@}
+% \cs{measure@} collects the various bits of information that we'll
+% need to perform the calculations outlined above, namely, the
+% number of align structures in the environment, the natural
+% lengths of the fields on each row, the maximum widths of each
+% column, and the widths of the equation tags on each line. It
+% also calculates the number of flexible interalign and margin
+% spaces and computes the initial values of the parameters
+% \cs{eqnshift@} and \cs{alignsep@}, which correspond to the widths
+% of the margins and the interalign spaces, respectively.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\measure@#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \measuring at true
+ \global\eqnshift@\z@
+ \global\alignsep@\z@
+ \global\let\tag at lengths\@empty
+ \global\let\field at lengths\@empty
+ \savecounters@
+ \global\setbox0\vbox{%
+ \let\math at cr@@@\math at cr@@@align at measure
+ \everycr{\noalign{\global\tag at false
+ \global\let\raise at tag\@empty \global\column@\z@}}%
+ \let\label\@gobble
+ \global\row@\z@
+ \tabskip\z@
+ \halign{\span\align at preamble\crcr
+ #1%
+ \math at cr@@@
+ \global\column@\z@
+ \add at amps\maxfields@\cr
+ }%
+ }%
+ \restorecounters@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% It's convenient to have \cs{maxfields@} rounded up to the nearest
+% even number, so that \cs{maxfields@} is precisely twice the
+% number of align structures.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifodd\maxfields@
+ \global\advance\maxfields@\@ne
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% It doesn't make sense to have a single align structure in either
+% \env{flalign} or \env{xxalignat}. So, we check for that case now
+% and, if necessary, switch to an \env{align} or \env{alignat}.
+% Arguably, we should issue a warning message, but why bother?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@
+ \ifnum\maxfields@<\thr@@
+ \let\xatlevel@\z@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\box0| now contains the lines of the \cs{halign}. After the
+% following maneuver, |\box1| will contain the last line of the
+% \cs{halign}, which is what we're interested in. (Incidentally,
+% the penalty we're removing is the \cs{@eqpen} inserted by
+% \cs{math at cr}. Normally, this is \cs{interdisplaylinepenalty},
+% unless the user has overridden that with a \cs{displaybreak}
+% command.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{%
+ \unvbox\z@ \unpenalty \global\setbox\@ne\lastbox
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\box1| begins with \cs{tabskip} glue and contains alternating
+% \cs{hbox}es (the fields whose widths we're trying to get) and
+% \cs{tabskip} glue [need better diagram]:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \hbox{\tabskip\hbox\tabskip...\hbox\tabskip}\end{verbatim}
+% In fact, all the \cs{tabskip} glue will be 0pt, because all the
+% \cs{tabskip}s in an \env{alignat} environment have a natural
+% width of 0pt, and the \cs{halign} has been set in its natural
+% width.
+%
+% One nice result of this is that we can read \cs{totwidth@} off
+% immediately, since it is just the width of |\box1|, plus
+% \cs{@mathmargin} if we're in \opt{fleqn} mode. (Actually, we
+% also have to take \cs{minalignsep} into account, but we'll do
+% that later):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\totwidth@\wd\@ne
+ \if at fleqn \global\advance\totwidth@\@mathmargin \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we initialize \cs{align at lengths} and start peeling the boxes
+% off, one by one, and adding their widths to \cs{align at lengths}.
+% We stop when we run out of boxes, i.e., when \cs{lastbox} returns
+% a void box. We're going to build a list using \cs{or} as a
+% delimiter, so we want to disable it temporarily.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\let\maxcolumn at widths\@empty
+ \begingroup
+ \let\or\relax
+ \loop
+ \global\setbox\@ne\hbox{%
+ \unhbox\@ne \unskip \global\setbox\thr@@\lastbox
+ }%
+ \ifhbox\thr@@
+ \xdef\maxcolumn at widths{ \or \the\wd\thr@@ \maxcolumn at widths}%
+ \repeat
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we calculate the number of flexible spaces and the initial
+% values of \cs{eqnshift@} and \cs{alignsep@}.
+% We start by calculating $\cs{displaywidth}-\cs{totwidth@}$,
+% which gives us the total amount of ``free space'' in a row.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \dimen@\displaywidth
+ \advance\dimen at -\totwidth@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next we calculate the number of columns of flexible spaces in the
+% display, which depends on whether we're in \opt{fleqn} mode and
+% in which particular environment we are in.
+%
+% We use \cs{@tempcnta} to store the total number of flexible spaces
+% in the align and \cs{@tempcntb} for the number of interalign
+% spaces.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifcase\xatlevel@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In \env{alignat}, the interalign spaces are under user control,
+% not ours. So, we set \cs{alignsep@} and \cs{minalignsep} both
+% equal to 0pt. Later, when calculating a new value for
+% \cs{alignsep@}, we will only save the new value if it is less
+% than the current value of \cs{alignsep@} (i.e., \cs{alignsep@}
+% will never increase). Since the values we calculate will never
+% be negative, this will ensure that \cs{alignsep@} remains zero in
+% \env{alignat}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\alignsep@\z@
+ \let\minalignsep\z@
+ \@tempcntb\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In \opt{fleqn} mode, the left margin---and hence the right margin
+% in this case---is fixed. Otherwise, we divide the free space
+% equally between the two margins.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if at fleqn
+ \@tempcnta\@ne
+ \global\eqnshift@\@mathmargin
+ \else
+ \@tempcnta\tw@
+ \global\eqnshift@\dimen@
+ \global\divide\eqnshift@\@tempcnta
+ \fi
+ \or
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In an \env{align} or \env{xalignat} environment with $n$ aligned
+% structures, there are $n-1$ interalign spaces and either 1 or~2
+% flexible margins, depending on whether we're in \opt{fleqn} mode
+% or not.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempcntb\maxfields@
+ \divide\@tempcntb\tw@
+ \@tempcnta\@tempcntb
+ \advance\@tempcntb\m at ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we are in \opt{fleqn} mode, we fix the left margin and divide
+% the free space equally among the interalign spaces and the right
+% margin.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if at fleqn
+ \global\eqnshift@\@mathmargin
+ \global\alignsep@\dimen@
+ \global\divide\alignsep@\@tempcnta
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise, we divide the free space equally among the interalign
+% spaces and both margins.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+ \global\eqnshift@\dimen@
+ \global\divide\eqnshift@\@tempcnta
+ \global\alignsep@\eqnshift@
+ \fi
+ \or
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, if we're in an \env{flalign} or \env{xxalignat}
+% environment, there are no flexible margins and $n-1$ flexible
+% interalign spaces.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempcntb\maxfields@
+ \divide\@tempcntb\tw@
+ \global\advance\@tempcntb\m at ne
+ \global\@tempcnta\@tempcntb
+ \global\eqnshift@\z@
+ \global\alignsep@\dimen@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we're in \opt{fleqn} mode, we need to add back the
+% \cs{@mathmargin} that was removed when \cs{dimen@} was originally
+% calculated above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if at fleqn
+ \global\advance\alignsep@\@mathmargin\relax
+ \fi
+ \global\divide\alignsep@\@tempcntb
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we make sure \cs{alignsep@} isn't too small.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim\alignsep@<\minalignsep\relax
+ \global\alignsep@\minalignsep\relax
+ \ifdim\eqnshift@>\z@
+ \if at fleqn\else
+ \global\eqnshift@\displaywidth
+ \global\advance\eqnshift at -\totwidth@
+ \global\advance\eqnshift at -\@tempcntb\alignsep@
+ \global\divide\eqnshift@\tw@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifdim\eqnshift@<\z@
+ \global\eqnshift@\z@
+ \fi
+ \calc at shift@align
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next, we calculate the value of \cs{tagshift@}. This is the glue
+% that will be inserted in front of the equation tag to make sure
+% it lines up flush against the appropriate margin.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\tagshift@\totwidth@
+ \global\advance\tagshift@\@tempcntb\alignsep@
+ \if at fleqn
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@
+ \global\advance\tagshift at -\@mathmargin\relax
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \global\advance\tagshift@\eqnshift@
+ \fi
+ \iftagsleft@ \else
+ \global\advance\tagshift at -\displaywidth
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, we increase \cs{totwidth@} by an appropriate multiple of
+% \cs{minalignsep}. If the result is greater than
+% \cs{displaywidth}, it means that at least one line in the
+% \env{align} is overfull and we will issue an appropriate warning
+% message (via \cs{bl at ck}) at the end of the environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \dimen@\minalignsep\relax
+ \global\advance\totwidth@\@tempcntb\dimen@
+ \ifdim\totwidth@>\displaywidth
+ \global\let\displaywidth@\totwidth@
+ \else
+ \global\let\displaywidth@\displaywidth
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The code for calculating the appropriate placement of equation
+% tags in the \env{align} environments is quite complicated and
+% varies wildly depending on the settings of the |tagsleft@| and
+% |@fleqn| switches. To minimize memory and hash space usage, we
+% only define the variant appropriate for the current setting of
+% those switches.
+%
+% It would be worthwhile to examine this code more closely someday
+% and see if it could be optimized any.
+%
+% \paragraph{Tag placement when \cs{tagsleft at true},
+% \cs{@fleqntrue}.}
+%
+% We begin with the version of \cs{calc at shift@align} appropriate
+% for flush-left equations with tags on the left.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\calc at shift@align}
+% This is the simplest case. Since the left margin is fixed, in
+% general the only thing to do is check whether there is room for
+% the tag in the left margin. The only exception is that if
+% $\cs{eqnshift@} = 0\,\mathrm{pt}$---meaning that we're in a
+% \env{flalign} environment and this is the first line with a tag
+% that we've encountered---then we set $\cs{eqnshift@} =
+% \cs{@mathmargin}$ and recalculate \cs{alignsep@}. This is done
+% by \cs{x at calc@shift at lf}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\iftagsleft@\if at fleqn
+ \def\calc at shift@align{%
+ \global\let\tag at shifts\@empty
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{@tempdima} is initialized to $\cs{@mathmargin} -
+% \cs{mintagsep}$, which yields the maximum size of a tag that will
+% not be shifted to another line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempdima\@mathmargin\relax
+ \advance\@tempdima-\mintagsep\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we examine each row in turn. If the width of the tag on the
+% line is non-positive---meaning either that there is no tag or
+% else that the user has forced it to have zero width---we mark the
+% tag to remain unshifted. Otherwise, we call \cs{x at calc@shift at lf}
+% to determine whether any adjustments need to be made to
+% \cs{eqnshift@} and \cs{alignsep@}. Note the difference in
+% treatment of zero-width tags between this code and \tex/'s
+% built-in algorithm: here, a width of zero prohibits the tag from
+% being shifted, while in \tex/'s built-in algorithm, a width of
+% zero forces the tag to be shifted.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \loop
+ \ifnum\row@>0
+ \ifdim\tag at width\row@>\z@
+ \x at calc@shift at lf
+ \else
+ \saveshift at 0%
+ \fi
+ \advance\row@\m at ne
+ \repeat
+ \endgroup
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\x at calc@shift at lf}
+% As mentioned above, \cs{x at calc@shift at lf} first checks to see if
+% the current left margin is set to 0 and, if so, resets it to
+% \cs{@mathmargin} and recalculates \cs{alignsep@}. Next, it
+% checks whether the length of the current tag exceeds the
+% previously calculated limit and, if so, marks the tag to be
+% shifted to a separate line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\x at calc@shift at lf{%
+ \ifdim\eqnshift@=\z@
+ \global\eqnshift@\@mathmargin\relax
+ \alignsep@\displaywidth
+ \advance\alignsep at -\totwidth@
+ \global\divide\alignsep@\@tempcntb
+ \ifdim\alignsep@<\minalignsep\relax
+ \global\alignsep@\minalignsep\relax
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifdim\tag at width\row@>\@tempdima
+ \saveshift at 1%
+ \else
+ \saveshift at 0%
+ \fi
+ }
+\fi\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \paragraph{Tag placement when \cs{tagsleft at false},
+% \cs{@fleqntrue}.}
+%
+% Next we consider the case when equations are flush-left, but tags
+% are on the right. This case is somewhat more complicated than
+% the previous one, since we can adjust the right margin by varying
+% the inter-align separatin. Thus, when a tag is found to be too
+% close to its equation, we first attempt to decrease
+% \cs{alignsep@} enough to move the equation off to an acceptable
+% distance. Only if that would require a value of \cs{alignsep@}
+% less than \cs{minalignsep} do we move the tag to a separate line.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\calc at shift@align}
+% This version of \cs{calc at shift@align} differs from the previous
+% version only in calling \cs{x at calc@shift at rf} rather than
+% \cs{x at calc@shift at lf}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\iftagsleft@\else\if at fleqn
+ \def\calc at shift@align{%
+ \global\let\tag at shifts\@empty
+ \begingroup
+ \loop
+ \ifnum\row@>0
+ \ifdim\tag at width\row@>\z@
+ \x at calc@shift at rf
+ \else
+ \saveshift at 0%
+ \fi
+ \advance\row@\m at ne
+ \repeat
+ \endgroup
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\x at calc@shift at rf}
+% To start, we need to know two quantities: the number of align
+% structures in the current row and the ``effective length'' of the
+% row, defined as the distance from the left margin to the
+% right edge of the text assuming that \cs{eqnshift@} and
+% \cs{alignsep@} are both~0. To get the number of align
+% structures, we first count the number of columns by counting the
+% number of entries in the \cs{fieldlengths@} for the current row.
+% The effective length is calcuated by \cs{x at rcalc@width} and put
+% in the temporary register \cs{@tempdimc}, using \cs{@tempdimb} as
+% an auxiliary variable.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\x at calc@shift at rf{%
+ \column@\z@
+ \@tempdimb\z@
+ \@tempdimc\z@
+ \edef\@tempb{\fieldlengths@\row@}%
+ \@for\@tempa:=\@tempb\do{%
+ \advance\column@\@ne
+ \x at rcalc@width
+ }%
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If there are $n$ columns in the current row, then there are
+% $\lfloor (n+1)/2 \rfloor$ align structures and $\lfloor (n-1)/2
+% \rfloor$ interalign spaces.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance\column@\m at ne
+ \divide\column@\tw@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If this is smaller than the maximum number of interalign spaces
+% in the environment, then we need to reduce \cs{@tempcnta} (the
+% total number of flexible spaces in the current line) by
+% $\cs{@tempcntb} - \cs{column@}$ and reset \cs{@tempcntb} to
+% \cs{column@}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\@tempcntb>\column@
+ \advance\@tempcnta-\@tempcntb
+ \advance\@tempcnta\column@
+ \@tempcntb\column@
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next, we add the width of the tag and the (fixed) left margin to
+% the effective length calculated above. This can be used to
+% calculate how much ``free space'' there is in the current line
+% and thus how much leeway we have to increase the amount of space
+% between the tag and the equation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tagwidth@\tag at width\row@\relax
+ \@tempdima\eqnshift@
+ \advance\@tempdima\@tempdimc\relax
+ \advance\@tempdima\tagwidth@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The first thing to check is whether the tag should be shifted to
+% a separate line. To do this, we add the minimum interalign
+% separation and the \cs{mintagsep} to the value of \cs{@tempdima}
+% just calculated. This yields the minimum acceptable length of
+% the current line. If that is greater than \cs{displaywidth}, we
+% mark the tag to be calculated. Otherwise, we mark the tag to be
+% kept on the same line and then check to see if the \cs{alignsep@}
+% needs to be reduced to make room for the tag.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \dimen@\minalignsep\relax
+ \multiply\dimen@\@tempcntb
+ \advance\dimen@\mintagsep\relax
+ \advance\dimen@\@tempdima
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \saveshift at 1%
+ \else
+ \saveshift at 0%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we perform essentially the same calculation, but using the
+% current value of \cs{alignsep@} instead of \cs{minalignsep}.
+% This gives the current length of the line. If this is greater
+% than \cs{displaywidth}, we recalculate \cs{alignsep@} to make
+% room for the tag.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \dimen@\alignsep@\relax
+ \multiply\dimen@\@tempcntb
+ \advance\dimen@\@tempdima
+ \advance\dimen@\tagwidth@
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \dimen@\displaywidth
+ \advance\dimen at -\@tempdima
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@
+ \advance\dimen at -\mintagsep\relax
+ \fi
+ \divide\dimen@\@tempcnta
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\minalignsep\relax
+ \global\alignsep@\minalignsep\relax
+ \else
+ \global\alignsep@\dimen@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }
+\fi\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \paragraph{Tag placement when \cs{tagsleft at false},
+% \cs{@fleqnfalse}.}
+%
+% This is similar to the previous case, except for the added
+% complication that both \cs{alignsep@} and \cs{eqnshift@} can
+% vary, which makes the computations correspondingly more
+% complicated.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\calc at shift@align}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\iftagsleft@\else\if at fleqn\else
+ \def\calc at shift@align{%
+ \global\let\tag at shifts\@empty
+ \begingroup
+ \loop
+ \ifnum\row@>0
+ \ifdim\tag at width\row@>\z@
+ \x at calc@shift at rc
+ \else
+ \saveshift at 0%
+ \fi
+ \advance\row@\m at ne
+ \repeat
+ \endgroup
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\x at calc@shift at rc}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\x at calc@shift at rc{%
+ \column@\z@
+ \@tempdimb\z@
+ \@tempdimc\z@
+ \edef\@tempb{\fieldlengths@\row@}%
+ \@for\@tempa:=\@tempb\do{%
+ \advance\column@\@ne
+ \x at rcalc@width
+ }%
+ \begingroup
+ \advance\column@\m at ne
+ \divide\column@\tw@
+ \ifnum\@tempcntb>\column@
+ \advance\@tempcnta-\@tempcntb
+ \advance\@tempcnta\column@
+ \@tempcntb\column@
+ \fi
+ \tagwidth@\tag at width\row@\relax
+ \@tempdima\@tempdimc
+ \advance\@tempdima\tagwidth@
+ \dimen@\minalignsep\relax
+ \multiply\dimen@\@tempcntb
+ \advance\dimen@\mintagsep\relax
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@ \else
+ \advance\dimen@\mintagsep\relax
+ \fi
+ \advance\dimen@\@tempdima
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \saveshift at 1%
+ \else
+ \saveshift at 0%
+ \dimen@\eqnshift@
+ \advance\dimen@\@tempdima
+ \advance\dimen@\@tempcntb\alignsep@
+ \advance\dimen@\tagwidth@
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \dimen@\displaywidth
+ \advance\dimen at -\@tempdima
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@
+ \advance\dimen at -\mintagsep\relax
+ \fi
+ \divide\dimen@\@tempcnta
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\minalignsep\relax
+ \global\alignsep@\minalignsep\relax
+ \eqnshift@\displaywidth
+ \advance\eqnshift at -\@tempdima
+ \advance\eqnshift at -\@tempcntb\alignsep@
+ \global\divide\eqnshift@\tw@
+ \else
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\eqnshift@
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\z@
+ \global\eqnshift@\z@
+ \else
+ \global\eqnshift@\dimen@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\alignsep@
+ \global\alignsep@\dimen@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }
+\fi\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\x at rcalc@width}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\iftagsleft@\else
+ \def\x at rcalc@width{%
+ \ifdim\@tempa > \z@
+ \advance\@tempdimc\@tempdimb
+ \ifodd\column@
+ \advance\@tempdimc\maxcol at width\column@
+ \@tempdimb\z@
+ \else
+ \advance\@tempdimc\@tempa\relax
+ \@tempdimb\maxcol at width\column@
+ \advance\@tempdimb-\@tempa\relax
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \advance\@tempdimb\maxcol at width\column@\relax
+ \fi
+ }
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \paragraph{Tag placement when \cs{tagsleft at true},
+% \cs{@fleqnfalse}.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\calc at shift@align}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\iftagsleft@\if at fleqn\else
+ \def\calc at shift@align{%
+ \global\let\tag at shifts\@empty
+ \begingroup
+ \loop
+ \ifnum\row@>\z@
+ \ifdim\tag at width\row@>\z@
+ \x at calc@shift at lc
+ \else
+ \saveshift at 0%
+ \fi
+ \advance\row@\m at ne
+ \repeat
+ \endgroup
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\x at calc@shift at lc}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\x at calc@shift at lc{%
+ \column@\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{@tempdima} will (eventually) be set to the effective width of
+% the current row, defined as the distance from the leftmost point
+% of the current line to the end of the last field of the
+% \cs{halign}, ignoring any intervening \cs{tabskip}s, plus the
+% width of the current tag. That is, it will be the width of the
+% first non-empty field plus the sum of the maximum widths of all
+% following fields, plus the tag width.
+%
+% \cs{@tempdimb} will be the ``indentation'' of leftmost end of
+% text, ignoring the \cs{tabskip} glue, i.e., it will be the sum of
+% the maximum widths of any fields to the left of the first
+% non-empty field, plus whatever empty space there is at the
+% beginning of the first non-empty field.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempdima\z@ % ``width of equation''
+ \@tempdimb\z@ % ``indent of equation''
+ \edef\@tempb{\fieldlengths@\row@}%
+ \@for\@tempa:=\@tempb\do{%
+ \advance\column@\@ne
+ \x at lcalc@width
+ }%
+ \begingroup
+ \tagwidth@\tag at width\row@\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{@tempdima} is now easy to calculate, since it is just
+% $\cs{totwidth@} - \cs{@tempdimb} + \cs{tagwidth@}$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempdima\totwidth@
+ \advance\@tempdima-\@tempdimb
+ \advance\@tempdima\tagwidth@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next, we check to see whether there is room for both the equation
+% and the tag on the same line, by calculating the minimum
+% acceptable length of the current row and comparing that to
+% \cs{displaywidth}. Note that here we use \cs{@tempcntb}, i.e.,
+% the number of interalign spaces after the first non-empty align
+% structure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \dimen@\minalignsep\relax
+ \multiply\dimen@\@tempcntb
+ \advance\dimen@\mintagsep\relax
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@ \else
+ \advance\dimen@\mintagsep\relax
+ \fi
+ \advance\dimen@\@tempdima
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the minimum acceptable width of the current line is greater
+% than \cs{displaywidth}, we mark the current tag to be shifted to
+% a separate line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \saveshift at 1%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise, the tag can stay on the same line as the equation, but
+% we need to check whether it is too close to the equation. So, we
+% calculate the distance between the left margin and the left side
+% of the equation, using the current values of \cs{eqnshift@} and
+% \cs{alignsep@}. Note that we use \cs{count@} here, not
+% \cs{@tempcntb}, as above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \saveshift at 0%
+ \dimen@\alignsep@
+ \multiply\dimen@\count@
+ \advance\dimen@\eqnshift@
+ \advance\dimen@\@tempdimb
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the left margin is less than twice the tag width, we calculate
+% new values of \cs{eqnshift@} and \cs{alignsep@} to move the
+% equation further away from the tag. In particular, we center the
+% current line between its tag and the right margin. Note that
+% although we later will need to transform \cs{dimen@} into a value
+% suitable for use as \cs{eqnshift@}, for the time being it is more
+% useful to think of it as the space separating the tag from the
+% equation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim\dimen@<2\tagwidth@
+ \dimen@\displaywidth
+ \advance\dimen at -\@tempdima
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@
+ \advance\dimen at -\mintagsep\relax
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In certain circumstances we will get a divide-by-zero error here
+% unless we guard against it. Use of \cs{@tempcnta} is complicated,
+% sometimes it is assigned globally, sometimes locally. Need to sort
+% it out one of these days [mjd,2000/06/02].
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta>\z@
+ \divide\dimen@\@tempcnta
+ \else \dimen@\z@
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As usual, we check to make sure we don't set \cs{alignsep@}
+% smaller than \cs{minalignsep} and, in any case, that we don't
+% replace \cs{alignsep@} by a larger value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\minalignsep\relax
+ \global\alignsep@\minalignsep\relax
+ \dimen@\displaywidth
+ \advance\dimen at -\@tempdima
+ \advance\dimen at -\@tempcntb\alignsep@
+ \global\divide\dimen@\tw@
+ \else
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\alignsep@
+ \global\alignsep@\dimen@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next, we calculate an appropriate value of \cs{eqnshift@},
+% assuming that \cs{dimen@} is the desired separation between the
+% tag and equation of the current line. This means that we first
+% need to adjust \cs{dimen@} if we're in an \env{flalign}
+% environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@
+ \dimen@\mintagsep\relax
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we calculate the value of \cs{eqnshift@} needed to produce a
+% separation of \cs{dimen@} between the equation tag and the
+% beginning of the equation. To do this, we need the following
+% equation to hold:
+% \[
+% \cs{eqnshift@} + n\cs{alignsep@} + \cs{@tempdimb}
+% = \cs{tagwidth@} + \cs{dimen@}
+% \]
+% where $n = \cs{count@}$ is the number of interalign spaces before
+% the first non-empty field of the current line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance\dimen@\tagwidth@
+ \advance\dimen at -\@tempdimb
+ \advance\dimen at -\count@\alignsep@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The value of \cs{eqnshift@} just calculated is the minimum
+% acceptable value; thus, we save it only if it is larger than the
+% current value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\eqnshift@
+ \global\eqnshift@\dimen@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\x at lcalc@width}
+% This macro calculates the ``indentation'' of the current row, as
+% defined above under the description of \cs{x at calc@shift at lc}.
+% This macro is called for each field of the current line, with
+% \cs{@tempa} set to the width of the current field. Ideally, the
+% loop enclosing \cs{x at lcalc@width} would terminate as soon as
+% \cs{@tempa} is non-zero, but that would be a bit tricky to
+% arrange. Instead, we use \cs{@tempdima} as a flag to signal when
+% we've encountered the first non-empty field.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\x at lcalc@width{%
+ \ifdim\@tempdima = \z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the current field is empty (i.e., $\cs{@tempa} =
+% \mathrm{0\,pt}$, then we increment \cs{@tempdimb} by the width of
+% the current field). Otherwise, we set $\cs{@tempdima} =
+% \mathrm{1\,pt}$ as a signal value and increment \cs{@tempdimb} by
+% the width of whatever empty space there might be at the left of
+% the current field.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim\@tempa > \z@
+ \@tempdima\p@
+ \ifodd\column@
+ \advance\@tempdimb \maxcol at width\column@
+ \advance\@tempdimb-\@tempa
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In addition, we need to adjust the values of \cs{@tempcnta} and
+% \cs{@tempcntb} to account for any empty align structures that
+% might occur at the beginning of the current line. More
+% specifically, we first set \cs{count@} equal to the number of
+% interalign spaces preceding the current field (namely, $\lfloor
+% (\cs{\column@}-1)/2 \rfloor$), and then subtract \cs{count@} from
+% both \cs{@tempcnta} and \cs{@tempcntb}. The rationale is that
+% for the purposes of adjusting the spacing between the tag and the
+% equation, the only flexible interalign spaces are those after
+% the first non-empty align structure, so we need to treat those
+% different from the ones before the first non-empty align
+% structure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \count@\column@
+ \advance\count@\m at ne
+ \divide\count@\tw@
+ \advance\@tempcnta-\count@
+ \advance\@tempcntb-\count@
+ \else
+ \advance\@tempdimb \maxcol at width\column@\relax
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }
+\fi\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\place at tag}
+% \cs{place at tag} takes care of the placment of tags in the
+% \env{align} environments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\place at tag{%
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \kern-\tagshift@
+ \if1\shift at tag\row@\relax
+ \rlap{\vbox{%
+ \normalbaselines
+ \boxz@
+ \vbox to\lineht@{}%
+ \raise at tag
+ }}%
+ \else
+ \rlap{\boxz@}%
+ \fi
+ \kern\displaywidth@
+ \else
+ \kern-\tagshift@
+ \if1\shift at tag\row@\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Added depth to correct vertical spacing of shifted
+% equation tags.---dmj, 1994/12/29
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \llap{\vtop{%
+ \raise at tag
+ \normalbaselines
+ \setbox\@ne\null
+ \dp\@ne\lineht@
+ \box\@ne
+ \boxz@
+ }}%
+ \else
+ \llap{\boxz@}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\align at preamble}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\align at preamble{%
+ &\hfil
+ \strut@
+ \setboxz at h{\@lign$\m at th\displaystyle{##}$}%
+ \ifmeasuring@\savefieldlength@\fi
+ \set at field
+ \tabskip\z at skip
+ &\setboxz at h{\@lign$\m at th\displaystyle{{}##}$}%
+ \ifmeasuring@\savefieldlength@\fi
+ \set at field
+ \hfil
+ \tabskip\alignsep@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set at field}
+% \cs{set at field} increments the column counter, tracks the value of
+% \cs{lineht@} and finally inserts the box containing the contents
+% of the current field.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at field{%
+ \column at plus
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \ifdim\ht\z@>\lineht@
+ \global\lineht@\ht\z@
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifdim\dp\z@>\lineht@
+ \global\lineht@\dp\z@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \boxz@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection {The \env{split} environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\split at err}
+% A special error function for \env{split} to conserve main mem (at a
+% cost of string pool/hash size.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\split at err#1{%
+ \@nx\@amsmath at err{%
+ \string\begin{split} won't work here%
+ }{%
+ \@xp\@nx\csname
+ Did you forget a preceding \string\begin{equation}?^^J%
+ If not, perhaps the `aligned' environment is what
+ you want.\endcsname}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{split}
+% If the \env{split} environment occurs inside \env{align} or
+% \env{gather}, it can make use of the enclosing halign; if it is
+% called inside a simple equation, we add an implicit `gather'
+% container.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{split}{%
+ \if at display
+ \ifinner
+ \@xp\@xp\@xp\split at aligned
+ \else
+ \ifst at rred \else \global\@eqnswtrue \fi
+ \fi
+ \else \let\endsplit\@empty \@xp\collect at body\@xp\split at err
+ \fi
+ \collect at body\gather at split
+}{%
+ \crcr
+ \egroup
+ \egroup
+ \iftagsleft@ \@xp\lendsplit@ \else \@xp\rendsplit@ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\split at tag\relax % init
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\gather at split#1#2#3{%
+ \@xp\endgroup \reset at equation % math at cr will handle equation numbering
+ \iftag@
+ \toks@\@xp{\df at tag}%
+ \edef\split at tag{%
+ \gdef\@nx\df at tag{\the\toks@}%
+ \global\@nx\tag at true \@nx\nonumber
+ }%
+ \else \let\split at tag\@empty
+ \fi
+ \spread at equation
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The extra vcenter wrapper here is not really a good thing but
+% without it there are compatibility problems with old documents that
+% throw in some extra material between \verb'\begin{equation}' and
+% \verb'\begin{split}' (for example, \verb'\hspace{-1pc}' or
+% \verb'\left\{'). [mjd,1999/09/20]
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \vcenter\bgroup
+ \gather@{\split at tag \begin{split}#1\end{split}}%
+ \def\endmathdisplay at a{%
+ \math at cr \black@ \totwidth@ \egroup
+ \egroup
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\insplit@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\insplit@{%
+ \global\setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+ \Let@ \chardef\dspbrk at context\@ne \restore at math@cr
+ \default at tag % disallow use of \tag here
+ \ialign\bgroup
+ \hfil
+ \strut@
+ $\m at th\displaystyle{##}$%
+ &$\m at th\displaystyle{{}##}$%
+ \hfill % Why not \hfil?---dmj, 1994/12/28
+ \crcr
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rendsplit@}
+% Moved the box maneuvers inside the \cs{ifinalign@}, since that is
+% the only place they are needed.---dmj, 1994/12/28
+%
+% TODO: Explore interaction of tag-placement algorithm with
+% \env{split}. Is there any way for \env{split} to pass the
+% relevant information out to the enclosing \env{gather} or
+% \env{align}?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rendsplit@{%
+ \ifinalign@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Changed |\box9| into a \cs{vtop} here for better spacing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\setbox9 \vtop{%
+ \unvcopy\z@
+ \global\setbox8 \lastbox
+ \unskip
+ }%
+ \setbox\@ne\hbox{%
+ \unhcopy8
+ \unskip
+ \global\setbox\tw@\lastbox
+ \unskip
+ \global\setbox\thr@@\lastbox
+ }%
+ \ifctagsplit@
+ \gdef\split@{%
+ \hbox to\wd\thr@@{}%
+ &\vcenter{\vbox{\moveleft\wd\thr@@\boxz@}}%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \global\setbox7 \hbox{\unhbox\tw@\unskip}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Added \cs{add at amps} to make sure we put the last line of the
+% \env{split} into the proper column of an \env{align} environment
+% with multiple align structures.---dmj, 1994/12/28
+%
+% Special care has to be taken in this case because the \env{split}
+% turns into two lines of the \env{align} instead of just one. So,
+% we have to make sure that the first line produced by the
+% \env{split} doesn't upset our bookkeeping, hence we call
+% \cs{savetaglength@} to insert 0\,pt as the tag for this
+% pseudo-line, and we advance the \cs{row@} counter and reset
+% \cs{lineht@} afterwards. It would be nice if we could just
+% replace the \cs{crcr} by \cs{math at cr@@@}, but that would cause
+% problems with the tag processing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \gdef\split@{%
+ \global\@tempcnta\column@
+ &\setboxz at h{}%
+ \savetaglength@
+ \global\advance\row@\@ne
+ \vbox{\moveleft\wd\thr@@\box9}%
+ \crcr
+ \noalign{\global\lineht@\z@}%
+ \add at amps\@tempcnta
+ \box\thr@@
+ &\box7
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifctagsplit@
+ \gdef\split@{\vcenter{\boxz@}}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Changed to just \cs{boxz@}, otherwise last line gets centered
+% rather than aligned properly with respect to the rest of the
+% lines. But this means that we can't see inside of the last line
+% to decide whether the tag needs to be moved. Will have to think
+% about this.---dmj, 1994/12/28
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \gdef\split@{%
+ \boxz@
+% \box9
+% \crcr
+% \hbox{\box\thr@@\box7}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \aftergroup\split@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lendsplit@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lendsplit@{%
+ \global\setbox9\vtop{\unvcopy\z@}%
+ \ifinalign@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Moved following two boxes inside the \cs{ifinalign@}, since they
+% are only used in that case. In fact, if we just kept track of
+% the width of the first column, we could dispense with this
+% entirely. Surely that would be more efficient than all these box
+% copies.---dmj, 1994/12/28
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\@ne\vbox{%
+ \unvcopy\z@
+ \global\setbox8\lastbox
+ }%
+ \setbox\@ne\hbox{%
+ \unhcopy8%
+ \unskip
+ \setbox\tw@\lastbox
+ \unskip
+ \global\setbox\thr@@\lastbox
+ }%
+ \ifctagsplit@
+ \gdef\split@{%
+ \hbox to\wd\thr@@{}%
+ &\vcenter{\vbox{\moveleft\wd\thr@@\box9}}%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \gdef\split@{%
+ \hbox to\wd\thr@@{}%
+ &\vbox{\moveleft\wd\thr@@\box9}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifctagsplit@
+ \gdef\split@{\vcenter{\box9}}%
+ \else
+ \gdef\split@{\box9}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \aftergroup\split@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% With \pkg{amsmath} 1.2 it was possible to put things like
+% \verb'\left\{' between \verb'\begin{equation}' and
+% \verb'\begin{split}' without getting any error message. For
+% backward compatibility we try to avoid a fatal error in this case
+% and instead attempt recovery with \env{aligned}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\split at aligned#1#2{%
+ \iffalse{\fi\ifnum0=`}\fi
+ \collect at body\split at al@a}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\split at al@a#1#2#3{%
+ \split at warning
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the \opt{fleqn} and \opt{tbtags} options are both in effect then
+% we will need to add an optional argument on the \env{aligned}
+% environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \toks@{\begin{aligned}}%
+ \if at fleqn \split at al@tagcheck \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \cs{relax} here is to prevent \cs{@let at token} from being left
+% equal to an ampersand if that happens to be the first thing in the body.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \the\toks@\relax#1\end{aligned}%
+ \ifnum0=`{\fi\iffalse}\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\split at al@tagcheck{%
+ \ifctagsplit@
+ \else
+ \iftagsleft@ \toks@\@xp{\the\toks@ [t]}%
+ \else \toks@\@xp{\the\toks@ [b]}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\split at warning{%
+ \PackageWarning{amsmath}{%
+Cannot use `split' here;\MessageBreak trying to recover with `aligned'}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The \env{multline} environment}
+%
+% In the original \amstex/, \cn{multlinegap} is a macro with an
+% argument that resets an internal dimension (one with an \qc{\@}
+% character in its name). Here, to save control sequence names, we
+% define \cn{multlinegap} to be the dimension itself and the
+% documentation instructs users to use \cn{setlength} if they
+% need to change it.
+% \begin{macro}{\multlinegap}
+% \begin{macro}{\multlinetaggap}
+% Changed \cs{multlinegap} and \cs{multlinetaggap} to skip
+% registers. Also changed name to \cs{multlinetaggap} from
+% \cs{multlinetaggap@}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\multlinegap
+\multlinegap10pt
+\newskip\multlinetaggap
+\multlinetaggap10pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\start at multline}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\start at multline#1{%
+ \RIfM@
+ \nomath at env
+ \DN@{\@namedef{end\@currenvir}{}\@gobble}%
+ \else
+ $$%
+ #1%
+ \ifst at rred
+ \nonumber
+ \else
+ \global\@eqnswtrue
+ \fi
+ \let\next@\multline@
+ \fi
+ \collect at body\next@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{multline}
+% \begin{environment}{multline*}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{multline}{%
+ \start at multline\st at rredfalse
+}{%
+ \iftagsleft@ \@xp\lendmultline@ \else \@xp\rendmultline@ \fi
+ \ignorespacesafterend
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{multline*}{\start at multline\st at rredtrue}{\endmultline}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\multline@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\multline@#1{%
+ \Let@
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% For multline neither \cs{displ at y} no \cs{displ at y@} is quite right;
+% we want to advance the row number and (I suppose?) the
+% display-pagebreak level, but we only want to do tag-related stuff
+% once before the first line, not repeat it for every line. (Recall
+% that the arg of \cs{@display at init} goes into \cs{everycr}.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@display at init{\global\advance\row@\@ne \global\dspbrk at lvl\m at ne}%
+ \chardef\dspbrk at context\z@
+ \restore at math@cr
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \env{multline} environment is somewhat unusual, in that
+% \cs{tag} and \cs{label} are enabled only during the measuring
+% phase and disabled during the production phase.
+% Here we disable \cs{tag} and \cs{label}; \cs{mmeasure@} will
+% re-enable them temporarily.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\tag\tag at in@align
+ \global\tag at false \global\let\raise at tag\@empty
+ \mmeasure@{#1}%
+ \let\tag\gobble at tag \let\label\@gobble
+ \tabskip \if at fleqn \@mathmargin \else \z at skip \fi
+ \totwidth@\displaywidth
+ \if at fleqn
+ \advance\totwidth at -\@mathmargin
+ \fi
+ \halign\bgroup
+ \hbox to\totwidth@{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In order to get the spacing of the last line right in fleqn
+% mode, we need to play a little game here. Normally the
+% stretchability of the \cs{hskip} here will be suppressed by the
+% \cs{hfil} at the end of the template, except inside the last line,
+% when that \cs{hfil} will be removed by the \cs{hfilneg} in
+% \cs{lendmultline@}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if at fleqn
+ \hskip \@centering \relax
+ \else
+ \hfil
+ \fi
+ \strut@
+ $\m at th\displaystyle{}##\endmultline at math
+ \hfil
+ }%
+ \crcr
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In \opt{fleqn} mode, it's the \cs{tabskip} of \cs{@mathmargin}
+% that needs to be removed in the first line, not the \cs{hfil} at
+% the beginning of the template.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if at fleqn
+ \hskip-\@mathmargin
+ \def\multline at indent{\hskip\@mathmargin}% put it back
+ \else
+ \hfilneg
+ \def\multline at indent{\hskip\multlinegap}%
+ \fi
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \iftag@
+ \begingroup
+ \ifshifttag@
+ \rlap{\vbox{%
+ \normalbaselines
+ \hbox{%
+ \strut@
+ \make at display@tag
+ }%
+ \vbox to\lineht@{}%
+ \raise at tag
+ }}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the equation tag doesn't fit on the same line with the first
+% line of the display, we'll indent the first line by
+% \cn{multlinegap}. This is a change from \pkg{amstex}, where the
+% first line would have been flush against the left margin in this
+% case. A corresponding change will be made in \cs{rendmultline@}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \multline at indent
+ \else
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{\make at display@tag}%
+ \dimen@\@mathmargin \advance\dimen at -\wd\z@
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\multlinetaggap
+ \dimen@\multlinetaggap
+ \fi
+ \box\z@ \hskip\dimen@\relax
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \multline at indent
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \multline at indent
+ \fi
+ #1%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% An extra level of indirection for the closing \verb'$' in multline
+% allows us to avoid getting an extra thinmuskip from a final
+% mathpunct in the equation contents, when equation numbers are on
+% the right. If we did not use this workaround, the sequence of
+% elements for a final comma would be, e.g.,
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ... ,<hskip><box containing equation number>
+% \end{verbatim}
+% which is equivalent to a sequence \verb'<mathpunct><mathord>' as
+% far as the automatic math spacing is concerned.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endmultline at math{$}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lendmultline@}
+% Bug fix: changed \cs{crcr} to \cs{math at cr} so that \cs{@eqpen}
+% gets reset properly if \cs{displaybreak} is used on the
+% penultimate line of an \env{align}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lendmultline@{%
+ \hfilneg
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \math at cr
+ \egroup
+ $$%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rendmultline@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rendmultline@{%
+ \iftag@
+ $\let\endmultline at math\relax
+ \ifshifttag@
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Added depth to correct vertical spacing of shifted equation
+% tags.---dmj, 1994/12/29
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \llap{\vtop{%
+ \raise at tag
+ \normalbaselines
+ \setbox\@ne\null
+ \dp\@ne\lineht@
+ \box\@ne
+ \hbox{\strut@\make at display@tag}%
+ }}%
+ \else
+ \hskip\multlinetaggap
+ \make at display@tag
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \fi
+ \hfilneg
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Use \cs{math at cr} rather than just \cs{crcr} so that \cs{@eqpen}
+% gets reset properly if \cs{displaybreak} is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \math at cr
+ \egroup$$%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mmeasure@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mmeasure@#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \measuring at true
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We use \cs{begin/endgroup} rather than |{}| in this definition of
+% \cn{label} because the latter would create an extra (wasteful of
+% main mem) null box in the current math list. [mjd, 1995/01/17]
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\label##1{%
+ \begingroup\measuring at false\label at in@display{##1}\endgroup}%
+ \def\math at cr@@@{\cr}%
+ \let\shoveleft\@iden \let\shoveright\@iden
+ \savecounters@
+ \global\row@\z@
+ \setbox\@ne\vbox{%
+ \global\let\df at tag\@empty
+ \halign{%
+ \setboxz at h{\@lign$\m at th\displaystyle{}##$}%
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \ifnum\row@=\@ne
+ \global\totwidth@\wdz@
+ \global\lineht@\ht\z@
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \global\totwidth@\wdz@
+ \global\lineht@\dp\z@
+ \fi
+ \crcr
+ #1%
+ \crcr
+ }%
+ }%
+ \ifx\df at tag\@empty\else\global\tag at true\fi
+ \if at eqnsw\global\tag at true\fi
+ \iftag@
+ \setboxz at h{%
+ \if at eqnsw
+ \stepcounter{equation}%
+ \tagform@\theequation
+ \else
+ \df at tag
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \global\tagwidth@\wdz@
+ \dimen@\totwidth@
+ \advance\dimen@\tagwidth@
+ \advance\dimen@\multlinetaggap
+ \iftagsleft@\else
+ \if at fleqn
+ \advance\dimen@\@mathmargin
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \global\shifttag at true
+ \else
+ \global\shifttag at false
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \restorecounters@
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\shoveleft}
+% \begin{macro}{\shoveright}
+% \cs{shoveleft} and \cs{shoveright} need to do slightly different
+% things depending on whether tags are on the left or the right and
+% whether we're in \opt{fleqn} mode. For compactness of code, we
+% make the appropriate decisions at ``compile'' time rather than at
+% load time.
+%
+% TODO: Investigate making \cs{shoveright} behave ``properly''(?) if
+% used on the first line of a \env{multline} and make \cs{shoveleft}
+% behave properly if used on the last line of a \env{multline}. But
+% in his \fn{amstex.doc} Spivak indicates those commands should never
+% be used on a first or last line. Perhaps better to leave the
+% question open unless/until real-life examples turn up.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\iftagsleft@
+ \def\shoveright#1{%
+ #1%
+ \hfilneg
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ }
+\else
+ \def\shoveright#1{%
+ #1%
+ \hfilneg
+ \iftag@
+ \ifshifttag@
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \else
+ \hskip\tagwidth@
+ \hskip\multlinetaggap
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \fi
+ }
+\fi
+
+\if at fleqn
+ \def\shoveleft#1{#1}%
+\else
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \def\shoveleft#1{%
+ \setboxz at h{$\m at th\displaystyle{}#1$}%
+ \setbox\@ne\hbox{$\m at th\displaystyle#1$}%
+ \hfilneg
+ \iftag@
+ \ifshifttag@
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \else
+ \hskip\tagwidth@
+ \hskip\multlinetaggap
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \fi
+ \hskip.5\wd\@ne
+ \hskip-.5\wdz@
+ #1%
+ }
+ \else
+ \def\shoveleft#1{%
+ \setboxz at h{$\m at th\displaystyle{}#1$}%
+ \setbox\@ne\hbox{$\m at th\displaystyle#1$}%
+ \hfilneg
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \hskip.5\wd\@ne
+ \hskip-.5\wdz@
+ #1%
+ }
+ \fi
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The \env{equation} environment}
+%
+% Rewritten from the ground up for version 2.0 to fix no-shrink and
+% no-shortskips bugs [mjd,2000/01/06].
+%
+% Standard \latex/ provides three environments for one-line equations:
+% \cn{[}\cn{]}, \env{equation}, and \env{displaymath}. We add
+% \env{equation*} as a synonym for \env{displaymath}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@saveprimitive\leqno\@@leqno
+\@saveprimitive\eqno\@@eqno
+\def\eqno{\@@eqno\let\eqno\relax\let\leqno\relax}
+\def\leqno{\@@leqno\let\leqno\relax\let\eqno\relax}
+%
+\let\veqno=\@@eqno
+\iftagsleft@ \let\veqno=\@@leqno \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Support for the \pkg{showkeys} package: provide no-op definitions
+% for a couple of SK functions, if they are not already defined. Then
+% we can just call them directly in our code without any extra fuss.
+% If the \pkg{showkeys} package is loaded later, our trivial
+% definitions will get overridden and everything works fine.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{SK@@label}{%
+ \let\SK@@label\relax \let\SK at equationtrue\relax
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\reset at equation\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Cf \cs{tag at in@align}. This is a bit of a mess though. Could use
+% some work. [mjd,1999/12/21]
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\alt at tag\@empty
+\def\tag at in@display#1#{\relax\tag at in@display at a{#1}}
+\def\tag at in@display at a#1#2{%
+ \iftag@
+ \invalid at tag{Multiple \string\tag}\relax
+ \else
+ \global\tag at true \nonumber \reset at equation \st at rredtrue
+ \if *\string#1%
+ \gdef\alt at tag{\def\SK at tagform@{#2\@gobble}%
+ \ifx\SK@@label\relax \let\tagform@\SK at tagform@ \fi
+ }%
+ \make at df@tag@@{#2}%
+ \else
+ \make at df@tag@@@{#2}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\restore at hfuzz\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mathdisplay#1{%
+ \ifmmode \@badmath
+ \else
+ $$\def\@currenvir{#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Allow use of \cn{displaybreak}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\dspbrk at context\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Although in some cases simpler label handling would seem to be
+% sufficient, always using \cs{label at in@display} makes it easier to
+% support the \pkg{showkeys} package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\tag\tag at in@display \let\label\label at in@display \SK at equationtrue
+ \global\let\df at label\@empty \global\let\df at tag\@empty
+ \global\tag at false
+ \let\mathdisplay at push\mathdisplay@@push
+ \let\mathdisplay at pop\mathdisplay@@pop
+ \if at fleqn
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Turn off overfull box messages temporarily\mdash otherwise there
+% would be unwanted extra ones emitted during our measuring
+% operations.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\restore at hfuzz{\hfuzz\the\hfuzz\relax}%
+ \hfuzz\maxdimen
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Initially set the equation body in a box of displaywidth. Then if
+% the box is not overfull, as we find by checking \cs{badness}, we
+% have acquired useful information for the subsequent processing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\z@\hbox to\displaywidth\bgroup
+ \let\split at warning\relax \restore at hfuzz
+ \everymath\@emptytoks \m at th $\displaystyle
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Arg 1 is not currently used. I thought it might come in handy for
+% error messages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endmathdisplay#1{%
+ \ifmmode \else \@badmath \fi
+ \endmathdisplay at a
+ $$%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% I guess the following code means this structure is non-reentrant.
+% But there is plenty of scope for tricky bugs here; suppressing them
+% by brute force at least makes it possible to get things working
+% correctly for normal use. [mjd,2000/01/06]
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\let\df at label\@empty \global\let\df at tag\@empty
+ \global\tag at false \global\let\alt at tag\@empty
+ \global\@eqnswfalse
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endmathdisplay at a{%
+ \if at eqnsw \gdef\df at tag{\tagform@\theequation}\fi
+ \if at fleqn \@xp\endmathdisplay at fleqn
+ \else \ifx\df at tag\@empty \else \veqno \alt at tag \df at tag \fi
+ \ifx\df at label\@empty \else \@xp\ltx at label\@xp{\df at label}\fi
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\dspbrk at lvl>\m at ne
+ \postdisplaypenalty -\@getpen\dspbrk at lvl
+ \global\dspbrk at lvl\m at ne
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% A boolean variable: Was that last box overfull or not? A value of 0
+% means yes, it was overfull.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\too at wide\@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Special handling is needed for flush-left equations. We need to
+% measure the equation body (found in box 0 after we close it with
+% the \cs{egroup}). Then after a fairly normal test to see if it fits
+% within the available space, we need to consider overlapping into
+% the displayindent area if displayindent is nonzero (as in an
+% indented list). If there is an equation number we may have to shift
+% it by hand to a separate line when there is not enough room;
+% we can no longer take advantage of the automatic shifting provided
+% by the \cn{leqno}, \cn{eqno} primitives.
+%
+% We initially add \cs{@mathmargin} glue at the end of box 0 to get
+% an accurate overfull test. If \cs{@mathmargin} contains any shrink
+% then we cannot reliably tell whether the box will be overfull or
+% not simply by doing hand calculations from the actual width of the
+% equation body. We have to actually set the box and find out what
+% happens.
+%
+% On the other hand if we put the \cs{@mathmargin} glue at the
+% beginning of the box it's awkward to remove it afterwards. So we
+% first put it in at the end and later we will move it to the
+% beginning as needed.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endmathdisplay at fleqn{%
+ $\hfil\hskip\@mathmargin\egroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We need to save the information about whether box 0 was overfull in
+% a variable, otherwise it will disappear in the next setbox
+% operation. And we couldn't set the equation number box earlier than
+% now, because the body of the equation might have contained a
+% \cs{tag} command (well, it could have been done, but this way
+% we can reuse the tag-handling code from elsewhere).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\badness<\inf at bad \let\too at wide\@ne \else \let\too at wide\z@ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty\df at tag
+ \else
+ \setbox4\hbox{\df at tag
+ \ifx\df at label\@empty \else \@xp\ltx at label\@xp{\df at label}\fi
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \csname emdf@%
+ \ifx\df at tag\@empty U\else \iftagsleft@ L\else R\fi\fi
+ \endcsname
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% For an unnumbered flush-left equation we hope first that the
+% the contents fit within displaywidth. If not we need to fall back
+% on a more complicated reboxing operation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\emdf at U{%
+ \restore at hfuzz
+ \ifodd\too at wide % not too wide: just need to swap the glue around
+ \hbox to\displaywidth{\hskip\@mathmargin\unhbox\z@\unskip}%
+ \else % M+B > displaywidth
+ \emdf at Ua
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Some notation: $M$ \cs{@mathmargin}, $B$ the width of the equation
+% body, $I$ \cs{displayindent}, $D$ \cs{displaywidth}, $N$ the width
+% of the equation number (aka the tag), $S$ \cs{mintagsep}, $C$
+% \cs{columnwidth}. If $M+B > \mbox{displaywidth}$, and if we assume
+% $M$ contains shrink, then the only solution left is to encroach
+% into the displayindent space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\emdf at Ua{%
+ \hbox to\columnwidth{%
+ \ifdim\displayindent>\z@
+ \hskip\displayindent minus\displayindent
+ \fi
+ \hskip\@mathmargin \unhbox\z@ \unskip
+ }%
+ \displayindent\z@ \displaywidth\columnwidth
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Find out first if the tag fits in ideal position. If so we can just
+% plunk down box 2. Otherwise we need to do something more complicated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\emdf at R{%
+ \setbox\tw@\hbox to\displaywidth{%
+ \hskip\@mathmargin \unhcopy\z@\unskip\hfil\hskip\mintagsep\copy4
+ }%
+ \restore at hfuzz
+ \ifnum\badness<\inf at bad \box\tw@ \else \emdf at Ra \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We shift the equation number to line 2 if it does not fit within
+% \cs{displaywidth}. Note that we do not first attempt to let the
+% equation body shift leftward into the \cs{displayindent} space. If
+% that is desired it will have to be done by hand by adding negative
+% space at the beginning of the equation body. I don't expect this to
+% arise very often in practice since most of the time
+% \cs{displayindent} is zero anyway.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\emdf at Ra{%
+ \skip@\displayindent minus\displayindent
+ \displayindent\z@ \displaywidth\columnwidth
+ \spread at equation \everycr{}\tabskip\z at skip
+ \halign{\hbox to\displaywidth{##}\cr
+ \relax
+ \ifdim\skip@>\z@ \hskip\skip@ \fi
+ \hskip\@mathmargin\unhbox\z@\unskip\hfil\cr
+ \noalign{\raise at tag}%
+ \hfil\box4 \cr}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Find out first if the tag fits in ideal position. If so we can just
+% plunk down box 2. Otherwise we need to do something more
+% complicated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\emdf at L{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Calculate the difference between $M$ and $N+S$. If the latter is
+% greater, we don't want to add any extra glue between the number and
+% the equation body. Otherwise the amount that we want to add is
+% \verb'x minus x' where $x=M-(N+S)$. I.e., the distribution of
+% spaces across the line is $N,S,x minus x,B,hfil$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempdima\@mathmargin
+ \advance\@tempdima-\wd4 \advance\@tempdima-\mintagsep
+ \skip@\@tempdima minus\@tempdima
+ \setbox\tw@\hbox to\displaywidth{%
+ \copy4\hskip\mintagsep
+ \ifdim\skip@>\z@ \hskip\skip@\fi
+ \unhcopy\z@\unskip
+ }%
+ \restore at hfuzz
+ \ifnum\badness<\inf at bad \box\tw@ \else \emdf at La \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If the equation body and equation number will not fit on the same
+% line, we put the number on line 1 and the body on line 2, with the
+% body positioned as for an unnumbered equation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\emdf at La{%
+ \spread at equation \everycr{}\tabskip\z at skip
+ \halign{\hbox to\displaywidth{##}\cr
+ \box4 \hfil \cr
+ \noalign{\raise at tag}%
+ \hskip\@mathmargin\unhbox\z@\unskip\hfil\cr}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If someone has \verb'\[ \]' nested inside a minipage environment
+% nested inside a numbered equation, the mathdisplay variables that
+% are global will get out of whack unless we take extra care. So we
+% make a stack and push all the variables before entering mathdisplay
+% and pop them afterwards. But we can save a little work by not doing
+% this at the top level, only at inner levels.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\mathdisplay at stack
+\let\mathdisplay at push\@empty
+\def\mathdisplay@@push{%
+ \begingroup
+ \toks@\@xp{\df at label}\@temptokena\@xp{\df at tag}%
+ \toks8\@xp{\alt at tag}%
+ \edef\@tempa{%
+ \global\if at eqnsw\@nx\@eqnswtrue\else\@nx\@eqnswfalse\fi
+ \global\iftag@\@nx\tag at false\else\@nx\tag at true\fi
+ \gdef\@nx\df at label{\the\toks@}\gdef\@nx\df at tag{\the\@temptokena}%
+ \gdef\@nx\alt at tag{\the\toks8}%
+ \global\mathdisplay at stack{\the\mathdisplay at stack}%
+ }%
+ \global\mathdisplay at stack\@xp{\@tempa}
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mathdisplay at pop\@empty
+\def\mathdisplay@@pop{\the\mathdisplay at stack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{equation}{%
+ \incr at eqnum
+ \mathdisplay at push
+ \st at rredfalse \global\@eqnswtrue
+ \mathdisplay{equation}%
+}{%
+ \endmathdisplay{equation}%
+ \mathdisplay at pop
+ \ignorespacesafterend
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{equation*}{%
+ \mathdisplay at push
+ \st at rredtrue \global\@eqnswfalse
+ \mathdisplay{equation*}%
+}{%
+ \endmathdisplay{equation*}%
+ \mathdisplay at pop
+ \ignorespacesafterend
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note: \latex/ defines the \env{displaymath} environment in
+% terms of \cn{[} and \cn{]}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\[}{\begin{equation*}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\]}{\end{equation*}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The usual \cs{endinput} to ensure that random garbage at the end of
+% the file doesn't get copied by \fn{docstrip}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\endinput
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Credits}
+%
+% Much of the code for the \pkg{amsmath} package had its orgin in
+% \fn{amstex.tex}, written by Michael Spivak. The initial work of
+% porting \fn{amstex.tex} to \fn{amstex.sty} was done in 1988--1989
+% by Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf. In 1994 David M. Jones
+% added the support for the \opt{fleqn} option and did extensive
+% improvements to the \env{align[at]} family of environments and to
+% the equation number handling in general. Michael Downes at the AMS
+% served as coordinator for the efforts of Mittelbach, Sch\"opf, and
+% Jones, and has contributed various bug fixes and additional
+% refinements over time.
+%
+% Versions 1.0 and 1.1 of the package carried the name \pkg{amstex}
+% instead of \pkg{amsmath}, to indicate its origins; the name was
+% changed in 1994 to make it user-oriented rather than
+% history-oriented.
+%
+\endinput
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.dtx
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.ins
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.ins (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex-dev/amsmath/amsmath.ins 2019-09-14 22:07:09 UTC (rev 52096)
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+%%
+%% Copyright 2010 American Mathematical Society.
+%% Copyright 2016 LaTeX3 Project and American Mathematical Society.
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+%%
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is the LaTeX3 Project.
+%%
+%% ====================================================================
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\askforoverwritefalse
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\preamble
+
+Copyright 1995, 1999, 2000, 2013 American Mathematical Society.
+Copyright 2016 LaTeX3 Project and American Mathematical Society.
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
@@ Diff output truncated at 1234567 characters. @@
More information about the tex-live-commits
mailing list